The accomplishment of the prophecies; or The third booke in defence of the Catholicke faith contained in the booke of the high & mighty King Iames. I. by the grace of God King of Great Brittaine and Ireland. Against the allegations of R. Bellarmine; and F.N. Coëffeteau & other doctors of the Romish church: by Peter Du Moulin minister of the word of God in the church of Paris. Translated into English by I. Heath, fellow of New College in Oxford.
         Defense de la foy catholique. Book 3. English
         Du Moulin, Pierre, 1568-1658.
      
       
         
           1613
        
      
       Approx. 604 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 256 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images.
       
         Text Creation Partnership,
         Ann Arbor, MI ; Oxford (UK) :
         2004-08 (EEBO-TCP Phase 1).
         A20930
         STC 7306
         ESTC S110979
         99846422
         99846422
         11387
         
           
            This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of
             Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal
            . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission.
          
        
      
       
         Early English books online.
      
       
         (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A20930)
         Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 11387)
         Images scanned from microfilm: (Early English books, 1475-1640 ; 1136:05)
      
       
         
           
             The accomplishment of the prophecies; or The third booke in defence of the Catholicke faith contained in the booke of the high & mighty King Iames. I. by the grace of God King of Great Brittaine and Ireland. Against the allegations of R. Bellarmine; and F.N. Coëffeteau & other doctors of the Romish church: by Peter Du Moulin minister of the word of God in the church of Paris. Translated into English by I. Heath, fellow of New College in Oxford.
             Defense de la foy catholique. Book 3. English
             Du Moulin, Pierre, 1568-1658.
             Heath, John, Fellow of New College, Oxford.
          
           [18], 484, [2] p.
           
             By Ioseph Barnes and are to be sold by Iohn Barnes dwelling neere Holborne Conduit [, London],
             Printed at Oxford :
             1613.
          
           
             A translation of "Accomplissement des propheties", book 3 of: Defense de la foy catholique contenue au livre de .. Jacques I.
             A defence of the "Premonition" forming part 1 of "Triplici nodo, triplex cuneus" by James I; substantially an exposition of selected passages from 1 Timothy, 2 Thessalonians, and Revelation. In part an answer to: Coeffeteau, Nicolas. Responce à l'advertissement, adressé par le sérénissime roy de la Grande Bretagne, Jacques I. à tous les princes et potentats de la chrestienté.
             The last leaf is blank.
             Reproduction of the original in the Henry E. Huntington Library and Art Gallery.
          
        
      
    
     
       
         Created by converting TCP files to TEI P5 using tcp2tei.xsl, TEI @ Oxford.
         Re-processed by University of Nebraska-Lincoln and Northwestern, with changes to facilitate morpho-syntactic tagging. Gap elements of known extent have been transformed into placeholder characters or elements to simplify the filling in of gaps by user contributors.
      
       
         EEBO-TCP is a partnership between the Universities of Michigan and Oxford and the publisher ProQuest to create accurately transcribed and encoded texts based on the image sets published by ProQuest via their Early English Books Online (EEBO) database (http://eebo.chadwyck.com). The general aim of EEBO-TCP is to encode one copy (usually the first edition) of every monographic English-language title published between 1473 and 1700 available in EEBO.
         EEBO-TCP aimed to produce large quantities of textual data within the usual project restraints of time and funding, and therefore chose to create diplomatic transcriptions (as opposed to critical editions) with light-touch, mainly structural encoding based on the Text Encoding Initiative (http://www.tei-c.org).
         The EEBO-TCP project was divided into two phases. The 25,363 texts created during Phase 1 of the project have been released into the public domain as of 1 January 2015. Anyone can now take and use these texts for their own purposes, but we respectfully request that due credit and attribution is given to their original source.
         Users should be aware of the process of creating the TCP texts, and therefore of any assumptions that can be made about the data.
         Text selection was based on the New Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature (NCBEL). If an author (or for an anonymous work, the title) appears in NCBEL, then their works are eligible for inclusion. Selection was intended to range over a wide variety of subject areas, to reflect the true nature of the print record of the period. In general, first editions of a works in English were prioritized, although there are a number of works in other languages, notably Latin and Welsh, included and sometimes a second or later edition of a work was chosen if there was a compelling reason to do so.
         Image sets were sent to external keying companies for transcription and basic encoding. Quality assurance was then carried out by editorial teams in Oxford and Michigan. 5% (or 5 pages, whichever is the greater) of each text was proofread for accuracy and those which did not meet QA standards were returned to the keyers to be redone. After proofreading, the encoding was enhanced and/or corrected and characters marked as illegible were corrected where possible up to a limit of 100 instances per text. Any remaining illegibles were encoded as <gap>s. Understanding these processes should make clear that, while the overall quality of TCP data is very good, some errors will remain and some readable characters will be marked as illegible. Users should bear in mind that in all likelihood such instances will never have been looked at by a TCP editor.
         The texts were encoded and linked to page images in accordance with level 4 of the TEI in Libraries guidelines.
         Copies of the texts have been issued variously as SGML (TCP schema; ASCII text with mnemonic sdata character entities); displayable XML (TCP schema; characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or text strings within braces); or lossless XML (TEI P5, characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or TEI g elements).
         
          Keying and markup guidelines are available at the
           Text Creation Partnership web site
          .
        
      
       
         
         
      
    
     
       
         eng
      
       
         
           James -- I, -- King of England, 1566-1625. -- Triplici nodo, triplex cuneus -- Early works to 1800.
           Bellarmino, Roberto Francesco Romolo, -- Saint, 1542-1621 -- Controversial literature -- Early works to 1800.
           Coeffeteau, Nicolas, 1574-1623. -- Responce à l'advertissement, adressé par le sérénissme roy de la Grande Bretagne, Jacques I. à tous les princes et potentats de la chrestienté -- Controversial literature -- Early works to 1800.
           Catholic Church -- Controversial literature -- Early works to 1800.
           Bible. -- N.T. -- 1 Timothy IV, 1-4 -- Commentaries -- Early works to 1800.
           Bible. -- N.T. -- 2 Thessalonians 2 -- Commentaries -- Early works to 1800.
           Bible. -- N.T. -- Revelation -- Commentaries -- Early works to 1800.
        
      
    
     
        2004-03 TCP
        Assigned for keying and markup
      
        2004-04 SPi Global
        Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images
      
        2004-05 Jonathan Blaney
        Sampled and proofread
      
        2004-05 Jonathan Blaney
        Text and markup reviewed and edited
      
        2004-07 pfs
        Batch review (QC) and XML conversion
      
    
  
   
     
       
         
         
         
           THE
           ACCOMPLISHMENT
           OF
           THE
           PROPHECIES
           ;
           OR
           THE
           THIRD
           BOOKE
           IN
           defense
           of
           the
           Catholicke
           faith
           ,
           contained
           in
           the
           booke
           of
           the
           high
           &
           mighty
           KING
           IAMES
           .
           I.
           by
           the
           grace
           of
           God
           King
           of
           Great
           Brittaine
           and
           Ireland
           .
        
         
           AGAINST
           THE
           ALLEGATIONS
           of
           
             R.
             Bellarmine
          
           ;
           and
           
             F.
             N.
             Coëffeteau
          
           &
           other
           Doctors
           of
           the
           Romish
           Church
           :
           BY
           PETER
           DV
           MOVLIN
           Minister
           of
           the
           word
           of
           God
           in
           the
           Church
           of
           Paris
           .
        
         
           Translated
           into
           English
           by
           
             I.
             HEATH
          
           ,
           Fellow
           of
           New
           College
           in
           Oxford
           .
        
         
           Printed
           at
           Oxford
           by
           Ioseph
           Barnes
           and
           are
           to
           be
           sold
           by
           Iohn
           Barnes
           dwelling
           neere
           Holborne
           Conduit
           .
           1613.
           
        
      
       
         
         
         
           THE
           PREFACE
           TO
           the
           Reader
           .
        
         
           I
           wrote
           my
           two
           first
           bookes
           beeing
           diversly
           distracted
           ,
           &
           my
           spirit
           surseized
           with
           feare
           ,
           foresaw
           the
           dismal
           chaunce
           that
           is
           nowe
           come
           vpon
           vs.
           The
           seditious
           sermons
           ,
           the
           impairing
           of
           a
           dutifull
           respect
           to
           the
           king
           ,
           the
           cōmon
           reports
           that
           were
           spred
           abroad
           of
           his
           death
           ,
           before
           his
           death
           ,
           the
           encrease
           of
           the
           Iesuits
           ,
           &
           by
           a
           consequent
           the
           establishment
           of
           their
           maxims
           ,
           made
           many
           to
           suspect
           shrewdly
           ,
           &
           it
           was
           no
           great
           praise
           to
           bee
           a
           prophet
           .
           We
           haue
           therefore
           foreseene
           ,
           &
           foretold
           the
           future
           calamity
           that
           was
           like
           to
           betide
           vs
           to
           our
           great
           losse
           ,
           &
           spake
           more
           true
           in
           it
           ,
           then
           we
           could
           wish
           to
           haue
           done
           ;
           Vpon
           the
           downefall
           of
           this
           so
           great
           a
           Prince
           many
           haue
           powred
           out
           
           the
           torrents
           of
           their
           eloquence
           ,
           and
           haue
           bewailed
           him
           with
           so
           much
           art
           ,
           that
           nature
           hath
           no
           more
           left
           to
           say
           .
           And
           to
           speak
           the
           truth
           wordes
           are
           too
           weak
           and
           feeble
           signes
           to
           expresse
           such
           a
           griefe
           ;
           light
           afflictions
           speak
           ,
           when
           the
           greater
           are
           dumbe
           ,
           and
           with
           the
           vaile
           of
           silence
           cover
           that
           which
           cānot
           be
           vttered
           .
           O
           miserable
           age
           !
           The
           murdering
           therefore
           of
           kings
           will
           ere
           long
           turne
           into
           a
           custome
           ;
           and
           the
           naturall
           respect
           that
           the
           French
           were
           wont
           to
           haue
           of
           their
           Soveraigne
           bee
           choaked
           by
           superstition
           .
           We
           see
           it
           to
           our
           great
           griefe
           .
           For
           whosoever
           shal
           hereafter
           take
           vpō
           him
           to
           attēpt
           the
           life
           his
           king
           ,
           shal
           be
           vnderpropt
           by
           many
           examples
           ,
           &
           ,
           which
           is
           more
           ,
           shall
           not
           want
           for
           rules
           :
           and
           if
           this
           growing
           evill
           be
           not
           by
           time
           prevented
           ,
           it
           wil
           at
           last
           be
           held
           a
           punishment
           to
           raigne
           ,
           &
           the
           coronation
           of
           our
           kings
           ,
           shall
           be
           as
           it
           were
           a
           consecratiō
           of
           sacrifices
           markt
           out
           for
           the
           slaughter
           .
           For
           howbeit
           the
           singular
           wisedome
           ,
           and
           vigilant
           care
           of
           our
           Queene
           his
           Maiesties
           spowse
           hath
           served
           vs
           as
           a
           prop
           to
           sustaine
           our
           ruinous
           estate
           ,
           yet
           may
           wee
           say
           that
           in
           him
           Fraunce
           hath
           lost
           the
           worthyest
           king
           it
           hath
           had
           these
           many
           yeares
           ,
           and
           the
           manner
           of
           whose
           death
           is
           a
           fatall
           
           example
           ,
           and
           a
           grand
           caveat
           to
           posterity
           .
        
         
           This
           wound
           did
           so
           smart
           ,
           that
           I
           coulde
           never
           get
           my
           fingers
           of
           from
           it
           ,
           nor
           for
           a
           long
           time
           togither
           settle
           my selfe
           about
           finishing
           the
           remainder
           of
           this
           work
           .
           Griefe
           which
           of
           its
           owne
           nature
           is
           idle
           ,
           is
           then
           so
           most
           especially
           ,
           when
           the
           thing
           grieved
           at
           is
           past
           all
           remedy
           .
           Herevnto
           adde
           that
           this
           
             third
             booke
          
           ,
           which
           entreats
           
             of
             the
             accomplishment
             of
             prophecies
          
           ,
           togither
           with
           the
           interpretatiō
           of
           them
           ,
           requires
           a
           more
           cōposed
           spirit
           then
           the
           two
           former
           did
           :
           For
           as
           God
           intending
           to
           reveale
           future
           events
           to
           his
           prophets
           ,
           withdrew
           them
           aside
           ,
           and
           carryed
           them
           either
           to
           the
           desert
           ,
           or
           els
           to
           the
           sea
           shore
           ,
           that
           so
           having
           pluckt
           them
           from
           amidst
           the
           presse
           ,
           he
           might
           setle
           their
           mindes
           in
           a
           quiet
           repose
           ;
           So
           thinke
           I
           ,
           that
           to
           diue
           into
           their
           prophecies
           a
           man
           neede
           be
           free
           from
           all
           cares
           ,
           &
           to
           partake
           of
           their
           rest
           ,
           that
           he
           may
           partake
           of
           the
           cleerenesse
           of
           their
           spirit
           .
           And
           ,
           indeed
           ,
           what
           by
           reason
           of
           the
           publike
           griefe
           ,
           the
           greatest
           part
           whereof
           hath
           fallen
           vpon
           vs
           ,
           and
           what
           by
           reason
           of
           many
           interruptions
           ,
           I
           had
           never
           dared
           to
           haue
           set
           vpon
           this
           matter
           ,
           had
           not
           the
           excellent
           spirit
           of
           the
           
             King
             of
             Great
             Brittaine
          
           enlightened
           me
           ,
           and
           if
           in
           the
           vnfolding
           
           of
           these
           prophecies
           I
           had
           not
           been
           assisted
           by
           experience
           ,
           which
           is
           the
           cause
           ,
           that
           I
           haue
           more
           need
           of
           a
           memory
           herein
           ,
           then
           any
           extraordinary
           revelation
           .
           God
           also
           ,
           whom
           I
           here
           invoke
           to
           mine
           aide
           ,
           wil
           by
           his
           spirit
           sharpen
           the
           dulnesse
           of
           mine
           ,
           and
           as
           hee
           hath
           given
           this
           property
           to
           the
           sea-cards
           needle
           to
           stand
           firme
           in
           the
           most
           violent
           tempests
           ,
           so
           is
           he
           able
           to
           giue
           his
           servants
           a
           piercing
           wit
           ,
           and
           a
           setled
           minde
           amidst
           this
           confusion
           .
           He
           reveales
           his
           secrets
           to
           those
           which
           feare
           him
           ,
           and
           makes
           them
           to
           vnderstand
           his
           will.
           Now
           that
           no
           man
           may
           accuse
           me
           of
           rashnesse
           herein
           ,
           as
           though
           I
           did
           too
           curiously
           pry
           into
           after
           ages
           ,
           or
           presumptuously
           gaue
           mine
           owne
           interpretations
           for
           rules
           ;
           the
           reader
           shall
           do
           well
           to
           consider
           ,
           that
           it
           is
           one
           thing
           to
           prophecy
           ,
           another
           thing
           to
           
             speak
             of
             the
             fulfilling
             of
             prophecies
             :
          
           the
           one
           is
           done
           by
           revelation
           ,
           the
           other
           by
           experience
           ;
           for
           the
           one
           we
           need
           to
           be
           inspired
           from
           aboue
           ,
           for
           the
           other
           we
           need
           nothing
           but
           a
           memory
           togither
           with
           some
           insight
           in
           the
           present
           times
           .
           The
           Prophets
           drew
           their
           prophecies
           from
           the
           counsell
           of
           God
           ,
           but
           we
           finde
           the
           
             accomplishment
             of
             their
             prophecies
          
           in
           histories
           ,
           by
           conferring
           the
           predictions
           with
           
           the
           events
           ;
           for
           the
           predictions
           after
           the
           events
           become
           histories
           ,
           and
           the
           promises
           performances
           .
        
         
           This
           is
           the
           reason
           why
           
             his
             Maiestie
             of
             England
          
           saith
           (
           and
           that
           most
           truely
           )
           that
           
             the
             fathers
             of
             the
             first
             ages
             ,
             spake
             of
             this
             matter
             but
             only
             by
             coniectures
             ,
             wheras
             we
             speake
             of
             it
             by
             experience
          
           ;
           For
           the
           prophecies
           which
           foretell
           of
           an
           evill
           to
           come
           ,
           may
           easily
           be
           interpreted
           by
           those
           vpon
           whom
           it
           is
           come
           .
           Even
           as
           the
           Iewes
           being
           led
           captiues
           into
           Babylon
           did
           easily
           vnderstande
           the
           
             prophecie
             of
             Ieremie
          
           ;
           so
           Christians
           held
           vnder
           the
           
             second
             captivity
             of
             Babilon
          
           ,
           may
           soone
           know
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           prophecies
           in
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           which
           foretell
           of
           it
           ;
           I
           would
           to
           God
           we
           were
           not
           the
           interpreters
           of
           our
           owne
           miseries
           ,
           and
           that
           we
           had
           not
           learn'd
           the
           meaning
           of
           these
           prophecies
           by
           experience
           .
           Which
           makes
           mee
           to
           wonder
           at
           our
           adversaries
           who
           to
           intangle
           this
           point
           the
           more
           ,
           doe
           nothing
           but
           quote
           passages
           out
           of
           the
           fathers
           ,
           whenas
           they
           speake
           only
           but
           by
           coniecture
           ,
           or
           else
           say
           such
           things
           as
           our
           adversaries
           themselues
           do
           deride
           ,
           &
           which
           experience
           hath
           confuted
           .
           Lactantius
           in
           the
           25.
           chap.
           of
           his
           7.
           booke
           saith
           that
           
             the
             world
             should
             not
             last
             
             aboue
          
           200
           
             yeares
             more
             at
             the
             most
          
           ,
           and
           yet
           notwithstanding
           it
           is
           well
           neere
           1300.
           yeares
           past
           since
           Lactantius
           wrote
           .
           
             Sulpitius
             Severus
          
           in
           the
           
             second
             booke
          
           of
           his
           history
           tels
           vs
           that
           
             it
             was
             generally
             thought
             in
             his
             time
             that
             Nero
             was
             not
             dead
             ,
             but
             that
             hee
             vvas
             cured
             of
             the
             vvounde
             that
             vvas
             given
             him
             ,
             and
             that
             his
             wound
             being
             cured
             ,
             he
             is
             reserved
             aliue
             for
             the
             last
             day
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             that
             he
             may
             exercise
             the
             mysterie
             of
             iniquity
             .
          
           S.
           Austin
           in
           the
           19.
           
           Chap.
           of
           the
           20.
           book
           of
           the
           cittie
           of
           God
           ,
           expounding
           S.
           Pauls
           prophecie
           ,
           in
           the
           2.
           
           Chap.
           of
           his
           2.
           
           Epist.
           to
           the
           Thess.
           speakes
           thus
           ,
           
             I
             confesse
             that
             I
             vnderstand
             no
             thing
             of
             all
             that
             which
             hee
             hath
             said
             ;
             only
             I
             will
             relate
             the
             divers
             surmises
             of
             men
             ,
             that
             I
             could
             ever
             heare
             of
             ,
             or
             read
             vpon
             this
             subiect
          
           ;
           Then
           he
           alleages
           divers
           opinions
           ,
           which
           he
           cals
           coniectures
           .
           Compare
           the
           booke
           of
           Antichrist
           fathered
           vpon
           
             S.
             Austin
          
           ,
           with
           the
           expositions
           of
           Andrew
           Archbishop
           of
           Cesarea
           ,
           and
           Bedaes
           ,
           and
           
             S.
             Ieromes
          
           Commentaries
           vpon
           Daniell
           ,
           &
           you
           shall
           see
           but
           little
           agreement
           between
           them
           .
           Wherefore
           the
           Iesuits
           writing
           vpon
           this
           subiect
           are
           often
           times
           troubled
           about
           confuting
           the
           Fathers
           opinions
           .
           If
           we
           then
           speak
           with
           more
           certaintie
           thē
           they
           ,
           
           it
           is
           not
           our
           sufficiency
           that
           is
           the
           cause
           thereof
           ,
           but
           rather
           our
           misfortune
           to
           bee
           reserved
           till
           the
           last
           daies
           ,
           that
           wee
           might
           see
           the
           execution
           of
           the
           plagues
           foretold
           in
           these
           prophecies
           .
        
         
           This
           notwithstanding
           their
           praise
           remaines
           whole
           vnto
           them
           stil
           :
           for
           he
           which
           expoundes
           prophecies
           not
           yet
           accomplished
           ,
           ought
           to
           be
           more
           admired
           ,
           if
           amōgst
           ten
           false
           expositions
           hee
           hit
           vpon
           one
           or
           two
           true
           ,
           then
           if
           after
           they
           were
           fulfilled
           hee
           should
           expound
           them
           all
           truly
           .
           Nowe
           the
           Fathers
           doe
           happily
           light
           vpon
           the
           true
           meaning
           in
           many
           of
           these
           points
           ,
           and
           bring
           divers
           expositions
           ,
           which
           the
           experience
           of
           succeeding
           ages
           hath
           confirmed
           ,
           which
           we
           will
           produce
           in
           their
           place
           .
        
         
           But
           heere
           before
           wee
           venter
           vpon
           this
           matter
           ,
           the
           faithfull
           reader
           must
           bee
           advised
           to
           avoid
           two
           extreames
           ;
           the
           one
           is
           ,
           that
           he
           tie
           not
           himselfe
           too
           religiously
           to
           these
           things
           ;
           the
           other
           ,
           that
           he
           set
           not
           too
           little
           by
           them
           .
           As
           for
           the
           former
           ,
           his
           
             Maiestie
             of
             England
          
           plainely
           affirmeth
           ,
           that
           
             in
             this
             doctrine
             there
             are
             obscure
             things
             which
             he
             would
             not
             vrge
             as
             necessarie
             to
             salvation
             for
             every
             one
             .
          
           And
           that
           with
           good
           reason
           .
           For
           I
           am
           perswaded
           that
           in
           Christian
           
           religion
           ,
           there
           is
           no
           one
           article
           of
           faith
           ,
           which
           may
           be
           necessarie
           to
           salvatiō
           at
           one
           time
           ,
           and
           yet
           not
           necessarie
           at
           another
           .
           Now
           all
           confesse
           that
           the
           vnderstanding
           of
           these
           prophecies
           was
           not
           necessary
           before
           they
           were
           fulfilled
           .
           It
           followes
           therefore
           that
           even
           after
           their
           accomplishment
           a
           man
           may
           bee
           saved
           without
           the
           knowledge
           of
           them
           .
           And
           I
           finde
           not
           that
           the
           reading
           of
           civill
           and
           ecclesiasticall
           histories
           is
           recommended
           vnto
           vs
           in
           the
           holy
           Scriptures
           as
           necessary
           to
           salvation
           .
           But
           so
           it
           is
           that
           partly
           out
           of
           them
           ,
           partly
           out
           of
           the
           present
           evils
           ,
           wee
           draw
           the
           meaning
           of
           these
           prophecies
           .
           The
           articles
           of
           the
           doctrine
           of
           salvation
           ,
           are
           no
           prophecies
           ,
           but
           Commandements
           ,
           or
           simple
           and
           bare
           promises
           ;
           or
           if
           it
           please
           any
           one
           to
           call
           the
           articles
           of
           the
           
             resurrection
             of
             the
             flesh
          
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           
             life
             everlasting
          
           ,
           by
           the
           names
           of
           prophecies
           ;
           yet
           are
           they
           coucht
           in
           such
           cleere
           tearmes
           ,
           that
           they
           haue
           no
           need
           of
           any
           interpretation
           .
           For
           God
           which
           hath
           covered
           future
           events
           with
           a
           thick
           darkenesse
           ,
           doth
           propose
           the
           things
           simply
           necessary
           to
           salvation
           with
           great
           perspicuitie
           .
        
         
           The
           other
           extremitie
           ,
           which
           is
           the
           setting
           too
           little
           by
           these
           prophecies
           ,
           hath
           no
           
           lesse
           danger
           .
           For
           as
           when
           the
           
             ruine
             of
             Ierusalem
          
           by
           Nabuchadnezar
           did
           fulfill
           the
           
             Prophecy
             of
             Ieremy
          
           :
           or
           when
           the
           
             birth
             of
             our
             Saviour
          
           ,
           made
           the
           prophecies
           of
           
             Iacob
             ,
             Esay
          
           ,
           and
           Micheas
           ,
           plaine
           ,
           &
           perspicuous
           ;
           if
           any
           one
           were
           so
           obstinate
           that
           he
           would
           not
           vnderstand
           these
           prophecies
           ,
           hee
           had
           reiected
           the
           grace
           of
           God.
           So
           now
           adaies
           when
           God
           hath
           made
           vs
           to
           see
           the
           accomplishment
           of
           matters
           foretold
           by
           Daniel
           ,
           S.
           Paul
           ,
           and
           
             S.
             Iohn
          
           ,
           whosoever
           shall
           herevpon
           close
           his
           eies
           of
           set
           purpose
           ,
           that
           man
           doth
           resist
           the
           wisdome
           of
           God
           ,
           and
           frustrates
           the
           holy
           Ghost
           of
           his
           intēt
           ,
           making
           (
           as
           much
           as
           lies
           in
           him
           )
           these
           prophecies
           to
           be
           vnprofitable
           .
           For
           God
           revealed
           these
           things
           to
           his
           Prophets
           and
           Apostles
           to
           no
           other
           end
           but
           to
           profit
           vs.
           That
           so
           the
           deliverances
           ,
           which
           they
           foretell
           of
           ,
           taking
           effect
           ,
           wee
           might
           not
           attribute
           it
           to
           our
           owne
           wisdome
           or
           force
           ,
           but
           to
           his
           providence
           ,
           and
           determination
           ,
           which
           hee
           declared
           long
           before
           to
           his
           Prophets
           :
           as
           also
           that
           we
           might
           knowe
           ,
           that
           these
           calamities
           ,
           being
           foretold
           of
           ,
           come
           not
           vpon
           vs
           by
           hap
           hazard
           ,
           but
           by
           his
           fixt
           counsell
           ,
           resolved
           vpon
           from
           everlasting
           ,
           and
           to
           the
           end
           that
           we
           might
           keepe
           our selues
           from
           
           being
           amongst
           the
           number
           of
           those
           vpon
           whome
           he
           will
           powre
           out
           the
           vials
           of
           his
           wrath
           because
           of
           their
           vnbeliefe
           .
           For
           whosoever
           shall
           labour
           to
           prevent
           the
           iudgements
           of
           God
           denounced
           by
           his
           Prophets
           will
           never
           stile
           the
           studie
           of
           knowing
           thē
           ,
           by
           the
           name
           of
           curiositie
           .
           But
           on
           the
           contrarie
           even
           as
           the
           faithfull
           which
           lived
           a
           little
           before
           the
           birth
           of
           our
           Saviour
           ,
           comforted
           themselues
           vnder
           the
           Roman
           yoke
           by
           meditating
           vpon
           the
           comming
           of
           Christ
           promised
           by
           his
           Prophets
           which
           they
           called
           ,
           *
           
             the
             cōsolatiō
             of
             Israel
          
           ,
           so
           ought
           wee
           vnder
           this
           Romish
           bondage
           ,
           which
           tyrannizeth
           over
           our
           consciences
           ,
           comfort
           vp
           our selues
           by
           these
           prophecies
           ,
           part
           of
           which
           being
           already
           finished
           ,
           assure
           vs
           that
           the
           rest
           too
           shall
           in
           their
           due
           time
           bee
           put
           in
           execution
           .
           Otherwise
           the
           reproach
           wherewith
           the
           Iewes
           were
           vpbraided
           by
           Ieremie
           shall
           also
           be
           cast
           in
           our
           teeth
           ,
           to
           wit
           ,
           *
           
             that
             the
             Storke
             ,
             the
             Turtle
             ,
             the
             Crane
             and
             the
             Swallow
             knew
             their
             seasons
             ,
             but
             the
             people
             of
             God
             knew
             not
             theirs
             .
          
           For
           hee
           iustly
           sends
           them
           to
           the
           schoole
           of
           beastes
           ,
           that
           will
           not
           be
           schollars
           in
           the
           house
           of
           God.
           But
           if
           these
           prophecies
           be
           not
           necessary
           as
           articles
           of
           our
           faith
           ,
           yet
           at
           the
           least
           are
           
           they
           necessarie
           as
           Gods
           forewarnings
           to
           vs
           ward
           ,
           which
           we
           cannot
           reiect
           without
           hurting
           our selues
           ,
           &
           displeasing
           him
           .
           For
           is
           it
           no
           fault
           ,
           trow
           we
           ,
           if
           that
           after
           hee
           hath
           painted
           out
           
             the
             sonne
             of
             perdition
          
           vnto
           vs
           long
           time
           before
           his
           comming
           ,
           we
           wil
           nor
           knowe
           him
           then
           when
           he
           is
           come
           ,
           &
           whē
           we
           are
           within
           his
           clumbs
           ?
           The
           holy
           Prophets
           ,
           should
           they
           ever
           haue
           foreseen
           these
           evils
           so
           long
           time
           before
           hand
           ,
           to
           the
           ende
           that
           we
           should
           not
           see
           them
           when
           they
           ariue
           ?
           And
           if
           we
           demonstrate
           ,
           that
           according
           to
           the
           predictions
           of
           the
           Prophets
           ,
           that
           
             man
             of
             sinne
          
           must
           needes
           bee
           already
           come
           ;
           what
           carelesnesse
           is
           it
           not
           to
           harken
           out
           his
           habitation
           ,
           and
           not
           so
           much
           as
           vouchsafe
           to
           looke
           whether
           it
           may
           not
           be
           that
           we
           our selues
           serue
           him
           without
           thinking
           of
           it
           .
           I
           omit
           to
           tell
           how
           the
           vnderstāding
           of
           these
           prophecies
           ,
           are
           of
           great
           force
           to
           giue
           waight
           and
           authoritie
           to
           the
           Gospell
           .
           For
           the
           mysterie
           of
           godlinesse
           is
           made
           more
           cleere
           by
           beeing
           opposed
           to
           the
           mysterie
           of
           iniquitie
           .
           Because
           we
           are
           soon
           induced
           to
           beleeue
           that
           the
           Prophets
           are
           true
           in
           their
           doctrines
           ,
           when
           wee
           finde
           by
           effect
           that
           they
           speake
           truth
           in
           their
           prophecies
           .
           We
           doe
           not
           therfore
           herein
           serue
           
           our
           owne
           curiositie
           ,
           but
           the
           good
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           and
           the
           commandement
           of
           God.
           Let
           others
           read
           the
           events
           of
           things
           to
           come
           in
           the
           Starres
           ,
           or
           study
           Chiromancy
           ,
           or
           Meteoposcopie
           ;
           the
           best
           Prognosticke
           that
           a
           man
           can
           haue
           ,
           is
           the
           feare
           of
           God
           ,
           &
           his
           word
           ,
           the
           best
           booke
           of
           predictions
           ,
           wherein
           God
           speakes
           ,
           as
           if
           hee
           did
           stretch
           out
           his
           finger
           from
           heauen
           ,
           and
           point
           out
           the
           
             See
             of
             Rome
          
           vnto
           vs
           ,
           saying
           ,
           behold
           her
           here
           of
           whō
           my
           Prophets
           spoke
           ,
           &
           which
           I
           marked
           out
           vnto
           you
           in
           my
           word
           .
        
         
           It
           remaines
           that
           I
           speake
           of
           the
           subiect
           of
           this
           booke
           ,
           &
           of
           the
           end
           that
           I
           proposed
           to
           my selfe
           therein
           .
           I
           doe
           not
           here
           dispute
           who
           that
           Antichrist
           should
           be
           ,
           nor
           whether
           the
           Pope
           should
           be
           so
           called
           .
           And
           I
           refraine
           from
           doing
           this
           for
           two
           reasons
           ,
           The
           one
           is
           ,
           because
           I
           would
           not
           willingly
           contest
           about
           wordes
           ,
           but
           rather
           tie
           my selfe
           to
           the
           things
           .
           For
           since
           all
           the
           fathers
           and
           our
           adversaries
           agree
           with
           vs
           in
           this
           ,
           that
           in
           the
           2.
           
           Chap.
           of
           the
           2.
           to
           the
           Thessal
           .
           and
           in
           the
           13.
           of
           the
           Apocal.
           and
           other
           places
           ,
           Antichrist
           is
           pointed
           out
           ,
           it
           shall
           suffice
           if
           we
           search
           the
           meaning
           of
           these
           chapters
           .
           For
           if
           it
           be
           found
           that
           they
           speake
           of
           the
           Pope
           ,
           the
           difficultie
           touching
           the
           name
           
           wil
           be
           taken
           away
           .
           We
           will
           make
           the
           propositions
           ,
           let
           who
           so
           will
           drawe
           the
           conclusion
           .
           The
           other
           reason
           is
           ,
           because
           this
           very
           name
           doth
           exasperate
           the
           simpler
           sort
           who
           thinking
           this
           an
           odious
           word
           ,
           condemne
           the
           booke
           for
           the
           titles
           sake
           .
           They
           thinke
           that
           other
           controversies
           pricke
           his
           Holynesse
           at
           the
           throat
           ,
           but
           that
           this
           cuts
           his
           wind
           pipe
           .
           To
           whose
           quaint
           stomacks
           ,
           and
           impatient
           delicacie
           I
           thought
           good
           to
           fit
           my selfe
           at
           this
           time
           ;
           being
           content
           only
           to
           shewe
           the
           meaning
           of
           these
           holy
           prophecies
           ,
           and
           to
           confirme
           my
           expositiō
           with
           proofes
           :
           which
           I
           hope
           to
           deliver
           so
           cleerely
           ,
           and
           make
           them
           so
           agreeable
           ,
           that
           I
           am
           perswaded
           that
           hee
           which
           is
           resolved
           not
           to
           beleeue
           any
           of
           them
           ,
           shall
           at
           the
           least
           wonder
           by
           what
           chaunce
           it
           coulde
           come
           to
           passe
           ,
           that
           so
           many
           things
           foretold
           by
           Daniel
           ,
           by
           S.
           Paul
           ,
           &
           S.
           Iohn
           should
           all
           meete
           iointly
           together
           in
           one
           man.
           Or
           how
           they
           could
           draw
           a
           picture
           so
           like
           the
           Pope
           ,
           and
           never
           thinke
           vpon
           him
           .
        
         
           Now
           ,
           this
           being
           a
           difficult
           point
           ,
           and
           a
           matter
           of
           importance
           ,
           I
           must
           of
           necessitie
           (
           to
           handle
           it
           with
           order
           and
           care
           )
           speake
           a
           great
           deale
           more
           in
           it
           then
           
             Mounsieur
             Coeffeteau
          
           bindes
           mee
           to
           doe
           .
           For
           seeing
           hee
           
           doth
           but
           florish
           the
           matter
           over
           superficially
           being
           content
           to
           cast
           some
           light
           difficulties
           here
           and
           there
           in
           the
           way
           ,
           it
           had
           beene
           impossible
           for
           mee
           to
           sound
           the
           depth
           of
           it
           in
           following
           him
           .
           Nevertheles
           he
           hath
           said
           nothing
           ,
           to
           which
           I
           doe
           not
           answer
           ,
           as
           it
           crosseth
           my
           course
           .
           God
           ,
           of
           his
           mercy
           ,
           fil
           vs
           with
           his
           grace
           frō
           aboue
           ,
           and
           after
           the
           accomplishment
           of
           these
           prophecies
           which
           threaten
           vs
           ,
           giue
           vs
           the
           accomplishment
           of
           his
           promises
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           A
           TABLE
           OF
           THE
           MATter
           's
           contained
           in
           this
           third
           booke
           .
        
         
           
             A
             Preface
             .
          
           
             An
             exposition
             of
             the
             4
             first
             verses
             of
             the
             fourth
             Chapter
             ,
             of
             the
             first
             Epistle
             to
             Timothie
             .
             
               Chap.
               1.
            
             
          
           
             An
             exposition
             of
             the
             second
             Chapter
             of
             the
             second
             to
             the
             Thessalonians
             .
             
               Chap.
               2.
            
             
          
           
             An
             exposition
             of
             the
             12
             Chapter
             of
             the
             Revelation
             .
             
               Chap.
               3.
            
             
          
           
             An
             exposition
             of
             the
             13
             Chapter
             of
             the
             Revelation
             .
             
               Chap.
               4
            
             ,
          
           
             An
             exposition
             of
             the
             14
             Chapter
             of
             the
             Revelation
             .
             
               Chap.
               5.
            
             
          
           
             An
             exposition
             of
             the
             17
             Chapter
             of
             the
             Revelation
             .
             
               Chap.
               6.
            
             
          
           
             An
             exposition
             of
             the
             18
             Chapter
             of
             the
             Revelation
             .
             
               Chap.
               7.
            
             
          
           
             An
             exposition
             of
             the
             7
             Chapter
             of
             Daniel
             .
             
               Chap.
               8.
            
             
          
           
             
             An
             exposition
             of
             the
             11
             Chapter
             of
             the
             Revelation
             .
             
               Chap.
               9.
            
             
          
           
             The
             conclusion
             with
             the
             clozure
             of
             the
             king
             of
             Great
             Brittaines
             Preface
             .
             
               Cha.
               10.
            
             
          
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
           THE
           THIRD
           BOOKE
           OF
           THE
           accomplishment
           of
           the
           Prophecies
           .
        
         
           THE
           PROPHECIE
           OF
           THE
           Apostle
           S.
           PAVL
           in
           the
           first
           to
           TIMOTHY
           ,
           and
           fourth
           Chapter
           .
           CHAP.
           I.
           
        
         
           
             
               1
               Now
               the
               spirit
               speaketh
               evidently
               ,
               that
               in
               the
               latter
               times
               some
               shall
               depart
               from
               the
               faith
               ,
               and
               shall
               giue
               heed
               vnto
               spirits
               of
               error
               ,
               and
               doctrines
               of
               Devils
               .
            
             
               2
               Which
               speake
               lies
               through
               hypocrisie
               ,
               &
               haue
               their
               cōsciences
               burned
               with
               an
               hot
               yrō
               .
            
             
               3
               Forbidding
               to
               marry
               ,
               and
               commaunding
               to
               abstaine
               from
               meats
               ,
               which
               God
               hath
               created
               to
               be
               received
               with
               giving
               thankes
               of
               them
               which
               belieue
               and
               know
               the
               truth
               .
            
             
               4
               For
               every
               creature
               of
               God
               is
               good
               ,
               and
               nothing
               ought
               to
               be
               refused
               ,
               if
               it
               be
               received
               with
               thankesgiving
               ,
               &c.
               
            
          
        
         
           
             The
             accomplishment
             of
             this
             Prophecie
             .
          
           
             THis
             prediction
             of
             the
             Apostle
             ,
             being
             not
             wrapt
             in
             riddles
             ,
             nor
             shadowed
             vnder
             figuratiue
             words
             ,
             need
             no
             subtil
             explication
             ,
             nor
             laborious
             coniectures
             to
             be
             vnderstood
             ,
             we
             need
             not
             speake
             by
             guesse
             ,
             
             when
             we
             feele
             the
             evill
             ,
             &
             I
             would
             to
             God
             we
             saw
             it
             lesse
             cleere
             then
             we
             do
             .
          
           
             The
             Apostle
             speaks
             of
             an
             evill
             that
             must
             happen
             in
             the
             last
             times
             ;
             these
             last
             times
             be
             gunne
             from
             the
             Apostles
             times
             ,
             as
             he
             himselfe
             tels
             vs
             in
             the
             10.
             
             Chap.
             of
             his
             first
             epistle
             to
             the
             Corinthians
             :
             whēce
             it
             followeth
             that
             these
             last
             times
             are
             now
             much
             neerer
             ,
             and
             that
             this
             present
             age
             is
             more
             the
             last
             times
             ,
             then
             that
             was
             wherein
             S.
             Paul
             lived
             .
          
           
             In
             these
             last
             times
             therefore
             he
             foretels
             of
             a
             departing
             from
             the
             faith
             ,
             of
             spirits
             of
             errour
             ,
             which
             shall
             teach
             the
             doctrine
             of
             devils
             through
             hypocrisie
             against
             their
             owne
             conscience
             .
          
           
             This
             being
             spoken
             in
             generall
             would
             haue
             a
             thousand
             faces
             ,
             and
             bee
             subiect
             to
             divers
             interpretations
             ,
             were
             it
             not
             that
             the
             Apostle
             himselfe
             did
             put
             his
             finger
             vpon
             the
             evil
             ,
             and
             specifie
             some
             examples
             thereof
             ;
             not
             the
             worst
             but
             the
             most
             sensible
             ,
             not
             the
             most
             wicked
             ,
             but
             the
             most
             easie
             to
             bee
             knowne
             .
             These
             are
             the
             errors
             .
             1.
             
             
               A
               forbidding
               to
               marry
            
             .
             2.
             
             
               A
               commanding
               to
               abstaine
               from
               meats
               .
            
             Both
             which
             are
             the
             errors
             of
             Papistry
             ,
             and
             the
             ordinances
             of
             the
             church
             of
             Rome
             ,
             more
             religiously
             observed
             then
             the
             commandements
             of
             God
             :
             Wee
             will
             
             speake
             of
             each
             of
             them
             severally
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             single
             life
             of
             the
             Clergie
             ,
             and
             Monks
             in
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             .
          
           
             MArriage
             is
             an
             holy
             bond
             betweene
             mā
             &
             womā
             ,
             whereby
             they
             are
             made
             one
             body
             ,
             &
             one
             flesh
             .
             If
             antiquitie
             giue
             authoritie
             to
             things
             ?
             it
             was
             from
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             creation
             ?
             If
             the
             author
             ,
             God
             did
             first
             institute
             it
             ;
             If
             the
             place
             where
             it
             began
             ?
             it
             was
             established
             in
             Paradise
             ;
             If
             the
             witnesses
             ?
             Iesus
             Christ
             himselfe
             did
             authorize
             it
             by
             his
             presence
             ;
             If
             sanctity
             ?
             God
             cōpares
             it
             to
             his
             holy
             covenant
             ,
             promising
             in
             *
             
               O
               see
               ,
               that
               he
               will
               marry
               vs
               vnto
               himselfe
               for
               ever
               in
               righteousnesse
               and
               mercy
            
             ;
             It
             is
             an
             assistance
             given
             vnto
             man
             ;
             a
             lenitiue
             of
             all
             afflictions
             ,
             a
             remedy
             against
             in
             cōtinency
             ;
             and
             amongst
             faithfull
             persons
             it
             is
             a
             spirituall
             harmonie
             ,
             to
             ioine
             their
             praiers
             ,
             to
             comfort
             them
             vp
             in
             their
             miseries
             ,
             to
             encourage
             them
             on
             to
             good
             workes
             ,
             and
             in
             slipperie
             places
             to
             reach
             out
             their
             helping
             hands
             to
             each
             other
             .
             This
             is
             that
             which
             preserues
             mankind
             from
             perishing
             ,
             it
             is
             the
             seed-plot
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             the
             fountaine
             and
             originall
             of
             al
             kinred
             and
             affinitie
             that
             
             is
             in
             the
             world
             ;
             without
             this
             men
             would
             liue
             dispersed
             like
             savage
             beastes
             ,
             without
             making
             vp
             families
             ,
             which
             are
             the
             first
             and
             principall
             parts
             of
             a
             Common
             wealth
             .
          
           
             Where
             is
             the
             man
             this
             day
             living
             ,
             whose
             virginitie
             may
             be
             compared
             with
             Abrahams
             marriage
             ,
             in
             whome
             all
             the
             nations
             of
             the
             world
             were
             blest
             ?
             Wherevpon
             *
             
               S.
               Austin
            
             also
             opposeth
             it
             to
             the
             virginity
             of
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             .
             But
             there
             is
             nothing
             that
             doth
             add
             more
             authoritie
             vnto
             marriage
             ,
             then
             that
             comparison
             so
             often
             *
             reiterated
             in
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             ,
             whereby
             the
             
               vnion
               of
               Iesus
               Christ
               with
               his
               Church
            
             is
             compared
             vnto
             marriage
             .
             The
             bond
             whereof
             is
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             ,
             the
             contract
             the
             Gospell
             ,
             the
             Apostles
             were
             the
             Registers
             of
             this
             contract
             ,
             and
             Iesus
             Christ
             himselfe
             sealed
             it
             with
             his
             bloud
             :
             the
             betrothing
             is
             here
             below
             in
             the
             Church
             ,
             but
             the
             wedding
             it selfe
             shall
             bee
             solemnized
             in
             heaven
             .
             God
             clothing
             this
             spiritual
             vnion
             with
             these
             borrowed
             terms
             to
             the
             end
             that
             no
             man
             might
             condemne
             marriage
             ,
             but
             he
             should
             withal
             despise
             his
             covenant
             .
             The
             
               Prophets
               ,
               Levits
            
             ,
             yea
             and
             the
             
               High
               Priests
            
             entered
             this
             holy
             course
             of
             life
             ,
             which
             before
             the
             division
             made
             by
             David
             ,
             were
             to
             serue
             every
             day
             at
             morning
             
             and
             evening
             sacrifice
             .
             But
             if
             God
             had
             thought
             that
             there
             had
             beene
             any
             pollution
             in
             marriage
             ,
             hee
             would
             haue
             found
             some
             other
             meanes
             to
             continue
             the
             succession
             of
             his
             Priests
             ,
             then
             by
             the
             hereditary
             succession
             of
             childrē
             after
             their
             fathers
             .
             Especially
             seeing
             that
             then
             in
             outward
             things
             ,
             and
             bodily
             cleannesse
             ,
             God
             required
             a
             great
             deale
             more
             puritie
             vnder
             the
             law
             then
             he
             doth
             now
             adaies
             .
             The
             Apostles
             also
             were
             married
             :
             for
             in
             the
             first
             of
             S.
             Mark
             there
             is
             mention
             made
             of
             the
             mother
             of
             
               S.
               Peters
            
             wife
             .
             And
             S.
             Ambrose
             vpō
             the
             11.
             
             Chap.
             of
             the
             2.
             to
             the
             
               Corinthians
               ,
               All
               the
               Apostles
            
             ,
             saith
             hee
             ,
             
               except
               Iohn
               and
               Paule
               had
               wiues
               .
               Ignatius
            
             in
             his
             Epistle
             to
             the
             Philadelphians
             ,
             doth
             not
             except
             Saint
             Paul
             ;
             but
             saith
             ,
             that
             
               Peter
               and
               Paule
               ,
               &
               the
               other
               Apostles
               were
               married
               .
            
             And
             
               Clemens
               Alexandrinus
            
             in
             the
             3.
             booke
             of
             his
             Stromes
             ,
             after
             a
             long
             reprehension
             of
             those
             which
             despise
             marriage
             vnder
             the
             shew
             of
             a
             more
             strict
             sanctititie
             ,
             addeth
             .
             
               Doe
               they
               reiect
               the
               Apostles
               ?
               For
               Peter
               and
               Philip
               begat
               children
               .
               Philip
               married
               his
               daughters
               to
               husbandes
               ,
               and
               Paule
               sticks
               not
               to
               speake
               vnto
               his
               wife
               in
               one
               of
               his
               Epistles
               .
            
             Now
             it
             is
             to
             be
             noted
             that
             in
             these
             places
             ,
             
             the
             Fathers
             speak
             of
             marriage
             as
             it
             is
             a
             remedy
             against
             incontinencie
             ,
             and
             as
             it
             was
             thought
             by
             some
             to
             be
             lesse
             holy
             then
             virginitie
             ;
             to
             the
             end
             that
             none
             should
             thinke
             that
             they
             thought
             the
             Apostles
             had
             wiues
             ,
             but
             never
             lay
             with
             them
             .
             They
             tell
             Christ
             truly
             in
             the
             9.
             
             Chap.
             of
             S.
             
               Matthew
               ,
               Behold
               we
               haue
               forsaken
               all
               and
               followed
               thee
               ,
            
             And
             Iesus
             answers
             them
             ;
             
               Whosoever
               shall
               forsake
               houses
               ,
               or
               brethren
               ,
               or
               sisters
               ,
               or
               father
               ,
               or
               mother
               ,
               or
               wife
               ,
               or
               children
               ,
               or
               lands
               ,
               for
               my
               names
               sake
               ,
               hee
               shall
               receiue
               an
               hundreth
               fold
               more
               ,
               and
               shall
               inherit
               everlasting
               life
               .
            
             But
             we
             must
             knowe
             that
             this
             promise
             is
             made
             vnto
             all
             the
             faithfull
             ,
             and
             not
             only
             to
             the
             Pastours
             of
             the
             Church
             .
             For
             he
             saith
             
               Whosoever
               shal
               leaue
               &c.
            
             and
             yet
             neuerthelesse
             no
             man
             would
             infer
             out
             of
             this
             place
             that
             all
             the
             faithfull
             must
             abstaine
             from
             their
             wiues
             ,
             or
             forsake
             their
             children
             for
             Christs
             sake
             ;
             only
             our
             Saviour
             would
             that
             all
             the
             faithful
             should
             leaue
             all
             that
             is
             most
             neare
             and
             deare
             vnto
             them
             ,
             when
             it
             shall
             hinder
             them
             from
             following
             him
             ,
             &
             when
             it
             cannot
             stand
             together
             with
             the
             profession
             of
             the
             Gospell
             .
             Moreover
             Christ
             here
             placeth
             the
             wife
             ,
             and
             the
             children
             ,
             &
             the
             lands
             ,
             and
             the
             houses
             in
             the
             same
             rank
             .
             
             If
             a
             Bishop
             therefore
             may
             bee
             suffered
             to
             enioy
             his
             lands
             ,
             or
             houses
             ,
             in
             the
             same
             fashion
             that
             hee
             did
             enioy
             them
             before
             hee
             was
             a
             Bishop
             or
             Priest
             ,
             what
             reason
             is
             there
             but
             that
             he
             should
             enioy
             his
             wife
             in
             the
             same
             manner
             that
             hee
             did
             before
             hee
             was
             a
             Priest
             ?
             And
             if
             a
             father
             that
             is
             afterwards
             made
             a
             Priest
             shal
             not
             for
             all
             this
             be
             less
             a
             father
             thē
             he
             was
             before
             ,
             why
             should
             hee
             become
             lesse
             an
             husband
             ?
             Especially
             seeing
             that
             there
             is
             an
             expresse
             commaundement
             of
             our
             Lord
             in
             the
             19.
             of
             S.
             Matt.
             which
             doth
             not
             permit
             a
             man
             to
             
               leaue
               his
               wife
               for
               any
               other
               cause
               but
               adulterie
               .
            
             And
             which
             saieth
             ,
             that
             
               they
               are
               no
               more
               two
               but
               one
               flesh
               ,
               Let
               no
               man
               therefore
               put
               that
               asunder
               which
               God
               hath
               coupled
               together
            
             ;
             Now
             it
             is
             manifest
             that
             the
             separation
             which
             he
             speakes
             of
             ,
             is
             a
             separation
             of
             the
             bed
             ,
             seeing
             that
             he
             opposeth
             it
             against
             that
             coniunction
             by
             which
             man
             and
             woman
             are
             made
             
               one
               body
            
             .
          
           
             This
             doctrine
             being
             sound
             divinity
             ,
             and
             built
             vpon
             the
             worde
             of
             God
             ,
             as
             we
             will
             shew
             it
             yet
             more
             manifestly
             ;
             it
             is
             not
             without
             iust
             cause
             that
             the
             contrary
             doctrine
             is
             called
             
               the
               doctrine
               of
               Devils
            
             .
             The
             first
             that
             ever
             spake
             against
             marriage
             were
             the
             
               Tatians
               ,
               
               Marcionites
            
             ,
             &
             Manichees
             ,
             after
             whō
             Papistrie
             succeeded
             ,
             a
             religion
             patched
             vp
             togither
             out
             of
             the
             divers
             shrids
             of
             ancient
             heresies
             .
             For
             the
             Popes
             haue
             set
             themselues
             directly
             to
             contradict
             the
             Apostles
             St
             *
             Paul
             who
             saith
             ,
             that
             
               a
               Bishop
               should
               be
               vnreprouable
               ,
               the
               husbād
               of
               one
               wife
               ,
               having
               his
               children
               vnder
               obedience
               with
               all
               honesty
               .
            
             On
             the
             cōtrary
             
               Pope
               Pelagius
            
             in
             the
             61.
             
             Distinction
             commandes
             ,
             that
             
               there
               should
               be
               no
               bishop
               chosen
               ,
               but
               such
               a
               one
               that
               hath
               neither
               wife
               ,
               nor
               children
               ,
               nor
               any
               other
               crime
               contrary
               to
               the
               canons
               .
            
             There
             is
             nothing
             more
             opposite
             .
             But
             yet
             in
             this
             contrariety
             there
             is
             no
             question
             to
             be
             made
             ,
             but
             of
             the
             two
             the
             Pope
             must
             rather
             bee
             believed
             ,
             since
             that
             in
             his
             *
             Canons
             he
             vaunts
             
               that
               hee
               can
               dispense
               aboue
               the
               law
               .
            
             And
             that
             the
             
               glosses
               of
               the
               Church
               of
               Rome
            
             tel
             vs
             herevpon
             ,
             that
             
               he
               can
               dispense
               against
               the
               Apostle
               ,
            
             &
             that
             
               he
               doth
               dispense
               with
               the
               gospell
               in
               giving
               it
               what
               interpretation
               he
               please
               ,
            
             and
             that
             
               the
               Apostle
               had
               nothing
               else
               but
               certaine
               Revelations
            
             ;
             marry
             his
             holinesse
             *
             brags
             that
             
               hee
               hath
               all
               the
               law
               close
               lockt
               vp
               within
               the
               clozet
               of
               his
               brest
               .
            
             We
             haue
             therefore
             plainely
             seene
             the
             accomplishment
             of
             this
             prophecie
             .
          
           
           
             It
             is
             true
             that
             our
             adversaries
             to
             obscure
             this
             truth
             ,
             say
             that
             
               S.
               Paul
            
             speakes
             of
             heretickes
             which
             forbad
             marriage
             not
             onlie
             to
             Clarckes
             and
             Ministers
             ,
             but
             to
             the
             lay
             people
             too
             ,
             and
             that
             as
             a
             wicked
             and
             vncleane
             thing
             in
             its
             owne
             nature
             ;
             That
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             forbids
             marriage
             only
             to
             Clarckes
             ,
             and
             Monkes
             ,
             and
             such
             as
             haue
             made
             a
             vow
             of
             continency
             ,
             and
             forbids
             it
             them
             not
             as
             an
             vncleane
             thing
             ,
             but
             as
             a
             
               coūsell
               of
               perfection
            
             ,
             and
             as
             a
             more
             strict
             &
             sanctified
             profession
             .
          
           
             1
             I
             answere
             that
             they
             delude
             themselues
             in
             seeking
             to
             delude
             vs.
             For
             the
             Apostle
             calleth
             those
             false
             teachers
             in
             general
             that
             forbid
             marriage
             without
             specifying
             anie
             cause
             for
             which
             they
             forbid
             it
             :
             the
             rule
             being
             general
             ,
             it
             is
             not
             for
             vs
             to
             put
             in
             I
             know
             not
             what
             exceptions
             which
             the
             worde
             of
             God
             shall
             not
             put
             in
             .
             By
             diverse
             lines
             wee
             may
             well
             come
             to
             the
             same
             point
             ,
             and
             by
             diverse
             waies
             runne
             to
             the
             same
             precipice
             .
             The
             selfe
             same
             errour
             is
             formed
             in
             the
             spirit
             of
             men
             by
             diverse
             reasons
             ,
             yet
             all
             the
             causes
             of
             error
             ,
             and
             contrary
             to
             the
             holie
             Scriptures
             .
          
           
             2
             Besides
             I
             say
             that
             they
             deceiue
             themselues
             if
             they
             think
             that
             the
             Manichees
             for
             
             bad
             marriage
             vnto
             all
             ,
             they
             forbad
             it
             them
             only
             whom
             they
             called
             their
             chosen
             or
             elect
             ;
             For
             so
             did
             they
             name
             their
             pastours
             ,
             &
             such
             as
             made
             profession
             of
             a
             more
             exact
             &
             sanctified
             kinde
             of
             life
             amongst
             them
             .
             
               S.
               Austin
            
             is
             a
             witnesse
             fit
             to
             bee
             believed
             for
             this
             ,
             because
             himselfe
             was
             a
             Manichee
             at
             first
             for
             a
             long
             time
             :
             who
             in
             the
             
               second
               book
               ,
               of
               the
               manners
               of
               the
               Church
               ,
            
             and
             the
             
               Manichees
               ,
               &
            
             18.
             
             Chapt.
             brings
             in
             the
             Manichees
             speaking
             as
             our
             adversaries
             doe
             at
             this
             day
             .
             Here
             ,
             saith
             he
             ,
             
               I
               knowe
               that
               you
               wil
               exclaime
               for
               to
               make
               vs
               odious
               ,
               that
               you
               doe
               not
               forbid
               marriage
               at
               all
               ,
               since
               that
               is
               not
               forbidden
               to
               your
               hearers
               (
               which
               are
               in
               the
            
             2
             
               rancke
               amongst
               you
               )
               to
               marry
               ,
               and
               to
               haue
               wiues
               .
            
             And
             in
             his
             74.
             
             
               Epist.
               They
               which
               are
               called
               the
               hearers
               amongst
               them
               ,
               eate
               flesh
               ,
               plough
               their
               fields
               ,
               and
               haue
               wiues
               too
               if
               they
               will
               ,
               none
               of
               which
               are
               done
               by
               those
               whome
               they
               call
               their
               elect
               .
            
             Whence
             it
             also
             appears
             that
             they
             did
             not
             take
             marriage
             to
             be
             simply
             bad
             ,
             since
             they
             did
             permit
             it
             to
             their
             people
             .
             No
             more
             true
             is
             that
             which
             our
             aduersaries
             say
             that
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             doth
             not
             maintain
             that
             marriage
             is
             a
             wicked
             and
             vncleane
             thing
             in
             its
             own
             nature
             .
             For
             see
             how
             the
             Popes
             speake
             of
             it
             .
             
               Pope
               
               Innocent
               in
               his
            
             82.
             
             Distinction
             ,
             doth
             forbid
             *
             
               that
               they
               which
               dwell
               with
               their
               wiues
               should
               be
               receaued
               to
               any
               holy
               charge
               ,
               because
               it
               is
               written
               ,
               Be
               yee
               holy
               as
               I
               am
               holy
               ,
               saith
               the
               Lord.
            
             This
             Pope
             it
             seems
             thought
             that
             marriage
             could
             not
             stand
             together
             with
             sanctity
             .
             And
             by
             consequence
             that
             it
             was
             a
             prophane
             thing
             .
             And
             note
             the
             abuse
             ;
             For
             when
             God
             saith
             ,
             
               Be
               yee
               holy
            
             ,
             hee
             speakes
             to
             all
             men
             :
             but
             if
             by
             this
             commandement
             God
             did
             require
             that
             men
             should
             abstaine
             from
             their
             wiues
             ,
             what
             remaines
             there
             more
             but
             that
             there
             should
             no
             man
             bee
             married
             ?
             To
             the
             same
             purpose
             doth
             he
             produce
             the
             passage
             of
             the
             
               Apostle
               to
               Titus
               Chap.
            
             1.
             
             
               Vnto
               the
               pure
               al
               things
               are
               pure
               ,
               but
               to
               them
               that
               are
               defiled
               and
               vnbeleeuing
               ,
               is
               nothing
               pure
               .
            
             Vpon
             this
             place
             doth
             hee
             ground
             the
             
               single
               life
               of
               Priests
            
             to
             the
             end
             they
             may
             bee
             pure
             ,
             otherwise
             hee
             thinkes
             them
             
               defiled
               and
               vnbeleiuing
            
             .
             Also
             wickedly
             wresting
             that
             saying
             of
             the
             Apostle
             Rom.
             8.
             v
             8.9
             .
             against
             married
             persons
             .
             Hee
             speakes
             thus
             to
             the
             Clarks
             .
             
               They
               which
               are
               in
               the
               flesh
               cannot
               please
               God
               ;
               Now
               yee
               are
               not
               in
               the
               flesh
               but
               in
               the
               spirit
               .
            
             Could
             hee
             more
             disgrace
             married
             men
             then
             to
             saie
             they
             cannot
             please
             God.
             For
             note
             that
             the
             
             Apostle
             in
             this
             place
             speaks
             to
             al
             the
             faithfull
             in
             generall
             .
          
           
             
               Pope
               Syricius
            
             in
             the
             same
             Distinction
             speakes
             yet
             more
             disgracefully
             of
             marriage
             ;
             for
             first
             he
             ranckes
             the
             Priestes
             which
             beget
             children
             vpon
             their
             owne
             wiues
             ,
             with
             those
             that
             commit
             adulterie
             .
             
               We
               haue
               vnderstood
            
             ,
             saith
             he
             ,
             
               that
               many
               Priests
               and
               Deacons
               ,
               haue
               a
               long
               time
               after
               their
               consecration
               ,
               gotten
               children
               both
               in
               marriage
               ,
               as
               also
               by
               fornicatiō
            
             ;
             A
             little
             after
             he
             speaks
             vnto
             them
             both
             equally
             ;
             
               Let
               them
               which
               are
               giuen
               to
               fornicatiō
               ,
               &
               which
               teach
               these
               sinnes
               tel
               me
               &c.
               
            
             And
             we
             haue
             heard
             aboue
             how
             
               Pope
               Pelagius
            
             accounts
             the
             marriage
             of
             Clarkes
             for
             a
             sinne
             .
             So
             in
             the
             31.
             
             Cause
             ,
             1.
             
             
               Quest.
               Canon
               .
               Hac
               ratione
            
             ,
             the
             
               Romish
               decree
            
             saith
             ,
             that
             howbeit
             the
             Apostle
             S.
             Paul
             haue
             commanded
             second
             marriages
             ,
             yet
             according
             to
             truth
             ,
             and
             in
             reason
             it
             is
             fornication
             .
             And
             the
             vow
             of
             single
             life
             is
             by
             them
             called
             the
             vow
             of
             chastity
             ,
             as
             though
             there
             were
             no
             chastitie
             in
             marriage
             .
             
               Bellarmine
               in
               his
            
             34.
             
             
               Ch.
               of
               the
               book
               of
               Monkes
               ,
            
             stiles
             the
             
               marriage
               of
               Clarkes
               and
               Monkes
            
             by
             the
             name
             of
             sacrilege
             ,
             and
             affirmes
             that
             they
             
               sinne
               lesse
               which
               cōmit
               fornicatiō
               ,
               after
               they
               haue
               once
               taken
               a
               vow
               ,
               then
               they
               doe
               
               which
               marry
               .
            
             And
             in
             the
             19.
             
             
               Chap.
               of
               the
            
             1.
             
               booke
               of
               Clarkes
            
             ,
             he
             saith
             that
             the
             
               marriage
               of
               Saints
               is
               not
               without
               some
               pollution
               &
               vncleanesse
               .
            
             And
             indeed
             should
             this
             people
             hold
             their
             peace
             ,
             yet
             experience
             would
             tel
             as
             much
             .
             For
             who
             is
             there
             but
             knows
             ,
             that
             to
             see
             a
             Priest
             keepe
             a
             pretty
             wench
             in
             his
             house
             ,
             or
             to
             goe
             into
             a
             Stewes
             ,
             is
             thought
             but
             a
             laughing
             matter
             ,
             and
             held
             to
             be
             a
             veniall
             slip
             ?
             But
             if
             a
             Priest
             should
             be
             married
             in
             the
             sight
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             this
             would
             bee
             held
             for
             a
             prodigie
             ;
             They
             would
             say
             that
             this
             were
             the
             cause
             of
             the
             plague
             or
             the
             dearth
             that
             lay
             vpon
             them
             ;
             that
             the
             eclipse
             of
             the
             sunne
             did
             prognosticate
             this
             :
             &
             out
             of
             question
             it
             should
             bee
             recorded
             in
             their
             Chronicles
             .
             The
             former
             is
             but
             simple
             fornication
             ,
             but
             the
             other
             is
             sacrilege
             .
             For
             500.
             publicke
             brothell
             ▪
             houses
             to
             be
             in
             the
             citty
             of
             Rome
             is
             thought
             nothing
             so
             hainous
             a
             crime
             ,
             as
             that
             one
             of
             the
             Cordiliers
             should
             be
             seene
             to
             be
             married
             .
             
               Moyses
               ,
               Samuel
            
             ,
             the
             Prophet
             Esay
             ,
             and
             the
             Apostle
             
               S.
               Peter
            
             ,
             which
             were
             all
             married
             ,
             would
             be
             thought
             monsters
             now
             a
             daies
             ;
             &
             a
             man
             might
             get
             mony
             by
             leading
             them
             about
             to
             bee
             seene
             for
             strange
             sightes
             .
             By
             this
             therefore
             wee
             see
             that
             this
             prophecy
             is
             fulfilled
             every
             
             kinde
             of
             way
             .
          
           
             They
             excuse
             it
             by
             their
             vow
             ,
             and
             say
             that
             the
             marriage
             of
             clarks
             and
             monks
             is
             therefore
             sacrilege
             because
             in
             beeing
             married
             they
             breake
             their
             vow
             .
             To
             which
             I
             answere
             that
             if
             the
             marriage
             of
             clarcks
             were
             therfore
             only
             to
             be
             condēned
             ,
             they
             should
             call
             it
             by
             the
             name
             of
             faithlesnesse
             only
             ,
             or
             infidelitie
             ,
             and
             not
             of
             pollution
             as
             
               Pope
               Syricius
            
             doth
             ;
             nor
             yet
             of
             sacrilege
             as
             Bellarmine
             .
             And
             in
             trueth
             why
             is
             it
             that
             before
             they
             receiue
             any
             to
             be
             clarckes
             they
             exact
             this
             vow
             of
             them
             so
             severely
             without
             anie
             exception
             ,
             but
             that
             they
             thinke
             that
             marriage
             in
             it selfe
             is
             not
             lawfull
             for
             them
             although
             they
             tooke
             no
             vow
             .
          
           
             As
             for
             the
             necessity
             of
             keeping
             vowes
             ,
             I
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             first
             vowes
             whē
             they
             are
             good
             and
             necessarie
             ,
             may
             not
             be
             brokē
             by
             those
             we
             take
             after
             ,
             &
             I
             am
             perswaded
             they
             will
             grant
             me
             this
             .
             But
             a
             clarcke
             before
             ever
             he
             were
             a
             clarcke
             did
             he
             not
             make
             a
             vow
             and
             promise
             to
             God
             to
             keepe
             his
             commaundements
             ?
             This
             is
             that
             which
             we
             all
             promise
             at
             our
             first
             entrance
             into
             the
             Church
             ,
             and
             although
             we
             did
             not
             promise
             it
             ,
             yet
             for
             all
             that
             were
             we
             bound
             to
             keepe
             it
             .
             Now
             amongst
             the
             commandements
             of
             God
             this
             
             is
             one
             .
             *
             
               To
               avoid
               fornication
               ,
               let
               every
               man
               haue
               his
               wife
               ,
               &
               every
               woman
               her
               husband
               .
            
             If
             therefore
             any
             Monke
             be
             lustfull
             ,
             and
             it
             fare
             with
             him
             as
             it
             did
             with
             S.
             Ierome
             ,
             who
             after
             all
             his
             prayers
             and
             fastings
             ,
             did
             yet
             still
             dreame
             of
             women
             and
             burne
             with
             incontinencie
             ,
             I
             demand
             to
             which
             vow
             he
             is
             most
             bound
             ,
             either
             to
             that
             which
             hee
             made
             to
             obay
             God
             ,
             who
             commands
             all
             such
             to
             marry
             ,
             or
             to
             that
             which
             he
             made
             to
             the
             Church
             that
             hee
             would
             never
             marry
             ?
             Can
             they
             without
             impietie
             affirme
             that
             he
             must
             rather
             keepe
             the
             vowe
             made
             to
             the
             Church
             wherevnto
             he
             is
             not
             tied
             by
             God
             ,
             then
             that
             which
             he
             made
             to
             God
             ,
             &
             which
             he
             were
             bound
             to
             keepe
             although
             hee
             had
             not
             made
             it
             ?
             Especially
             seeing
             that
             *
             
               Tho.
               Aquinas
            
             ,
             and
             Cardinal
             *
             Bellarmine
             confesse
             that
             the
             single
             life
             of
             Priests
             is
             but
             by
             the
             law
             of
             man
             ,
             but
             to
             abstaine
             from
             fornication
             ,
             is
             inioined
             by
             the
             lawe
             of
             God
             ,
             why
             then
             is
             the
             law
             of
             man
             observed
             more
             religiously
             then
             the
             law
             of
             God
             ?
             Why
             are
             humane
             institutions
             more
             strictly
             kept
             thē
             Gods
             commandements
             ?
             insomuch
             that
             a
             Priest
             which
             shall
             commit
             fornication
             against
             the
             law
             of
             God
             ,
             is
             thought
             to
             haue
             sinned
             a
             great
             deale
             lesse
             then
             if
             hee
             were
             
             married
             against
             the
             promise
             made
             to
             the
             Church
             without
             the
             commaundement
             of
             God
             ?
             the
             one
             being
             called
             but
             fornicatiō
             ,
             but
             the
             other
             held
             to
             be
             sacrilege
             .
             To
             abstaine
             from
             fornication
             is
             nothing
             but
             to
             obay
             the
             law
             of
             God
             ,
             but
             never
             to
             marry
             is
             a
             
               counsell
               of
               perfection
               ,
               and
               a
               worke
               of
               supererogation
            
             ▪
             which
             sets
             the
             Monkes
             in
             Paradice
             in
             a
             far
             higher
             degree
             of
             glory
             ,
             then
             
               Abraham
               ,
               Moses
            
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             Prophets
             that
             were
             married
             could
             euer
             attaine
             vnto
             .
          
           
             But
             I
             would
             yet
             further
             be
             informed
             ,
             if
             when
             a
             man
             take
             vpon
             him
             to
             be
             a
             Monk
             and
             promise
             to
             liue
             chastly
             ,
             whether
             by
             this
             promise
             he
             doe
             not
             withall
             promise
             to
             abstain
             from
             fornicatiō
             :
             they
             would
             blush
             to
             deny
             this
             .
             It
             followes
             therefore
             that
             hee
             sinnes
             far
             more
             in
             committing
             fornication
             then
             in
             marrying
             ,
             seeing
             that
             by
             fornication
             (
             besides
             the
             violating
             of
             the
             generall
             vow
             which
             all
             men
             are
             bound
             to
             make
             to
             God
             ,
             he
             also
             breaketh
             his
             very
             monasticall
             vow
             which
             hee
             tooke
             vpon
             him
             over
             and
             aboue
             the
             commandement
             of
             God.
             To
             all
             these
             things
             our
             adversaries
             never
             answer
             directly
             ,
             nor
             speak
             they
             ought
             to
             the
             purpose
             .
             They
             make
             digressions
             in
             the
             praise
             of
             Virginitie
             ;
             But
             this
             concernes
             not
             vs
             ,
             
             who
             acknowledge
             that
             virginitie
             is
             the
             most
             cōmodious
             state
             of
             life
             to
             serue
             God
             in
             without
             straying
             ,
             that
             marriage
             hath
             its
             discommodities
             ,
             and
             as
             the
             Apostle
             saith
             ,
             1.
             
             Cor.
             7.
             
               troubles
               in
               the
               flesh
            
             ,
             especially
             in
             time
             of
             persecutiō
             .
             But
             these
             praises
             agree
             only
             to
             
               chast
               virginitie
            
             ,
             which
             doth
             not
             consist
             only
             in
             keeping
             the
             body
             from
             vncleannesse
             ,
             but
             in
             withholding
             the
             minde
             too
             from
             lust
             .
             Whosoever
             hath
             this
             perfection
             ,
             &
             besides
             hath
             discretion
             enough
             to
             guid
             his
             familie
             ,
             that
             man
             doth
             wisely
             to
             liue
             single
             .
             But
             if
             he
             be
             set
             vpon
             by
             wicked
             desires
             ,
             and
             yet
             notwithstanding
             doth
             still
             affect
             a
             single
             life
             ,
             he
             provoketh
             God
             ,
             exposeth
             himselfe
             to
             temptatiōs
             ,
             ensnares
             his
             conscience
             ,
             and
             digs
             a
             pit
             for
             himselfe
             to
             fall
             in
             .
             
               Chast
               marriage
            
             will
             never
             be
             liable
             to
             so
             many
             discommodities
             as
             incontinent
             virginitie
             ,
             for
             what
             doe
             they
             which
             liue
             in
             this
             state
             ,
             but
             chew
             the
             bit
             it
             secret
             ,
             thinking
             that
             condition
             of
             life
             most
             sweet
             and
             happy
             which
             they
             are
             denyed
             to
             liue
             ,
             desiring
             that
             which
             they
             fly
             ,
             hauing
             their
             thoughts
             defiled
             with
             vnchast
             imaginations
             ,
             and
             yet
             notwithstanding
             all
             this
             resolued
             not
             to
             follow
             the
             counsell
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             to
             abstaine
             from
             vsing
             the
             remedies
             
             which
             hee
             hath
             prescribed
             .
             This
             is
             a
             vice
             for
             which
             Philosophie
             could
             never
             finde
             a
             name
             ,
             to
             burne
             with
             lust
             ,
             and
             whilst
             wee
             are
             in
             this
             taking
             ,
             to
             vow
             to
             God
             that
             wee
             will
             flie
             from
             the
             remedies
             that
             hee
             hath
             ordained
             against
             it
             ;
             which
             is
             all
             one
             as
             if
             a
             man
             were
             sicke
             ,
             and
             should
             promise
             God
             that
             he
             would
             take
             no
             Phisicke
             ,
             there
             is
             rashnesse
             in
             this
             mixed
             together
             with
             obdurat
             superstition
             .
          
           
             To
             vrge
             this
             yet
             further
             we
             aske
             if
             this
             continent
             virginitie
             be
             the
             gift
             of
             God
             ,
             or
             whether
             it
             be
             in
             our
             owne
             power
             ,
             Bellarmine
             answers
             that
             
               it
               is
               truely
               the
               gift
               of
               God
            
             and
             yet
             neverthelesse
             that
             it
             is
             
               in
               our
               owne
               power
            
             .
             
             Which
             is
             a
             plaine
             contradiction
             ;
             for
             if
             God
             giue
             it
             vs
             then
             is
             it
             not
             in
             our
             power
             ,
             seeing
             that
             wee
             doe
             not
             carry
             the
             key
             of
             his
             gifts
             ,
             and
             that
             his
             goods
             are
             not
             at
             our
             disposall
             .
             It
             is
             true
             indeed
             that
             wee
             aske
             the
             grace
             of
             God
             freely
             ;
             &
             vse
             it
             with
             out
             constraint
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             God
             that
             maketh
             vs
             disposed
             to
             aske
             it
             ,
             and
             giues
             vs
             the
             will
             to
             vse
             it
             .
             *
             
               It
               is
               hee
               which
               worketh
               both
               the
               will
               and
               deed
               in
               vs
               ,
               even
               of
               his
               good
               pleasure
               .
            
             Seeing
             then
             it
             is
             the
             gift
             of
             God
             ,
             when
             any
             man
             doth
             aske
             the
             gift
             of
             continuing
             in
             a
             single
             life
             without
             desire
             of
             marying
             ,
             doth
             
             God
             stil
             heare
             him
             ?
             And
             where
             is
             then
             the
             promise
             that
             God
             will
             heare
             him
             as
             concerning
             this
             .
             For
             cōfidence
             of
             prayer
             must
             bee
             grounded
             on
             some
             promise
             of
             God.
             Bellarmine
             cannot
             produce
             any
             promise
             ,
             only
             he
             brings
             vs
             ,
             as
             his
             fashion
             is
             ,
             a
             ridiculous
             distinctiō
             ;
             *
             saying
             ,
             that
             God
             giues
             all
             men
             a
             possibility
             of
             containing
             themselues
             ,
             but
             that
             hee
             giues
             not
             vnto
             all
             men
             actually
             to
             containe
             themselues
             ,
             but
             only
             to
             such
             as
             he
             thinkes
             good
             .
             As
             who
             should
             say
             ,
             that
             God
             gaue
             one
             power
             to
             be
             an
             Emperor
             ,
             but
             yet
             did
             not
             grant
             that
             he
             should
             be
             an
             Emperour
             ;
             that
             God
             gaue
             a
             man
             power
             to
             bee
             wise
             ,
             but
             yet
             did
             not
             graunt
             that
             he
             should
             be
             wise
             .
             But
             to
             what
             ende
             serues
             that
             power
             ,
             that
             is
             neuer
             reduced
             in
             to
             act
             ?
             For
             our
             question
             was
             not
             ,
             whether
             God
             gaue
             the
             power
             or
             the
             act
             ;
             but
             whether
             he
             gaue
             the
             act
             of
             being
             continent
             to
             all
             men
             ?
             Hee
             confesseth
             therefore
             that
             hee
             giues
             not
             this
             but
             to
             some
             particulars
             ;
             and
             that
             to
             be
             actually
             continent
             is
             a
             guift
             of
             god
             that
             is
             not
             given
             to
             all
             .
             If
             then
             there
             be
             a
             Monke
             ,
             to
             whom
             God
             hath
             not
             givē
             the
             gift
             of
             continency
             ,
             and
             which
             burnes
             with
             inward
             lust
             ,
             who
             shall
             tell
             you
             himselfe
             ,
             that
             after
             so
             many
             
               Pater
               Nosters
            
             said
             ,
             
             and
             often
             fastings
             ,
             hee
             is
             yet
             still
             tempted
             with
             the
             spirit
             of
             fornication
             ;
             I
             woulde
             knowe
             whether
             such
             a
             one
             bee
             to
             followe
             the
             Apostles
             counsell
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             marry
             ,
             or
             else
             to
             continue
             in
             his
             former
             incontinencie
             ?
             But
             it
             ill
             befits
             these
             fellowes
             to
             talke
             of
             such
             things
             .
             For
             as
             it
             ill
             beseems
             a
             slaue
             to
             discourse
             of
             liberty
             ,
             or
             a
             man
             with
             his
             belly
             ful
             to
             preach
             fasting
             &
             pennance
             :
             so
             also
             is
             it
             ill
             beseeming
             these
             squires
             that
             liue
             so
             vnchastly
             ,
             to
             dispute
             of
             chastitie
             .
             For
             their
             liues
             speak
             against
             them
             ,
             &
             their
             rules
             are
             refuted
             by
             their
             actions
             .
             Hardly
             would
             a
             man
             beleeue
             them
             since
             they
             doe
             not
             beleeue
             themselues
             ,
             and
             since
             they
             make
             a
             vow
             of
             chastity
             ,
             that
             so
             they
             may
             liue
             the
             more
             dissolutely
             .
             They
             speake
             against
             nature
             ,
             whilst
             they
             are
             most
             giuen
             to
             nature
             ;
             (
             to
             say
             nothing
             of
             their
             pleasures
             contrary
             to
             nature
             .
             )
             Let
             them
             therefore
             first
             learne
             to
             liue
             ,
             before
             they
             goe
             about
             to
             dispute
             ;
             and
             let
             the
             Covent
             go
             no
             more
             to
             the
             Stewes
             ,
             nor
             the
             Stewes
             bee
             kept
             any
             more
             in
             the
             Covēt
             ,
             if
             they
             would
             not
             haue
             vs
             beleeue
             that
             continency
             is
             a
             gift
             ,
             which
             God
             giues
             not
             to
             such
             as
             correct
             his
             word
             .
             Or
             if
             every
             one
             may
             haue
             it
             that
             will
             ,
             the
             more
             to
             blame
             they
             for
             refusing
             
             it
             ,
             since
             it
             was
             in
             their
             power
             to
             haue
             had
             it
             .
          
           
             Nor
             let
             them
             speake
             any
             more
             to
             vs
             of
             these
             vowes
             ,
             which
             are
             a
             yoke
             of
             yron
             ,
             and
             a
             snare
             to
             intangle
             weake
             soules
             .
             For
             they
             omit
             the
             first
             point
             ,
             which
             is
             ,
             that
             they
             should
             knowe
             before
             they
             take
             any
             vowe
             ,
             whether
             it
             be
             good
             and
             lawful
             ;
             seeing
             that
             if
             it
             be
             not
             lawfull
             to
             make
             ,
             it
             is
             vnlawfull
             to
             keep
             .
             Things
             which
             are
             bad
             to
             promise
             ,
             are
             worse
             yet
             to
             performe
             .
             Virginity
             is
             a
             good
             thing
             ,
             &
             honest
             ,
             but
             for
             a
             man
             to
             tie
             himselfe
             thereto
             ,
             is
             a
             token
             of
             rashnesse
             &
             ignorance
             of
             his
             owne
             infirmity
             .
          
           
             For
             vowes
             are
             thē
             good
             whē
             they
             haue
             these
             3
             conditions
             ,
             1.
             
             If
             the
             things
             vowed
             be
             good
             .
             2.
             
             If
             they
             bee
             such
             as
             we
             know
             to
             be
             in
             our
             owne
             power
             .
             3.
             
             If
             we
             vow
             them
             willingly
             and
             wittingly
             .
             None
             of
             al
             which
             are
             found
             in
             the
             vowes
             of
             chastity
             which
             the
             Monckes
             and
             Clarckes
             take
             ;
             For
             to
             liue
             single
             is
             good
             ,
             but
             not
             for
             all
             ,
             but
             only
             for
             such
             as
             haue
             the
             gift
             of
             continency
             :
             it
             is
             good
             ,
             but
             not
             in
             that
             degree
             of
             goodnes
             as
             they
             would
             haue
             it
             ,
             making
             it
             a
             kinde
             of
             perfection
             aboue
             the
             law
             ,
             and
             a
             worke
             of
             supererogation
             whereby
             we
             render
             God
             more
             then
             we
             owe
             him
             .
             It
             is
             hard
             that
             that
             
             which
             is
             the
             occasion
             of
             so
             much
             vncleannesse
             should
             be
             a
             work
             of
             more
             worth
             thē
             to
             loue
             God
             with
             all
             our
             hearts
             .
             Or
             that
             that
             should
             be
             a
             worke
             of
             supererogation
             ,
             which
             if
             every
             one
             kept
             ,
             the
             church
             would
             ere
             long
             bee
             abolisht
             from
             the
             face
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             2.
             
             That
             it
             is
             not
             in
             our
             power
             we
             haue
             shewed
             already
             ,
             &
             their
             liues
             which
             make
             this
             vow
             ,
             shew
             their
             vnablenesse
             to
             perform
             it
             .
             3.
             
             The
             monastical
             vow
             is
             not
             alwaies
             made
             wittingly
             ,
             and
             willingly
             .
             Many
             there
             be
             that
             enter
             into
             it
             through
             choler
             ,
             some
             through
             despaire
             ,
             and
             others
             out
             of
             ignorance
             ,
             and
             in
             their
             tender
             age
             when
             they
             doe
             not
             knowe
             what
             the
             motions
             of
             lust
             meane
             .
             A
             father
             will
             say
             ,
             how
             shall
             I
             marry
             all
             my
             daughters
             ,
             how
             shal
             I
             devide
             my
             goods
             amongst
             so
             many
             sonnes
             ?
             I
             must
             needs
             place
             my
             lame
             sonne
             in
             a
             monastery
             ,
             &
             since
             he
             is
             fit
             for
             no
             other
             calling
             ,
             make
             him
             a
             man
             of
             the
             church
             .
             It
             is
             a
             rare
             thing
             and
             seldome
             seene
             to
             offer
             a
             lamb
             without
             spot
             to
             God.
             And
             these
             poore
             children
             being
             come
             to
             yeares
             they
             finde
             themselues
             taken
             in
             the
             net
             ,
             into
             which
             they
             entred
             at
             first
             as
             it
             were
             reioicing
             ,
             but
             liue
             therein
             sorrowing
             ,
             seeing
             themselues
             caught
             ,
             with
             out
             all
             hope
             of
             ever
             being
             set
             at
             liberty
             .
          
           
           
             Seeing
             then
             it
             is
             better
             for
             the
             governement
             of
             our
             life
             to
             follow
             sacred
             and
             sure
             rules
             ,
             then
             rash
             and
             indiscreet
             vowes
             ;
             and
             not
             so
             much
             to
             keepe
             that
             to
             which
             wee
             haue
             bound
             our selues
             ,
             as
             that
             to
             which
             we
             are
             bound
             by
             God
             ,
             we
             will
             conclude
             this
             discourse
             ,
             with
             the
             rule
             of
             the
             Apostle
             .
             1.
             
             
               Tim.
               chap.
            
             3.
             
             
               Let
               a
               bishop
               therefore
               be
               vnreproueable
               ,
               the
               husband
               of
               one
               wife
               ,
               ruling
               his
               owne
               house
               honestly
               ,
               having
               his
               children
               vnder
               obedience
               with
               all
               reverence
               .
            
          
           
             The
             common
             evasion
             is
             ,
             that
             
               S.
               Paule
            
             meanes
             only
             that
             a
             Bishop
             must
             not
             haue
             had
             but
             one
             wife
             before
             his
             election
             into
             that
             charge
             ,
             but
             that
             after
             his
             election
             he
             is
             to
             haue
             none
             .
             Hierome
             a
             professed
             enemie
             of
             marriage
             vnderstandes
             it
             thus
             .
             They
             interpret
             these
             words
             therefore
             ,
             
               Let
               a
               Bishop
               be
            
             ,
             by
             these
             ,
             
               Let
               a
               Bishop
               haue
               beene
            
             .
             By
             their
             reckoning
             the
             Apostle
             should
             speak
             thus
             .
             
               Let
               such
               a
               one
               be
               chosen
               to
               bee
               a
               Bishop
               that
               hath
               beene
               irreproueable
               ,
               the
               husbvnde
               of
               one
               wife
               ,
               watching
               ,
               temperate
               ,
               modest
            
             ;
             or
             ,
             
               but
               let
               him
               now
               be
               so
               no
               longer
            
             ;
             so
             doe
             they
             make
             the
             Apostle
             the
             teacher
             of
             vices
             ,
             and
             the
             entrance
             into
             a
             Bishoprick
             to
             be
             a
             ceasing
             from
             vertue
             .
             But
             though
             it
             were
             harde
             for
             
               S.
               Paul
            
             to
             foresee
             that
             any
             should
             wrest
             
             his
             words
             so
             strangely
             ,
             yet
             ,
             as
             it
             seemes
             ,
             he
             meant
             purposely
             to
             put
             the
             matter
             out
             of
             controversie
             ,
             by
             that
             which
             he
             annexeth
             in
             the
             12
             verse
             .
             
               Let
               the
               deacons
               be
               the
               husbāds
               of
               one
               wife
               ,
               and
               such
               as
               can
               rule
               their
               childrē
               well
               ,
               and
               their
               owne
               housholds
            
             ;
             where
             these
             words
             
               Let
               them
               be
            
             ,
             go
             immediatly
             before
             ,
             and
             are
             ioined
             only
             to
             the
             word
             ,
             husbands
             .
             And
             ,
             which
             is
             more
             ,
             in
             the
             11.
             verse
             ,
             he
             ordaineth
             that
             
               their
               wiues
               be
               honest
               ,
               not
               evill
               speakers
               ,
               but
               sober
               ,
               and
               faithfull
               in
               al
               things
               .
            
             Who
             would
             thinke
             that
             
               S.
               Paule
            
             did
             instruct
             the
             women
             that
             had
             been
             the
             wiues
             of
             Bishops
             ,
             but
             not
             such
             as
             were
             ▪
             His
             meaning
             therefore
             is
             that
             Bishops
             ,
             and
             Deacons
             should
             not
             be
             Digamists
             ,
             &
             that
             they
             should
             neither
             in
             former
             times
             haue
             had
             ,
             nor
             at
             the
             present
             haue
             but
             one
             wife
             at
             once
             ;
             because
             then
             it
             was
             the
             custome
             that
             man
             and
             wife
             were
             often
             separated
             by
             divorce
             for
             other
             causes
             besides
             adulterie
             ,
             &
             vpon
             light
             occasions
             ,
             and
             afterward
             marryed
             againe
             as
             they
             thought
             best
             ,
             which
             the
             Apostle
             
               S.
               Paule
            
             doth
             forbid
             ,
             not
             onlie
             to
             Bishops
             and
             Deacons
             ,
             but
             to
             such
             *
             widdowes
             also
             as
             served
             in
             the
             church
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             no
             man
             might
             say
             that
             they
             had
             two
             husbands
             ,
             the
             one
             with
             them
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             
             divorced
             .
          
           
             Wherein
             the
             truth
             is
             so
             cleere
             ,
             and
             the
             liberty
             of
             expounding
             being
             ,
             by
             
               having
               beene
            
             ,
             so
             intolerable
             ,
             that
             Bellarmine
             himselfe
             ,
             (
             howsoever
             he
             threaten
             as
             though
             he
             would
             contest
             )
             is
             faine
             to
             yeeld
             vnto
             it
             ,
             in
             the
             21.
             chap.
             of
             his
             1.
             booke
             of
             Clerckes
             ,
             in
             these
             words
             ,
             
               Chrysostome
               and
               the
               other
               fathers
               vpon
               this
               place
               teach
               that
               Paule
               made
               no
               law
               that
               bishops
               should
               haue
               wiues
               ,
               but
               only
               that
               they
               should
               not
               haue
               ,
               nor
               haue
               had
               but
               one
               .
               Agreeable
               to
               Pope
               Leos
               expositiō
               in
               his
            
             85.
             
             
               Epistle
               .
               The
               Apostle
               bids
               vs
               t●
               choose
               a
               bishop
               that
               is
               knowne
               to
               haue
               beene
               marryed
               ,
               or
               to
               be
               marryed
               but
               to
               one
               wife
               .
            
          
           
             This
             so
             manifest
             a
             truth
             ,
             and
             so
             forcible
             an
             evidence
             ,
             hath
             by
             force
             extorted
             confessions
             frō
             our
             adversaries
             which
             are
             inserted
             in
             the
             Romish
             decrees
             .
             In
             the
             23.
             
             Distinction
             about
             the
             governement
             of
             Clerckes
             ,
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             
               Let
               them
               labour
               to
               preserue
               the
               chastitie
               of
               their
               bodies
               inviolable
               ,
               or
               at
               the
               most
               let
               them
               marry
               but
               once
            
             ;
             and
             in
             the
             26.
             cause
             quaest
             .
             2.
             
             
               The
               marriage
               of
               Priests
               ,
               and
               of
               cousens
               ,
               is
               forbidden
               neither
               by
               the
               Legall
               ,
               nor
               Evangelical
               ,
               nor
               Apostocall
               authority
               ,
               neverthelesse
               it
               is
               absolutelie
               forbidden
               by
               the
               authority
               of
               the
               Church
               .
            
             
             Where
             by
             the
             Church
             he
             vnderstands
             the
             Romish
             church
             .
             For
             in
             the
             Aethiopian
             Church
             ,
             which
             containes
             17.
             realmes
             ,
             the
             Monckes
             are
             married
             ,
             and
             are
             labouring
             and
             handy
             crafts
             men
             ;
             and
             in
             the
             Greeke
             Church
             the
             Priests
             and
             Deacons
             are
             married
             once
             .
             Witnesse
             the
             Canon
             Aliter
             in
             the
             32.
             
             Distinction
             .
             The
             tradition
             of
             the
             East
             church
             is
             divers
             frō
             this
             of
             the
             church
             of
             Rome
             .
             For
             their
             Priests
             ,
             Deacons
             ,
             and
             Subdeacōs
             are
             marryed
             :
             But
             in
             this
             church
             no
             priest
             frō
             a
             subdeacon
             to
             a
             bishop
             hath
             any
             liberty
             to
             marry
             .
             In
             the
             very
             same
             Distinction
             is
             the
             iudgement
             of
             the
             councell
             of
             Nice
             set
             downe
             in
             these
             words
             ,
             concerning
             the
             resistance
             made
             by
             Paphnutius
             bishop
             of
             
               Thebais
               .
               Now
               Paphnutius
               the
               confessor
               withstood
               this
               ,
               shewing
               that
               marriage
               was
               honorable
               ,
               and
               saying
               that
               it
               was
               chastitie
               for
               a
               man
               to
               liue
               with
               his
               owne
               wife
               .
               Wherfore
               hee
               advised
               the
               councell
               not
               to
               establish
               such
               a
               law
               ;
               affirming
               that
               it
               was
               a
               matter
               of
               importance
               ,
               and
               that
               it
               would
               bee
               an
               occasion
               either
               to
               them
               or
               their
               wiues
               of
               fornication
               .
            
             And
             this
             was
             Paphnutius
             his
             opinion
             although
             himselfe
             were
             not
             married
             ,
             whose
             advise
             was
             approved
             of
             by
             the
             Synod
             .
             The
             like
             is
             reported
             by
             Socrates
             in
             his
             1.
             booke
             
             and
             8.
             
             Chap.
             &
             by
             Sozomene
             in
             his
             1.
             book
             23.
             
             Chap.
             &
             by
             
               Nicephorus
               Callistus
            
             in
             the
             8.
             book
             of
             his
             history
             ,
             Chap.
             19.
             and
             by
             the
             actes
             of
             the
             councell
             of
             Nice
             written
             by
             
               Gelasius
               Cysicensus
            
             ,
             all
             which
             do
             not
             onlie
             speake
             of
             suffering
             Priests
             to
             haue
             wiues
             ,
             but
             graunt
             them
             the
             enioining
             of
             the
             marriage
             bed
             ,
             as
             honest
             and
             lawfull
             .
             Which
             I
             haue
             therefore
             the
             longer
             insisted
             vpon
             ,
             because
             there
             be
             some
             that
             haue
             mard
             this
             history
             ,
             and
             that
             tell
             it
             otherwise
             .
             In
             the
             56.
             
             Distinction
             ,
             in
             the
             Canon
             Osius
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             greate
             bedroll
             of
             bishops
             reckoned
             vp
             ,
             which
             were
             the
             sonnes
             of
             bishops
             ,
             Priests
             ,
             or
             Deacons
             ;
             And
             least
             a
             man
             should
             think
             that
             they
             were
             begotten
             before
             their
             fathers
             had
             taken
             holy
             orders
             ,
             a
             little
             after
             in
             the
             same
             Distinction
             ,
             the
             exposition
             is
             annexed
             in
             these
             wordes
             .
             
               When
               we
               reade
               aboue
               that
               Priests
               children
               haue
               beene
               made
               Popes
               ,
               we
               must
               not
               thinke
               that
               they
               were
               begot
               by
               fornication
               ,
               but
               by
               lawfull
               marriage
               ,
               which
               ,
               before
               this
               prohibition
               ,
               was
               permitted
               vnto
               all
               ,
               and
               is
               at
               this
               day
               (
               as
               all
               know
               )
               suffered
               in
               the
               East
               Church
               .
            
          
           
             Hence
             come
             these
             Canons
             of
             the
             auncient
             Councels
             .
             The
             4
             Canon
             of
             the
             counsell
             of
             Gangres
             is
             this
             .
             
               If
               any
               one
               shall
               put
               a
               
               difference
               betweene
               a
               Priest
               that
               is
               married
               ,
               as
               though
               it
               were
               not
               lawfull
               to
               receaue
               the
               sacrament
               at
               his
               hands
               when
               he
               shal
               serue
               it
               ,
               Let
               him
               be
               an
               Anathema
               .
            
             A
             Canon
             which
             Bellarmine
             hath
             falsified
             in
             the
             21.
             
             Chap.
             of
             his
             first
             book
             of
             Clerkes
             ,
             having
             turned
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             by
             
               Qui
               vxorem
               habuit
            
             ,
             which
             had
             a
             wife
             ,
             whereas
             it
             signifieth
             ,
             
               Qui
               vxorem
               duxit
            
             ,
             which
             hath
             married
             a
             wife
             ,
             that
             is
             as
             much
             to
             say
             ,
             which
             is
             marryed
             .
             Witnesse
             the
             vulgar
             translation
             allowed
             of
             by
             the
             Councell
             of
             Trent
             ,
             which
             translates
             the
             10.
             verse
             of
             the
             7.
             
             Chap.
             of
             the
             1
             to
             the
             
               Corinthians
               ;
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               ijs
               autem
               qui
               matrionio
               iuncti
               sunt
               ,
            
             to
             those
             which
             are
             marryed
             ,
             and
             not
             as
             
               Bellarmine
               ,
               Iis
               qui
               vxorem
               habuerunt
               ,
            
             to
             those
             which
             haue
             beene
             marryed
             .
          
           
             The
             6.
             
             Generall
             councell
             assembled
             at
             Trulla
             to
             make
             Canons
             hath
             an
             expresse
             ordinaunce
             herevpon
             in
             the
             13.
             
             Canon
             in
             these
             words
             .
             
               For
               as
               much
               as
               we
               haue
               vnderstood
               ,
               that
               it
               hath
               beene
               ordained
               for
               a
               rule
               in
               the
               Church
               of
               Rome
               ,
               that
               whosoever
               will
               bee
               a
               Deacon
               or
               Priect
               ,
               must
               first
               protest
               that
               he
               will
               never
               any
               more
               after
               that
               haue
               to
               doe
               with
               his
               wife
               :
               we
               ,
               following
               the
               Apostolicall
               order
               &
               discipline
               ,
               will
               that
               the
               lawfull
               marriages
               
               of
               Clergy
               men
               be
               for
               ever
               availeable
               ,
               by
               no
               means
               separating
               them
               frō
               their
               wiues
               ,
               nor
               forbidding
               them
               to
               come
               togither
               at
               convenient
               times
               .
               Wherefore
               if
               any
               one
               shall
               be
               thought
               worthy
               to
               be
               chosen
               a
               subdeacon
               ,
               deacon
               ,
               or
               a
               Priest
               ,
               let
               him
               not
               be
               hindred
               from
               mounting
               to
               this
               degree
               because
               he
               dwels
               togither
               with
               his
               lawfull
               wife
               ,
               and
               let
               it
               not
               bee
               exacted
               of
               him
               in
               the
               day
               of
               his
               election
               to
               renounce
               the
               cōpany
               of
               his
               lawfull
               spowse
               .
               Least
               by
               this
               we
               be
               constrained
               to
               disgrace
               marriage
               ,
               which
               was
               first
               instituted
               by
               God
               ,
               and
               blessed
               by
               his
               presence
               ,
               seeing
               that
               the
               Gospel
               cries
               out
               that
               no
               man
               shoulde
               separate
               that
               which
               God
               hath
               ioined
               togither
            
             ;
             This
             ,
             vnder
             the
             paine
             of
             excommunication
             &
             deposition
             :
             and
             all
             against
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             ,
             expresly
             named
             in
             the
             Canon
             .
             It
             is
             true
             indeede
             that
             Bellarmine
             incensed
             against
             the
             Councel
             ,
             cals
             it
             profane
             ,
             in
             his
             1.
             booke
             of
             Clarkes
             19.
             
             Chap.
             so
             defaming
             and
             disgracing
             these
             ancient
             coūcels
             as
             often
             as
             they
             shall
             speake
             against
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             .
             But
             he
             did
             not
             marke
             how
             withall
             he
             condemned
             Pope
             Adrian
             ,
             which
             allowes
             of
             this
             6.
             
             Councell
             togither
             with
             all
             the
             Canons
             thereof
             :
             which
             approbation
             is
             inserted
             in
             the
             Decretals
             in
             the
             third
             Distinction
             
             of
             Consecration
             .
          
           
             To
             this
             councell
             doth
             Iustinians
             constitutiō
             agree
             in
             the
             Code
             ,
             &
             2.
             law
             
               De
               Episcopis
               &
               Clericis
            
             :
             the
             wordes
             whereof
             are
             these
             .
             
               Let
               not
               clergie
               men
               be
               cōpelled
               to
               finde
               post
               horses
               ,
               nor
               carts
               for
               common
               carriages
               ,
               and
               let
               not
               their
               goods
               and
               substance
               be
               taxed
               for
               this
               purpose
               .
               Let
               all
               Clarcks
               enioy
               this
               priviledge
               ,
               so
               that
               neither
               their
               wiues
               nor
               their
               children
               be
               subiect
               to
               this
               burden
               .
            
          
           
             Wee
             haue
             heard
             a
             multitude
             of
             ancient
             authors
             herevpon
             ,
             which
             teach
             that
             the
             Apostles
             were
             marryed
             .
             If
             we
             beleeue
             Platina
             in
             the
             life
             of
             Cletus
             the
             1.
             
             
               S.
               Luke
            
             was
             marryed
             ,
             and
             had
             his
             wife
             in
             
               Bythynia
               .
               Athanasius
            
             towards
             the
             end
             of
             his
             epistle
             to
             Dracōtius
             ,
             shews
             the
             custome
             in
             his
             daies
             .
             
               Many
               bishops
            
             ,
             saith
             he
             ,
             
               are
               not
               marryed
               ,
               on
               the
               contrary
               there
               bee
               Monckes
               that
               are
               the
               fathers
               of
               childrē
               ;
               as
               on
               the
               other
               side
               we
               haue
               knowne
               bishops
               that
               haue
               had
               children
               ,
               and
               Moncks
               that
               haue
               had
               none
               :
            
             as
             who
             should
             say
             ,
             that
             in
             this
             there
             was
             no
             law
             nor
             necessitie
             imposed
             .
          
           
             Socrates
             in
             the
             22.
             chap.
             of
             his
             5.
             booke
             .
             Many
             (
             saith
             hee
             )
             St.
             Gregorie
             of
             
               Nysse
               ,
               brother
               to
               Basilius
            
             ,
             was
             
             married
             ;
             of
             whom
             Nicephorus
             speaks
             thus
             in
             the
             11.
             
             Chap.
             of
             his
             11.
             booke
             .
             
               Although
               he
               had
               a
               wife
               ,
               in
               other
               things
               he
               was
               not
               inferiour
               to
               his
               brother
               .
               Sozomene
            
             in
             the
             11.
             
             Chap.
             of
             his
             1.
             booke
             speakes
             thus
             of
             Saint
             
               Spiridion
               .
               Hee
               was
               a
               plaine
               man
               hauing
               wife
               and
               children
               ,
               but
               this
               made
               him
               never
               the
               worse
               for
               his
               divine
               function
               .
               Mantuan
            
             speakes
             after
             this
             manner
             of
             
               S.
               Hilarie
            
             in
             the
             first
             booke
             of
             his
             Fasti.
             
          
           
             
               Non
               nocuit
               tibi
               progenies
               ,
               non
               obstitit
               vxor
            
             
               Legitimo
               coniuncta
               thoro
               ,
               non
               horruit
               illa
            
             
               Tempestate
               Deus
               thalamos
               ,
               cunabula
               ,
               taedas
            
             
               Thy
               children
               did
               not
               marre
               thy
               course
               of
               life
               ,
            
             
               Nor
               wast
               thou
               made
               the
               worser
               for
               thy
               wife
               ,
            
             
               God
               likt
               the
               marriage
               bed
               well
               till
               of
               late
               ,
            
             
               But
               what
               he
               thē
               did
               like
               ,
               he
               now
               doth
               hate
            
          
           
             And
             Synesius
             Bishop
             of
             Cyrene
             ,
             was
             admitted
             Bishop
             ,
             although
             hee
             tolde
             them
             plainely
             that
             hee
             would
             not
             therefore
             depart
             from
             his
             wife
             ,
             and
             would
             haue
             as
             many
             children
             by
             her
             as
             he
             could
             .
             
               S.
               Hierome
            
             himselfe
             a
             mortall
             enimie
             of
             marriage
             ,
             yet
             neverthelesse
             (
             when
             hee
             is
             out
             of
             coller
             against
             Iovinian
             )
             allowes
             of
             the
             marriage
             of
             Bishops
             .
             For
             in
             his
             Epistle
             to
             Oceanus
             ,
             
             he
             defendes
             Carterius
             a
             Bishop
             of
             Spaine
             which
             had
             a
             second
             wife
             ,
             against
             a
             certain
             lewd
             fellowe
             ,
             which
             being
             a
             fornicator
             spoke
             il
             of
             Carterius
             his
             marriage
             .
             He
             saith
             therefore
             .
             
               Carterius
               hath
               desired
               to
               haue
               children
               by
               his
               wife
               ;
               but
               thou
               by
               giuing
               thy
               body
               to
               a
               queane
               hast
               destroyed
               thy
               race
               .
               He
               hid
               himselfe
               in
               the
               secret
               corners
               of
               his
               chāber
               ,
               whilst
               he
               served
               nature
               ,
               and
               the
               blessing
               of
               God
               ,
               saying
               ,
               encrease
               and
               multiply
               ,
               &
               fill
               the
               earth
               ;
               but
               thou
               serving
               thy
               beastly
               lust
               in
               open
               places
               wert
               detested
               by
               the
               beholders
               .
               Hee
               concealed
               a
               lawfull
               action
               by
               an
               honest
               modesty
               ;
               but
               thou
               hast
               exposed
               thy
               vnlawfull
               actions
               to
               the
               sight
               of
               all
               men
               .
               For
               him
               it
               is
               written
               ,
               that
               marriage
               is
               honorable
               ,
               and
               the
               bed
               vndefiled
               ;
               but
               for
               thee
               ,
               that
               God
               shall
               iudge
               fornicators
               and
               adulterers
               .
            
             And
             the
             same
             Hierome
             against
             Iovinian
             ,
             where
             hee
             speaketh
             so
             disgracefully
             of
             marriage
             ,
             doth
             yet
             acknowledge
             that
             in
             his
             time
             Priestes
             were
             married
             .
             
               If
               it
               be
               said
            
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             
               that
               Samuel
               ,
               which
               was
               brought
               vp
               at
               the
               Tabernacle
               ,
               had
               a
               wife
               ,
               how
               doth
               this
               preiudice
               virginitie
               ?
               As
               if
               there
               were
               not
               at
               this
               day
               many
               Priests
               that
               are
               married
               :
               seeing
               that
               the
               Apostle
               describes
               a
               Bishop
               to
               be
               the
               husband
               of
               one
               wife
               ,
               &c.
               Leo
            
             the
             1.
             
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             in
             
             his
             85.
             
             Epistle
             speaking
             of
             the
             Apostles
             Commandement
             of
             choosing
             a
             Bishop
             ,
             which
             either
             is
             ,
             or
             hath
             beene
             the
             husband
             but
             of
             one
             wife
             ,
             saith
             that
             
               this
               Commandemēt
               was
               alwaies
               observed
               so
               religiously
               that
               the
               same
               condition
               was
               held
               fit
               to
               bee
               kept
               in
               choosing
               the
               wife
               of
               a
               Priest.
               
            
          
           
             Yet
             (
             notwithstanding
             al
             this
             )
             I
             doe
             not
             deny
             ,
             but
             that
             many
             holy
             men
             in
             times
             past
             ,
             haue
             devoted
             themselues
             to
             a
             single
             life
             ;
             thinking
             marriage
             a
             state
             of
             life
             not
             so
             agreeable
             with
             a
             Bishops
             calling
             as
             virginity
             .
             Wee
             may
             see
             many
             examples
             for
             this
             in
             
               Chrysostome
               ,
               Epiphanius
               ,
               Hierome
            
             ,
             and
             Ambrose
             .
             And
             which
             is
             more
             ,
             Origen
             that
             hee
             might
             liue
             chastly
             did
             vtterly
             disable
             himselfe
             for
             being
             fit
             for
             the
             act
             of
             generation
             ;
             whether
             it
             were
             that
             he
             did
             geld
             himselfe
             ,
             or
             vse
             some
             other
             means
             to
             mortifie
             his
             members
             .
             And
             indeed
             ,
             as
             the
             Coūcels
             before
             mentioned
             doe
             permit
             a
             Priest
             to
             take
             a
             wife
             ,
             and
             to
             enioy
             her
             as
             hee
             did
             before
             he
             was
             a
             Priest
             ;
             so
             I
             confesse
             it
             was
             the
             most
             vsual
             custome
             for
             Priests
             to
             marry
             before
             they
             tooke
             orders
             ,
             it
             being
             the
             common
             fashion
             at
             this
             day
             in
             Greece
             for
             their
             Priests
             to
             take
             wiues
             some
             few
             daies
             before
             their
             ordination
             ,
             and
             those
             once
             
             dead
             ,
             never
             to
             marry
             againe
             ;
             but
             to
             bee
             married
             after
             their
             ordination
             this
             was
             vnvsuall
             .
             Vntill
             at
             last
             the
             Councell
             of
             Neocaesarea
             which
             is
             but
             provinciall
             ,
             did
             in
             the
             1.
             
             Canon
             forbid
             Priests
             ever
             to
             marry
             after
             their
             admission
             .
             These
             were
             yet
             but
             the
             seeds
             of
             error
             ;
             to
             which
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             not
             encrease
             ,
             the
             Councels
             held
             in
             the
             East
             ,
             haue
             made
             Canons
             cleane
             contrary
             .
             But
             in
             the
             West
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             in
             the
             Latin
             Church
             ,
             which
             is
             called
             the
             Roman
             ,
             the
             Romish
             Bishops
             hauing
             found
             by
             experience
             ,
             that
             virginitie
             was
             the
             fittest
             state
             for
             the
             preserving
             of
             Church
             goods
             ,
             &
             of
             maintaining
             their
             authority
             ouer
             the
             Clergie
             ,
             did
             willingly
             admit
             of
             it
             ,
             and
             by
             all
             meanes
             seeke
             to
             vphold
             it
             .
             And
             this
             evill
             ,
             being
             increast
             amongst
             the
             
               Gaules
               ,
               Salvian
            
             a
             Bishop
             of
             Marsilia
             ,
             which
             lived
             in
             the
             time
             of
             Clowis
             as
             then
             an
             heathen
             ,
             cōplaineth
             much
             of
             it
             ,
             towards
             the
             later
             ende
             of
             his
             5.
             booke
             of
             providence
             ;
             where
             hee
             speakes
             after
             this
             wise
             vnto
             such
             as
             did
             refraine
             from
             marriage
             that
             they
             might
             enter
             into
             some
             holy
             order
             of
             religion
             .
             
               This
               is
               a
               new
               kinde
               of
               change
               .
               They
               doe
               not
               that
               which
               they
               may
               ,
               and
               doe
               that
               which
               they
               may
               not
               .
               They
               abstaine
               from
               marrying
               ,
               but
               doe
               
               not
               abstaine
               from
               rapine
               .
               O
               foolish
               perswasiō
               !
               what
               dost
               thou
               ?
               God
               hath
               forbidden
               sinnes
               ,
               &
               not
               marriages
               .
            
          
           
             Gregory
             the
             1.
             bishop
             of
             Rome
             did
             maintaine
             this
             errour
             to
             the
             vtmost
             of
             his
             power
             ,
             about
             the
             yeare
             of
             our
             Lord
             ,
             600.
             and
             yet
             notwithstanding
             in
             Boniface
             his
             questions
             ,
             and
             4
             booke
             of
             dialogues
             ,
             11.
             chap.
             he
             speakes
             of
             Priests
             wiues
             whom
             hee
             calleth
             Presbyteras
             ,
             and
             makes
             mention
             of
             a
             Priest
             of
             Narsia
             ,
             that
             did
             abstaine
             from
             lying
             with
             his
             wife
             ,
             For
             (
             saith
             
               Gregory
               )
               holie
               men
               haue
               this
               property
               ,
               sometimes
               to
               abstaine
               from
               lawfull
               things
               ,
               that
               so
               they
               may
               alwaies
               estrange
               themselues
               from
               the
               things
               that
               are
               vnlawfull
               .
            
             In
             his
             iudgement
             therefore
             ,
             if
             this
             priest
             had
             dwelt
             with
             his
             wife
             ,
             hee
             had
             done
             no
             more
             then
             what
             he
             might
             do
             lawfully
             .
          
           
             To
             be
             short
             ,
             what
             care
             and
             diligence
             so
             ever
             the
             bishops
             of
             Rome
             and
             their
             substitutes
             did
             vse
             ,
             they
             coulde
             not
             effect
             what
             they
             intended
             ,
             but
             slowly
             :
             there
             being
             not
             as
             yet
             aboue
             500.
             yeares
             past
             ,
             since
             that
             Priests
             were
             married
             in
             
               France
               ,
               England
            
             &
             Germanie
             .
             For
             the
             proofe
             whereof
             I
             could
             produce
             many
             good
             witnesses
             ,
             which
             report
             of
             the
             great
             oppositiōs
             that
             the
             Popes
             
             haue
             had
             in
             this
             matter
             ,
             and
             the
             generall
             outcries
             of
             the
             whole
             clergie
             .
          
           
             It
             remaines
             that
             wee
             make
             good
             this
             clause
             of
             the
             Apostles
             prophecy
             ,
             wherein
             hee
             foretelleth
             vs
             that
             lying
             spirites
             shall
             teach
             this
             errour
             through
             hypocrisie
             ,
             having
             cauterized
             consciences
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             having
             lost
             all
             sense
             and
             feeling
             of
             conscience
             ,
             as
             a
             tooth
             or
             other
             part
             of
             the
             bodie
             that
             is
             seared
             with
             an
             hot
             yron
             to
             dead
             it
             .
          
           
             Nowe
             that
             this
             doctrine
             was
             first
             planted
             by
             the
             Doctours
             of
             the
             Romish
             church
             even
             against
             their
             owne
             consciences
             it
             is
             easie
             to
             prooue
             by
             vnanswerable
             arguments
             .
          
           
             1
             For
             they
             call
             marriage
             a
             sacrament
             ,
             and
             yet
             they
             say
             that
             in
             Monks
             &
             Priests
             it
             is
             sacriledge
             .
             Can
             they
             possibly
             imagine
             that
             one
             and
             the
             selfesame
             action
             shoulde
             be
             a
             sacrament
             in
             one
             ,
             and
             sacriledge
             in
             an
             other
             ?
             Or
             that
             any
             one
             may
             be
             said
             to
             commit
             sacriledge
             in
             vsing
             a
             sacrament
             ?
          
           
             2
             Againe
             ,
             this
             is
             against
             their
             conscience
             ,
             when
             they
             faine
             that
             they
             establish
             this
             decree
             of
             virginity
             for
             no
             other
             ende
             but
             that
             Clerkes
             should
             be
             the
             more
             holy
             ,
             when
             the
             true
             cause
             thereof
             indeede
             ,
             is
             the
             preservation
             of
             church
             goods
             ,
             for
             feare
             a
             
             bishop
             or
             Priest
             should
             pare
             awaie
             some
             thing
             from
             them
             ,
             and
             imploy
             it
             to
             the
             vse
             of
             his
             wife
             and
             children
             ;
             as
             Pope
             Gregorie
             witnesseth
             in
             the
             28.
             
             Distinction
             ,
             &
             Canon
             
               De
               Syracusanis
            
             ,
             where
             he
             saith
             that
             the
             reason
             why
             he
             did
             refuse
             to
             admit
             of
             a
             certain
             bishop
             ,
             was
             ,
             because
             he
             had
             a
             wife
             ,
             &
             children
             ,
             by
             whom
             the
             church
             goods
             doe
             vse
             to
             be
             endangered
             .
             And
             yet
             notwithstanding
             ,
             at
             the
             vrgent
             request
             of
             the
             people
             of
             Syracusa
             he
             did
             receiue
             him
             ,
             on
             condition
             that
             his
             wife
             and
             children
             should
             not
             meddle
             at
             all
             with
             the
             church
             revenewes
             .
          
           
             3
             It
             is
             also
             against
             their
             owne
             conscience
             ,
             that
             having
             once
             confessed
             ,
             that
             the
             single
             life
             of
             priests
             and
             monkes
             ,
             is
             not
             by
             the
             commandement
             of
             God
             ,
             but
             only
             by
             the
             law
             of
             man
             ;
             yet
             they
             labour
             to
             proue
             it
             out
             of
             the
             scripture
             .
             For
             if
             their
             proofes
             be
             good
             ,
             then
             is
             it
             by
             the
             law
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             4
             It
             is
             likewise
             against
             their
             conscience
             ,
             that
             after
             they
             haue
             acknowledged
             that
             fornication
             is
             vnlawfull
             by
             the
             law
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             single
             life
             of
             priests
             is
             established
             only
             by
             the
             law
             of
             man
             ,
             yet
             notwithstanding
             they
             mainetaine
             that
             it
             is
             a
             lesse
             sinne
             for
             a
             Priest
             to
             commit
             fornication
             ,
             then
             to
             marry
             .
          
           
           
             5
             It
             is
             not
             with
             a
             good
             cōscience
             that
             whilest
             they
             exact
             a
             vowe
             of
             chastitie
             of
             their
             priests
             ,
             they
             should
             in
             the
             mean
             space
             excuse
             their
             lasciviousnesse
             ,
             as
             the
             *
             Canonists
             do
             ,
             which
             haue
             made
             this
             glosse
             on
             the
             Decree
             in
             the
             11.
             cause
             quest
             .
             3.
             
             
               But
               if
               a
               priest
               embrace
               a
               woman
               ,
               it
               is
               to
               bee
               presumed
               that
               hee
               doth
               it
               to
               no
               other
               end
               ,
               but
               to
               giue
               her
               a
               fatherly
               benediction
               .
            
          
           
             6
             They
             goe
             against
             their
             conscience
             ,
             when
             they
             say
             ,
             that
             they
             doe
             not
             forbidde
             marriage
             ,
             and
             yet
             will
             not
             suffer
             a
             priest
             ,
             that
             is
             a
             knowne
             fornicatour
             ,
             to
             bee
             married
             .
          
           
             7
             They
             speake
             against
             their
             conscience
             ,
             when
             they
             say
             that
             they
             are
             no
             enemies
             of
             such
             marriages
             as
             are
             approved
             of
             in
             the
             Scripture
             ,
             and
             yet
             never
             the
             lesse
             in
             their
             Decrees
             (
             which
             are
             the
             lawes
             of
             the
             church
             of
             Rome
             )
             they
             suffer
             *
             Canons
             to
             be
             ,
             which
             say
             that
             
               S.
               Paule
            
             commaunding
             such
             as
             are
             widdowes
             to
             marry
             againe
             ,
             spake
             against
             truth
             and
             reason
             ,
             seeing
             that
             such
             marriage
             is
             fornication
             .
          
           
             8
             With
             the
             like
             dissimulation
             they
             speak
             of
             chastity
             ,
             and
             yet
             for
             all
             this
             ,
             suffer
             vnchast
             laws
             and
             Canons
             in
             their
             decrees
             .
             As
             in
             the
             Canon
             .
             
               Is
               qui
            
             ,
             in
             the
             34.
             
             Distinction
             .
             
             Where
             of
             behold
             the
             inscription
             .
             
               He
               that
               hath
               no
               wife
               ,
               let
               him
               in
               steede
               of
               a
               wife
               haue
               a
               concubine
               .
            
             The
             Canon
             following
             is
             not
             much
             better
             .
             
               It
               is
               not
               lawful
               for
               a
               Christian
               to
               haue
               .
               I
               do
               not
               say
               many
               wiues
               ,
               but
               not
               so
               much
               as
               two
               wiues
               ,
               but
               only
               one
               wife
               ,
               or
               in
               defect
               therof
               a
               Cōcubine
               .
            
             Likewise
             the
             Canō
             ,
             
               Dilectissimis
               in
               the
            
             12.
             
               cause
               ,
               &
            
             1
             quest
             .
             which
             doth
             commend
             and
             approue
             
               Platoes
               opinion
               the
               wisest
               amongst
               the
               Greekes
               ▪
               which
               saith
               that
               all
               things
               should
               be
               common
               amongst
               friends
               ,
               now
               vnder
               this
               name
               of
               all
               things
            
             (
             saith
             this
             Canon
             )
             
               questionlesse
               mens
               ,
               wiues
               too
               are
               comprehended
               .
            
          
           
             9
             It
             cannot
             bee
             with
             a
             good
             conscience
             that
             they
             exact
             the
             vow
             of
             continency
             ,
             and
             yet
             take
             away
             the
             remedy
             against
             incontinency
             :
             that
             they
             tie
             men
             to
             chastity
             and
             yet
             wincke
             at
             fornication
             :
             forbidding
             marriage
             ,
             and
             opening
             the
             Stewes
             :
             whereby
             they
             say
             that
             they
             avoid
             a
             greater
             evil
             ,
             contrary
             to
             the
             rule
             of
             the
             *
             Apostle
             ,
             whoe
             bids
             vs
             that
             
               we
               should
               not
               doe
               evill
               that
               good
               may
               come
               thereby
               .
            
             And
             yet
             let
             a
             man
             but
             note
             how
             this
             is
             a
             remedy
             against
             other
             evils
             .
             For
             there
             are
             many
             towns
             where
             true
             religion
             is
             established
             ,
             where
             there
             are
             no
             Stewes
             ,
             and
             yet
             fornication
             is
             not
             frequētly
             
             practised
             ,
             nor
             the
             name
             of
             Sodomie
             scarse
             knowne
             .
             But
             the
             Pope
             by
             establishing
             Stews
             in
             Rome
             ,
             hath
             he
             thereby
             extinguished
             the
             sinne
             of
             Sodomie
             ,
             or
             diminished
             the
             number
             of
             adulterers
             ?
          
           
             10
             This
             is
             also
             against
             their
             conscience
             that
             confessing
             many
             of
             the
             Apostles
             to
             haue
             beene
             married
             ,
             they
             do
             yet
             call
             the
             forbidding
             of
             marriage
             an
             Apostolicall
             tradition
             .
          
           
             11
             Finally
             to
             know
             what
             subtile
             devises
             the
             Pope
             hath
             vsed
             in
             these
             matters
             of
             marriage
             ,
             we
             are
             to
             vnderstand
             that
             he
             hath
             remoued
             all
             causes
             concerning
             matrimonie
             from
             the
             secular
             Courts
             of
             Princes
             ,
             and
             taken
             order
             for
             them
             to
             bee
             decided
             at
             Rome
             .
             Nowe
             to
             the
             ende
             that
             hee
             might
             hereby
             tyrannize
             over
             mens
             consciences
             ,
             he
             hath
             invēte●
             a
             thousand
             scruples
             .
             He
             hath
             found
             o●●
             newe
             degrees
             of
             spiritual
             kindred
             :
             forbidding
             marriage
             betweene
             Godfathers
             ,
             and
             Godmothers
             ,
             or
             their
             children
             .
             Also
             ,
             the
             *
             word
             of
             God
             not
             forbidding
             marriage
             any
             further
             then
             betweene
             the
             Vnckle
             and
             the
             neece
             ,
             or
             the
             Nephew
             and
             the
             Aunt
             ,
             which
             are
             in
             the
             first
             or
             secōd
             degree
             ,
             the
             Pope
             going
             lower
             hath
             forbidden
             it
             betweene
             Cosen
             germans
             ,
             
             and
             their
             children
             ,
             and
             those
             which
             are
             remote
             even
             to
             the
             fourth
             degree
             .
             Hee
             hath
             likewise
             made
             it
             vnlawfull
             to
             marry
             in
             Lent.
             For
             looke
             howe
             many
             the
             more
             prohibitions
             there
             are
             ,
             so
             many
             the
             more
             dispensations
             must
             there
             bee
             ,
             which
             are
             bought
             at
             a
             deare
             rate
             ,
             and
             by
             so
             much
             the
             more
             is
             he
             repaired
             vnto
             .
             And
             note
             that
             he
             doth
             not
             only
             dispense
             with
             prohibitions
             of
             his
             owne
             making
             ,
             but
             with
             those
             which
             God
             hath
             made
             too
             ;
             suffering
             Vnkles
             to
             marry
             their
             Neeces
             ,
             especially
             in
             the
             families
             of
             Princes
             :
             to
             the
             end
             that
             the
             childrē
             borne
             of
             such
             that
             are
             thus
             married
             ,
             should
             for
             their
             owne
             ease
             bee
             glad
             to
             vphold
             his
             authoritie
             .
             The
             counting
             booke
             of
             the
             fees
             belonging
             to
             the
             Romish
             court
             of
             Chauncerie
             ,
             imprinted
             at
             Paris
             by
             
               Tousains
               Denis
            
             ,
             in
             
               S.
               Iames
            
             his
             street
             ,
             neere
             
               S.
               Yuoes
            
             .
             in
             the
             yeare
             1520.
             hath
             these
             words
             .
             The
             penitentiarie
             may
             dispense
             with
             the
             first
             degree
             of
             affinity
             in
             the
             Court
             of
             conscience
             ,
             &
             such
             a
             dispensation
             is
             sold
             for
             9
             Ducats
             and
             six
             groats
             .
             That
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             Pope
             may
             giue
             permission
             to
             a
             woman
             to
             marry
             the
             brother
             of
             her
             dead
             husband
             ,
             or
             to
             a
             man
             to
             marry
             his
             dead
             wiues
             sister
             ,
             a
             thing
             forbidden
             by
             the
             word
             of
             God.
             Levit.
             18.
             
             16.
             and
             20.21
             .
          
           
             Wee
             haue
             therefore
             in
             this
             point
             also
             plainely
             seene
             the
             Apostles
             prophecie
             fulfilled
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             second
             part
             of
             this
             prophecie
             ,
             concerning
             the
             forbidding
             of
             meates
             .
          
           
             THe
             Apostle
             S.
             Peter
             commaunding
             vs
             to
             watch
             ,
             and
             be
             sober
             presupposeth
             that
             sobriety
             is
             a
             helpe
             to
             vigilancie
             .
             For
             it
             is
             hard
             to
             watch
             with
             a
             full
             belly
             :
             one
             that
             is
             drunke
             is
             no
             fit
             mā
             to
             be
             a
             sentinell
             .
             This
             watchfulnesse
             is
             requisite
             to
             foresee
             the
             assaults
             of
             Satan
             ,
             and
             to
             avoide
             his
             temptations
             ,
             and
             to
             make
             vs
             lift
             vp
             our
             harts
             directly
             vnto
             God.
             For
             as
             a
             man
             cannot
             well
             study
             in
             the
             kitchin
             ,
             so
             neither
             can
             one
             easilie
             meditate
             of
             heavenly
             things
             whilst
             his
             delight
             is
             set
             vpon
             meat
             .
             The
             belly
             must
             hold
             his
             peace
             ,
             when
             the
             spirit
             speakes
             to
             God
             ,
             and
             the
             desire
             of
             eating
             be
             as
             it
             were
             mortified
             by
             this
             spirituall
             hunger
             ,
             wherof
             our
             Saviour
             speakes
             in
             the
             4.
             of
             Iohn
             ,
             saying
             ,
             
               My
               meate
               is
               to
               do
               the
               will
               of
               my
               father
               that
               sent
               me
            
             ;
             hardly
             can
             the
             loue
             of
             God
             liue
             togither
             with
             the
             pāpring
             of
             the
             body
             .
             Hardly
             can
             a
             mā
             ever
             imprint
             any
             mark
             of
             godlines
             
             in
             his
             hart
             ,
             whose
             palate
             is
             more
             skilfull
             then
             his
             vnderstanding
             :
             or
             which
             enthralleth
             his
             minde
             to
             his
             belly
             ,
             nourishing
             this
             not
             so
             much
             for
             necessity
             ,
             as
             curiosity
             :
             but
             if
             this
             evill
             be
             pernicious
             at
             all
             times
             ,
             it
             followes
             that
             sobriety
             is
             alwaies
             necessary
             ,
             and
             that
             a
             Christians
             life
             ought
             to
             be
             a
             continuall
             fast
             ;
             yea
             ,
             I
             dare
             affirme
             ,
             that
             in
             this
             ,
             piety
             may
             learne
             of
             superstition
             :
             For
             if
             the
             superstitious
             do
             fast
             the
             evēs
             of
             holy
             daies
             ,
             why
             should
             not
             wee
             fast
             all
             our
             life
             long
             ,
             since
             it
             is
             nothing
             els
             but
             the
             vigill
             of
             that
             great
             holyday
             which
             is
             the
             everlasting
             sabbaoth
             ?
          
           
             Fasting
             therefore
             is
             an
             holy
             exercise
             ,
             &
             in
             the
             worde
             of
             God
             ordinarily
             ioined
             togither
             with
             praier
             .
             So
             our
             Lord
             Iesus
             in
             the
             17.
             chap.
             of
             
               S.
               Matthew
            
             and
             21
             verse
             ,
             speakes
             of
             certaine
             stubborne
             spirits
             ,
             that
             
               could
               not
               be
               cast
               out
               but
               by
               praier
               &
               fasting
               .
            
             And
             
               S.
               Paul
            
             in
             the
             1.
             to
             the
             Corinthians
             ,
             &
             7.
             chap.
             
               Defraud
               not
               one
               an
               other
               ,
               except
               it
               be
               with
               consent
               for
               a
               time
               ,
               that
               yee
               may
               giue
               your selues
               to
               fasting
               and
               praier
               .
            
             For
             they
             knew
             that
             there
             was
             a
             mutuall
             accord
             between
             praier
             and
             fasting
             .
             Fasting
             enflames
             praier
             ,
             and
             praier
             sanctifies
             fasting
             ;
             Fasting
             remoues
             negligence
             from
             praier
             ,
             and
             praier
             
             remoues
             pride
             and
             superstition
             from
             fasting
             .
             For
             as
             prayer
             without
             fasting
             is
             but
             slow
             ,
             so
             fasting
             without
             praier
             is
             but
             a
             bodily
             diet
             ,
             and
             no
             spirituall
             exercise
             .
             God
             is
             more
             angry
             then
             pleased
             with
             this
             service
             ,
             if
             that
             whilst
             a
             mā
             hath
             an
             empty
             stomack
             ,
             he
             be
             drūken
             with
             wrath
             ,
             or
             glutted
             with
             lewd
             lusts
             .
             For
             he
             reckons
             of
             both
             alike
             ,
             both
             of
             the
             surfets
             of
             the
             wicked
             ,
             and
             the
             fasts
             of
             hypocrits
             ,
             which
             change
             vertue
             into
             foolery
             ,
             and
             christian
             sobriety
             into
             a
             distinction
             of
             meats
             ,
             and
             into
             scrupulous
             observations
             ,
             with
             (
             I
             know
             not
             )
             what
             opinion
             of
             merit
             ,
             and
             satisfaction
             .
             As
             though
             fasting
             could
             satisfie
             God
             ,
             or
             as
             though
             hee
             were
             bounde
             more
             to
             pleasure
             him
             which
             hath
             lost
             his
             dinner
             .
             For
             true
             fasting
             is
             to
             make
             vs
             more
             fit
             for
             to
             serue
             God
             ,
             but
             not
             for
             to
             merit
             any
             thing
             at
             his
             hands
             ,
             or
             for
             to
             lay
             downe
             a
             payment
             for
             our
             sinnes
             ,
             for
             which
             Iesus
             Christ
             hath
             already
             fully
             satisfied
             .
          
           
             But
             it
             is
             not
             so
             now
             a
             daies
             ;
             so
             hath
             superstition
             overrun
             true
             devotion
             ,
             and
             marred
             this
             holy
             exercise
             .
             This
             abuse
             began
             in
             the
             Apostles
             time
             ;
             and
             is
             reprehended
             by
             the
             Apostle
             
               S.
               Paul
            
             in
             the
             2.
             chap.
             of
             his
             Epistle
             to
             the
             Colossians
             ,
             where
             he
             rebukes
             
             those
             which
             said
             ,
             
               tast
               not
               ,
               touch
               not
               ,
               handle
               not
               ,
            
             doing
             this
             ,
             not
             because
             they
             thought
             any
             kinde
             of
             meate
             more
             vncleane
             then
             other
             ,
             but
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             by
             a
             voluntary
             religion
             ,
             and
             humblenes
             of
             minde
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             not
             spare
             their
             bodies
             ,
             nor
             haue
             any
             regard
             to
             pampring
             of
             their
             flesh
             .
             Some
             150
             years
             after
             came
             the
             Tatians
             and
             Montanists
             ,
             thē
             the
             Manichees
             ,
             and
             after
             them
             Eustacius
             bishop
             of
             Sebastia
             (
             whom
             Sozomen
             takes
             to
             be
             the
             author
             of
             the
             Asceticks
             of
             Basil
             )
             taught
             certaine
             superstitious
             fasts
             and
             distinctions
             of
             meates
             ;
             all
             which
             were
             condemned
             for
             hereticall
             by
             the
             ancient
             Church
             .
          
           
             Last
             of
             all
             came
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             ,
             which
             now
             is
             so
             far
             transported
             with
             this
             errour
             ,
             that
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             their
             religion
             consisteth
             in
             these
             petty
             observatiōs
             of
             daies
             ,
             and
             distinctions
             of
             meats
             ,
             which
             are
             so
             many
             in
             number
             ,
             that
             the
             bondage
             of
             the
             legall
             Ceremonies
             might
             be
             called
             liberty
             in
             respect
             of
             these
             ;
             For
             whosoever
             will
             reckon
             vp
             all
             their
             fasting
             daies
             in
             a
             yeare
             ,
             shall
             finde
             that
             they
             come
             to
             more
             then
             5
             months
             yearely
             .
             In
             some
             of
             these
             daies
             flesh
             only
             is
             forbidden
             ;
             in
             others
             butter
             also
             and
             egges
             .
             In
             Spaine
             they
             are
             suffered
             
             
             
             
             
             on
             fasting
             daies
             to
             eate
             the
             inwardes
             of
             calues
             ,
             and
             sheepe
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             morsillos
             and
             menudillos
             .
             A
             good
             and
             religious
             christian
             is
             now
             a
             daies
             discerned
             by
             this
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             if
             he
             keepe
             Lent
             ,
             and
             the
             fowre
             Ember
             weeks
             ,
             and
             the
             vigils
             of
             Festival
             daies
             ;
             that
             which
             was
             craftily
             imposed
             at
             first
             .
             For
             in
             taking
             away
             the
             holy
             scripture
             frō
             the
             people
             ,
             and
             giving
             them
             divine
             service
             in
             an
             vnknowne
             tongue
             ,
             he
             must
             needes
             thinke
             on
             some
             think
             to
             busie
             their
             bodies
             withall
             ,
             whilst
             he
             did
             blind
             their
             minds
             ,
             &
             giue
             them
             some
             corporall
             exercise
             ,
             whilst
             hee
             robbed
             them
             of
             spirituall
             instruction
             .
             Hence
             comes
             it
             that
             the
             poore
             people
             doe
             to
             a
             day
             know
             all
             the
             fasting
             daies
             exactly
             ,
             and
             how
             many
             holy
             day
             evens
             there
             be
             to
             be
             fasted
             ;
             but
             knowe
             nothing
             at
             all
             in
             the
             scripture
             .
             Hence
             also
             comes
             it
             that
             the
             priest
             in
             confession
             doth
             carefully
             enquire
             of
             the
             sinner
             ,
             whether
             he
             hath
             kept
             Lent
             or
             no
             ,
             and
             the
             4
             fasts
             :
             but
             never
             asketh
             if
             hee
             haue
             confirmed
             his
             faith
             in
             the
             promises
             of
             the
             gospell
             ,
             if
             he
             be
             instructed
             in
             the
             holie
             scripture
             ,
             if
             he
             vnderstand
             the
             misteries
             of
             our
             redemption
             :
             if
             he
             loue
             God
             with
             all
             his
             hart
             ,
             and
             his
             neighbor
             as
             himselfe
             :
             But
             if
             it
             be
             found
             that
             the
             sinner
             haue
             broken
             
             the
             ordinance
             of
             the
             Church
             by
             eating
             flesh
             in
             Lent
             ,
             especially
             in
             the
             week
             which
             they
             call
             ,
             the
             holy
             weeke
             ;
             the
             Priest
             then
             hath
             no
             power
             to
             absolue
             him
             ,
             but
             sendes
             him
             to
             the
             penitentiarie
             .
             As
             for
             murder
             ,
             &
             adulterie
             ,
             and
             other
             lesse
             sinnes
             which
             are
             but
             against
             the
             law
             of
             God
             ,
             the
             Priest
             can
             easily
             absolue
             him
             from
             such
             crimes
             ;
             On
             the
             contrary
             ,
             if
             hee
             haue
             fulfilled
             the
             commandement
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             and
             fasted
             according
             to
             the
             lawes
             thereof
             ,
             why
             ,
             this
             is
             a
             meritorious
             worke
             ,
             not
             only
             for
             his
             sins
             that
             shall
             thus
             haue
             fasted
             ,
             but
             for
             the
             sins
             of
             others
             too
             .
             And
             this
             fasting
             is
             not
             measured
             by
             the
             quātitie
             of
             meat
             ,
             but
             he
             is
             said
             to
             keepe
             Lent
             ,
             that
             eateth
             no
             flesh
             ,
             nor
             egges
             ,
             although
             hee
             drinke
             that
             which
             is
             better
             ,
             and
             feed
             on
             the
             best
             fish
             that
             can
             be
             got
             :
             for
             as
             for
             their
             after-suppers
             of
             comfits
             ,
             and
             drie
             suckats
             ,
             they
             are
             not
             reckoned
             ,
             because
             they
             take
             these
             as
             Physick
             ,
             &
             for
             to
             follow
             the
             Apostles
             counsell
             whoe
             advised
             Timothie
             to
             comforte
             himselfe
             by
             drinking
             wine
             against
             the
             weaknes
             of
             the
             stomacke
             .
             So
             haue
             they
             beene
             more
             carefull
             to
             fulfill
             the
             Apostles
             prophecie
             then
             the
             commandement
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             Their
             ordinarie
             excuse
             is
             ,
             that
             
               S.
               Paule
            
             
             in
             this
             prophecie
             speaketh
             of
             the
             Montanists
             and
             Manichees
             ,
             which
             held
             some
             meats
             to
             be
             vncleane
             &
             profane
             :
             But
             that
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             thinkes
             no
             meat
             vncleane
             ,
             but
             only
             forbids
             certaine
             kindes
             thereof
             for
             some
             few
             daies
             ,
             to
             take
             downe
             the
             flesh
             by
             using
             it
             the
             more
             coursly
             ,
             and
             by
             withholding
             such
             meates
             from
             the
             body
             ,
             as
             doe
             most
             provoke
             lust
             .
          
           
             1
             But
             against
             this
             ,
             wee
             haue
             seene
             aboue
             ,
             how
             the
             Apostle
             
               S.
               Paule
            
             in
             his
             Epistle
             to
             the
             Colosians
             ,
             condemneth
             those
             by
             name
             which
             by
             refraining
             from
             set
             kindes
             of
             meate
             (
             being
             led
             therevnto
             by
             a
             voluntary
             religion
             and
             humblenesse
             of
             minde
             ,
             thought
             to
             vse
             their
             bodies
             hardly
             ,
             &
             had
             no
             regard
             to
             the
             pampring
             of
             their
             flesh
             .
             And
             hee
             speakes
             not
             to
             the
             Iewes
             ,
             for
             the
             Iewes
             did
             not
             abstain
             from
             certaine
             kinds
             of
             meats
             for
             to
             subdue
             their
             bodies
             ,
             but
             to
             obay
             Moyses
             law
             .
             Besides
             
               S.
               Paul
            
             calleth
             these
             observations
             the
             commandements
             of
             men
             ,
             but
             the
             Iewes
             kept
             theirs
             as
             the
             commandements
             of
             God.
             Herevnto
             adde
             that
             the
             Apostle
             speaketh
             of
             such
             who
             besides
             the
             errour
             of
             distinguishing
             of
             meats
             did
             worship
             Angels
             withall
             .
             An
             errour
             wherewith
             as
             then
             the
             Iewes
             were
             not
             branded
             .
          
           
           
             2
             Moreover
             the
             Apostle
             speakes
             generally
             ,
             and
             reckons
             the
             forbidding
             of
             meat
             ,
             amongst
             the
             errors
             and
             doctrines
             of
             Devils
             ,
             without
             specifying
             any
             reason
             for
             which
             it
             is
             done
             ;
             The
             Church
             of
             Rome
             doth
             doe
             that
             which
             heretickes
             doe
             ,
             although
             it
             be
             for
             another
             reason
             .
          
           
             3
             But
             what
             matter
             is
             it
             whether
             wee
             knowe
             for
             what
             cause
             they
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             do
             abstaine
             from
             certaine
             meats
             ,
             since
             in
             effect
             they
             make
             a
             conscience
             to
             eate
             of
             them
             ,
             &
             that
             the
             Apostle
             doth
             forbid
             vs
             to
             make
             a
             conscience
             of
             this
             ;
             For
             behold
             his
             words
             in
             the
             10.
             of
             the
             1.
             to
             the
             
               Corinthians
               .
               If
               any
               of
               them
               which
               belieue
               not
               ,
               call
               you
               to
               a
               feast
               ,
               and
               if
               you
               will
               goe
               ,
               what
               soever
               is
               set
               before
               you
               ,
               eate
               ,
               asking
               no
               question
               for
               conscience
               sake
               .
            
             This
             rule
             likes
             not
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             ,
             the
             people
             whereof
             are
             instructed
             ,
             when
             they
             shall
             bee
             invited
             by
             such
             as
             they
             call
             hereticks
             and
             infidels
             ,
             to
             make
             a
             conscience
             of
             not
             eating
             all
             things
             indifferently
             that
             are
             set
             before
             thē
             .
             Behold
             therefore
             a
             forbidding
             of
             meates
             condemned
             by
             the
             Apostle
             ,
             and
             by
             consequence
             the
             fulfilling
             of
             this
             prophecie
             .
          
           
             But
             what
             if
             wee
             shewe
             that
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             doth
             count
             flesh
             and
             the
             like
             
             meats
             to
             be
             vncleane
             in
             their
             own
             nature
             ?
             For
             if
             it
             forbid
             the
             eating
             of
             flesh
             for
             no
             other
             reason
             but
             onely
             because
             it
             provokes
             to
             lust
             ,
             it
             should
             far
             rather
             haue
             forbidden
             ,
             wine
             ,
             and
             sauce
             ,
             and
             sweet
             meates
             ,
             which
             enflame
             the
             bloud
             ,
             and
             doe
             far
             more
             provoke
             lust
             then
             any
             thing
             else
             whatsoever
             .
             2
             But
             what
             meanes
             that
             custome
             of
             carrying
             their
             meat
             after
             Lent
             to
             the
             Priest
             for
             him
             to
             say
             his
             exorcismes
             over
             it
             ,
             and
             blesse
             it
             ,
             if
             they
             did
             not
             thinke
             that
             some
             wicked
             spirits
             lay
             lurking
             in
             it
             al
             the
             Lent
             long
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             had
             some
             pollutiō
             whereof
             it
             had
             need
             to
             be
             purged
             ?
             For
             if
             it
             were
             otherwise
             ,
             and
             if
             that
             the
             intent
             of
             the
             Priest
             were
             only
             to
             blesse
             the
             meate
             ,
             as
             we
             doe
             ours
             vsually
             at
             meales
             before
             we
             feede
             vpon
             it
             ,
             this
             blessing
             would
             bee
             as
             good
             at
             any
             other
             times
             ,
             as
             after
             Lent
             ,
             and
             there
             would
             need
             no
             coniuration
             .
             This
             is
             likewise
             confirmed
             by
             this
             ,
             that
             the
             religious
             which
             make
             profession
             of
             a
             greater
             sanctitie
             then
             others
             ,
             as
             the
             Benedictins
             ,
             and
             Chartrians
             ,
             doe
             altogether
             abstaine
             from
             flesh
             all
             their
             life
             long
             ,
             and
             eschewe
             the
             touching
             or
             tasting
             of
             it
             ,
             as
             of
             a
             profane
             thing
             :
             Doing
             in
             this
             worse
             then
             they
             whō
             the
             Apostle
             condemnes
             in
             the
             2.
             to
             the
             
             Colosians
             which
             say
             ,
             
               tast
               not
               ,
               touch
               not
            
             ,
             being
             moued
             therevnto
             onely
             with
             a
             voluntarie
             religion
             ,
             for
             to
             humble
             themselues
             &
             bring
             downe
             the
             flesh
             .
             But
             if
             you
             read
             the
             disputations
             of
             our
             schoole
             Doctors
             ,
             as
             of
             Durandus
             ,
             and
             Alensis
             ,
             &
             others
             ,
             you
             shall
             find
             that
             the
             reasons
             which
             they
             giue
             ,
             why
             flesh
             is
             forbidden
             and
             not
             fish
             ,
             do
             presuppose
             some
             vncleannesse
             in
             flesh
             .
             For
             there
             be
             some
             of
             them
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             reason
             is
             ,
             because
             the
             creatures
             of
             flesh
             were
             curst
             and
             drowned
             in
             the
             generall
             deluge
             ,
             &
             not
             the
             fish
             :
             by
             which
             reason
             it
             should
             follow
             ,
             that
             neither
             duckes
             ,
             nor
             any
             other
             water
             fowle
             should
             be
             forbidden
             to
             bee
             eaten
             in
             Lent.
             Others
             of
             them
             there
             be
             that
             say
             that
             the
             reason
             is
             ,
             because
             Iesus
             Christ
             never
             did
             eate
             any
             thing
             but
             fish
             after
             his
             resurrection
             .
             They
             cannot
             deny
             but
             that
             he
             did
             eate
             his
             part
             of
             the
             paschall
             lambe
             the
             last
             week
             in
             Lent
             before
             Easter
             :
             but
             I
             imagine
             these
             Masters
             will
             presuppose
             that
             he
             did
             dispēse
             with
             his
             owne
             sanctitie
             in
             this
             .
             Finally
             if
             of
             two
             impure
             actions
             committed
             by
             any
             one
             ,
             the
             one
             be
             more
             grievously
             punished
             then
             the
             other
             ,
             is
             it
             not
             because
             it
             is
             more
             impure
             ?
             When
             therefore
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             doth
             inflict
             a
             greater
             punishment
             
             on
             him
             that
             doth
             eate
             flesh
             in
             Lent
             ,
             then
             on
             him
             that
             hath
             committed
             fornication
             ;
             doth
             it
             not
             thereby
             shew
             that
             it
             takes
             flesh
             in
             Lent
             to
             bee
             more
             vncleane
             then
             fornication
             ?
          
           
             Neverthelesse
             ,
             for
             to
             pleasure
             them
             ,
             let
             vs
             suppose
             that
             the
             forbidding
             of
             certaine
             meats
             in
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             ,
             be
             not
             built
             vpon
             any
             impuritie
             conceited
             to
             be
             in
             the
             meat
             ;
             and
             hauing
             granted
             them
             this
             ,
             let
             vs
             see
             ,
             if
             herein
             our
             adversaries
             differ
             frō
             ancient
             hereticks
             .
             Sozomene
             in
             his
             3.
             booke
             ,
             and
             31.
             
             Chapter
             .
             witnesseth
             that
             Eustacius
             Bishop
             of
             Sebastia
             in
             Armenia
             ,
             was
             the
             first
             that
             ever
             brought
             the
             monastical
             profession
             into
             
               Armenia
               ,
               Pontus
            
             ,
             and
             Paphlagonia
             ,
             putting
             a
             difference
             between
             meats
             ,
             and
             inventing
             a
             strange
             kinde
             of
             habits
             ,
             &
             other
             absurd
             things
             contrary
             to
             the
             ordinance
             of
             the
             Church
             .
             Hee
             tels
             vs
             also
             how
             that
             many
             women
             being
             ruled
             by
             the
             Disciples
             of
             that
             sect
             ,
             shaved
             their
             heades
             vnder
             the
             shewe
             of
             religion
             :
             that
             the
             Councell
             of
             Gangres
             declared
             them
             to
             be
             cut
             of
             from
             the
             Church
             ,
             if
             they
             did
             not
             renounce
             their
             opinions
             .
             In
             this
             Councell
             Sozomene
             saith
             that
             Eustacius
             protested
             how
             hee
             did
             not
             bring
             vp
             this
             as
             a
             necessary
             doctrine
             ,
             
             but
             only
             for
             discipline
             sake
             ,
             or
             as
             a
             devout
             exercise
             and
             acceptable
             vnto
             God.
             This
             at
             that
             time
             was
             the
             excuse
             of
             heretickes
             ,
             whereby
             they
             did
             excuse
             their
             forbidding
             of
             meats
             ,
             iust
             after
             the
             same
             manner
             that
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             doth
             now
             adaies
             .
          
           
             The
             Montanists
             likewise
             were
             generally
             condemned
             by
             the
             auncient
             church
             because
             they
             forbad
             flesh
             to
             be
             eaten
             .
             Whether
             they
             did
             this
             out
             of
             an
             opinion
             they
             had
             ,
             that
             flesh
             was
             defiled
             and
             polluted
             ,
             or
             for
             exercise
             sake
             ,
             to
             beate
             downe
             the
             flesh
             ,
             and
             curbe
             in
             their
             lust
             ,
             no
             man
             can
             better
             resolue
             vs
             then
             Tertullian
             ,
             the
             captaine
             of
             that
             band
             ;
             who
             himselfe
             was
             stained
             with
             this
             heresie
             ,
             and
             hath
             purposely
             written
             a
             booke
             of
             this
             matter
             ,
             intituled
             ,
             
               Adversus
               Psychicos
               ,
               against
               fleshly
               men
               :
            
             For
             so
             is
             it
             his
             pleasure
             to
             stile
             the
             catholicks
             .
             Whose
             obiections
             against
             the
             Montanists
             ,
             he
             produceth
             in
             the
             second
             chapter
             ,
             which
             are
             al
             one
             with
             ours
             against
             the
             church
             of
             Rome
             .
             For
             in
             the
             2.
             chap.
             the
             Catholickes
             tell
             the
             Montanists
             .
             That
             
               the
               lawe
               and
               the
               prophets
               lasted
               but
               till
               Iohn
               ,
               after
               what
               time
               mē
               fasted
               as
               they
               thought
               best
               ,
               not
               for
               that
               they
               were
               so
               commanded
               by
               the
               imposition
               of
               a
               new
               discipline
               ,
               but
               accordingly
               as
               every
               man
               saw
               his
               
               occasion
               .
               That
               the
               Apostles
               vsed
               to
               do
               thus
               ,
               imposing
               no
               other
               burden
               of
               solemne
               and
               set
               fasts
               .
            
             They
             do
             yet
             farther
             alleadge
             the
             saying
             of
             the
             Apostle
             rebuking
             the
             *
             Galathians
             ,
             because
             they
             observed
             daies
             and
             moneths
             .
             They
             do
             also
             obiect
             that
             God
             himselfe
             in
             the
             58
             of
             Esay
             approues
             not
             of
             that
             fast
             that
             is
             an
             abstaining
             from
             meate
             ,
             but
             of
             that
             which
             is
             an
             exercise
             of
             the
             workes
             of
             righteousnes
             .
             And
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             hath
             in
             a
             worde
             answered
             all
             these
             scrupulous
             observations
             of
             eating
             and
             drinking
             ,
             by
             saying
             ,
             
               That
               which
               goeth
               into
               the
               mouth
               defileth
               not
               the
               man
               ,
            
             
             
               but
               that
               which
               commeth
               out
               of
               the
               mouth
               ,
               that
               defileth
               the
               mā
               .
            
             Wherfore
             he
             himselfe
             made
             no
             scruple
             to
             eate
             &
             drinke
             ,
             till
             at
             last
             hee
             was
             reprehended
             for
             it
             ,
             and
             called
             a
             glutton
             .
             That
             the
             Apostle
             teacheth
             that
             it
             is
             not
             meate
             that
             maketh
             vs
             the
             more
             acceptable
             vnto
             God
             ,
             &c.
             
             To
             be
             briefe
             ,
             the
             faithfull
             in
             times
             past
             did
             dispute
             against
             the
             Montanists
             as
             we
             do
             now
             a
             daies
             against
             the
             church
             of
             Rome
             ,
             &
             the
             Montanists
             likewise
             did
             defend
             themselus
             by
             the
             same
             shiftes
             and
             excuses
             that
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             now
             doth
             .
             For
             see
             how
             they
             answere
             in
             the
             15.
             chap.
             of
             the
             same
             booke
             .
             
               The
               Apostle
            
             ,
             say
             they
             ,
             
               condemneth
               
               such
               ,
               as
               did
               commaunde
               men
               to
               refraine
               from
               meate
               ;
               But
               the
               holy
               Ghost
               by
               his
               prescience
               ,
               condemned
               such
               hereticks
               ,
               before
               they
               came
               ,
               as
               should
               enioine
               a
               perpetuall
               fast
               ,
               for
               to
               destroy
               and
               vilifie
               the
               workes
               of
               the
               Creatour
               .
            
             Herevnto
             adde
             ,
             that
             this
             errour
             of
             refusing
             Gods
             creatures
             ,
             may
             wel
             be
             foūd
             amongst
             the
             
               Marcionits
               ,
               Talians
            
             ,
             and
             Pythagoreans
             but
             not
             in
             the
             schoole
             of
             Montanus
             ,
             which
             he
             calleth
             the
             Paraclet
             .
             And
             a
             little
             after
             ;
             
               we
               abstaine
               from
               meates
               ,
               which
               we
               do
               not
               reiect
               ,
               but
               only
               forbeare
               to
               vse
               them
               for
               a
               time
               .
            
             And
             a
             few
             lines
             aboue
             .
             
               The
               Apostles
               intent
               was
               ,
               to
               reprehend
               such
               as
               did
               abstaine
               from
               meate
               ,
               out
               of
               a
               kinde
               of
               loathing
               disdainefulnesse
               ,
               and
               not
               out
               of
               duty
               ,
            
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             out
             of
             a
             voluntary
             devotion
             .
             So
             did
             these
             hereticks
             excuse
             themselues
             ,
             whose
             forbearing
             of
             meate
             ;
             was
             not
             yet
             left
             vnreckoned
             amongst
             their
             heresies
             ,
             what
             protestations
             soever
             they
             made
             ,
             that
             they
             did
             not
             thinke
             them
             to
             bee
             vncleane
             or
             vnlawfull
             in
             their
             owne
             nature
             .
             Whence
             it
             also
             appeares
             that
             *
             Epiphanius
             knewe
             not
             their
             tenent
             ,
             when
             he
             accuseth
             them
             for
             mainetaining
             ,
             that
             certaine
             meates
             were
             vncleane
             and
             profane
             .
          
           
             Now
             although
             the
             ancient
             church
             beganne
             
             to
             encrease
             the
             number
             of
             fasts
             ,
             yet
             were
             they
             nothing
             like
             those
             which
             are
             nowe
             a
             daies
             practised
             in
             the
             church
             of
             Rome
             .
             For
             they
             did
             abstaine
             not
             only
             from
             flesh
             ,
             but
             also
             from
             wine
             ,
             and
             all
             other
             delicacies
             .
             Witnesse
             
               S.
               Austin
            
             in
             the
             1.
             booke
             of
             the
             customes
             of
             the
             church
             33.
             chap.
             
               Let
               those
               that
               can
               ,
               abstaine
               from
               flesh
               and
               wine
               for
               two
               causes
               ,
               either
               because
               of
               the
               weaknes
               of
               their
               brethren
               ,
               or
               else
               for
               their
               owne
               liberties
               sake
               herein
               .
            
             And
             in
             the
             booke
             of
             Faith
             to
             Peter
             the
             Deacon
             .
             42.
             chap.
             
               Hold
               this
               for
               certaine
               ,
               that
               the
               servants
               of
               God
               ,
               which
               abstaine
               from
               flesh
               and
               wine
               ,
               do
               not
               reiect
               thē
               as
               vncleane
               things
               ,
               but
               they
               refraine
               from
               stronger
               meats
               &
               drinks
               for
               to
               chastise
               their
               bodies
               .
               Chrysostome
            
             in
             the
             4.
             of
             his
             Homilies
             made
             at
             Antioch
             vpon
             the
             breaking
             downe
             of
             the
             Emperours
             statues
             .
             
               There
               bee
               some
            
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             
               that
               go
               two
               whole
               daies
               without
               eating
               a
               bit
               ,
               and
               againe
               there
               bee
               some
               ,
               which
               cutting
               of
               not
               only
               wine
               and
               oile
               from
               their
               table
               ,
               but
               all
               sort
               of
               flesh
               &
               fish
               too
               ,
               feed
               all
               the
               Lent
               vpon
               nothing
               but
               bread
               and
               water
               .
            
          
           
             Basill
             in
             his
             1.
             sermon
             of
             fasting
             ,
             would
             that
             in
             fasting
             there
             be
             
               nether
               flesh
               nor
               wine
               vsed
               ,
               nor
               any
               thing
               else
               that
               they
               like
               ,
               which
               
               serue
               their
               bellies
            
             ;
             and
             that
             we
             should
             feede
             on
             nothing
             but
             bread
             only
             .
             And
             a
             little
             after
             .
             
               Thou
               dost
               eate
               no
               flesh
               ,
               but
               thou
               dost
               eate
               thy
               brother
               ;
               thou
               dost
               abstaine
               from
               wine
               but
               thou
               dost
               not
               abstain
               from
               doing
               outrage
               ,
               and
               bearing
               thy selfe
               insolently
               ,
               thou
               stayest
               for
               thy
               meate
               till
               night
               ,
               but
               thou
               art
               all
               daie
               wrangling
               at
               the
               bar
               ;
               Wo
               be
               vnto
               those
               that
               are
               drunke
               ,
               but
               not
               with
               wine
               .
            
          
           
             Also
             the
             Fastes
             of
             the
             Auncient
             ,
             were
             made
             partly
             by
             the
             wil
             of
             some
             particulars
             which
             fasted
             more
             or
             lesse
             ,
             as
             they
             thought
             best
             :
             &
             partly
             by
             the
             directions
             of
             Bishops
             ,
             and
             Pastours
             of
             every
             church
             ,
             and
             not
             by
             the
             ordinance
             of
             the
             Bish
             :
             of
             Rome
             ,
             which
             had
             no
             power
             in
             prescribing
             rules
             in
             these
             matters
             out
             of
             the
             precincts
             of
             his
             own
             bishopricke
             .
             This
             appeares
             by
             the
             divers
             customes
             in
             the
             Church
             .
             In
             the
             time
             of
             
               S.
               Ambrose
            
             they
             fasted
             at
             Rome
             vpon
             Saturdaie
             ,
             but
             at
             Millan
             they
             did
             not
             fast
             then
             ,
             as
             
               S.
               Austin
            
             witnesseth
             in
             his
             118.
             epist.
             to
             Ianuaries
             .
             The
             church
             of
             Millan
             herein
             did
             follow
             the
             custome
             of
             the
             Gre●ke
             church
             ,
             which
             fasted
             neither
             saturday
             ,
             nor
             sūday
             in
             Lent
             ;
             and
             did
             for
             this
             very
             cause
             excommunicate
             the
             church
             of
             Rome
             ,
             and
             denounce
             it
             Anathema
             in
             the
             6.
             general
             coūcell
             ,
             
             and
             the
             55.
             
             Canon
             ,
             in
             these
             words
             .
             
               Because
               we
               haue
               vnderstood
               that
               in
               the
               cittie
               of
               Rome
               they
               vse
               to
               fast
               on
               the
               Saturdaies
               in
               Lent
               ,
               against
               the
               custome
               left
               to
               the
               Church
               :
               This
               holy
               Synod
               hath
               therefore
               decreed
               ,
               that
               they
               shall
               likewise
               in
               the
               church
               of
               Rome
               keep
               that
               Canon
               ,
               which
               saith
               ;
               If
               a
               Clarke
               be
               found
               to
               fast
               on
               saturday
               or
               sunday
               ,
               let
               him
               bee
               degraded
               ;
               if
               a
               lay
               man
               ,
               let
               him
               bee
               excommunicated
               .
            
             But
             this
             fell
             out
             a
             long
             time
             after
             ,
             this
             Councell
             being
             not
             assembled
             before
             the
             674.
             yeare
             of
             our
             Lord.
             But
             at
             the
             first
             these
             things
             were
             more
             free
             ,
             and
             the
             rules
             for
             them
             ,
             lesse
             strict
             .
             
               S.
               Austin
            
             in
             his
             86.
             
             Epistle
             ,
             saith
             ,
             
               I
               see
               well
               ,
               that
               fasting
               is
               commāded
               ,
               in
               the
               Evangelicall
               ,
               &
               Apostolicall
               writings
               ,
               and
               throughout
               all
               the
               new
               Testament
               ,
               but
               vpō
               what
               daies
               we
               should
               fast
               or
               not
               fast
               ,
               I
               see
               no
               commandement
               for
               this
               ,
               neither
               of
               Christ
               ,
               nor
               his
               Apostles
            
             :
             and
             a
             little
             before
             hee
             said
             that
             the
             diverse
             observations
             of
             Fasts
             ,
             did
             not
             trouble
             the
             truth
             of
             Faith
             :
             &
             that
             these
             things
             are
             the
             plaits
             of
             the
             kings
             daughters
             Robe
             .
             So
             did
             hee
             call
             the
             different
             customes
             of
             the
             Church
             .
          
           
             Eusebius
             in
             the
             5.
             booke
             of
             his
             historie
             ,
             recites
             an
             Epistles
             of
             Ireneus
             ,
             to
             Victor
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             ,
             wherein
             hee
             speakes
             of
             
             the
             diverse
             manners
             of
             fastings
             before
             Easter
             .
             
               There
               be
               some
            
             ,
             saith
             he
             ,
             
               which
               think
               they
               must
               not
               fast
               but
               one
               day
               ,
               others
               there
               be
               that
               fast
            
             2
             ,
             
               &
               some
               that
               fast
               more
               ,
               some
               measure
               their
               fasting
               daies
               by
            
             40.
             
               houres
               ,
               day
               and
               night
               .
               And
               this
               diversitie
               betweene
               the
               observers
               of
               the
               Easter
               fast
               ,
               began
               not
               from
               our
               time
               ,
               but
               long
               before
               ,
               from
               their
               time
               (
               as
               it
               is
               credible
               )
               which
               governing
               the
               Church
               without
               observing
               any
               exact
               rule
               ,
               did
               ,
               a
               little
               after
               ,
               turne
               that
               into
               a
               custome
               ,
               which
               was
               done
               in
               simplicitie
               ,
               and
               by
               particular
               observation
               .
               Neverthelesse
               they
               had
               all
               peace
               amongst
               themselues
               ,
               and
               we
               yet
               liue
               in
               peace
               together
               ,
            
             Agreeably
             to
             this
             in
             the
             passage
             of
             Tertullian
             aboue
             alleaged
             ,
             the
             Catholike
             Church
             maintaineth
             against
             the
             Montanists
             ,
             that
             since
             Iohn
             Baptists
             time
             ,
             fasts
             haue
             beene
             free
             ,
             and
             that
             there
             is
             no
             rule
             which
             binds
             vs
             to
             certaine
             fasts
             that
             wee
             must
             keepe
             in
             common
             .
             
               S.
               Basil
            
             in
             his
             two
             sermons
             of
             fasting
             ,
             speaking
             of
             the
             fast
             before
             Easter
             ,
             tels
             vs
             ,
             I
             knowe
             not
             how
             often
             ,
             that
             this
             Fast
             lasted
             not
             aboue
             5
             daies
             .
             
               Let
               the
               belly
            
             ,
             (
             saith
             he
             in
             his
             first
             Sermon
             )
             
               giue
               vs
               some
               time
               of
               truce
               ,
               and
               let
               that
               ,
               which
               is
               ever
               a
               craving
               ,
               bee
               at
               peace
               with
               vs
               for
               fiue
               daies
               .
            
             And
             towarde
             the
             ende
             of
             the
             homily
             ,
             hee
             
             sharply
             rebukes
             such
             ,
             as
             did
             vse
             before
             the
             fiue
             daies
             came
             ,
             to
             stuffe
             their
             guts
             with
             meate
             and
             wine
             ,
             to
             the
             ende
             they
             might
             fast
             the
             more
             easilie
             ,
             and
             haue
             their
             bellies
             filled
             with
             provision
             .
             And
             in
             the
             second
             Sermon
             .
             
               This
               is
               an
               ill
               mind
               ,
               because
               we
               hear
               of
               a
               fast
               to
               come
               of
            
             5
             
               daies
               ,
               therefore
               to
               make
               our selues
               drunke
               before
               hand
               .
            
          
           
             We
             may
             not
             omit
             the
             history
             of
             Alcibiades
             ,
             recited
             by
             Eusebius
             in
             the
             3.
             chapt
             .
             and
             5.
             booke
             of
             his
             historie
             .
             This
             Alcibiades
             did
             macerate
             his
             body
             by
             fasting
             ,
             living
             onely
             vpon
             bread
             and
             water
             ,
             even
             whilst
             he
             was
             in
             the
             prison
             :
             But
             it
             was
             told
             the
             Martyr
             Attalus
             by
             revelation
             ,
             that
             Alcibiades
             did
             ill
             in
             abstaining
             frō
             Gods
             creatures
             ,
             and
             did
             thereby
             scandalize
             his
             brethren
             ;
             Alcibiades
             being
             told
             hereof
             ,
             belieued
             it
             ,
             and
             did
             ever
             after
             that
             time
             eate
             of
             all
             meats
             indifferently
             ,
             and
             without
             feare
             ,
             and
             gaue
             God
             thanks
             for
             it
             .
          
           
             The
             historie
             of
             Spiridion
             ,
             related
             by
             Sozomen
             ,
             in
             the
             1.
             booke
             ,
             11.
             chap.
             witneseth
             that
             
               S.
               Spiridion
            
             ,
             and
             his
             houshold
             ,
             did
             eate
             no
             bread
             vpon
             fasting
             daies
             ,
             and
             that
             commanding
             his
             daughter
             to
             cover
             the
             table
             for
             a
             stranger
             ,
             which
             came
             suddenly
             vpon
             him
             ,
             shee
             answered
             him
             that
             
             there
             was
             no
             bread
             in
             the
             house
             ,
             for
             (
             it
             being
             as
             then
             a
             time
             of
             fast
             )
             it
             would
             haue
             beene
             superfluous
             .
             Notwithstanding
             all
             this
             Spiridion
             made
             her
             serue
             in
             a
             peece
             of
             porcke
             that
             he
             had
             left
             .
             But
             the
             stranger
             (
             brought
             vp
             belike
             in
             some
             superstitious
             place
             )
             told
             him
             that
             hee
             would
             not
             eate
             of
             it
             ,
             because
             he
             was
             a
             Christian.
             Then
             Spiridion
             replied
             ,
             
               But
               for
               this
               very
               reason
               thou
               shouldst
               the
               rather
               eate
               of
               it
               ,
               for
               God
               saith
               ,
               al
               things
               are
               cleane
               to
               the
               cleane
               ,
            
             and
             did
             eate
             thereof
             himselfe
             .
             He
             did
             not
             say
             ,
             
               eate
               of
               it
               ,
               for
               I
               haue
               nothing
               else
               in
               the
               house
               ,
               necessity
               may
               excuse
               thee
            
             ;
             But
             hee
             alleages
             the
             Apostles
             rule
             ,
             which
             had
             not
             beene
             lesse
             true
             ,
             although
             hee
             had
             had
             never
             ▪
             so
             much
             varietie
             of
             meate
             in
             the
             house
             :
             and
             he
             himselfe
             in
             eating
             thereof
             without
             any
             necessity
             ,
             &
             only
             to
             giue
             him
             an
             example
             ,
             shewes
             that
             there
             was
             no
             necessitie
             in
             this
             kinde
             of
             abstinencie
             .
          
           
             
               S.
               Austin
            
             in
             his
             33.
             chap.
             of
             the
             1.
             booke
             of
             the
             customs
             of
             the
             Church
             (
             speaking
             of
             the
             fasts
             of
             Romish
             and
             Easterne
             Monkes
             .
             which
             were
             all
             artizans
             ,
             every
             one
             getting
             his
             living
             by
             his
             trade
             )
             saith
             that
             none
             amongst
             them
             were
             put
             to
             any
             hard
             thing
             that
             they
             were
             not
             able
             to
             beare
             :
             
               There
               is
               
               no
               man
               which
               putteth
               a
               burden
               vpon
               any
               one
               that
               he
               shall
               refuse
               to
               carry
               ;
               and
               he
               is
               not
               cōdemned
               by
               others
               because
               he
               confesseth
               himselfe
               too
               weake
               to
               follow
               them
               ,
               for
               they
               haue
               not
               forgot
               ,
               how
               that
               all
               things
               are
               cleane
               to
               the
               cleane
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             And
             the
             whole
             Chapter
             is
             spent
             about
             this
             ,
             to
             shewe
             that
             when
             a
             faithfull
             man
             well
             informed
             ,
             doth
             refraine
             from
             certaine
             meats
             ,
             hee
             doth
             doe
             this
             for
             feare
             of
             offending
             the
             weake
             ,
             although
             he
             knowe
             well
             enough
             that
             it
             is
             a
             thing
             lawfull
             and
             indifferent
             in
             it selfe
             .
          
           
             This
             diversity
             of
             customes
             in
             diverse
             countries
             ,
             grounded
             vpon
             Christian
             libertie
             ,
             is
             set
             downe
             at
             large
             by
             Socrates
             in
             the
             22.
             chap.
             of
             the
             5
             booke
             of
             his
             history
             .
             Hee
             saith
             that
             they
             did
             not
             fast
             at
             Rome
             but
             3
             weekes
             before
             Easter
             excepting
             Saturday
             and
             Sunday
             .
             That
             in
             Sclavonia
             ,
             and
             Greece
             and
             Alexandria
             ,
             they
             fasted
             6.
             that
             in
             other
             places
             they
             fasted
             3
             times
             5
             daies
             ,
             at
             3
             severall
             times
             ,
             and
             yet
             that
             neverthelesse
             they
             did
             cal
             this
             Lent
             ,
             every
             one
             alleaging
             a
             diverse
             reason
             .
             That
             there
             was
             the
             like
             differēce
             in
             their
             fasting
             from
             meat
             .
             Some
             of
             them
             abstaining
             from
             all
             living
             creatures
             ,
             others
             feeding
             vpon
             fish
             only
             ,
             others
             eating
             fowle
             together
             with
             fish
             ,
             as
             which
             
             (
             according
             to
             Moses
             testimonie
             )
             were
             made
             out
             of
             the
             water
             .
             There
             bee
             some
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             which
             abstaine
             from
             the
             fruits
             of
             trees
             ,
             and
             from
             egges
             .
             And
             there
             bee
             some
             that
             tie
             rhemselues
             to
             eate
             nothing
             but
             bread
             .
             And
             againe
             ,
             there
             be
             some
             ,
             that
             eate
             no
             bread
             at
             all
             .
             Whence
             hee
             collects
             ,
             that
             
               since
               no
               man
               can
               shew
               any
               expresse
               commandement
               as
               concerning
               this
               ,
               it
               is
               evident
               that
               the
               Apostles
               did
               remit
               it
               to
               everie
               mans
               will
               and
               pleasure
               ,
               to
               the
               end
               every
               one
               might
               doe
               good
               ,
               but
               not
               through
               feare
               ,
               or
               by
               constraint
               .
            
             Neither
             can
             it
             be
             said
             ,
             that
             this
             which
             hee
             saith
             of
             Rome
             ,
             is
             contrary
             to
             
               S.
               Austin
            
             .
             in
             his
             86.
             and
             11.
             
             Epistles
             .
             where
             he
             saith
             ,
             that
             they
             fast
             at
             Rome
             vpon
             Saturday
             .
             For
             Austin
             speakes
             of
             the
             Saturdaies
             all
             the
             yeare
             long
             ,
             but
             Sozomene
             speakes
             only
             of
             the
             3
             last
             Saterdaies
             before
             Easter
             .
             And
             ,
             say
             hee
             were
             mistaken
             in
             this
             ,
             yet
             is
             it
             not
             likely
             ,
             but
             that
             hee
             told
             the
             truth
             of
             other
             Churches
             ,
             which
             he
             himselfe
             saw
             .
             Especially
             seeing
             that
             his
             testimonie
             is
             agreeable
             to
             so
             many
             witnesses
             aboue
             cited
             .
             To
             whom
             we
             will
             ioine
             
               S.
               Ambrose
            
             ,
             in
             his
             34.
             
             Sermon
             ,
             saying
             that
             in
             his
             time
             there
             were
             some
             which
             made
             their
             Lent
             to
             last
             20
             daies
             ,
             others
             30.
             by
             interchangeable
             weeks
             .
             Now
             
             as
             touching
             the
             fast
             before
             Easter
             ,
             the
             ancients
             doe
             not
             ranck
             it
             in
             the
             same
             degree
             ,
             as
             they
             do
             the
             other
             fasts
             of
             the
             yeare
             .
             For
             the
             Catholicke
             Church
             disputing
             against
             the
             Montanists
             in
             the
             10.
             
             Chapter
             of
             Tertullians
             booke
             of
             Fasts
             ,
             saith
             ,
             that
             those
             daies
             in
             the
             Gospell
             are
             markt
             out
             for
             fasting
             ,
             in
             which
             the
             bridegroome
             was
             takē
             away
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             the
             daies
             in
             which
             Iesus
             Christ
             suffered
             ,
             and
             was
             in
             his
             graue
             ;
             that
             all
             other
             daies
             are
             in
             a
             mans
             owne
             liberty
             .
             And
             
               S.
               Austin
            
             giues
             the
             selfesame
             reason
             for
             it
             in
             his
             86.
             
             Epistle
             to
             Casulan
             .
             Because
             Iesus
             Christ
             said
             in
             the
             9.
             of
             
               Saint
               Matthew
               ,
               that
               the
               day
               would
               come
               wherein
               the
               bridegroome
               should
               be
               taken
               away
               ,
               and
               then
               they
               should
               fast
               .
            
             This
             reason
             (
             ioined
             togither
             with
             the
             ancient
             custome
             ,
             witnessed
             by
             Irenaeus
             concerning
             this
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             many
             did
             fast
             40
             continuall
             howres
             before
             Easter
             )
             doth
             discover
             the
             very
             head
             spring
             and
             first
             beginning
             of
             Lent.
             That
             is
             ,
             that
             they
             thought
             themselues
             bound
             to
             fast
             40
             howres
             ,
             because
             Iesus
             Christ
             was
             for
             so
             long
             togither
             kept
             vnder
             death
             ,
             and
             that
             this
             was
             the
             time
             wherin
             the
             bridegroome
             was
             wanting
             .
             Which
             is
             likewise
             confirmed
             ,
             by
             that
             ancient
             custome
             of
             forbidding
             
             them
             to
             fast
             after
             Easter
             ,
             till
             whitsontide
             were
             past
             :
             because
             this
             was
             the
             time
             wherein
             the
             bridegroome
             was
             restored
             ,
             &
             did
             converse
             here
             on
             earth
             after
             his
             resurrection
             .
             But
             by
             little
             and
             little
             this
             fast
             began
             to
             be
             enlarged
             ,
             &
             men
             vsed
             to
             fast
             many
             daies
             before
             Easter
             ,
             some
             more
             ,
             some
             lesse
             .
             Till
             at
             last
             those
             40
             howres
             ,
             were
             turned
             into
             40
             daies
             .
          
           
             During
             this
             diversity
             of
             customes
             in
             divers
             countries
             ,
             wee
             never
             read
             that
             the
             bishop
             of
             Rome
             did
             take
             vpō
             him
             to
             correct
             other
             churches
             ,
             or
             ever
             laboured
             to
             bring
             the
             Greeke
             Church
             ,
             or
             that
             of
             Millan
             ,
             to
             the
             fashions
             of
             the
             church
             of
             Rome
             .
          
           
             But
             I
             cannot
             deny
             but
             that
             some
             of
             the
             ancient
             were
             excessiue
             in
             the
             praise
             of
             fasting
             .
             As
             Ambrose
             and
             Basill
             ,
             which
             killed
             himselfe
             with
             fasting
             ,
             making
             his
             body
             ,
             for
             a
             long
             time
             ,
             feeble
             ,
             and
             vnfit
             for
             his
             vocation
             by
             emulating
             Xerophagies
             a
             Monke
             of
             the
             desert
             .
             In
             their
             Homilies
             of
             Fasts
             ,
             they
             say
             that
             Adam
             fell
             because
             he
             did
             not
             fast
             .
             That
             it
             was
             fasting
             that
             hardned
             the
             bodies
             of
             the
             three
             children
             throwne
             into
             the
             fornace
             ,
             and
             made
             them
             not
             to
             bee
             burnt
             .
             That
             fasting
             gaue
             Daniels
             body
             a
             temper
             of
             steele
             so
             that
             the
             teeth
             of
             the
             Lyons
             
             could
             not
             bite
             him
             .
          
           
             And
             in
             
               S.
               Austins
            
             time
             these
             and
             such
             like
             scrupulous
             observations
             taking
             place
             ,
             this
             good
             servaunt
             of
             God
             complained
             of
             it
             .
             Behold
             what
             he
             saith
             in
             his
             119.
             
             Epistle
             .
             
               That
               which
               is
               brought
               vp
               besides
               the
               commō
               custome
               ,
               as
               though
               it
               were
               the
               observation
               of
               some
               sacrament
               ,
               I
               cannot
               approue
               of
               it
               ,
               although
               I
               dare
               not
               freely
               to
               reprehend
               it
               ,
               for
               feare
               of
               offending
               some
               persons
               ;
               either
               holy
               ,
               or
               turbulent
               .
               But
               I
               am
               much
               grieved
               at
               this
               that
               we
               set
               little
               by
               many
               wholsome
               doctrines
               contained
               in
               holy
               writ
               ,
               and
               all
               things
               are
               so
               full
               of
               presumption
               ,
               that
               he
               shall
               be
               more
               grievously
               reprehēded
               ,
               which
               during
               the
               Octaues
               shall
               touch
               the
               earth
               with
               his
               bare
               foote
               ,
               then
               hee
               that
               shall
               haue
               buried
               his
               vnderstanding
               in
               drunkennesse
               .
            
             And
             a
             little
             after
             speaking
             of
             such
             as
             did
             charge
             the
             church
             ,
             with
             many
             were
             observations
             ,
             &
             particularly
             with
             that
             of
             abstaining
             from
             flesh
             ,
             he
             saith
             .
             
               Although
               it
               cannot
               bee
               found
               that
               these
               things
               are
               contrary
               to
               the
               faith
               ,
               neverthelesse
               they
               lade
               religion
               with
               servile
               burdens
               (
               which
               God
               would
               haue
               to
               be
               free
               ,
               he
               himselfe
               laying
               nothing
               vpon
               it
               ,
               but
               the
               observations
               of
               the
               Sacraments
               ,
               which
               are
               but
               few
               ,
               neither
               yet
               obscure
               )
               in
               such
               sort
               ,
               that
               the
               condition
               of
               
               the
               Iewes
               is
               more
               tollerable
               .
               For
               although
               they
               knewe
               not
               the
               time
               of
               libertie
               ,
               so
               it
               is
               ,
               that
               they
               were
               subiect
               onely
               to
               the
               burdens
               of
               the
               law
               ,
               and
               not
               to
               humane
               inv●ntions
               .
               But
               the
               Church
               of
               God
               ,
               mingled
               with
               much
               chaff
               and
               many
               tares
               ,
               suffereth
               many
               things
               .
               But
               she
               approues
               not
               of
               that
               which
               is
               against
               the
               faith
               ,
               or
               a
               good
               life
               ,
               neither
               doth
               she
               conceale
               it
               ,
               nor
               yet
               doe
               it
               .
               Wherefore
               ,
               that
               which
               thou
               wrotest
               vnto
               mee
               ,
               that
               there
               bee
               some
               which
               doe
               abstaine
               from
               flesh
               ,
               thinking
               those
               to
               bee
               vncleane
               which
               eate
               of
               it
               ,
               is
               manifestly
               against
               the
               faith
               ,
               and
               sound
               doctrine
               .
            
             So
             did
             this
             good
             servant
             of
             God
             ,
             suffer
             that
             with
             griefe
             ,
             which
             hee
             coulde
             not
             amend
             .
             Although
             the
             slaverie
             and
             burdens
             of
             which
             he
             complaineth
             ,
             were
             nothing
             in
             respect
             of
             ours
             now
             adaies
             .
             He
             himselfe
             in
             the
             118
             Epistle
             ,
             telleth
             vs
             that
             hee
             followeth
             the
             counsel
             of
             Ambrose
             ,
             as
             of
             an
             oracle
             ,
             which
             is
             this
             .
             
               When
               I
               am
               at
               Rome
               I
               fast
               the
               saturday
               ,
               when
               I
               am
               here
               ,
               I
               doe
               not
               fast
               .
               So
               thou
               ,
               to
               what
               Church
               soever
               thou
               shalt
               come
               by
               chance
               ,
               conforme
               thy selfe
               to
               the
               customes
               thereof
               ,
               if
               thou
               wilt
               not
               bee
               a
               scandall
               to
               any
               body
               ,
               nor
               haue
               any
               one
               to
               bee
               a
               scandall
               vnto
               thee
               .
            
          
           
             The
             abuses
             which
             followe
             ,
             are
             more
             
             grosse
             yet
             ,
             and
             farther
             remote
             from
             the
             ancient
             simplicitie
             .
             For
             the
             Ancients
             did
             not
             thinke
             that
             their
             fasts
             were
             payments
             to
             God
             ,
             to
             satisfie
             for
             the
             paine
             due
             to
             our
             sinnes
             .
             This
             is
             a
             strange
             kind
             of
             fashion
             ,
             for
             a
             man
             to
             pay
             his
             debts
             with
             fasting
             ,
             as
             if
             a
             creditour
             should
             abate
             his
             debtour
             10
             crownes
             for
             every
             day
             he
             should
             fast
             .
             Hee
             that
             thinkes
             that
             God
             is
             contented
             with
             this
             ,
             dreames
             of
             an
             easie
             composition
             ,
             and
             payes
             him
             but
             in
             light
             mony
             .
             I
             cōfesse
             that
             God
             hath
             wrought
             many
             deliuerances
             for
             them
             that
             haue
             fasted
             :
             but
             our
             adversaries
             doe
             wrong
             to
             attribute
             that
             to
             the
             vertue
             of
             fasting
             ,
             which
             was
             meant
             by
             God
             to
             faith
             and
             prayer
             ,
             that
             doe
             sanctifie
             fasting
             .
             And
             they
             may
             doe
             well
             to
             remember
             the
             *
             Pharisee
             ,
             who
             was
             sent
             away
             ,
             although
             he
             fasted
             twice
             a
             weeke
             ,
             and
             gaue
             God
             to
             vnderstand
             of
             his
             workes
             of
             supererogation
             .
          
           
             Aboue
             all
             ,
             they
             haue
             a
             good
             grace
             ,
             to
             make
             one
             man
             fast
             for
             another
             ,
             and
             they
             would
             haue
             me
             belieue
             ,
             that
             God
             wil
             pardon
             my
             sinnes
             ,
             because
             my
             neighbor
             hath
             fasted
             for
             me
             .
             There
             is
             no
             iudge
             so
             foolishly
             connivent
             ,
             that
             will
             pardon
             a
             crime
             to
             any
             one
             ,
             in
             consideration
             that
             his
             brother
             
             hath
             not
             dined
             .
             But
             that
             which
             we
             would
             iudge
             an
             intolerable
             sottishnesse
             in
             a
             man
             ,
             shall
             we
             thinke
             this
             fitting
             for
             God
             ?
             For
             the
             Pope
             would
             haue
             him
             to
             rest
             contented
             with
             this
             .
             And
             they
             that
             are
             not
             in
             the
             humour
             of
             fasting
             ,
             loue
             rather
             to
             borrowe
             it
             of
             others
             ,
             &
             to
             change
             their
             bodily
             fast
             ,
             into
             a
             pecuniarie
             mulct
             .
             They
             wil
             say
             therefore
             to
             some
             religious
             person
             ,
             fast
             for
             mee
             ,
             and
             I
             will
             content
             thee
             .
             And
             that
             which
             is
             thus
             given
             to
             Monkes
             shall
             bee
             called
             an
             almes
             ,
             although
             they
             be
             never
             so
             rich
             .
             This
             pretty
             doctrine
             is
             taught
             in
             the
             Canon
             ,
             Presbyter
             ,
             in
             the
             82
             distinction
             .
             
               He
               may
               redeeme
               the
               moonday
               fast
               ,
               if
               need
               be
               ,
               by
               singing
               a
               Psalme
               ,
               or
               giuing
               a
               penny
               to
               the
               poore
               .
            
             And
             the
             glosse
             of
             the
             Doctors
             herevpon
             .
             
               Hee
               may
               free
               himselfe
               from
               fast
               by
               giving
               a
               peny
               ;
               wherefore
               by
               a
               greater
               reason
               he
               may
               bee
               freed
               by
               others
               fasting
               for
               him
               .
               Because
               also
               that
               the
               fasting
               of
               the
               living
               is
               availeable
               for
               the
               dead
               .
            
             Agreeable
             to
             the
             Canon
             .
             Animae
             ,
             in
             the
             13.
             
             Cause
             ,
             &
             2.
             
             Question
             .
             
               The
               soules
               of
               the
               dead
               are
               delivered
               by
            
             4
             
               means
               ;
               either
               by
               the
               oblation
               of
               Priestes
               ,
               or
               by
               the
               praiers
               of
               the
               Saints
               ,
               or
               by
               the
               almes
               of
               their
               friends
               ,
               or
               else
               by
               the
               fastings
               of
               their
               kindred
               and
               allies
               .
            
             It
             is
             Pope
             Gregorie
             which
             
             speakes
             this
             ,
             who
             belieued
             that
             the
             soules
             were
             in
             Purgatory
             ,
             some
             in
             hot
             houses
             ,
             others
             vnder
             the
             leaues
             of
             trees
             ,
             others
             in
             rivers
             ,
             and
             hee
             was
             much
             troubled
             how
             to
             get
             them
             out
             thence
             .
             Now
             I
             say
             that
             if
             the
             fasting
             of
             the
             living
             doe
             refresh
             them
             ,
             their
             feasting
             also
             must
             burne
             and
             torment
             thē
             .
             Track
             mee
             but
             any
             footing
             of
             al
             these
             opinions
             in
             the
             3
             or
             4
             first
             ages
             .
          
           
             Or
             else
             of
             that
             proper
             custome
             ,
             whereby
             the
             Prelates
             that
             enioine
             fasts
             doe
             dispense
             with
             them
             ,
             giuing
             these
             dispensations
             not
             to
             the
             poore
             but
             to
             their
             friends
             ,
             and
             such
             as
             are
             gracious
             with
             them
             .
             At
             Rome
             yee
             shall
             get
             letters
             of
             a
             perpetuall
             dispensation
             .
             In
             the
             booke
             of
             the
             Taxation
             of
             the
             Romish
             Chancerie
             ,
             formerly
             alleaged
             ,
             this
             article
             is
             found
             in
             the
             6.
             leafe
             .
             
               For
               that
               a
               lay
               man
               is
               not
               tyed
               to
               fast
               on
               the
               daies
               which
               are
               enioyned
               him
               by
               the
               Church
               ,
               and
               may
               eate
               cheese
               ,
               this
               letter
               costs
               twentie
               groats
               .
            
             If
             a
             poore
             man
             pay
             it
             ,
             he
             shall
             for
             al
             that
             fast
             after
             he
             hath
             payd
             it
             .
          
           
             This
             being
             so
             ,
             it
             is
             no
             wonder
             ;
             if
             hee
             which
             giues
             dispensations
             to
             others
             ,
             doe
             take
             one
             for
             himselfe
             ,
             and
             if
             the
             Pope
             and
             Cardinals
             doe
             often
             dispense
             with
             themselues
             in
             these
             matters
             .
             For
             we
             are
             to
             know
             
             that
             in
             the
             25
             cause
             ,
             1.
             quest
             .
             in
             the
             Canon
             Ideo
             .
             vpon
             a
             question
             which
             some
             made
             ,
             whether
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             were
             subiect
             to
             the
             Statuts
             of
             Councells
             ,
             Pope
             Leo
             the
             fourth
             ,
             makes
             this
             answere
             .
             
               The
               holy
               Church
               of
               Rome
               giues
               all
               power
               ,
               and
               authoritie
               to
               the
               holy
               Canons
               ,
               but
               shee
               for
               her
               owne
               part
               is
               not
               bound
               ,
               nor
               tied
               to
               keepe
               them
               .
            
             And
             a
             little
             after
             hee
             saith
             that
             
               as
               Iesus
               did
               submit
               himselfe
               vnto
               the
               lawe
               ,
               and
               sometimes
               withstand
               it
               ,
               to
               shewe
               that
               hee
               was
               master
               of
               the
               law
               .
               So
               ,
            
             saith
             he
             ,
             
               the
               Bishops
               of
               the
               chiefe
               see
               ,
               respect
               the
               Canons
               made
               by
               themselues
               ,
               or
               others
               vnder
               their
               authoritie
               ,
               and
               do
               yeeld
               to
               keepe
               them
               ,
               that
               they
               might
               make
               them
               to
               be
               kept
               of
               others
               ;
               but
               sometimes
               too
               ,
               either
               in
               commanding
               or
               decreeing
               ,
               or
               by
               oppugning
               them
               ,
               they
               shew
               that
               they
               are
               Lords
               over
               the
               decrees
               ,
               and
               the
               makers
               of
               them
               .
            
             And
             a
             little
             after
             he
             saith
             ,
             
               that
               the
               Church
               of
               Rome
               giveth
               it selfe
               speciall
               privileges
               ,
               against
               generall
               decrees
               .
            
          
           
             Herevnto
             adde
             the
             custome
             ,
             of
             making
             the
             people
             to
             go
             in
             procession
             to
             our
             Lady
             in
             the
             beginning
             of
             Lent
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             haue
             leaue
             to
             eate
             butter
             .
             As
             also
             the
             trick
             ,
             whereby
             they
             delude
             the
             ancient
             custome
             ,
             of
             eating
             nothing
             in
             Lent
             before
             evening
             .
             
             For
             now
             a
             daies
             they
             make
             the
             evening
             service
             to
             bee
             song
             before
             noone
             ,
             and
             afterwards
             eat
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             evening
             is
             past
             :
             And
             a
             thousand
             such
             like
             shifts
             ,
             which
             betraie
             not
             only
             abuse
             ,
             but
             mockery
             too
             ;
             to
             the
             ende
             that
             the
             prophecy
             of
             the
             Apostle
             might
             be
             fulfilled
             ,
             when
             he
             saith
             ,
             that
             this
             error
             shall
             be
             taught
             thorough
             hypocrisie
             ,
             and
             by
             such
             as
             haue
             their
             consciences
             seared
             with
             an
             hot
             yron
             .
             And
             doubt
             not
             ,
             but
             ,
             if
             that
             we
             had
             not
             opposed
             our selues
             against
             the
             tyranny
             of
             the
             Pope
             ,
             which
             did
             daily
             encrease
             like
             a
             swelling
             torrent
             ,
             there
             had
             beene
             worse
             things
             seene
             .
             After
             that
             he
             had
             once
             got
             the
             kitchins
             and
             shambles
             vnder
             his
             dominion
             ;
             he
             tooke
             vpon
             him
             to
             make
             other
             lawes
             for
             attire
             ,
             and
             houshold
             stuffe
             ,
             so
             that
             a
             man
             might
             not
             lie
             vpon
             a
             matteresse
             ,
             nor
             weare
             silke
             ,
             nor
             presume
             to
             bath
             himselfe
             without
             some
             speciall
             dispēsation
             .
             And
             their
             booke
             of
             dispensation
             fees
             ,
             made
             a
             hundred
             yeares
             since
             ,
             doth
             sufficiently
             shew
             ,
             that
             they
             did
             even
             then
             begin
             to
             encroach
             vpon
             these
             things
             .
             For
             as
             then
             ,
             letters
             of
             dispensatiō
             for
             a
             Nunne
             to
             bath
             her selfe
             ,
             were
             prized
             at
             a
             certain
             rate
             And
             letters
             of
             dispensation
             for
             a
             lay
             man
             ,
             to
             study
             in
             the
             schooles
             ;
             and
             letters
             of
             dispensation
             
             for
             to
             bury
             a
             body
             in
             two
             sepulchres
             :
             and
             letters
             of
             dispensation
             for
             a
             mā
             to
             keep
             that
             which
             he
             had
             got
             vniustly
             .
             To
             conclude
             ,
             they
             amongst
             this
             people
             which
             do
             most
             hate
             vs
             ,
             may
             know
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             bound
             to
             vs
             ,
             for
             that
             little
             liberty
             which
             they
             do
             yet
             enioy
             .
          
        
      
       
         
           THE
           SECOND
           PROPHEcie
           contained
           in
           the
           2.
           
           Epistle
           of
           S.
           Paul
           to
           the
           Thessalonians
           .
           CHAP.
           2.
           
        
         
           
             
               3
               Let
               no
               man
               deceiue
               you
               by
               any
               means
               :
               for
               that
               day
               shall
               not
               come
               ,
               except
               there
               come
               a
               departing
               first
               ,
               and
               that
               the
               man
               of
               sinne
               be
               disclosed
               ,
               even
               the
               sonne
               of
               perdition
               .
            
             
               4
               Which
               is
               an
               adversary
               ,
               and
               exalteth
               himselfe
               against
               all
               that
               is
               called
               God
               ,
               or
               that
               is
               worshipped
               :
               so
               that
               hee
               doth
               sit
               as
               God
               in
               the
               temple
               of
               God.
               
            
             
               5
               Remember
               yee
               not
               ,
               that
               when
               I
               was
               yet
               with
               you
               ,
               I
               told
               you
               these
               things
               ?
            
             
               6
               And
               now
               yee
               know
               what
               withholdeth
               ,
               that
               he
               might
               be
               revealed
               in
               his
               time
               .
            
             
               7
               For
               the
               mysterie
               of
               iniquity
               doth
               already
               
               worke
               ,
               only
               he
               which
               now
               withholdeth
               ,
               shall
               let
               till
               he
               be
               taken
               out
               of
               the
               way
               .
            
             
               8
               And
               then
               shal
               that
               wicked
               man
               be
               revealed
               ,
               whom
               the
               Lorde
               shall
               consume
               with
               the
               spirit
               of
               his
               mouth
               ,
               and
               shall
               abolish
               with
               the
               brightnesse
               of
               his
               comming
               .
            
             
               9
               Euen
               him
               whose
               comming
               is
               by
               the
               effectuall
               working
               of
               Satan
               ,
               with
               all
               power
               ,
               and
               signes
               ,
               and
               lying
               wonders
               .
            
             
               10
               And
               in
               all
               deceiueablenesse
               of
               vnrighteousnesse
               among
               them
               that
               perish
               ,
               because
               they
               received
               not
               the
               loue
               of
               the
               truth
               ,
               that
               they
               might
               be
               saved
               .
            
             
               11
               And
               therefore
               God
               shall
               send
               them
               strong
               delusions
               ,
               that
               they
               should
               belieue
               lies
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             The
             vnfolding
             of
             this
             prophecy
             in
             manner
             of
             a
             Paraphrase
             .
          
           
             3
             LET
             no
             man
             by
             any
             meanes
             seduce
             you
             ,
             by
             seeking
             to
             perswade
             you
             that
             the
             day
             of
             iudgment
             is
             neere
             at
             han●
             .
             For
             this
             day
             shall
             not
             come
             ,
             till
             there
             be
             a
             generall
             backsliding
             ,
             whereby
             men
             shal
             fal
             from
             the
             true
             doctrine
             ;
             &
             that
             man
             of
             sin
             ,
             which
             is
             markt
             out
             to
             perdition
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             the
             bishop
             of
             Rome
             ,
             be
             disclosed
             .
          
           
             4
             Whō
             ye
             shall
             know
             by
             these
             marks
             
             He
             shall
             oppose
             himselfe
             against
             all
             that
             is
             called
             God
             ,
             and
             which
             is
             worshipped
             ;
             to
             wit
             against
             the
             true
             and
             highest
             God
             ,
             and
             against
             Emperours
             ,
             and
             Kings
             ,
             and
             Magistrates
             ,
             whom
             the
             holy
             scripture
             calleth
             Gods.
             Nay
             ,
             which
             is
             more
             ,
             he
             shall
             exalt
             himselfe
             aboue
             God
             ,
             and
             especially
             aboue
             that
             which
             is
             called
             God
             by
             Idolators
             ,
             till
             he
             shall
             haue
             got
             to
             be
             absolute
             commander
             over
             the
             church
             ,
             and
             be
             called
             the
             head
             thereof
             ,
             vsurping
             both
             the
             name
             and
             authority
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             5
             Remember
             you
             not
             ,
             that
             when
             I
             was
             yet
             with
             you
             ,
             I
             told
             you
             these
             things
             ?
          
           
             6
             And
             now
             yee
             know
             what
             it
             is
             that
             staieth
             his
             comming
             ,
             which
             shall
             come
             to
             passe
             ,
             at
             the
             time
             appointed
             ,
             &
             foreordained
             by
             God.
             
          
           
             7
             For
             the
             foundations
             of
             this
             son
             of
             perditions
             dominion
             are
             already
             laid
             .
             And
             Satan
             doth
             evē
             now
             draw
             out
             the
             threeds
             ,
             and
             spinne
             the
             beginnings
             of
             his
             doctrine
             ,
             which
             shall
             be
             woven
             togither
             by
             an
             abominable
             art
             ,
             and
             ful
             of
             wicked
             craft
             .
             There
             is
             nothing
             but
             one
             that
             hinders
             the
             disclosing
             hereof
             :
             that
             is
             ,
             the
             Romane
             Empire
             (
             which
             doeth
             nowe
             oversway
             the
             whole
             world
             )
             must
             remaine
             yet
             for
             a
             time
             ,
             and
             afterwards
             
             be
             abolished
             .
          
           
             8
             And
             when
             this
             Roman
             Empire
             shal
             be
             destroyed
             ,
             then
             shall
             this
             bishop
             be
             fully
             disclosed
             ,
             and
             the
             Papall
             See
             shal
             be
             exalted
             by
             the
             ruines
             of
             the
             Empire
             ;
             which
             bishop
             ,
             God
             shall
             beat
             down
             ,
             and
             weaken
             by
             the
             preaching
             of
             his
             word
             ,
             but
             shal
             not
             destroy
             him
             vtterly
             til
             the
             last
             day
             of
             iudgement
             ,
             then
             when
             Iesus
             Christ
             shal
             come
             in
             glorie
             .
          
           
             9
             Which
             Pope
             shall
             come
             fortified
             with
             the
             might
             and
             efficacie
             of
             Satan
             ,
             with
             power
             ,
             and
             signes
             ,
             and
             false
             miracles
             ,
             serving
             to
             establish
             lyes
             .
          
           
             10
             Whereby
             such
             as
             are
             markt
             out
             to
             perdition
             ,
             shal
             be
             lewdly
             seduced
             ,
             because
             they
             haue
             not
             loved
             the
             truth
             of
             the
             Gospell
             ,
             which
             might
             haue
             saved
             them
             .
          
           
             11
             And
             therefore
             God
             will
             suffer
             thē
             to
             be
             seduced
             ,
             and
             to
             be
             driven
             into
             strong
             delusions
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             may
             beleeue
             lies
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             proofe
             of
             this
             exposition
             .
          
           
             He
             that
             in
             the
             texture
             of
             this
             whole
             discourse
             shall
             not
             see
             the
             Popes
             image
             ,
             &
             his
             doctrine
             ,
             and
             the
             meanes
             of
             his
             rising
             ,
             all
             set
             out
             in
             their
             true
             colours
             ,
             doth
             willingly
             
             erre
             ,
             and
             is
             blind
             at
             noone
             daie
             .
             For
             we
             bring
             no
             bold
             coniectures
             ;
             and
             our
             explications
             are
             not
             violent
             or
             forced
             ,
             but
             naturall
             ,
             and
             such
             as
             do
             of
             their
             owne
             accord
             offer
             themselues
             to
             our
             hands
             :
             such
             as
             doe
             not
             depart
             from
             the
             words
             of
             the
             Apostle
             ,
             and
             are
             taught
             vs
             by
             experience
             .
             Whosoever
             wil
             cōtest
             about
             some
             particulars
             ,
             shal
             not
             thereby
             endammage
             the
             whole
             bodie
             of
             this
             Prophecie
             .
             For
             though
             hee
             moue
             some
             difficulties
             vpō
             certain
             verses
             here
             &
             there
             ,
             yet
             it
             is
             enough
             to
             stagger
             the
             most
             strongly
             opinionated
             ,
             when
             they
             shall
             see
             that
             all
             the
             peeces
             of
             this
             so
             long
             a
             Prophecie
             doe
             agree
             vpon
             one
             only
             man
             ,
             and
             that
             there
             is
             so
             good
             a
             correspondency
             betweene
             all
             the
             parts
             thereof
             :
             which
             shall
             appeare
             yet
             more
             manifestly
             by
             the
             proofs
             and
             by
             the
             difficulties
             which
             our
             adversaries
             moue
             to
             the
             contrary
             ;
             let
             vs
             therefore
             once
             more
             againe
             run
             over
             this
             Prophecy
             from
             the
             beginning
             ,
             and
             examine
             every
             particular
             thereof
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             first
             part
             of
             this
             Prophecie
             .
          
           
             3
             LEt
             no
             man
             deceaue
             you
             by
             any
             meanes
             ;
             for
             that
             day
             shall
             not
             come
             except
             there
             
             be
             a
             departing
             first
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             man
             of
             sin●●
             be
             disclosed
             ,
             even
             the
             sonne
             of
             perdition
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Exposition
             .
          
           
             3
             LEt
             no
             man
             by
             any
             meanes
             seduce
             you
             ,
             by
             seeking
             to
             perswade
             you
             that
             the
             day
             of
             iudgement
             is
             neere
             at
             hād
             .
             For
             this
             day
             shall
             not
             come
             till
             there
             bee
             a
             generall
             departing
             ,
             whereby
             men
             shall
             fall
             from
             the
             true
             doctrine
             ,
             and
             that
             man
             of
             sinne
             which
             is
             markt
             out
             to
             perdition
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             ,
             be
             disclosed
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             proofe
             of
             this
             Exposition
             .
          
           
             MAny
             ,
             being
             either
             led
             by
             curiosity
             ,
             or
             spurred
             on
             by
             impatience
             ,
             affirmed
             that
             the
             day
             of
             the
             Lord
             was
             hard
             at
             hand
             .
             Whose
             over
             rash
             and
             headlong
             forwardnes
             ,
             is
             here
             staied
             by
             the
             Apostle
             ,
             telling
             them
             that
             this
             day
             shall
             not
             come
             till
             there
             be
             a
             falling
             away
             .
             What
             manner
             of
             falling
             away
             this
             is
             ,
             he
             himselfe
             telleth
             vs
             in
             that
             *
             Prophecy
             of
             his
             ,
             which
             wee
             haue
             formerly
             touched
             ;
             telling
             vs
             before
             hand
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             latter
             time
             many
             shall
             fall
             away
             from
             the
             faith
             .
             And
             so
             did
             some
             of
             the
             Ancient
             
             vnderstand
             it
             ;
             
               Primasius
               ,
               Chrysostome
            
             and
             Theodoret
             ,
             whom
             ,
             his
             Maiestie
             of
             England
             ,
             followes
             .
             There
             be
             some
             that
             vnderstand
             it
             ,
             of
             the
             peoples
             falling
             away
             ,
             from
             vnder
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             .
             And
             so
             do
             some
             of
             the
             Ancient
             :
             which
             also
             agreeth
             with
             the
             event
             .
             For
             we
             shall
             see
             anon
             how
             that
             the
             papacy
             increased
             by
             the
             decreasing
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             greatnesse
             thereof
             was
             built
             vpon
             the
             ruines
             of
             the
             Empire
             .
          
           
             The
             head
             and
             chiefe
             cause
             of
             this
             falling
             away
             from
             the
             faith
             ,
             is
             by
             the
             Apostle
             S.
             Paule
             ,
             called
             the
             man
             of
             sinne
             ,
             &
             sonne
             of
             perdition
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             vsuall
             forme
             of
             speech
             in
             Scripture
             ,
             which
             calleth
             a
             bloody
             man
             ,
             a
             man
             of
             blood
             .
             And
             those
             the
             children
             of
             hell
             ,
             which
             are
             markt
             out
             for
             hell
             .
             So
             the
             man
             of
             sinne
             ,
             and
             the
             sonne
             of
             perdition
             ,
             signifie
             ,
             a
             man
             that
             is
             a
             notorious
             sinner
             ,
             and
             such
             a
             one
             as
             is
             markt
             out
             vnto
             perdition
             .
          
           
             That
             these
             qualities
             ,
             some
             ages
             since
             ,
             were
             fitting
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             ,
             no
             man
             can
             doubt
             that
             hath
             read
             the
             writings
             ,
             not
             of
             their
             enimies
             ,
             but
             even
             of
             their
             owne
             servants
             that
             haue
             most
             respected
             them
             .
             Never
             was
             there
             man
             that
             did
             more
             prostitute
             himselfe
             to
             vphold
             the
             Popes
             power
             
             then
             Baronius
             did
             .
             And
             yet
             see
             his
             own
             words
             in
             the
             yeare
             912.
             and
             8.
             article
             .
             
               With
               what
               face
               did
               the
               Church
               of
               Rome
               then
               look
               ,
               and
               how
               ilfavoredly
               ?
               then
               ,
               when
               famous
               queanes
               ,
               and
               lewd
               strumpets
               did
               domineere
               at
               Rome
               ?
               at
               whose
               pleasure
               Church
               livings
               were
               bestowsd
               ,
               Bishopricks
               given
               ,
               and
               that
               which
               is
               horrible
               to
               heare
               ,
               and
               not
               to
               bee
               spoken
               ,
               their
               louers
               ,
               false
               Popes
               ,
               thrust
               into
               the
               seat
               of
               Peter
               .
            
             It
             would
             bee
             long
             to
             repeate
             the
             whole
             passage
             ;
             till
             at
             last
             hee
             breakes
             out
             ,
             and
             asketh
             ,
             
               What
               Priests
               ,
               and
               Deacons
               Cardinals
               do
               yee
               thinke
               were
               chosen
               by
               these
               monsters
            
             ?
             And
             hee
             complaineth
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             did
             sleepe
             ,
             Now
             hee
             speakes
             of
             such
             a
             great
             number
             of
             wicked
             &
             vitious
             Popes
             that
             it
             should
             seeme
             by
             his
             reckoning
             ,
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             slept
             a
             long
             time
             .
             Platina
             in
             the
             life
             of
             Benedict
             the
             4.
             saith
             ,
             
               The
               liberty
               of
               sinning
               hath
               begot
               vs
               these
               monsters
               ,
               and
               prodigies
               ,
               which
               by
               ambition
               and
               corruption
               ,
               haue
               rather
               vsurpt
               ,
               thē
               possest
               the
               holy
               chaire
               of
               Peter
               ,
               no
               Prince
               repressing
               the
               wickednesse
               of
               these
               men
               .
            
             Nay
             I
             dare
             affirme
             ,
             that
             the
             histories
             of
             Emperours
             ,
             and
             Pagan
             kings
             ,
             written
             by
             their
             enimies
             ,
             or
             by
             strangers
             ,
             doe
             not
             speake
             so
             ill
             of
             them
             ,
             as
             the
             histories
             of
             the
             Popes
             ,
             written
             by
             their
             owne
             
             servants
             ,
             and
             flatterers
             ,
             doe
             speake
             ill
             of
             Popes
             .
             From
             the
             yeare
             870.
             to
             the
             yeare
             1050.
             
             You
             see
             none
             but
             Necromancers
             ,
             but
             Adulterers
             ,
             and
             Murderers
             ,
             and
             infamous
             persons
             preferred
             to
             the
             Papacy
             :
             Every
             one
             knowes
             the
             complaints
             of
             Bernard
             ,
             of
             Petrarke
             ,
             of
             Mantuan
             ,
             bewailing
             the
             corruption
             ,
             &
             bad
             report
             of
             the
             Court
             of
             Rome
             .
             If
             these
             witnesses
             bee
             not
             of
             authoritie
             enough
             ,
             at
             least
             I
             hope
             Popes
             thēselues
             shall
             bee
             beleeued
             herein
             .
             
               Aeneas
               Sylvius
            
             otherwise
             called
             
               Pius
               secundus
            
             in
             the
             66.
             
             Epist
             to
             
               Iohn
               Peregall
            
             ,
             speaks
             thus
             .
             
               The
               court
               of
               Rome
               giues
               nothing
               without
               mony
               ;
               yea
               the
               imposition
               of
               hands
               ,
               &
               the
               gifts
               of
               the
               holy
               Ghost
               are
               sold
               ;
               and
               the
               remission
               of
               sinnes
               is
               communicated
               vnto
               none
               ,
               that
               haue
               not
               wherewithall
               to
               pay
               for
               it
               .
            
             Where
             is
             the
             man
             that
             durst
             now
             adaies
             speake
             so
             boldly
             as
             
               S.
               Bernard
            
             did
             in
             his
             125.
             
             Epistle
             .
             
               The
               beast
            
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             
               of
               the
               Apocalyps
               ,
               to
               whome
               a
               mouth
               was
               given
               speaking
               blasphemy
               ,
               and
               to
               make
               warre
               vpon
               the
               Saints
               ,
               doth
               possesse
               the
               Chaire
               of
               S.
               Peter
               ,
               as
               a
               Lyon
               prepared
               for
               the
               pray
               .
            
             I
             will
             annex
             one
             passage
             out
             of
             the
             Canonists
             ,
             which
             haue
             glozed
             the
             decretals
             ,
             in
             the
             title
             of
             Election
             ,
             and
             6.
             
             Chap.
             Their
             wordes
             are
             .
             
               Rome
               built
               at
               first
               by
               
               theeues
               ,
               doth
               yet
               retaine
               the
               smacke
               of
               her
               first
               religion
               ,
               being
               called
               Roma
               quasi
               rodens
               manus
               .
            
             It
             must
             needs
             be
             that
             this
             evill
             was
             great
             ,
             seeing
             that
             in
             a
             booke
             so
             publike
             &
             authenticall
             ,
             which
             containes
             all
             the
             laws
             and
             Statuts
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             ,
             these
             doctors
             did
             insert
             such
             things
             to
             their
             owne
             shame
             .
             To
             be
             briefe
             ,
             if
             this
             be
             humanitie
             ,
             to
             cause
             70000
             persons
             ,
             within
             a
             few
             daies
             to
             be
             murdered
             in
             a
             massacre
             in
             France
             ;
             If
             this
             bee
             chastitie
             ,
             to
             establish
             Stewes
             at
             Rome
             :
             If
             this
             bee
             humilitie
             ,
             to
             make
             Emperours
             and
             Kings
             kisse
             his
             feet
             :
             If
             this
             be
             fidelitie
             ,
             to
             dispense
             with
             vowes
             and
             oaths
             ;
             If
             this
             be
             religion
             ,
             to
             weare
             the
             crosse
             of
             Christ
             vpon
             his
             Pantophle
             :
             If
             this
             be
             liberalitie
             ,
             to
             set
             the
             absolutions
             from
             sin
             ,
             and
             *
             dispensations
             for
             ill
             doing
             ,
             at
             a
             certaine
             price
             of
             money
             ,
             and
             to
             make
             expresse
             books
             thereof
             ;
             I
             am
             then
             content
             that
             we
             be
             said
             to
             haue
             done
             his
             Holinesse
             wrong
             by
             calling
             him
             the
             man
             of
             sinne
             .
          
           
             As
             for
             the
             title
             of
             the
             sonne
             of
             perdition
             ,
             it
             is
             not
             our
             parts
             to
             giue
             iudgement
             vpon
             any
             body
             ,
             or
             positiuely
             to
             define
             what
             men
             are
             damned
             :
             but
             wee
             pray
             to
             God
             to
             shew
             mercy
             to
             these
             Popes
             ,
             which
             haue
             bathed
             their
             handes
             in
             our
             bloud
             .
             
             Howbeit
             *
             Platina
             the
             Popes
             servant
             and
             Secretarie
             ,
             speaking
             of
             their
             vices
             ,
             doth
             as
             it
             were
             despaire
             of
             their
             salvation
             ,
             saying
             .
             
               Our
               vices
               are
               growne
               to
               that
               heigth
               ,
               that
               they
               will
               hardly
               ever
               find
               mercy
               in
               the
               sight
               of
               God.
               
            
          
           
             Now
             here
             .
             least
             our
             adversaries
             should
             perplex
             vs
             ,
             we
             are
             to
             knowe
             that
             the
             Apostle
             doth
             not
             say
             ,
             that
             there
             must
             of
             necessitie
             be
             a
             generall
             departure
             ,
             before
             the
             son
             of
             perdition
             be
             revealed
             ,
             so
             that
             when
             hee
             shall
             once
             come
             ,
             there
             shall
             no
             more
             faithfull
             men
             be
             left
             in
             the
             world
             :
             It
             is
             enough
             for
             the
             fulfilling
             of
             his
             Prophecie
             ,
             that
             this
             departure
             be
             begun
             ,
             and
             haue
             already
             gathered
             some
             little
             strength
             ,
             then
             ,
             when
             the
             sonne
             of
             perdition
             shall
             be
             disclosed
             ;
             of
             which
             departure
             hee
             shall
             make
             himselfe
             the
             head
             ,
             and
             seeke
             to
             increase
             it
             with
             all
             his
             power
             ;
             which
             yet
             shall
             never
             bee
             so
             great
             ,
             but
             that
             there
             shall
             be
             some
             faithfull
             men
             in
             the
             world
             ,
             left
             hid
             amidst
             this
             great
             corruption
             .
          
           
             Moreouer
             ,
             wee
             neede
             not
             wonder
             that
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             ,
             is
             called
             the
             man
             of
             sinne
             ,
             in
             the
             singular
             ,
             though
             there
             be
             many
             of
             them
             ,
             one
             after
             another
             .
             For
             we
             speak
             so
             commonly
             ,
             and
             say
             that
             the
             Emperour
             
             goeth
             before
             kings
             ,
             although
             there
             be
             many
             successiue
             Emperours
             .
             So
             our
             adversaries
             say
             that
             the
             Pope
             is
             the
             head
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             and
             not
             the
             Popes
             ,
             because
             there
             is
             but
             one
             at
             a
             time
             .
             In
             France
             wee
             vse
             to
             say
             that
             the
             king
             dieth
             not
             ,
             because
             that
             by
             the
             king
             ,
             wee
             doe
             not
             vnderstand
             Henry
             ,
             or
             Lewis
             ,
             but
             a
             continuall
             descent
             of
             kings
             ,
             one
             succeding
             the
             other
             So
             in
             the
             7.
             and
             8.
             chapter
             of
             Daniell
             a
             continuall
             succession
             of
             kings
             ,
             is
             represented
             by
             one
             only
             beast
             ,
             which
             appeareth
             yet
             more
             plainely
             in
             the
             8.
             chapter
             20.
             verse
             .
             
               The
               ramme
               which
               thou
               sawest
               having
               two
               hornes
               ,
               are
               the
               kings
               of
               the
               Medes
            
             and
             Persians
             .
             And
             in
             the
             verse
             following
             ,
             the
             kings
             of
             Greece
             are
             figured
             by
             a
             Goat
             ,
             the
             horn
             of
             which
             signifieth
             the
             first
             king
             .
             The
             Greeke
             article
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             which
             is
             singular
             ,
             doth
             most
             vsually
             signifie
             an
             indefinite
             person
             :
             as
             in
             the
             2.
             to
             Timothy
             ,
             and
             3.
             chap.
             where
             it
             is
             also
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             &c.
             that
             the
             man
             of
             God
             may
             be
             absolute
             ,
             where
             this
             word
             ,
             
               The
               man
            
             ,
             is
             aswell
             ,
             as
             in
             this
             prophecie
             ,
             taken
             indefinitely
             ,
             and
             applyed
             to
             diverse
             men
             a
             part
             .
             And
             so
             Matthew
             the
             18.
             verse
             17.
             
             
               Let
               him
               be
               vnto
               thee
               ,
               as
               the
               heathē
               man
               ,
               or
               publican
               ,
            
             although
             there
             were
             a
             
             great
             number
             of
             this
             sort
             ;
             and
             so
             shall
             wee
             finde
             it
             often
             .
             But
             if
             the
             sonne
             of
             perdition
             were
             but
             one
             only
             man
             that
             were
             yet
             to
             come
             ,
             how
             shall
             the
             saying
             of
             the
             Apostle
             stand
             ,
             who
             presently
             vpon
             this
             telleth
             vs
             ,
             that
             the
             mystery
             of
             iniquity
             did
             even
             then
             in
             his
             time
             begin
             to
             worke
             ,
             for
             to
             prepare
             his
             way
             ?
             Is
             it
             credible
             that
             5.
             or
             700.
             yeares
             should
             bee
             imployed
             about
             the
             producing
             one
             only
             man
             ,
             which
             should
             not
             last
             aboue
             3.
             yeares
             ,
             and
             some
             few
             moneths
             ?
             Or
             that
             the
             mysterie
             of
             iniquity
             shoulde
             even
             then
             begin
             to
             worke
             ,
             and
             that
             this
             man
             shoulde
             not
             yet
             be
             revealed
             ?
             Especially
             seeing
             that
             our
             adversaries
             make
             Antichrist
             to
             bee
             ●
             Iew
             ,
             of
             the
             tribe
             of
             Dan
             ,
             and
             which
             shall
             build
             vp
             Ierusalem
             againe
             ,
             whereas
             we
             see
             no
             preparations
             for
             all
             this
             ,
             so
             that
             by
             their
             reckoning
             the
             mysterie
             of
             iniquity
             should
             bee
             lesse
             prepared
             nowe
             then
             it
             was
             in
             the
             Apostles
             time
             .
             But
             if
             any
             one
             thinke
             it
             strange
             ,
             that
             
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
            
             which
             was
             but
             one
             person
             ,
             should
             bee
             a
             figure
             of
             divers
             successiue
             persons
             ,
             Let
             him
             remember
             that
             many
             high
             Priests
             one
             succeeding
             the
             other
             ,
             were
             the
             figures
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             which
             yet
             neverthelesse
             was
             but
             one
             person
             .
             And
             yet
             the
             reason
             is
             alike
             on
             both
             
             sides
             .
             Besides
             ,
             Antiochus
             is
             not
             the
             figure
             of
             many
             at
             a
             time
             ,
             seeing
             there
             is
             never
             but
             one
             Pope
             at
             the
             same
             time
             .
          
           
             Neither
             ,
             can
             so
             great
             a
             dominion
             over
             so
             many
             nations
             (
             got
             ,
             not
             by
             any
             exploite
             of
             war
             ,
             but
             by
             guile
             ,
             as
             the
             Apocalyps
             foretels
             vs
             in
             the
             17.
             ch
             .
             )
             be
             the
             work
             of
             one
             only
             man
             ,
             much
             lesse
             of
             such
             a
             one
             ,
             that
             shall
             raigne
             but
             3.
             yeares
             and
             an
             halfe
             ;
             this
             is
             a
             worke
             of
             many
             ages
             ;
             that
             which
             followes
             ,
             sutes
             with
             this
             ,
             and
             is
             full
             of
             perspicuity
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             second
             part
             of
             this
             prophecie
             .
          
           
             4
             Which
             is
             an
             adversarie
             ,
             and
             exalteth
             himselfe
             against
             all
             that
             is
             called
             God
             ,
             or
             that
             is
             worshipped
             :
             so
             that
             he
             doth
             sit
             as
             God
             in
             the
             temple
             of
             God
             ,
             shewing
             himselfe
             that
             hee
             is
             God.
             
          
           
             5
             Remember
             yee
             not
             that
             whē
             I
             was
             yet
             with
             you
             ,
             I
             told
             you
             these
             things
             ?
          
        
         
           
             The
             exposition
             .
          
           
             4
             Whom
             yee
             shall
             know
             by
             these
             markes
             .
             He
             shal
             oppose
             himselfe
             against
             all
             that
             is
             called
             God
             ,
             and
             which
             is
             worshipped
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             against
             the
             true
             ,
             and
             highest
             God
             ,
             and
             against
             
             Emperours
             ,
             and
             kings
             ,
             &
             magistrates
             ,
             whom
             the
             holy
             scripture
             calleth
             Gods.
             Nay
             ,
             which
             is
             more
             ,
             he
             shall
             exalt
             himselfe
             aboue
             God
             ,
             and
             especially
             aboue
             that
             which
             is
             called
             God
             by
             Idolatours
             ,
             till
             he
             shall
             haue
             got
             to
             be
             absolute
             commander
             over
             the
             Church
             ,
             and
             be
             called
             the
             head
             thereof
             ,
             vsurping
             both
             the
             name
             and
             authority
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             5
             Remember
             yee
             not
             that
             whē
             I
             was
             yet
             with
             you
             ,
             I
             told
             you
             these
             things
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             proofe
             of
             this
             exposition
             .
          
           
             The
             proofe
             of
             this
             exposition
             consisteth
             in
             fiue
             pointes
             .
          
           
             1
             To
             shew
             that
             the
             Pope
             calleth
             himselfe
             God
             ,
             &
             taketh
             the
             authority
             of
             God
             vpon
             him
             .
          
           
             2
             That
             hee
             doth
             exalt
             himselfe
             aboue
             God
             ,
             and
             especially
             aboue
             that
             which
             is
             called
             God
             by
             Idolatours
             .
          
           
             3
             That
             hee
             doth
             oppose
             himselfe
             against
             God.
             
          
           
             4
             That
             hee
             doth
             oppose
             himselfe
             against
             kings
             ,
             and
             princes
             ,
             and
             magistrates
             .
          
           
             5
             That
             he
             calleth
             himselfe
             the
             head
             of
             the
             church
             vniversall
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             The
             first
             point
             .
          
           
             That
             the
             Pope
             names
             himselfe
             God
             ,
             and
             is
             so
             called
             by
             his
             favourites
             ,
             this
             is
             a
             common
             thing
             ,
             whereof
             the
             Popes
             Decrees
             ,
             &
             the
             coūcels
             where
             he
             sat
             as
             chiefe
             ,
             are
             full
             .
             The
             Canon
             .
             Satis
             ,
             in
             the
             96.
             
             Distinction
             ,
             speakes
             thus
             .
             
               It
               is
               manifestly
               seene
               that
               the
               Pope
               can
               in
               no
               wise
               ,
               neither
               be
               vnbound
               ,
               nor
               bound
               by
               any
               secular
               power
               ;
               who
               is
               knowne
               to
               haue
               bin
               called
               God
               ,
               by
               the
               religious
               Prince
               Constantine
               before
               mentioned
               :
               now
               it
               is
               apparant
               ,
               that
               God
               cannot
               be
               iudged
               by
               men
               .
            
             He
             excludes
             princes
             therefore
             from
             the
             title
             of
             God
             ,
             that
             he
             may
             reserue
             it
             to
             himselfe
             ;
             and
             approving
             of
             Constantines
             saying
             which
             calleth
             him
             God
             ,
             thence
             inferreth
             that
             the
             Pope
             may
             not
             bee
             iudged
             by
             any
             person
             .
             Where
             we
             are
             to
             note
             by
             the
             way
             ,
             that
             Constantine
             in
             the
             councell
             of
             Nice
             ,
             speaking
             to
             al
             the
             bishops
             present
             ,
             said
             vnto
             them
             ,
             
               Yee
               are
               Gods
            
             ,
             but
             never
             spake
             this
             in
             particular
             to
             the
             bishop
             of
             Rome
             .
          
           
             The
             glosse
             of
             the
             extrauagant
             ,
             
               cum
               inter
            
             of
             Iohn
             the
             22.
             hath
             these
             words
             .
             
               To
               thinke
               that
               our
               Lord
               God
               the
               Pope
               ,
               the
               author
               of
               the
               aforesaid
               Decretall
               ,
               and
               of
               this
               ,
               had
               no
               power
               to
               decree
               as
               he
               hath
               decreed
               ,
               would
               be
               iudged
               
               an
               heresie
               .
            
             Where
             we
             must
             note
             that
             the
             Cardinals
             ,
             &
             Doctors
             appointed
             by
             Pope
             Gregory
             the
             13.
             for
             the
             correcting
             of
             the
             Canons
             ,
             Decretals
             ,
             Clementines
             ,
             and
             ,
             Extravagants
             ,
             having
             corrected
             many
             other
             glosses
             ,
             do
             not
             touch
             this
             at
             all
             ,
             and
             were
             willing
             to
             haue
             it
             remaine
             as
             it
             is
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             last
             councell
             of
             Lateran
             ,
             and
             9.
             
             Session
             in
             the
             yeare
             1514.
             one
             of
             the
             secretaries
             of
             the
             Popes
             chamber
             speakes
             thus
             to
             Leo
             the
             10.
             
             
               The
               lookes
               of
               your
               divine
               maiestie
               ,
               with
               the
               beame-darting
               splendor
               of
               which
               ,
               my
               weake
               eies
               are
               dimmed
               ,
            
             which
             was
             inserted
             in
             the
             councell
             ,
             as
             good
             ,
             and
             warrantable
             ;
             For
             there
             must
             never
             any
             impieties
             bee
             put
             into
             councels
             ,
             without
             being
             found
             fault
             with
             .
             Nay
             which
             is
             more
             ,
             after
             that
             the
             said
             coūcel
             was
             written
             out
             ,
             Pope
             Leo
             approved
             of
             it
             ,
             and
             his
             approbation
             is
             set
             in
             the
             frontispice
             thereof
             :
             in
             the
             same
             *
             page
             the
             papall
             dignity
             ,
             is
             called
             ,
             
               Divinū
               imperium
            
             ,
             the
             
               kingdome
               of
               God.
            
             
          
           
             In
             the
             2.
             book
             of
             holy
             ceremonies
             7.
             section
             ,
             &
             6.
             chapter
             .
             There
             are
             these
             words
             ,
             
               The
               seate
               of
               God
               ,
               That
               is
               to
               say
               ,
               the
               Apostolical
               seat
               .
            
             And
             Steuchus
             likewise
             the
             Popes
             library
             keeper
             ,
             in
             his
             booke
             of
             the
             donation
             of
             Constantine
             ,
             saith
             that
             Constantine
             
             held
             Pope
             Sylvester
             for
             a
             God
             
               (
               &
               adoravit
               vt
               Deum
               )
               and
               worshipped
               him
               as
               God.
               
            
          
           
             In
             Italie
             vpon
             the
             gate
             of
             Tolentū
             there
             is
             this
             inscriptiō
             .
             
               to
               Paul
               the
            
             3.
             
               the
               most
               high
               and
               mighty
               God
               vpon
               earth
               .
            
             Vpon
             the
             triumphall
             arch
             ,
             erected
             to
             Pope
             Sixtus
             the
             4.
             as
             he
             entered
             in
             state
             into
             Rome
             ,
             there
             was
             this
             written
             
               
                 Oraclo
                 vocis
                 mundi
                 moderaris
                 habenas
              
               
                 Et
                 merito
                 in
                 terris
                 crederis
                 esse
                 Deus
                 .
              
               
                 This
                 lower
                 world
                 thy
                 sacred
                 words
                 do
                 sway
                 ,
              
               
                 Stile
                 thee
                 an
                 earthly
                 God
                 we
                 rightly
                 may
                 .
              
            
             Stapleton
             an
             English
             Iesuit
             in
             the
             preface
             of
             his
             booke
             ,
             of
             the
             principles
             ,
             of
             the
             doctrine
             of
             faith
             cals
             Gregory
             the
             13.
             
             
               Supremum
               ,
               plane
               supremum
               in
               terris
               numen
               .
            
             The
             supreame
             ,
             the
             most
             absolute
             supreame
             God
             vpon
             earth
             .
          
           
             And
             Coeffeteau
             denieth
             not
             this
             ,
             but
             saith
             that
             the
             Pope
             is
             God
             in
             the
             same
             sense
             that
             the
             scripture
             calleth
             kings
             ,
             and
             other
             powers
             by
             the
             name
             of
             Gods
             :
             an
             idle
             excuse
             ,
             and
             against
             the
             intent
             of
             his
             Holines
             For
             in
             the
             old
             testamēt
             ,
             this
             word
             of
             Gods
             is
             indeed
             attributed
             to
             Princes
             in
             the
             plurall
             .
             But
             for
             a
             mans
             selfe
             to
             attribute
             the
             name
             of
             God
             vnto
             himselfe
             in
             the
             singular
             ;
             this
             is
             a
             thing
             which
             no
             christiā
             prince
             
             nor
             prelate
             ever
             did
             .
             The
             bishop
             of
             Rome
             is
             the
             first
             ,
             who
             some
             ages
             since
             began
             to
             vsurpe
             this
             title
             .
          
           
             We
             are
             also
             to
             note
             ,
             that
             the
             word
             Iehovah
             in
             the
             old
             testament
             is
             never
             attributed
             to
             any
             creature
             :
             but
             well
             the
             worde
             of
             Elohim
             may
             in
             the
             plurall
             ,
             which
             signifieth
             Gods
             ,
             and
             Lords
             .
             As
             for
             the
             new
             testamēt
             ,
             wherein
             the
             head-springs
             of
             all
             christiā
             religion
             are
             contained
             ,
             &
             which
             should
             rule
             our
             fashion
             of
             speaking
             ,
             yee
             shall
             never
             there
             finde
             the
             name
             of
             God
             in
             the
             singular
             attributed
             to
             any
             but
             God
             himselfe
             ,
             or
             to
             Satan
             whom
             the
             Apostle
             calleth
             ,
             
               The
               God
               of
               this
               world
            
             ,
             because
             in
             this
             world
             hee
             seeks
             by
             al
             meanes
             to
             encroach
             vpō
             Gods
             right
             .
             Heathen
             Emperours
             also
             haue
             taken
             vpon
             them
             the
             title
             of
             God
             ,
             as
             
               Bassian
               Caracalla
            
             ,
             &
             before
             him
             Domitian
             ,
             whō
             *
             Sueton
             ,
             and
             *
             Martiall
             call
             
               Dominus
               Deus
               noster
            
             ,
             the
             Lord
             our
             God
             ,
             which
             are
             the
             very
             same
             words
             with
             those
             which
             I
             haue
             formerly
             cited
             out
             of
             the
             glosse
             .
             But
             this
             name
             was
             ever
             reputed
             odious
             amongst
             the
             Christians
             ,
             when
             it
             was
             once
             attributed
             to
             man
             ,
             because
             they
             haue
             no
             more
             excellent
             or
             reverent
             name
             then
             this
             ;
             not
             as
             the
             Hebrewes
             ,
             who
             are
             of
             opinion
             that
             the
             
             name
             of
             Iehova
             is
             more
             holy
             and
             incommunicable
             .
          
           
             But
             for
             to
             know
             in
             what
             sense
             the
             Pope
             is
             called
             God
             ,
             the
             Pope
             himselfe
             can
             best
             resolue
             vs.
             For
             out
             of
             this
             title
             ,
             he
             gathereth
             by
             consequence
             that
             he
             should
             bee
             adored
             ;
             The
             last
             councell
             of
             Lateran
             ,
             in
             the
             3.
             and
             10.
             sessions
             saith
             .
             
               The
               Pope
               ought
               to
               be
               worshipped
               of
               all
               people
               ,
               and
               is
               most
               like
               vnto
               God
               :
            
             and
             that
             a
             man
             might
             not
             imagine
             that
             it
             speaketh
             of
             a
             civill
             kind
             of
             worship
             ,
             it
             is
             there
             told
             vs
             what
             manner
             of
             adoration
             this
             must
             be
             ,
             wherwith
             he
             is
             to
             be
             adored
             ;
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             it
             must
             bee
             with
             that
             kinde
             of
             adoration
             that
             is
             mentioned
             in
             the
             72.
             
             Psalme
             .
             
               Adorabunt
               eum
               omnes
               reges
               terrae
            
             ,
             All
             the
             kings
             of
             the
             earth
             shall
             worshippe
             him
             .
             Where
             by
             worship
             ,
             the
             highest
             kinde
             of
             worshippe
             is
             meant
             ,
             which
             is
             due
             to
             the
             son
             of
             God
             ;
             as
             Tertullian
             teacheth
             vs
             in
             his
             5
             ,
             booke
             7.
             chap.
             against
             Marcion
             .
             So
             doth
             Mantuan
             vnderstande
             it
             ,
             which
             speakes
             of
             the
             Pope
             :
             
               
                 Ense
                 potens
                 gemino
                 ,
                 cuius
                 vestigia
                 adorāt
              
               
                 Caesar
                 ,
                 &
                 aurato
                 vestiti
                 murice
                 reges
                 ,
              
               
                 He
                 hath
                 2
                 swords
                 within
                 his
                 power
                 to
                 draw
                 ,
              
               
                 Caesar
                 adores
                 him
                 with
                 an
                 humble
                 awe
                 :
              
               
                 And
                 kings
                 with
                 Caesar
                 too
                 in
                 this
                 do
                 meete
                 ,
              
               
               
                 Bowing
                 their
                 necks
                 down
                 for
                 to
                 kisse
                 his
                 feet
                 .
              
            
             The
             histories
             of
             these
             last
             ages
             are
             ful
             with
             examples
             of
             this
             adoration
             of
             the
             Pope
             .
             In
             the
             2.
             
             Tome
             of
             councels
             they
             doe
             highly
             magnifie
             Iustinian
             because
             hee
             did
             adore
             Pope
             Agapet●
             .
             But
             the
             most
             remarkable
             worship
             that
             is
             given
             him
             ,
             is
             that
             which
             they
             do
             vnto
             him
             within
             the
             conclaue
             ,
             immediatly
             after
             his
             election
             .
             As
             soone
             as
             ever
             he
             is
             pronounced
             Pope
             by
             the
             Cardinals
             shut
             vp
             in
             the
             conclaue
             ,
             they
             presently
             run
             vnto
             him
             ,
             and
             pulling
             of
             his
             owne
             apparell
             ,
             put
             on
             other
             insteed
             thereof
             ,
             redde
             hose
             ,
             and
             red
             shooes
             with
             a
             crosse
             of
             gold
             ,
             a
             red
             girdle
             with
             buckles
             of
             Gold
             ,
             a
             red
             cap
             ,
             and
             a
             rochet
             ,
             and
             answerably
             fitting
             him
             with
             a
             red
             mantle
             ,
             and
             a
             triple
             crowne
             glittering
             with
             Diamonds
             ,
             they
             mount
             him
             vp
             vpon
             their
             shoulders
             aloft
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             some
             glorified
             body
             ,
             and
             set
             him
             vpon
             the
             Altar
             .
             This
             amongst
             the
             Italians
             is
             commonly
             called
             adoration
             :
             and
             is
             therefore
             the
             more
             worth
             the
             noting
             ,
             because
             the
             Pope
             is
             set
             vpon
             the
             Altar
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             place
             where
             they
             set
             their
             Masse-god
             ,
             and
             which
             is
             appointed
             for
             divine
             worship
             :
             so
             that
             this
             worship
             ,
             cannot
             be
             taken
             for
             a
             civill
             worship
             .
             Herevnto
             adde
             that
             in
             civill
             
             affaires
             kings
             haue
             more
             authoritie
             then
             Popes
             ,
             and
             should
             therefore
             by
             a
             consequent
             rather
             bee
             worshipt
             with
             civill
             honour
             .
             But
             they
             doe
             not
             only
             not
             worship
             Kings
             ,
             but
             exact
             of
             kings
             themselues
             to
             worship
             the
             Popes
             .
             But
             if
             a
             King
             called
             himselfe
             God
             ,
             he
             might
             seem
             to
             haue
             some
             shew
             for
             it
             ,
             by
             alleaging
             the
             passage
             out
             of
             the
             old
             Testament
             wherein
             kings
             are
             said
             to
             be
             Gods
             ,
             yet
             should
             a
             king
             so
             doe
             he
             would
             be
             thought
             by
             Christians
             to
             bee
             little
             lesse
             then
             a
             blasphemer
             ,
             and
             I
             am
             perswaded
             that
             the
             Pope
             himselfe
             would
             not
             like
             it
             ,
             being
             that
             hee
             vsurps
             the
             name
             of
             God
             excclusiuely
             from
             al
             other
             Princes
             vnto
             himselfe
             ,
             by
             reason
             that
             it
             is
             a
             holy
             word
             ,
             and
             imports
             as
             much
             as
             adoration
             .
             Neither
             will
             hee
             bee
             woone
             to
             grant
             ,
             that
             kings
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             called
             Gods
             by
             David
             ,
             should
             therefore
             deny
             to
             bee
             iudged
             ;
             seeing
             that
             he
             takes
             vpon
             him
             to
             bee
             their
             iudge
             .
             And
             yet
             we
             haue
             seene
             before
             ,
             how
             the
             Pope
             out
             of
             this
             very
             saying
             of
             David
             ,
             concludeth
             that
             no
             man
             may
             be
             his
             iudge
             ,
             although
             in
             that
             place
             there
             bee
             no
             mention
             made
             of
             Bishops
             or
             Pastours
             ,
             but
             of
             Princes
             :
             It
             is
             easie
             to
             bee
             knowne
             in
             what
             sense
             he
             calleth
             himselfe
             God
             ,
             since
             hee
             vsually
             
             calls
             his
             decrees
             ,
             and
             Canons
             by
             the
             name
             of
             *
             Oracles
             .
             Now
             an
             oracle
             signifieth
             an
             heavenly
             answer
             ,
             proceeding
             from
             the
             mouth
             of
             God.
             Rom.
             3.
             verse
             2.
             &
             chap.
             11.
             v.
             4.
             with
             the
             like
             modestie
             doth
             he
             call
             his
             decretall
             Epistles
             Canonical
             scriptures
             in
             the
             19
             Distinction
             ,
             in
             the
             Canon
             
               In
               Canonicis
            
             ,
             the
             inscription
             whereof
             is
             this
             .
             
               Inter
               Canonicas
               scripturas
               Decretales
               Epistolae
               connumerantur
               .
            
             The
             decretall
             Epistles
             are
             reckoned
             amongst
             the
             Canonicall
             scriptures
             .
             That
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             Popes
             Decrees
             are
             equall
             to
             the
             holy
             scripture
             ,
             and
             by
             a
             consequent
             are
             the
             word
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             What
             can
             one
             say
             more
             of
             God
             then
             that
             which
             the
             aboue
             cited
             councell
             of
             Lateran
             ,
             in
             the
             9.
             
             &
             10.
             
             Sessions
             speakes
             of
             the
             Pope
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             
               hee
               hath
               all
               power
               aboue
               all
               powers
               ,
               both
               of
               heaven
               and
               earth
               ?
            
             And
             he
             himselfe
             speakes
             as
             much
             of
             himselfe
             in
             the
             1.
             booke
             of
             holy
             ceremonies
             .
             7.
             sect
             .
             6.
             chap.
             where
             Pope
             Sixtus
             the
             4.
             speakes
             thus
             .
             
               This
               Pontificall
               sword
               representeth
               the
               Soveraigne
               temporall
               power
               that
               Christ
               hath
               given
               the
               Pope
               his
               vicar
               vpon
               earth
               ,
               as
               it
               is
               written
               .
               All
               power
               is
               given
               mee
               both
               in
               heaven
               ,
               and
               in
               earth
               ,
               and
            
             *
             
               elsewhere
               .
               His
               dominion
               shall
               be
               from
               sea
               to
               sea
               ,
               &
               from
               
               the
               river
               vnto
               the
               ends
               of
               the
               land
               .
               Which
               power
               is
               also
               signified
               by
               the
               velvet
               cap
               which
               Popes
               weare
               .
            
             Of
             which
             power
             even
             over
             heaven
             it selfe
             ,
             Innocent
             the
             3.
             was
             bold
             to
             make
             vse
             in
             the
             bull
             ▪
             
               Ad
               liberandum
            
             :
             where
             he
             grants
             vnto
             Pilgrims
             ,
             that
             die
             in
             their
             pilgrimage
             ,
             to
             enioy
             a
             greater
             degree
             of
             glory
             in
             Paradice
             aboue
             others
             .
          
           
             Besides
             I
             say
             ,
             that
             to
             call
             himselfe
             his
             Holines
             exclusiuely
             to
             al
             others
             ,
             is
             to
             take
             a
             name
             vpon
             him
             that
             is
             proper
             to
             God
             alone
             ,
             who
             is
             not
             only
             
               the
               most
               holy
               Father
            
             ,
             (
             a
             name
             which
             the
             Pope
             doth
             also
             assume
             )
             but
             Holinesse
             it selfe
             .
             As
             also
             for
             to
             attribute
             all
             power
             vnto
             himselfe
             as
             Paule
             the
             5.
             doth
             in
             this
             holy
             register
             ,
             where
             he
             calls
             himselfe
             a
             Vice-God
             ,
             the
             Monarch
             of
             the
             Christian
             world
             :
             the
             vpholder
             of
             the
             papall
             omnipotency
             .
          
           
             Next
             in
             order
             comes
             our
             Saviour
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             adorned
             with
             titles
             ,
             names
             &
             qualities
             ,
             all
             which
             the
             Pope
             applyeth
             vnto
             himselfe
             .
             Hee
             calls
             himselfe
             at
             least
             a
             hundred
             times
             in
             his
             Canons
             and
             Decrees
             ,
             
               The
               spowse
               of
               the
               vniversall
               Church
               ;
               Bellarmine
            
             goeth
             yet
             farther
             ,
             
               Etiam
               Christo
               secluso
            
             ,
             (
             that
             is
             )
             that
             hee
             is
             so
             indeed
             ,
             Christ
             being
             set
             apart
             ,
             in
             the
             9.
             
             Chapt.
             &
             1.
             booke
             
             of
             the
             Pope
             ;
             And
             although
             Christ
             were
             not
             excluded
             ,
             yet
             so
             it
             is
             that
             in
             matter
             of
             marriage
             ,
             men
             doe
             not
             lightly
             admit
             of
             a
             companion
             ,
             much
             lesse
             will
             this
             bee
             endured
             in
             that
             holy
             coniunction
             with
             Christ
             ,
             concerning
             which
             S.
             *
             Paule
             saith
             .
             
               I
               haue
               prepared
               you
               for
               one
               husband
               ,
               to
               present
               you
               as
               a
               pure
               virgin
               to
               Christ.
            
             And
             that
             hee
             might
             leaue
             him
             nothing
             proper
             ,
             Leo
             the
             10.
             in
             the
             Councell
             of
             Lateran
             formerly
             cited
             ,
             is
             called
             
               the
               Lion
               of
               the
               tribe
               of
               Iuda
               ,
               the
               roote
               of
               David
               ,
               the
               Saviour
               of
               Sion
               .
            
             And
             Bellarmine
             in
             the
             preface
             of
             his
             booke
             of
             the
             pope
             ,
             calleth
             the
             pope
             
               the
               corner
               stone
               ,
               a
               tryed
               stone
               ,
               a
               pretious
               stone
               ,
            
             whereof
             Esay
             speakes
             in
             his
             28.
             
             Chap.
             16.
             verse
             .
             Which
             is
             therefore
             the
             more
             to
             be
             noted
             ,
             because
             the
             Apostle
             in
             the
             9.
             
             Chap.
             of
             the
             Epistle
             to
             the
             Romans
             ,
             saith
             ,
             that
             
               none
               that
               belieue
               in
               this
               stone
               shall
               be
               put
               to
               confusion
               .
            
          
           
             After
             that
             he
             hath
             once
             seized
             vpon
             the
             names
             and
             titles
             of
             the
             Father
             ,
             and
             of
             his
             sonne
             our
             Saviour
             ,
             it
             is
             no
             wonder
             that
             he
             equalleth
             himselfe
             with
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             ,
             saying
             in
             the
             25
             cause
             ,
             1.
             quest
             .
             that
             to
             violate
             his
             Canons
             &
             ordinances
             is
             to
             blaspheame
             against
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             we
             should
             know
             ,
             that
             such
             an
             offence
             shal
             
             never
             be
             pardoned
             ,
             neither
             in
             this
             world
             nor
             in
             the
             world
             to
             come
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             second
             point
             .
             That
             the
             Pope
             doth
             exalt
             himselfe
             aboue
             God.
             
          
           
             THE
             Apostle
             will
             tel
             vs
             in
             the
             10.
             verse
             of
             this
             Chap.
             that
             the
             sonne
             of
             perdition
             shall
             vse
             all
             guile
             and
             deceitfulnesse
             .
             Whence
             it
             follows
             that
             we
             must
             not
             think
             that
             this
             man
             of
             sinne
             ,
             this
             sonne
             of
             perdition
             ,
             shall
             openly
             proclaime
             vnto
             vs
             ,
             and
             say
             .
             I
             am
             more
             great
             and
             powerfull
             thē
             the
             eternall
             God
             ,
             which
             created
             the
             world
             .
             For
             who
             would
             followe
             him
             if
             hee
             should
             speake
             thus
             ?
             Or
             how
             could
             any
             one
             be
             seduced
             therewithall
             ?
             but
             rather
             he
             must
             insinuate
             himselfe
             through
             deceipt
             ,
             and
             vnder
             the
             shewe
             of
             sanctitie
             .
             
               Hee
               shall
               haue
            
             (
             saith
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             in
             the
             13.
             of
             the
             
               Apocalyps
               )
               two
               hornes
               like
               the
               lambe
               ,
               but
               hee
               shall
               speake
               like
               the
               Dragon
               :
            
             making
             a
             shew
             of
             Christianitie
             ,
             and
             professing
             the
             name
             of
             Christ
             ,
             but
             teaching
             divelish
             doctrine
             ,
             As
             
               S.
               Hilarie
            
             saith
             against
             
               Auxentius
               ;
               vnder
               the
               colour
               of
               preaching
               the
               Gospell
               he
               shal
               be
               contrary
               vnto
               Christ
               ,
               so
               that
               the
               Lord
               Iesus
               shall
               bee
               denied
               ,
               whilst
               men
               thinke
               hee
               is
               preached
               .
            
             It
             is
             sufficient
             therefore
             for
             the
             
             fulfilling
             of
             this
             prophecy
             ,
             that
             the
             sonne
             of
             perdition
             doth
             in
             effect
             lift
             himselfe
             aboue
             God
             ,
             although
             he
             professe
             that
             he
             is
             beneath
             him
             .
             And
             it
             will
             be
             no
             great
             labor
             to
             proue
             this
             .
          
           
             1
             Whosoever
             shall
             quit
             a
             servant
             frō
             the
             obediēce
             due
             to
             his
             master
             ,
             must
             needs
             be
             greater
             then
             his
             master
             :
             But
             the
             popes
             dispense
             with
             the
             setvants
             of
             God
             for
             obaying
             of
             God
             :
             Whence
             it
             followeth
             that
             they
             are
             greater
             then
             God.
             A
             horrible
             thing
             ,
             yet
             that
             which
             is
             necessarily
             inferred
             out
             of
             their
             doctrine
             ,
             No
             man
             will
             deny
             the
             maior
             ,
             the
             minor
             is
             verified
             by
             a
             thousand
             examples
             .
          
           
             1
             It
             is
             Gods
             will
             that
             we
             should
             keep
             our
             oathes
             and
             vowes
             ,
             but
             the
             pope
             vseth
             to
             dispense
             with
             them
             .
             Say
             that
             a
             man
             haue
             vowed
             and
             promised
             to
             God
             to
             goe
             on
             pilgrimage
             ;
             the
             pope
             if
             it
             please
             him
             ,
             will
             dispense
             with
             him
             for
             it
             ,
             teaching
             him
             how
             to
             be
             periured
             with
             a
             good
             cōscience
             .
             And
             how
             knowe
             I
             whether
             God
             also
             will
             free
             me
             ,
             or
             whether
             hee
             will
             condescend
             to
             his
             Holinesse
             his
             will.
             
          
           
             2
             God
             hath
             knit
             man
             and
             wife
             together
             with
             a
             knot
             ,
             that
             may
             not
             bee
             losed
             for
             any
             thing
             but
             adulterie
             .
             But
             the
             
             pope
             breakes
             of
             marriages
             in
             many
             other
             cases
             ,
             frustrating
             the
             rule
             of
             the
             Gospell
             ,
             which
             saith
             ,
             
               That
               which
               God
               hath
               ioined
               let
               no
               man
               sever
               .
            
          
           
             3
             God
             hath
             expresly
             commanded
             the
             obedience
             &
             fidelitie
             of
             subiects
             towards
             their
             Prince
             ,
             although
             he
             bee
             an
             infidell
             :
             But
             the
             Pope
             will
             free
             subiects
             from
             this
             obedience
             &
             fealtie
             towards
             their
             Prince
             ,
             although
             this
             Prince
             bee
             no
             infidell
             ,
             nor
             tainted
             with
             any
             other
             crime
             ,
             nor
             one
             that
             shall
             withstand
             the
             Romish
             religiō
             ,
             but
             only
             if
             the
             pope
             be
             of
             opiniō
             that
             he
             is
             not
             fit
             for
             governemēt
             ,
             as
             pope
             Zacharie
             boasted
             that
             he
             dealt
             with
             Childericke
             ,
             and
             Sixtus
             the
             5
             a
             little
             after
             with
             our
             K.
             Henry
             the
             3.
             
          
           
             4
             God
             saith
             in
             the
             gospell
             ,
             
               Do
               workes
               worthy
               of
               repentance
            
             ,
             This
             commandement
             is
             expresse
             and
             generall
             ,
             with
             which
             yet
             the
             Pope
             will
             dispense
             by
             his
             Indulgences
             as
             Cardinall
             Bellarmin
             saith
             in
             the
             13.
             cha
             .
             of
             his
             4.
             booke
             of
             pennance
             ;
             
               Indulgences
               cause
               that
               for
               the
               paines
               which
               are
               pardoned
               vs
               by
               the
               Indulgences
               ,
               we
               be
               not
               bound
               to
               this
               commandement
               of
               bringing
               forth
               fruits
               worthy
               of
               repentance
               .
            
          
           
             5
             God
             in
             his
             law
             doeth
             formally
             forbid
             marriage
             in
             the
             1.
             degree
             of
             affinitie
             ,
             
             that
             is
             for
             a
             man
             to
             marry
             the
             sister
             of
             his
             deade
             wife
             ,
             or
             for
             a
             woman
             to
             marry
             the
             brother
             of
             her
             dead
             husband
             .
             Levit.
             18.
             
             &
             20.
             
             And
             yet
             for
             all
             this
             ,
             the
             taxe
             of
             the
             Popes
             Chancery
             fees
             in
             the
             40.
             leafe
             ,
             giues
             a
             dispensation
             and
             permission
             for
             this
             at
             a
             certaine
             price
             .
             
               The
               Penitentiarie
               in
               the
               Court
               of
               Chancerie
               may
               dispense
               in
               the
               first
               degree
               of
               affinitie
               ,
               and
               such
               a
               letter
               is
               sold
               for
            
             9.
             
               ducats
               ,
               and
               sixe
               groates
            
             .
          
           
             6
             As
             for
             a
             man
             to
             marry
             his
             Aunt
             or
             his
             neece
             ,
             a
             thing
             which
             God
             also
             hath
             expresly
             forbidden
             in
             the
             18.
             and
             20.
             chap.
             of
             Levit.
             The
             Popes
             dispēsations
             are
             frequēt
             in
             this
             kinde
             ;
             especially
             in
             great
             families
             .
          
           
             7
             In
             all
             these
             things
             ,
             and
             more
             such
             like
             ,
             the
             Pope
             doth
             exalt
             himselfe
             aboue
             God
             ,
             since
             he
             dispenseth
             with
             men
             not
             to
             obay
             his
             commandements
             .
             And
             he
             himselfe
             &
             his
             Doctors
             do
             not
             dissemble
             this
             .
             For
             in
             the
             8.
             
             Title
             of
             the
             grant
             of
             Prebēds
             ,
             he
             boasteth
             that
             by
             the
             fulnesse
             of
             that
             power
             which
             he
             hath
             ,
             he
             can
             dispense
             with
             the
             law
             ,
             &
             aboue
             the
             law
             .
             And
             the
             Glosse
             of
             the
             Canonists
             vpon
             this
             place
             maketh
             it
             cleere
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             said
             .
             
               Papa
               contra
               Apostolum
               dispensat
               ,
               &
               contra
               Canones
               Apostolorum
               .
               Item
               contra
               vetus
               testamentum
               ,
               Itē
               
               in
               iuramento
               .
            
             The
             Pope
             dispenseth
             against
             the
             Apostle
             ,
             and
             against
             the
             Canons
             of
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             and
             against
             the
             new
             Testament
             ,
             and
             with
             oaths
             .
             And
             vpon
             the
             Canon
             ,
             Lector
             ,
             in
             the
             34.
             
             Distinction
             .
             
               The
               Pope
               can
               dispense
               against
               the
               Apostle
            
             ;
             and
             vpon
             the
             25.
             cause
             ,
             1.
             
             Question
             .
             
               The
               Pope
               doth
               dispēse
               with
               the
               Gospell
               ,
               by
               giving
               it
               what
               interpretation
               he
               list
               .
            
          
           
             8
             How
             many
             dispensations
             for
             age
             doth
             he
             giue
             contrary
             to
             the
             Apostles
             wil
             ?
             Who
             *
             forbiddeth
             that
             a
             bishop
             should
             be
             a
             
               young
               schollar
            
             .
             He
             bestoweth
             bishopricks
             vpon
             children
             ;
             yea
             ,
             the
             very
             Popedome
             it selfe
             (
             into
             which
             none
             are
             nowe
             a
             daies
             invested
             ,
             but
             old
             men
             )
             hath
             in
             times
             past
             bin
             given
             to
             children
             .
             Benedict
             the
             6.
             was
             not
             aboue
             9.
             yeares
             old
             when
             he
             was
             chosen
             pope
             ,
             as
             Baronius
             witnesseth
             in
             the
             yeare
             ,
             1033.
             6.
             
             Article
             .
             Hee
             which
             as
             yet
             knew
             not
             what
             faith
             meant
             ,
             could
             not
             erre
             in
             the
             faith
             .
          
           
             2
             To
             this
             proofe
             we
             may
             annex
             an
             other
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             demonstration
             ,
             built
             vpon
             these
             maximes
             ,
             that
             ,
             those
             faults
             are
             greater
             which
             are
             committed
             against
             a
             greater
             person
             ;
             so
             it
             is
             a
             greater
             iniurie
             for
             a
             man
             to
             wrong
             his
             king
             ,
             then
             his
             neighbour
             ,
             &
             
             for
             to
             strike
             his
             father
             ,
             then
             his
             companion
             ,
             as
             also
             vpon
             this
             ,
             that
             the
             more
             grievous
             the
             faults
             bee
             ,
             they
             are
             punished
             the
             more
             grievously
             :
             If
             therefore
             an
             offence
             committed
             against
             the
             Pope
             ,
             be
             more
             severely
             punished
             then
             an
             offence
             committed
             against
             God
             ;
             if
             the
             Popes
             Decrees
             be
             more
             authorized
             ,
             thē
             the
             commandemēts
             God
             :
             if
             a
             man
             bee
             thought
             to
             haue
             sinned
             more
             hainously
             in
             disobaying
             the
             Pope
             ,
             then
             in
             disobaying
             God
             ;
             how
             can
             wee
             but
             confesse
             ,
             that
             this
             sin
             of
             the
             two
             is
             thought
             to
             be
             the
             greater
             ,
             and
             by
             a
             cōsequent
             that
             the
             Pope
             doth
             exalt
             himselfe
             aboue
             God
             ?
             Experience
             confirmeth
             this
             ;
             swear
             ,
             &
             blaspheame
             in
             Italie
             ,
             no
             man
             is
             moved
             at
             it
             .
             Oathes
             are
             thought
             to
             bee
             but
             the
             flowers
             of
             eloquence
             .
             But
             should
             a
             man
             goe
             to
             Rome
             ,
             and
             there
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             pope
             is
             not
             head
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             it
             is
             not
             the
             intercession
             of
             a
             king
             that
             could
             deliver
             him
             from
             the
             stake
             ,
             or
             free
             him
             frō
             the
             clumbs
             of
             the
             Inquisition
             .
             The
             Iewes
             say
             that
             Christ
             was
             a
             deceiver
             ,
             and
             yet
             they
             are
             suffered
             to
             liue
             quietly
             at
             Rome
             ,
             but
             shoulde
             a
             man
             once
             dare
             open
             his
             mouth
             to
             dispute
             of
             purgatory
             ,
             hee
             would
             presently
             bee
             had
             to
             the
             house
             of
             Inquisition
             .
             There
             be
             certain
             sins
             
             which
             they
             call
             reserued
             cases
             ,
             from
             which
             no
             bishop
             can
             absolue
             a
             man
             ,
             except
             it
             bee
             only
             vpon
             the
             point
             of
             death
             .
             You
             will
             imagine
             perhaps
             ,
             that
             these
             cases
             are
             either
             murder
             ,
             or
             parricide
             ,
             or
             incest
             ,
             or
             atheisme
             ,
             or
             sodomie
             ;
             no
             such
             matter
             .
             But
             these
             great
             sinnes
             from
             which
             none
             can
             absolue
             a
             mā
             except
             the
             pope
             only
             ,
             are
             ,
             the
             stopping
             of
             a
             man
             vpon
             the
             way
             as
             he
             is
             going
             to
             Rome
             to
             purchase
             him
             great
             pardons
             ,
             the
             intruding
             ones
             selfe
             in
             a
             benefice
             ,
             the
             stealing
             of
             church
             goods
             ,
             to
             haue
             spoken
             ill
             of
             ,
             or
             done
             ill
             ,
             vnto
             the
             Apostolical
             seat
             ,
             &c
             :
             such
             sinnes
             as
             these
             cannot
             be
             pardoned
             on
             this
             side
             the
             Alpes
             ,
             except
             it
             be
             by
             a
             special
             permission
             ,
             and
             that
             vpon
             the
             point
             of
             death
             .
             If
             you
             haue
             committed
             either
             murder
             or
             fornication
             ,
             the
             priest
             will
             absolue
             you
             frō
             this
             .
             But
             if
             you
             haue
             eaten
             flesh
             the
             weeke
             before
             Easter
             ,
             the
             priest
             cannot
             pardō
             this
             but
             must
             send
             you
             to
             the
             penitenciarie
             :
             and
             yet
             notwithstanding
             ,
             one
             is
             the
             ordinance
             of
             God
             ,
             the
             other
             a
             commandement
             but
             of
             man.
             In
             the
             Taxe
             of
             the
             popes
             Chancerie
             ,
             in
             the
             chapter
             of
             pardons
             ,
             36.
             leafe
             .
             Incest
             with
             ones
             mother
             is
             fined
             at
             fiue
             groates
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             page
             following
             ,
             the
             falsifying
             of
             the
             Apostolicall
             letters
             are
             set
             at
             tenne
             groates
             .
          
           
           
             2
             Againe
             ,
             the
             pope
             exalteth
             himselfe
             aboue
             God
             ,
             when
             he
             takes
             vpon
             him
             to
             be
             the
             chiefe
             iudge
             in
             controversies
             of
             religion
             ,
             in
             steede
             of
             deferring
             this
             soveraigne
             iudgement
             to
             the
             holy
             scripture
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             word
             of
             God.
             It
             is
             said
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             the
             church
             ,
             which
             doth
             giue
             force
             &
             authority
             to
             the
             scripture
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             pope
             is
             aboue
             the
             church
             :
             so
             he
             is
             two
             degrees
             aboue
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             seeing
             that
             he
             is
             aboue
             the
             church
             ,
             and
             the
             church
             aboue
             the
             Scripture
             .
          
           
             3
             But
             especiallie
             the
             pope
             exalteth
             himselfe
             aboue
             that
             ,
             which
             is
             called
             God
             in
             the
             church
             of
             Rome
             ,
             for
             so
             do
             papists
             at
             this
             time
             ,
             call
             the
             bread
             of
             the
             Eucharist
             ;
             they
             say
             ,
             that
             they
             holde
             vp
             God
             in
             the
             Masse
             ,
             when
             they
             hold
             vp
             the
             bread
             ,
             that
             they
             carry
             God
             to
             the
             sick
             when
             they
             carry
             the
             bread
             ,
             that
             they
             eate
             God
             and
             take
             their
             creatour
             ,
             when
             they
             take
             ▪
             and
             eat
             the
             bread
             .
             Many
             kinde
             of
             waies
             doth
             the
             pope
             exalt
             himselfe
             aboue
             this
             God.
             For
             in
             the
             procession
             vpon
             the
             day
             of
             his
             coronation
             ,
             and
             at
             other
             solemne
             times
             ,
             they
             make
             this
             God
             go
             before
             him
             ,
             carryed
             vpon
             a
             white
             horse
             ,
             having
             a
             Sansbell
             about
             his
             necke
             ,
             and
             a
             lantherne
             before
             ,
             being
             covered
             all
             
             over
             with
             a
             Canopy
             ,
             which
             is
             carryed
             vp
             by
             the
             citizens
             of
             Rome
             .
             But
             the
             pope
             comes
             after
             being
             carried
             vpon
             mens
             shoulders
             ,
             vnder
             a
             Canopie
             helde
             vp
             by
             princes
             or
             princes
             ambassadors
             ,
             the
             Emperor
             to
             (
             if
             he
             be
             there
             )
             putting
             to
             his
             helping
             hand
             ,
             or
             if
             his
             Holynesse
             bee
             on
             horse
             backe
             holding
             his
             horses
             bridle
             ,
             after
             that
             hee
             hath
             first
             held
             the
             stirrup
             for
             him
             to
             mount
             ;
             as
             it
             is
             described
             at
             large
             in
             the
             1.
             booke
             of
             holy
             Ceremonies
             ,
             2.
             
             Section
             ,
             &
             3.
             cha
             .
             compare
             the
             popes
             manner
             of
             furniture
             with
             that
             of
             his
             God
             ,
             and
             yee
             shall
             see
             the
             Apostles
             prophecie
             fulfilled
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             that
             
               he
               shall
               exalt
               himself
               aboue
               that
               which
               is
               called
               God
               ,
               and
               is
               worshipped
               .
            
          
           
             4
             You
             shall
             see
             the
             like
             example
             to
             this
             ,
             in
             the
             1.
             
             Section
             of
             the
             2.
             booke
             in
             the
             14.
             cha
             .
             where
             it
             is
             set
             downe
             ,
             with
             what
             solemnitie
             the
             pope
             doeth
             celebrate
             the
             masse
             in
             his
             owne
             person
             .
             As
             he
             is
             going
             vp
             to
             the
             Altar
             ,
             the
             greatest
             prince
             ,
             or
             the
             Emperour
             himselfe
             (
             if
             he
             be
             present
             )
             holdeth
             vp
             his
             traine
             :
             there
             is
             a
             Canopy
             carried
             ouer
             his
             head
             ,
             borne
             vp
             by
             8.
             princes
             ,
             or
             princes
             ambassadours
             :
             being
             before
             the
             Altar
             ,
             whilst
             he
             is
             singing
             of
             the
             masse
             ,
             the
             prelates
             come
             ,
             and
             kneeling
             downe
             kisse
             
             his
             right
             knee
             :
             others
             kisse
             his
             feete
             .
             He
             doth
             bow
             himselfe
             ,
             I
             confesse
             ,
             before
             the
             host
             ;
             but
             the
             standers
             by
             doe
             him
             ten
             times
             more
             reverence
             ,
             then
             they
             doe
             God.
             The
             greatest
             prince
             in
             the
             company
             giues
             him
             water
             4.
             times
             to
             wash
             ,
             serving
             it
             to
             him
             vpon
             his
             knee
             ,
             as
             Charles
             the
             8.
             did
             to
             Alexander
             the
             6.
             
             He
             is
             capt
             ,
             &
             vncapt
             ,
             shod
             ,
             and
             vnshod
             ;
             gloued
             ,
             &
             vngloued
             ;
             ringed
             ,
             &
             vnringed
             ,
             I
             know
             not
             how
             often
             .
             There
             is
             his
             taster
             by
             him
             ,
             as
             they
             vse
             to
             haue
             at
             princes
             tables
             .
             There
             standes
             one
             by
             his
             side
             ,
             that
             points
             at
             the
             words
             in
             the
             booke
             with
             his
             finger
             ,
             as
             we
             vse
             to
             serue
             litle
             childrē
             .
             He
             sucks
             wine
             out
             of
             the
             chalice
             with
             a
             reede
             .
             So
             that
             all
             well
             considered
             ,
             this
             whole
             solēnitie
             ,
             vnder
             a
             shew
             of
             worshipping
             the
             Host
             ,
             is
             done
             farre
             more
             for
             the
             honour
             of
             the
             pope
             ,
             then
             for
             the
             honor
             of
             his
             God.
             
          
           
             3
             Let
             vs
             annex
             one
             proofe
             more
             ;
             he
             that
             giveth
             authority
             to
             the
             holy
             scripture
             hath
             more
             authority
             thē
             the
             scripture
             .
             But
             Bishops
             of
             Rome
             take
             vpon
             them
             to
             giue
             authority
             to
             the
             holy
             scripture
             ,
             &
             say
             that
             wee
             are
             to
             receaue
             it
             ,
             because
             the
             pope
             hath
             so
             ordained
             He
             attributs
             more
             authoritie
             therefore
             to
             himselfe
             ,
             then
             to
             the
             
             holy
             scripture
             .
             The
             minor
             is
             proved
             by
             the
             words
             of
             pope
             Nicholas
             in
             the
             19.
             
             Distinction
             ,
             and
             Canon
             .
             
               Si
               Romanorum
            
             ,
             where
             he
             approueth
             of
             their
             saying
             which
             said
             ,
             
               That
               the
               old
               and
               new
               Testament
               are
               to
               bee
               receaued
               ,
               not
               because
               they
               are
               annexed
               to
               the
               Canons
               ,
               but
               because
               holy
               Pope
               Innocent
               hath
               pronounced
               that
               they
               must
               be
               receaued
               ,
            
             For
             there
             ,
             he
             doth
             not
             only
             not
             reprehēd
             those
             that
             speake
             thus
             prophanely
             ,
             but
             doth
             herevpon
             ground
             the
             establishment
             of
             the
             popes
             Decretals
             ,
             which
             are
             not
             inserted
             in
             the
             Canons
             .
             By
             this
             reckoning
             then
             ,
             wee
             must
             beleeue
             ;
             that
             God
             created
             the
             world
             ;
             that
             Cain
             killed
             Abell
             ;
             that
             Noah
             built
             the
             Arke
             ;
             that
             God
             made
             a
             covenant
             with
             Abraham
             ;
             that
             God
             gaue
             his
             law
             vnto
             Moyses
             ;
             wee
             must
             belieue
             all
             this
             I
             say
             ,
             not
             because
             the
             holy
             scripture
             witnesseth
             as
             much
             ,
             but
             because
             the
             pope
             &
             the
             church
             of
             Rome
             doe
             say
             that
             it
             is
             true
             ,
             and
             that
             these
             bookes
             ought
             to
             be
             receaued
             ;
             And
             for
             to
             make
             vs
             relie
             more
             vpon
             the
             authoritie
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             ,
             then
             of
             the
             scripture
             ,
             they
             vse
             commonly
             to
             speake
             thus
             vnto
             vs.
             How
             would
             you
             knowe
             that
             this
             were
             the
             scripture
             ,
             if
             the
             Church
             had
             not
             told
             you
             of
             it
             ?
             whence
             they
             conclude
             
             that
             the
             church
             is
             aboue
             the
             scripture
             .
             As
             if
             I
             should
             say
             ,
             I
             should
             not
             haue
             knowne
             that
             this
             was
             the
             king
             ,
             but
             that
             such
             a
             man
             shewd
             him
             to
             me
             ,
             therefore
             this
             man
             is
             aboue
             the
             king
             .
             A
             wicked
             church
             may
             informe
             vs
             that
             this
             is
             the
             scripture
             .
             The
             Iewes
             made
             the
             old
             Testament
             knowne
             to
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             &
             yet
             notwithstanding
             they
             persecuted
             our
             Saviour
             .
          
           
             4
             Briefly
             ,
             to
             take
             such
             wordes
             out
             of
             the
             common
             forme
             of
             Gods
             law
             ,
             as
             doe
             forbid
             vs
             
               to
               make
               images
               ,
               or
               to
               fall
               down
               before
               them
               ,
            
             what
             is
             this
             but
             to
             correct
             God
             ,
             and
             by
             a
             consequent
             to
             exalt
             himselfe
             aboue
             God.
             
          
        
         
           
             The
             third
             point
             .
             That
             the
             Pope
             doth
             set
             himselfe
             against
             God.
             
          
           
             This
             needeth
             no
             long
             proofe
             ,
             &
             it
             doth
             followe
             out
             of
             the
             two
             precedent
             points
             .
             For
             it
             is
             impossible
             ,
             that
             hee
             should
             call
             himselfe
             God
             ,
             &
             exalt
             himselfe
             aboue
             God
             ,
             without
             being
             contrary
             vnto
             him
             ,
             &
             withstanding
             his
             wil
             :
             yet
             behold
             some
             formal
             proofs
             for
             the
             confirming
             of
             this
             too
             .
          
           
             1
             God
             in
             the
             4.
             of
             Deut.
             2.
             verse
             ,
             doth
             
             forbid
             vs
             to
             adde
             any
             thing
             to
             ,
             or
             take
             any
             thing
             from
             his
             word
             .
             And
             at
             the
             end
             of
             the
             new
             Testament
             ,
             God
             doth
             denounce
             a
             curse
             against
             him
             that
             shall
             adde
             any
             thing
             to
             the
             things
             contained
             in
             that
             booke
             .
             A
             passage
             ,
             which
             the
             Councell
             of
             Friuli
             approved
             by
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             doth
             thus
             expound
             .
             
               The
               Apostle
               S.
               Iohn
               in
               the
               Apocalyps
               ,
               vnder
               the
               name
               of
               one
               book
               ,
               doth
               protest
               of
               all
               the
               bookes
               ,
               both
               of
               the
               old
               and
               newe
               Testament
               ,
               If
               any
               one
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             On
             the
             contrary
             the
             pope
             doth
             presume
             to
             make
             new
             articles
             of
             faith
             ,
             and
             to
             adde
             to
             the
             Creed
             .
             At
             the
             ende
             of
             the
             last
             Councell
             of
             Lateran
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             Bull
             of
             Leo
             the
             10
             ,
             wherein
             all
             Luthers
             heresies
             are
             reckoned
             vp
             .
             The
             26.
             heresie
             is
             ,
             that
             he
             said
             ,
             
               That
               out
               of
               doubt
               it
               lay
               not
               in
               the
               handes
               either
               of
               the
               Church
               or
               Pope
               to
               make
               new
               articles
               of
               faith
               .
            
             And
             in
             the
             Councell
             of
             Florence
             ,
             in
             the
             last
             session
             it
             is
             defined
             ,
             that
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             may
             adde
             vnto
             the
             Creed
             .
             Of
             all
             the
             articles
             of
             faith
             which
             the
             pope
             hath
             added
             ,
             I
             am
             perswaded
             that
             this
             is
             the
             worst
             .
             
               That
               Iesus
               Christ
               did
               not
               satisfie
               for
               the
               paine
               due
               to
               sinnes
               after
               Baptisme
               .
            
          
           
             2
             God
             saith
             ,
             
               Drinke
               yee
               all
               of
               this
            
             ,
             the
             Pope
             on
             the
             contrary
             ,
             
               Yee
               shall
               not
               all
               drink
               
               of
               this
               ,
            
             but
             this
             is
             the
             priviledge
             of
             Priests
             ,
             and
             kings
             ,
             If
             in
             the
             line
             going
             before
             ,
             the
             commandement
             of
             eating
             bee
             made
             vnto
             the
             people
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             vnto
             the
             Priest
             ,
             why
             not
             the
             commandement
             of
             drinking
             as
             well
             ?
          
           
             3
             God
             saith
             in
             his
             lawe
             .
             
               six
               daies
               shalt
               thou
               labour
            
             .
             The
             Pope
             saith
             ,
             
               Yee
               shall
               not
               labour
               six
               daies
               ,
            
             but
             yee
             shall
             keepe
             a
             great
             many
             other
             resting
             festivall
             daies
             in
             the
             weeke
             .
          
           
             4
             God
             saith
             ,
             Deuter.
             4.16
             .
             
               Take
               heede
               that
               yee
               corrupt
               not
               your selues
               ,
               and
               make
               you
               a
               graven
               image
               or
               representation
               of
               any
               figure
               ,
               whether
               it
               bee
               the
               likenesse
               of
               male
               or
               female
               .
            
             On
             the
             contrary
             the
             Pope
             suffereth
             images
             of
             God
             to
             be
             made
             in
             stone
             ,
             and
             in
             painting
             ,
             of
             the
             Trinitie
             in
             wood
             ,
             and
             of
             God
             the
             Father
             in
             papall
             habiliments
             .
          
           
             5
             God
             saith
             in
             his
             law
             ,
             
               thou
               shalt
               not
               lust
            
             ;
             whence
             it
             followeth
             ,
             that
             to
             lust
             ,
             is
             to
             sinne
             ,
             and
             so
             
               S.
               Paul
            
             calleth
             it
             ,
             Rom.
             7.
             v.
             7.
             
             The
             Church
             of
             Rome
             on
             the
             cōtrary
             saith
             ,
             that
             to
             lust
             is
             not
             to
             sinne
             .
             And
             the
             Councell
             of
             Trent
             in
             the
             5
             Session
             saith
             ,
             that
             this
             lust
             ,
             which
             the
             Apostle
             calleth
             sinne
             ,
             to
             speake
             properly
             is
             no
             sin
             ,
             but
             onely
             that
             it
             springs
             from
             sinne
             ,
             and
             makes
             vs
             prone
             ▪
             to
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
           
             6
             God
             saith
             ,
             
               Thou
               shalt
               worship
               God
               onely
            
             ,
             where
             he
             speakes
             of
             a
             religious
             kind
             of
             worship
             .
             On
             the
             contrary
             ,
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             doth
             with
             a
             religious
             worship
             ▪
             worship
             the
             virgin
             Mary
             ,
             the
             Saints
             ,
             their
             Images
             ,
             their
             reliques
             ,
             and
             the
             Pope
             takes
             vpon
             him
             to
             be
             thus
             worshipped
             ,
             as
             wee
             haue
             aboue
             shewed
             by
             many
             witnesses
             ,
             &
             by
             experiences
             ,
             where
             wee
             haue
             also
             refelled
             their
             evasions
             .
          
           
             7
             God
             saith
             in
             the
             2
             of
             Chron.
             6.
             cha
             .
             30.
             ver
             .
             That
             
               God
               only
               knoweth
               the
               hearts
               of
               men
               .
            
             On
             the
             contrary
             the
             Romish
             Church
             saith
             ,
             that
             the
             Saints
             knowe
             our
             hearts
             ,
             &
             our
             thoughts
             .
          
           
             8
             God
             saith
             in
             the
             1.
             of
             the
             Apocalyps
             3.
             
               v.
               Blessed
               is
               he
               that
               readeth
               ,
               and
               they
               that
               hear
               the
               words
               of
               this
               prophecy
               .
            
             And
             
               S.
               Paul
            
             wrote
             vnto
             the
             people
             of
             Rome
             ,
             Corinth
             ,
             &c.
             vnto
             the
             ende
             that
             they
             should
             reade
             that
             which
             he
             wrote
             .
             On
             the
             contrary
             the
             pope
             forbids
             the
             people
             to
             reade
             the
             scriptures
             ,
             to
             finde
             a
             Spanish
             or
             Italian
             Bible
             ,
             in
             Spain
             ,
             or
             Italie
             ,
             is
             held
             for
             a
             capital
             offence
             and
             thought
             to
             be
             a
             note
             of
             heresie
             .
          
           
             9
             God
             by
             his
             Apostle
             in
             the
             1.
             to
             the
             Corinth
             .
             14.
             
             Chap.
             doth
             beate
             altogether
             vpon
             this
             ,
             that
             wee
             ought
             not
             to
             speake
             in
             the
             
             Church
             with
             an
             vnknowne
             tongue
             ;
             On
             the
             contrary
             ,
             the
             pope
             doth
             make
             all
             his
             publicke
             service
             to
             bee
             read
             in
             a
             tongue
             ,
             which
             the
             people
             vnderstand
             not
             ,
             and
             accustometh
             women
             to
             pray
             in
             Latin
             ,
             as
             though
             they
             were
             afraid
             to
             be
             vnderstood
          
           
             10
             God
             saith
             by
             his
             Apostle
             .
             1.
             
             Tim.
             3
             ,
             v.
             12.
             
             
               Let
               a
               Deacon
               be
               the
               husband
               of
               one
               wife
               .
            
             The
             pope
             on
             the
             contrary
             ,
             Let
             him
             not
             be
             married
             at
             all
             ;
             and
             so
             of
             Bishops
             .
          
           
             11
             God
             saith
             by
             his
             Apostle
             .
             1.
             
             Cor.
             10.
             
             
               If
               any
               of
               them
               which
               belieue
               not
               call
               you
               to
               a
               feast
               ,
               whatsoever
               is
               set
               before
               you
               ,
               eate
               ,
               asking
               no
               question
               for
               conscience
               sake
               .
            
             On
             the
             contrary
             the
             pope
             saith
             .
             If
             hereticks
             invite
             you
             to
             a
             feast
             ,
             eate
             not
             of
             flesh
             vpon
             a
             fish
             day
             although
             they
             carne
             it
             vnto
             you
             ,
             for
             it
             is
             a
             case
             of
             conscience
             .
          
           
             12
             God
             commandeth
             kings
             expresly
             to
             read
             in
             his
             law
             ;
             which
             is
             the
             holy
             scripture
             ,
             al
             the
             daies
             of
             their
             life
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             learne
             to
             feare
             him
             .
             On
             the
             contrary
             the
             popish
             Doctors
             ,
             Bishops
             and
             Confessours
             ,
             which
             are
             about
             Kings
             ,
             never
             recommend
             the
             reading
             of
             the
             scripture
             vnto
             them
             ;
             for
             they
             are
             afraid
             ,
             that
             by
             this
             reading
             they
             might
             chance
             to
             learne
             the
             truth
             ,
             &
             come
             to
             knowe
             that
             their
             Crownes
             are
             not
             subiect
             
             to
             the
             pope
             .
          
           
             Finally
             ,
             The
             holy
             scripture
             saith
             that
             life
             everlasting
             is
             the
             gift
             of
             God
             ;
             
             &
             an
             inheritance
             ,
             which
             wee
             haue
             as
             wee
             are
             the
             children
             of
             God.
             That
             the
             bloud
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             doth
             purge
             vs
             from
             all
             our
             sins
             .
             That
             we
             eate
             &
             break
             bread
             in
             the
             Lords
             Supper
             ;
             That
             Iesus
             as
             he
             was
             man
             ,
             was
             like
             vnto
             vs
             in
             all
             things
             ,
             sinne
             only
             excepted
             .
             That
             Iesus
             Christ
             was
             offered
             vp
             for
             a
             sacrifice
             but
             one
             onely
             time
             .
             All
             which
             doctrines
             are
             cleane
             overthrowne
             by
             merits
             ,
             by
             purgatory
             ,
             by
             transubstantiation
             ,
             by
             the
             sacrifice
             of
             the
             Masse
             ,
             as
             wee
             haue
             formerly
             shewed
             .
          
           
             In
             all
             these
             things
             the
             pope
             doth
             oppose
             himselfe
             against
             God
             ,
             and
             resist
             his
             word
             .
             In
             so
             much
             that
             he
             suffereth
             a
             *
             Canon
             to
             be
             in
             his
             book
             of
             Decretals
             ,
             which
             saith
             ,
             that
             
               the
               Apostle
               S.
               Paul
               spoke
               against
               truth
               and
               reason
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             The
             fourth
             point
             .
             That
             the
             Pope
             doth
             set
             himselfe
             against
             Kings
             and
             Magistrats
             ,
             and
             exalt
             himselfe
             aboue
             them
             .
          
           
             This
             fourth
             point
             hath
             been
             proued
             sufficiently
             
             in
             my
             first
             book
             .
             To
             degrade
             kings
             and
             thrust
             them
             out
             of
             their
             kingdomes
             .
             &
             after
             that
             he
             hath
             denounced
             them
             deposed
             ,
             to
             expose
             them
             to
             the
             mercy
             of
             their
             subiects
             ,
             in
             saying
             with
             *
             Bellarmine
             ,
             that
             ,
             
               Executio
               ad
               alios
               pertinet
            
             ,
             the
             execution
             belongs
             to
             others
             :
             To
             tread
             vpon
             Emperours
             necks
             ,
             and
             when
             they
             come
             to
             kisse
             his
             pantofle
             ,
             to
             strike
             of
             the
             imperiall
             crowne
             with
             his
             foot
             :
             To
             make
             them
             hold
             the
             stirrup
             and
             the
             bridle
             of
             his
             horse
             ;
             To
             whip
             Kings
             or
             their
             Ambassadors
             in
             their
             place
             with
             rods
             by
             way
             of
             pennance
             ,
             making
             them
             to
             fall
             downe
             before
             him
             ;
             for
             which
             wee
             haue
             fresh
             examples
             ,
             and
             they
             themselues
             brag
             of
             it
             :
             to
             raise
             infinite
             sums
             of
             mony
             vpon
             their
             Kingdomes
             vnder
             the
             colour
             of
             first
             fruites
             ,
             bulls
             ,
             dispensations
             ,
             absolutions
             ;
             and
             to
             withhold
             the
             fift
             part
             of
             their
             subiects
             from
             them
             ,
             and
             the
             third
             part
             of
             their
             kingdome
             ;
             are
             things
             that
             cānot
             be
             taken
             for
             any
             great
             good
             turnes
             ,
             or
             testimonies
             of
             his
             loue
             towardes
             Princes
             .
             As
             for
             the
             exalting
             himselfe
             aboue
             them
             ,
             pope
             Innocent
             the
             3.
             in
             the
             Decretall
             that
             beginneth
             with
             ,
             Solitae
             ,
             puts
             as
             great
             a
             difference
             betweene
             the
             pope
             ,
             and
             the
             Emperour
             ,
             as
             there
             is
             betweene
             the
             sun
             &
             the
             
             moone
             .
             Which
             according
             to
             the
             rules
             of
             Astronomie
             .
             is
             6539
             times
             lesse
             then
             the
             sun
             ;
             and
             we
             haue
             seene
             before
             how
             Bellarmine
             maketh
             Kings
             as
             much
             inferiour
             to
             popes
             as
             artificers
             are
             to
             Kings
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             fift
             point
             .
             That
             the
             Pope
             doth
             call
             himselfe
             head
             of
             the
             Church
             .
          
           
             WE
             need
             plaints
             rather
             them
             proofs
             vpō
             this
             point
             .
             For
             the
             pope
             doth
             not
             onely
             take
             the
             title
             of
             the
             head
             of
             the
             Church
             vpon
             him
             ,
             but
             makes
             vs
             to
             feele
             the
             effects
             of
             it
             .
             Neither
             ,
             when
             we
             say
             that
             the
             pope
             calleth
             himselfe
             head
             of
             the
             vniversall
             church
             ,
             doe
             our
             adversaries
             say
             that
             we
             wrong
             them
             ,
             but
             they
             take
             it
             hardly
             ,
             that
             we
             doe
             not
             beleeue
             them
             .
             And
             I
             must
             needs
             condemne
             our selues
             of
             blockishnesse
             in
             offering
             to
             dispute
             about
             this
             title
             with
             him
             ,
             seeing
             that
             pope
             Anaclet
             in
             his
             3
             Decretall
             Epistle
             ,
             hath
             proued
             it
             so
             well
             out
             of
             the
             Gospel
             ;
             saying
             ,
             that
             Peter
             is
             called
             Cephas
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             the
             head
             .
             For
             this
             Etymologie
             must
             needes
             stand
             for
             good
             ,
             since
             the
             pope
             hath
             approued
             of
             it
             .
             With
             the
             like
             soliditie
             ,
             
             doth
             pope
             Boniface
             the
             8
             
             ground
             this
             superiority
             vpon
             the
             very
             first
             line
             of
             scripture
             .
             
               In
               the
               beginning
               God
               created
               the
               heaven
               and
               the
               earth
               .
            
          
           
             It
             is
             true
             ,
             that
             to
             shift
             of
             the
             matter
             ,
             they
             vse
             to
             say
             that
             the
             pope
             is
             but
             a
             ministeriall
             head
             .
             But
             herein
             mee
             thinkes
             they
             doe
             delude
             themselues
             ,
             because
             these
             wordes
             of
             a
             ministeriall
             head
             ,
             are
             meerely
             contradictory
             ,
             for
             it
             is
             as
             if
             one
             should
             say
             ,
             a
             kingly
             subiect
             ,
             or
             a
             masterly
             servant
             .
             And
             there
             is
             no
             king
             in
             the
             world
             ,
             which
             hauing
             sent
             his
             Vice-gerent
             into
             a
             Province
             ,
             woulde
             endure
             that
             hee
             should
             call
             himselfe
             king
             ,
             although
             he
             should
             excuse
             it
             ,
             and
             say
             that
             he
             were
             but
             a
             ministeriall
             king
             ,
             And
             do
             we
             thinke
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             whome
             the
             holy
             scripture
             calleth
             the
             head
             of
             the
             church
             ,
             will
             be
             well
             pleased
             that
             a
             man
             should
             take
             this
             title
             vpon
             him
             ,
             vnder
             the
             pretext
             that
             some
             doe
             excuse
             it
             by
             ,
             ,
             saying
             that
             he
             is
             an
             inferiour
             ,
             or
             ministeriall
             head
             ?
             And
             yet
             for
             all
             this
             ,
             not
             forbeare
             to
             rule
             like
             the
             cheife
             head
             ,
             as
             it
             often
             falleth
             out
             ,
             that
             vnder
             the
             title
             of
             the
             Kings
             Lieutenant
             many
             ,
             doe
             vsurp
             the
             authority
             of
             the
             King.
             
          
           
             But
             this
             is
             an
             other
             question
             .
             It
             is
             sufficient
             for
             vs
             if
             it
             appeare
             that
             the
             Pope
             names
             himselfe
             head
             of
             the
             church
             ,
             for
             this
             
             is
             enough
             for
             the
             fulfilling
             of
             the
             prophecie
             contained
             in
             these
             words
             ,
             that
             
               the
               son
               of
               perdition
               shall
               sit
               in
               the
               temple
               of
               God.
            
             For
             it
             is
             not
             without
             cause
             ,
             that
             the
             holy
             ghost
             doth
             vse
             this
             worde
             of
             sitting
             ,
             in
             steede
             of
             raigning
             .
             Because
             this
             is
             a
             word
             whereby
             the
             dignity
             ,
             and
             papall
             authority
             is
             commonly
             exprest
             .
             It
             is
             said
             ,
             that
             he
             sitteth
             in
             the
             chaire
             of
             
               S.
               Peter
            
             ,
             the
             common
             fashiō
             of
             speech
             is
             to
             say
             that
             Boniface
             or
             
               Clement
               sate
            
             so
             many
             yeares
             ,
             insteed
             of
             saying
             they
             governed
             the
             church
             so
             long
             .
             And
             so
             doth
             the
             whore
             speak
             in
             the
             18.
             of
             the
             
               Apocal.
               I
               sit
               as
               Queen
            
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             I
             rule
             ,
             shee
             the
             sāe
             
               sat
               vpon
               many
               waters
            
             ,
             which
             are
             the
             people
             and
             nations
             ,
             Apoc.
             17.
             ver
             .
             15.
             
             To
             sit
             therefore
             in
             the
             tēple
             of
             God
             ,
             signifieth
             to
             take
             vpon
             him
             to
             rule
             in
             the
             temple
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             This
             temple
             of
             God
             ,
             is
             the
             church
             of
             God
             :
             according
             to
             the
             stile
             of
             the
             new
             Testament
             ,
             S.
             *
             Paul
             speaks
             thus
             to
             the
             church
             of
             
               Corinth
               ,
               What
               agreement
               hath
               the
               temple
               of
               God
               with
               Idoles
               ?
               For
               yee
               are
               ▪
               the
               temple
               of
               the
               living
               God.
            
             So
             likewise
             it
             is
             said
             in
             the
             Apocalyps
             chap.
             3.
             
             
               Him
               that
               overcommeth
               will
               I
               make
               a
               pillar
               in
               the
               temple
               of
               my
               God.
            
             And
             in
             the
             11.
             c.
             the
             Angel
             of
             God
             cōmandeth
             
               S.
               Ioh.
            
             to
             
               mete
               the
               tēple
               of
               God
            
             ,
             which
             is
             not
             a
             building
             of
             stones
             ,
             but
             the
             church
             
             of
             God
             ,
             called
             by
             
               S.
               Paule
            
             the
             
               house
               of
               God.
            
             
          
           
             I
             am
             not
             ignorant
             that
             some
             of
             the
             Ancient
             by
             the
             Temple
             of
             God
             ,
             haue
             vnderstood
             the
             temple
             of
             Ierusalē
             ,
             
             with
             the
             like
             cōiecture
             ,
             as
             they
             haue
             said
             that
             Antichrist
             should
             be
             Nero
             ,
             raised
             vp
             againe
             from
             the
             dead
             .
             But
             there
             be
             some
             others
             of
             the
             Ancient
             which
             contradict
             them
             .
             Chrysostome
             vpon
             this
             place
             .
             
               He
               shall
               sit
               in
               the
               temple
               of
               God
               ,
               not
               in
               that
               of
               Ierusalē
               ,
               but
               in
               the
               church
               Theophylact
               ,
            
             and
             Oecumenius
             ,
             vsing
             lightly
             to
             follow
             him
             ,
             say
             the
             same
             .
             Authors
             ,
             whō
             Bellar.
             hath
             thus
             falsified
             ;
             
               He
               shall
               sit
               in
               the
               temple
               of
               God
               ,
               not
               only
               in
               that
               of
               Ierusalem
               .
            
             This
             Only
             is
             of
             his
             own
             ,
             falsly
             put
             in
             cōtrary
             to
             the
             reading
             of
             all
             copies
             .
             
               S.
               Hierome
            
             sheweth
             himselfe
             cleerly
             to
             be
             of
             this
             opiniō
             .
             
               He
               shal
               sit
               in
               the
               Temple
               of
               God
               ,
               that
               is
               either
               in
               Ierusalē
               ,
               or
               in
               the
               church
               ,
               which
               later
               expositiō
               I
               take
               to
               be
               the
               truer
               of
               the
               two
               .
            
          
           
             Others
             thinke
             to
             catch
             vs
             with
             a
             subtilty
             ,
             and
             say
             .
             If
             the
             sonne
             of
             perdition
             be
             sate
             in
             the
             church
             ,
             and
             the
             Pope
             be
             that
             sonne
             of
             perdition
             ,
             it
             followes
             that
             the
             church
             of
             Rome
             is
             the
             church
             ,
             since
             the
             Pope
             is
             sate
             there
             .
             The
             Apostle
             lendeth
             vs
             a
             helping
             hand
             to
             get
             out
             of
             this
             difficulty
             .
             For
             every
             one
             knowes
             that
             it
             is
             one
             thing
             to
             sit
             ,
             and
             another
             thing
             to
             bee
             sate
             ;
             the
             one
             notes
             a
             
             moving
             ,
             the
             other
             a
             resting
             ;
             the
             one
             signifies
             to
             take
             a
             place
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             to
             keepe
             it
             .
             This
             is
             the
             reason
             why
             the
             Apostle
             hath
             set
             it
             downe
             in
             the
             accusatiue
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             to
             represent
             a
             moving
             vnto
             vs.
             His
             meaning
             then
             is
             that
             the
             Pope
             shall
             sit
             in
             the
             temple
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             take
             place
             there
             ,
             but
             he
             doth
             not
             deny
             that
             after
             he
             is
             entered
             into
             the
             temple
             ,
             and
             is
             sate
             there
             ,
             hee
             shall
             driue
             the
             service
             of
             God
             thence
             .
             The
             temple
             of
             Salomō
             ,
             was
             it
             not
             the
             house
             of
             God
             ?
             And
             yet
             the
             Priests
             which
             were
             sate
             there
             changed
             it
             into
             a
             den
             of
             theeues
             :
             how
             much
             more
             if
             they
             had
             brought
             Idolatry
             into
             it
             ?
             They
             therefore
             which
             knowing
             the
             abuses
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             ,
             say
             that
             they
             must
             not
             go
             out
             of
             it
             because
             Antichrist
             is
             there
             ,
             suffer
             themselues
             (
             as
             it
             seemeth
             to
             me
             )
             to
             be
             bound
             with
             a
             straw
             ,
             and
             to
             be
             held
             with
             a
             slight
             reason
             ▪
             and
             I
             cannot
             sufficiently
             wonder
             at
             their
             foolishnesse
             :
             for
             they
             speake
             as
             if
             they
             should
             say
             .
             We
             may
             not
             go
             out
             of
             this
             house
             ,
             for
             the
             plague
             is
             here
             ;
             or
             thus
             ,
             that
             we
             may
             not
             be
             the
             children
             of
             perdition
             ,
             we
             must
             be
             subiect
             to
             the
             sonne
             of
             perdition
             .
             We
             confesse
             that
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             was
             the
             true
             church
             ,
             when
             the
             Pope
             was
             first
             establisht
             
             therein
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             the
             Greeke
             church
             ,
             the
             Syrian
             ,
             or
             Armenian
             ,
             but
             whē
             he
             was
             once
             establisht
             there
             ,
             by
             little
             ,
             and
             litle
             he
             overthrew
             religion
             ,
             so
             that
             they
             ,
             which
             look
             to
             be
             saved
             ,
             must
             of
             necessity
             goe
             out
             of
             her
             ;
             And
             he
             that
             shall
             go
             out
             of
             her
             ,
             goeth
             not
             out
             of
             the
             vniversall
             Church
             ,
             but
             out
             of
             a
             particular
             corrupted
             church
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             fourth
             part
             of
             the
             Prophecie
             of
             S.
             Paule
             .
          
           
             6
             And
             now
             ye
             know
             what
             withholdeth
             ,
             that
             he
             might
             be
             revealed
             in
             his
             time
             .
          
           
             7
             For
             the
             mysterie
             of
             iniquity
             doeth
             already
             worke
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             exposition
             of
             this
             prophecie
             .
          
           
             6
             And
             now
             ye
             know
             what
             it
             is
             that
             staieth
             his
             comming
             ,
             which
             shall
             come
             to
             passe
             ,
             at
             the
             time
             appointed
             ,
             and
             foreordained
             by
             God.
             
          
           
             7
             For
             the
             foundations
             of
             this
             sonne
             of
             perditions
             dominion
             are
             already
             laied
             .
             And
             Satan
             doth
             even
             now
             draw
             out
             the
             thre●des
             ,
             and
             spin
             the
             beginnings
             of
             his
             doctrine
             ,
             which
             shall
             be
             woven
             togither
             by
             an
             abominable
             art
             ,
             and
             full
             of
             wicked
             craft
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             The
             proofe
             of
             this
             exposition
             .
          
           
             For
             to
             proue
             this
             exposition
             ,
             wee
             are
             to
             shew
             two
             things
             .
             1.
             
             That
             there
             were
             some
             seedes
             of
             Papistry
             sowen
             even
             in
             
               S.
               Paules
            
             time
             .
             2.
             
             That
             Papistry
             is
             built
             with
             artificiall
             mysteries
             ,
             &
             fraudulent
             devises
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             first
             point
             .
             That
             there
             were
             some
             seeds
             of
             Papistry
             sowen
             even
             in
             S.
             Paules
             time
             .
          
           
             1
             THe
             affectation
             of
             preheminencie
             in
             the
             church
             .
             2.
             
             The
             religious
             service
             done
             to
             creatures
             .
             3.
             
             The
             Distinction
             of
             meates
             ,
             and
             of
             daies
             .
             4.
             
             The
             allurements
             of
             philosophy
             .
             5.
             
             The
             traditions
             of
             men
             ;
             all
             these
             are
             the
             maladies
             of
             the
             Papacie
             ,
             and
             vices
             of
             the
             church
             of
             Rome
             .
          
           
             There
             were
             some
             seedes
             of
             these
             vices
             sowne
             in
             the
             Apostle
             
               S.
               Paules
            
             time
             .
             For
             even
             at
             that
             time
             ,
             one
             called
             himselfe
             the
             disciple
             of
             Peter
             ,
             another
             of
             Paule
             ,
             and
             a
             third
             of
             Apollos
             ;
             which
             were
             enflamed
             with
             emulation
             about
             chiefdome
             .
             The
             encrease
             of
             which
             disorders
             was
             for
             the
             present
             hindered
             
             by
             the
             humility
             ,
             and
             vnion
             of
             the
             Apostles
             .
             And
             it
             may
             well
             seeme
             not
             to
             bee
             without
             great
             consideration
             ,
             that
             the
             same
             Apostle
             hath
             advertised
             the
             Romanes
             not
             to
             be
             high-minded
             ,
             vnder
             the
             paine
             of
             being
             cut
             of
             .
             Rom.
             11.
             
             For
             although
             the
             same
             instruction
             be
             giuen
             in
             general
             to
             the
             gentils
             ,
             yet
             doth
             he
             meane
             it
             more
             in
             speciall
             to
             the
             Romans
             ;
             foreseeing
             that
             their
             fall
             would
             come
             by
             pride
             ;
             &
             giueth
             them
             this
             information
             ,
             which
             they
             should
             take
             insteed
             of
             a
             prophecy
             .
          
           
             2
             There
             were
             some
             of
             them
             too
             which
             were
             giuen
             to
             worship
             Angels
             ,
             whom
             hee
             reprehendeth
             in
             his
             epistle
             to
             the
             Colossians
             ,
             2.
             chap.
             
               Let
               no
               man
            
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             
               beare
               rule
               over
               you
               ,
               by
               humblenesse
               of
               minde
               ,
               and
               worshipping
               of
               Angels
               .
            
          
           
             3
             There
             were
             euen
             in
             those
             daies
             these
             words
             heard
             ,
             
               Eate
               not
               ,
               taste
               not
               ,
               touch
               not
               .
               Col.
            
             2.
             and
             many
             made
             a
             conscience
             of
             eating
             certaine
             meates
             .
             1.
             
             Cor.
             10.
             
             Rom.
             14.
             and
             this
             for
             a
             religious
             exercise
             ,
             and
             out
             of
             a
             voluntary
             devotion
             ,
             &
             for
             no
             other
             end
             but
             to
             keepe
             downe
             the
             flesh
             .
             Then
             did
             some
             begin
             to
             make
             a
             distinction
             between
             daies
             ,
             as
             if
             one
             had
             beene
             better
             then
             another
             ,
             Rom.
             15.5
             .
             Gal.
             4.10
             .
          
           
           
             4
             Then
             were
             there
             some
             ,
             that
             sought
             to
             seduce
             the
             simple
             by
             philosophy
             ;
             where
             of
             
               S.
               Paul
            
             doth
             also
             admonish
             the
             faithful
             .
             
               Beware
               that
               no
               man
               spoile
               you
               through
               philosophy
               ,
               and
               vaine
               deceipt
               .
            
          
           
             5
             In
             the
             same
             place
             he
             forbiddeth
             the
             Colossians
             to
             sticke
             to
             the
             traditions
             of
             mē
             ;
             and
             he
             toucheth
             the
             corruption
             ,
             that
             was
             growing
             amongst
             thē
             .
             Out
             of
             these
             sparks
             ,
             through
             continuance
             of
             time
             ,
             there
             arose
             a
             great
             flame
             :
             Satan
             endeavouring
             at
             that
             time
             to
             beate
             vpon
             this
             yron
             with
             as
             little
             noise
             as
             might
             bee
             ,
             which
             hee
             could
             not
             bring
             to
             that
             perfect
             forme
             as
             hee
             desired
             ,
             till
             many
             ages
             were
             past
             ;
             There
             were
             many
             yeares
             to
             be
             imployed
             about
             the
             licking
             of
             this
             beare
             ,
             before
             it
             could
             be
             brought
             to
             any
             handsome
             shape
             .
             The
             authority
             of
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             the
             zeale
             of
             their
             disciples
             ,
             the
             violence
             of
             persecutions
             ,
             did
             stop
             him
             frō
             going
             forwards
             in
             his
             worke
             ;
             but
             if
             frō
             the
             very
             infancie
             of
             the
             christian
             church
             ,
             &
             in
             the
             sight
             of
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             he
             did
             begin
             to
             set
             about
             this
             mysterie
             of
             iniquity
             ;
             what
             did
             he
             do
             after
             these
             lights
             were
             extinguished
             ,
             after
             this
             zeale
             was
             waxen
             cold
             ;
             is
             it
             likely
             that
             hee
             woulde
             forget
             his
             former
             worke
             ,
             or
             begin
             it
             so
             earely
             to
             cast
             it
             off
             at
             
             last
             ?
             Seeing
             that
             if
             Antichrist
             must
             be
             such
             a
             one
             ,
             as
             our
             adversaries
             describe
             him
             to
             be
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             a
             Iew
             ,
             one
             that
             must
             build
             vp
             Ierusalem
             againe
             ,
             and
             be
             a
             soveraigne
             monarch
             over
             the
             whole
             world
             ,
             we
             see
             no
             beginnings
             yet
             of
             all
             this
             ,
             nor
             nothing
             more
             vnlikely
             to
             come
             to
             passe
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             second
             point
             .
             With
             what
             cunning
             the
             prophecie
             is
             built
             and
             of
             the
             diverse
             sortes
             of
             guile
             that
             are
             therein
             .
          
           
             AS
             the
             Apostle
             calleth
             the
             doctrine
             of
             our
             redemption
             ,
             a
             secret
             or
             mistery
             of
             godlynesse
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             height
             ,
             &
             depth
             thereof
             :
             so
             doth
             he
             call
             the
             doctrin
             ,
             which
             is
             framed
             with
             deceipt
             ,
             and
             continued
             by
             deepe
             policie
             ,
             a
             secret
             or
             mistery
             of
             iniquitie
             :
             which
             is
             the
             selfesame
             with
             that
             ,
             which
             the
             spirit
             of
             God
             in
             the
             2.
             of
             the
             Apocalyps
             calleth
             the
             deepnesse
             of
             Satan
             .
          
           
             The
             policies
             imployed
             about
             the
             building
             of
             Poperie
             ,
             and
             establishment
             of
             the
             papall
             dignity
             ,
             are
             of
             4.
             sorts
             .
             1.
             
             There
             be
             some
             of
             them
             ,
             which
             serue
             to
             blinde
             the
             people
             ,
             and
             to
             darke
             their
             vnderstandings
             .
             
             2.
             
             There
             bee
             others
             that
             serue
             to
             heape
             vp
             riches
             ;
             3.
             
             There
             be
             others
             that
             serue
             to
             exalt
             the
             pope
             ,
             and
             his
             clergie
             to
             honour
             ,
             &
             dignitie
             .
             4.
             
             There
             bee
             others
             which
             serue
             for
             the
             preservation
             of
             that
             which
             is
             gotten
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             first
             sort
             of
             Policie
             serving
             to
             blind
             ,
             and
             inveigle
             the
             people
             .
          
           
             THat
             the
             people
             therefore
             might
             bee
             blinded
             ,
             and
             deceaued
             without
             vnderstanding
             so
             much
             ;
             the
             pope
             hath
             wrested
             the
             scriptures
             out
             of
             their
             hands
             ,
             and
             takē
             order
             that
             they
             should
             not
             bee
             translated
             into
             a
             knowne
             tongue
             .
             Within
             these
             fewe
             yeares
             ,
             the
             scriptures
             were
             no
             more
             knowne
             to
             the
             people
             of
             France
             ,
             then
             the
             Alcoran
             was
             :
             There
             were
             only
             some
             Latin
             Bibles
             in
             Monasteries
             ,
             and
             in
             clergie
             mens
             houses
             .
             And
             evē
             at
             this
             very
             time
             in
             
               Spain
               ,
               Italie
               ,
               Sicilie
               ,
               &c.
            
             to
             see
             an
             Italian
             or
             Spanish
             Bible
             ,
             would
             be
             deemed
             to
             bee
             a
             prodigy
             ,
             and
             thought
             a
             matter
             sufficient
             to
             fetch
             one
             vnder
             the
             inquisition
             .
             To
             the
             same
             ende
             it
             is
             that
             hee
             will
             haue
             the
             common
             service
             read
             in
             a
             strange
             tongue
             ,
             and
             the
             women
             and
             children
             are
             taught
             to
             
             pray
             in
             Latin
             ,
             for
             feare
             they
             should
             vnderstand
             themselus
             .
             This
             once
             effected
             ,
             it
             was
             easie
             for
             the
             Pope
             to
             drawe
             religion
             to
             his
             owne
             profit
             ,
             &
             to
             disguise
             it
             as
             he
             thought
             best
             ;
             the
             poore
             people
             suffering
             themselus
             perforce
             to
             bee
             led
             along
             by
             these
             guides
             ,
             which
             haue
             hoodwinckt
             their
             eies
             .
             Neverthelesse
             because
             it
             is
             the
             nature
             of
             the
             people
             to
             be
             busie
             about
             some
             thing
             ;
             having
             taken
             away
             the
             scripture
             from
             them
             ,
             insteed
             thereof
             he
             gaue
             them
             images
             ,
             together
             with
             many
             outward
             ceremonies
             ,
             &
             gay
             ornaments
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             that
             whilst
             they
             stood
             gazing
             vpon
             these
             he
             might
             the
             easier
             display
             his
             nets
             to
             ensnare
             them
             ;
             Some
             pretty
             recreations
             they
             haue
             for
             to
             occupy
             their
             mindes
             ,
             whilst
             hee
             in
             the
             Interim
             builds
             a
             strong
             fort
             round
             about
             them
             ,
             for
             to
             keepe
             them
             in
             slavish
             bondage
             .
          
           
             2
             But
             because
             ,
             be
             you
             never
             so
             carefull
             herein
             ,
             yet
             there
             will
             ever
             be
             some
             curious
             spirits
             that
             will
             escape
             and
             get
             out
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             is
             hard
             ,
             but
             that
             some
             one
             or
             other
             will
             be
             desirous
             to
             see
             the
             head
             spring
             and
             knowe
             vpon
             what
             authoritie
             Christian
             religion
             is
             founded
             ;
             for
             feare
             least
             such
             a
             man
             as
             this
             ,
             hauing
             gotten
             the
             sight
             of
             the
             scripture
             by
             stealth
             ,
             should
             bee
             offended
             
             for
             to
             see
             it
             so
             little
             agreeing
             with
             the
             doctrine
             of
             the
             Romish
             Church
             ,
             they
             haue
             sought
             to
             prevent
             this
             inconvenience
             ,
             by
             an
             impudent
             shift
             .
             That
             is
             ,
             they
             vse
             to
             revile
             the
             scripture
             ,
             saying
             that
             it
             doth
             not
             containe
             all
             things
             necessary
             to
             salvation
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             but
             a
             peece
             of
             a
             rule
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             obscure
             ,
             and
             ambiguous
             ,
             that
             the
             divell
             himselfe
             makes
             vse
             of
             it
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             not
             the
             chief
             iudge
             of
             controversies
             ;
             but
             that
             frō
             thence
             wee
             must
             appeale
             to
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             ,
             which
             cannot
             bee
             deceaued
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             Pope
             which
             cannot
             erre
             in
             the
             faith
             ;
             By
             these
             meanes
             they
             haue
             made
             the
             rule
             of
             religiō
             subiect
             vnto
             themselues
             ,
             since
             that
             they
             themselues
             ,
             are
             the
             rule
             of
             religion
             :
             and
             haue
             made
             themselues
             ,
             both
             iudges
             &
             parties
             ,
             since
             that
             in
             the
             accusatiōs
             against
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             ,
             they
             will
             haue
             the
             Church
             to
             be
             iudge
             ,
             and
             acknowledge
             no
             other
             true
             Church
             but
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             .
          
           
             3
             To
             the
             same
             end
             is
             it
             that
             they
             bind
             and
             tie
             the
             beliefe
             of
             the
             people
             ,
             with
             an
             ignorant
             respect
             ,
             making
             them
             to
             followe
             without
             vnderstanding
             ,
             and
             to
             beleeue
             without
             knowledge
             ,
             whereas
             the
             *
             Scripture
             would
             haue
             vs
             first
             know
             &
             then
             belieue
             .
             
             So
             doe
             they
             fold
             the
             faith
             of
             an
             ignorant
             man
             within
             the
             faith
             of
             his
             curate
             ;
             but
             take
             away
             the
             means
             from
             him
             ,
             where
             by
             hee
             might
             knowe
             whether
             his
             Curate
             taught
             the
             truth
             or
             no.
             
          
           
             This
             also
             serueth
             to
             detain
             mens
             minds
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             by
             varietie
             of
             recreations
             hath
             studied
             to
             fit
             it selfe
             to
             all
             sorts
             of
             humors
             ,
             and
             to
             content
             all
             kind
             of
             persons
             ;
             There
             is
             not
             so
             distasting
             a
             spirit
             ,
             but
             may
             finde
             something
             here
             to
             please
             his
             palat
             .
             Doe
             you
             loue
             pompe
             and
             magnificence
             ?
             where
             is
             the
             like
             to
             that
             of
             the
             Cardinals
             ,
             and
             Prelates
             ?
             or
             set
             out
             with
             that
             stately
             furniture
             ,
             as
             their
             most
             solemne
             Masses
             are
             ?
             But
             if
             a
             sordid
             life
             bee
             more
             pleasing
             to
             any
             one
             ,
             you
             haue
             the
             Capuchins
             ,
             and
             Fevillants
             ;
             doe
             you
             loue
             to
             liue
             at
             your
             ease
             ?
             you
             haue
             your
             Abbays
             ,
             and
             Priories
             ,
             together
             with
             richly
             landed
             places
             for
             Canons
             and
             Monckes
             :
             who
             enioy
             their
             hearts
             desires
             ,
             &
             haue
             the
             world
             at
             wil
             ;
             but
             if
             you
             like
             rather
             to
             liue
             like
             a
             beggar
             ,
             you
             haue
             the
             4.
             orders
             of
             begging
             Friars
             ;
             if
             you
             affect
             solitarinesse
             ,
             you
             haue
             the
             Hermits
             ;
             if
             to
             keepe
             company
             ,
             you
             haue
             the
             Convētuall
             Mōks
             ;
             are
             you
             desirous
             of
             knowledge
             ,
             behold
             the
             
             Iesuits
             that
             take
             vpon
             them
             to
             professe
             it
             ;
             or
             if
             ignorance
             ?
             you
             haue
             the
             ignorant
             Friars
             ,
             which
             haue
             made
             a
             vertue
             of
             ignorāce
             ;
             Doth
             insolencie
             ,
             and
             lasciviousnes
             ,
             like
             any
             one
             ,
             there
             is
             shrouetide
             ,
             a
             time
             appointed
             to
             daunce
             ,
             and
             revell
             in
             ,
             which
             sportes
             if
             any
             chance
             to
             distaste
             ,
             presently
             therevpon
             ensueth
             ash-wednesday
             ,
             which
             chāgeth
             their
             countenances
             ,
             and
             turneth
             all
             their
             lewd
             mirth
             into
             a
             suddaine
             devotion
             .
             At
             Rome
             you
             haue
             covents
             of
             cloystered
             Monckes
             wonderfull
             for
             their
             austerity
             ,
             &
             stricktnesse
             of
             life
             ;
             and
             hard
             by
             ,
             the
             commō
             stewes
             :
             liberall
             almes
             bestowed
             on
             the
             hospitall
             of
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             ;
             but
             withall
             selling
             of
             benefices
             ,
             dispensations
             ,
             absolutions
             ,
             and
             Church
             offices
             .
          
           
             All
             this
             is
             done
             in
             divers
             places
             ,
             and
             by
             divers
             men
             ,
             but
             behold
             contrary
             things
             in
             one
             and
             the
             selfe
             same
             person
             .
             The
             Pope
             makes
             Emperours
             to
             kisse
             his
             feet
             ,
             but
             hee
             himselfe
             on
             Maundie
             Thursday
             washeth
             poore
             mens
             feet
             ;
             he
             calleth
             himselfe
             a
             Monarch
             &
             God
             vpon
             earth
             ,
             but
             ye
             shal
             heare
             him
             at
             another
             time
             ,
             say
             that
             he
             is
             the
             servant
             of
             servants
             .
             Pretty
             diversity
             ,
             and
             delightfull
             ;
             a
             witty
             people
             ,
             to
             cloath
             religion
             with
             this
             variety
             of
             colours
             .
             There
             are
             
             none
             there
             ,
             euen
             to
             little
             children
             of
             6.
             and
             7.
             yeares
             old
             ,
             but
             shall
             haue
             some
             thing
             or
             other
             that
             wil
             content
             them
             ;
             there
             are
             certaine
             feasts
             of
             purpose
             for
             them
             ,
             as
             the
             feast
             of
             
               S.
               Catharin
            
             ,
             and
             
               S.
               Nicholas
            
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             clad
             in
             gay
             apparell
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             led
             about
             in
             procession
             ,
             &
             haue
             little
             painted
             pictures
             giuen
             them
             to
             beare
             in
             their
             hāds
             .
             When
             they
             are
             9.
             or
             10.
             yeares
             old
             they
             haue
             their
             heads
             bound
             about
             with
             fillets
             ,
             and
             little
             crosses
             laid
             vpon
             them
             of
             beaten
             gold
             ,
             thē
             the
             bishop
             stroaks
             their
             crowns
             ,
             and
             this
             is
             that
             which
             they
             call
             confirmation
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             second
             Policie
             serving
             to
             gaine
             .
          
           
             IN
             the
             second
             place
             ,
             Popery
             hath
             made
             religion
             serue
             ,
             as
             a
             meanes
             to
             gather
             vp
             riches
             ;
          
           
             1
             This
             is
             the
             reason
             why
             they
             haue
             made
             a
             new
             article
             of
             faith
             ,
             which
             overthrowes
             the
             whole
             gospel
             :
             to
             wit
             ;
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             by
             his
             passion
             hath
             not
             satisfied
             for
             the
             paine
             due
             to
             our
             sinnes
             which
             wee
             commit
             after
             Baptisme
             ,
             but
             that
             it
             lieth
             vp
             on
             vs
             to
             satisfie
             for
             them
             ,
             by
             doing
             pennance
             in
             this
             life
             ,
             and
             after
             this
             life
             by
             beeing
             
             in
             the
             fire
             of
             Purgatory
             ;
             a
             fire
             ,
             seauen
             times
             more
             hot
             then
             common
             fire
             is
             ,
             and
             wherein
             a
             man
             shall
             fry
             for
             many
             ages
             togither
             .
             But
             such
             is
             the
             mercy
             of
             his
             Holinesse
             ,
             that
             hee
             pardoneth
             a
             great
             deale
             of
             this
             time
             to
             some
             ,
             whither
             it
             be
             by
             iurisdiction
             ,
             or
             else
             by
             way
             of
             suffrage
             .
          
           
             2
             To
             the
             same
             end
             is
             it
             ,
             that
             they
             tie
             their
             pardons
             to
             certaine
             churches
             ,
             and
             hang
             them
             on
             certaine
             altars
             ;
             to
             which
             this
             priviledge
             is
             granted
             ,
             that
             whosoeuer
             shal
             cause
             a
             Masse
             to
             bee
             said
             there
             ,
             on
             such
             a
             day
             ,
             shal
             haue
             his
             choice
             to
             free
             what
             soule
             he
             will
             out
             of
             Purgatory
             ;
             but
             this
             is
             neuer
             done
             without
             paying
             ;
             And
             in
             the
             buls
             of
             Indulgence
             there
             is
             this
             clause
             ordinarily
             inserted
             ,
             that
             this
             priuiledge
             is
             for
             none
             ,
             but
             
               Manus
               porrigentibus
               adiutrices
            
             ,
             for
             such
             as
             shall
             put
             to
             their
             helping
             handes
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             for
             such
             as
             shall
             giue
             some
             thing
             to
             the
             Church
             ,
             or
             which
             shall
             put
             some
             thing
             into
             the
             poore
             mans
             boxe
             ,
             which
             for
             this
             purpose
             is
             set
             before
             the
             church
             dore
             where
             the
             pardons
             are
             hanged
             .
             Wherein
             wee
             may
             note
             a
             notable
             point
             of
             subtilty
             ,
             for
             the
             Pope
             sending
             his
             Iubilee
             into
             Fraunce
             ,
             sendeth
             it
             but
             onlie
             into
             two
             or
             three
             places
             of
             the
             Realme
             ,
             &
             
             not
             thorough
             the
             whole
             Country
             ,
             for
             so
             it
             would
             be
             hard
             for
             him
             to
             gather
             in
             the
             cōtributions
             ;
             and
             the
             summes
             of
             mony
             being
             dispersed
             must
             needs
             be
             much
             diminished
             in
             passing
             through
             so
             many
             mens
             hands
             .
          
           
             3
             With
             the
             like
             cūning
             is
             it
             ,
             that
             they
             vse
             to
             make
             the
             people
             institute
             obits
             ,
             and
             yearely
             masses
             to
             bee
             said
             for
             their
             soules
             ,
             which
             are
             bought
             at
             a
             deare
             rate
             .
             For
             to
             hope
             to
             haue
             Masses
             without
             mony
             ,
             were
             but
             a
             folly
             ;
             it
             is
             no
             reason
             that
             a
             mā
             should
             die
             cheape
             ;
             yet
             this
             is
             one
             commodity
             that
             in
             this
             happy
             age
             ,
             euery
             one
             is
             received
             into
             paradice
             for
             his
             mony
             ;
             it
             cannot
             be
             imagined
             what
             profit
             they
             reap
             hereby
             :
             seeing
             that
             there
             is
             no
             mā
             which
             would
             not
             gladly
             giue
             all
             〈◊〉
             he
             were
             worth
             ,
             to
             bee
             delivered
             from
             a
             fire
             that
             should
             torment
             him
             but
             for
             halfe
             an
             howre
             ,
             how
             much
             more
             to
             be
             freed
             from
             a
             fire
             wherein
             hee
             should
             lie
             burning
             I
             know
             not
             how
             many
             hundreth
             years
             ;
             these
             were
             the
             meanes
             by
             which
             this
             shamefull
             gaine
             beganne
             first
             to
             encrease
             ,
             whereby
             bodyly
             pennance
             ,
             is
             turned
             into
             a
             pecuniarie
             mulct
             ;
             they
             cannot
             haue
             the
             earth
             broken
             vp
             for
             them
             to
             be
             buryed
             in
             ,
             nor
             the
             bels
             rung
             out
             ,
             nor
             be
             named
             in
             the
             Memento
             without
             mony
             ;
             yea
             &
             the
             masses
             
             are
             solde
             for
             more
             and
             lesse
             according
             to
             the
             degree
             of
             the
             solemnitie
             that
             they
             are
             set
             out
             in
             ;
             there
             are
             none
             but
             the
             poore
             in
             a
             bad
             taking
             when
             they
             die
             .
             The
             4.
             orders
             of
             the
             Friars
             Mendicant
             never
             come
             to
             visit
             them
             vpon
             their
             death
             beds
             ,
             neuer
             accompany
             them
             to
             church
             at
             their
             funerals
             ,
             nor
             do
             them
             any
             other
             seruice
             .
             For
             the
             Taxe
             booke
             in
             the
             chapter
             of
             matrimoniall
             dispensations
             ,
             in
             the
             23.
             leafe
             ,
             doth
             put
             for
             an
             vndoubted
             maxime
             ,
             that
             
               Hae
               gratiae
               non
               cōceduntur
               paup
               ribus
               ,
               quia
               non
               sunt
               ,
               ideo
               non
               possunt
               consolari
               .
            
             These
             favours
             are
             not
             grāted
             to
             the
             poore
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             not
             ,
             therfore
             they
             cannot
             bee
             comforted
             .
             For
             as
             thē
             they
             thought
             thēselues
             to
             stand
             on
             so
             sure
             ground
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             scoffe
             at
             the
             people
             without
             any
             danger
             ,
             and
             bragge
             how
             they
             had
             abused
             them
             .
          
           
             4
             The
             inuocation
             of
             Saints
             ,
             and
             miracles
             ,
             and
             supposed
             reliques
             ,
             haue
             ,
             and
             still
             do
             serue
             to
             the
             same
             end
             ;
             for
             if
             one
             Saint
             be
             in
             credit
             ,
             every
             one
             carieth
             his
             offrings
             to
             him
             ;
             The
             Curate
             liues
             by
             this
             ,
             &
             the
             village
             fareth
             the
             better
             for
             it
             ;
             And
             when
             the
             people
             come
             to
             kisse
             the
             reliques
             ,
             the
             basen
             is
             never
             farre
             of
             .
             To
             go
             away
             without
             casting
             any
             thing
             into
             it
             ,
             would
             bee
             
             thought
             to
             haue
             beene
             done
             in
             contempt
             ,
             and
             be
             censured
             for
             an
             vncivill
             part
             ;
             Their
             solemne
             feastes
             are
             daies
             of
             collection
             ,
             which
             for
             this
             reason
             ,
             haue
             beene
             so
             much
             the
             more
             multiplied
             ;
             On
             such
             times
             as
             these
             ,
             the
             Saints
             are
             better
             clothed
             then
             they
             vse
             to
             bee
             ordinarily
             ,
             and
             the
             Virgin
             Mary
             doth
             change
             her
             attire
             .
          
           
             5
             To
             the
             same
             end
             is
             it
             that
             the
             Pope
             hath
             invented
             a
             thousand
             inhibitions
             for
             certaine
             meats
             ,
             As
             also
             that
             hee
             hath
             forbidden
             marriage
             in
             the
             third
             &
             fourth
             degree
             ,
             &
             in
             spirituall
             parentage
             ,
             &
             in
             Lent
             ,
             &c.
             
             Because
             look
             how
             many
             the
             more
             inhibitions
             there
             are
             ,
             by
             so
             much
             the
             greater
             need
             haue
             we
             to
             seeke
             for
             more
             dispensations
             ,
             which
             do
             alwaies
             bring
             some
             profit
             .
          
           
             6
             The
             Clergie
             it selfe
             is
             not
             exempted
             hence
             ,
             vpon
             whom
             the
             Pope
             doth
             raise
             yearely
             payments
             ,
             and
             contributions
             ,
             and
             makes
             every
             Archbishop
             amōgst
             them
             to
             buy
             his
             Pall
             at
             a
             deere
             rate
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             white
             Pall
             ;
             4
             fingers
             broad
             ,
             with
             buttons
             of
             lead
             ,
             covered
             over
             with
             blacke
             silke
             ,
             made
             of
             the
             wool
             of
             certain
             Lambs
             which
             are
             bread
             at
             
               S.
               Agnes
            
             in
             Rome
             ,
             according
             as
             it
             is
             related
             in
             the
             1
             booke
             of
             holy
             
             
             vate
             designes
             of
             princes
             ;
             If
             any
             one
             bee
             intended
             to
             trouble
             a
             state
             ,
             and
             to
             make
             the
             people
             take
             armes
             against
             their
             King
             ,
             his
             next
             way
             is
             to
             fall
             in
             with
             the
             Father
             confessours
             ,
             that
             so
             he
             may
             knowe
             howe
             they
             are
             inclined
             ,
             and
             by
             confession
             egge
             them
             on
             to
             rebellion
             .
          
           
             5
             Absolution
             after
             confession
             doth
             adde
             no
             lesse
             authoritie
             vnto
             them
             ;
             For
             by
             this
             it
             is
             that
             they
             haue
             vsurped
             a
             temporall
             dominion
             ,
             yea
             ouer
             kings
             and
             princes
             ;
             The
             pope
             will
             absolue
             a
             King
             ,
             but
             vpon
             some
             tyrannicall
             conditions
             ;
             to
             wit
             ,
             if
             hee
             will
             submit
             himselfe
             to
             be
             ierkt
             ,
             &
             to
             take
             a
             certaine
             number
             of
             lashes
             by
             the
             handes
             of
             Monkes
             ;
             or
             goe
             in
             pilgrimage
             ,
             or
             make
             his
             land
             tributary
             to
             the
             pope
             ,
             holding
             it
             as
             from
             
               S.
               Peter
            
             ,
             or
             send
             so
             many
             souldiers
             to
             such
             or
             such
             a
             country
             ,
             for
             the
             service
             of
             his
             Holinesse
             ;
             whereof
             we
             haue
             produced
             many
             examples
             aboue
             .
          
           
             6
             In
             publike
             ceremonies
             ,
             in
             Masses
             ,
             in
             Sittings
             ,
             &
             Feasts
             ,
             they
             haue
             taken
             vpon
             them
             to
             be
             princes
             superiours
             ,
             and
             exact
             slavish
             submission
             at
             their
             hands
             ;
             The
             Kings
             must
             serue
             popes
             at
             the
             Masse
             vpon
             their
             knees
             ;
             They
             must
             hold
             his
             stirrup
             as
             he
             is
             getting
             vp
             to
             horse
             ;
             They
             must
             hold
             
             his
             horse
             by
             the
             bridle
             as
             he
             is
             going
             ;
             or
             else
             help
             to
             beare
             vp
             his
             chaire
             with
             their
             shoulders
             ;
             they
             must
             wait
             vpon
             him
             at
             the
             table
             .
             And
             at
             the
             popes
             feast
             the
             chiefe
             Cardinall
             Bishop
             ,
             is
             to
             sit
             aboue
             the
             highest
             prince
             of
             Christendome
             ;
             and
             it
             is
             a
             notable
             maxime
             ,
             and
             infallible
             rule
             ,
             which
             is
             mentioned
             in
             the
             3
             booke
             1.
             sect
             .
             and
             2.
             chap.
             of
             popish
             ceremonies
             ;
             to
             wit
             ;
             
               Note
               that
               the
               Pope
               doth
               never
               doe
               reverence
               to
               any
               man.
               
            
          
           
             7
             If
             there
             bee
             any
             fountaine
             that
             is
             good
             against
             the
             stone
             ,
             or
             to
             comfort
             the
             stomacke
             ,
             and
             strengthen
             the
             sinnewes
             ,
             presently
             there
             is
             the
             statue
             of
             some
             Saint
             or
             other
             sent
             ,
             and
             erected
             hard
             by
             it
             ;
             as
             if
             this
             were
             done
             by
             some
             miracle
             and
             by
             vertue
             of
             the
             Saint
             ,
             that
             so
             they
             may
             the
             more
             confirme
             superstition
             .
          
           
             8
             They
             haue
             also
             yet
             more
             exalted
             themselues
             by
             their
             works
             of
             supererogation
             ,
             by
             vertue
             of
             which
             ,
             they
             obtaine
             a
             degree
             of
             glory
             in
             Paradice
             aboue
             the
             common
             Saints
             ,
             which
             had
             no
             other
             sanctitie
             but
             to
             obay
             God
             ;
             wheras
             these
             squires
             do
             more
             then
             God
             hath
             commāded
             ;
             their
             superaboūdant
             satisfactions
             serue
             for
             others
             ,
             &
             the
             Monckes
             which
             haue
             suffered
             more
             
             paines
             their
             sinnes
             deserued
             ,
             are
             in
             a
             manner
             our
             redeemers
             ,
             as
             Bellarmin
             saith
             in
             the
             4.
             chapter
             of
             his
             1.
             booke
             of
             Indulgences
             .
          
           
             9
             The
             cases
             of
             marriage
             also
             haue
             bin
             a
             great
             helpe
             to
             encrease
             their
             power
             ;
             for
             they
             haue
             remoued
             all
             matters
             of
             this
             nature
             from
             the
             courts
             of
             ciuill
             Magistrates
             .
             Whence
             it
             comes
             to
             passe
             that
             men
             repaire
             to
             Rome
             from
             all
             parts
             of
             Europe
             ,
             for
             the
             disanulling
             of
             marriages
             ,
             and
             for
             dispensations
             to
             marry
             in
             forbidden
             degrees
             ;
             the
             children
             that
             are
             borne
             out
             of
             which
             marriages
             ,
             are
             boūd
             of
             necessity
             to
             defend
             the
             Popes
             authority
             ,
             seeing
             that
             such
             marriages
             as
             these
             ,
             depend
             altogither
             vpon
             his
             permission
             .
          
           
             10
             Of
             the
             same
             rancke
             is
             their
             common
             service
             which
             they
             cause
             to
             be
             said
             in
             the
             Latin
             tongue
             .
             For
             as
             the
             Romanes
             did
             plant
             their
             language
             in
             the
             coūtries
             which
             they
             conquered
             ,
             and
             the
             king
             of
             Spaine
             vseth
             the
             Indians
             to
             speake
             spanish
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             a
             marke
             of
             soveraignty
             ,
             and
             a
             meanes
             to
             make
             them
             the
             more
             his
             owne
             .
             So
             the
             Pope
             hath
             made
             all
             the
             churches
             which
             are
             vnder
             him
             glad
             to
             yeeld
             their
             necks
             to
             this
             yoke
             ,
             &
             hath
             giuen
             thē
             the
             Roman
             tongue
             ,
             for
             a
             marke
             of
             subiection
             to
             the
             
               bishoppe
               of
               Rome
            
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             The
             fourth
             Policie
             .
             The
             meanes
             how
             to
             keepe
             that
             which
             they
             haue
             gotten
             .
          
           
             THe
             Popes
             being
             thus
             enriched
             ,
             and
             exalted
             to
             this
             height
             of
             honour
             ,
             did
             wisely
             cōsider
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             to
             little
             purpose
             to
             get
             ,
             if
             they
             were
             not
             able
             to
             keepe
             that
             which
             they
             had
             gotten
             ;
             &
             this
             is
             the
             maine
             point
             aboue
             others
             in
             which
             they
             haue
             beaten
             their
             braines
             ,
             and
             laboured
             to
             the
             vtmost
             of
             their
             power
             .
          
           
             1
             The
             first
             meanes
             ,
             to
             preserue
             that
             which
             they
             had
             gotten
             ,
             was
             to
             forbid
             men
             of
             the
             church
             to
             marry
             ,
             for
             feare
             lest
             bishops
             and
             Curates
             ,
             should
             encroach
             vpon
             church
             goods
             ,
             and
             least
             they
             should
             turne
             little
             streames
             out
             of
             the
             common
             channel
             to
             their
             private
             families
             ;
             Gregory
             the
             1.
             hath
             told
             vs
             as
             much
             aboue
             ,
             saying
             ,
             
               that
               he
               was
               therefore
               vnwilling
               to
               admit
               of
               a
               marryed
               bishop
               ,
               because
               a
               wife
               and
               children
               ,
               doe
               vse
               commonly
               to
               consume
               the
               church
               goods
               .
            
          
           
             2
             And
             for
             feare
             that
             Princes
             might
             come
             to
             finger
             their
             substaunce
             ,
             and
             that
             their
             lands
             (
             for
             treason
             or
             other
             such
             like
             
             crimes
             )
             might
             chaunce
             to
             be
             confiscate
             to
             the
             crowne
             ,
             they
             haue
             got
             to
             haue
             their
             iudges
             ,
             their
             officers
             ,
             &
             their
             prisons
             apart
             yea
             they
             haue
             so
             farre
             forth
             prevailed
             with
             our
             ancient
             kings
             ,
             (
             which
             were
             intente
             to
             nothing
             else
             but
             to
             draw
             the
             sworde
             ,
             and
             followe
             the
             game
             )
             that
             their
             civill
             causes
             were
             altogither
             decided
             at
             Rome
             ;
             they
             did
             also
             obtaine
             that
             the
             church
             shoulde
             euer
             be
             held
             to
             be
             vnder
             age
             ,
             that
             so
             they
             might
             not
             be
             bound
             to
             stand
             to
             any
             bargaine
             ,
             if
             it
             were
             their
             lucke
             at
             any
             time
             to
             be
             overtaken
             .
          
           
             3
             And
             to
             the
             ende
             that
             kings
             &
             princes
             should
             not
             put
             their
             noses
             in
             their
             affaires
             ,
             by
             medling
             with
             the
             choosing
             of
             *
             Popes
             ,
             as
             they
             did
             heretofore
             ,
             they
             haue
             not
             only
             confined
             this
             election
             to
             the
             suffrages
             of
             a
             fewe
             Cardinals
             ,
             but
             they
             shut
             them
             vp
             also
             within
             the
             Conclaue
             ,
             damme
             vp
             the
             windowes
             ,
             put
             in
             their
             meat
             vnto
             them
             at
             a
             little
             hole
             ;
             giue
             them
             their
             bread
             cut
             in
             small
             peeces
             ,
             their
             wine
             in
             cleere
             glasses
             ,
             for
             feare
             least
             there
             should
             be
             any
             ticket
             inclosed
             ,
             wherby
             they
             might
             receaue
             some
             information
             from
             without
             ;
             They
             dine
             every
             one
             apart
             ,
             without
             helping
             one
             another
             .
             And
             to
             make
             them
             dispatch
             
             their
             businesse
             the
             sooner
             ,
             their
             cōmons
             are
             diminished
             ,
             and
             their
             ordinarie
             made
             lesse
             from
             day
             to
             day
             ;
             yea
             Princes
             now
             adaies
             thinke
             themselues
             highly
             favored
             if
             they
             can
             buy
             the
             Cardinals
             voyces
             for
             huge
             summes
             of
             mony
             ,
             to
             the
             ende
             they
             may
             haue
             a
             Pope
             that
             will
             not
             handle
             them
             too
             rigorously
             ;
             And
             there
             is
             scarse
             ever
             a
             Pope
             made
             but
             by
             such
             meanes
             as
             these
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             The
             same
             politicke
             wisdome
             of
             theirs
             hath
             suggested
             this
             maxime
             vnto
             them
             ,
             that
             for
             the
             strengthning
             of
             their
             state
             they
             must
             of
             necessitie
             oblige
             great
             families
             ,
             and
             let
             them
             haue
             a
             share
             in
             the
             pray
             .
             Wherefore
             if
             a
             Prince
             or
             Lord
             haue
             a
             house
             overcharged
             with
             children
             ,
             they
             will
             bestow
             a
             Cardinallship
             on
             the
             youngest
             ,
             and
             make
             him
             an
             Abbot
             ,
             or
             a
             Prior
             ,
             this
             makes
             the
             house
             the
             lighter
             .
             A
             father
             hauing
             put
             his
             daughter
             into
             some
             religious
             order
             ,
             is
             not
             troubled
             to
             provide
             her
             a
             dowrie
             against
             her
             marriage
             day
             .
             They
             giue
             civill
             magistrates
             leaue
             ,
             and
             make
             them
             capable
             of
             holding
             benefices
             ,
             although
             they
             be
             married
             ,
             so
             to
             make
             them
             obliged
             .
          
           
             5
             The
             chiefest
             point
             of
             their
             policie
             ,
             
             is
             their
             thrusting
             of
             Prelates
             ,
             and
             other
             churchmen
             into
             Councels
             ,
             &
             into
             Courts
             of
             Parliament
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             they
             may
             know
             all
             the
             affaires
             of
             a
             Realme
             ;
             which
             is
             more
             ;
             Cardinals
             promoted
             to
             this
             honour
             by
             Popes
             ,
             sit
             in
             the
             Councels
             of
             kings
             ,
             against
             all
             the
             rules
             of
             state
             ,
             that
             a
             king
             should
             admit
             such
             into
             his
             Councel
             ,
             as
             are
             the
             creatures
             of
             a
             stranger
             ;
             By
             the
             like
             reasō
             ,
             kings
             should
             also
             for
             their
             parts
             haue
             some
             lay
             men
             in
             all
             Ecclesiasticall
             assemblies
             ,
             and
             generall
             Councels
             ,
             which
             should
             haue
             an
             eie
             over
             their
             actions
             ,
             and
             knowe
             what
             they
             did
             ;
             but
             they
             are
             to
             wise
             to
             suffer
             this
             .
          
           
             6
             This
             is
             not
             sufficient
             :
             For
             because
             amongst
             Prelats
             ,
             Bishops
             ,
             Abbots
             ,
             and
             the
             most
             quallified
             men
             of
             the
             clergie
             ,
             there
             are
             ever
             a
             great
             many
             honest
             ,
             &
             well
             minded
             persons
             ,
             which
             doe
             loue
             their
             countrie
             and
             the
             liberty
             of
             their
             Kings
             ,
             the
             Pope
             hath
             therefore
             here
             and
             there
             dispersed
             a
             great
             rabblement
             of
             petty
             Monks
             which
             should
             preach
             the
             obedience
             due
             to
             him
             ;
             who
             meriting
             for
             themselues
             ,
             and
             others
             ,
             haue
             receaued
             certaine
             prerogatiues
             of
             holinesse
             from
             the
             Pope
             ,
             which
             others
             haue
             not
             ;
             The
             fraternitie
             of
             the
             Cordeliers
             haue
             the
             privilege
             to
             drawe
             a
             soule
             
             out
             of
             Purgatory
             vpon
             certaine
             daies
             .
             The
             Carmelites
             haue
             the
             prerogatiue
             not
             to
             be
             in
             purgatory
             beyond
             the
             Saturday
             after
             their
             deaths
             .
             To
             weare
             the
             cowle
             ,
             &
             make
             the
             vow
             of
             
               S.
               Francis
            
             &
             
               S.
               Dominick
            
             ,
             doth
             confer
             the
             same
             grace
             that
             baptisme
             doth
             as
             Bernardine
             telleth
             vs
             in
             his
             Rosarie
             ,
             and
             
               Thomas
               of
               Aquine
            
             ,
             in
             his
             4.
             booke
             of
             Sentences
             ,
             and
             fourth
             Distinction
             .
          
           
             7
             But
             aboue
             all
             ,
             their
             greatest
             policy
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             depths
             of
             the
             mysterie
             of
             iniquitie
             haue
             beene
             discouered
             in
             their
             inventing
             the
             order
             of
             the
             Iesuites
             ;
             which
             leaue
             the
             honour
             of
             keeping
             the
             vowe
             of
             pouertie
             ,
             and
             chastitie
             to
             other
             orders
             ,
             binding
             themselues
             chiefly
             to
             the
             vow
             of
             obedience
             ,
             being
             tied
             in
             particular
             by
             an
             oath
             to
             the
             pope
             ,
             whom
             they
             sweare
             to
             obay
             ,
             
               In
               omnibus
               ,
               &
               per
               omnia
               ,
            
             with
             an
             obedience
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             a
             
               blind
               obedience
            
             ,
             such
             as
             doth
             execute
             the
             commandements
             of
             a
             superiour
             ,
             without
             inquiring
             why
             ;
             which
             are
             sent
             to
             run
             over
             the
             whole
             earth
             even
             to
             the
             Indies
             ,
             which
             haue
             a
             permissito
             goe
             in
             Lay
             mens
             apparell
             ,
             and
             to
             vse
             equivocation
             in
             iudgement
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             reveale
             the
             confessions
             of
             traytours
             ,
             &
             conspiratours
             against
             the
             life
             of
             their
             Kings
             :
             
             which
             take
             nothing
             from
             any
             by
             parcels
             ,
             but
             catch
             by
             grosse
             ,
             &
             swallow
             vp
             whole
             families
             together
             .
          
           
             All
             these
             tricks
             ,
             and
             devises
             ,
             tend
             chiefly
             to
             the
             ruine
             and
             reproach
             of
             kings
             ,
             whō
             his
             Holinesse
             doth
             cause
             to
             bee
             whipt
             most
             shamefully
             ,
             and
             with
             whose
             crownes
             hee
             dispenseth
             at
             his
             pleasure
             .
          
           
             8
             It
             is
             true
             indeed
             that
             the
             pope
             doth
             recompense
             them
             ;
             For
             hee
             giueth
             them
             of
             his
             spirituall
             graces
             ,
             an
             
               Holy
               Rose
            
             ,
             a
             Standard
             ,
             or
             a
             
               sacred
               sword
            
             ,
             a
             
               Boxe
               full
               of
               holy
               Graines
            
             ,
             of
             
               little
               crosses
               ,
               and
               beads
            
             ,
             which
             in
             kissing
             and
             carrying
             about
             them
             ,
             they
             shall
             gaine
             an
             hundred
             yeares
             of
             pardon
             .
             As
             also
             the
             priviledge
             of
             communicating
             vnder
             both
             kinds
             .
             Whoe
             will
             not
             stand
             amazed
             to
             behold
             these
             things
             ?
             Or
             who
             will
             be
             so
             obstinate
             as
             not
             to
             be
             forced
             by
             the
             evidence
             of
             the
             truth
             ?
             Although
             al
             this
             which
             I
             haue
             said
             is
             little
             ,
             or
             nothing
             ;
             I
             had
             need
             of
             better
             eies
             to
             looke
             downe
             in
             to
             the
             bottome
             of
             this
             so
             deepe
             a
             mystery
             .
             Wee
             haue
             produced
             nothing
             of
             this
             but
             what
             we
             haue
             knowne
             by
             experience
             .
             But
             how
             much
             more
             is
             that
             which
             lies
             hid
             ,
             and
             which
             we
             doe
             not
             knowe
             ?
             All
             other
             policie
             is
             but
             blockishnesse
             in
             respect
             of
             this
             ,
             
             and
             I
             am
             of
             opinion
             that
             they
             which
             are
             the
             contrivers
             of
             it
             ,
             can
             hardly
             look
             vpon
             one
             another
             without
             laughing
             .
             Finally
             this
             is
             altogether
             such
             a
             subiect
             ,
             as
             God
             doth
             demand
             for
             to
             shew
             that
             he
             doth
             cōfound
             the
             wisdomes
             of
             men
             ,
             and
             take
             the
             subtill
             in
             their
             own
             devises
             .
             But
             the
             Apostle
             calls
             vnto
             vs
             ,
             intending
             to
             make
             the
             matter
             more
             cleere
             yet
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             fourth
             part
             of
             this
             prophecy
             .
          
           
             7
             Only
             he
             which
             now
             withholdeth
             ,
             shall
             let
             till
             he
             be
             taken
             out
             of
             the
             way
             .
          
           
             8
             And
             then
             shall
             that
             wicked
             man
             bee
             revealed
             ,
             whome
             the
             Lord
             shal
             consume
             with
             the
             spirit
             of
             his
             mouth
             ,
             and
             shall
             abolish
             with
             the
             brightnesse
             of
             his
             comming
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             explication
             of
             this
             prophecy
             .
          
           
             7
             There
             is
             nothing
             but
             one
             that
             hinders
             the
             disclosing
             of
             this
             Bishop
             .
             That
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             (
             which
             doth
             now
             oversway
             the
             whole
             world
             )
             must
             remaine
             yet
             for
             a
             time
             ,
             and
             afterwards
             be
             abolished
             .
          
           
             8
             And
             when
             this
             Roman
             Empire
             shall
             bee
             destroyed
             ,
             then
             shall
             this
             Bishop
             bee
             fully
             
             disclosed
             ,
             and
             the
             Papall
             see
             shall
             bee
             exalted
             by
             the
             ruines
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             which
             Bishop
             God
             shall
             beat
             downe
             ,
             &
             weaken
             by
             the
             preaching
             of
             his
             word
             ,
             but
             shall
             not
             destroy
             him
             vtterly
             till
             the
             last
             day
             of
             iudgement
             ,
             then
             when
             Iesus
             Christ
             shall
             come
             in
             his
             glory
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             proofe
             of
             this
             exposition
             .
          
           
             FOr
             the
             proofe
             of
             this
             interpretation
             ,
             we
             are
             to
             shew
             ,
             1.
             
             That
             the
             papacie
             is
             encreased
             ,
             and
             exalted
             by
             the
             ruines
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             2.
             
             That
             God
             hath
             weakned
             the
             papacie
             by
             the
             preaching
             of
             his
             word
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             first
             point
             .
             That
             the
             Papacie
             is
             encreased
             by
             the
             ruine
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             .
          
           
             THe
             Apostle
             saith
             ,
             
               That
               hee
               which
               doth
               obtaine
               shall
               obtaine
               ,
            
             or
             
               that
               hee
               which
               boldeth
               must
               hold
            
             ;
             By
             him
             which
             holdeth
             he
             vnderstandeth
             him
             ,
             which
             possesseth
             ,
             or
             holdeth
             rule
             ;
             which
             cannot
             bee
             vnderstood
             but
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             which
             did
             as
             then
             beare
             rule
             over
             a
             great
             part
             of
             the
             world
             .
             For
             the
             worde
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             which
             
             he
             vseth
             ,
             doth
             signify
             
               to
               possesse
            
             .
             as
             in
             the
             1.
             to
             the
             Cor.
             chap.
             7.
             v.
             30.
             
             Hee
             foretelleth
             vs
             therefore
             that
             the
             Empire
             which
             did
             beare
             rule
             must
             be
             abolished
             ,
             and
             that
             out
             of
             the
             ruines
             of
             the
             Empire
             
               the
               sonne
               of
               perdition
            
             must
             exalt
             himselfe
             ,
             &
             bee
             made
             manifest
             .
             The
             same
             word
             signifies
             also
             to
             withhold
             ,
             or
             hinder
             ;
             which
             also
             agreeth
             to
             our
             purpose
             .
             For
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             while
             it
             was
             in
             force
             did
             hinder
             the
             pope
             from
             rising
             ,
             and
             kept
             him
             vnder
             ,
             by
             punishing
             him
             ,
             driuing
             him
             to
             corners
             ,
             degrading
             him
             ,
             if
             at
             any
             time
             he
             failed
             to
             do
             his
             duty
             .
             But
             this
             Empire
             being
             decayed
             in
             the
             West
             ,
             &
             diminished
             in
             the
             East
             by
             the
             Sarasins
             ,
             The
             popes
             found
             means
             to
             seize
             vpō
             the
             chiefe
             citie
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             together
             with
             a
             great
             part
             of
             Italie
             ,
             &
             to
             devoure
             the
             neighbouring
             Churches
             ,
             and
             Realmes
             at
             his
             pleasure
             .
          
           
             Now
             although
             the
             Fathers
             haue
             spokē
             nothing
             concerning
             these
             things
             ,
             but
             only
             by
             guesse
             ,
             &
             coniectures
             ;
             because
             they
             were
             not
             as
             yet
             come
             to
             passe
             ,
             nevertheles
             I
             knowe
             not
             how
             it
             hath
             come
             to
             passe
             to
             bee
             a
             generall
             receaued
             opinion
             amongst
             them
             ,
             and
             a
             common
             prophecie
             ,
             that
             
               this
               sonne
               of
               perdition
            
             whom
             they
             call
             Antichrist
             ,
             
             should
             rise
             out
             of
             the
             destruction
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             and
             be
             exalted
             vpon
             the
             ruins
             thereof
             :
             And
             they
             apply
             this
             passage
             to
             that
             purpose
             ,
             wherin
             they
             al
             hold
             that
             Antichrist
             is
             spoken
             of
             :
             Tertullian
             in
             his
             book
             of
             the
             resurrection
             of
             the
             flesh
             ,
             chapter
             24
             Onely
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             
               hee
               which
               now
               holdeth
               ,
               must
               hold
               till
               he
               be
               abolished
               ;
               what
               is
               this
               but
               the
               Roman
               Empire
               ,
               the
               scattered
               parts
               whereof
               being
               divided
               amongst
               tenne
               kings
               shall
               produce
               Antichrist
               ,
               and
               then
               shall
               that
               wicked
               man
               be
               revealed
               ,
               &c.
               
               Chrysostome
            
             in
             his
             4.
             sermon
             vpon
             the
             second
             to
             the
             Thessalonians
             ,
             
               What
               is
               it
               therefore
               that
               withholdeth
               ,
               that
               hee
               bee
               not
               made
               manifest
               ,
               that
               is
               to
               say
               ,
               what
               is
               it
               that
               hindreth
               him
               from
               being
               revealed
               :
               some
               say
               that
               it
               is
               the
               grace
               of
               the
               holy
               Ghost
               ,
               others
               say
               that
               it
               is
               the
               Roman
               Empire
               ,
               of
               whose
               opinion
               I
               am
               altogether
               .
            
             The
             Greeke
             scholiast
             gathered
             out
             of
             diverse
             interpreters
             ,
             saith
             the
             same
             .
             
               By
               him
               which
               holdeth
               ,
               hee
               vnderstandeth
               him
               which
               hindreth
               ;
               And
               what
               is
               this
               ?
               some
               say
               that
               it
               is
               the
               holy
               Ghost
               ,
               others
               that
               it
               is
               the
               Roman
               Empire
               ,
               and
               this
               opinion
               is
               the
               best
               ;
               S.
               Austin
            
             in
             his
             20.
             booke
             and
             19.
             chap.
             of
             the
             cittie
             of
             God
             :
             
               Whereas
               the
               Apostle
               saith
               ,
               that
               only
               he
               which
               now
               holdeth
               ,
               must
               hold
               till
               hee
               be
               abolished
               ,
               
               this
               is
               thought
               by
               some
               and
               that
               not
               absurdly
               to
               be
               spokē
               of
               the
               Roman
               Empire
               ,
               as
               if
               it
               had
               beene
               said
               ,
               Only
               hee
               which
               now
               beareth
               rule
               ,
               must
               rule
               ,
               till
               he
               be
               put
               from
               it
               .
            
             Primasius
             ;
             
               The
               Roman
               Empire
               shall
               be
               destroyed
               before
               that
               Antichrist
               bee
               revealed
               ;
               S.
               Ierome
            
             saith
             the
             same
             in
             the
             11.
             quest
             .
             to
             Algasia
             where
             he
             doth
             expoūd
             this
             place
             ,
             
               If
               the
               Roman
               Empire
               bee
               not
               first
               destroyed
               ,
               and
               Antichrist
               goe
               before
               ,
               Christ
               shall
               not
               come
               .
            
             And
             a
             litle
             after
             ,
             hauing
             said
             that
             the
             name
             of
             blasphemy
             written
             in
             the
             forehead
             of
             the
             harlot
             clad
             in
             skarlet
             ,
             is
             ,
             
               Roma
               aeterna
            
             ,
             hee
             addeth
             ,
             that
             the
             Apostle
             durst
             not
             say
             in
             expresse
             tearms
             that
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             should
             bee
             abolished
             ,
             for
             feare
             of
             drawing
             persecution
             vpon
             the
             Church
             .
          
           
             Since
             therefore
             that
             the
             destruction
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             must
             goe
             before
             the
             manifestation
             of
             the
             sonne
             of
             perdition
             which
             is
             called
             Antichrist
             ,
             we
             are
             to
             looke
             whether
             this
             Empire
             be
             destroyed
             .
             For
             if
             it
             be
             found
             that
             it
             was
             long
             since
             ruinated
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             question
             but
             the
             sonne
             of
             perdition
             is
             made
             manifest
             .
          
           
             Here
             vpon
             there
             is
             a
             question
             moved
             whether
             the
             Empire
             of
             Germanie
             bee
             the
             true
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             and
             the
             same
             Empire
             
             which
             was
             in
             the
             Apostles
             time
             .
             There
             be
             some
             that
             affirme
             this
             ,
             building
             vpon
             this
             ground
             ,
             that
             the
             Emperour
             of
             Germanie
             is
             called
             King
             of
             the
             Romans
             .
             Others
             say
             that
             we
             are
             not
             to
             stand
             on
             wordes
             ,
             but
             things
             :
             And
             that
             the
             Romā
             Empire
             ,
             wherof
             
               S.
               Paul
            
             speaketh
             ,
             is
             no
             more
             ,
             as
             Machiavell
             saith
             in
             his
             1.
             booke
             of
             the
             Florentine
             historie
             :
             that
             ,
             
               L'
               Imperio
               é
               tutto
               in
               terrâ
               .
            
             the
             Empire
             is
             all
             fallē
             flat
             vpō
             the
             ground
             .
             That
             the
             Empire
             of
             Germanie
             came
             not
             by
             succession
             from
             the
             auncient
             Romane
             Emperours
             ;
             but
             that
             Charles
             the
             Great
             ,
             King
             of
             France
             was
             the
             first
             founder
             of
             it
             .
             That
             the
             Emperour
             of
             Germanie
             holdeth
             nothing
             neither
             in
             Rome
             nor
             in
             Italie
             .
             That
             Germanie
             for
             the
             most
             part
             is
             out
             of
             the
             ancient
             Roman
             Empire
             .
             That
             it
             is
             vnlikely
             that
             hee
             should
             be
             the
             Roman
             Emperour
             ,
             which
             is
             not
             onely
             not
             Emperour
             of
             Rome
             ,
             but
             sendeth
             to
             Rome
             to
             tender
             his
             submission
             ,
             and
             to
             take
             an
             oath
             of
             allegiance
             and
             obedience
             to
             him
             that
             beares
             sway
             there
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             to
             the
             Pope
             of
             Rome
             .
             And
             indeed
             Lypsius
             whoe
             hath
             spent
             his
             whole
             study
             in
             an
             exact
             knowledge
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             and
             which
             in
             this
             point
             yeelds
             to
             no
             man
             living
             ,
             affirmes
             boldly
             
             that
             the
             Pope
             holdeth
             the
             remainder
             of
             this
             Empire
             ;
             wherefore
             hee
             saith
             that
             this
             Pope
             and
             Roman
             Dictatour
             doth
             sustaine
             the
             parts
             of
             this
             ruined
             edifice
             .
             That
             hee
             hath
             his
             Senate
             clad
             in
             purple
             ,
             whom
             wee
             may
             compare
             to
             Kings
             ;
             That
             hee
             hath
             imposts
             ,
             and
             Embassadours
             from
             farre
             countries
             .
             That
             Kings
             themselues
             ,
             and
             Princes
             doe
             bend
             before
             him
             ,
             and
             bow
             down
             their
             heads
             in
             token
             of
             subiection
             .
             Wherevpon
             also
             he
             saith
             that
             
               this
               sacred
               Empire
               at
               Rome
               ,
               hath
               beene
               ,
               and
               is
               ,
               insteed
               of
               an
               ankor
               to
               floating
               Europe
            
             :
             And
             in
             my
             opinion
             the
             Pope
             and
             his
             Parasites
             do
             but
             plainly
             scof
             at
             the
             Emperor
             ,
             in
             calling
             him
             king
             of
             the
             Romans
             ,
             since
             that
             they
             haue
             taken
             away
             all
             Rome
             and
             Italy
             from
             him
             .
             But
             we
             need
             not
             here
             go
             about
             to
             decide
             this
             differēce
             ;
             for
             it
             is
             is
             sufficient
             that
             all
             confesse
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             long
             since
             to
             haue
             beene
             so
             decayed
             ,
             that
             one
             may
             say
             truly
             that
             it
             is
             ruinated
             ,
             and
             destroyed
             ;
             as
             say
             that
             our
             Kings
             should
             bee
             thrust
             out
             of
             al
             France
             ,
             except
             it
             were
             a
             little
             Corner
             in
             Brittany
             ,
             one
             might
             say
             that
             their
             kingdome
             were
             destroyed
             ,
             &
             abolished
             .
             Besids
             ,
             Bellarmine
             doth
             not
             see
             how
             he
             doth
             contradict
             himselfe
             ,
             in
             affirming
             that
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             
             whereof
             
               S.
               Paule
            
             speakes
             is
             not
             yet
             abolished
             :
             For
             hee
             saith
             by
             a
             consequent
             that
             the
             Empire
             of
             Germanie
             doth
             hinder
             the
             comming
             of
             Antichrist
             :
             which
             being
             granted
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             likelyhood
             that
             Antichrist
             must
             be
             a
             Iew
             which
             shall
             take
             vp
             his
             seat
             in
             the
             kingdome
             of
             Ierusalem
             ,
             for
             the
             Emperour
             of
             Germanie
             hath
             no
             meanes
             to
             hinder
             this
             .
          
           
             This
             then
             being
             out
             of
             question
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             whereof
             
               S.
               Paule
            
             speakes
             ,
             is
             already
             ruinated
             ,
             it
             must
             needs
             also
             be
             that
             the
             sonne
             of
             perditiō
             is
             already
             made
             manifest
             ;
             since
             that
             hee
             is
             to
             rise
             out
             of
             the
             ruines
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             and
             bee
             made
             manifest
             by
             the
             abolishment
             therof
             .
             We
             are
             therefore
             to
             finde
             out
             some
             state
             that
             did
             raise
             it selfe
             by
             the
             fall
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             :
             the
             head
             whereof
             must
             call
             himselfe
             God
             ,
             and
             take
             vpon
             him
             to
             rule
             in
             the
             house
             of
             God
             ,
             which
             is
             his
             Church
             ,
             and
             boast
             of
             signes
             and
             miracles
             :
             Doubtlesse
             the
             Turke
             never
             tooke
             such
             titles
             :
             &
             there
             shall
             no
             man
             but
             the
             Pope
             be
             found
             to
             whom
             all
             these
             things
             will
             agree
             :
             who
             hath
             also
             made
             the
             seate
             of
             his
             Pontificall
             Empire
             in
             the
             same
             towne
             ,
             which
             in
             the
             Apostle
             
               S.
               Pauls
            
             time
             was
             the
             seate
             of
             the
             
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             and
             which
             for
             many
             ages
             together
             was
             the
             chiefe
             cittie
             of
             the
             Empire
             :
             so
             that
             it
             cannot
             bee
             denied
             but
             that
             he
             holdeth
             the
             same
             place
             which
             the
             Roman
             Emperours
             did
             of
             old
             :
             And
             this
             is
             so
             knowne
             a
             thing
             that
             our
             adversaries
             thēselues
             are
             forced
             to
             confesse
             it
             ,
             some
             of
             whose
             testimonies
             wee
             will
             cite
             .
             
               Nicholas
               Machiavell
            
             dedicateth
             his
             
               Florentine
               historie
            
             to
             
               Pope
               Clement
            
             the
             7
             :
             And
             yet
             for
             al
             that
             ,
             in
             the
             1.
             booke
             there
             of
             hee
             is
             not
             afraid
             to
             speake
             in
             this
             manner
             :
             
               The
               Emperour
               therefore
               becomming
               a
               Christian
               ,
               and
               withdrawing
               himselfe
               to
               Constantinople
               ,
               it
               followed
               therevpon
               that
               the
               Roman
               Empire
               came
               to
               decay
               ,
               and
               the
               church
               of
               Rome
               to
               encrease
               the
               more
               :
               neverthelesse
               till
               the
               comming
               of
               the
               Lombards
               (
               all
               Italie
               being
               vnder
               the
               rule
               of
               Emperors
               or
               Kings
               )
               the
               Popes
               never
               tooke
               any
               other
               authoritie
               vpon
               them
               at
               that
               time
               ,
               but
               to
               looke
               into
               mens
               manners
               ,
               and
               their
               doctrine
               :
               In
               other
               matters
               they
               obayed
               the
               Emperours
               or
               Kings
               ,
               which
               sometimes
               did
               put
               them
               to
               death
               ,
               and
               imploy
               them
               as
               their
               servants
               in
               what
               businesse
               they
               pleased
               :
               but
               that
               which
               woone
               them
               the
               more
               honour
               ,
               and
               made
               them
               to
               be
               the
               more
               respected
               in
               Italie
               ,
               was
               King
               Theodoricks
               laying
               
               siege
               to
               Ravenna
               :
               because
               Rome
               remaining
               without
               a
               Prince
               ,
               the
               Romans
               to
               haue
               the
               more
               refuge
               ,
               were
               compelled
               to
               yeeld
               the
               Pope
               the
               more
               obedience
               .
               Yet
               they
               did
               not
               gaine
               much
               authoritie
               by
               this
               ,
               only
               the
               Church
               of
               Rome
               got
               to
               be
               preferred
               before
               that
               of
               Ravenna
               .
               But
               the
               comming
               of
               the
               Lumbards
               ,
               &
               the
               division
               of
               Italie
               into
               so
               many
               parts
               ,
               were
               the
               occasions
               of
               the
               Popes
               rising
               .
               Because
               he
               (
               being
               as
               it
               were
               the
               head
               at
               Rome
               )
               the
               Emperor
               of
               Constantinople
               ,
               and
               the
               Lumbards
               did
               so
               far
               forth
               respect
               him
               ,
               that
               the
               Romans
               by
               the
               Popes
               meanes
               did
               enter
               a
               league
               of
               friendship
               with
               the
               Lombards
               ,
               and
               with
               Longinus
               ,
               not
               as
               subiects
               but
               as
               friends
               .
               And
               so
               the
               Popes
               continuing
               to
               be
               friends
               both
               with
               the
               Lombards
               ,
               and
               with
               the
               Graecians
               ,
               did
               encrease
               their
               dignitie
               ;
               but
               a
               little
               after
               ensued
               the
               downefall
               of
               the
               East
               Empire
               ,
               which
               hapned
               about
               that
               time
               vnder
               the
               Emperor
               Heraclius
               ,
               by
               the
               Sclavonians
               ,
               Persians
               ,
               Sarasins
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             He
             addeth
             farther
             that
             the
             Pope
             being
             not
             able
             to
             obtaine
             succor
             from
             the
             Emperour
             against
             the
             Lombards
             ,
             sought
             to
             the
             kings
             of
             Fraunce
             for
             aide
             ,
             and
             that
             all
             the
             wars
             which
             were
             in
             Italie
             after
             that
             time
             were
             raised
             by
             the
             Popes
             ,
             which
             made
             Barbarians
             come
             to
             succour
             them
             ,
             
             vnder
             which
             word
             of
             Barbarians
             hee
             doth
             also
             comprehend
             the
             French
             ,
             who
             were
             the
             only
             men
             that
             did
             vphold
             the
             Papacie
             as
             it
             was
             falling
             ,
             and
             which
             gaue
             the
             Pope
             whatsoever
             he
             doth
             possesse
             in
             Italie
             .
             Finally
             hee
             concludeth
             this
             whole
             narration
             with
             these
             words
             .
             
               Wherfore
               to
               describe
               that
               which
               followed
               after
               this
               time
               ,
               wee
               neede
               no
               more
               to
               tell
               of
               the
               ruine
               of
               the
               Empire
               which
               is
               vtterly
               decayed
               ,
               but
               how
               the
               Pope
               came
               to
               encrease
               .
            
          
           
             Hee
             that
             woulde
             see
             more
             particularly
             how
             the
             bishop
             of
             Rome
             hath
             made
             his
             cōmodity
             by
             the
             ruine
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             let
             him
             read
             Sigonius
             his
             historie
             of
             the
             kingdome
             of
             Italie
             .
             In
             the
             beginning
             of
             his
             3.
             booke
             he
             relateth
             how
             (
             the
             Emperour
             
               Philippicus
               Bardanes
            
             ,
             opposing
             himselfe
             against
             the
             receiving
             of
             images
             into
             churches
             )
             Pope
             Gregory
             the
             2.
             did
             for
             bid
             the
             Italians
             to
             receiue
             any
             letters
             frō
             the
             Emperour
             ,
             to
             pay
             him
             any
             tribute
             out
             of
             their
             mony
             ,
             to
             place
             his
             statue
             in
             their
             temples
             ,
             or
             so
             much
             as
             once
             to
             name
             him
             in
             their
             publike
             service
             .
             This
             was
             the
             first
             time
             that
             the
             Popes
             did
             rebell
             against
             the
             Emperours
             ,
             being
             much
             enfeebled
             by
             the
             Sarasins
             in
             the
             East
             ,
             and
             spoiled
             of
             the
             Empire
             of
             the
             West
             .
             Before
             
             then
             they
             tooke
             heed
             not
             to
             raise
             any
             mutinies
             .
             Now
             this
             first
             attempt
             of
             the
             Popes
             fell
             out
             in
             the
             yeare
             of
             our
             Lord
             ,
             712.
             yet
             this
             stroke
             drew
             no
             bloud
             ,
             for
             no
             man
             did
             for
             all
             this
             withdraw
             himselfe
             from
             beeing
             subiect
             to
             the
             Emperour
             .
             And
             Sigonius
             tels
             vs
             plainly
             that
             eleven
             yeares
             after
             ,
             the
             Emperour
             Leo
             gaue
             Marin
             ,
             an
             Esquire
             of
             his
             body
             ,
             the
             governmēt
             of
             the
             city
             of
             Rome
             ,
             which
             place
             they
             that
             helde
             were
             called
             Dukes
             of
             Rome
             ,
             to
             whom
             he
             gaue
             in
             commission
             to
             put
             Pope
             Gregorie
             to
             death
             :
             which
             he
             being
             not
             able
             to
             effect
             (
             the
             authority
             of
             Emperours
             as
             then
             decreasing
             from
             day
             to
             day
             ,
             he
             commanded
             his
             Lieutenant
             in
             Italie
             who
             was
             called
             the
             Exarch
             ,
             to
             spoile
             him
             of
             his
             Popedome
             ,
             &
             to
             degrade
             him
             ;
             But
             Gregorie
             sued
             to
             the
             vsurpers
             of
             Lombardie
             for
             aid
             ,
             against
             the
             Emperour
             his
             naturall
             Prince
             :
             And
             his
             dispute
             concerning
             the
             service
             of
             images
             served
             him
             for
             this
             purpose
             ,
             wherein
             vnder
             the
             colour
             of
             devotion
             he
             did
             oppose
             himselfe
             against
             the
             Emperors
             ,
             which
             did
             beat
             downe
             images
             in
             all
             places
             ;
             and
             having
             perswaded
             the
             Italians
             that
             to
             overthrow
             images
             was
             to
             overturne
             Christian
             religion
             ,
             hee
             made
             the
             Emperours
             odious
             
             to
             the
             people
             of
             Italie
             .
             Till
             at
             last
             in
             the
             yeare
             725.
             hee
             wrought
             them
             of
             Rome
             ,
             of
             Campania
             ,
             of
             Ravenna
             and
             Pentapolis
             to
             revolt
             from
             the
             Emperour
             ,
             with
             a
             thousand
             cruelties
             practised
             vpon
             those
             that
             tooke
             the
             Emperours
             part
             ;
             Wherevpon
             Sigonius
             concludeth
             thus
             ;
             
               By
               these
               meanes
               Rome
               and
               the
               Dukedome
               of
               Rome
               came
               to
               be
               in
               the
               Popes
               power
               ,
               being
               taken
               from
               the
               Grecians
               by
               reason
               of
               their
               wicked
               heresie
            
             ;
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             Popes
             did
             take
             away
             the
             chiefest
             part
             of
             the
             Empire
             from
             vnder
             the
             Emperours
             government
             ,
             because
             they
             would
             not
             yeeld
             to
             worship
             images
             .
             This
             was
             the
             pretext
             ;
             but
             the
             true
             cause
             was
             ,
             because
             the
             Emperour
             was
             poore
             &
             weak
             so
             that
             one
             might
             offend
             him
             without
             much
             danger
             .
             This
             notwithstanding
             was
             nothing
             in
             respect
             of
             the
             greatnesse
             to
             which
             Pepin
             king
             of
             France
             did
             exalt
             the
             Pope
             in
             the
             yeare
             755.
             which
             is
             the
             time
             wherein
             the
             Pope
             did
             first
             begin
             to
             bee
             an
             earthly
             Prince
             vnder
             any
             title
             .
             Now
             even
             as
             when
             a
             great
             tree
             doth
             fall
             ,
             every
             man
             runs
             with
             his
             hatchet
             to
             get
             some
             branch
             or
             other
             :
             Even
             so
             in
             the
             ruine
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             diverse
             Princes
             ,
             and
             people
             ●an
             to
             the
             wracke
             thereof
             ,
             and
             every
             one
             
             snatched
             a
             part
             of
             it
             .
             But
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             over
             and
             aboue
             the
             possession
             of
             the
             head
             citty
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             country
             round
             about
             ,
             did
             by
             little
             &
             little
             take
             the
             markes
             and
             dignitie
             of
             the
             Empire
             vpon
             him
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             his
             habit
             ,
             &
             shooes
             of
             skarlet
             ;
             his
             senate
             clad
             in
             skarlet
             ,
             the
             power
             of
             enrolling
             some
             for
             Gods
             ,
             and
             Canonizing
             them
             for
             Saints
             :
             the
             obeisance
             ,
             &
             submission
             of
             all
             the
             Princes
             which
             doe
             agnize
             him
             ▪
             the
             Canon
             law
             in
             imitation
             of
             the
             civill
             :
             Embassadours
             called
             Legats
             ,
             as
             those
             of
             Emperours
             .
             Papall
             iniunctions
             in
             imitation
             of
             the
             imperiall
             .
             Imposts
             ,
             and
             tributs
             vnder
             the
             title
             of
             Annates
             and
             contributions
             .
             The
             imperiall
             crowne
             ;
             but
             triple
             .
             So
             that
             becomming
             of
             a
             Bishop
             to
             be
             a
             King
             ,
             hee
             did
             labour
             tooth
             and
             naile
             to
             make
             a
             monarchie
             of
             the
             church
             ,
             &
             a
             Temporall
             Empire
             of
             a
             mysticall
             and
             spirituall
             body
             :
             For
             which
             purpose
             hee
             made
             vse
             of
             our
             ancient
             kings
             (
             especially
             after
             Lewes
             surnamed
             the
             Debonnayre
             )
             which
             being
             plaine
             meaning
             men
             ,
             not
             seene
             in
             pointes
             of
             religion
             ,
             thinking
             that
             to
             study
             was
             a
             disgrace
             for
             a
             King
             ,
             suffered
             themselues
             to
             be
             led
             by
             an
             idle
             respect
             ,
             vnder
             colour
             of
             the
             keyes
             ,
             and
             
               S.
               Peters
            
             chaire
             ,
             till
             a
             last
             
             they
             did
             cease
             to
             bee
             their
             owne
             masters
             ,
             seeing
             that
             their
             crowne
             is
             at
             the
             popes
             disposall
             ,
             who
             takes
             it
             and
             giues
             it
             to
             whō
             he
             thinkes
             good
             ▪
             These
             things
             haue
             beene
             noted
             by
             Guicciardine
             that
             famous
             Historian
             in
             the
             fourth
             booke
             of
             his
             historie
             ,
             where
             after
             a
             long
             discourse
             of
             the
             rising
             and
             advancements
             of
             the
             popes
             ,
             hee
             shuts
             vp
             all
             with
             these
             wordes
             .
             
               The
               Popes
               vpon
               these
               foundations
               ,
               and
               by
               these
               meanes
               being
               exalted
               to
               an
               earthly
               dominion
               ,
               having
               by
               little
               and
               little
               neglected
               the
               salvation
               of
               soules
               ,
               and
               cast
               aside
               the
               remembrance
               of
               divine
               instructions
               ,
               bending
               their
               studies
               howe
               to
               attaine
               to
               worldly
               greatnesse
               ,
               &
               vsing
               spirituall
               authoritie
               no
               farther
               ,
               but
               as
               it
               was
               an
               instrument
               ,
               and
               help
               for
               the
               temporall
               ,
               did
               begin
               to
               shew
               more
               like
               secular
               Princes
               then
               Bishops
            
             ;
             A
             *
             passage
             ,
             which
             together
             with
             others
             the
             Expurgators
             haue
             razed
             cleane
             out
             of
             the
             last
             editions
             of
             Guicciardine
             .
             To
             be
             briefe
             he
             must
             bee
             very
             little
             read
             in
             history
             ,
             that
             can
             bee
             ignorant
             of
             the
             accomplishmēt
             of
             the
             Apostles
             prophecy
             ,
             which
             saith
             that
             when
             he
             which
             bore
             rule
             should
             be
             abolished
             ,
             then
             the
             sonne
             of
             perdition
             should
             be
             exalted
             and
             made
             manifest
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             The
             second
             point
             .
             That
             God
             hoth
             staggered
             the
             Papacy
             by
             the
             preaching
             of
             his
             word
             ,
             &
             shall
             destroy
             it
             finally
             by
             his
             last
             comming
             .
          
           
             IN
             the
             yeare
             of
             our
             Lord
             1513.
             the
             popedome
             being
             in
             the
             heigth
             of
             worldly
             glory
             ,
             and
             covering
             al
             the
             earth
             over
             with
             a
             darknesse
             more
             thick
             then
             that
             of
             Egypt
             ,
             pope
             Leo
             the
             10
             began
             a
             most
             shamefull
             trafficke
             :
             sending
             messengers
             to
             carry
             his
             pardons
             into
             all
             places
             ,
             who
             sold
             the
             remission
             of
             sinnes
             at
             a
             set
             price
             ,
             and
             for
             two
             crownes
             would
             drawe
             a
             soule
             out
             of
             Purgatorie
             .
             These
             Babylonish
             merchants
             wēt
             from
             towne
             to
             towne
             venting
             their
             ware
             ,
             and
             gathering
             infinite
             summes
             of
             money
             ,
             which
             as
             they
             made
             shewe
             was
             to
             bee
             imployed
             in
             warre
             against
             the
             Turke
             ,
             but
             the
             diuell
             a
             souldier
             was
             euer
             prest
             for
             this
             purpose
             ;
             but
             all
             was
             converted
             by
             these
             Collectours
             to
             the
             buying
             of
             Cardinals
             caps
             ,
             and
             the
             maintaining
             of
             pride
             and
             insolency
             ,
             as
             if
             one
             should
             take
             a
             sack
             full
             of
             crownes
             ,
             and
             throwe
             it
             into
             a
             deep
             quagmire
             .
             The
             holy
             scripture
             as
             then
             was
             no
             
             more
             knowne
             to
             the
             people
             then
             the
             history
             of
             the
             newe
             Guinie
             .
             The
             subiect
             of
             their
             sermons
             was
             onely
             to
             speake
             of
             the
             miracles
             of
             Saints
             ,
             and
             vertues
             of
             reliques
             :
             Iesus
             Christ
             could
             scarse
             be
             knowne
             from
             their
             common
             sort
             of
             Saints
             ,
             and
             it
             was
             a
             long
             time
             before
             he
             could
             get
             a
             feastiuall
             day
             to
             be
             assigned
             vnto
             him
             .
             The
             common
             fashion
             was
             to
             wrap
             men
             ,
             as
             they
             lay
             a
             dying
             ,
             in
             a
             Monks
             gown
             ,
             that
             so
             they
             might
             dy
             in
             the
             state
             of
             grace
             ;
             this
             was
             thought
             to
             bee
             of
             no
             lesse
             vertue
             then
             a
             second
             baptisme
             .
             Amidst
             this
             so
             grosse
             ignorance
             which
             was
             scarse
             two
             fingers
             bredth
             from
             paganisme
             ,
             yet
             for
             all
             ,
             euen
             at
             that
             time
             ,
             this
             marchandize
             did
             seeme
             so
             odious
             ,
             that
             euery
             one
             cryed
             after
             a
             reformation
             ,
             &
             many
             had
             a
             desire
             to
             see
             the
             fountaines
             and
             headsprings
             of
             christian
             religion
             ,
             and
             to
             consult
             with
             the
             scripture
             that
             was
             kept
             hid
             from
             them
             .
             Luther
             did
             translate
             it
             into
             the
             German
             tongue
             ,
             &
             being
             assisted
             by
             others
             did
             by
             vrgent
             perswasions
             exhort
             the
             people
             to
             follow
             the
             *
             coūsell
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             who
             willeth
             them
             
               to
               search
               the
               scriptures
               that
               they
               may
               haue
               eternall
               life
            
             :
             These
             abuses
             being
             by
             these
             meanes
             discouered
             ,
             the
             Gospell
             was
             made
             
             open
             vnto
             all
             ,
             and
             infinite
             sorts
             of
             people
             came
             flocking
             vnto
             the
             doctrine
             of
             saluation
             .
             England
             ,
             Scotland
             ,
             Denmarke
             ,
             Suethland
             ,
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             Germanie
             ,
             &
             of
             Swizzerland
             ,
             a
             great
             part
             of
             the
             low
             Countries
             ,
             of
             France
             ,
             of
             Hungary
             ,
             Bohemia
             ,
             Polonia
             ,
             Morauia
             ,
             and
             Transsyluania
             ,
             acknowledged
             their
             errour
             ,
             opened
             their
             eies
             ,
             gaue
             the
             glory
             to
             God
             ,
             and
             shook
             off
             the
             Romish
             tyranny
             ,
             not
             to
             speak
             of
             those
             which
             euen
             in
             Italy
             and
             Spaine
             it selfe
             doe
             grone
             vnder
             the
             yoke
             ,
             and
             earne
             after
             liberty
             .
             To
             these
             churches
             newly
             reformed
             in
             many
             places
             ,
             we
             may
             add
             others
             which
             before
             Luthers
             time
             held
             the
             same
             doctrin
             that
             he
             did
             ,
             which
             were
             in
             Hungaria
             ,
             in
             Province
             ,
             in
             the
             valleyes
             of
             the
             Alps
             ,
             in
             Bohemia
             ,
             and
             in
             diuerse
             other
             places
             ,
             being
             the
             remainder
             of
             that
             horrible
             persecution
             ,
             which
             the
             pope
             practised
             amongst
             them
             some
             foure
             or
             fiue
             hundred
             yeares
             since
             .
             Since
             what
             time
             ,
             euen
             in
             the
             Countries
             ouer
             which
             the
             pope
             is
             absolute
             commander
             ,
             the
             reliques
             are
             not
             visited
             so
             often
             as
             they
             were
             wont
             ,
             and
             may
             bee
             seene
             for
             lesse
             money
             ,
             then
             they
             vsed
             to
             bee
             formerly
             :
             The
             gifts
             and
             offerings
             of
             our
             Lady
             of
             Loretta
             ,
             and
             of
             S.
             Iames
             in
             Gallizia
             ,
             
             are
             by
             two
             thirds
             lesse
             then
             they
             were
             :
             The
             badges
             of
             the
             *
             crosse
             ,
             by
             which
             the
             pope
             in
             turning
             of
             his
             hand
             could
             leuie
             whole
             armies
             ;
             are
             now
             no
             more
             in
             vse
             .
             And
             there
             be
             some
             states
             and
             common-wealths
             ,
             euē
             in
             Italy
             it selfe
             ,
             which
             dare
             argue
             the
             case
             ,
             and
             dispute
             with
             what
             right
             hee
             holdeth
             one
             of
             his
             swords
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             the
             temporall
             .
             And
             out
             of
             doubt
             popery
             had
             beene
             abolished
             ere
             this
             ,
             if
             Kings
             and
             Princes
             had
             not
             vpheld
             it
             by
             their
             power
             ,
             and
             if
             their
             crueltie
             had
             not
             compelled
             men
             to
             yeeld
             vnto
             it
             for
             feare
             ;
             and
             if
             the
             great
             revenews
             which
             the
             Clergie
             possesse
             did
             not
             hold
             many
             people
             fast
             bound
             by
             the
             bellies
             ,
             &
             obliged
             to
             maintaine
             this
             error
             .
             Now
             this
             so
             suddaine
             and
             so
             great
             a
             change
             doth
             evidently
             shewe
             ,
             that
             before
             euer
             Luther
             taught
             ,
             many
             did
             distast
             this
             abuse
             ,
             and
             watcht
             for
             nothing
             but
             an
             occasion
             to
             cast
             of
             the
             yoke
             of
             tyrannicall
             superstition
             ,
             we
             haue
             therefore
             by
             the
             events
             which
             fell
             out
             in
             our
             fathers
             time
             seene
             a
             greate
             part
             of
             the
             accōplishment
             of
             the
             Apostles
             prophecy
             ,
             which
             is
             ,
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             shoulde
             consume
             the
             sonne
             of
             perdition
             by
             the
             spirit
             of
             his
             mouth
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             fashion
             of
             speech
             vsed
             by
             Isaiah
             in
             the
             11.
             chap.
             &
             4.
             
             ver
             .
             where
             speaking
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             he
             saith
             ,
             
               that
               he
               shall
               smite
               the
               earth
               with
               the
               rod
               of
               his
               mouth
               ,
               &
               slay
               the
               wicked
               with
               the
               breath
               of
               his
               lips
               .
            
             so
             ,
             that
             which
             the
             Prophet
             calleth
             
               the
               breath
               of
               his
               lips
               ,
               S.
               Paul
            
             calleth
             
               the
               spirit
               ,
               or
               breath
               of
               his
               mouth
            
             ;
             wherfore
             also
             in
             the
             1.
             of
             the
             Apoc.
             it
             is
             said
             that
             
               a
               sharp
               two-edged
               sword
               went
               out
               of
               his
               mouth
            
             :
             which
             signifies
             the
             peircing
             vertue
             of
             his
             word
             .
             And
             out
             of
             questiō
             if
             the
             kingdom
             of
             the
             son
             of
             perdition
             must
             be
             established
             through
             the
             doctrine
             of
             lies
             ,
             it
             must
             needs
             bee
             that
             hee
             must
             be
             overthrown
             by
             the
             word
             of
             truth
             .
             Nor
             doth
             
               S.
               Ieromes
            
             interpretation
             ,
             in
             the
             11.
             quest
             .
             to
             Algazia
             ,
             cōtradict
             this
             ,
             which
             will
             haue
             the
             spirit
             of
             his
             mouth
             to
             signifie
             the
             power
             &
             ordinance
             of
             his
             maiesty
             :
             For
             what
             is
             the
             worde
             of
             God
             but
             his
             ordinance
             ?
             And
             preaching
             ,
             which
             makes
             the
             foundations
             of
             Babylon
             to
             totter
             ,
             could
             it
             haue
             this
             vertue
             without
             the
             power
             &
             efficacie
             of
             God
             for
             to
             quicken
             it
             ?
          
           
             Now
             to
             shew
             that
             this
             finall
             destructiō
             of
             the
             son
             of
             Perditiō
             must
             not
             be
             wrought
             all
             at
             one
             blow
             ,
             but
             by
             little
             and
             little
             ,
             the
             Apostle
             vseth
             the
             word
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             which
             signifieth
             to
             wast
             and
             consume
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             kill
             as
             the
             cōmon
             translation
             of
             the
             church
             of
             Rome
             turnes
             it
             ,
             as
             if
             it
             were
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ;
             I
             do
             
             not
             here
             dispute
             whether
             
               S.
               Paule
            
             by
             this
             discomfiture
             or
             consuming
             ,
             do
             vnderstand
             an
             vtter
             abolishment
             ,
             or
             only
             a
             weakening
             of
             the
             Papacie
             :
             only
             this
             I
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             Apostle
             vseth
             such
             words
             as
             signifie
             that
             this
             destruction
             shall
             not
             be
             effected
             but
             in
             processe
             of
             time
             ,
             and
             by
             degrees
             .
             I
             say
             moreover
             that
             God
             hath
             already
             put
             his
             hande
             to
             the
             worke
             ,
             and
             made
             vs
             see
             the
             accomplishment
             of
             this
             prophecy
             well
             onward
             .
          
           
             For
             as
             for
             the
             finall
             destruction
             of
             the
             sonne
             of
             perdition
             ,
             
               S.
               Paule
            
             hath
             told
             vs
             before
             hand
             that
             it
             shall
             not
             be
             till
             the
             day
             of
             iudgement
             ,
             saying
             ,
             
               that
               God
               shall
               abolish
               him
               with
               the
               brightnesse
               of
               his
               comming
            
             ;
             Agreeable
             to
             the
             prophecy
             of
             Daniel
             ,
             which
             makes
             him
             to
             last
             ,
             
               till
               the
               thrones
               were
               erected
               ,
               and
               the
               ancient
               of
               daies
               sate
               ,
            
             
             
               and
               that
               the
               sessions
               were
               held
               ,
               and
               the
               bookes
               were
               opened
               .
            
             Which
             we
             are
             therefore
             the
             more
             to
             note
             for
             feare
             least
             any
             one
             to
             delicatly
             impatient
             should
             flatter
             himselfe
             in
             his
             hopes
             and
             promise
             to
             himselfe
             that
             he
             shall
             liue
             to
             see
             the
             Pope
             vtterly
             abolished
             :
             for
             feare
             also
             least
             being
             too
             hasty
             in
             our
             desires
             ,
             we
             come
             at
             length
             to
             murmur
             ,
             and
             complaine
             as
             if
             the
             time
             were
             prorogued
             .
          
           
             This
             point
             were
             at
             an
             end
             ,
             but
             that
             I
             cānot
             
             passe
             by
             *
             Bellarmines
             allegation
             of
             Chrysostome
             ,
             taken
             out
             of
             his
             4
             ,
             sermon
             vpon
             the
             2.
             to
             the
             Thessalonians
             ,
             which
             place
             (
             as
             it
             seemes
             )
             he
             did
             not
             vnderstand
             .
             Chrysostome
             speaketh
             thus
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Bellarmine
             in
             the
             9.
             chapt
             .
             of
             his
             booke
             against
             the
             king
             turnes
             it
             thus
             .
             
               Quemadmodum
               irruens
               ignis
               passim
               minuta
               animalia
               etiam
               antequam
               planè
               adveniat
               procul
               adhuc
               situs
               terrefacit
               &
               consumit
               .
            
             He
             thought
             that
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             signified
             ,
             
               passim
               irruere
            
             ,
             wheras
             it
             signifies
             ,
             illabi
             ,
             or
             supervenire
             ,
             &
             that
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             signified
             ,
             terrefacere
             .
             Whereas
             it
             signifies
             
               sopire
               or
               soporare
            
             ;
             but
             let
             vs
             come
             to
             that
             which
             followes
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             fift
             part
             of
             this
             Prophecie
             .
          
           
             3
             Which
             wicked
             mans
             comming
             is
             by
             the
             effectuall
             working
             of
             Satan
             ,
             with
             all
             power
             and
             signes
             ,
             and
             lying
             wonders
             .
          
           
             10
             And
             in
             all
             deceiueablenesse
             of
             vnrighteousnesse
             ,
             among
             them
             that
             perish
             ,
             because
             they
             received
             not
             the
             loue
             of
             the
             truth
             that
             they
             might
             be
             saved
             .
          
           
             11
             And
             therefore
             God
             shall
             send
             them
             
             strong
             delusion
             that
             they
             should
             beleeue
             lies
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             explication
             of
             this
             prophecie
             .
          
           
             9
             The
             Pope
             shall
             come
             fortified
             with
             the
             might
             and
             efficacie
             of
             Satan
             ,
             with
             power
             ,
             and
             signes
             ,
             and
             false
             miracles
             ,
             &
             serving
             to
             establish
             lies
             .
          
           
             10
             Whereby
             such
             as
             are
             markt
             out
             to
             perdition
             shal
             be
             lewdly
             seduced
             ,
             because
             they
             haue
             not
             loved
             the
             truth
             of
             the
             gospell
             which
             might
             haue
             saued
             them
             .
          
           
             11
             And
             therefore
             God
             shall
             suffer
             thē
             to
             be
             seduced
             ,
             and
             to
             be
             driuen
             into
             strong
             delusions
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             may
             beleeue
             lies
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             proofe
             of
             this
             Exposition
             .
          
           
             ALthough
             the
             ordinary
             workes
             of
             God
             deserue
             most
             to
             be
             admired
             ,
             yet
             men
             never
             wonder
             at
             these
             ,
             but
             are
             still
             desirous
             to
             see
             some
             extraordinary
             thing
             :
             Few
             are
             there
             that
             take
             notice
             of
             the
             suns
             moving
             ,
             but
             what
             a
             wonderment
             would
             it
             be
             to
             see
             the
             sun
             stand
             still
             ?
             And
             yet
             notwithstanding
             the
             motion
             thereof
             is
             the
             more
             wonderful
             of
             the
             two
             .
             Man
             is
             naturally
             enclined
             to
             looke
             after
             extraordinary
             eventes
             ,
             
             but
             to
             to
             carelesse
             to
             better
             himselfe
             by
             them
             .
             So
             the
             Iews
             resorted
             to
             Christ
             :
             because
             of
             the
             miracle
             of
             the
             fiue
             loaues
             ,
             but
             not
             to
             receiue
             instruction
             .
             This
             is
             the
             reason
             why
             God
             ,
             being
             willing
             to
             direct
             mēs
             vnderstandings
             by
             naturall
             means
             ,
             did
             annex
             miracles
             to
             the
             publication
             of
             his
             law
             and
             his
             gospel
             :
             that
             so
             he
             might
             plant
             a
             dutiful
             respect
             in
             our
             hearts
             ,
             before
             he
             did
             engraue
             his
             will
             in
             them
             .
             Yet
             for
             feare
             that
             miracles
             by
             being
             made
             to
             commō
             should
             cease
             to
             be
             miracles
             ,
             he
             thought
             it
             not
             fit
             to
             satisfie
             every
             mans
             curiosity
             in
             this
             ,
             but
             sends
             vs
             backe
             to
             the
             hearing
             of
             his
             word
             :
             which
             being
             once
             confirmed
             by
             miracles
             in
             the
             first
             publication
             thereof
             ,
             to
             aske
             any
             more
             for
             miracles
             is
             manifest
             incredulitie
             .
             Herevnto
             adde
             that
             Satan
             doth
             sometimes
             imitate
             the
             miracles
             of
             God
             ,
             but
             never
             his
             truth
             ,
             whēce
             it
             happens
             that
             he
             which
             will
             not
             beleeue
             except
             he
             see
             miracles
             ,
             doth
             thereby
             (
             without
             thinking
             of
             it
             )
             sollicit
             Satan
             to
             worke
             some
             miraculous
             feates
             ,
             and
             to
             sport
             himselfe
             in
             deluding
             him
             .
             This
             is
             the
             reason
             why
             our
             Lord
             in
             the
             13.
             of
             Deuteronomie
             doth
             forbid
             vs
             to
             iudge
             of
             the
             doctrine
             by
             the
             miracles
             ,
             and
             woulde
             that
             we
             should
             rather
             iudge
             of
             the
             miracles
             by
             
             the
             doctrine
             ,
             saying
             
               that
               if
               any
               one
               shal
               giue
               vs
               a
               signe
               ,
               or
               wonder
               ,
               and
               the
               signe
               or
               wonder
               which
               he
               told
               of
               should
               come
               to
               passe
               ,
               yet
               we
               must
               not
               harkē
               vnto
               him
               if
               he
               once
               say
               ,
               Come
               and
               let
               vs
               go
               serue
               other
               Gods
            
             ;
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             if
             he
             shall
             teach
             false
             doctrine
             .
             Such
             were
             the
             miracles
             of
             the
             magicians
             of
             Egypt
             ,
             which
             counterfaited
             the
             power
             of
             God.
             Such
             were
             the
             miracles
             of
             the
             ancient
             hereticks
             ,
             who
             disputing
             against
             the
             Catholickes
             did
             alleadge
             their
             miracles
             ,
             as
             Tertullian
             reporteth
             in
             44.
             chapt
             .
             of
             the
             booke
             of
             prescriptions
             .
             
               They
               will
               moreover
               (
               saith
               he
               )
               speake
               much
               concerning
               the
               authority
               of
               every
               hereticke
               ,
               that
               they
               haue
               more
               then
               any
               others
               cōfirmed
               the
               certainty
               of
               their
               doctrin
               that
               they
               haue
               raised
               the
               dead
               ,
               healed
               the
               sick
               ,
               foretold
               of
               events
               to
               come
               ,
               that
               they
               might
               be
               reputed
               for
               Apostles
               :
               as
               though
               this
               also
               were
               not
               written
               ,
               that
               many
               shall
               come
               doing
               great
               miracles
               ,
               for
               to
               strengthen
               the
               deceitfulnesse
               of
               their
               wicked
               preaching
               .
            
             And
             in
             the
             3.
             cha
             .
             of
             his
             3.
             booke
             against
             Marcian
             ,
             hee
             saith
             ,
             
               that
               the
               false
               Christs
               doe
               worke
               miracles
               very
               easily
               .
            
             For
             Iesus
             Christ
             tels
             vs
             that
             in
             the
             last
             day
             many
             shall
             say
             vnto
             him
             ,
             
               haue
               not
               we
               cast
               forth
               divels
               in
               thy
               name
               ?
            
             To
             whome
             he
             shall
             answere
             ,
             
               I
               know
               yee
               not
               ,
               depart
               from
               
               me
               yee
               workers
               of
               iniquity
               .
            
             And
             in
             an
             other
             
             place
             he
             saith
             ,
             
               that
               false
               Christs
               ;
               and
               false
               prophets
               shall
               arise
               ,
               &
               shall
               shew
               great
               signes
               ,
               and
               wonders
               ,
               so
               that
               if
               it
               were
               possible
               they
               should
               deceiue
               the
               very
               elect
               .
            
             And
             
               S.
               Paul
            
             yet
             more
             in
             particular
             saith
             of
             the
             sonne
             of
             perdition
             which
             is
             called
             Antichrist
             ,
             that
             his
             comming
             shall
             be
             
               with
               signes
               ,
               and
               lying
               wōders
               ,
            
             so
             called
             ,
             both
             because
             they
             shall
             bee
             deceitfull
             miracles
             ,
             and
             meere
             illusions
             ,
             as
             also
             because
             they
             shall
             serue
             to
             establish
             a
             lie
             .
          
           
             Which
             made
             me
             not
             a
             little
             wōder
             how
             Bellarmine
             and
             others
             came
             to
             put
             miracles
             amongst
             the
             notes
             of
             the
             true
             church
             ,
             since
             the
             spirit
             of
             God
             hath
             given
             it
             vs
             in
             these
             last
             daies
             for
             a
             marke
             of
             the
             false
             .
             And
             that
             after
             the
             miracles
             of
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             and
             their
             disciples
             ,
             we
             hear
             of
             no
             miracles
             foretold
             ,
             but
             only
             those
             of
             false
             teachers
             ,
             and
             the
             sonne
             of
             perdition
             ,
             as
             the
             author
             of
             the
             commentary
             vpon
             
               S.
               Matthew
            
             (
             commonly
             fathered
             vpon
             Chrysostome
             )
             saith
             in
             the
             49.
             sermon
             .
             
               We
               do
               not
               now
               acknowledge
               ani●
               to
               be
               the
               ministers
               of
               Christ
               because
               they
               doe
               profitable
               miracles
               ,
               but
               because
               they
               do
               no●●
               of
               these
               miracles
               .
               It
               is
               an
               evill
               and
               adulterous
               generation
               that
               seeketh
               signes
               ,
               saith
               
               Christ
               in
               the
            
             12.
             
               of
               Matthew
            
             ;
             But
             the
             faithful
             rest
             the
             contented
             with
             the
             wil
             of
             God
             revealed
             in
             his
             word
             :
             For
             if
             we
             teach
             no
             other
             doctrine
             then
             that
             of
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             their
             miracles
             are
             ours
             ,
             and
             confirme
             our
             religion
             .
             It
             is
             for
             them
             that
             forge
             newe
             articles
             of
             faith
             ,
             to
             worke
             new
             miracles
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             be
             beleeued
             .
          
           
             Now
             for
             to
             finde
             the
             accomplishment
             of
             
               S.
               Pauls
            
             prophecy
             in
             the
             miracles
             of
             Popery
             ,
             wee
             are
             of
             necessitie
             to
             rippe
             vp
             the
             whole
             matter
             from
             the
             beginning
             ,
             and
             to
             see
             by
             what
             miracles
             the
             Papacy
             beganne
             first
             to
             be
             advanced
             .
          
           
             The
             Apostles
             &
             their
             Disciples
             having
             wrought
             many
             excellent
             and
             sauing
             miracles
             ,
             this
             vertue
             did
             insensibly
             diminish
             by
             little
             and
             little
             .
             This
             notwithstanding
             in
             the
             third
             and
             fourth
             ages
             there
             were
             some
             miracles
             done
             .
             But
             wheresoever
             God
             hath
             his
             Church
             ,
             the
             divell
             will
             be
             sure
             to
             build
             him
             a
             chappell
             not
             far
             of
             :
             and
             where
             he
             cānot
             overthrowe
             the
             worke
             of
             God
             by
             cōtradicting
             it
             ,
             hee
             will
             obscure
             it
             by
             counterfeiting
             the
             like
             therevnto
             .
             He
             did
             therfore
             doe
             many
             miracles
             by
             the
             handes
             of
             hereticks
             ,
             as
             
               S.
               Austin
            
             doth
             confesse
             in
             his
             13
             tract
             vpon
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             16.
             chapt
             .
             
             of
             his
             booke
             of
             the
             vnitie
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             where
             he
             saith
             that
             Donat
             and
             Portius
             did
             miracles
             ,
             of
             whom
             and
             of
             all
             those
             which
             pray
             towards
             the
             sepulchers
             of
             the
             dead
             ,
             and
             which
             see
             visions
             ,
             he
             saith
             ,
             
               that
               they
               are
               either
               the
               fictions
               of
               lying
               men
               ,
               or
               prodigies
               of
               deceitfull
               spirits
               .
            
          
           
             Satan
             hath
             for
             this
             purpose
             made
             vse
             of
             another
             more
             subtill
             device
             .
             For
             hee
             hath
             raised
             vp
             historians
             ,
             which
             in
             rehearsing
             the
             true
             miracles
             of
             the
             good
             servants
             of
             God
             ,
             doe
             adde
             some
             of
             their
             owne
             ,
             &
             mingle
             the
             true
             with
             the
             false
             .
             Or
             else
             he
             himselfe
             hath
             wrought
             some
             absurd
             and
             ridiculous
             miracles
             ,
             which
             hee
             hath
             patcht
             in
             among
             the
             actions
             of
             the
             Saints
             ,
             so
             to
             make
             the
             true
             miracles
             suspected
             ,
             being
             thought
             to
             come
             out
             of
             the
             same
             shop
             .
          
           
             
               S.
               Martin
            
             did
             doe
             God
             great
             service
             in
             winning
             the
             Gaules
             from
             Paganisme
             ,
             and
             advancing
             Christian
             religion
             ,
             and
             was
             a
             man
             full
             of
             zeale
             ,
             and
             mightie
             in
             workes
             ;
             but
             
               Severus
               Sulpitius
            
             ,
             which
             tels
             vs
             that
             he
             saw
             him
             ,
             reporteth
             many
             things
             of
             him
             which
             turne
             to
             his
             disgrace
             ,
             and
             make
             the
             whole
             historie
             ridiculous
             .
             Hee
             saith
             that
             Martin
             healed
             one
             that
             was
             possessed
             of
             a
             divel
             by
             giving
             him
             somthing
             to
             purge
             ,
             
             and
             that
             he
             made
             him
             void
             the
             divell
             out
             at
             his
             backe
             parts
             .
             *
             He
             ,
             the
             same
             relateth
             how
             Martin
             did
             inioine
             a
             company
             of
             wild
             fowle
             not
             to
             catch
             any
             more
             fish
             ,
             cōmanding
             them
             to
             flie
             thence
             into
             a
             desert
             country
             .
             A
             certaine
             man
             comming
             into
             one
             of
             Martins
             cels
             ,
             &
             finding
             a
             fire
             there
             sate
             him
             down
             ,
             tuckt
             vp
             his
             clothes
             about
             his
             knees
             ,
             so
             to
             warme
             him
             the
             better
             ,
             which
             Martin
             (
             who
             as
             then
             was
             in
             another
             roome
             )
             knowing
             by
             revelation
             ,
             cryed
             out
             from
             farre
             .
             
               Quis
               nudato
               inguine
               nostrū
               incestat
               habitaculum
               ?
            
             These
             tales
             which
             follow
             here
             are
             worse
             .
             He
             saith
             that
             Martin
             promised
             the
             mercy
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             vnto
             the
             divell
             ,
             if
             hee
             would
             but
             repent
             ,
             as
             if
             Iesus
             Christ
             had
             died
             for
             the
             divels
             also
             .
             The
             brother
             of
             Martin
             being
             dead
             ,
             his
             soule
             was
             presented
             before
             God
             ,
             and
             for
             his
             sinnes
             sent
             to
             hel
             ,
             there
             to
             be
             grievously
             tormented
             :
             But
             two
             Angels
             ,
             came
             ,
             and
             signified
             to
             God
             (
             for
             God
             himselfe
             knewe
             not
             of
             it
             )
             that
             this
             was
             the
             man
             for
             which
             Martin
             prayed
             ,
             wherevpon
             God
             commanded
             that
             hee
             should
             bee
             releast
             ,
             sent
             backe
             againe
             into
             the
             world
             ;
             and
             restored
             to
             Martin
             .
             After
             his
             death
             a
             dog
             barked
             incessantly
             at
             certaine
             men
             as
             they
             passed
             
             by
             ,
             one
             of
             which
             turning
             backe
             ,
             said
             vnto
             the
             dog
             ,
             
               In
               the
               name
               of
               Martin
               I
               command
               thee
               to
               be
               quiet
               .
            
             What
             was
             this
             but
             to
             place
             Martin
             in
             the
             roome
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             &
             to
             make
             vse
             of
             his
             power
             in
             a
             matter
             of
             no
             importance
             ?
             whereby
             you
             may
             see
             ,
             that
             Satan
             did
             euen
             then
             begin
             to
             cast
             his
             proiects
             ,
             how
             he
             might
             establish
             the
             worship
             of
             Saints
             in
             the
             Church
             ,
             and
             make
             them
             which
             had
             abandoned
             the
             false
             Gods
             ,
             change
             the
             true
             Saints
             into
             Idoles
             .
             Now
             this
             was
             about
             the
             400.
             yeare
             of
             our
             Lord.
             
          
           
             But
             these
             things
             began
             dayly
             to
             growe
             worse
             and
             worse
             ;
             for
             two
             hundred
             yeares
             after
             came
             Gregory
             the
             1.
             
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             ,
             surnamed
             the
             Great
             ,
             for
             what
             reason
             I
             knowe
             not
             ;
             who
             in
             his
             dialogues
             doth
             furnish
             vs
             with
             other
             examples
             of
             this
             kinde
             .
             In
             the
             1.
             booke
             and
             4.
             chap.
             an
             Angell
             geldeth
             S.
             *
             Equitius
             in
             his
             sleep
             .
             In
             the
             same
             place
             a
             maid
             comming
             into
             a
             garden
             ,
             and
             taking
             a
             lettice
             to
             eate
             it
             ,
             crusht
             the
             divell
             betweene
             her
             teeth
             in
             the
             lettice
             :
             and
             this
             poore
             divell
             (
             whom
             belike
             she
             swallowed
             downe
             together
             with
             the
             lettice
             (
             being
             commanded
             to
             goe
             out
             and
             chekt
             by
             Equitius
             ,
             excuseth
             himselfe
             ,
             saying
             .
             *
             
               Alas
               what
               hurt
               did
               I
               ,
               I
               was
               sitting
               quietly
               vpon
               
               the
               lettice
               ,
               and
               she
               came
               &
               bit
               me
               .
            
             The
             fault
             was
             in
             her
             for
             not
             making
             the
             signe
             of
             the
             crosse
             when
             she
             gathered
             the
             lettice
             :
             and
             it
             may
             bee
             the
             diuell
             would
             haue
             vanished
             from
             out
             the
             leaues
             ,
             if
             shee
             had
             but
             dipped
             her
             lettice
             in
             vineger
             .
             In
             the
             19.
             chapter
             .
             
               S.
               Boniface
            
             maketh
             a
             fox
             ,
             with
             all
             gentlenes
             that
             may
             be
             ,
             to
             bring
             back
             a
             chicke
             which
             he
             had
             taken
             away
             .
             And
             in
             the
             10.
             chap.
             a
             Lady
             of
             good
             fashion
             is
             possessed
             with
             a
             diuell
             because
             shee
             lay
             with
             her
             husband
             the
             day
             before
             the
             dedication
             of
             a
             certaine
             church
             .
             In
             the
             first
             chapter
             of
             the
             2.
             booke
             ,
             the
             diuell
             breakes
             
               S.
               Bennets
            
             bell
             with
             a
             stone
             ,
             which
             hee
             did
             vse
             to
             ring
             ,
             when
             hee
             would
             haue
             meat
             brought
             vnto
             him
             .
             A
             little
             after
             ,
             the
             same
             Saint
             burning
             with
             the
             fits
             of
             loue
             ,
             did
             (
             for
             to
             correct
             the
             outragious
             insolencie
             of
             his
             flesh
             )
             roll
             his
             naked
             body
             vpon
             thornes
             ,
             and
             nettles
             ,
             till
             the
             blood
             sprang
             out
             againe
             .
             In
             the
             20.
             chap.
             a
             Monke
             holdes
             a
             candle
             to
             
               S.
               Bennet
            
             all
             supper
             time
             ,
             as
             though
             it
             had
             beene
             a
             sinne
             for
             him
             to
             set
             it
             downe
             vpon
             the
             table
             .
             In
             the
             22.
             chap.
             the
             Deacon
             saying
             ,
             as
             the
             fashion
             is
             ,
             *
             
               If
               there
               be
               any
               one
               here
               that
               doth
               not
               communicate
               ,
               let
               him
               depart
               ,
            
             two
             maids
             being
             buried
             in
             the
             church
             ,
             which
             died
             
             without
             euer
             receauing
             the
             Communion
             ,
             rose
             out
             of
             their
             graues
             ,
             went
             out
             of
             the
             church
             ,
             &
             returned
             againe
             after
             the
             communion
             was
             ended
             .
             In
             the
             14
             chap.
             of
             the
             3.
             book
             ,
             
               S.
               Eutiche
            
             calleth
             a
             Beare
             his
             brother
             ,
             giuing
             him
             a
             charge
             to
             lead
             his
             flock
             to
             feeding
             ,
             and
             to
             bring
             them
             home
             still
             at
             night
             .
             In
             the
             15.
             chap.
             some
             of
             the
             cloaths
             of
             this
             Saint
             ,
             being
             hanged
             out
             ,
             haue
             the
             vertue
             to
             procure
             raine
             .
             In
             the
             4.
             booke
             and
             21.
             chap.
             two
             Monkes
             that
             were
             hanged
             ,
             doe
             sing
             most
             melodiously
             vpon
             the
             gibbet
             after
             their
             deathes
             .
             And
             this
             fourth
             booke
             is
             spent
             wholly
             in
             mentioning
             of
             soules
             ,
             that
             say
             they
             are
             in
             Purgatory
             ,
             not
             in
             a
             fire
             vnder
             the
             earth
             ,
             that
             the
             Pope
             might
             draw
             them
             out
             by
             his
             Indulgences
             (
             for
             this
             invention
             was
             not
             yet
             thought
             vpon
             )
             but
             in
             bathes
             ,
             in
             the
             wind
             ,
             vnder
             the
             leaues
             of
             trees
             ,
             or
             in
             the
             cold
             water
             .
             And
             these
             soules
             being
             asked
             why
             they
             suffered
             these
             paines
             ,
             answered
             ,
             because
             they
             had
             wronged
             some
             Monk
             or
             other
             ,
             or
             had
             not
             giuen
             that
             to
             the
             Church
             which
             they
             had
             promised
             .
             Wherevpon
             Gregory
             stands
             amazed
             at
             the
             so
             frequent
             visions
             of
             souls
             ,
             neuer
             heard
             of
             before
             .
             Saying
             in
             the
             41.
             chap.
             
               Whence
               comes
               it
               to
               passe
               I
               pray
               you
               ,
               
               that
               in
               these
               latter
               daies
               we
               haue
               so
               many
               things
               revealed
               concerning
               the
               soules
               of
               the
               departed
               ,
               which
               lay
               hid
               from
               vs
               before
               ?
            
          
           
             Behold
             two
             abuses
             ,
             euen
             in
             those
             daies
             ,
             crept
             into
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             ,
             and
             both
             confirmed
             by
             miracles
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             the
             Adoration
             of
             Saints
             ,
             and
             the
             opinion
             of
             Purgatory
             ;
             although
             this
             were
             another
             kinde
             of
             Purgatory
             ,
             thē
             that
             ,
             which
             we
             haue
             in
             the
             church
             of
             Rome
             now
             adaies
             .
             And
             this
             was
             not
             aboue
             600.
             yeares
             after
             Christ.
             
          
           
             But
             in
             the
             two
             next
             ages
             following
             ,
             Satan
             holding
             on
             his
             olde
             course
             ,
             did
             much
             advance
             the
             mysterie
             of
             iniquitie
             ,
             hauing
             raised
             vp
             a
             new
             heresie
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             the
             Adoration
             of
             images
             ,
             which
             was
             no
             small
             helpe
             to
             the
             exalting
             of
             the
             Papacy
             .
             For
             in
             the
             controversie
             cōcerning
             Prioritie
             between
             the
             Patriarch
             of
             Constantinople
             ,
             and
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             ,
             the
             Emperour
             Phocas
             deciding
             it
             on
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Romes
             side
             ,
             &
             a
             little
             after
             the
             Emperours
             forces
             decaying
             in
             Italie
             ,
             the
             pope
             after
             hee
             had
             vsurpt
             the
             title
             of
             the
             head
             of
             the
             church
             ,
             began
             to
             cast
             about
             how
             hee
             might
             shake
             of
             the
             yoke
             of
             the
             Empire
             :
             and
             the
             *
             the
             question
             concerning
             images
             falling
             fit
             to
             his
             purpose
             for
             to
             withstand
             the
             Emperor
             ,
             which
             
             did
             persecute
             the
             worshippers
             of
             images
             ,
             he
             made
             himselfe
             Prince
             of
             Rome
             ,
             and
             of
             a
             great
             part
             of
             Italy
             ,
             by
             such
             meanes
             and
             degrees
             ,
             as
             we
             haue
             formerly
             related
             .
             Miracles
             were
             made
             serue
             to
             this
             end
             ,
             which
             as
             then
             were
             so
             frequent
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             held
             for
             a
             miracle
             ,
             not
             to
             worke
             a
             miracle
             .
             Baronius
             in
             his
             Annals
             ,
             in
             the
             870.
             yeere
             parag
             .
             63.
             names
             certaine
             witnesses
             which
             report
             that
             three
             miles
             of
             from
             the
             towne
             of
             Damas
             ,
             there
             was
             in
             former
             times
             a
             table
             or
             image
             of
             the
             virgin
             Mary
             in
             painting
             ,
             the
             painting
             whereof
             came
             to
             bee
             flesh
             incarnate
             within
             the
             wood
             ,
             and
             sent
             forth
             a
             more
             odoriferous
             oyle
             then
             balme
             .
             Luitprandus
             ,
             and
             Platina
             in
             the
             life
             of
             Sergius
             the
             third
             ,
             reports
             that
             when
             the
             body
             of
             pope
             Formosus
             was
             carryed
             into
             
               S.
               Peters
            
             church
             ,
             all
             the
             images
             of
             the
             Saints
             that
             stood
             there
             did
             him
             obeysance
             .
             Bellarmine
             in
             the
             12.
             chapter
             .
             of
             his
             booke
             of
             images
             ,
             speakes
             of
             an
             Hermit
             that
             was
             tempted
             with
             fornication
             ,
             to
             whom
             Satan
             promised
             that
             he
             would
             tempt
             him
             no
             more
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             hee
             would
             giue
             him
             the
             gift
             of
             continency
             ,
             on
             conditiō
             that
             he
             should
             ever
             after
             that
             adore
             the
             image
             of
             the
             virgin
             Mary
             .
             This
             was
             a
             meanes
             rather
             to
             incite
             
             him
             on
             to
             it
             afresh
             .
             There
             are
             images
             shewed
             at
             Burgo
             in
             Spaine
             ,
             which
             are
             reported
             to
             haue
             fallen
             from
             heauen
             ,
             and
             to
             be
             made
             by
             
               S.
               Luke
            
             ,
             and
             images
             of
             a
             crucifix
             the
             haire
             &
             nailes
             of
             which
             do
             grow
             out
             new
             every
             month
             .
             Caesarius
             and
             others
             recite
             infinite
             miracles
             done
             by
             images
             ,
             which
             did
             sweat
             ,
             or
             weep
             ,
             or
             speak
             ,
             or
             wag
             the
             head
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             certaine
             that
             (
             if
             at
             leastwise
             we
             may
             beleeue
             these
             people
             )
             the
             image
             of
             the
             virgin
             Mary
             hath
             wrought
             a
             thousand
             times
             more
             miracles
             ,
             then
             Iesus
             Christ
             himself
             ever
             did
             in
             his
             own
             person
             .
             Which
             holy
             virgin
             they
             haue
             prophanely
             dishonored
             ,
             by
             attributing
             such
             miracles
             vnto
             her
             as
             are
             scarsely
             honest
             .
             There
             is
             an
             Italian
             booke
             sufficiently
             knowne
             ,
             intituled
             ,
             
               Miracoli
               d'
               ella
               gloriosa
               virgine
               Maria
            
             printed
             at
             Milan
             in
             the
             yeare
             1547.
             which
             saith
             that
             a
             certaine
             Abbesse
             being
             great
             with
             child
             ,
             the
             holy
             virgin
             willing
             to
             cover
             her
             crime
             ,
             did
             in
             her
             steed
             present
             herselfe
             before
             the
             Bishop
             in
             forme
             of
             an
             Abbesse
             ,
             and
             shewd
             him
             by
             an
             ocular
             demonstration
             that
             she
             was
             not
             great
             with
             child
             .
             The
             same
             booke
             relateth
             that
             an
             honest
             woman
             snatcht
             the
             virgin
             Maries
             sonne
             from
             betweene
             the
             armes
             of
             her
             image
             ,
             
             saying
             vnto
             her
             ,
             
               Giue
               me
               my
               sonne
               which
               is
               kept
               prisoner
               ,
               or
               I
               will
               not
               giue
               thee
               thine
               ,
            
             &
             that
             the
             virgin
             Mary
             for
             to
             haue
             her
             owne
             sonne
             did
             free
             the
             other
             womans
             sonne
             out
             of
             prison
             .
             Caesarius
             in
             his
             7.
             booke
             35.
             chap.
             reports
             that
             the
             virgin
             Mary
             for
             12.
             whole
             yeares
             together
             ,
             did
             supply
             the
             place
             of
             a
             certaine
             Nunne
             called
             Beatrice
             ,
             whilst
             shee
             lay
             in
             the
             Stewes
             ,
             till
             at
             last
             she
             came
             backe
             againe
             to
             take
             her
             place
             ,
             and
             freed
             the
             Virgin
             from
             standing
             sentinell
             any
             longer
             .
             And
             God
             being
             enraged
             against
             the
             rebellion
             of
             men
             ,
             hath
             giuen
             to
             these
             miracles
             a
             powerfulnes
             of
             deluding
             ,
             that
             so
             the
             Apostles
             prophecy
             might
             bee
             fulfilled
             .
          
           
             Nowe
             looke
             after
             what
             manner
             Satan
             went
             about
             at
             first
             to
             establish
             the
             worship
             of
             Images
             ,
             the
             same
             way
             did
             he
             go
             to
             lay
             the
             foundation
             of
             transubstantiation
             ,
             &
             did
             also
             for
             the
             authorising
             of
             this
             ,
             serue
             his
             owne
             turne
             with
             a
             new
             sort
             of
             false
             miracles
             .
             For
             many
             faithfull
             servants
             of
             God
             opposing
             themselues
             against
             this
             errour
             in
             the
             rising
             thereof
             ,
             the
             foster-fathers
             of
             this
             abuse
             ,
             began
             to
             invent
             a
             kinde
             of
             miracles
             never
             heard
             of
             before
             .
             A
             certaine
             Monke
             reportes
             that
             he
             saw
             Iesus
             Christ
             in
             forme
             
             of
             a
             childe
             sitting
             vpon
             the
             Altar
             ;
             another
             saith
             ,
             that
             *
             Wittikind
             King
             of
             the
             Saxons
             ,
             entring
             disguised
             into
             a
             church
             ,
             and
             diligently
             observing
             the
             Christians
             fashion
             of
             receauing
             the
             communion
             ,
             saw
             them
             put
             a
             litle
             pretty
             smiling
             boy
             into
             their
             mouths
             .
             Others
             report
             that
             they
             haue
             seen
             the
             host
             make
             the
             signe
             of
             the
             Crosse
             :
             others
             that
             they
             saw
             Angels
             which
             held
             a
             little
             childe
             vpon
             the
             altar
             ,
             and
             afterwards
             cut
             him
             into
             a
             thousand
             small
             pieces
             .
             
               Iodocus
               Coccius
            
             Canon
             of
             Iuliers
             doth
             produce
             35.
             such
             like
             examples
             as
             these
             ,
             and
             yet
             doth
             not
             alleage
             the
             one
             moyty
             of
             them
             .
             All
             these
             miraculous
             apparitions
             of
             flesh
             ,
             and
             bloud
             ,
             beganne
             in
             the
             yeare
             785
             ,
             for
             before
             that
             time
             they
             were
             never
             heard
             of
             ,
             nor
             doe
             our
             adversaries
             alleadge
             any
             one
             example
             of
             them
             :
             neverthelesse
             to
             giue
             colour
             to
             these
             new
             fables
             ,
             by
             the
             testimony
             of
             some
             ancient
             witnesse
             ,
             one
             (
             I
             know
             what
             manner
             of
             man
             )
             Amphylochius
             by
             name
             ,
             hath
             written
             the
             life
             of
             
               S.
               Basill
            
             ,
             many
             ages
             after
             Basill
             was
             dead
             ,
             altogither
             different
             from
             that
             which
             Nazianzen
             hath
             writtē
             of
             the
             same
             subiect
             ,
             where
             he
             saith
             that
             a
             Iew
             saw
             an
             infant
             torne
             in
             many
             pieces
             betweene
             
               S.
               Basils
            
             handes
             .
             The
             like
             fable
             is
             related
             by
             
             Simeon
             the
             Metaphrast
             ,
             a
             new
             author
             ,
             in
             the
             life
             of
             Arsenius
             the
             Hermite
             .
             For
             it
             shal
             never
             be
             found
             that
             any
             author
             ,
             as
             ancient
             as
             Basill
             ,
             or
             Arsenius
             ,
             or
             those
             which
             came
             long
             after
             ,
             did
             ever
             speake
             of
             this
             .
             The
             8.
             age
             began
             first
             to
             bring
             forth
             these
             prodigies
             ,
             and
             impostures
             :
             Iesus
             Christ
             as
             then
             beginning
             to
             make
             himselfe
             known
             in
             the
             Masse
             ,
             and
             to
             shew
             himselfe
             in
             his
             proper
             shape
             ,
             beeing
             a
             perfect
             compleate
             man
             in
             heauen
             ,
             and
             but
             a
             childe
             vpon
             earth
             ,
             wholly
             entire
             in
             heaven
             ,
             but
             here
             cut
             and
             mangled
             into
             small
             pieces
             betweene
             the
             hands
             of
             the
             Priest.
             Wherefore
             they
             do
             yet
             keepe
             some
             bloud
             &
             flesh
             in
             many
             churches
             ,
             for
             feare
             least
             the
             people
             suspect
             that
             these
             were
             illusions
             .
             For
             Satan
             even
             in
             those
             daies
             did
             secretly
             begin
             to
             weaue
             the
             web
             of
             the
             mistery
             of
             Transubstantiatiō
             :
             which
             having
             cōfirmed
             by
             these
             miracles
             ,
             he
             got
             it
             at
             last
             to
             passe
             in
             an
             article
             of
             a
             councell
             ,
             the
             Lat●ran
             Councell
             I
             meane
             ,
             held
             vnder
             Innocent
             the
             3.
             in
             the
             yeare
             of
             our
             Lorde
             ,
             1215.
             
             To
             these
             apparitions
             they
             annexe
             the
             testimoines
             of
             beasts
             .
             There
             were
             an
             hiue
             of
             Bees
             seene
             in
             
               S
               ,
               Gervays
            
             his
             monastery
             in
             Paris
             which
             builte
             a
             chappell
             of
             waxe
             in
             honor
             of
             the
             Host
             ;
             but
             aboue
             all
             ,
             
             the
             miracle
             of
             the
             Asse
             that
             left
             his
             provender
             to
             worship
             the
             hoast
             ,
             seemes
             most
             ridiculous
             to
             the
             king
             of
             Great
             Brittaine
             :
             and
             that
             with
             good
             reason
             :
             howsoever
             
             Bellarmine
             in
             his
             answere
             to
             the
             king
             seeke
             to
             colour
             it
             with
             other
             miracles
             mentioned
             in
             the
             Scripture
             ,
             which
             ,
             as
             he
             saith
             ,
             seeme
             no
             lesse
             absurd
             to
             him
             .
             Wee
             are
             therefore
             now
             come
             to
             that
             passe
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             helde
             impiety
             not
             to
             think
             that
             foolish
             legends
             forged
             but
             of
             late
             ,
             must
             haue
             all
             one
             authority
             to
             bind
             our
             beliefe
             ,
             as
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             besides
             ,
             no
             miracles
             of
             the
             scripture
             do
             plāt
             Christiā
             vertues
             in
             brute
             beasts
             :
             for
             it
             must
             needes
             be
             (
             by
             their
             reckoning
             )
             that
             this
             Asse
             (
             going
             of
             his
             own
             accord
             to
             worship
             the
             hoast
             )
             had
             some
             zeale
             in
             him
             &
             knowledge
             of
             God
             ,
             which
             was
             not
             to
             be
             seen
             in
             the
             Kine
             that
             drew
             the
             Arke
             ,
             nor
             in
             Balaams
             Asse
             .
             The
             miracles
             that
             are
             done
             nowe
             a
             daies
             are
             of
             no
             more
             worth
             ,
             and
             are
             al
             reducible
             to
             one
             miracle
             ,
             which
             is
             to
             driue
             away
             divels
             ,
             who
             make
             as
             though
             they
             were
             afraid
             of
             holy
             water
             ,
             and
             the
             signe
             of
             crosse
             ,
             so
             to
             detaine
             the
             people
             still
             in
             errour
             :
             and
             as
             theeues
             are
             thought
             to
             giue
             life
             when
             they
             do
             not
             take
             it
             away
             ,
             so
             the
             divels
             are
             said
             to
             do
             good
             when
             they
             cease
             
             to
             hurt
             .
             Wherevnto
             they
             do
             willingly
             cōdescend
             ,
             for
             to
             make
             men
             thinke
             that
             the
             Masse
             or
             these
             cōiurations
             haue
             some
             vertue
             in
             them
             .
             The
             Pharisies
             accused
             Iesus
             Christ
             for
             casting
             out
             divels
             by
             Beelzebub
             Prince
             of
             the
             divels
             ,
             thinking
             that
             Beelzebub
             did
             cast
             out
             others
             as
             being
             more
             powerfull
             then
             they
             .
             But
             we
             speak
             not
             as
             the
             Pharisies
             :
             for
             we
             say
             not
             that
             these
             coniurers
             of
             spirits
             in
             this
             age
             ,
             do
             cast
             out
             divels
             by
             any
             superiority
             or
             predominancie
             that
             they
             haue
             over
             them
             ,
             but
             by
             collusion
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             voluntary
             departing
             of
             the
             divels
             themselues
             .
             Wherefore
             they
             cannot
             answer
             vs
             as
             our
             Lord
             did
             the
             Pharisies
             ,
             that
             if
             Satan
             cast
             out
             Satan
             his
             kingdome
             cannot
             endure
             ,
             because
             hee
             is
             divided
             against
             himselfe
             ,
             for
             in
             all
             their
             exorcismes
             we
             presuppose
             that
             the
             diuels
             are
             to
             well
             agreed
             .
             Yea
             and
             I
             say
             ,
             that
             if
             Christ
             could
             haue
             done
             no
             other
             miracle
             but
             to
             heale
             those
             which
             were
             possessed
             with
             diuels
             ,
             the
             Pharisies
             had
             had
             some
             reason
             to
             doubt
             of
             his
             power
             :
             but
             he
             gaue
             sight
             to
             such
             as
             were
             borne
             blinde
             ,
             raised
             the
             dead
             that
             lay
             stinking
             in
             their
             graues
             ,
             multiplyed
             the
             bread
             ,
             things
             which
             the
             diuels
             cannot
             doe
             ,
             and
             which
             our
             aduersaries
             (
             though
             neuer
             so
             
             foole-hardy
             in
             imitating
             )
             doe
             not
             yet
             dare
             to
             counterfait
             :
             for
             they
             haue
             beene
             manie
             times
             taken
             tardy
             in
             lesse
             matters
             ,
             and
             punished
             for
             such
             pranckes
             by
             iudges
             of
             the
             same
             religion
             that
             they
             are
             .
             In
             the
             yeare
             1509
             there
             were
             fowre
             Iacobin
             Friers
             executed
             at
             Berne
             ,
             for
             raising
             vlcers
             ,
             in
             the
             feete
             ,
             in
             the
             hands
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             side
             of
             a
             simple
             man
             ,
             of
             whom
             they
             would
             haue
             made
             another
             
               S.
               Frauncis
            
             ,
             and
             giuen
             him
             the
             marks
             ,
             as
             *
             Langius
             witnesseth
             in
             his
             chronicle
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             a
             thing
             commonly
             practised
             to
             this
             day
             in
             Swizerlād
             .
             In
             the
             year
             *
             1534
             the
             Cordeliers
             of
             Orleans
             did
             put
             a
             Novice
             of
             their
             profession
             over
             the
             vault
             of
             the
             church
             ,
             which
             with
             pittifull
             sighes
             &
             great
             lamentation
             did
             faigne
             that
             hee
             was
             the
             soule
             the
             Provosts
             wife
             of
             Orleans
             ,
             that
             died
             without
             giuing
             them
             any
             thing
             ,
             and
             gaue
             them
             to
             vnderstand
             that
             she
             was
             dāned
             ,
             and
             that
             her
             body
             must
             bee
             digged
             vp
             againe
             out
             of
             the
             earth
             .
             This
             point
             of
             knavery
             being
             detected
             by
             the
             Officiall
             ,
             the
             two
             principall
             authors
             of
             it
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             Colimā
             and
             Steven
             of
             Arras
             ,
             were
             sent
             to
             Paris
             ,
             &
             after
             iudgement
             past
             ,
             were
             forthwith
             led
             backe
             againe
             to
             Orleans
             ,
             and
             there
             in
             an
             open
             place
             (
             where
             malefactours
             vse
             to
             suffer
             )
             
             were
             made
             to
             confesse
             their
             imposture
             .
             Papon
             in
             the
             sixth
             edition
             of
             his
             Reportes
             ,
             1.
             title
             ,
             &
             6.
             
             Iudgement
             .
             doth
             relate
             manie
             sentences
             that
             haue
             past
             in
             the
             high
             Courts
             against
             these
             false
             ,
             and
             abusiue
             miracles
             .
             The
             miracles
             of
             
               Martha
               Brossiere
            
             ,
             which
             was
             possest
             with
             a
             diuell
             ,
             haue
             lately
             beene
             found
             to
             be
             false
             ,
             and
             shee
             condemned
             in
             iudgement
             ,
             
               Mounsieur
               Marescot
            
             a
             Physitiā
             that
             was
             sent
             for
             to
             visit
             her
             ,
             hath
             written
             an
             expresse
             booke
             of
             this
             .
             
               Mounsieur
               Boutiller
            
             that
             famous
             advocate
             at
             Paris
             hath
             written
             a
             set
             tract
             against
             the
             fable
             of
             Gargoville
             of
             Roane
             ,
             slaine
             by
             
               S.
               Roman
            
             ,
             wherein
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             that
             for
             a
             requital
             of
             this
             good
             turne
             ,
             God
             hath
             done
             him
             this
             favor
             that
             whosoeuer
             doth
             but
             lift
             vp
             his
             coffin
             (
             be
             it
             that
             he
             bee
             a
             parricide
             or
             haue
             committed
             incest
             )
             is
             forthwith
             absolued
             both
             from
             the
             punishment
             ,
             &
             the
             guilt
             of
             these
             crimes
             .
             Read
             the
             miracles
             of
             our
             Lady
             of
             Halls
             in
             Flaunders
             ,
             published
             by
             Lipsius
             ,
             &
             you
             shall
             see
             that
             the
             good
             man
             hath
             spent
             40
             yeares
             in
             gathering
             choice
             flowers
             of
             Grammar
             Latin
             to
             throw
             them
             downe
             at
             the
             feete
             of
             an
             image
             ,
             and
             made
             vse
             of
             all
             his
             philosophy
             vpon
             an
             idle
             toy
             :
             there
             shal
             you
             see
             how
             he
             doth
             often
             call
             the
             Virgin
             
             Deam
             ,
             &
             Divam
             ,
             Pagan-like
             substituting
             femall
             Gods.
             
               S.
               Ignatius
               Loyola
            
             the
             father
             and
             patron
             of
             the
             Iesuits
             had
             not
             for
             a
             lōg
             time
             done
             any
             miracles
             :
             but
             his
             opening
             vertue
             began
             of
             late
             to
             shew
             it selfe
             ,
             by
             vnstopping
             the
             obstructions
             of
             a
             wench
             troubled
             with
             the
             stone
             &
             making
             her
             to
             leake
             .
             This
             is
             the
             first
             signe
             of
             any
             powerfull
             vertue
             that
             was
             in
             this
             Saint
             ,
             and
             this
             goodly
             miracle
             was
             newly
             printed
             of
             late
             at
             Liege
             and
             at
             
               S.
               Omers
            
             ,
             and
             is
             proclaimed
             by
             the
             common
             cryer
             to
             be
             sold
             at
             Paris
             .
          
           
             To
             go
             about
             here
             to
             reckon
             vp
             a
             thousand
             false
             miracles
             wherewith
             the
             legends
             are
             stuft
             ,
             were
             nothing
             else
             but
             to
             rake
             vp
             heapes
             of
             dunge
             .
             
               S.
               Dominicke
            
             heales
             a
             wenches
             thigh
             ,
             by
             rubbing
             it
             over
             with
             the
             oile
             of
             Loue
             ,
             as
             his
             Legend
             reporteth
             .
             That
             of
             
               S.
               Frauncis
            
             saith
             ,
             that
             he
             preached
             to
             the
             Pyes
             ,
             and
             Swallowes
             ,
             and
             called
             thē
             his
             sisters
             :
             that
             he
             gaue
             his
             hand
             to
             a
             wolfe
             calling
             him
             his
             brother
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             wolfe
             gaue
             him
             his
             paw
             .
             The
             booke
             intituled
             
               Fasciculus
               temporum
            
             ,
             composed
             by
             a
             religious
             Carmelite
             ,
             vpon
             the
             yeare
             754
             ,
             reporteth
             of
             
               S.
               Gingolfs
            
             wife
             ,
             that
             she
             vsed
             to
             sing
             with
             her
             lower
             mouth
             ,
             which
             was
             inflicted
             vpon
             her
             for
             a
             punishment
             ,
             because
             
             shee
             scoffed
             at
             her
             husbands
             miracles
             .
             In
             all
             this
             ,
             the
             greatest
             miracle
             is
             the
             patience
             of
             God
             ▪
             and
             the
             blockishnesse
             of
             the
             people
             ,
             that
             are
             thus
             led
             .
             But
             it
             must
             needs
             bee
             that
             the
             Apostles
             prophecie
             ,
             must
             be
             fulfilled
             ;
             which
             saith
             ,
             that
             the
             comming
             of
             the
             sonne
             of
             Perdition
             should
             be
             in
             all
             power
             ,
             and
             signes
             ,
             and
             lying
             wonders
             :
             and
             that
             God
             should
             send
             the
             powerfulnesse
             of
             delusion
             for
             a
             punishmēt
             vnto
             such
             as
             would
             not
             loue
             his
             truth
             ,
             
               On
               whom
            
             (
             saith
             the
             Apostle
             )
             
               God
               hath
               sent
               strong
               delusions
               ,
               that
               they
               should
               beleeue
               lies
               .
            
          
        
      
       
         
           THE
           PROPHECIE
           CONtained
           in
           the
           12.
           
           Chapter
           of
           the
           Apocalyps
           .
           CHAP.
           3.
           
        
         
           
             
               1
               AND
               there
               appeared
               a
               great
               wonder
               in
               heaven
               :
               a
               woman
               clothed
               with
               the
               sunne
               ,
               and
               the
               moone
               was
               vnder
               her
               feet
               ,
               and
               vpon
               her
               head
               a
               crowne
               of
               12.
               starres
               .
            
             
               2
               And
               shee
               was
               with
               child
               ,
               and
               cried
               travailing
               in
               birth
               ,
               and
               was
               pained
               ready
               to
               be
               delivered
               .
            
             
             
               3
               And
               there
               appeared
               another
               wonder
               in
               heaven
               :
               for
               behold
               a
               great
               red
               dragon
               hauing
               7.
               heads
               ,
               and
               10.
               hornes
               ,
               &
               7
               crownes
               vpon
               his
               heads
               :
            
             
               4
               And
               his
               taile
               drew
               the
               third
               part
               of
               the
               starres
               of
               heaven
               ,
               and
               cast
               them
               to
               the
               earth
               .
               And
               the
               dragon
               stood
               before
               the
               woman
               which
               was
               ready
               to
               bee
               delivered
               ,
               to
               devoure
               her
               child
               ,
               when
               shee
               had
               brought
               it
               forth
               .
            
             
               5
               So
               she
               brought
               forth
               a
               man
               child
               ,
               which
               should
               rule
               all
               nations
               with
               a
               rod
               of
               iron
               :
               and
               that
               her
               child
               was
               taken
               vp
               vnto
               God
               ,
               and
               to
               his
               throne
               .
            
             
               6
               And
               the
               woman
               fled
               into
               the
               wildernesse
               ,
               where
               she
               hath
               a
               place
               prepared
               of
               God
               ,
               that
               they
               should
               feed
               her
               there
               a
               thousand
               ,
               two
               hundreth
               ,
               and
               three
               score
               daies
               .
            
             
               7
               And
               there
               was
               a
               great
               battaile
               in
               heaven
               ,
               Michael
               and
               his
               Angels
               fought
               against
               the
               Dragon
               ,
               and
               the
               Dragon
               fought
               and
               his
               Angels
               ;
            
             
               8
               But
               they
               prevailed
               not
               ,
               neither
               was
               their
               place
               any
               more
               found
               in
               heaven
               .
            
             
               9
               And
               the
               great
               Dragon
               ,
               that
               olde
               serpent
               ,
               called
               the
               divell
               and
               Satan
               ,
               was
               cast
               out
               ,
               which
               deceiveth
               all
               the
               world
               ;
               hee
               was
               even
               cast
               into
               the
               earth
               ,
               and
               his
               Angels
               were
               
               cast
               out
               with
               him
               .
            
             
               10
               Then
               I
               heard
               a
               lowd
               voice
               in
               heaven
               ,
               saying
               ,
               Now
               is
               salvation
               ,
               and
               strength
               ,
               and
               the
               kingdome
               of
               our
               God
               ,
               and
               the
               power
               of
               his
               Christ
               :
               for
               the
               accuser
               of
               our
               brethren
               is
               cast
               downe
               ,
               which
               accused
               them
               before
               our
               God
               day
               and
               night
               .
            
             
               11
               But
               they
               overcame
               him
               by
               that
               blood
               of
               the
               Lambe
               ,
               and
               by
               the
               word
               of
               their
               testimonie
               ,
               and
               they
               loued
               not
               their
               liues
               vnto
               the
               death
               .
            
             
               12
               Therefore
               reioice
               yee
               heavens
               ,
               and
               yee
               that
               dwell
               in
               them
               .
               Wo
               to
               the
               inhabitants
               of
               the
               earth
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               sea
               :
               for
               the
               divell
               is
               come
               down
               vnto
               you
               ,
               which
               hath
               great
               wrath
               knowing
               that
               he
               hath
               but
               a
               short
               time
               .
            
             
               13
               And
               when
               the
               Dragon
               saw
               that
               he
               was
               cast
               vnto
               the
               earth
               ,
               he
               persecuted
               the
               woman
               ,
               which
               had
               brought
               forth
               the
               man
               child
               .
            
             
               14
               But
               to
               the
               woman
               were
               given
               two
               wings
               of
               a
               great
               Eagle
               ,
               that
               she
               might
               fly
               into
               the
               wildernesse
               ,
               into
               her
               place
               where
               she
               is
               nourished
               for
               a
               time
               ,
               and
               times
               ,
               and
               halfe
               a
               time
               ,
               from
               the
               presence
               of
               the
               serpent
               .
            
             
               15
               And
               the
               serpent
               cast
               out
               of
               his
               mouth
               water
               after
               the
               woman
               like
               a
               flood
               ,
               that
               he
               might
               cause
               her
               to
               be
               carried
               away
               of
               
               the
               flood
            
             
               16
               But
               the
               earth
               holpe
               the
               woman
               ,
               and
               the
               earth
               opened
               her
               mouth
               ,
               &
               swallowed
               vp
               the
               floud
               which
               the
               Dragon
               had
               cast
               out
               of
               his
               mouth
               .
            
             
               17
               Then
               the
               Dragon
               was
               wroth
               with
               the
               woman
               ,
               and
               went
               and
               made
               war
               with
               the
               remnant
               of
               her
               seed
               ,
               which
               keepe
               the
               commandements
               of
               God
               ,
               and
               haue
               the
               testimonie
               of
               Iesus
               Christ
            
             
               18
               And
               I
               stood
               on
               the
               sea
               sand
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             The
             Exposition
             of
             this
             Prophecie
             .
          
           
             1
             A
             Great
             signe
             appeared
             in
             heaven
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             a
             woman
             which
             was
             the
             type
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             Israell
             .
             And
             this
             Church
             was
             illightned
             with
             the
             brightnesse
             of
             the
             knoweledge
             of
             God
             and
             did
             tread
             vnder
             her
             feet
             the
             mutable
             instabilitie
             of
             worldly
             things
             ,
             which
             is
             like
             to
             the
             change
             of
             the
             moone
             .
             And
             was
             crowned
             with
             a
             douzen
             starrs
             ,
             which
             are
             the
             twelue
             Patriarchs
             ,
             the
             fathers
             of
             the
             twelue
             tribes
             of
             Israell
             .
          
           
             2
             And
             of
             this
             Church
             must
             there
             a
             child
             be
             borne
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             the
             Messias
             ,
             in
             expectation
             of
             whome
             she
             did
             suffer
             ,
             and
             was
             in
             anguish
             ,
             
             looking
             for
             the
             manifestation
             of
             this
             Messias
             .
          
           
             3
             But
             behold
             on
             the
             other
             side
             the
             divel
             like
             a
             red
             dragon
             ,
             hauing
             7
             heads
             ,
             and
             tenne
             hornes
             ,
             and
             7
             crowns
             vpon
             his
             heads
             .
          
           
             4
             Whose
             venemous
             temptations
             haue
             vsed
             to
             make
             the
             third
             part
             of
             those
             that
             are
             in
             the
             visible
             Church
             ,
             to
             fall
             away
             ,
             whom
             he
             turneth
             aside
             from
             heauenly
             things
             to
             earthly
             .
             And
             this
             divell
             did
             watch
             with
             all
             diligence
             for
             the
             time
             when
             Iesus
             Christ
             should
             be
             born
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             Israel
             ,
             that
             he
             might
             make
             him
             to
             perish
             as
             soone
             as
             ever
             hee
             was
             borne
             ,
             having
             raised
             vp
             a
             persecution
             against
             him
             in
             his
             cradle
             ,
             then
             when
             Herod
             would
             haue
             put
             him
             to
             death
             .
          
           
             5
             Now
             of
             this
             Church
             of
             Israel
             was
             a
             man-child
             borne
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             which
             must
             rule
             all
             the
             world
             with
             a
             strong
             &
             mightie
             scepter
             .
             And
             this
             Iesus
             was
             lifted
             vp
             from
             earth
             to
             heaven
             by
             his
             ascension
             .
          
           
             6
             And
             after
             the
             ascensiō
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             Satan
             hauing
             raised
             vp
             a
             persecutiō
             against
             the
             Iewes
             ,
             so
             to
             enwrap
             the
             Christian
             Iewish
             Church
             in
             the
             same
             ruine
             ,
             this
             Church
             did
             retire
             aside
             into
             a
             place
             called
             Pella
             ,
             where
             she
             lay
             hid
             1260.
             daies
             ,
             which
             are
             three
             years
             and
             a
             halfe
             .
          
           
           
             7
             Now
             after
             this
             ascension
             ,
             there
             was
             a
             great
             battaile
             fought
             in
             heaven
             ,
             Iesus
             Christ
             and
             his
             Angels
             fighting
             against
             the
             Prince
             of
             the
             divels
             ,
             and
             the
             wicked
             spirits
             that
             took
             his
             part
             .
          
           
             8
             But
             Satan
             was
             overcome
             ,
             &
             cast
             out
             of
             heaven
             .
          
           
             9
             So
             was
             this
             old
             serpent
             ,
             called
             the
             divell
             and
             satan
             (
             which
             thought
             to
             haue
             seduced
             all
             men
             )
             put
             to
             flight
             ;
             And
             was
             throwne
             downe
             from
             heaven
             to
             earth
             ,
             and
             all
             wicked
             spirits
             together
             with
             him
             .
          
           
             10
             Then
             I
             heard
             a
             great
             voice
             in
             heaven
             ,
             saying
             ;
             Now
             by
             the
             ascension
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             (
             vvhich
             hath
             taken
             possession
             of
             the
             kingdōe
             of
             God
             ,
             being
             sate
             at
             his
             right
             hand
             )
             is
             salvation
             purchased
             vnto
             the
             Church
             ,
             and
             the
             mightie
             kingdome
             of
             our
             God
             is
             established
             ,
             and
             the
             power
             of
             his
             Christ.
             For
             the
             divell
             vvhich
             did
             accuse
             the
             faithful
             incessantly
             before
             God
             ,
             is
             cast
             out
             of
             heaven
             ,
             and
             put
             by
             from
             his
             trade
             of
             accusation
             .
          
           
             11
             But
             in
             vertue
             of
             the
             death
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             which
             by
             his
             death
             hath
             subdued
             him
             that
             had
             the
             power
             over
             death
             ,
             to
             vvit
             ,
             the
             divell
             ,
             they
             haue
             overcome
             him
             ,
             being
             armed
             vvith
             the
             vvord
             of
             the
             Gospell
             ,
             to
             vvhich
             they
             haue
             geuen
             testimony
             by
             their
             suffrings
             ,
             
             &
             by
             their
             preaching
             ,
             hauing
             vvillingly
             exposed
             their
             liues
             to
             the
             death
             ,
             for
             the
             iustifying
             of
             their
             faith
             in
             Iesus
             Christ.
             
          
           
             12
             Wherefore
             reioice
             O
             yee
             Saints
             which
             dwell
             in
             heauen
             ,
             but
             tremble
             yee
             inhabitants
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             which
             dwell
             in
             the
             continent
             ,
             &
             in
             the
             Ilands
             ;
             for
             the
             divell
             is
             come
             downe
             vnto
             you
             ,
             for
             to
             vvreake
             his
             anger
             vpon
             you
             ,
             knowing
             that
             he
             shall
             ere
             long
             be
             cast
             into
             the
             bottomlesse
             pit
             ,
             and
             that
             all
             his
             povver
             to
             doe
             hurt
             ,
             shall
             shortly
             be
             taken
             away
             from
             him
             .
          
           
             13
             When
             the
             divell
             therefore
             savv
             that
             he
             vvas
             casseered
             of
             his
             kingdome
             ,
             &
             that
             he
             vvas
             throwne
             out
             of
             heauen
             ,
             hee
             did
             set
             himselfe
             to
             persecute
             the
             Church
             of
             vvhich
             Iesus
             Christ
             was
             borne
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             faithfull
             Iewes
             ,
             amongst
             vvhom
             vvere
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             and
             Disciples
             of
             Iesus
             .
          
           
             14
             But
             God
             shewd
             this
             Church
             a
             vvay
             to
             escape
             the
             persecution
             vvhich
             the
             divell
             had
             raised
             ,
             by
             flying
             away
             ,
             &
             hiding
             herselfe
             in
             the
             aboue
             named
             towne
             of
             Pella
             ,
             on
             this
             side
             Iordan
             ,
             vvhere
             God
             did
             nourish
             and
             defend
             her
             ,
             for
             a
             yeare
             ,
             two
             yeares
             ,
             and
             a
             halfe
             an
             yeare
             ;
             that
             is
             ,
             for
             three
             yeares
             and
             a
             halfe
             .
          
           
             15
             This
             persecution
             then
             of
             the
             Christian
             Church
             ,
             being
             no
             vvaies
             advantagious
             to
             Satan
             ,
             he
             mooved
             Pagan
             &
             heathen
             people
             
             to
             rise
             vp
             against
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             and
             their
             Disciples
             ,
             so
             to
             oppresse
             them
             and
             vvorke
             their
             ouerthrowe
             .
          
           
             16
             But
             these
             people
             stirred
             vp
             by
             Satan
             vvere
             swallowed
             vp
             in
             the
             bottomelesse
             pit
             ,
             and
             vvere
             cast
             downe
             into
             hell
             .
          
           
             17
             Satan
             therefore
             being
             enraged
             that
             hee
             could
             not
             vvorke
             the
             overthrowe
             of
             the
             Christian
             Iewish
             Church
             ,
             laboured
             by
             all
             means
             to
             persecute
             the
             Churches
             of
             the
             Gentiles
             ,
             vvhich
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             Iewes
             had
             planted
             and
             begotten
             ,
             vvhich
             Churches
             of
             the
             Gentiles
             doe
             keepe
             the
             Commandements
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             lay
             vp
             the
             doctrine
             of
             the
             Gospell
             in
             their
             hearts
             .
          
           
             18
             And
             in
             this
             vision
             that
             I
             saw
             I
             was
             not
             transported
             out
             of
             my
             body
             ,
             but
             ,
             being
             only
             ravished
             in
             spirit
             ,
             I
             remained
             on
             the
             sea
             shore
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             cleering
             of
             this
             prophecie
             ,
             togither
             with
             the
             proofe
             of
             this
             exposition
             .
          
           
             ALbeit
             this
             chapter
             make
             no
             mention
             of
             the
             bishop
             of
             Rome
             ,
             yet
             I
             must
             of
             necessity
             expound
             it
             ,
             because
             it
             serues
             for
             the
             vnfolding
             of
             the
             chapters
             following
             ,
             and
             because
             they
             depend
             vpon
             this
             .
             Now
             the
             
             exposition
             which
             I
             giue
             of
             it
             is
             so
             cleere
             &
             naturall
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             be
             thought
             a
             labour
             spent
             in
             vaine
             to
             goe
             about
             to
             proue
             it
             .
          
           
             By
             this
             woman
             I
             vnderstand
             the
             church
             of
             Israel
             ,
             after
             Abraham
             &
             the
             patriarches
             ,
             which
             were
             the
             fathers
             of
             the
             12
             tribes
             of
             Israell
             ,
             till
             the
             Iewish
             church
             began
             to
             bee
             mixed
             togither
             with
             that
             of
             the
             Gentils
             ,
             which
             came
             to
             passe
             presently
             vpon
             the
             time
             of
             the
             Apostles
             .
             This
             is
             the
             reason
             ,
             that
             (
             although
             the
             church
             of
             the
             Iewes
             before
             the
             preaching
             of
             the
             gospel
             ,
             and
             before
             the
             ascension
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             be
             the
             selfe
             same
             Church
             with
             that
             of
             the
             faithfull
             Iewes
             ,
             which
             from
             the
             Apostles
             time
             did
             beleeue
             in
             Iesus
             Christ
             )
             yet
             so
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             for
             the
             more
             perspicuities
             sake
             I
             cal
             the
             church
             of
             the
             Iews
             after
             the
             ascension
             of
             our
             Saviour
             Iesus
             Christ
             the
             Iewish-Christian
             church
             ,
             for
             to
             distinguish
             it
             from
             the
             Iewes
             that
             were
             the
             enimies
             of
             the
             gospell
             :
             &
             yet
             notwithstanding
             it
             is
             still
             the
             Church
             of
             Israell
             .
          
           
             There
             be
             2
             reasons
             that
             enforce
             me
             not
             to
             vnderstād
             the
             church
             in
             generall
             by
             this
             woman
             ,
             but
             only
             the
             church
             of
             Israell
             .
             The
             first
             is
             because
             Iesus
             Christ
             is
             borne
             of
             the
             church
             here
             mentioned
             .
             For
             least
             any
             man
             
             should
             vnderstand
             this
             of
             a
             metaphoricall
             birth
             ,
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             doth
             there
             make
             expresse
             mention
             of
             a
             birth
             that
             goeth
             before
             his
             ascension
             :
             which
             cannot
             agree
             to
             regeneration
             ,
             whereby
             Christ
             is
             formed
             a
             new
             in
             vs.
             The
             second
             reason
             is
             because
             in
             the
             17.
             verse
             this
             church
             is
             manifestly
             distinguished
             from
             that
             of
             the
             Gētils
             ;
             as
             the
             mother
             from
             the
             daughter
             .
             Besides
             the
             whole
             course
             of
             the
             chapter
             sheweth
             vs
             that
             this
             is
             the
             meaning
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             third
             verse
             the
             diuell
             is
             represented
             in
             the
             forme
             of
             a
             beast
             having
             7.
             heads
             and
             ten
             hornes
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             forme
             vnder
             which
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             is
             represented
             in
             the
             7.
             of
             Daniell
             :
             and
             in
             the
             1.
             verse
             of
             the
             chapter
             which
             wee
             come
             next
             to
             handle
             ;
             where
             we
             will
             examin
             the
             reason
             why
             the
             Empire
             is
             described
             in
             this
             manner
             .
             And
             the
             diuell
             and
             the
             Empire
             are
             both
             represented
             vnder
             the
             same
             forme
             ,
             because
             the
             diuell
             did
             as
             then
             make
             vse
             of
             this
             mightie
             Empire
             for
             to
             persecute
             the
             church
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             4.
             verse
             their
             revolting
             ,
             which
             held
             some
             place
             in
             the
             Church
             ,
             is
             compared
             to
             the
             falling
             of
             starres
             throwne
             down
             from
             heauen
             vpon
             earth
             .
             For
             as
             the
             church
             is
             often
             called
             the
             kingdome
             of
             heaven
             ,
             so
             
             by
             the
             same
             reason
             they
             which
             are
             placed
             therein
             are
             compared
             to
             starres
             :
             whose
             apostacie
             is
             as
             the
             falling
             of
             one
             from
             heavē
             to
             earth
             ,
             both
             because
             they
             are
             shut
             out
             of
             heauen
             ,
             as
             also
             because
             they
             deiect
             &
             debase
             their
             desires
             and
             affections
             from
             heavenly
             to
             earthly
             things
             .
             Which
             will
             also
             serue
             vs
             to
             expound
             the
             10.
             verse
             of
             the
             8.
             chapter
             of
             this
             booke
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             said
             that
             a
             great
             star
             fell
             from
             heauen
             ,
             which
             did
             infect
             the
             thirde
             part
             of
             the
             waters
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             the
             meaning
             whereof
             is
             nothing
             els
             ,
             but
             that
             a
             great
             man
             of
             note
             in
             the
             Church
             should
             fal
             from
             the
             faith
             ,
             and
             by
             his
             example
             corrupt
             many
             others
             .
          
           
             That
             which
             is
             said
             in
             the
             fifth
             verse
             ,
             that
             the
             child
             (
             which
             is
             the
             Messias
             )
             shall
             governe
             all
             nations
             with
             a
             scepter
             of
             yron
             ,
             is
             taken
             out
             of
             the
             2.
             
             Psalme
             ,
             ver
             .
             9.
             
             
               Thou
               shalt
               crush
               them
               with
               a
               scepter
               of
               yron
               ,
            
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             thou
             shalt
             keepe
             them
             vnder
             with
             a
             mighty
             scepter
             ,
             and
             with
             a
             powerfull
             dominion
             :
             in
             which
             Psalme
             the
             extent
             of
             the
             absolute
             Empire
             of
             Christ
             Iesus
             is
             described
             vnto
             us
             .
          
           
             The
             flight
             and
             retiring
             of
             the
             Iewish
             church
             ,
             and
             the
             three
             yeares
             and
             an
             halfe
             wherein
             shee
             lay
             hid
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             in
             the
             6.
             
             &
             14.
             
             verses
             ,
             are
             proved
             to
             be
             true
             by
             history
             .
             Eusebius
             in
             the
             2.
             booke
             of
             his
             history
             ,
             and
             5.
             chapter
             saith
             ;
             
               The
               people
               of
               the
               church
               of
               Ierusalem
               were
               before
               the
               warre
               began
               by
               an
               oracle
               revealed
               to
               some
               of
               the
               chiefe
               amongest
               them
               ,
               commanded
               to
               depart
               out
               of
               that
               citty
               ,
               and
               to
               dwell
               in
               a
               towne
               on
               this
               side
               Iordano
               called
               Pella
               ,
               whether
               as
               many
               as
               beleeved
               in
               Iesus
               Christ
               fled
               hauing
               left
               Ierusalem
               .
            
             Now
             this
             warre
             lasted
             3.
             years
             and
             a
             halfe
             ,
             as
             we
             may
             gather
             out
             of
             Dion
             ,
             and
             Iosephus
             ,
             from
             the
             third
             booke
             of
             his
             Iudaicall
             historie
             to
             the
             6.
             
             In
             the
             67.
             yeare
             of
             our
             Lord
             ,
             in
             the
             month
             of
             Aprill
             ,
             4.
             moneths
             after
             the
             death
             of
             
               Nero
               ,
               Vespasian
            
             sent
             at
             first
             by
             Nero
             began
             to
             lay
             his
             siedge
             to
             Gadara
             ,
             and
             Iotapata
             ,
             and
             to
             subdue
             Galilee
             .
             In
             the
             70.
             year
             of
             our
             Lord
             on
             the
             8.
             of
             December
             Titus
             the
             sonne
             of
             Vespasian
             tooke
             Ierusalem
             ,
             &
             razed
             it
             to
             the
             ground
             ,
             afterward
             departed
             thence
             to
             triumph
             at
             Rome
             ,
             leauing
             some
             few
             forces
             to
             finish
             that
             which
             he
             had
             left
             vndone
             ,
             which
             was
             effected
             with
             little
             or
             no
             resistance
             .
          
           
             The
             Prince
             of
             the
             Angels
             Michaell
             which
             is
             spoken
             of
             in
             the
             7.
             verse
             ,
             is
             Iesus
             Christ
             our
             Lord.
             For
             this
             is
             he
             which
             is
             the
             head
             of
             the
             Angels
             ;
             this
             is
             *
             he
             which
             hath
             
             overcome
             the
             diuell
             ;
             this
             is
             he
             to
             whom
             alone
             the
             name
             of
             Michael
             agreeth
             ,
             which
             signifieth
             ,
             
               Who
               is
               as
               God
            
             ?
             for
             hee
             hath
             thought
             it
             no
             robbery
             to
             be
             equal
             to
             God
             his
             father
             .
             Phil.
             2.6
             .
          
           
             Now
             the
             battel
             that
             was
             fought
             in
             heaven
             must
             bee
             vnderstoode
             to
             haue
             beene
             fought
             after
             the
             death
             or
             ascension
             of
             our
             Lord
             ,
             and
             not
             after
             the
             retiring
             aside
             of
             the
             Iewes
             into
             Pella
             ,
             although
             there
             be
             mention
             made
             of
             this
             before
             the
             fighting
             of
             the
             battaile
             in
             heauen
             :
             for
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             hauing
             first
             related
             what
             befell
             the
             church
             vpon
             earth
             ,
             mounts
             vp
             againe
             to
             the
             things
             that
             were
             done
             in
             heauen
             :
             and
             indeed
             in
             the
             14.
             this
             very
             flight
             of
             the
             church
             is
             set
             after
             the
             fighting
             of
             the
             battaile
             in
             heaven
             :
             which
             I
             doe
             not
             thinke
             was
             so
             in
             effect
             ,
             but
             that
             hereby
             God
             did
             in
             a
             visiō
             represent
             to
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             ,
             that
             Satan
             was
             cast
             out
             of
             heauen
             by
             Iesus
             Christ.
             
          
           
             To
             this
             purpose
             wee
             are
             to
             note
             that
             in
             the
             1.
             of
             Iob
             ,
             the
             6.
             verse
             ,
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             that
             the
             children
             of
             God
             (
             which
             are
             the
             Angels
             )
             came
             and
             stood
             before
             the
             Lord
             ,
             and
             that
             Satan
             also
             thrust
             in
             amongst
             them
             .
             And
             in
             the
             22.
             chapt
             .
             of
             the
             1.
             of
             Kings
             21.
             verse
             ,
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             that
             a
             wicked
             spirit
             came
             and
             stood
             
             before
             the
             Lord
             ,
             offring
             his
             service
             to
             seduce
             the
             Prophets
             ,
             and
             to
             be
             a
             lying
             spirit
             in
             their
             mouths
             .
             By
             which
             places
             it
             appeares
             ,
             that
             Satan
             in
             that
             time
             had
             as
             yet
             free
             accesse
             into
             heauen
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             was
             found
             amongst
             the
             Angels
             .
             But
             in
             the
             10.
             chap.
             of
             
               S.
               Luke
            
             ,
             and
             18.
             verse
             ,
             Iesus
             speaketh
             thus
             ,
             
               I
               saw
               Satan
               like
               lightning
               fall
               downe
               from
               heaven
               .
            
             And
             in
             this
             12.
             chapter
             of
             the
             Apocalyps
             ,
             Satan
             is
             described
             vnto
             vs
             falling
             from
             heauen
             to
             earth
             presentlie
             after
             the
             ascensiō
             of
             Iesus
             Christ.
             By
             which
             passages
             of
             scripture
             it
             seemeth
             that
             the
             ascension
             of
             our
             Lord
             did
             wholly
             exclude
             Satan
             out
             of
             heaven
             ,
             and
             barred
             him
             al
             entrance
             there
             again
             for
             ever
             after
             that
             time
             ,
             tumbling
             him
             downe
             into
             this
             lower
             region
             .
             Wherevpon
             
               S.
               Paul
            
             also
             in
             the
             2.
             chapt
             .
             to
             the
             Ephesians
             ,
             calleth
             the
             wicked
             spirits
             ,
             
               the
               powers
               that
               rule
               in
               the
               aire
               ,
            
             &
             the
             prince
             of
             the
             diuels
             ,
             
               the
               Prince
               of
               the
               powers
               that
               rule
               in
               the
               aire
               .
            
             Which
             region
             of
             the
             aire
             is
             in
             infinite
             places
             of
             holy
             writ
             called
             by
             the
             name
             of
             heauen
             :
             in
             which
             sense
             I
             am
             perswaded
             that
             must
             be
             vnderstoode
             which
             the
             same
             Apostle
             speaketh
             in
             the
             6.
             chap.
             of
             the
             same
             epistle
             ,
             where
             he
             saith
             ,
             that
             the
             spirituall
             wickednesses
             are
             in
             the
             high
             ,
             or
             
             heauenly
             places
             .
          
           
             Now
             that
             Satan
             being
             in
             heauen
             did
             accuse
             and
             calumniate
             the
             faithful
             to
             God
             ,
             it
             appeareth
             by
             the
             example
             of
             Iob
             ,
             whom
             he
             accused
             to
             God
             ,
             as
             if
             al
             his
             zeale
             and
             innocencie
             had
             beene
             mercenary
             ,
             and
             led
             by
             profit
             .
             Wherefore
             also
             hee
             is
             called
             the
             divell
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             a
             slanderer
             .
          
           
             The
             waters
             which
             Satan
             did
             powre
             out
             after
             the
             church
             for
             to
             hurt
             her
             ,
             are
             the
             people
             ,
             and
             nations
             .
             The
             meaning
             whereof
             would
             haue
             been
             hard
             for
             vs
             to
             haue
             foūd
             out
             ,
             if
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             himselfe
             had
             not
             expounded
             it
             in
             the
             15.
             verse
             of
             the
             17.
             chap.
             
               The
               waters
               which
               thou
               sawest
               ,
               are
               people
               ,
               and
               multitudes
               ,
               and
               nations
               .
            
          
        
      
       
         
           THE
           PROPHECIE
           CONtained
           in
           the
           13.
           
           Chapter
           of
           the
           Apocalyps
           .
           CHAP.
           4.
           
        
         
           
             
               1
               And
               I
               saw
               a
               beast
               rising
               out
               of
               the
               sea
               having
               seaven
               heads
               and
               ten
               hornes
               ,
               and
               vpon
               his
               hornes
               were
               ten
               crownes
               ,
               and
               vpon
               his
               head
               the
               name
               of
               blasphemy
               .
            
             
             
               2
               And
               the
               beast
               which
               I
               saw
               was
               like
               a
               Leopard
               ,
               and
               his
               feete
               like
               a
               beares
               ,
               and
               his
               mouth
               as
               the
               mouth
               of
               a
               Lyon
               :
               and
               the
               dragō
               gaue
               him
               his
               power
               and
               his
               throne
               and
               great
               authority
               .
            
             
               3
               And
               I
               saw
               one
               of
               his
               heads
               as
               it
               were
               wounded
               to
               death
               ,
               but
               his
               deadly
               wound
               was
               healed
               ,
               and
               all
               the
               world
               wondered
               and
               followed
               the
               beast
               .
            
             
               4
               And
               they
               worshipped
               the
               dragō
               ,
               which
               gaue
               power
               vnto
               the
               beast
               ,
               and
               they
               worshipped
               the
               beast
               ,
               saying
               ,
               who
               is
               he
               like
               vnto
               the
               beast
               ?
               who
               is
               able
               to
               warre
               with
               him
               ?
            
             
               5
               And
               there
               was
               given
               vnto
               him
               a
               mouth
               ,
               that
               spake
               great
               things
               and
               blasphemies
               ,
               and
               power
               was
               given
               vnto
               him
               to
               do
               42.
               moneths
               .
            
             
               6
               And
               he
               opened
               his
               mouth
               vnto
               blasphemie
               against
               God
               to
               blaspheme
               his
               name
               ,
               and
               his
               tabernacle
               ,
               and
               them
               that
               dwell
               in
               heaven
               .
            
             
               7
               And
               it
               was
               given
               to
               him
               to
               make
               warre
               with
               the
               Saints
               ,
               &
               to
               overcome
               them
               ,
               and
               power
               was
               given
               him
               over
               every
               kinred
               ,
               and
               tongue
               ,
               and
               nation
               .
            
             
               8
               Therefore
               al
               that
               dwel
               vpon
               the
               earth
               shall
               worship
               him
               ,
               whose
               names
               are
               not
               written
               in
               the
               booke
               of
               life
               of
               〈…〉
               ,
               which
               
               was
               slaine
               from
               the
               beginning
               of
               the
               world
               .
            
             
               9
               If
               any
               man
               haue
               an
               eare
               let
               him
               hear
               .
            
             
               10
               If
               any
               man
               lead
               into
               captivity
               ,
               hee
               shall
               goe
               into
               captivity
               :
               If
               any
               man
               kill
               with
               a
               sword
               ,
               he
               must
               be
               killed
               by
               a
               sword
               :
               here
               is
               the
               patience
               ,
               and
               the
               faith
               of
               the
               Saints
               .
            
             
               11
               And
               I
               beheld
               another
               beast
               cōming
               vp
               out
               of
               the
               earth
               ,
               which
               had
               two
               horns
               like
               the
               Lambe
               ,
               but
               he
               spake
               like
               the
               Dragon
               .
            
             
               12
               And
               hee
               did
               all
               that
               the
               first
               beast
               could
               do
               before
               him
               ,
               and
               he
               caused
               the
               earth
               and
               them
               which
               dwell
               therein
               ,
               to
               worship
               the
               first
               beast
               ,
               whose
               deadly
               wound
               was
               healed
               .
            
             
               13
               And
               he
               did
               great
               wōders
               ,
               so
               that
               he
               made
               fire
               to
               come
               downe
               from
               heaven
               on
               the
               earth
               ,
               in
               the
               sight
               of
               men
               .
            
             
               14
               And
               he
               deceived
               them
               that
               dwel
               on
               the
               earth
               by
               the
               signes
               which
               were
               permitted
               him
               to
               do
               in
               the
               sight
               of
               the
               beast
               ,
               saying
               to
               them
               that
               dwell
               on
               the
               earth
               ,
               that
               they
               should
               make
               the
               image
               of
               the
               beast
               ,
               which
               had
               the
               wound
               with
               a
               sword
               ,
               and
               did
               liue
               .
            
             
               15
               And
               it
               was
               permitted
               vnto
               him
               to
               giue
               a
               spirite
               vnto
               the
               image
               of
               the
               beast
               ,
               so
               that
               the
               image
               of
               the
               beast
               should
               speake
               ,
               and
               should
               cause
               that
               as
               many
               as
               would
               not
               worship
               the
               image
               of
               the
               beast
               ,
               should
               be
               killed
               .
            
             
               16
               And
               he
               made
               all
               both
               smal
               &
               great
               ,
               
               rich
               &
               poore
               ,
               free
               &
               bond
               ,
               to
               receiue
               a
               marke
               in
               their
               right
               hand
               ,
               or
               in
               their
               foreheads
               .
            
             
               17
               And
               that
               no
               man
               might
               buy
               or
               sell
               ,
               saue
               he
               that
               had
               the
               marke
               ,
               or
               the
               name
               of
               the
               beast
               ,
               or
               the
               number
               of
               his
               name
               .
            
             
               18
               Here
               is
               wisdome
               .
               Let
               him
               that
               hath
               wit
               ,
               count
               the
               number
               of
               the
               beast
               :
               for
               it
               is
               the
               number
               of
               a
               man
               ,
               and
               his
               number
               is
               six
               hundreth
               threescore
               and
               six
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             The
             exposition
             of
             this
             Prophecy
             .
          
           
             1
             Then
             I
             saw
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             to
             raise
             it selfe
             vp
             from
             amongst
             the
             people
             and
             nations
             ,
             hauing
             its
             seat
             in
             the
             towne
             which
             hath
             7.
             hills
             ,
             and
             which
             must
             be
             governed
             with
             7.
             kinds
             of
             principal
             governments
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             by
             kings
             ,
             by
             Consuls
             ,
             by
             military
             Tribunes
             ,
             by
             Decemvirs
             ,
             by
             Dictatours
             ,
             by
             Emperours
             ,
             and
             last
             of
             all
             by
             Popes
             .
             Which
             Empire
             is
             composed
             of
             10.
             principall
             parts
             ,
             which
             are
             so
             many
             kingdomes
             .
             And
             this
             cittie
             seated
             vpon
             7.
             hills
             bore
             a
             wicked
             ,
             and
             blasphemous
             name
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             Rome
             the
             Euerlasting
             .
          
           
             2
             And
             this
             Empire
             looked
             like
             a
             Leopard
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             speedy
             atchieuements
             of
             its
             conquests
             .
             And
             held
             fast
             the
             
             substance
             of
             the
             people
             as
             a
             beare
             ,
             which
             keeps
             that
             which
             he
             hath
             gotten
             vnder
             his
             pawes
             ,
             and
             devoured
             the
             nations
             as
             a
             Lion
             deuoureth
             his
             pray
             .
             And
             the
             divell
             (
             which
             is
             the
             *
             Prince
             of
             this
             world
             ,
             and
             which
             *
             takes
             vpon
             him
             to
             dispose
             of
             kingdomes
             at
             his
             pleasure
             ,
             gaue
             him
             his
             power
             and
             rule
             ,
             and
             great
             glory
             .
          
           
             3
             And
             it
             came
             passe
             that
             one
             of
             these
             governments
             ,
             to
             wit
             the
             6
             ,
             which
             is
             that
             of
             the
             Emperours
             ,
             was
             ouerthrowne
             ,
             then
             when
             (
             the
             Lombards
             hauing
             chased
             the
             Lieutenants
             of
             the
             Empire
             out
             of
             Italie
             )
             Rome
             did
             cease
             to
             be
             vnder
             subiection
             to
             the
             Emperours
             ;
             wherefore
             to
             say
             truth
             ,
             the
             Empyre
             did
             euen
             at
             that
             time
             leaue
             to
             bee
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             .
             But
             not
             long
             after
             this
             mortall
             blowe
             by
             which
             the
             Empyre
             of
             Rome
             was
             layed
             on
             the
             ground
             ,
             this
             monarchie
             began
             to
             grow
             vp
             afresh
             ,
             and
             to
             reviue
             againe
             by
             the
             Roman
             Hierarchie
             ,
             which
             did
             reerect
             a
             newe
             Monarchie
             at
             Rome
             ,
             and
             raise
             vp
             the
             Empire
             that
             was
             fallen
             :
             And
             all
             the
             people
             submitted
             themselues
             vnder
             the
             gouernement
             of
             this
             Romish
             church
             ,
          
           
             4.
             
             And
             did
             serue
             Idols
             ;
             which
             who
             so
             serue
             ,
             doe
             serue
             the
             divell
             ,
             the
             author
             and
             
             aduancer
             of
             this
             Papall
             Hierarchie
             ,
             &
             did
             attribute
             that
             vnto
             this
             Hierarchie
             which
             did
             appertaine
             vnto
             God
             ,
             saying
             who
             is
             there
             that
             is
             like
             vnto
             this
             Empire
             ,
             &
             who
             is
             able
             to
             resist
             it
             ?
          
           
             5
             And
             God
             hath
             suffered
             this
             Empire
             to
             take
             proud
             and
             blasphemous
             titles
             ,
             
             and
             it
             must
             endure
             1260.
             yeares
             .
          
           
             6
             And
             this
             papall
             Hierarchie
             doth
             set
             it selfe
             to
             belch
             forth
             horrible
             blasphemies
             against
             God
             ,
             and
             to
             wrong
             his
             name
             and
             his
             Church
             ,
             and
             his
             Saints
             .
          
           
             7
             Yea
             God
             hath
             suffered
             it
             to
             persecute
             the
             faithfull
             ,
             and
             to
             ouercome
             them
             ,
             &
             power
             was
             giuen
             vnto
             it
             ouer
             infinite
             people
             ,
             and
             tongues
             ,
             and
             nations
             .
          
           
             8
             In
             so
             much
             that
             all
             men
             shall
             fall
             downe
             to
             worship
             it
             ,
             whose
             names
             are
             not
             found
             in
             the
             booke
             of
             life
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             which
             died
             for
             vs
             ,
             written
             before
             the
             foūdations
             of
             the
             world
             were
             laid
             .
          
           
             9
             If
             any
             man
             haue
             an
             vnderstanding
             to
             conceaue
             this
             ,
             let
             him
             conceaue
             it
             .
          
           
             10
             For
             they
             which
             persecute
             ,
             shall
             be
             delt
             with
             after
             the
             same
             manner
             ▪
             whosoever
             leadeth
             the
             faithfull
             into
             captiuitie
             ,
             shall
             himselfe
             at
             length
             be
             made
             a
             captiue
             ;
             whosoeuer
             slayeth
             them
             shall
             bee
             slaine
             .
             
             Herein
             appeareth
             the
             faith
             and
             patience
             of
             the
             Saints
             .
          
           
             11
             I
             saw
             also
             a
             Monarch
             of
             another
             name
             and
             fashion
             then
             the
             former
             Roman
             Emperours
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             the
             Pope
             ,
             which
             wore
             a
             miter
             with
             two
             hornes
             vpon
             his
             head
             ,
             &
             which
             seemed
             in
             outward
             shew
             to
             profess
             Christ
             ,
             and
             his
             doctrine
             ,
             but
             whose
             doctrine
             indeed
             was
             diabolicall
             .
          
           
             12
             And
             he
             tooke
             all
             the
             power
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             vpon
             him
             at
             Rome
             being
             the
             seate
             of
             the
             Empire
             :
             and
             exhorted
             all
             people
             to
             submit
             themselues
             to
             this
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             which
             being
             destroyed
             by
             the
             Lombards
             in
             Italie
             ,
             was
             brought
             to
             life
             againe
             ,
             and
             reestablished
             by
             the
             Papacy
             .
          
           
             13
             And
             this
             Pope
             wrought
             miracles
             ;
             insomuch
             that
             he
             sent
             forth
             the
             thunderbolts
             and
             lightnings
             of
             his
             excommunications
             against
             Kings
             and
             their
             people
             :
             &
             caused
             
               S.
               Anthonies
            
             fire
             to
             come
             downe
             from
             heauen
             ,
             and
             made
             it
             to
             thunder
             and
             lighten
             by
             a
             miracle
             .
          
           
             14
             And
             the
             people
             were
             seduced
             by
             the
             miracles
             which
             God
             gaue
             him
             power
             to
             effect
             ,
             for
             to
             establish
             this
             Roman
             Papal
             〈◊〉
             ,
             commanding
             the
             people
             to
             make
             
             vp
             the
             image
             of
             the
             ancient
             Roman
             Empire
             againe
             ;
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             to
             serue
             the
             Papall
             Empire
             with
             the
             same
             manner
             of
             obedience
             as
             they
             did
             the
             old
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             which
             being
             demolished
             was
             built
             vp
             againe
             by
             the
             Papacy
             .
          
           
             15
             And
             God
             did
             suffer
             him
             to
             giue
             force
             and
             strength
             to
             this
             Papall
             Empire
             ,
             which
             did
             resemble
             the
             ancient
             Empire
             ,
             for
             the
             spirituall
             power
             that
             it
             did
             vsurpe
             gaue
             life
             &
             strength
             to
             its
             temporall
             power
             .
             Which
             Papall
             Empire
             being
             nothing
             but
             an
             imaginarie
             Empire
             ,
             and
             which
             consisteth
             only
             in
             opinion
             ,
             neuertheles
             speaks
             proudly
             ,
             and
             maketh
             such
             to
             be
             massacred
             ,
             and
             burnt
             ,
             as
             doe
             refuse
             to
             submit
             themselues
             to
             this
             imaginarie
             Empire
             .
          
           
             16
             And
             hee
             made
             all
             ,
             both
             small
             and
             great
             ,
             rich
             and
             poore
             ,
             bond
             and
             free
             ,
             to
             giue
             him
             their
             handes
             ,
             and
             take
             an
             oath
             to
             be
             faithfull
             vnto
             him
             ,
             and
             to
             bee
             markt
             by
             their
             actions
             .
             And
             their
             foreheads
             were
             marked
             with
             the
             marke
             of
             Confirmation
             ,
             and
             they
             made
             profession
             of
             his
             religion
             ,
             which
             profession
             of
             religion
             is
             often
             in
             the
             holy
             scripture
             ,
             called
             by
             the
             name
             of
             a
             marke
             in
             the
             forehead
             .
          
           
             17
             And
             he
             tooke
             order
             that
             no
             man
             
             might
             trafficke
             nor
             sell
             ,
             nor
             buy
             ,
             nor
             exchange
             benefices
             :
             nor
             bee
             suffered
             to
             purchase
             an
             Archbishops
             Pall
             ,
             nor
             haue
             a
             Licence
             ,
             nor
             any
             pa●t
             in
             the
             Church
             goods
             ,
             no
             nor
             yet
             buy
             an
             estate
             ,
             if
             hee
             had
             not
             the
             name
             ,
             and
             profession
             of
             a
             Papist
             :
             and
             were
             not
             of
             the
             number
             of
             those
             which
             are
             marked
             with
             the
             figures
             or
             numbers
             of
             the
             letters
             of
             his
             name
             .
          
           
             18
             In
             which
             nūber
             they
             which
             think
             themselues
             the
             wisest
             may
             find
             some
             thing
             worth
             their
             search
             .
             Whosoever
             hath
             vnderstanding
             let
             him
             diligently
             calculate
             the
             summe
             ,
             to
             which
             these
             greeke
             cyphers
             or
             numbers
             of
             the
             pope
             of
             Rome
             doe
             amount
             ,
             for
             it
             is
             an
             vsuall
             number
             amongst
             men
             ,
             and
             therefore
             easie
             to
             be
             vnderstood
             .
             And
             this
             number
             to
             which
             the
             greeke
             letters
             of
             his
             name
             do
             amoūt
             ,
             is
             six
             hundreth
             sixtie
             six
             .
             For
             this
             word
             (
             Latin
             )
             (
             which
             is
             the
             ordinary
             name
             ,
             by
             which
             the
             Greeke
             church
             doth
             cal
             those
             of
             the
             Romā
             church
             and
             their
             head
             )
             being
             written
             in
             Greeke
             and
             after
             calculated
             ,
             makes
             vp
             iust
             666.
             
             Which
             number
             also
             by
             an
             admirable
             occurrence
             ,
             doth
             admonish
             you
             that
             666.
             yeares
             after
             the
             revealing
             of
             this
             Prophecy
             ,
             this
             2.
             beast
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             the
             Pope
             shall
             begin
             
             to
             heale
             the
             wound
             of
             the
             ancient
             Empire
             ,
             and
             place
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             againe
             in
             its
             former
             seat
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             proofe
             of
             this
             exposition
             .
          
           
             BEfore
             wee
             goe
             about
             to
             proue
             this
             exposition
             ,
             wee
             are
             to
             note
             fiue
             things
             .
          
           
             1
             That
             all
             the
             ancient
             ,
             and
             our
             adversaries
             themselues
             doe
             vnderstand
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             by
             the
             first
             beast
             ,
             and
             Antichrist
             by
             the
             second
             .
          
           
             2
             That
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             in
             this
             prophecy
             doth
             not
             speake
             according
             to
             custome
             ,
             but
             according
             to
             the
             truth
             ;
             and
             therefore
             holds
             him
             to
             be
             the
             Roman
             Emperour
             which
             raigneth
             at
             Rome
             ,
             and
             not
             him
             which
             doth
             not
             rule
             there
             ,
             howbeit
             he
             beare
             the
             title
             thereof
             .
          
           
             3
             That
             in
             the
             yeare
             of
             our
             Lord
             752.
             the
             Lieutenancie
             of
             the
             Empire
             being
             destroyed
             by
             Aistulphus
             king
             of
             the
             Lombards
             ,
             the
             Emperour
             of
             Constantinople
             did
             vtterly
             loose
             all
             his
             dominion
             ouer
             Italy
             ,
             &
             the
             citie
             of
             Rome
             ,
             so
             that
             he
             could
             neuer
             after
             recouer
             it
             :
             whence
             it
             followes
             that
             the
             Emperour
             of
             Constantinople
             ,
             did
             at
             that
             time
             cease
             to
             be
             the
             Roman
             Emperour
             .
          
           
           
             4
             That
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             in
             this
             Prophecy
             makes
             the
             Hierarchicall
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             to
             be
             a
             continuation
             of
             the
             Romā
             Empire
             ,
             as
             which
             did
             succeed
             in
             the
             rome
             ,
             and
             vsurp
             the
             rights
             thereof
             ,
             and
             makes
             but
             one
             Empire
             of
             them
             both
             ,
             hauing
             chāged
             the
             head
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             the
             forme
             of
             governement
             .
          
           
             5
             That
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             in
             this
             prophecy
             puts
             a
             difference
             betweene
             the
             Roman
             Hierarchie
             and
             the
             Pope
             .
             Seeing
             that
             the
             Pope
             is
             but
             one
             person
             at
             once
             :
             but
             the
             Hierarchie
             is
             the
             whole
             body
             of
             the
             Prelates
             and
             Clergie
             ,
             that
             doe
             vphold
             his
             authoritie
             .
          
           
             This
             being
             premised
             for
             the
             better
             opening
             of
             the
             matter
             in
             hand
             ,
             we
             will
             now
             come
             to
             proue
             ,
             and
             demonstrate
             the
             seuerall
             parts
             thereof
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             first
             part
             of
             this
             Prophecie
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             THen
             I
             saw
             a
             beast
             rising
             out
             of
             the
             sea
             ,
             hauing
             seaven
             heades
             and
             tenne
             hornes
             ,
             and
             vpon
             his
             hornes
             were
             tenne
             Crownes
             ,
             and
             vpon
             his
             head
             the
             name
             of
             blasphemy
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             The
             Exposition
             of
             this
             Prophecy
             .
          
           
             1
             THen
             I
             saw
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             to
             raise
             it selfe
             vp
             from
             amongst
             the
             people
             and
             nations
             ,
             hauing
             its
             seate
             in
             the
             towne
             which
             hath
             7
             hills
             ,
             and
             which
             must
             be
             gouerned
             with
             7
             kindes
             of
             maine
             governements
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             by
             kings
             ,
             by
             Consuls
             ,
             by
             militarie
             Tribunes
             ,
             by
             Decemvirs
             ,
             by
             Dictatours
             ,
             by
             Emperours
             ,
             and
             last
             of
             all
             by
             Popes
             .
             Which
             Empire
             is
             composed
             of
             10.
             principall
             partes
             ,
             which
             are
             so
             many
             kingdomes
             .
             And
             this
             citie
             seated
             vpon
             7.
             hils
             bore
             a
             wicked
             and
             blasphemous
             name
             to
             wit
             ,
             Rome
             the
             Everlasting
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             proofe
             of
             this
             Exposition
             .
          
           
             By
             the
             sea
             ,
             the
             people
             and
             nations
             are
             vnderstood
             ;
             according
             to
             the
             exposition
             of
             the
             Angell
             in
             the
             17.
             chap.
             and
             15.
             verse
             of
             this
             booke
             .
             
               The
               waters
               which
               thou
               sawest
               ,
               are
               people
               ,
               and
               multitudes
               ,
               and
               nations
               .
            
             A
             fashion
             of
             speech
             vsed
             by
             Daniell
             ,
             in
             the
             7.
             chap.
             and
             3.
             verse
             ;
             Where
             in
             steed
             of
             saying
             that
             he
             saw
             4
             great
             Empires
             rise
             vp
             from
             amongst
             the
             nations
             ,
             he
             saith
             that
             4
             
               great
               
               beasts
               did
               rise
               vp
               out
               of
               the
               sea
               .
            
             So
             speakes
             Esay
             in
             his
             8.
             chap.
             and
             7.
             verse
             ;
             and
             David
             in
             the
             Psalmes
             ,
             46.
             verse
             4.
             and
             65.
             verse
             .
             8.
             
          
           
             That
             by
             the
             7.
             heads
             ,
             7.
             hils
             are
             vnderstood
             ,
             vpon
             which
             the
             citty
             of
             Rome
             was
             situate
             ,
             the
             Angell
             witnesseth
             in
             the
             17.
             chap.
             of
             this
             booke
             ,
             and
             9.
             verse
             .
             
               The
               seaven
               heads
               are
               seavē
               mountaines
               whereon
               the
               woman
               sitteth
               .
            
             Afterward
             he
             addeth
             in
             the
             18.
             verse
             ,
             
               That
               woman
               which
               thou
               sawest
               is
               the
               great
               citty
               which
               raigneth
               over
               the
               kings
               of
               the
               earth
               .
            
             This
             cannot
             be
             vnderstood
             of
             any
             other
             citty
             but
             of
             Rome
             ,
             which
             in
             the
             time
             of
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             raigned
             over
             realmes
             ,
             and
             was
             the
             seate
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             and
             there
             was
             no
             other
             citty
             at
             that
             time
             which
             had
             seaven
             hils
             ,
             wherfore
             also
             it
             is
             called
             in
             greek
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             Septicollis
             .
             And
             there
             was
             a
             solemne
             feast
             ,
             called
             Septimontium
             ,
             in
             honor
             of
             the
             towne
             ,
             as
             *
             Varro
             witnesseth
             in
             his
             5.
             booke
             of
             the
             Latin
             tongue
             .
             And
             *
             Martial
             saith
             that
             hee
             coulde
             see
             the
             7.
             hils
             of
             Rome
             from
             his
             house
             :
             and
             Propertius
             in
             the
             10.
             elegie
             of
             his
             3.
             booke
             ,
          
           
             
               Septe
               vrbs
               alta
               iugis
               toti
               quae
               prasidetorbi
               .
            
             Also
             our
             aduersaries
             themselues
             doe
             not
             deny
             but
             that
             this
             citty
             whereof
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             speaketh
             is
             Rome
             :
             but
             they
             would
             haue
             it
             
             to
             be
             heathnish
             Rome
             .
             We
             will
             shew
             in
             the
             17.
             chapt
             .
             that
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             did
             speake
             of
             Rome
             also
             after
             Paganisme
             was
             abolished
             :
             but
             in
             this
             chapt
             .
             it
             is
             sufficient
             for
             vs
             that
             by
             the
             7.
             heads
             the
             7.
             hils
             of
             Rome
             are
             vnderstood
             ,
             taken
             in
             that
             sense
             as
             our
             adversaries
             would
             haue
             it
             .
          
           
             By
             these
             7.
             hils
             we
             do
             vnderstand
             7.
             divers
             successiue
             governments
             ,
             which
             haue
             borne
             soveraigne
             rule
             ouer
             the
             citty
             of
             Rome
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             the
             Kings
             ,
             whō
             the
             Consuls
             succeeded
             ,
             whose
             forme
             of
             governement
             was
             interrupted
             3
             several
             times
             by
             the
             Militarie
             Tribunes
             which
             were
             endued
             with
             consular
             authority
             .
             Afterward
             by
             the
             Decemvirs
             ;
             and
             by
             the
             Dictatous
             ,
             at
             diuerse
             times
             ,
             but
             most
             especially
             vnder
             the
             Dictatorship
             of
             Sylla
             ,
             and
             
               Iulius
               Caesar.
            
             After
             whom
             
               Octavius
               Augustus
            
             established
             the
             Monarchicall
             state
             of
             Emperours
             ,
             whose
             gouernement
             ouer
             Rome
             and
             Italie
             being
             interrupted
             by
             the
             Herules
             and
             Goths
             ,
             neverthelesse
             they
             made
             a
             shift
             a
             little
             after
             to
             recouer
             it
             againe
             :
             vntil
             the
             Lombards
             at
             last
             hauing
             destroyed
             the
             Empire
             in
             Italie
             ,
             opened
             a
             way
             vnto
             the
             Pope
             to
             make
             himselfe
             Lord
             of
             Rome
             ,
             &
             to
             build
             vp
             the
             Romane
             Monarchie
             to
             that
             heighth
             as
             we
             see
             
             it
             is
             come
             to
             at
             this
             day
             .
             And
             this
             exposition
             is
             not
             of
             our
             owne
             inuenting
             ,
             but
             groūded
             vpon
             the
             17.
             of
             the
             Revelation
             the
             10.
             verse
             ,
             where
             he
             saith
             that
             the
             7.
             
               heads
               are
            
             7.
             kings
             (
             so
             doth-he
             call
             all
             soueraigne
             power
             )
             
               fiue
               of
               which
               were
               fallen
               ,
               and
               the
            
             6.
             
               was
               ,
               &
               the
            
             7.
             
               was
               not
               yet
               come
            
             .
             There
             is
             nothing
             so
             cleere
             and
             evident
             .
             For
             at
             the
             time
             when
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             had
             this
             Revelation
             the
             5.
             first
             of
             these
             7.
             soueraigne
             gouernements
             were
             abolished
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             the
             kings
             ,
             the
             Consuls
             ,
             the
             Militarie
             Tribunes
             ,
             the
             Decemvirs
             ,
             and
             the
             Dictatours
             ,
             the
             sixth
             did
             flourish
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             the
             Emperours
             ,
             and
             the
             7.
             to
             wit
             ,
             the
             Popes
             were
             not
             as
             yet
             come
             .
             I
             am
             not
             ignoraunt
             that
             euen
             then
             there
             were
             Consuls
             still
             remaining
             ,
             and
             Militarie
             Tribunes
             ,
             but
             they
             had
             no
             soueraignty
             .
             The
             Consulship
             was
             a
             place
             more
             of
             dignity
             ,
             then
             any
             authority
             ,
             and
             serued
             for
             nothing
             else
             but
             to
             distinguish
             the
             yeares
             in
             their
             Fasti.
             And
             the
             Military
             Tribunes
             were
             but
             the
             Captaines
             of
             one
             Legion
             ,
             which
             are
             at
             this
             day
             called
             the
             Colonels
             of
             a
             band
             .
             It
             is
             not
             therefore
             an
             interpretation
             of
             our
             owne
             inuention
             ,
             when
             we
             say
             that
             these
             7
             heads
             doe
             signifie
             7.
             seueral
             formes
             of
             soueraigne
             gouernment
             ruling
             Rome
             one
             after
             an
             other
             ,
             and
             
             not
             all
             at
             the
             same
             time
             :
             seeing
             that
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             saith
             that
             5.
             of
             these
             7.
             heads
             were
             fallen
             ,
             that
             one
             was
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             7.
             was
             not
             as
             yet
             come
             .
             This
             doubtlesse
             is
             an
             admirable
             exposition
             ,
             and
             was
             suggested
             to
             his
             Maiesty
             of
             England
             by
             the
             spirit
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             doth
             adde
             further
             ,
             that
             this
             beast
             which
             is
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             had
             10.
             diademes
             ,
             or
             crownes
             ;
             the
             meaning
             is
             plaine
             :
             we
             vse
             to
             say
             that
             our
             King
             ,
             besides
             the
             crowne
             of
             Fraunce
             hath
             also
             the
             crowne
             of
             Navarre
             :
             and
             that
             the
             kings
             of
             England
             &
             Spain
             ,
             are
             kings
             of
             more
             crownes
             thē
             one
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             of
             more
             Realmes
             or
             Provinces
             ;
             The
             like
             is
             here
             to
             be
             vnderstood
             .
             The
             10.
             crownes
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             are
             10.
             great
             Provinces
             &
             principall
             parts
             ,
             whereof
             the
             Empire
             did
             as
             then
             consist
             ;
             
               Italie
               ,
               Spaine
            
             ,
             the
             
               Gaules
               ,
               Germanie
               ,
               Hungary
            
             and
             
               Bulgarie
               ,
               Greece
               ,
               Natolia
            
             or
             
               Asia
               minor
               ,
               Syria
            
             and
             
               Assyria
               ,
               Egypt
            
             ,
             and
             Affricke
             .
             The
             Iles
             are
             dependances
             of
             the
             next
             continēt
             .
             And
             vnder
             euery
             one
             of
             these
             great
             partes
             are
             comprehended
             the
             next
             small
             provinces
             which
             were
             kept
             in
             subiection
             by
             the
             same
             armies
             :
             as
             Dacia
             &
             Moldavia
             by
             the
             Legions
             appointed
             for
             Hungarie
             .
             If
             there
             were
             any
             other
             Provinces
             ,
             as
             Armenia
             ,
             &
             
             Arabia
             ,
             they
             were
             neuer
             held
             but
             weakly
             ,
             and
             in
             part
             ,
             and
             were
             often
             lost
             ,
             and
             they
             are
             reckoned
             for
             dependences
             of
             
               Asia
               minor
            
             ,
             and
             of
             Syria
             .
          
           
             And
             although
             the
             Romane
             Emperour
             be
             here
             compared
             to
             a
             beast
             ,
             yet
             this
             doth
             not
             deny
             but
             that
             there
             were
             some
             good
             Roman
             Emperours
             :
             and
             we
             may
             not
             think
             it
             strange
             that
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             doth
             represent
             this
             Empire
             vnto
             vs
             by
             a
             Beast
             ,
             which
             was
             not
             only
             gouerned
             by
             
               Neroes
               ,
               Domitians
            
             ,
             and
             Heliogabales
             :
             but
             by
             Theodosies
             also
             ,
             &
             Valentinians
             ,
             Christian
             and
             religious
             Princes
             .
             For
             Empires
             are
             called
             beasts
             in
             the
             Prophecy
             of
             Daniel
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Apocalyps
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             manner
             by
             which
             they
             did
             first
             rise
             and
             increase
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             by
             violence
             and
             crueltie
             .
             For
             no
             man
             can
             deny
             that
             the
             Romans
             at
             first
             were
             nothing
             else
             but
             theeues
             ,
             and
             common
             robbers
             ,
             which
             heretofore
             hauing
             nothing
             but
             onely
             one
             walled
             towne
             ,
             had
             no
             right
             ouer
             Italy
             lesse
             yet
             ouer
             Greece
             ,
             ouer
             the
             Gaules
             ,
             ouer
             
               Spaine
               ,
               Africke
            
             ,
             or
             Asia
             ;
             but
             it
             is
             possible
             enough
             to
             gouerne
             that
             with
             order
             and
             equitie
             ,
             which
             was
             first
             laid
             hold
             on
             by
             iniustice
             .
          
           
             It
             remains
             that
             we
             see
             what
             these
             names
             
             of
             blasphemy
             are
             ,
             which
             this
             citie
             and
             Empire
             of
             Rome
             did
             beare
             .
             
               S.
               Hierome
            
             in
             the
             11.
             question
             to
             Algasia
             ,
             expounds
             this
             place
             thus
             .
             
               There
               is
               (
               saith
               S.
               Iohn
               in
               the
               Revelation
               ,
               )
               a
               name
               of
               blasphemy
               written
               in
               the
               forehead
               of
               the
               queane
               clad
               in
               skarlet
               ,
               &
               this
               name
               is
               ,
               Rome
               The
               Everlasting
               .
            
             The
             same
             citie
             is
             likewise
             called
             Dea
             ,
             Goddess
             ,
             And
             so
             doth
             
               Iulius
               Frontinus
            
             cal
             her
             in
             his
             booke
             of
             water
             workes
             .
             The
             queene
             and
             Empresse
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             Goddesse
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             nations
             .
             And
             Martial
             speaketh
             after
             the
             same
             manner
             ,
             in
             the
             8.
             
             Epigram
             of
             his
             12
             booke
             .
             
               
                 Terrarum
                 Dea
                 gentiumque
                 Roma
              
               
                 Cui
                 par
                 est
                 nihil
                 &
                 nihil
                 secundum
                 .
              
               
                 Queene
                 of
                 the
                 earth
                 ,
                 Goddesse
                 of
                 this
                 worlds
                 round
                 ,
              
               
                 Whose
                 like
                 or
                 second
                 may
                 no
                 where
                 be
                 found
                 .
              
            
             The
             Emperours
             also
             were
             not
             without
             *
             blasphemous
             titles
             .
             For
             they
             were
             called
             Gods
             ,
             not
             only
             after
             their
             death
             ,
             but
             whilst
             they
             were
             liuing
             too
             :
             There
             were
             altars
             built
             in
             honor
             of
             them
             ,
             They
             had
             sacrifice
             offered
             vnto
             them
             ;
             The
             common
             fashion
             of
             swearing
             was
             to
             sweare
             by
             the
             Genius
             of
             the
             Emperour
             ,
             their
             statues
             were
             places
             of
             refuge
             for
             offendours
             ,
             as
             for
             example
             ,
             
             to
             the
             servants
             of
             
               Iulius
               Sabinus
            
             ,
             of
             whom
             for
             this
             fact
             there
             is
             mention
             made
             in
             the
             8.
             chapt
             .
             of
             the
             1.
             booke
             of
             Iustinians
             Institutioos
             .
             There
             offendours
             might
             rest
             more
             secure
             then
             in
             a
             Temple
             ,
             as
             Philostratus
             saith
             in
             the
             life
             of
             Apollonius
             ;
             and
             Tertullian
             in
             his
             Apologeticke
             oratiō
             against
             the
             heathen
             affirmeth
             that
             it
             was
             lesse
             danger
             ,
             for
             a
             man
             to
             sweare
             falsely
             by
             Iupiter
             ,
             then
             to
             periute
             himselfe
             by
             the
             name
             of
             the
             Prince
             .
             And
             Plinie
             the
             younger
             in
             the
             97.
             
             Epistle
             of
             his
             10.
             booke
             saith
             ,
             that
             he
             made
             al
             such
             ,
             as
             renounced
             christianity
             ,
             to
             kneele
             downe
             before
             the
             image
             of
             the
             Empeorur
             ,
             and
             to
             offer
             incense
             and
             wine
             vnto
             him
             for
             sacrifice
             .
             Which
             impietie
             beeing
             abolished
             by
             the
             Christian
             Emperours
             ,
             yet
             neuerthelesse
             (
             that
             this
             prophecie
             might
             be
             fulfilled
             ,
             there
             were
             still
             some
             names
             of
             blasphemie
             abiding
             ,
             for
             retaining
             of
             which
             they
             cannot
             be
             excused
             .
             In
             the
             yeare
             of
             our
             Lord
             314.
             
             
               Petronius
               Arrianus
            
             ,
             and
             Iulian
             being
             commaunded
             to
             look
             to
             the
             safety
             of
             many
             bishops
             that
             were
             returning
             into
             Affricke
             ,
             &
             to
             defraie
             the
             charges
             of
             their
             iourney
             ,
             writ
             thus
             to
             
               Domitius
               Celsus
            
             the
             Emperours
             Lieutenant
             in
             
               Affricke
               ,
               Many
               bishops
               of
               Affricke
               
               are
               cōe
               to
               the
               country
               of
               the
               Gauls
               by
               the
               heavenly
               commandement
               of
               our
               Lord
               Constantine
               .
            
             And
             a
             little
             after
             ;
             
               Following
               the
               commandement
               of
               the
               Eternitie
               of
               that
               thrice
               gratious
               Prince
               ,
               as
               Baronius
            
             doth
             relate
             it
             vpon
             the
             314.
             yeare
             of
             our
             Lord.
             The
             selfe
             same
             title
             is
             giuen
             by
             Symmachus
             to
             
               Valentinian
               ,
               Theodosius
            
             ,
             &
             Arcadius
             in
             the
             54
             Epistle
             of
             the
             tenth
             booke
             .
             
               Multa
               victoriae
               debet
               Aeternitas
               vestra
               ,
               &
               adhuc
               plura
               debebit
               .
            
             In
             the
             second
             Apologie
             of
             Athanasius
             ,
             there
             is
             an
             Epistle
             of
             Colluthas
             ,
             wherein
             he
             saith
             ,
             
               that
               the
               Godhead
               of
               Augustus
               had
               taken
               order
               for
               a
               Church
               to
               bee
               built
               in
               the
               village
               of
               Secontaururus
               with
               all
               speed
               possible
               ,
               and
               commands
               them
               to
               fall
               about
               it
               as
               soone
               as
               ever
               they
               should
               receaue
               the
               Divine
               letters
               patent
               .
               Ausonius
            
             speakes
             thus
             to
             the
             Emperour
             Theodosius
             in
             the
             beginning
             of
             his
             Poems
             .
             
               
                 Nil
                 dubites
                 authore
                 bono
                 ,
                 mortalia
                 quaerunt
              
               
                 Consilium
                 ,
                 certus
                 iussa
                 capesse
                 Dei.
                 
              
            
             and
             a
             little
             after
             .
             
               Non
               tutum
               renuisse
               Deo.
            
             According
             to
             this
             manner
             of
             speaking
             did
             the
             Emperours
             vse
             to
             call
             their
             Institutions
             ,
             
               Divine
               Institutions
            
             ,
             and
             their
             Edicts
             ,
             
               the
               Edicts
               of
               God.
            
             In
             the
             1.
             booke
             of
             Iustitinians
             Code
             ,
             and
             2.
             title
             ,
             the
             Constitutions
             
             of
             the
             Emperours
             are
             called
             
               heavenly
               Oracles
            
             ,
             and
             
               divine
               Sanctions
            
             ;
             that
             is
             to
             say
             the
             word
             of
             God.
             
          
        
         
           
             The
             second
             part
             of
             this
             Prophecy
             .
          
           
             2
             ANd
             the
             beast
             which
             I
             saw
             was
             like
             a
             Leopard
             ,
             and
             his
             feet
             like
             a
             beares
             ;
             &
             his
             mouth
             as
             the
             mouth
             of
             a
             Lyon
             ;
             and
             the
             Dragon
             gaue
             him
             his
             power
             ,
             and
             his
             throne
             ,
             &
             great
             authoritie
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Explication
             .
          
           
             2
             AND
             this
             Empire
             looked
             like
             a
             Leopard
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             speedy
             atchieuements
             of
             its
             Conquests
             .
             And
             held
             fast
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             people
             as
             a
             Bear
             ,
             which
             keeps
             that
             which
             he
             hath
             gotten
             vnder
             his
             pawes
             ,
             and
             devoured
             the
             nations
             as
             a
             Lyon
             devoureth
             his
             pray
             .
             And
             the
             divell
             (
             which
             is
             the
             
             Prince
             of
             this
             world
             )
             and
             which
             
             takes
             vpon
             him
             to
             dispose
             of
             kingdomes
             at
             his
             pleasure
             ,
             gaue
             him
             his
             power
             ,
             and
             rule
             ,
             and
             great
             〈◊〉
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             The
             proofe
             of
             this
             Exposition
             .
          
           
             THis
             interpretation
             needeth
             not
             much
             proofe
             ;
             euery
             man
             knowes
             the
             speedy
             atchieuements
             of
             the
             Romans
             conquests
             ,
             especially
             after
             the
             2
             Punick
             war.
             Then
             (
             as
             Florus
             saith
             )
             
               the
               conquest
               of
               Macedon
               followed
               that
               of
               Africke
               ,
               then
               ,
               that
               of
               Greece
               ,
               &
               of
               Syria
               ,
               &
               of
               all
               the
               rest
               in
               a
               huddle
               ,
               carried
               away
               by
               the
               vnresistable
               tide
               ,
               &
               rushing
               torrent
               of
               Fortune
               .
            
             It
             is
             said
             of
             Pompey
             that
             he
             ouerran
             the
             world
             by
             his
             conquests
             in
             lesse
             time
             ,
             then
             one
             could
             haue
             run
             it
             ouer
             a
             foot
             .
             And
             Caesar
             in
             the
             war
             against
             Pharnaces
             doth
             boast
             ,
             that
             hee
             no
             sooner
             came
             and
             saw
             him
             ,
             but
             he
             ouer
             came
             him
             .
             Whosoeuer
             shall
             but
             consider
             the
             exploits
             of
             this
             Empire
             ,
             will
             thinke
             that
             more
             then
             twice
             the
             time
             was
             imployed
             about
             the
             performance
             of
             them
             .
          
           
             As
             for
             the
             shedding
             of
             bloud
             ,
             Plutarch
             in
             the
             life
             of
             Caesar
             reporteth
             ,
             ●hat
             in
             the
             conquest
             but
             of
             the
             Gauls
             only
             which
             was
             10
             years
             a
             working
             ,
             there
             were
             a
             milliō
             of
             men
             slaine
             .
             And
             Iosephus
             telleth
             vs
             that
             in
             the
             siege
             of
             Ierusalem
             vndertaken
             by
             Titus
             and
             Vespasian
             there
             died
             11000000
             men
             :
             
             and
             yet
             neuerthelesse
             these
             Princes
             haue
             beene
             noted
             for
             examples
             of
             clemency
             .
             What
             might
             Marius
             and
             Sylla
             those
             bloudy
             minded
             men
             doe
             ?
             and
             how
             much
             blood
             may
             we
             thinke
             ,
             was
             shed
             in
             all
             the
             rest
             of
             
               Europe
               ,
               Asia
            
             ,
             and
             Africa
             ?
             The
             Amphitheater
             where
             the
             people
             were
             entertained
             to
             passe
             away
             the
             time
             ,
             where
             murder
             was
             a
             common
             sport
             ,
             where
             men
             went
             to
             see
             Lions
             and
             Tigers
             teare
             men
             asunder
             ,
             so
             to
             solace
             themselues
             ,
             what
             else
             was
             this
             but
             a
             discipline
             of
             crueltie
             ,
             and
             a
             means
             to
             accustome
             the
             people
             to
             murder
             ,
             &
             to
             drink
             in
             bloud
             at
             their
             eies
             by
             way
             of
             recreation
             ?
          
           
             As
             for
             the
             wealth
             of
             this
             Empire
             ,
             it
             is
             an
             incredible
             thing
             :
             the
             riches
             of
             our
             Kings
             are
             but
             pouertie
             being
             compared
             to
             these
             .
             Some
             of
             the
             citizens
             that
             were
             enfranchised
             by
             the
             Emperors
             ,
             haue
             not
             yeelded
             to
             kings
             in
             this
             respect
             ,
             a
             great
             many
             examples
             whereof
             are
             found
             noted
             by
             Lipsius
             in
             his
             last
             chap.
             and
             2.
             booke
             of
             the
             greatnesse
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             .
             Lucullus
             and
             Apicius
             did
             spend
             more
             at
             one
             supper
             ,
             then
             a
             Prince
             does
             in
             a
             month
             .
             Caligula
             in
             one
             yeare
             did
             consume
             all
             that
             which
             the
             couetousnesse
             of
             Tiberius
             had
             scraped
             together
             ,
             
             which
             did
             amount
             to
             six
             hundreth
             and
             fiftie
             millions
             ,
             and
             4
             hundreth
             fiftie
             foure
             thousand
             crownes
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             summed
             vp
             by
             
               Hadrianus
               Iunius
            
             .
          
           
             These
             great
             riches
             came
             vpon
             them
             by
             the
             robbing
             and
             pilling
             of
             the
             Provinces
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             whereby
             they
             did
             sucke
             away
             all
             their
             substance
             from
             the
             Provincials
             ,
             and
             spoiled
             thē
             of
             their
             goods
             as
             much
             in
             time
             of
             peace
             ,
             as
             of
             warre
             .
             
               
                 —
                 Referebant
                 navibus
                 altis
              
               
                 Occulta
                 spolia
                 ,
                 &
                 plures
                 ex
                 pace
                 triumphos
                 .
              
            
             Read
             ,
             to
             be
             informed
             in
             this
             ,
             the
             life
             of
             Antonie
             in
             Plutarch
             .
             He
             levied
             two
             hundreth
             thousand
             talents
             out
             of
             Asia
             yearely
             ,
             every
             talent
             being
             worth
             6
             hundreth
             crowns
             .
             But
             this
             being
             not
             enough
             to
             content
             his
             greedy
             mind
             ,
             he
             doubled
             the
             sum
             .
             Wherevpon
             the
             people
             seeing
             themselues
             not
             able
             to
             hold
             out
             ,
             sent
             Deputies
             vnto
             him
             ,
             one
             amongst
             which
             told
             him
             .
             
               If
               thou
               wilt
               raise
               a
               double
               yearely
               Tax
               vpon
               vs
               ,
               giue
               vs
               also
               double
               harvests
               ,
               two
               summers
               &
               two
               autumes
               in
               one
               yeare
               .
            
             Hence
             arose
             the
             great
             hatred
             against
             Publicans
             ,
             which
             is
             often
             mentioned
             in
             the
             scripture
             ,
             and
             witnessed
             by
             Cicero
             in
             the
             first
             Epistle
             to
             his
             brother
             Quintus
             .
          
           
           
             Now
             albeit
             some
             of
             the
             Romans
             did
             excell
             in
             morall
             vertues
             ,
             and
             that
             we
             take
             many
             examples
             of
             iustice
             ,
             continency
             ,
             clemency
             ,
             and
             sobrietie
             from
             them
             ,
             especially
             before
             the
             time
             that
             Attalus
             bequeathed
             his
             mooueables
             and
             treasures
             to
             the
             people
             of
             Rome
             ,
             yet
             so
             it
             is
             that
             all
             these
             did
             nothing
             but
             assist
             iniustice
             ,
             and
             their
             vpright
             dealing
             was
             like
             that
             of
             theeues
             ,
             which
             when
             they
             haue
             robbed
             a
             man
             will
             goe
             aad
             divide
             the
             pray
             equally
             .
             For
             what
             were
             the
             Romans
             ,
             but
             common
             robbers
             ,
             and
             forragers
             of
             all
             habitable
             countries
             ?
             If
             they
             did
             sometimes
             mannage
             that
             with
             order
             ,
             or
             were
             liberall
             of
             that
             which
             they
             did
             take
             from
             others
             wrongfully
             ,
             or
             if
             out
             of
             a
             theeuish
             mercy
             ,
             they
             did
             suffer
             them
             to
             liue
             whom
             they
             might
             haue
             killed
             ,
             I
             say
             that
             these
             vertues
             are
             no
             vertues
             ;
             since
             they
             serue
             to
             vphold
             vices
             ,
             and
             are
             imploied
             either
             to
             color
             iniustice
             ,
             or
             to
             establish
             tyranny
             .
          
           
             Finally
             ,
             no
             man
             may
             thinke
             it
             strange
             that
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             saith
             ,
             that
             the
             Diuell
             gaue
             this
             power
             to
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             .
             For
             howsoeuer
             Monarchies
             be
             of
             God
             ,
             &
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             was
             established
             by
             his
             providence
             ,
             for
             secret
             reasons
             reserued
             to
             
             himselfe
             ,
             yet
             it
             was
             not
             he
             that
             did
             vrge
             on
             the
             Roman
             to
             invade
             others
             countries
             ,
             but
             Satan
             ,
             to
             whome
             also
             they
             haue
             attributed
             all
             the
             glory
             of
             their
             victories
             ,
             as
             Symmachus
             saith
             in
             his
             54.
             
             Epist.
             where
             he
             brings
             in
             the
             citie
             of
             Rome
             speaking
             after
             this
             manner
             in
             favour
             of
             the
             heathenish
             superstition
             .
             
               This
               religious
               service
               hath
               brought
               the
               world
               vnder
               my
               lawes
               :
               these
               sacrifices
               haue
               driven
               Hannibal
               from
               my
               walles
               ,
               and
               forced
               the
               Gaules
               to
               remoue
               their
               siege
               from
               the
               Capitoll
               .
            
             Whensoeuer
             a
             Captaine
             had
             slaine
             another
             Captaine
             of
             the
             aduerse
             armie
             with
             his
             owne
             hands
             ,
             hee
             hung
             vp
             his
             armor
             to
             
               Iupiter
               Feretius
            
             .
             Because
             the
             army
             of
             the
             Romans
             as
             they
             were
             flying
             away
             did
             take
             courage
             againe
             &
             turne
             back
             vpon
             their
             enimies
             ,
             therefore
             did
             Romulus
             erect
             a
             temple
             to
             
               Iupiter
               Stator
            
             .
             
             Cicero
             reporteth
             that
             the
             Captaines
             of
             an
             hoast
             after
             a
             conquest
             obtained
             did
             vse
             to
             goe
             to
             Pessinunte
             ,
             there
             to
             performe
             their
             vowes
             to
             the
             mother
             of
             the
             Gods.
             And
             we
             neuer
             read
             that
             they
             vndertooke
             any
             businesse
             of
             moment
             without
             consulting
             their
             Augurs
             and
             Soothsayers
             ,
             and
             without
             obseruing
             the
             flying
             ,
             the
             eating
             ,
             the
             singing
             ,
             the
             going
             of
             birds
             .
             To
             conclude
             ,
             Plutarch
             in
             a
             
             set
             tract
             of
             his
             brings
             in
             the
             Fortune
             of
             the
             Romans
             contesting
             with
             their
             vertue
             ,
             wherein
             they
             dispute
             whether
             of
             the
             two
             did
             conferre
             more
             to
             the
             founding
             of
             this
             Empire
             ,
             so
             that
             on
             whether
             of
             thē
             it
             light
             ,
             God
             shall
             bee
             sure
             to
             goe
             without
             his
             honour
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             third
             part
             of
             this
             prophecie
             .
          
           
             3
             And
             I
             saw
             one
             of
             his
             heads
             as
             it
             were
             wounded
             to
             death
             ,
             but
             his
             deadly
             wound
             was
             healed
             ,
             &
             all
             the
             world
             wondered
             and
             followed
             the
             beast
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Explication
             .
          
           
             3
             And
             it
             came
             to
             passe
             that
             one
             of
             these
             governments
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             the
             sixth
             ,
             which
             is
             that
             of
             the
             Emperours
             ,
             was
             overthrowne
             ,
             then
             ,
             whē
             the
             Lombards
             having
             chased
             the
             Lieuetenants
             of
             the
             Empire
             out
             of
             Italie
             ,
             Rome
             did
             cease
             to
             be
             vnder
             subiectiō
             to
             the
             Emperours
             .
             Wherefore
             (
             to
             say
             truth
             )
             the
             Empire
             did
             evē
             at
             that
             time
             leaue
             to
             be
             the
             Romane
             Empire
             :
             But
             not
             long
             after
             that
             mortal
             blow
             by
             which
             the
             Empire
             of
             Rome
             was
             laid
             on
             the
             grounde
             ,
             this
             Monarchie
             began
             to
             grow
             vp
             a
             fresh
             ,
             &
             
             to
             reviue
             againe
             by
             the
             Romane
             Hierarchie
             ,
             which
             did
             reerect
             a
             new
             monarchie
             at
             Rome
             ,
             and
             raise
             vp
             the
             Empire
             that
             was
             fallen
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             people
             submitted
             themselues
             vnder
             the
             government
             of
             this
             Romish
             Church
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Proofe
             .
          
           
             THere
             is
             nothing
             more
             agreeable
             to
             the
             event
             then
             this
             interpretation
             .
             In
             the
             year
             752.
             
             Aistulphus
             king
             of
             the
             Lombards
             destroyed
             the
             Exarchat
             of
             Ravenna
             ,
             and
             put
             downe
             the
             Exarchs
             ,
             which
             200.
             whole
             yeares
             after
             Narses
             had
             beene
             the
             Emperours
             Lieutenants
             in
             Italie
             .
             This
             is
             the
             deadly
             wound
             which
             the
             beasts
             did
             receaue
             .
             Now
             because
             Rome
             was
             a
             part
             of
             the
             Exarchat
             ,
             Aistulphus
             did
             pretend
             that
             being
             Lord
             of
             the
             Exarchat
             ,
             he
             was
             also
             to
             be
             Lord
             over
             Rome
             ,
             and
             began
             to
             wast
             the
             territories
             of
             the
             Duchy
             of
             
               Rome
               .
               Stephen
            
             the
             second
             was
             then
             Pope
             ,
             who
             in
             this
             extremitie
             sought
             to
             his
             soveraigne
             Lord
             the
             Emperour
             for
             succour
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             to
             the
             Roman
             Emperour
             ,
             but
             being
             not
             able
             to
             get
             any
             aide
             from
             him
             ,
             because
             he
             was
             weake
             ,
             and
             elsewhere
             occupied
             ,
             the
             foresaide
             Pope
             had
             recourse
             to
             Pepin
             king
             of
             
             Fraunce
             ,
             which
             not
             long
             before
             had
             got
             to
             bee
             king
             by
             deposing
             Childericke
             his
             Master
             and
             lawfull
             Soveraihne
             .
             At
             his
             request
             Pepin
             came
             downe
             into
             Italie
             in
             the
             yeare
             of
             our
             Lord
             .754
             .
             And
             having
             compelled
             Aistulphus
             to
             receiue
             conditions
             of
             peace
             ,
             returned
             into
             Fraunce
             .
             But
             in
             the
             yeare
             following
             Aistulphus
             broke
             the
             agreement
             ,
             &
             did
             forrage
             the
             Roman
             territory
             againe
             :
             This
             drew
             Pepin
             the
             second
             time
             into
             Italie
             ,
             where
             having
             overcome
             Aistulphus
             he
             took
             the
             Exarchat
             frō
             him
             ,
             and
             bestowed
             it
             on
             the
             bishop
             of
             Rome
             ,
             &
             made
             him
             Lord
             over
             Rome
             ,
             and
             a
             great
             part
             of
             Italie
             ,
             666.
             yeares
             after
             the
             time
             that
             the
             Apocalyps
             was
             revealed
             to
             
               Saint
               Iohn
            
             .
             So
             the
             Popes
             became
             Princes
             by
             the
             inconsiderat
             liberality
             of
             our
             kings
             ,
             &
             began
             even
             then
             ,
             to
             shew
             their
             good
             wils
             to
             cut
             of
             Monarchs
             ,
             to
             imitate
             their
             actions
             ,
             and
             to
             encroach
             vpon
             the
             rightes
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             .
             Hereby
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             became
             to
             bee
             Queene
             over
             other
             Churches
             ,
             and
             in
             her
             Prelats
             and
             Hierarchicall
             orders
             did
             reerect
             the
             Empire
             that
             was
             fallen
             :
             tyrannising
             over
             the
             goods
             &
             consciences
             of
             men
             ,
             vsing
             her
             temporall
             riches
             as
             a
             meanes
             to
             augment
             her
             spirituall
             
             power
             ,
             and
             to
             establish
             a
             Monarchie
             at
             Rome
             over
             the
             Church
             ,
             bearing
             rule
             over
             the
             Temporaltie
             ,
             and
             Spiritualty
             in
             Christian
             kingdomes
             ;
             For
             how
             be
             it
             the
             successours
             of
             Charlemaine
             were
             and
             are
             as
             yet
             stiled
             the
             kings
             of
             the
             Romans
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Othons
             had
             a
             Regent
             at
             Rome
             ,
             &
             handled
             the
             Popes
             as
             their
             subiectes
             ,
             yet
             this
             did
             not
             last
             long
             :
             and
             the
             Pope
             foūd
             a
             meanes
             so
             to
             free
             himselfe
             from
             beeing
             vnder
             their
             dominion
             ,
             that
             at
             length
             hee
             made
             them
             to
             be
             his
             vassals
             &
             bondmen
             ,
             and
             to
             receiue
             their
             crown
             by
             his
             benefit
             ,
             &
             vnder
             his
             permissiō
             ,
             till
             it
             should
             please
             his
             Holynesse
             to
             take
             it
             from
             them
             ,
             &
             bestow
             it
             on
             whom
             hee
             thought
             good
             :
             to
             to
             kisse
             his
             feet
             ,
             to
             lay
             downe
             great
             sums
             of
             gold
             at
             his
             feete
             for
             tribute
             ;
             and
             even
             then
             when
             the
             German
             Emperours
             did
             curbe
             the
             Popes
             ,
             yet
             they
             did
             stil
             acknowledge
             themselues
             subiect
             to
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             .
             This
             once
             obtained
             it
             is
             no
             marvell
             if
             hee
             name
             himselfe
             a
             King
             and
             Monarch
             ,
             and
             call
             his
             Bishoprick
             an
             Empire
             ,
             and
             so
             haue
             reestablished
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             in
             its
             former
             seate
             ,
             as
             
               Austin
               Steuchus
            
             the
             Popes
             library
             keeper
             saith
             ,
             
             in
             his
             first
             booke
             of
             Constantines
             donation
             ,
             in
             such
             
             tearmes
             as
             may
             seeme
             to
             be
             made
             of
             purpose
             for
             the
             vnfolding
             of
             this
             prophecy
             .
             
               After
               the
               destruction
               of
               the
               Roman
               Empire
            
             (
             saith
             hee
             )
             
               caused
               by
               the
               lewd
               liues
               of
               the
               Emperours
               ,
               if
               God
               had
               not
               raised
               vp
               the
               Papacy
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               Roman
               maiestie
               did
               reviue
               ,
               it
               would
               haue
               hapned
               ,
               that
               Rome
               being
               succoured
               by
               no
               man
               ,
               had
               beene
               inhabitable
               ,
               or
               made
               astinking
               oxe-stall
               or
               pigstie
               .
               But
               in
               the
               Pope
               there
               arose
               ,
               if
               not
               the
               greatnes
               of
               the
               Ancient
               Empire
               ,
               at
               least
               a
               forme
               not
               much
               vnlike
               vnto
               that
               ,
               whereby
               all
               nations
               did
               heretofore
               obay
               the
               Emperours
               .
            
             And
             this
             is
             that
             which
             S.
             Iohn
             addeth
             ,
             that
             all
             the
             earth
             went
             after
             the
             beast
             wondring
             .
             A
             little
             after
             the
             same
             Steuchus
             calleth
             the
             Papacie
             an
             Empire
             ,
             and
             maiesticall
             Royalty
             :
             And
             so
             doth
             Lipsius
             speake
             of
             it
             ,
             and
             others
             formerly
             cited
             ,
             all
             which
             doe
             acknowledge
             ,
             that
             the
             Popes
             are
             the
             true
             possessours
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             and
             doe
             hold
             the
             place
             of
             the
             ancient
             Roman
             Emperours
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             Caesars
             successours
             more
             thē
             the
             Apostles
             .
             Now
             by
             these
             words
             of
             S.
             Iohn
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             all
             the
             earth
             wondring
             at
             the
             healing
             of
             this
             wound
             went
             after
             the
             beast
             ,
             it
             appears
             that
             the
             woūd
             which
             
             the
             Empire
             did
             receaue
             by
             the
             
               Herules
               ,
               Gothes
               ,
               Vandals
            
             ,
             was
             not
             the
             wound
             here
             spoken
             of
             :
             For
             the
             healing
             of
             this
             wound
             by
             Belisarius
             and
             Marses
             ,
             drewe
             no
             people
             or
             nations
             to
             the
             obedience
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             no
             countrie
             moved
             with
             admiration
             ,
             did
             for
             this
             submit
             it selfe
             voluntarily
             .
             The
             fruit
             of
             this
             conquest
             over
             the
             Gothes
             was
             the
             establishment
             only
             of
             the
             Exarchat
             in
             a
             part
             of
             Italie
             .
             But
             the
             restoring
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             by
             the
             Roman
             Hierarchie
             drew
             infinit
             sorts
             of
             people
             to
             the
             obedience
             of
             this
             Empire
             ;
             And
             wee
             may
             say
             that
             all
             the
             earth
             moued
             with
             admiration
             ,
             out
             of
             a
             voluntarie
             respect
             ran
             after
             the
             beast
             ,
             which
             shall
             bee
             proved
             more
             fully
             yet
             by
             the
             12.
             and
             14.
             verse
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             4.
             part
             of
             this
             Prophecie
             .
          
           
             4
             And
             they
             worshipped
             the
             dragon
             which
             gaue
             power
             vnto
             the
             beast
             ,
             and
             they
             worshipped
             the
             beast
             ,
             saying
             ,
             who
             is
             like
             vnto
             the
             beast
             ?
             who
             is
             able
             to
             warre
             with
             him
             ?
          
        
         
           
             The
             Explication
             .
          
           
             4
             And
             did
             serue
             Idols
             ;
             which
             ,
             who
             so
             
             serue
             ,
             doe
             serue
             the
             divell
             ,
             the
             Author
             and
             advancer
             of
             this
             Papall
             Hierarchie
             ;
             and
             did
             attribute
             that
             that
             vnto
             this
             Hierarchie
             which
             did
             appertaine
             vnto
             God
             ,
             saying
             who
             is
             there
             that
             is
             like
             vnto
             this
             Empire
             ,
             and
             who
             is
             able
             to
             resist
             it
             ?
          
        
         
           
             The
             proofe
             of
             this
             exposition
             .
          
           
             This
             is
             a
             rare
             prediction
             ,
             and
             such
             as
             giues
             light
             to
             this
             whole
             prophecie
             .
             For
             here
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             makes
             idolatrie
             to
             bee
             borne
             iust
             at
             the
             same
             time
             that
             the
             Roman
             Hierarchie
             did
             begin
             to
             possesse
             an
             earthly
             Empire
             ,
             and
             to
             imitate
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             that
             was
             decayed
             .
             Which
             was
             manifestly
             verified
             in
             this
             ,
             that
             when
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             went
             to
             ruine
             in
             Italie
             then
             was
             the
             question
             about
             the
             worship
             of
             images
             most
             hot
             .
             To
             which
             worship
             the
             people
             of
             the
             East
             did
             not
             yeeld
             then
             ,
             when
             the
             Popes
             first
             of
             all
             became
             Monarches
             at
             Rome
             ,
             but
             they
             were
             woon
             vnto
             it
             by
             little
             and
             little
             ,
             after
             the
             imitatiō
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             authority
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             .
             The
             other
             kind
             of
             Idolatrie
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             the
             worshipping
             the
             bread
             of
             the
             Eucharist
             ,
             grounded
             vpon
             transubstantion
             ,
             began
             
             also
             to
             grow
             vp
             in
             the
             Church
             iust
             at
             the
             same
             time
             that
             the
             Pope
             grew
             to
             be
             a
             Prince
             and
             earthly
             Monarch
             ;
             for
             we
             may
             see
             some
             small
             seeds
             of
             this
             in
             Damascene
             which
             liued
             in
             the
             750
             yeare
             of
             our
             Lord
             ,
             and
             as
             this
             errour
             did
             increase
             by
             little
             &
             little
             ,
             Bertram
             a
             Priest
             that
             liued
             in
             France
             vnder
             
               Charles
               the
               bald
            
             in
             the
             yeare
             870.
             writ
             an
             excellent
             booke
             in
             confutation
             thereof
             ,
             which
             is
             to
             bee
             seene
             at
             this
             day
             .
             And
             at
             the
             same
             time
             
               Iohn
               Erigen
            
             surnamed
             the
             Scot
             a
             Monke
             of
             S.
             Benedicts
             order
             wrot
             another
             booke
             against
             the
             selfe
             same
             errour
             .
             But
             the
             Bishops
             of
             Rome
             which
             had
             erected
             the
             service
             of
             images
             ,
             did
             also
             establish
             the
             worship
             of
             bread
             :
             &
             condemned
             the
             writings
             of
             the
             said
             Scot
             ,
             especially
             Leo
             the
             9.
             in
             the
             yeare
             1055
             having
             assembled
             a
             Councell
             at
             Rome
             ,
             and
             another
             at
             Verseil
             in
             Piemont
             for
             the
             confirmation
             of
             this
             Idolatry
             ,
             against
             which
             many
             of
             the
             faithfull
             did
             oppose
             themselues
             ,
             and
             amongst
             others
             Berenger
             Archdeacon
             of
             Anger
             's
             ,
             a
             man
             of
             great
             knowledge
             and
             holy
             conversation
             .
             At
             last
             truth
             was
             overborne
             by
             falsehoode
             ,
             our
             kings
             lending
             a
             helping
             hand
             to
             the
             Pope
             .
             And
             that
             this
             prophecy
             
             might
             be
             fulfilled
             in
             all
             points
             ,
             looke
             how
             Idolatry
             did
             encrease
             ,
             so
             did
             the
             greatnes
             of
             the
             Roman
             Hierarchie
             encrease
             ;
             in
             so
             much
             that
             all
             did
             dread
             the
             power
             therof
             ,
             thinking
             that
             none
             was
             able
             to
             resist
             it
             .
             As
             for
             the
             peoples
             worshipping
             of
             this
             Hierarchie
             ,
             &
             giving
             it
             that
             which
             did
             appertaine
             vnto
             God
             ,
             we
             will
             speake
             of
             this
             in
             the
             verse
             following
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             fift
             part
             of
             this
             Prophecie
             .
          
           
             5
             And
             there
             was
             given
             vnto
             him
             a
             mouth
             that
             spake
             great
             things
             ,
             and
             blasphemies
             ;
             and
             power
             was
             given
             vnto
             him
             to
             doe
             42
             moneths
             .
          
           
             6
             And
             he
             opened
             his
             mouth
             vnto
             blasphemie
             against
             God
             to
             blaspheme
             his
             name
             ,
             and
             his
             tabernacle
             ,
             and
             them
             that
             dwell
             in
             heaven
             ,
          
           
             And
             it
             was
             given
             vnto
             him
             to
             make
             war
             with
             the
             Saints
             ,
             &
             to
             overcome
             them
             ,
             and
             power
             was
             given
             him
             over
             every
             kinred
             ,
             &
             tongue
             ,
             and
             nation
             .
          
           
             8
             Therefore
             all
             that
             dwell
             vpon
             the
             earth
             shall
             worship
             him
             ,
             whose
             names
             are
             not
             written
             in
             the
             booke
             of
             life
             of
             that
             Lambe
             which
             was
             slaine
             from
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
          
           
           
             9
             If
             any
             man
             haue
             an
             eare
             let
             him
             heare
             .
          
           
             If
             any
             lead
             into
             captivitie
             he
             shall
             goe
             into
             captivitie
             ,
             if
             any
             man
             kill
             with
             a
             sword
             he
             must
             be
             killed
             by
             a
             sword
             :
             here
             is
             the
             patience
             and
             the
             faith
             of
             the
             Saints
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Explication
             .
          
           
             5
             And
             God
             hath
             suffered
             this
             Hierarchie
             ,
             and
             Roman
             Church
             ,
             to
             assume
             prowde
             ,
             and
             blasphemous
             titles
             ,
             and
             it
             must
             endure
             1260
             yeares
             .
          
           
             6
             And
             this
             Papal
             Hierarchy
             doth
             set
             it selfe
             to
             belch
             forth
             horrible
             blasphemies
             against
             God
             ,
             and
             to
             wrong
             his
             name
             ,
             and
             his
             Church
             and
             his
             Saints
             .
          
           
             7
             Yea
             God
             hath
             suffered
             it
             to
             persecute
             the
             faithfull
             ,
             and
             to
             overcome
             them
             ,
             and
             power
             was
             given
             vnto
             it
             over
             infinit
             people
             ,
             &
             tongues
             ,
             and
             nations
             .
          
           
             8
             In
             so
             much
             that
             all
             mē
             shall
             fall
             down
             to
             worship
             it
             ,
             whose
             names
             are
             not
             found
             in
             the
             booke
             of
             life
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             that
             dyed
             for
             vs
             ,
             which
             book
             was
             written
             before
             the
             foundations
             of
             the
             world
             were
             laid
             .
          
           
             9
             If
             any
             man
             haue
             an
             vnderstāding
             to
             conceiue
             this
             let
             him
             conceiue
             it
             .
          
           
           
             10
             For
             they
             which
             persecute
             ,
             shall
             bee
             dealt
             with
             after
             the
             same
             māner
             ;
             whosoever
             leadeth
             the
             faithfull
             into
             captivity
             shall
             him selfe
             at
             length
             be
             made
             a
             captiue
             ;
             whosoever
             slaieth
             shall
             be
             slaine
             :
             herein
             appeareth
             the
             faith
             and
             patience
             of
             the
             Saints
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             proofe
             .
          
           
             The
             proofe
             of
             this
             exposition
             doth
             cōsist
             in
             5.
             points
             .
          
           
             1
             To
             shew
             what
             blasphemous
             titles
             the
             Roman
             Hierarchie
             doth
             assume
             ,
             and
             how
             she
             doth
             attribute
             that
             vnto
             her selfe
             which
             doth
             of
             right
             appertain
             vnto
             God.
             
          
           
             2
             How
             shee
             doth
             blaspheme
             against
             the
             Saints
             &
             against
             the
             Church
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             3
             To
             shew
             how
             she
             hath
             persecuted
             them
             and
             overcome
             them
             .
          
           
             4
             To
             speak
             of
             the
             time
             that
             she
             must
             last
             .
          
           
             5
             And
             of
             the
             obedience
             that
             the
             people
             yeeld
             vnto
             her
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             point
             is
             easie
             to
             prooue
             ,
             whether
             you
             respect
             the
             heade
             of
             this
             Hierarchie
             ,
             or
             else
             consider
             the
             whole
             body
             .
             The
             head
             is
             called
             God
             ,
             the
             Divine
             Maiestie
             ,
             the
             vniversall
             Bishop
             ,
             the
             head
             &
             Spowse
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             the
             corner
             stone
             ,
             the
             Lion
             of
             Iuda
             ,
             and
             Saviour
             of
             Sion
             ,
             the
             most
             holy
             
             Father
             ,
             and
             his
             Holynesse
             ,
             and
             doth
             arrogate
             many
             more
             such
             like
             prowd
             titles
             ,
             as
             we
             haue
             formerly
             shewed
             by
             a
             great
             nūber
             of
             examples
             .
             The
             body
             of
             this
             Hierarchie
             vnder
             the
             name
             of
             the
             Church
             doeth
             vsurp
             that
             which
             appertaines
             to
             God
             ,
             saying
             that
             the
             Church
             cannot
             erre
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             is
             the
             supreame
             iudge
             in
             matters
             of
             religion
             :
             And
             that
             it
             is
             this
             church
             which
             giveth
             authority
             to
             the
             scripture
             ,
             &
             is
             the
             only
             infallible
             Iudge
             of
             the
             interpretatiō
             thereof
             .
             They
             cal
             this
             Church
             the
             Romā-Catholick
             church
             ,
             not
             in
             that
             sense
             as
             the
             Ancient
             did
             take
             Catholicke
             for
             Orthodox
             ,
             but
             by
             Catholicke
             they
             vnderstande
             vniuersall
             ,
             exclusiuely
             to
             all
             other
             churches
             ,
             as
             if
             there
             were
             no
             other
             church
             but
             the
             Roman
             .
             *
             They
             say
             that
             this
             Church
             hath
             authority
             to
             make
             newe
             articles
             of
             faith
             ,
             and
             to
             adde
             to
             the
             Creede
             :
             That
             she
             is
             the
             mother
             and
             mistresse
             of
             all
             other
             Christian
             Churches
             :
             So
             the
             French
             and
             Spanish
             Church
             are
             become
             the
             handemaides
             of
             the
             Roman
             ,
             and
             if
             any
             one
             beeing
             asked
             of
             what
             church
             he
             were
             ,
             should
             answere
             ,
             I
             am
             of
             the
             French
             church
             ,
             hee
             would
             bee
             thought
             ridiculous
             ,
             or
             scarce
             well
             in
             his
             wits
             ,
             because
             the
             Frēch
             church
             
             is
             now
             reckoned
             for
             nothing
             ,
             or
             for
             some
             smal
             dependance
             of
             the
             Roman
             .
             Al
             which
             positions
             ,
             are
             as
             so
             many
             blasphemies
             .
             1.
             
             For
             ,
             to
             take
             vpon
             ones
             selfe
             not
             to
             be
             able
             to
             erre
             ,
             and
             to
             be
             supreame
             iudge
             in
             matters
             of
             religion
             ,
             is
             to
             intrude
             into
             Gods
             place
             ,
             and
             to
             take
             away
             this
             dignitie
             of
             being
             highest
             Iudge
             from
             Gods
             word
             .
             2.
             
             To
             boast
             that
             they
             giue
             authority
             to
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             which
             is
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             this
             is
             to
             exalt
             themselus
             aboue
             the
             word
             of
             God
             :
             For
             hee
             which
             giueth
             authoritie
             is
             more
             great
             then
             he
             which
             receiveth
             it
             .
             For
             if
             we
             consider
             well
             of
             the
             matter
             ,
             wee
             shal
             finde
             that
             it
             is
             not
             the
             characters
             ,
             nor
             the
             booke
             ,
             which
             are
             vnderstood
             by
             the
             name
             of
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             ,
             but
             God
             speaking
             in
             his
             worde
             :
             the
             church
             of
             Rome
             therfore
             in
             this
             doth
             exalt
             her selfe
             aboue
             God.
             3.
             
             Likewise
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             doth
             make
             her selfe
             equall
             with
             God
             ,
             whē
             shee
             doeth
             challenge
             the
             authority
             of
             giving
             an
             infallible
             interpretation
             of
             the
             scripture
             ,
             and
             which
             shall
             be
             of
             equall
             authority
             with
             the
             scripture
             it selfe
             ,
             for
             none
             cā
             giue
             interpretation
             of
             a
             law
             ,
             which
             shal
             be
             of
             equal
             authority
             with
             the
             law
             ,
             but
             only
             he
             which
             made
             the
             law
             :
             the
             church
             of
             Rome
             therefore
             is
             God
             ,
             and
             doth
             vsurpe
             
             Gods
             seat
             ,
             since
             she
             giveth
             interpretatiōs
             to
             Gods
             law
             ,
             which
             are
             of
             equal
             authority
             with
             the
             law
             .
             Nay
             ,
             which
             is
             more
             ,
             I
             say
             that
             to
             interpret
             the
             law
             after
             this
             manner
             ,
             is
             a
             great
             deale
             more
             thē
             to
             make
             it
             ,
             since
             that
             the
             people
             are
             not
             bounde
             to
             followe
             the
             letter
             of
             the
             law
             and
             of
             Gods
             word
             ,
             but
             the
             interpretation
             which
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             shall
             giue
             of
             it
             .
             4.
             
             The
             Church
             of
             Rome
             also
             doeth
             make
             her selfe
             as
             God
             ,
             when
             in
             steed
             of
             instructing
             the
             people
             to
             beleeue
             in
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             she
             teacheth
             them
             to
             beleeue
             in
             the
             Church
             .
             For
             if
             you
             aske
             the
             simple
             people
             why
             they
             beleeue
             this
             or
             that
             ,
             they
             will
             answer
             you
             because
             the
             church
             beleeues
             it
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             Church
             they
             vnderstand
             the
             Roman
             Church
             ,
             as
             if
             to
             beleeue
             in
             the
             Roman
             Church
             ,
             and
             to
             beleeue
             in
             God
             were
             all
             one
             .
             Now
             it
             is
             to
             be
             noted
             ,
             that
             in
             all
             these
             errours
             by
             the
             word
             Church
             ,
             the
             people
             art
             not
             meant
             ,
             for
             they
             are
             no
             iudges
             ,
             they
             giue
             no
             authority
             to
             the
             scripture
             :
             but
             by
             the
             church
             the
             Hierarchie
             is
             vnderstood
             ,
             and
             the
             body
             of
             Prelats
             which
             being
             dispersed
             thorough
             diverse
             nations
             doth
             depend
             vpon
             Rome
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             on
             the
             Romane
             consistorie
             ,
             and
             the
             Popes
             chaire
             .
             It
             was
             neuer
             heard
             of
             ,
             before
             the
             Pope
             came
             to
             rule
             ,
             
             that
             for
             to
             be
             saved
             ,
             a
             man
             must
             needes
             be
             a
             Roman
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             words
             ,
             Vniversall
             and
             Roman
             were
             coincident
             ;
             whereas
             the
             Apostle
             wrote
             to
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             Romanes
             after
             the
             same
             manner
             as
             he
             did
             to
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             Corinthians
             ,
             or
             Ephesians
             ,
             &
             gaue
             her
             not
             any
             title
             of
             superiority
             :
             without
             doubt
             he
             should
             haue
             spake
             thus
             vnto
             them
             .
             Although
             your
             Church
             be
             the
             Mistresse
             of
             all
             other
             Churches
             ,
             and
             my
             admonitions
             may
             seeme
             needlesse
             for
             you
             ,
             because
             ye
             cānot
             possibly
             erre
             in
             the
             faith
             ,
             and
             because
             
               S.
               Peter
            
             your
             bishop
             is
             the
             head
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             to
             whō
             I
             my selfe
             also
             am
             subiect
             ,
             yet
             notwithstanding
             I
             thought
             good
             to
             write
             vnto
             you
             for
             these
             and
             these
             reasons
             .
             Not
             a
             word
             of
             all
             this
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             11.
             chap.
             he
             threatens
             thē
             with
             being
             cut
             off
             ,
             if
             they
             grow
             to
             be
             high
             minded
             ,
             or
             disesteeme
             the
             grace
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             The
             holy
             Ghost
             addeth
             that
             this
             Hierarchie
             doeth
             blaspheme
             against
             the
             church
             of
             God
             ,
             
             and
             against
             those
             which
             dwell
             in
             heaven
             :
             If
             by
             heaven
             hee
             vnderstand
             the
             Church
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             9.
             chapt
             .
             and
             1.
             verse
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             12.
             chapt
             .
             and
             4.
             verse
             ,
             or
             if
             the
             falling
             away
             of
             those
             which
             went
             out
             of
             the
             visible
             church
             bee
             represented
             
             by
             the
             starres
             which
             fell
             from
             heaven
             ,
             it
             is
             easie
             to
             prooue
             how
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             doth
             diffame
             those
             which
             did
             ,
             and
             stil
             do
             ,
             serue
             God
             in
             puritie
             ,
             fastning
             odious
             names
             vpon
             them
             ,
             and
             calling
             them
             Heretickes
             ,
             Schismaticks
             ,
             Infidels
             ,
             Vaudians
             ,
             Albigeans
             ,
             Huguenots
             ,
             Calvinists
             :
             perswading
             the
             simpler
             sort
             ,
             that
             wee
             hold
             good
             workes
             to
             bee
             vnprofitable
             :
             that
             wee
             approue
             all
             kinde
             of
             dissolutenesse
             ,
             that
             wee
             are
             enimies
             of
             the
             Virgin
             Marie
             and
             the
             Saints
             ;
             that
             we
             make
             God
             the
             author
             of
             sinne
             :
             and
             such
             like
             things
             as
             we
             detest
             ,
             &
             which
             are
             cleane
             contrary
             to
             our
             beliefe
             .
          
           
             But
             if
             by
             those
             which
             are
             in
             heaven
             the
             Saints
             in
             Paradice
             bee
             vnderstoode
             ,
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             doeth
             wrong
             these
             no
             lesse
             ;
             For
             is
             it
             not
             an
             iniurie
             to
             the
             Saints
             to
             change
             them
             into
             Idols
             ?
             and
             to
             make
             thē
             the
             instruments
             of
             dishonouring
             God
             worshipping
             and
             adoring
             them
             with
             a
             religious
             kinde
             of
             worship
             that
             is
             due
             onlie
             to
             God
             ?
             who
             cā
             doubt
             but
             that
             the
             Saints
             do
             hate
             such
             as
             honor
             them
             thus
             ?
             To
             omit
             how
             the
             Romish
             church
             doth
             ty
             the
             S
             t
             s
             to
             a
             block
             ,
             imploying
             thē
             about
             base
             offices
             ,
             cōmending
             the
             keeping
             of
             their
             hogs
             to
             one
             ,
             of
             their
             horses
             to
             another
             ,
             the
             curing
             
             of
             the
             scurfe
             to
             a
             thirde
             ;
             and
             that
             the
             Legends
             of
             the
             Saints
             do
             disgrace
             them
             ,
             in
             so
             much
             that
             they
             make
             the
             Virgin
             Mary
             to
             converse
             with
             Queanes
             ,
             and
             to
             favour
             them
             in
             their
             vncleanenesse
             as
             wee
             haue
             shewed
             aboue
             .
          
           
             
             As
             for
             the
             persecutions
             which
             this
             Hirarchie
             hath
             raised
             against
             the
             faithfull
             ,
             &
             the
             victories
             which
             it
             hath
             had
             over
             the
             Church
             ;
             It
             is
             never
             found
             that
             the
             Orthodox
             Church
             did
             make
             any
             massacres
             of
             the
             ancient
             hereticks
             .
             Crueltie
             is
             most
             sutable
             with
             falshood
             .
             To
             burne
             a
             Christian
             because
             he
             would
             not
             obey
             the
             Pope
             ,
             is
             a
             thing
             which
             had
             never
             beene
             seene
             :
             but
             began
             after
             the
             Pope
             grewe
             to
             bee
             an
             earthly
             Monarch
             .
             It
             is
             well
             neere
             400.
             yeares
             since
             Innocent
             the
             3.
             within
             the
             space
             of
             a
             few
             monthes
             ,
             made
             more
             then
             200000
             of
             the
             faithfull
             to
             bee
             slaine
             ,
             whō
             they
             called
             Albigeans
             ,
             after
             the
             same
             maner
             as
             they
             doe
             vs
             Hugenots
             now
             adaies
             .
             It
             is
             not
             aboue
             a
             hundred
             years
             since
             ,
             that
             all
             Europe
             did
             streame
             with
             blood
             ,
             &
             that
             the
             Pope
             and
             his
             adherents
             thought
             by
             slaughter
             and
             torments
             to
             haue
             rooted
             vs
             out
             vtterly
             .
             In
             S.
             Bartholomewes
             massacre
             ,
             in
             the
             yeare
             1572
             ,
             more
             then
             80000
             men
             
             were
             slaine
             in
             cold
             blood
             .
             At
             Lyons
             150.
             persons
             put
             into
             prison
             were
             drawne
             out
             all
             one
             after
             another
             ,
             and
             stabbed
             at
             the
             gate
             of
             the
             prison
             .
             At
             Orleans
             400
             persons
             shut
             vp
             in
             a
             house
             (
             which
             was
             called
             the
             house
             with
             4
             corners
             )
             were
             burnt
             al
             together
             .
             The
             Duke
             of
             Alua
             plaied
             the
             butcher
             at
             Flaunders
             ,
             and
             vnder
             the
             shadow
             of
             a
             Catholike
             zeale
             slew
             millions
             of
             mē
             .
             In
             recompence
             whereof
             the
             Pope
             sent
             him
             an
             holy
             sword
             ,
             &
             consecrated
             gloues
             .
             The
             punishments
             of
             the
             Inquisition
             surpasse
             all
             crueltie
             .
             The
             bull
             of
             Phalaris
             is
             nothing
             in
             respect
             of
             this
             .
             A
             man
             is
             carried
             to
             prison
             not
             knowing
             wherefore
             :
             after
             he
             hath
             beene
             cubd
             vp
             in
             solitarinesse
             ,
             and
             never
             seene
             one
             glympse
             of
             light
             for
             a
             whole
             yeare
             together
             ,
             at
             last
             there
             coms
             one
             vnto
             him
             ,
             and
             questions
             with
             him
             about
             certaine
             interrogatories
             ;
             if
             hee
             say
             that
             he
             is
             a
             good
             Catholike
             ,
             and
             doe
             renounce
             his
             former
             heresie
             ,
             hee
             shall
             haue
             this
             favour
             to
             die
             a
             more
             gentle
             death
             .
             For
             recant
             never
             so
             much
             ,
             the
             very
             once
             being
             accused
             of
             heresie
             is
             thought
             enough
             to
             condemne
             a
             man.
             If
             hee
             persevere
             in
             defence
             of
             the
             truth
             ,
             and
             triumph
             in
             martyrdome
             ,
             after
             a
             thousond
             tormēts
             
             endured
             in
             private
             ,
             he
             is
             brought
             forth
             in
             publike
             ,
             wrapt
             about
             the
             head
             with
             an
             ougly
             coife
             which
             they
             call
             
               S.
               Bennet
            
             ,
             having
             a
             vizard
             on
             his
             face
             with
             a
             yawning
             mouth
             ,
             and
             a
             long
             taile
             made
             fast
             behind
             at
             his
             backe
             ,
             as
             they
             vse
             to
             paint
             the
             divel
             ;
             and
             so
             burnt
             by
             little
             and
             little
             ,
             being
             put
             in
             and
             taken
             from
             the
             fire
             I
             know
             not
             how
             often
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             he
             might
             not
             die
             as
             some
             doe
             without
             feeling
             that
             they
             dy
             .
             Tyrannie
             ,
             which
             the
             Turkes
             and
             Mahometans
             (
             though
             the
             sworne
             enimies
             of
             Christs
             name
             )
             doe
             detest
             :
             for
             they
             never
             practised
             any
             thing
             vpon
             Christians
             ,
             that
             came
             neere
             to
             this
             crueltie
             .
          
           
             We
             are
             also
             to
             speake
             of
             the
             continuance
             of
             time
             that
             this
             Hierarchicall
             Empire
             shall
             endure
             .
             
             The
             holy
             Ghost
             saith
             that
             it
             shall
             last
             1260.
             daies
             ,
             where
             wee
             must
             take
             each
             day
             for
             a
             yeare
             :
             For
             this
             Prophecie
             doth
             every
             where
             almost
             borrow
             the
             tearmes
             of
             Daniel
             ,
             and
             vse
             his
             fashion
             of
             speech
             ,
             who
             by
             a
             weeke
             vnderstands
             7.
             yeares
             ,
             and
             who
             foretelleth
             that
             from
             the
             permission
             of
             returning
             ,
             &
             building
             vp
             Hierusalem
             againe
             ,
             (
             granted
             by
             
               Darius
               ,
               Nothus
            
             )
             vntill
             the
             finall
             destruction
             thereof
             ,
             there
             should
             be
             70
             weekes
             ,
             
             that
             is
             to
             say
             70
             times
             7
             yeares
             ,
             to
             take
             a
             day
             for
             a
             yeare
             ,
             which
             make
             490
             yeares
             which
             afterward
             came
             to
             passe
             ;
             and
             this
             wonderfull
             prophecie
             was
             fulfilled
             at
             the
             time
             appointed
             .
             So
             likewise
             in
             Ezechiel
             in
             the
             4.
             chap.
             and
             6.
             verse
             .
             
               Thou
               shalt
               beare
               the
               iniquitie
               of
               the
               house
               of
               Iudah
            
             40
             
               daies
               :
               I
               haue
               appointed
               thee
               a
               day
               for
               a
               yeare
               .
            
             And
             in
             the
             14
             chap.
             of
             Numbers
             .34
             .
             verse
             .
             
               After
               the
               number
               of
               the
               daies
               in
               which
               ye
               searched
               out
               the
               land
               ,
               even
            
             40.
             
               daies
               every
               day
               for
               a
               yeare
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             It
             is
             no
             new
             thing
             therefore
             in
             Scripture
             to
             take
             a
             day
             for
             a
             yeare
             ;
             but
             it
             is
             the
             stile
             of
             the
             prophecies
             .
             Now
             here
             is
             a
             mystery
             ,
             and
             an
             admirable
             correspondency
             :
             for
             herein
             the
             Iewish-christian
             Church
             which
             lay
             hid
             1260
             daies
             ,
             flying
             the
             persecution
             of
             the
             heathenish
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             was
             a
             figure
             of
             the
             flight
             and
             persecution
             of
             the
             Christian
             Church
             vnder
             the
             Papall
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             which
             persecution
             must
             last
             1260
             mistical
             daies
             ,
             which
             amount
             to
             so
             many
             yeares
             .
          
           
             Since
             it
             is
             so
             that
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             throughout
             this
             whole
             chap.
             speakes
             of
             the
             succession
             and
             establishment
             of
             this
             Roman
             Hierarchie
             ,
             insteed
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             and
             that
             we
             haue
             shewed
             that
             the
             
             Pope
             began
             to
             lay
             the
             foundations
             of
             this
             temporal
             Empire
             in
             the
             yeare
             of
             our
             Lord
             755.
             if
             therevnto
             yee
             ad
             these
             1260
             yeares
             of
             the
             continuance
             of
             this
             Hierarchicall
             Empire
             ,
             it
             must
             needes
             last
             to
             the
             2015.
             yeare
             of
             our
             Lord
             :
             according
             to
             which
             reckoning
             it
             hath
             404.
             yeares
             yet
             to
             continue
             .
             Wherevnto
             if
             yee
             ioine
             the
             prediction
             of
             the
             Apostle
             ,
             who
             hath
             told
             vs
             that
             Christ
             shall
             abolish
             this
             sonne
             of
             perdition
             by
             the
             brightnesse
             of
             his
             comming
             ,
             yee
             may
             well
             neere
             guesse
             the
             time
             of
             the
             cōming
             of
             the
             Lord.
             Herevnto
             adde
             that
             amongst
             the
             Iewes
             this
             was
             an
             vsuall
             prophecie
             ,
             that
             as
             the
             world
             was
             made
             in
             6.
             daies
             ,
             and
             after
             came
             the
             day
             of
             rest
             ,
             so
             the
             world
             must
             endure
             sixe
             thousand
             yeares
             ,
             &
             afterwards
             there
             shall
             be
             an
             everlasting
             time
             of
             rest
             :
             That
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             there
             must
             be
             so
             many
             thousande
             yeares
             in
             the
             worldes
             duration
             ,
             as
             there
             were
             daies
             in
             the
             creation
             .
             For
             as
             the
             Apostle
             S.
             
             Peter
             saith
             :
             
               One
               day
               with
               the
               Lord
               is
               as
               a
               thousand
               yeares
               ,
               &
               a
               thousand
               yeares
               as
               one
               day
               .
            
             According
             to
             this
             calculation
             ,
             this
             present
             yeare
             of
             our
             Lord
             ,
             1611.
             being
             the
             5560
             year
             of
             the
             world
             .
             If
             the
             papall
             Empire
             must
             yet
             continue
             404
             years
             ,
             
             its
             end
             must
             bee
             in
             the
             5964.
             yeare
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             which
             is
             nor
             farre
             of
             from
             6000
             yeares
             .
             Astrologie
             also
             doth
             lend
             vs
             some
             light
             in
             this
             matter
             :
             for
             in
             the
             yeare
             of
             the
             world
             3665.
             
             
               Ptolomie
               Philadelph
            
             raigneing
             in
             Egypt
             ,
             some
             469
             yeares
             after
             the
             building
             of
             Rome
             ,
             there
             lived
             one
             Hipparchus
             a
             famous
             Astrologer
             ,
             who
             reports
             that
             in
             his
             time
             the
             star
             commonly
             called
             ,
             
               stella
               polaris
            
             ,
             which
             is
             in
             the
             taile
             of
             the
             lesser
             beare
             ,
             was
             12
             degrees
             &
             two
             fifths
             distant
             frō
             the
             poles
             of
             the
             Equator
             .
             This
             starre
             from
             age
             to
             age
             hath
             insensibly
             still
             crept
             neerer
             to
             the
             Pole
             ,
             whēce
             it
             appeareth
             that
             the
             poles
             of
             the
             Equator
             are
             moueable
             ;
             it
             is
             not
             now
             past
             3
             degrees
             distant
             from
             the
             poles
             of
             the
             Equator
             :
             when
             this
             starre
             therefore
             shall
             come
             to
             touch
             the
             Pole
             there
             being
             no
             farther
             space
             left
             for
             it
             to
             go
             forward
             (
             which
             may
             well
             enough
             come
             to
             passe
             within
             fiue
             or
             sixe
             hundreth
             yeares
             )
             it
             seemes
             that
             thē
             there
             shall
             be
             a
             great
             change
             of
             
               things
               ,
               and
               that
               this
               time
               is
               the
               period
               which
               God
               hath
               prefixed
               to
               nature
               .
            
             All
             these
             observations
             put
             together
             make
             vs
             presume
             that
             the
             Romā
             Hierarchicall
             Empire
             must
             endure
             till
             the
             2015
             yeare
             of
             our
             Lorde
             .
             And
             that
             this
             
             Empire
             being
             abolisht
             ,
             the
             Pope
             yet
             shall
             remaine
             still
             ,
             but
             without
             power
             &
             authoritie
             ,
             til
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             shal
             destroy
             him
             by
             his
             last
             comming
             ,
             which
             (
             as
             it
             should
             seeme
             by
             the
             evidēces
             formerly
             cited
             )
             shal
             be
             some
             one
             ,
             or
             two
             and
             twentie
             ages
             ,
             after
             our
             Saviours
             incarnation
             ,
             who
             is
             God
             over
             all
             ,
             blessed
             for
             ever
             .
             Yet
             I
             would
             not
             haue
             any
             think
             that
             I
             speak
             this
             as
             though
             I
             went
             about
             to
             prie
             into
             such
             secrets
             as
             God
             himselfe
             would
             haue
             to
             be
             hid
             ,
             or
             as
             though
             I
             meant
             to
             define
             any
             thing
             absolutely
             concerning
             the
             last
             day
             ,
             but
             onlie
             that
             I
             might
             not
             seeme
             to
             neglect
             the
             Revelations
             which
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             hath
             laid
             open
             vnto
             vs
             in
             this
             prophecy
             :
             seeing
             that
             here
             he
             telleth
             vs
             how
             long
             the
             Papal
             Empire
             shall
             last
             ,
             and
             that
             
               S.
               Paule
            
             and
             
             Daniell
             in
             his
             7.
             chap.
             doe
             stretch
             the
             tearme
             of
             time
             ,
             wherein
             the
             son
             of
             Perditiō
             shall
             last
             ,
             to
             the
             day
             of
             iudgement
             .
          
           
             Our
             adversaries
             goe
             more
             boldly
             to
             worke
             .
             For
             taking
             these
             1260
             daies
             simply
             for
             3
             yeares
             and
             a
             halfe
             ,
             they
             say
             that
             Antichrist
             must
             not
             raigne
             aboue
             3
             years
             and
             a
             halfe
             ,
             and
             that
             45.
             daies
             after
             the
             last
             Iudgement
             shall
             be
             .
             If
             this
             be
             true
             ,
             thē
             the
             faithfull
             that
             shall
             liue
             vnder
             the
             dominion
             
             of
             Antichrist
             ,
             shall
             knowe
             the
             day
             of
             iudgement
             exactly
             ,
             and
             Christs
             speech
             shall
             not
             be
             verified
             of
             them
             ,
             wherein
             hee
             saith
             ,
             
               Of
               that
               day
               and
               howre
               knoweth
               no
               mā
               no
               not
               the
               Angels
               in
               heaven
               ,
            
             as
             the
             king
             of
             great
             Brittaine
             hath
             learnedly
             obserued
             :
             who
             notes
             also
             that
             our
             Lord
             Iesus
             hath
             foretold
             that
             at
             this
             time
             
               men
               shall
               bee
               eating
               and
               drinking
               ,
               &
               making
               merry
            
             ;
             which
             sheweth
             evidently
             that
             this
             shal
             be
             a
             time
             of
             rest
             ,
             and
             not
             of
             troubles
             and
             persecutions
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             comming
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             shall
             not
             be
             lookt
             for
             .
             Besides
             ,
             that
             such
             an
             Empire
             ,
             which
             (
             as
             they
             say
             )
             shall
             subdue
             all
             the
             world
             ,
             should
             in
             3.
             yeares
             &
             a
             halfe
             rise
             ,
             increase
             ,
             and
             fall
             ,
             is
             a
             thing
             altogether
             impossible
             :
             a
             man
             cannot
             in
             that
             time
             ride
             over
             a
             quarter
             of
             the
             countries
             in
             post
             ,
             how
             much
             more
             time
             had
             he
             need
             aske
             to
             conquer
             them
             ?
             Or
             who
             can
             imagin
             that
             the
             mystery
             of
             iniquitie
             should
             in
             Saint
             Paules
             time
             begin
             to
             prepare
             the
             way
             for
             the
             sonne
             of
             perdition
             to
             enter
             ,
             and
             that
             now
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             some
             1550.
             yeares
             after
             ,
             there
             should
             bee
             no
             preparation
             at
             all
             .
             
          
           
             It
             remaines
             that
             we
             speake
             of
             the
             obedience
             and
             religious
             service
             which
             the
             people
             shall
             giue
             to
             this
             Roman
             Hierarchie
             :
             
             The
             holy
             Ghost
             saith
             that
             all
             mē
             that
             inhabit
             the
             earth
             shall
             adore
             it
             :
             Hee
             saith
             ,
             
               All
               men
            
             ,
             although
             there
             bee
             many
             countries
             which
             never
             did
             acknowledge
             it
             :
             for
             the
             Scripture
             lightly
             speakes
             after
             this
             manner
             of
             great
             Empires
             ,
             which
             hold
             a
             great
             number
             of
             people
             and
             many
             realms
             vnder
             their
             dominion
             :
             especially
             the
             Prophet
             Daniel
             (
             to
             whose
             stile
             the
             holy
             ghost
             doth
             conform
             himselfe
             in
             the
             Apocalyps
             )
             in
             the
             2.
             chap.
             37.
             and
             38
             verses
             ,
             speaking
             to
             Nabuchadnezar
             .
             O
             
               King
               thou
               art
               a
               king
               of
               kings
               ,
               and
               in
               all
               places
               where
               the
               children
               of
               men
               dwell
               hee
               hath
               given
               them
               into
               thine
               hand
               ,
               and
               hath
               made
               thee
               ruler
               over
               them
               all
            
             ;
             although
             hee
             had
             nothing
             at
             all
             in
             Europe
             ,
             and
             but
             little
             in
             Affricke
             .
             There
             is
             the
             like
             forme
             of
             speech
             in
             the
             7.
             chapter
             ,
             verse
             23.
             
             So
             in
             speaking
             of
             the
             Pope
             wee
             vse
             to
             say
             that
             all
             the
             word
             is
             vnder
             him
             ,
             although
             the
             Turke
             and
             Mores
             disclaime
             him
             :
             but
             by
             so
             saying
             wee
             meane
             that
             hee
             hath
             a
             large
             dominion
             .
             And
             our
             adversaries
             themselues
             doe
             not
             deny
             this
             ,
             since
             they
             are
             of
             opinion
             that
             the
             heathenish
             Romā
             Empire
             is
             meant
             in
             this
             prophecie
             ,
             which
             yet
             notwithstanding
             ,
             was
             never
             absolute
             cōmander
             over
             one
             fourth
             part
             
             of
             the
             world
             :
             And
             I
             cannot
             imagin
             that
             there
             shall
             or
             can
             be
             such
             a
             Monarchie
             to
             which
             all
             the
             world
             (
             without
             excepting
             any
             place
             )
             shall
             be
             subiect
             .
             It
             is
             not
             three
             yeares
             and
             an
             halfe
             ,
             no
             nor
             3
             ages
             that
             wil
             be
             sufficient
             for
             the
             obtaining
             of
             such
             a
             conquest
             .
             And
             there
             is
             not
             the
             man
             to
             bee
             found
             with
             a
             braine
             strong
             enough
             ,
             to
             governe
             an
             Empire
             of
             this
             nature
             .
             The
             most
             politicke
             head
             in
             the
             world
             would
             in
             the
             governement
             of
             such
             a
             state
             be
             distracted
             with
             the
             multiplicitie
             of
             businesse
             and
             fall
             into
             shivers
             .
          
           
             The
             dutiful
             respect
             therefore
             and
             obedience
             ,
             which
             the
             people
             must
             yeeld
             to
             this
             Roman
             Hierarchie
             ,
             is
             called
             Adoration
             :
             Not
             only
             because
             the
             head
             of
             this
             Empire
             shall
             cause
             himselfe
             to
             be
             adored
             ,
             and
             make
             men
             kisse
             his
             feet
             ,
             but
             also
             because
             of
             the
             strange
             kinde
             of
             soveraigntie
             that
             the
             body
             of
             this
             Hierarchie
             hath
             attained
             vnto
             .
             The
             Cardinals
             in
             all
             their
             meetings
             ,
             and
             solemne
             feastes
             ,
             goe
             ,
             and
             fit
             before
             kings
             ,
             as
             we
             haue
             already
             
             shewed
             .
             In
             Spaine
             a
             man
             may
             offend
             the
             king
             with
             lesse
             daunger
             then
             the
             least
             of
             the
             Inquisition
             .
             Frō
             Gregory
             the
             7.
             surnamed
             Hildebrād
             ,
             which
             was
             made
             Pope
             ,
             
             in
             the
             yeare
             of
             our
             Lord
             1073
             ,
             to
             Leo
             the
             10.
             who
             died
             in
             the
             yeare
             1521.
             there
             are
             448.
             yeares
             ,
             during
             which
             time
             wee
             may
             say
             that
             the
             Papacie
             was
             at
             the
             height
             of
             her
             power
             and
             glory
             .
             Then
             Moncks
             were
             highly
             honoured
             ,
             and
             the
             Popes
             Legates
             tooke
             their
             places
             before
             kings
             :
             then
             the
             Pope
             could
             command
             all
             the
             nobles
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             men
             of
             armes
             ,
             to
             come
             out
             of
             Frāce
             or
             England
             ,
             or
             any
             other
             quarter
             of
             Europe
             ,
             and
             make
             thē
             trot
             from
             far
             through
             I
             knowe
             not
             howe
             many
             places
             to
             ioine
             their
             forces
             against
             the
             Sarrasins
             ,
             and
             filled
             all
             Fraunce
             with
             widdowes
             and
             Orphanes
             :
             to
             him
             that
             chaunced
             to
             die
             in
             this
             warre
             ,
             the
             Pope
             gaue
             a
             degree
             of
             glory
             in
             Paradice
             aboue
             the
             common
             sort
             of
             Saints
             .
             Then
             he
             which
             wore
             the
             badge
             of
             the
             crosse
             did
             cease
             to
             bee
             the
             kings
             subiect
             ,
             and
             no
             Magistrate
             might
             touch
             him
             what
             offence
             soever
             hee
             had
             committed
             ,
             because
             hee
             was
             the
             Popes
             souldier
             .
             At
             that
             time
             he
             made
             kings
             to
             be
             ierkt
             ,
             and
             stroke
             of
             the
             Emperours
             crowne
             with
             his
             foot
             ,
             and
             trod
             vpon
             his
             necke
             .
             His
             power
             now
             a
             daies
             is
             much
             diminished
             over
             that
             it
             was
             ,
             and
             yet
             even
             at
             this
             time
             ,
             he
             makes
             men
             come
             from
             farre
             and
             neere
             to
             seek
             at
             
             Rome
             for
             the
             remission
             of
             their
             sins
             .
             And
             an
             offence
             committed
             against
             his
             owne
             person
             is
             a
             reserved
             case
             ,
             whence
             none
             in
             Fraunce
             may
             absolue
             a
             man
             ,
             but
             the
             least
             Priest
             that
             is
             ,
             hath
             authority
             to
             pardon
             a
             sin
             cōmitted
             against
             the
             Maiestie
             of
             God.
             Nay
             which
             is
             more
             ,
             they
             take
             vpon
             them
             to
             make
             God
             ,
             and
             to
             create
             their
             creator
             with
             the
             repeating
             of
             certaine
             words
             ;
             No
             mervaile
             therefore
             if
             they
             be
             so
             much
             honoured
             and
             respected
             .
             So
             we
             haue
             seene
             this
             prophecie
             fulfilled
             on
             everie
             side
             :
             whence
             also
             wee
             may
             assure
             our selues
             of
             the
             accomplishment
             of
             the
             other
             part
             of
             this
             prophecie
             .
             That
             they
             which
             kill
             shall
             be
             killed
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             which
             persecute
             vs
             shall
             bee
             dealt
             withall
             accordingly
             .
             Which
             yet
             we
             do
             not
             desire
             ,
             having
             learn●
             of
             our
             Savior
             to
             blesse
             those
             that
             curse
             vs
             ,
             and
             to
             pray
             for
             their
             amendment
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             6.
             part
             of
             this
             prophecie
             .
          
           
             11
             And
             I
             beheld
             an
             other
             beast
             comming
             vp
             out
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             which
             had
             two
             hornes
             like
             the
             lambe
             ,
             but
             hee
             spake
             like
             the
             Dragon
             .
          
           
             12
             And
             hee
             did
             all
             that
             the
             first
             beast
             
             could
             do
             before
             him
             ,
             &
             he
             caused
             the
             earth
             ,
             and
             thē
             that
             dwell
             therin
             to
             worship
             the
             first
             beast
             ,
             whose
             deadly
             wound
             was
             healed
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Explication
             .
          
           
             11
             I
             saw
             also
             a
             Monarch
             to
             rise
             vp
             frō
             a
             low
             estate
             ,
             being
             of
             another
             name
             and
             nature
             then
             the
             former
             Roman
             Emperours
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             the
             Pope
             ,
             which
             wore
             a
             miter
             with
             tvvo
             hornes
             vpon
             his
             head
             ,
             and
             which
             seemed
             in
             outwarde
             shew
             to
             professe
             Christ
             ,
             but
             whose
             doctrine
             was
             diabolicall
             .
          
           
             12
             And
             he
             tooke
             all
             the
             power
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             vpō
             him
             ,
             at
             Rome
             ,
             being
             the
             seate
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             and
             exhorted
             al
             the
             people
             to
             submit
             themselues
             to
             this
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             which
             being
             destroyed
             by
             the
             Lombards
             in
             Italie
             ,
             was
             brought
             to
             life
             againe
             ,
             and
             re-established
             by
             the
             Papacie
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             proofe
             .
          
           
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             doth
             here
             speake
             of
             two
             beasts
             ,
             the
             former
             of
             which
             is
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             as
             all
             confesse
             ,
             and
             the
             prophecy
             is
             cleere
             .
             This
             Empire
             being
             excluded
             out
             of
             Rome
             &
             Italie
             by
             the
             Lombards
             ,
             was
             recovered
             
             by
             little
             and
             little
             ,
             and
             restored
             againe
             by
             the
             Roman
             Hierarchie
             ,
             which
             is
             helde
             by
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             for
             the
             same
             beast
             with
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             stil
             one
             Empire
             raigning
             at
             Rome
             ,
             though
             vnder
             an
             other
             title
             .
             The
             second
             beast
             is
             a
             liuely
             representation
             of
             the
             bishop
             of
             Rome
             .
          
           
             1
             For
             
               Saint
               Iohn
            
             saith
             that
             this
             beast
             
               came
               vp
               out
               of
               the
               earth
               ,
            
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             rose
             from
             a
             small
             beginning
             ,
             and
             meane
             estate
             ,
             according
             as
             the
             Latins
             cal
             such
             as
             get
             vp
             from
             a
             little
             ,
             
               Terrae
               filios
            
             ,
             as
             mushromes
             ,
             or
             toadstooles
             that
             growe
             vp
             out
             of
             the
             earth
             in
             a
             night
             :
             a
             fashion
             of
             speech
             vsual
             in
             Scripture
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             2.
             chapt
             .
             of
             the
             1.
             of
             
               Samuell
               .
               He
               raiseth
               vp
               the
               poore
               out
               of
               the
               dust
               ,
            
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             out
             of
             a
             base
             condition
             of
             life
             .
             Now
             who
             is
             there
             but
             knows
             how
             meane
             and
             poore
             the
             state
             of
             the
             bishops
             of
             Rome
             was
             before
             they
             came
             to
             be
             earthly
             Monarchs
             ?
             Then
             when
             they
             had
             not
             one
             foot
             of
             ground
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Emperours
             made
             them
             be
             whipt
             ,
             emprisoned
             ,
             &
             banished
             them
             ?
             Then
             when
             the
             
             Emperour
             Constantius
             having
             exiled
             Liberius
             bishop
             of
             Rome
             ,
             gaue
             him
             500
             crownes
             for
             pitty
             sake
             ro
             relieue
             him
             .
             As
             the
             grain
             of
             mustard
             seed
             ,
             which
             our
             Savior
             speaks
             
             of
             Luke
             the
             13.
             ve
             .
             19.
             which
             is
             but
             little
             ,
             brought
             forth
             a
             tree
             ,
             within
             which
             the
             birds
             of
             the
             aire
             built
             their
             nests
             ,
             so
             out
             of
             this
             smalnesse
             of
             bishops
             ,
             did
             the
             greatnesse
             of
             the
             Pope
             arise
             ,
             within
             the
             which
             infinite
             companies
             of
             beneficed
             men
             doe
             nestle
             themselues
             ,
             which
             liue
             vnder
             his
             shaddow
             .
          
           
             2
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             also
             saith
             that
             
               he
               shall
               haue
               hornes
               like
               the
               Lambe
               ,
               but
               shall
               speake
               like
               the
               dragon
               ,
            
             as
             if
             he
             should
             haue
             said
             ,
             ye
             wil
             say
             when
             yee
             see
             him
             that
             hee
             resembleth
             Christ
             Iesus
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             Lambe
             of
             God
             ;
             and
             looks
             like
             a
             Christian
             ,
             but
             his
             doctrin
             is
             Diabolicall
             .
             This
             also
             agreeth
             to
             the
             Pope
             which
             cals
             himselfe
             the
             Vicar
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             but
             whose
             doctrine
             is
             contrary
             to
             Iesus
             Christ
             ;
             for
             proofe
             whereof
             reade
             my
             second
             booke
             ,
             in
             that
             place
             ,
             where
             I
             defend
             his
             Maiesties
             of
             Englands
             confession
             of
             the
             faith
             ,
             It
             may
             bee
             that
             the
             two
             hornes
             of
             his
             ordinary
             miter
             ,
             do
             serue
             also
             for
             the
             accomplishment
             of
             this
             prophecy
             .
          
           
             3
             In
             the
             third
             place
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             saith
             that
             hee
             shall
             exercise
             the
             authority
             of
             the
             first
             beast
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             for
             as
             much
             as
             he
             shal
             counterfait
             the
             actions
             ,
             &
             vsurp
             the
             rights
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             :
             
             That
             this
             also
             agreeth
             to
             the
             Pope
             wee
             may
             proue
             by
             infinite
             examples
             .
             1.
             
             Hee
             hath
             taken
             a
             crowne
             hauing
             cast
             away
             his
             Bishops
             crosier
             staffe
             .
             2.
             
             He
             hath
             taken
             the
             Emperours
             *
             habit
             which
             was
             of
             skarlet
             ,
             together
             with
             shooes
             of
             skarlet
             ,
             which
             were
             proper
             to
             the
             Emperours
             .
             3.
             
             The
             Emperours
             had
             a
             Senat
             clad
             in
             skarlet
             ,
             &
             hee
             hath
             a
             Senate
             of
             Cardinals
             clad
             in
             cloath
             of
             the
             same
             colour
             .
             4.
             
             In
             the
             Senate
             there
             were
             Apotheoses
             ,
             or
             
               Canonizations
               of
               Gods
            
             practised
             ,
             as
             there
             are
             
               Canonizations
               of
               Saints
            
             in
             the
             Popes
             consistorie
             .
             5.
             
             The
             Emperours
             caused
             themselues
             to
             be
             adored
             ,
             and
             were
             *
             called
             Gods.
             So
             the
             Popes
             call
             themselues
             God
             ,
             and
             take
             vpon
             them
             to
             be
             adored
             .
             6.
             
             The
             Emperours
             brought
             vp
             the
             right
             of
             fiefs
             and
             other
             duties
             to
             be
             paid
             to
             the
             Lord
             Paramont
             in
             case
             that
             the
             tenants
             were
             changed
             .
             In
             imitation
             whereof
             the
             Pope
             hath
             established
             his
             Annates
             ,
             by
             which
             all
             Church
             livings
             are
             made
             fiefs
             to
             the
             Papall
             See
             ,
             and
             pay
             the
             first
             yeares
             revenewes
             in
             case
             of
             a
             new
             election
             .
             7.
             
             The
             Emperours
             did
             receaue
             
               the
               submissions
               and
               acknowledgements
               of
               subiection
               ,
            
             from
             forraine
             Princes
             by
             their
             Embassadours
             :
             so
             the
             Pope
             doth
             receaue
             the
             
             
               submissions
               of
               kings
               ,
               and
               their
               oathes
               of
               fealtie
               ,
            
             which
             are
             all
             bound
             as
             soone
             as
             ever
             there
             is
             a
             new
             Pope
             chosen
             to
             send
             their
             Embassadours
             to
             kisse
             his
             feet
             ,
             and
             to
             tender
             him
             an
             oath
             of
             allegeance
             .
             8.
             
             The
             Emperours
             had
             their
             Imposts
             ,
             and
             Tributes
             ;
             &
             the
             Pope
             hath
             his
             S.
             
               Peter
               pence
            
             ,
             levied
             in
             many
             Countries
             vpon
             the
             head
             of
             every
             particular
             man
             :
             as
             also
             petty
             cōtributions
             ,
             and
             a
             thousand
             diverse
             commodities
             that
             arise
             out
             of
             dispensations
             ,
             absolutions
             ,
             provisions
             ,
             advouzons
             ,
             indulgences
             ,
             erections
             ,
             derogations
             ,
             exchange
             of
             vowes
             ,
             matrimoniall
             causes
             ,
             &c.
             which
             are
             the
             tributs
             ,
             and
             imposts
             of
             this
             Roman
             Empire
             .
             9.
             
             The
             Emperours
             had
             their
             
               civill
               law
            
             ,
             and
             he
             hath
             his
             
               Canon
               law
            
             .
             10.
             
             The
             Emperours
             had
             their
             Indictions
             of
             15.
             yeares
             ,
             and
             hee
             hath
             his
             
               Roman
               Indictions
            
             of
             the
             like
             time
             .
             11.
             
             The
             Emperours
             had
             their
             
               Publicans
               ,
               &
               tole-gatherers
            
             ,
             which
             did
             farme
             the
             revenewes
             of
             the
             Empire
             .
             So
             the
             Pope
             hath
             his
             Dataries
             and
             Bullists
             which
             rent
             the
             commodities
             of
             this
             spirituall
             merchandise
             .
             12.
             
             The
             Emperours
             had
             their
             
               Trapezites
               ,
               or
               exchangers
            
             at
             Rome
             :
             &
             the
             Pope
             hath
             his
             Banckers
             in
             Lions
             ,
             and
             diverse
             other
             places
             of
             Europe
             ,
             which
             will
             procure
             
             dispensations
             and
             absolutions
             from
             Rome
             at
             a
             certaine
             price
             ,
             and
             help
             you
             to
             obtain
             the
             remission
             of
             your
             sinnes
             by
             letters
             of
             exchange
             .
             13.
             
             The
             Roman
             Emperours
             having
             conquered
             a
             countrie
             ,
             laboured
             to
             plant
             the
             Latin
             tongue
             in
             it
             :
             in
             imitation
             of
             which
             policie
             ,
             the
             Pope
             hath
             so
             prevailed
             ,
             that
             he
             hath
             brought
             all
             the
             countries
             which
             are
             vnder
             him
             to
             pray
             to
             God
             ,
             
             and
             say
             their
             service
             in
             the
             Latin
             tongue
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             not
             long
             since
             that
             in
             France
             the
             law
             acts
             ,
             and
             publike
             instruments
             were
             made
             in
             Latin
             ;
             in
             doing
             this
             ,
             hee
             hath
             stamped
             the
             print
             of
             his
             governement
             vpon
             vs
             ,
             and
             made
             vs
             weare
             the
             badges
             of
             his
             Empire
             .
             14.
             
             The
             Roman
             Emperours
             took
             an
             yearly
             rent
             to
             suffer
             the
             Stewes
             ;
             The
             Pope
             which
             did
             succeed
             in
             this
             Empire
             ,
             hath
             also
             succeeded
             in
             the
             honestie
             of
             this
             action
             .
          
           
             4
             For
             to
             make
             the
             matter
             more
             cleer
             ,
             S.
             Iohn
             hauing
             said
             that
             this
             second
             beast
             doth
             resemble
             the
             first
             beast
             ,
             and
             exercise
             his
             power
             ,
             addes
             that
             it
             is
             in
             the
             presence
             of
             the
             first
             beast
             ,
             &
             in
             the
             very
             place
             where
             the
             seat
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             is
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             at
             Rome
             it selfe
             :
             or
             at
             leastwise
             in
             the
             presence
             of
             this
             
               Hierarchicall
               Roman
               Empire
            
             .
          
           
           
             Let
             the
             reader
             therfore
             put
             al
             this
             together
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             we
             are
             foretold
             of
             a
             man
             1.
             which
             shall
             rise
             vp
             from
             a
             meane
             estate
             .
             2.
             
             Which
             shall
             be
             a
             Christian
             by
             profession
             ,
             but
             yet
             shall
             teach
             wicked
             doctrine
             .
             3.
             
             Which
             shall
             vsurpe
             the
             rights
             ,
             and
             imitate
             the
             actions
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             .
             4.
             which
             shall
             haue
             his
             seate
             in
             the
             same
             place
             ,
             where
             the
             seate
             of
             the
             Empire
             was
             .
             And
             after
             that
             hee
             hath
             runne
             overall
             histories
             ,
             and
             drawed
             his
             braines
             drie
             with
             long
             seeking
             after
             another
             besides
             the
             Pope
             ,
             to
             whome
             all
             these
             things
             may
             agree
             :
             yet
             shall
             he
             never
             be
             able
             to
             shew
             vs
             such
             another
             :
             The
             verses
             following
             will
             tell
             vs
             of
             other
             markes
             no
             lesse
             cleere
             ,
             and
             evident
             .
          
           
             Neverthelesse
             (
             since
             it
             appeareth
             by
             the
             12.
             verse
             ,
             that
             the
             second
             beast
             which
             wee
             proue
             to
             be
             the
             Pope
             ,
             shall
             make
             vse
             of
             this
             healing
             and
             reestablishment
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             for
             the
             authorising
             of
             this
             Empire
             reestablished
             by
             the
             Papacie
             )
             it
             is
             manifest
             that
             this
             wound
             here
             spoken
             of
             cannot
             be
             the
             death
             of
             
               Iulius
               Caesar
            
             ,
             nor
             of
             
               Domitius
               Nero
            
             ,
             nor
             yet
             the
             stroake
             receaued
             by
             the
             Herules
             ,
             and
             Gothes
             ,
             because
             the
             healing
             of
             these
             wounds
             did
             no
             
             way
             encrease
             the
             dignity
             of
             the
             Pope
             ,
             nor
             did
             he
             gaine
             any
             thing
             by
             them
             .
             Who
             can
             imagine
             that
             the
             people
             were
             moued
             to
             yeeld
             themselues
             subiect
             to
             the
             Papacie
             ,
             by
             wondring
             at
             the
             Empire
             which
             being
             fallen
             was
             set
             vp
             againe
             by
             
               Augustus
               Caesar
            
             ,
             or
             by
             Vespasian
             ,
             or
             by
             Narses
             ?
             But
             wel
             may
             it
             be
             that
             the
             wound
             receaved
             by
             the
             Lumbards
             being
             healed
             by
             the
             advancement
             of
             the
             Roman
             Hierarchie
             ,
             the
             Pope
             did
             hereby
             come
             to
             bee
             an
             earthly
             Monarch
             ,
             and
             by
             this
             meanes
             advance
             his
             spirituall
             power
             .
             So
             did
             hee
             make
             the
             people
             to
             submit
             themselues
             to
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             that
             was
             healed
             of
             the
             deadly
             wound
             in
             as
             much
             as
             the
             state
             of
             the
             Roman
             Monarch
             ,
             which
             he
             tooke
             vpon
             him
             after
             the
             destruction
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             by
             the
             Lombards
             ,
             made
             him
             to
             be
             highly
             respected
             of
             the
             people
             ,
             and
             did
             infinitely
             exalt
             his
             authoritie
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             6.
             part
             of
             this
             prophecie
             .
          
           
             13
             And
             he
             did
             great
             wonders
             ,
             so
             that
             he
             made
             fire
             to
             come
             downe
             from
             heaven
             on
             the
             earth
             in
             the
             sight
             of
             men
             .
          
           
             14
             And
             deceived
             them
             that
             dwell
             on
             
             the
             earth
             by
             the
             signes
             which
             were
             permitted
             him
             to
             do
             in
             the
             sight
             of
             the
             beast
             ,
             saying
             to
             thē
             that
             dwell
             on
             the
             earth
             ,
             that
             they
             shoulde
             make
             the
             image
             of
             the
             beast
             which
             had
             the
             wound
             of
             a
             sword
             ,
             and
             did
             liue
             .
          
           
             15
             And
             it
             was
             permitted
             to
             him
             to
             giue
             a
             spirit
             vnto
             the
             image
             of
             the
             beast
             ;
             so
             that
             the
             image
             of
             the
             beast
             shoulde
             speake
             ,
             and
             should
             cause
             that
             as
             many
             as
             would
             not
             worship
             the
             image
             of
             the
             beast
             should
             be
             killed
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Explication
             .
          
           
             13
             And
             this
             Pope
             wrought
             miracles
             ,
             in
             so
             much
             that
             he
             sent
             forth
             the
             lightnings
             ,
             and
             thunderbolts
             of
             his
             excommunications
             against
             Kings
             ,
             and
             their
             people
             :
             and
             caused
             S.
             Anthonies
             fire
             to
             come
             downe
             from
             heavē
             and
             made
             it
             thunder
             and
             lighten
             by
             a
             miracle
             .
          
           
             14
             And
             the
             people
             vvere
             seduced
             because
             of
             the
             miracles
             which
             God
             did
             suffer
             him
             to
             doe
             ,
             for
             the
             authorizing
             of
             this
             Romane
             Papal
             Empire
             ,
             commanding
             the
             people
             to
             make
             vp
             the
             image
             of
             the
             ancient
             Roman
             Empire
             again
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             to
             serue
             the
             Roman
             Papall
             Empire
             with
             the
             same
             manner
             of
             obedience
             as
             they
             did
             the
             ancient
             Romane
             
             Empire
             ,
             which
             being
             demolished
             was
             built
             vp
             againe
             by
             the
             Roman
             Hierarchie
             .
          
           
             15
             And
             God
             did
             suffer
             him
             to
             giue
             force
             and
             strength
             to
             this
             Papall
             Empire
             ,
             or
             Hierarchie
             ,
             made
             after
             the
             image
             of
             the
             ancient
             Empire
             ,
             for
             the
             spirituall
             power
             that
             it
             did
             vsurpe
             gaue
             soule
             and
             life
             to
             its
             temporall
             power
             .
             Which
             Papall
             Empire
             being
             nothing
             else
             but
             an
             imaginarie
             Empire
             ,
             and
             which
             consisteth
             only
             in
             the
             opinion
             of
             such
             as
             yeelde
             obedience
             vnto
             it
             ,
             neverthelesse
             speakes
             prowde
             things
             ,
             and
             makes
             all
             such
             to
             be
             massacred
             and
             burnt
             ,
             that
             shall
             refuse
             to
             subiect
             themselues
             to
             this
             imaginarie
             Empire
             ,
             made
             according
             to
             the
             image
             of
             the
             ancient
             Roman
             Empire
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Proofe
             of
             the
             exposition
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Holy
               Ghost
            
             giu●●
             one
             more
             marke
             yet
             to
             know
             the
             〈◊〉
             by
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             he
             shall
             worke
             great
             sig●●s
             ,
             and
             miracles
             .
             As
             for
             the
             miracles
             of
             paperie
             wee
             haue
             spoken
             sufficiently
             of
             them
             alreadie
             .
             Amongst
             other
             signes
             ,
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             saith
             that
             
             he
             shall
             make
             fire
             fall
             downe
             from
             heavē
             .
             Whether
             it
             be
             that
             we
             are
             to
             vnderstande
             this
             of
             S.
             *
             Anthonies
             fire
             which
             the
             begging
             friars
             in
             times
             past
             made
             to
             fall
             vpon
             such
             as
             offended
             them
             ;
             or
             whether
             it
             be
             to
             vnderstood
             of
             the
             divers
             shrines
             ,
             and
             popish
             reliques
             ,
             which
             when
             a
             man
             pul●
             down
             ,
             the
             heaven
             straight
             waies
             is
             on
             fire
             ,
             and
             there
             is
             nothing
             but
             raine
             ,
             and
             lightning
             ;
             or
             whether
             it
             be
             that
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             speakes
             this
             of
             spirituall
             thunderbolts
             such
             as
             are
             the
             Popes
             excōmunications
             ,
             vnder
             which
             Christian
             realmes
             some
             600
             or
             700.
             years
             since
             did
             tremble
             .
          
           
             These
             things
             are
             done
             (
             saith
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             )
             by
             the
             seconde
             beast
             in
             the
             presence
             of
             the
             first
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             by
             the
             Pope
             in
             the
             presēce
             of
             the
             
               Romā
               Hierarchical
               Empire
            
             ,
             in
             the
             same
             place
             where
             the
             seate
             of
             the
             Empire
             is
             ,
             &
             for
             the
             authorising
             therof
             .
             Which
             
               Hierarchical
               Empire
            
             ▪
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             by
             an
             admirable
             kinde
             of
             speech
             ,
             and
             full
             of
             waight
             ,
             cals
             the
             image
             of
             the
             first
             beast
             :
             because
             that
             although
             the
             
               Roman
               Hierarchie
            
             ,
             be
             a
             continuation
             ,
             and
             succession
             of
             the
             ancient
             
               Roman
               Monarchie
            
             ,
             and
             is
             〈◊〉
             in
             this
             book
             by
             the
             same
             beast
             .
             Neverthelesse
             ,
             if
             we
             consider
             the
             point
             somewhat
             
             better
             ,
             and
             looke
             a
             little
             neerer
             into
             the
             matter
             ,
             wee
             shall
             finde
             that
             it
             is
             rather
             an
             image
             and
             imitation
             of
             the
             ancient
             
               Roman
               Empire
            
             ,
             and
             a
             kinde
             of
             part
             that
             is
             acted
             vpon
             the
             seat
             of
             the
             ancient
             Empire
             .
             So
             the
             
               Roman
               Hierarchie
            
             is
             called
             the
             image
             of
             the
             beast
             ,
             both
             because
             it
             is
             built
             in
             imitation
             of
             the
             
               Roman
               Empire
            
             ,
             as
             wee
             haue
             shewed
             aboue
             by
             14
             examples
             ,
             as
             also
             because
             it
             is
             an
             imaginarie
             Empire
             ,
             which
             doth
             consist
             only
             in
             the
             opinion
             of
             the
             subiects
             .
             Since
             the
             power
             therof
             hurts
             none
             but
             such
             as
             feare
             it
             .
             Its
             dispensations
             are
             worth
             as
             much
             ,
             as
             we
             esteeme
             them
             to
             be
             worth
             ;
             set
             light
             by
             the
             Popes
             thunderbolts
             ,
             and
             you
             shall
             sleepe
             the
             better
             .
             The
             price
             of
             his
             holy
             Graines
             ,
             Agnus
             Dei
             ,
             Beads
             ,
             holy
             roses
             ,
             and
             consecrated
             mantles
             ,
             cōsists
             only
             in
             the
             opiniō
             of
             the
             buyers
             .
             And
             his
             trading
             of
             late
             begins
             not
             to
             be
             so
             good
             as
             it
             was
             .
             Should
             a
             Prince
             or
             .
             cōmon
             wealth
             but
             a
             hundreth
             years
             since
             haue
             done
             but
             a
             quarter
             of
             that
             which
             the
             Venetians
             haue
             within
             these
             few
             years
             ,
             he
             (
             being
             bound
             hand
             and
             foot
             )
             had
             beene
             cast
             downe
             into
             hell
             and
             given
             to
             the
             Divell
             without
             all
             remission
             .
             The
             Croysade
             had
             beene
             preached
             against
             him
             in
             al
             places
             ,
             
             by
             vertue
             of
             which
             millions
             of
             men
             would
             haue
             assembled
             themselues
             together
             from
             all
             parts
             of
             Europe
             .
             to
             fall
             vpon
             the
             heretickes
             ,
             that
             so
             they
             might
             gaine
             Paradice
             .
             But
             the
             King
             of
             great
             Brittaine
             ,
             which
             hath
             stript
             the
             whore
             ,
             and
             laid
             opē
             her
             mysteries
             ,
             doth
             even
             to
             this
             day
             stand
             still
             vnexcommunicated
             .
             The
             gunpowder
             threatnings
             ,
             are
             more
             dangerous
             then
             the
             Popes
             excommunications
             .
          
           
             Now
             albeit
             this
             Hierarchie
             be
             an
             image
             of
             the
             ancient
             Empire
             ,
             yet
             Saint
             Iohn
             saith
             that
             this
             image
             doth
             liue
             and
             speake
             ,
             and
             that
             this
             second
             beast
             which
             is
             the
             Pope
             ,
             giues
             life
             vnto
             it
             ,
             &
             makes
             it
             speak
             ;
             words
             wonderfully
             expresse
             ,
             and
             significant
             .
             For
             the
             temporall
             power
             of
             the
             Popes
             Hierarchicall
             Empire
             would
             be
             nothing
             else
             but
             a
             dead
             image
             of
             the
             ancient
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             were
             it
             not
             that
             the
             spirituall
             power
             ,
             did
             quicken
             the
             temporall
             ,
             and
             giue
             strength
             vnto
             it
             .
             For
             it
             is
             his
             spirituall
             power
             ,
             that
             accumulates
             such
             great
             store
             of
             goods
             ,
             and
             riches
             vpon
             the
             temporall
             ;
             which
             opens
             the
             peoples
             purses
             vnto
             him
             which
             forceth
             kings
             necks
             to
             bow
             ,
             which
             makes
             his
             thunderbolts
             so
             dreadfull
             ,
             which
             compels
             men
             to
             repaire
             from
             all
             
             quarters
             to
             Rome
             ,
             for
             to
             share
             of
             the
             spirituall
             liberalities
             of
             his
             Holinesse
             .
             Yet
             he
             is
             ever
             a
             gainer
             hereby
             ,
             and
             his
             spirituall
             power
             ,
             serues
             for
             nothing
             but
             to
             vphold
             his
             temporal
             ,
             as
             Guicciardine
             formerly
             alleaged
             ,
             affirmeth
             .
             It
             is
             the
             same
             spirituall
             power
             ,
             that
             makes
             this
             image
             of
             the
             beast
             to
             speake
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             which
             causeth
             that
             this
             Papall
             Empire
             (
             formed
             according
             to
             the
             pourtraiture
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             )
             should
             speake
             so
             big
             ,
             giue
             lawes
             ,
             pronounce
             decrees
             ,
             decide
             questions
             of
             faith
             with
             a
             finall
             resolution
             ,
             &
             command
             all
             such
             to
             bee
             put
             to
             death
             as
             shall
             refuse
             to
             obey
             him
             :
             sounding
             the
             trumpet
             from
             an
             high
             place
             ,
             thereby
             to
             incourage
             kings
             and
             people
             to
             exercise
             crueltie
             .
          
           
             This
             notwithstanding
             wee
             are
             to
             note
             one
             generall
             doctrine
             ,
             that
             as
             they
             are
             not
             the
             carvers
             ,
             nor
             founders
             ,
             that
             make
             Idols
             but
             they
             which
             serue
             them
             ,
             so
             also
             in
             this
             place
             ,
             that
             the
             Pope
             which
             is
             the
             founder
             of
             this
             image
             ,
             and
             principall
             promoter
             of
             this
             Hierarchie
             resembling
             the
             Romā
             Empire
             ,
             is
             not
             he
             for
             all
             that
             which
             hath
             made
             it
             to
             be
             an
             image
             ,
             but
             the
             opinion
             of
             the
             people
             .
             Wherefore
             S.
             Iohn
             saith
             that
             this
             second
             beast
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             Pope
             caused
             
             the
             inhabitants
             of
             the
             earth
             to
             make
             an
             image
             of
             the
             first
             beast
             ,
             and
             to
             erect
             an
             Empire
             like
             to
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             that
             was
             decayed
             ▪
             For
             it
             is
             not
             the
             subtiltie
             of
             the
             Popes
             that
             hath
             made
             this
             Papall
             Empire
             ,
             but
             the
             stupiditie
             of
             the
             people
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             7.
             part
             of
             this
             Prophecie
             .
          
           
             16
             And
             hee
             made
             all
             ,
             both
             small
             and
             great
             rich
             and
             poore●
             ,
             free
             and
             bond
             ,
             to
             receaue
             a
             marke
             in
             their
             right
             hand
             or
             in
             their
             foreheads
             .
          
           
             17
             And
             that
             no
             man
             might
             buy
             or
             sel
             saue
             he
             that
             had
             the
             marke
             ,
             or
             the
             name
             of
             the
             beast
             ,
             or
             the
             number
             of
             his
             name
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Explication
             .
          
           
             16
             And
             hee
             made
             all
             both
             small
             and
             great
             ,
             rich
             and
             poore
             ,
             bond
             and
             free
             ,
             to
             giue
             him
             their
             hāds
             ,
             &
             to
             take
             an
             oath
             to
             be
             faithfull
             vnto
             him
             ,
             and
             to
             be
             markt
             by
             their
             actions
             .
             And
             their
             foreheads
             were
             markt
             with
             the
             marke
             of
             confirmation
             ;
             &
             they
             made
             profession
             of
             his
             religion
             ,
             which
             profession
             of
             religion
             is
             often
             in
             holy
             Scripture
             ,
             called
             by
             the
             name
             of
             a
             marke
             in
             the
             forehead
             .
          
           
           
             17
             And
             hee
             tooke
             order
             that
             no
             man
             might
             trafficke
             ,
             nor
             sell
             ,
             nor
             buy
             ,
             nor
             exchange
             benefices
             ,
             nor
             be
             suffered
             to
             purchase
             an
             Archbishops
             pall
             ,
             nor
             haue
             a
             license
             ,
             nor
             any
             part
             in
             the
             Church
             goods
             ,
             no
             nor
             yet
             buy
             an
             estate
             ,
             if
             he
             had
             not
             the
             name
             and
             profession
             of
             a
             Romanist
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Proofe
             .
          
           
             By
             the
             right
             hande
             is
             meant
             the
             outward
             actions
             .
             This
             is
             a
             fashion
             of
             speech
             vsuall
             with
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             .
             As
             in
             the
             144.
             
             
               Psalme
               ,
               ver
            
             .
             8.
             
             
               Whose
               right
               hand
               is
               a
               right
               hand
               of
               falshood
               ,
            
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             disloyall
             in
             their
             actions
             .
             And
             there
             is
             nothing
             more
             common
             in
             scripture
             ,
             then
             by
             the
             cleanenesse
             ,
             or
             vncleannesse
             of
             the
             hands
             ,
             to
             vnderstand
             the
             iustice
             or
             iniustice
             of
             the
             actions
             ,
             as
             Psal.
             18.
             ver
             .
             25.
             
             
               &
               Psal.
            
             24.
             ver
             .
             4.
             
             By
             the
             right
             hand
             wee
             may
             likewise
             vnderstand
             the
             promise
             of
             fidelitie
             ,
             as
             
               S.
               Paul
            
             in
             the
             second
             to
             the
             
               Galath
               .
               v.
            
             9.
             saith
             that
             
               Iames
               ,
               Peter
            
             ,
             and
             Iohn
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             gaue
             him
             and
             Barnabas
             their
             
               right
               hands
            
             .
             So
             in
             the
             last
             chap.
             of
             the
             1.
             book
             of
             Chronicles
             ,
             all
             the
             sonnes
             of
             king
             David
             ,
             gaue
             their
             hands
             to
             bee
             vnder
             king
             Salomon
             .
             
             That
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             tooke
             an
             oath
             of
             alleagiance
             to
             be
             true
             subiects
             vnto
             him
             .
          
           
             As
             for
             the
             marke
             in
             the
             forehead
             ,
             the
             Apocalyps
             it selfe
             shews
             vs
             ,
             what
             the
             meaning
             of
             this
             is
             .
             For
             in
             the
             9.
             chap.
             &
             4.
             ver
             .
             the
             Locusts
             are
             commanded
             ,
             
               not
               to
               hurt
               the
               grasse
               of
               the
               earth
               ,
               neither
               any
               greene
               thing
               ,
               neither
               any
               tree
               ,
               but
               only
               those
               men
               which
               haue
               not
               the
               seale
               of
               God
               in
               their
               foreheads
               .
            
             And
             in
             the
             7.
             cha
             .
             God
             doth
             marke
             his
             faithful
             servants
             in
             their
             foreheads
             .
             As
             therefore
             the
             truely
             faithfull
             are
             not
             marked
             in
             the
             forehead
             with
             any
             visible
             mark
             but
             this
             marke
             in
             the
             foreheade
             is
             the
             vnfeigned
             profession
             of
             a
             true
             Christian
             ,
             so
             likewise
             the
             marke
             of
             a
             beast
             in
             the
             forehead
             of
             a
             man
             ,
             is
             the
             profession
             of
             beeing
             faithfull
             vnto
             the
             beast
             ,
             as
             Thomas
             also
             doth
             expound
             it
             in
             the
             3.
             
             P.
             of
             his
             summes
             63.
             quest
             .
             and
             3.
             
             Art.
             *
             
               By
               the
               Character
               of
               the
               beast
               we
               may
               vnderstand
               either
               an
               obstinate
               malice
               ,
               by
               reason
               of
               which
               some
               are
               adiudged
               to
               everlasting
               punishment
               ,
               or
               the
               profession
               of
               an
               vnlawfull
               religion
               .
            
             This
             marke
             therefore
             is
             the
             profession
             of
             Popery
             .
             But
             if
             any
             one
             be
             desirous
             rather
             to
             know
             of
             a
             marke
             really
             imprinted
             in
             the
             forehead
             ,
             there
             is
             the
             marke
             of
             confirmation
             may
             
             satisfie
             him
             ,
             with
             which
             the
             Bishop
             doeth
             marke
             children
             in
             the
             forehead
             ,
             without
             which
             marke
             the
             *
             decrees
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             pronoūce
             that
             a
             man
             is
             but
             halfe
             a
             Christian.
             
          
           
             Without
             this
             marke
             ,
             and
             profession
             of
             Poperie
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             saith
             that
             no
             man
             is
             admitted
             to
             sell
             or
             buy
             ,
             for
             all
             the
             goods
             of
             this
             Papall
             Empire
             are
             bought
             and
             sold.
             It
             is
             nothing
             else
             but
             a
             bare
             traffique
             .
             Benefices
             are
             exchanged
             vpon
             certaine
             considerations
             ;
             He
             that
             hath
             but
             a
             leane
             bishopricke
             layes
             about
             him
             howe
             hee
             might
             scorce
             it
             for
             a
             fatter
             .
             As
             soone
             as
             ever
             an
             Abbotship
             or
             benefice
             is
             vacant
             ,
             manie
             may
             sue
             ,
             but
             he
             shall
             be
             sure
             to
             carry
             it
             away
             that
             can
             bribe
             best
             ,
             &
             giue
             the
             greatest
             presents
             .
             There
             are
             Abbotships
             conferred
             vpon
             Captaines
             ,
             and
             illiterat
             men
             ,
             Bishopricks
             ,
             and
             Cardinalships
             bestowed
             on
             little
             children
             ;
             and
             sometimes
             in
             waie
             of
             recompense
             for
             vnhonest
             services
             .
             To
             be
             briefe
             it
             is
             a
             most
             shamefull
             merchandize
             .
             And
             how
             should
             not
             these
             things
             be
             sold
             ,
             since
             that
             God
             himselfe
             is
             sold
             ,
             and
             that
             we
             haue
             heard
             aboue
             how
             
               Pope
               Pius
            
             the
             2.
             complaineth
             that
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             is
             sold
             at
             Rome
             ,
             and
             the
             forgiuenesse
             of
             sins
             ?
             
             Nowe
             I
             am
             of
             opinion
             that
             it
             is
             easier
             for
             them
             to
             sell
             him
             ,
             then
             to
             deliuer
             him
             after
             they
             haue
             sold
             him
             .
          
           
             No
             man
             (
             according
             to
             the
             rules
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             )
             may
             haue
             a
             share
             in
             the
             emoluments
             of
             this
             merchandize
             ,
             but
             only
             he
             which
             shall
             professe
             himselfe
             to
             be
             a
             Roman
             ,
             and
             to
             be
             of
             the
             church
             of
             Rome
             ,
             &
             a
             true
             subiect
             to
             the
             Pope
             .
             The
             formes
             of
             the
             admission
             of
             Bishops
             ,
             Archbishops
             Cardinals
             ,
             Knights
             of
             Malta
             ,
             yea
             and
             of
             kings
             themselues
             ,
             haue
             this
             article
             inserted
             expresly
             in
             them
             ,
             of
             fidelitie
             and
             obedience
             to
             the
             Papall
             See.
             
          
        
         
           
             The
             8.
             part
             of
             this
             prophecie
             .
          
           
             17
             And
             hee
             tooke
             order
             that
             no
             man
             might
             buy
             or
             sell
             ;
             saue
             he
             that
             had
             the
             marke
             or
             the
             name
             of
             the
             beast
             or
             the
             number
             of
             his
             name
             .
          
           
             18
             Here
             is
             wisdome
             .
             Let
             him
             that
             hath
             wit
             ,
             count
             the
             nūber
             of
             the
             beast
             :
             for
             it
             is
             the
             number
             of
             a
             man
             ,
             and
             his
             number
             is
             666.
             
          
        
         
           
             The
             Explication
             .
          
           
             17
             And
             hee
             tooke
             order
             that
             no
             man
             
             might
             trafficke
             ,
             nor
             sel
             ,
             nor
             buy
             ,
             nor
             exchāge
             benefices
             ,
             nor
             bee
             suffered
             to
             purchase
             an
             Archbishops
             Pall
             ,
             nor
             haue
             a
             Licence
             ,
             nor
             any
             part
             in
             the
             Church
             goods
             ,
             no
             nor
             yet
             buy
             an
             estate
             ,
             if
             he
             had
             not
             the
             name
             and
             profession
             of
             a
             Romanist
             :
             and
             were
             not
             of
             the
             number
             of
             those
             which
             are
             marked
             with
             the
             figures
             ,
             or
             numbers
             of
             the
             letters
             of
             his
             name
             .
          
           
             18
             In
             which
             number
             they
             which
             think
             themselues
             the
             wisest
             may
             finde
             some
             thing
             worth
             their
             search
             .
             Whosoever
             hath
             understanding
             let
             him
             diligently
             calculate
             the
             summe
             ,
             to
             which
             these
             Greeke
             Cyphars
             or
             numbers
             of
             the
             Pope
             of
             Rome
             doe
             amount
             ;
             for
             it
             is
             an
             vsuall
             number
             amongest
             men
             ,
             and
             therefore
             easie
             to
             be
             vnderstood
             .
             And
             this
             number
             to
             which
             the
             Greeke
             letters
             of
             his
             name
             doe
             amount
             ,
             is
             666.
             
             For
             this
             word
             ,
             Latin
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             ordinary
             name
             by
             which
             the
             Greeke
             church
             doth
             call
             those
             of
             the
             Roman
             Church
             ,
             and
             their
             head
             )
             being
             written
             in
             Greeke
             ,
             and
             after
             calculated
             makes
             vp
             iust
             666.
             
             Which
             number
             also
             by
             an
             admirable
             occurrence
             ,
             doth
             admonish
             you
             that
             666.
             yeares
             after
             the
             revealing
             of
             this
             prophecie
             ,
             this
             2
             beast
             ,
             to
             wit
             the
             Pope
             ,
             shall
             beginne
             to
             heale
             the
             wound
             of
             the
             ancient
             Empire
             ,
             and
             place
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             again
             in
             its
             former
             seat
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             The
             Proofe
             .
          
           
             Of
             the
             traffick
             ,
             and
             the
             marke
             ,
             we
             haue
             said
             enough
             already
             .
             But
             concerning
             the
             number
             of
             the
             name
             of
             the
             second
             beast
             there
             is
             more
             difficultie
             :
             There
             bee
             two
             things
             that
             giue
             vs
             some
             light
             in
             this
             matter
             ,
             the
             one
             is
             ,
             that
             S.
             Iohn
             saith
             ,
             that
             the
             number
             is
             the
             number
             of
             a
             man
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             a
             number
             vsuall
             amongst
             men
             ;
             So
             hee
             puts
             vs
             out
             of
             the
             labour
             of
             seeking
             after
             mysticall
             numbers
             ,
             as
             when
             a
             day
             is
             taken
             for
             a
             yeare
             .
             The
             other
             is
             ,
             that
             since
             the
             question
             is
             of
             numbring
             or
             cyphring
             the
             Letters
             of
             this
             name
             ,
             this
             name
             must
             of
             necessity
             be
             in
             a
             tongue
             ,
             the
             letters
             of
             which
             are
             cyphers
             or
             Arithmeticall
             numbers
             .
             Now
             this
             is
             proper
             to
             the
             Greeke
             and
             Hebrew
             tongues
             ,
             to
             haue
             no
             other
             cyphers
             but
             the
             letters
             of
             their
             Alphabet
             .
             But
             being
             that
             S.
             Iohn
             wrote
             in
             Greeke
             ,
             &
             that
             to
             the
             Greeke
             churches
             too
             ,
             this
             name
             cannot
             but
             be
             Greeke
             .
             S.
             Irenee
             following
             these
             rules
             ,
             noted
             (
             two
             hundreth
             yeares
             after
             the
             birth
             of
             our
             Saviour
             ,
             that
             the
             letters
             of
             cyphars
             of
             this
             word
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             Latin
             ,
             being
             added
             together
             make
             vp
             iust
             666.
             
             Now
             to
             knowe
             whether
             this
             name
             bee
             the
             true
             name
             or
             
             no
             of
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             ,
             we
             are
             not
             to
             look
             to
             the
             fashion
             of
             speech
             that
             is
             in
             vse
             with
             vs
             now
             adaies
             in
             France
             or
             Italy
             ,
             but
             to
             the
             Greeks
             manner
             of
             speaking
             ,
             seeing
             that
             S.
             Iohn
             wrote
             in
             Greeke
             and
             to
             the
             Greekes
             ;
             and
             into
             the
             nature
             of
             the
             thing
             .
          
           
             We
             are
             therefore
             to
             knowe
             that
             after
             the
             Empire
             was
             translated
             ,
             the
             Cittie
             of
             Constantinople
             was
             called
             new
             Rome
             ,
             and
             the
             Countrie
             about
             commonly
             called
             Thracia
             was
             called
             Romania
             likewise
             ,
             and
             is
             so
             called
             to
             this
             day
             .
             But
             as
             for
             the
             churches
             of
             
               Italie
               ,
               France
            
             ,
             and
             Spaine
             ,
             which
             are
             reckoned
             vnder
             the
             Roman
             Patriarchat
             ,
             the
             Greekes
             doe
             commonly
             call
             thē
             the
             Latin
             churches
             .
             When
             the
             Greeks
             see
             a
             french
             man
             or
             German
             in
             their
             country
             ,
             they
             aske
             him
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ?
             Are
             you
             a
             Latin
             ?
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             as
             we
             vse
             to
             speake
             here
             with
             vs
             ,
             are
             you
             of
             the
             Romish
             Church
             ?
             So
             at
             the
             end
             of
             the
             Councell
             of
             Florence
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             long
             list
             of
             the
             names
             and
             subscriptions
             of
             the
             Greeke
             Bishops
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             second
             place
             the
             subscriptions
             of
             the
             Bishops
             of
             the
             Romish
             Church
             ,
             amongst
             which
             there
             bee
             some
             French
             men
             ,
             and
             Spaniardes
             ,
             and
             Flemmings
             ,
             and
             yet
             neverthelesse
             over
             the
             head
             of
             all
             
             these
             subscriptions
             is
             written
             ,
             
               Subscriptiones
               Latinorum
               patrum
            
             ;
             So
             Nilus
             Bishop
             of
             Thessalonica
             wrote
             two
             books
             in
             greek
             one
             against
             Purgatory
             ,
             the
             other
             against
             the
             Primacie
             of
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             ,
             where
             he
             speakes
             (
             I
             know
             not
             how
             often
             )
             of
             the
             Latins
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Latin
             Church
             ,
             without
             ever
             calling
             it
             the
             Romā
             church
             .
             Let
             this
             therefore
             bee
             taken
             for
             certaine
             ,
             that
             then
             when
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             became
             a
             Monarch
             ,
             and
             erected
             an
             earthly
             Empire
             at
             Rome
             (
             for
             this
             is
             the
             time
             of
             which
             S.
             Iohn
             doth
             prophecie
             )
             the
             Roman
             Church
             was
             commonly
             called
             the
             Latin
             Church
             ,
             and
             by
             a
             consequent
             ,
             the
             head
             thereof
             was
             called
             Latin.
             
          
           
             As
             for
             the
             nature
             of
             the
             thing
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             name
             that
             is
             more
             agreeing
             vnto
             it
             ;
             seeing
             that
             the
             Latin
             tongue
             only
             is
             received
             in
             Popish
             churches
             ;
             all
             their
             service
             is
             said
             in
             Latin
             ,
             the
             people
             are
             taught
             to
             pray
             in
             Latin
             ;
             the
             Buls
             ,
             and
             Indulgences
             ,
             and
             letters
             of
             absolution
             are
             all
             made
             in
             Latin
             ,
             the
             holy
             scripture
             is
             not
             allowed
             of
             but
             in
             Latin
             ,
             and
             the
             Latin
             translation
             is
             preferred
             before
             the
             originall
             .
             And
             it
             is
             not
             long
             since
             that
             in
             the
             court
             of
             Parliament
             ,
             and
             seates
             of
             
             Iustice
             ,
             al
             the
             decrees
             ,
             and
             sentences
             ,
             acts
             ,
             and
             publike
             instrumentes
             were
             set
             downe
             in
             Latin.
             To
             conclude
             ,
             all
             that
             is
             there
             is
             Latin.
             I
             am
             verily
             perswaded
             that
             Irenaeus
             speaking
             this
             had
             no
             reference
             to
             the
             bishop
             of
             Rome
             ,
             for
             although
             he
             take
             vp
             Victor
             bishop
             of
             Rome
             somewhat
             short
             ,
             for
             his
             sharpnesse
             &
             violence
             ,
             yet
             the
             bishops
             of
             Rome
             in
             his
             time
             were
             so
             poore
             and
             feeble
             ,
             that
             no
             man
             could
             possibly
             imagin
             that
             they
             shoulde
             ever
             haue
             come
             to
             this
             heigth
             .
             And
             indeed
             Irenaeus
             was
             rather
             led
             away
             by
             the
             coniecture
             of
             other
             names
             ,
             where
             the
             selfe
             same
             number
             is
             foūd
             .
             But
             the
             experience
             of
             succeeding
             ages
             hath
             refuted
             his
             other
             coniectures
             ,
             &
             ratified
             this
             ,
             by
             which
             he
             hath
             opened
             a
             way
             vnto
             vs
             to
             know
             the
             truth
             ,
             which
             he
             could
             not
             liue
             to
             know
             by
             experience
             ,
             as
             we
             haue
             .
          
           
             But
             if
             besides
             this
             we
             shew
             that
             not
             only
             the
             number
             of
             666.
             is
             found
             within
             this
             word
             Latin
             :
             but
             also
             that
             this
             very
             number
             doth
             point
             out
             the
             time
             vnto
             vs
             exactly
             in
             which
             the
             Pope
             became
             to
             be
             a
             Monarch
             ,
             &
             began
             to
             lift
             vp
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             into
             its
             former
             seat
             ,
             then
             I
             hope
             that
             they
             which
             are
             most
             set
             against
             this
             doctrine
             ,
             
             will
             wonder
             at
             this
             interpretation
             ,
             and
             by
             an
             amazed
             silence
             giue
             the
             glorie
             to
             God.
             
          
           
             We
             must
             vnderstand
             therfore
             ,
             that
             the
             first
             persecution
             of
             Christians
             (
             raised
             vp
             by
             Nero
             in
             the
             last
             yeare
             of
             his
             raigne
             )
             fell
             out
             in
             the
             year
             of
             our
             Lord
             ,
             69.
             
             Fourteene
             yeares
             after
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             in
             the
             yeare
             83.
             
             Domitian
             began
             an
             other
             persecution
             ,
             in
             which
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             was
             cited
             to
             Rome
             ,
             and
             thence
             banished
             into
             the
             Isle
             of
             Pathmos
             ,
             as
             
               S.
               Hierome
            
             witnesseth
             in
             his
             *
             Catalogue
             .
             This
             persecution
             was
             more
             gentle
             then
             the
             others
             ,
             and
             the
             Emperour
             went
             not
             so
             farre
             as
             bloud
             ,
             as
             he
             did
             afterwardes
             towardes
             the
             ende
             of
             his
             raigne
             .
             In
             this
             Isle
             ,
             did
             this
             Revelation
             appeare
             to
             
               S.
               Iohn
               ,
               Apoc.
            
             1.
             ver
             .
             9.
             which
             afterward
             he
             committed
             to
             writing
             ,
             towards
             the
             end
             of
             Domitians
             raigne
             as
             Irenaeus
             witnesseth
             in
             his
             fifth
             booke
             .
             For
             he
             remained
             in
             this
             Island
             vntill
             the
             time
             that
             Nerva
             came
             to
             rule
             ,
             which
             began
             his
             raigne
             in
             the
             yeare
             97.
             
             Seeing
             therfore
             that
             the
             Pope
             began
             to
             be
             a
             commander
             &
             temporal
             Prince
             in
             Rome
             &
             Italie
             in
             the
             yeare
             of
             our
             Lord
             ,
             755.
             by
             the
             indiscreete
             liberality
             of
             Pepin
             king
             of
             Fraunce
             :
             if
             ye
             go
             666.
             yeares
             higher
             ,
             yee
             
             shal
             light
             vpon
             the
             yeare
             of
             our
             Lord
             ,
             89.
             
             In
             which
             yeare
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             was
             yet
             in
             the
             Isle
             of
             Pathmos
             ,
             where
             he
             cōtinued
             some
             few
             years
             after
             ,
             at
             what
             time
             he
             had
             leasure
             to
             commit
             that
             to
             writing
             ,
             which
             he
             had
             received
             from
             God
             by
             Revelation
             .
             It
             is
             true
             that
             Pepin
             ,
             and
             
               Charles
               the
               Great
            
             his
             son
             ,
             &
             
               Lewis
               the
               Debonnayre
            
             his
             grand-child
             which
             gaue
             this
             donation
             ,
             did
             yet
             reserue
             the
             right
             of
             soveraignty
             vnto
             themselues
             .
             But
             for
             all
             this
             the
             Pope
             did
             not
             spare
             to
             labour
             the
             best
             he
             could
             to
             make
             himselfe
             a
             monarch
             ,
             and
             did
             even
             at
             that
             time
             lay
             his
             proiects
             for
             the
             compassing
             of
             a
             Monarchie
             ,
             taking
             vpon
             him
             to
             bestow
             the
             dignitie
             of
             a
             Patrician
             vpon
             Pepin
             ,
             which
             none
             but
             the
             Emperours
             could
             conferre
             ,
             &
             presuming
             to
             set
             the
             Imperiall
             Crowne
             vpon
             the
             head
             of
             
               Charles
               the
               Great
            
             ,
             and
             that
             by
             a
             sleight
             ,
             the
             said
             Charles
             the
             great
             not
             marking
             so
             much
             ,
             and
             after
             being
             angry
             with
             him
             for
             so
             doing
             ,
             and
             saying
             as
             he
             went
             out
             ,
             that
             if
             hee
             had
             thought
             the
             Pope
             would
             haue
             vsed
             him
             so
             ,
             he
             woulde
             not
             haue
             come
             into
             the
             Church
             ,
             as
             Eginard
             witnesseth
             in
             his
             history
             .
             So
             the
             Pope
             encreasing
             dayly
             more
             and
             more
             ,
             did
             in
             fine
             driue
             the
             successours
             of
             Pepin
             ,
             and
             
             Charles
             the
             great
             his
             benefactours
             out
             of
             all
             Italie
             :
             and
             hath
             brought
             them
             to
             kisse
             his
             feet
             ,
             and
             to
             hold
             their
             crownes
             at
             his
             mercie
             and
             discretion
             ,
             calling
             himselfe
             Lord
             commander
             over
             the
             Empire
             ,
             and
             bragging
             that
             he
             hath
             receiued
             the
             dominion
             of
             heaven
             and
             earth
             from
             God.
             
          
           
             Now
             here
             I
             cannot
             but
             wonder
             at
             the
             rashnesse
             of
             some
             which
             dare
             accuse
             Irenee
             for
             writing
             this
             word
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             falslie
             with
             an
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             as
             if
             a
             Graecian
             ,
             and
             one
             of
             the
             learnedst
             amongst
             them
             ,
             knew
             not
             howe
             to
             write
             true
             orthography
             in
             his
             owne
             tongue
             .
             For
             although
             this
             word
             bee
             also
             written
             without
             an
             Iota
             ,
             yet
             they
             which
             haue
             any
             skil
             in
             the
             tongue
             ,
             do
             know
             that
             the
             Graecians
             did
             vse
             to
             write
             an
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             where
             the
             Latins
             wrote
             an
             I.
             So
             Nilus
             ,
             and
             Epirus
             ,
             and
             Mithras
             ,
             are
             written
             in
             Greeke
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             
               Ioseph
               Scaliger
            
             in
             his
             notes
             vpon
             Eusebius
             Chronicle
             ,
             page
             106.
             markes
             how
             the
             Graecians
             doe
             often
             turne
             the
             I
             ,
             of
             the
             Latins
             into
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             when
             it
             is
             long
             ,
             &
             that
             an
             N
             comes
             after
             ,
             as
             in
             these
             words
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Not
             that
             they
             did
             write
             it
             so
             still
             ,
             for
             this
             was
             left
             indifferent
             .
             Nor
             will
             any
             man
             wonder
             here
             at
             ,
             which
             knowes
             that
             the
             Latins
             did
             
             pronoūce
             their
             I
             long
             like
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             whence
             that
             inscription
             Capteiuei
             of
             a
             Comedie
             in
             Plautus
             comes
             ,
             and
             the
             verse
             of
             Lucilius
             cited
             by
             Quintilian
             in
             the
             first
             book
             of
             his
             oratoricall
             instructions
             ,
             
               Iam
               pueret
               venere
               ,
               è
               postremum
               facito
               atque
               I
               ,
            
             for
             hee
             helde
             that
             it
             should
             be
             written
             
               puerei
               ,
               mendacei
               ,
               furei
            
             .
             The
             importunity
             of
             our
             adversaries
             haue
             forced
             me
             to
             play
             the
             schoole
             boy
             ,
             and
             to
             rub
             vp
             my
             old
             Grammar
             learning
             ,
             in
             steed
             of
             admiring
             the
             secrets
             of
             the
             wisdome
             of
             God
             ,
             who
             vnder
             the
             transparent
             vaile
             of
             this
             prophecie
             ,
             hath
             made
             vs
             to
             see
             ,
             and
             feele
             his
             truth
             .
          
           
             But
             here
             I
             am
             to
             admonish
             the
             reader
             that
             when
             I
             lay
             the
             accomplishment
             of
             of
             these
             666.
             yeares
             vpon
             the
             755
             year
             of
             our
             Lord
             ,
             I
             do
             not
             thereby
             vnderstande
             that
             Antichrist
             did
             but
             then
             begin
             to
             be
             made
             manifest
             .
             He
             was
             made
             knowne
             before
             by
             many
             effectes
             ,
             neverthelesse
             nothing
             like
             so
             manifestly
             as
             after
             when
             hee
             came
             to
             be
             an
             earthly
             Monarch
             :
             For
             hee
             had
             before
             this
             time
             taken
             the
             title
             of
             Head
             of
             the
             Church
             vpon
             him
             ,
             vnder
             a
             shew
             that
             in
             the
             contention
             between
             him
             and
             the
             bishop
             of
             Constantinople
             ,
             the
             Parricide
             Phocas
             had
             adiudged
             the
             Primacie
             
             to
             the
             bishop
             of
             Rome
             ,
             iust
             666.
             yeares
             after
             that
             Pompey
             had
             taken
             Ierusalem
             ,
             and
             subdued
             the
             nation
             of
             the
             Iewes
             which
             as
             then
             was
             the
             only
             church
             of
             God.
             For
             Pompey
             wrought
             this
             exploite
             61
             yeares
             after
             the
             birth
             of
             our
             Saviour
             in
             the
             consulship
             of
             Cicero
             and
             Antonie
             ,
             and
             Phocas
             gaue
             the
             Primacie
             to
             Boniface
             the
             3.
             in
             the
             yeare
             of
             our
             Lord
             ,
             606.
             so
             that
             to
             count
             from
             this
             exploite
             of
             Pompey
             there
             are
             666.
             yeares
             :
             By
             this
             meanes
             betweene
             the
             subduing
             of
             the
             church
             of
             the
             old
             Testament
             by
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             and
             betweene
             the
             bondage
             of
             the
             church
             of
             the
             newe
             Testament
             by
             the
             bishop
             of
             Rome
             there
             are
             666.
             yeares
             ,
             which
             is
             an
             excellēt
             observation
             ,
             and
             which
             his
             Maiestie
             of
             Englād
             hath
             faithfully
             noted
             .
             But
             this
             13.
             chap.
             speaks
             not
             of
             the
             time
             in
             which
             Antichrist
             began
             to
             appeare
             ,
             but
             of
             the
             time
             in
             which
             he
             began
             to
             establish
             a
             worldlie
             Empire
             ,
             and
             encroach
             vpon
             the
             rights
             ,
             &
             imitate
             the
             actions
             of
             the
             Roman
             Emperour
             .
             Which
             he
             began
             666.
             yeares
             after
             this
             Revelation
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
           THE
           PROPHECIE
           CONTAIned
           in
           the
           14.
           
           Chap.
           of
           the
           Apocalyps
           .
           CHAP.
           5.
           
        
         
           
             
               1
               Then
               I
               looked
               ,
               &
               lo
               ,
               a
               Lamb
               stood
               on
               mount
               Sion
               ,
               and
               with
               him
               an
               hundreth
               ,
               fortie
               ,
               and
               foure
               thousand
               ,
               having
               his
               fathers
               name
               written
               in
               their
               foreheads
               .
            
             
               2
               And
               I
               heard
               a
               voice
               from
               heaven
               as
               the
               sound
               of
               many
               waters
               ,
               and
               as
               the
               sound
               of
               a
               great
               thunder
               :
               and
               I
               heard
               the
               voice
               of
               harpers
               ,
               harping
               with
               their
               harps
               .
            
             
               3
               And
               they
               sung
               as
               it
               were
               a
               new
               song
               before
               the
               throne
               ,
               and
               before
               the
               4.
               beastes
               ,
               and
               the
               elders
               :
               &
               no
               man
               could
               learne
               that
               song
               ,
               but
               the
               hundreth
               fortie
               and
               fowre
               thousand
               ,
               which
               were
               bought
               from
               the
               earth
               .
            
             
               4
               These
               are
               they
               which
               are
               not
               defiled
               with
               women
               :
               for
               they
               are
               Virgins
               :
               these
               follow
               the
               Lambe
               wheresoever
               he
               goeth
               :
               these
               are
               bought
               from
               men
               being
               the
               first
               fruits
               vnto
               God
               and
               vnto
               the
               Lambe
               .
            
             
               5
               And
               in
               their
               mouthes
               was
               founde
               no
               guile
               :
               for
               they
               are
               without
               spot
               before
               the
               throne
               of
               God.
               
            
             
               6
               Then
               I
               saw
               another
               Angell
               flie
               in
               
               the
               midst
               of
               heaven
               ,
               having
               an
               everlasting
               Gospell
               to
               preach
               vnto
               them
               that
               dwell
               on
               the
               earth
               ,
               and
               to
               every
               nation
               ,
               and
               kindred
               ,
               and
               tongue
               ,
               and
               people
               .
            
             
               7
               Saying
               with
               a
               lowd
               voice
               ,
               feare
               God
               ,
               and
               giue
               glorie
               to
               him
               ;
               for
               the
               howre
               of
               his
               Iudgement
               is
               come
               :
               and
               worship
               him
               that
               made
               heaven
               ,
               and
               earth
               ,
               and
               the
               sea
               ,
               and
               the
               fountaines
               of
               waters
               .
            
             
               8
               And
               there
               followed
               an
               other
               Angell
               saying
               Babylon
               that
               great
               cittie
               is
               fallen
               ,
               it
               is
               fallen
               :
               for
               shee
               made
               all
               nations
               to
               drinke
               of
               the
               wine
               of
               the
               wrath
               of
               her
               fornication
               .
            
             
               9
               And
               the
               third
               Angell
               followed
               thē
               saying
               with
               a
               lowd
               voice
               ,
               If
               any
               man
               worship
               the
               beast
               ,
               and
               his
               image
               ,
               &
               receiue
               his
               mark
               in
               his
               forehead
               ,
               or
               on
               his
               hands
               ;
            
             
               10
               The
               same
               shall
               drinke
               of
               the
               wine
               of
               the
               wrath
               of
               God
               yea
               of
               the
               pure
               wine
               ,
               which
               is
               powred
               into
               the
               cup
               of
               his
               wrath
               ,
               and
               hee
               shall
               bee
               tormented
               in
               fire
               and
               brimstone
               before
               the
               holy
               Angels
               ,
               and
               before
               the
               Lambe
               .
            
             
               11
               And
               the
               smoake
               of
               their
               torment
               shall
               ascend
               ever
               more
               :
               and
               they
               shall
               haue
               no
               rest
               day
               nor
               night
               ,
               which
               worship
               the
               beast
               and
               his
               image
               ,
               and
               whosoever
               receiveth
               the
               print
               of
               his
               name
               .
            
             
               12
               Here
               is
               the
               patience
               of
               Saints
               :
               here
               
               are
               they
               that
               keepe
               the
               commaundements
               of
               God
               ,
               and
               the
               faith
               of
               Iesus
               .
            
             
               13
               Then
               I
               heard
               a
               voice
               from
               heaven
               saying
               vnto
               me
               ,
               write
               ,
               The
               dead
               which
               die
               in
               the
               Lord
               are
               fully
               blessed
               .
               Even
               so
               saith
               the
               spirit
               :
               For
               they
               rest
               from
               their
               labours
               &
               their
               workes
               follow
               them
               .
            
             
               14
               And
               I
               looked
               ,
               and
               beholde
               a
               white
               clowde
               ,
               and
               vpon
               the
               clowde
               one
               sitting
               like
               to
               the
               sonne
               of
               man
               ,
               having
               on
               his
               head
               a
               golden
               crown
               ,
               and
               in
               his
               hand
               a
               sharp
               sickle
               .
            
             
               15
               And
               an
               other
               Angell
               came
               out
               of
               the
               Temple
               ,
               crying
               with
               a
               lowd
               voice
               to
               him
               that
               sate
               on
               the
               clowde
               ,
               Thrust
               in
               thy
               sickle
               and
               reape
               :
               for
               the
               time
               is
               come
               to
               reape
               ;
               for
               the
               harvest
               of
               the
               earth
               is
               ripe
               .
            
             
               16
               And
               he
               that
               sate
               on
               the
               clowd
               ,
               thrust
               in
               his
               sickle
               on
               the
               earth
               ,
               and
               the
               earth
               was
               reaped
               .
            
             
               17
               Then
               an
               other
               Angell
               came
               out
               of
               the
               the
               temple
               ,
               which
               is
               in
               heaven
               ,
               having
               also
               a
               sharpe
               sickle
               .
            
             
               18
               And
               another
               Angell
               came
               out
               from
               the
               altar
               ,
               which
               had
               power
               over
               fire
               ,
               &
               cried
               with
               a
               lowde
               crie
               to
               him
               that
               had
               the
               sharpe
               sickle
               ,
               and
               said
               ,
               Thrust
               in
               thy
               sharpe
               sickle
               ,
               &
               gather
               the
               clusters
               of
               the
               vineyard
               of
               the
               earth
               :
               for
               her
               grapes
               are
               ripe
               .
            
             
             
               19
               And
               the
               Angel
               thrust
               in
               his
               sharpe
               sickle
               on
               the
               earth
               and
               cut
               downe
               the
               vines
               of
               the
               vineyard
               of
               the
               earth
               ,
               and
               cast
               them
               in
               to
               that
               great
               wine
               presse
               of
               the
               wrath
               of
               God
            
             
               20
               And
               the
               wine
               presse
               was
               troden
               without
               the
               citty
               ,
               and
               bloud
               came
               out
               of
               the
               wine
               presse
               vnto
               the
               horse
               bridles
               ,
               by
               the
               space
               of
               a
               thousande
               and
               sixe
               hundreth
               furlongs
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             The
             Exposition
             .
          
           
             1
             After
             that
             God
             had
             made
             me
             to
             see
             the
             dominion
             of
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             figured
             by
             the
             second
             beast
             ,
             hee
             shewed
             Iesus
             Christ
             vnto
             me
             having
             the
             governement
             of
             his
             Church
             :
             and
             with
             him
             a
             great
             multitude
             of
             the
             faithfull
             of
             every
             tribe
             ,
             and
             people
             ,
             which
             had
             the
             marke
             of
             the
             people
             of
             God
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             true
             profession
             of
             the
             faith
             ,
             and
             Christianitie
             .
          
           
             2
             And
             I
             heard
             a
             voice
             from
             heaven
             as
             the
             sound
             of
             many
             waters
             ,
             and
             like
             a
             clash
             of
             thunder
             ,
             and
             to
             mixe
             pleasantnes
             with
             this
             maiesty
             ,
             after
             this
             voice
             ,
             I
             heard
             a
             melodious
             cōfort
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             of
             harpers
             playing
             vpon
             harps
             ,
             and
             a
             heavenly
             harmony
             .
          
           
             3
             And
             they
             sang
             a
             new
             thanksgiving
             
             containing
             the
             redemption
             manifested
             by
             the
             new
             covenant
             ,
             in
             the
             presence
             of
             God
             and
             his
             Angels
             ,
             and
             the
             Patriarches
             ,
             and
             Apostles
             .
             And
             no
             man
             can
             conceaue
             what
             this
             thanksgiving
             was
             ,
             and
             howe
             God
             ought
             to
             be
             praised
             for
             this
             redemption
             ,
             but
             only
             the
             truely
             faithfull
             ,
             chosen
             out
             of
             every
             tribe
             ,
             and
             nation
             ;
             which
             were
             saued
             ,
             and
             redeemed
             by
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             whole
             Masse
             of
             mankind
             ,
             that
             was
             lost
             &
             corrupted
             .
          
           
             4
             These
             faithfull
             did
             abstaine
             from
             al
             fleshly
             fornication
             ,
             &
             from
             spirituall
             too
             ,
             which
             is
             Idolatrie
             ;
             for
             they
             are
             chast
             .
             They
             follow
             the
             commandment
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             and
             suffer
             themselues
             to
             be
             led
             whither
             it
             shall
             seeme
             good
             to
             him
             .
             They
             were
             redeemed
             out
             of
             the
             whole
             stocke
             of
             mankind
             for
             to
             be
             consecrated
             vnto
             God
             ,
             and
             to
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             as
             the
             first
             fruites
             of
             his
             creatures
             .
          
           
             5
             And
             there
             was
             no
             guile
             found
             in
             their
             mouthes
             ,
             nor
             no
             dissembling
             words
             ,
             for
             they
             did
             appeare
             pure
             and
             innocent
             before
             the
             throne
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             6
             After
             that
             I
             saw
             a
             faithfull
             Minister
             of
             the
             Gospell
             rise
             out
             of
             the
             corruption
             of
             this
             papall
             kingdome
             ,
             and
             passing
             
             through
             the
             midst
             of
             the
             church
             to
             preach
             conformitie
             to
             the
             everlasting
             Gospel
             ;
             &
             God
             raised
             him
             vp
             to
             preach
             vnto
             the
             mē
             that
             dwell
             vpon
             the
             earth
             ,
             and
             to
             every
             nation
             .
          
           
             7
             And
             he
             cried
             out
             saying
             ,
             Feare
             God
             &
             giue
             him
             the
             glory
             ,
             for
             the
             houre
             of
             the
             last
             iudgement
             is
             at
             hand
             ;
             worship
             no
             creatures
             any
             more
             ,
             nor
             the
             reliques
             of
             Saints
             nor
             their
             images
             ,
             nor
             the
             Pope
             ,
             nor
             the
             Host
             ,
             nor
             any
             other
             creature
             ;
             but
             worship
             him
             which
             hath
             made
             heauen
             and
             earth
             ,
             and
             the
             bottomelesse
             deepe
             ,
             whence
             the
             rivers
             arise
             .
          
           
             8
             And
             another
             faithfull
             minister
             of
             the
             Gospell
             came
             after
             him
             saying
             ,
             for
             certaine
             Rome
             is
             fallen
             ,
             because
             she
             made
             all
             nations
             drunke
             with
             her
             furious
             Idolatry
             .
          
           
             9
             And
             a
             third
             minister
             came
             after
             these
             two
             saying
             stoutly
             ,
             if
             any
             one
             worship
             the
             Pope
             ,
             or
             yeeld
             himselfe
             subiect
             to
             the
             Empire
             ,
             which
             he
             hath
             formed
             anew
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             image
             of
             the
             ancient
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             professing
             himselfe
             to
             be
             a
             Roman
             ,
             or
             of
             the
             Latin
             Church
             ,
             or
             giue
             him
             a
             hand
             of
             fealtie
             ,
             and
             obedience
             ;
          
           
             10
             This
             man
             shall
             also
             drinke
             of
             the
             wine
             of
             the
             wrath
             of
             God
             ,
             yea
             of
             the
             pure
             
             wine
             ,
             powred
             into
             the
             cup
             of
             his
             wrath
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             he
             shall
             tast
             of
             Gods
             displeasure
             to
             the
             end
             ,
             and
             shall
             bee
             cast
             into
             hell
             in
             the
             presence
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             and
             the
             Angels
             there
             to
             bee
             burnt
             everlastingly
             .
          
           
             11
             And
             the
             smoake
             of
             their
             torment
             shall
             ascend
             evermore
             .
             And
             they
             shall
             enioy
             no
             rest
             ,
             which
             doe
             worship
             the
             Pope
             ,
             and
             the
             Empire
             which
             hee
             hath
             formed
             anew
             according
             to
             the
             image
             of
             the
             Romā
             Empire
             ,
             &
             whosoever
             doth
             professe
             himselfe
             to
             bee
             a
             Roman
             ,
             or
             of
             the
             Latine
             Church
             .
          
           
             12
             Here
             is
             the
             patience
             of
             the
             faithful
             to
             be
             seen
             ,
             in
             this
             it
             is
             that
             they
             appeare
             which
             keep
             the
             commandements
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             the
             faith
             of
             Iesus
             .
          
           
             13
             Then
             I
             heard
             a
             voice
             from
             heaven
             saying
             ,
             happy
             are
             they
             which
             die
             in
             the
             faith
             of
             our
             Lord
             Iesus
             .
             From
             that
             time
             ,
             of
             a
             truth
             (
             saith
             the
             spirit
             )
             they
             rest
             from
             their
             labours
             ,
             and
             they
             shall
             receaue
             the
             reward
             of
             their
             good
             workes
             .
          
           
             14
             Afterward
             I
             looked
             ,
             and
             behold
             ,
             a
             white
             cloud
             appeared
             vnto
             me
             ,
             and
             vpō
             this
             cloude
             there
             sate
             an
             Angel
             ,
             like
             to
             a
             man
             :
             which
             had
             a
             crowne
             of
             gold
             vpō
             his
             head
             ,
             as
             who
             had
             the
             dignitie
             of
             an
             Arch-Angel
             ,
             
             and
             power
             over
             many
             spirits
             ,
             &
             in
             his
             hand
             a
             sharpe
             sickle
             ,
             for
             to
             execute
             the
             iudgements
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             15
             And
             another
             Angell
             came
             out
             of
             the
             assembly
             ,
             and
             Church
             of
             the
             Saints
             ,
             which
             speaking
             vnto
             the
             Angel
             that
             was
             vpon
             the
             cloude
             ,
             gaue
             him
             commandement
             from
             God
             saying
             :
             Exercise
             iustice
             now
             vpon
             the
             earth
             ;
             for
             the
             houre
             of
             displaying
             Gods
             iudgements
             is
             come
             ,
             because
             the
             causes
             which
             drawe
             the
             iudgements
             of
             God
             downe
             (
             to
             wit
             the
             sinnes
             of
             men
             )
             are
             come
             to
             their
             full
             measure
             .
          
           
             16
             Then
             the
             Angell
             that
             sate
             vpō
             the
             cloude
             ,
             threw
             downe
             the
             chastisements
             ordained
             of
             God
             vpon
             the
             earth
             ,
             &
             a
             multitude
             of
             men
             were
             destroyed
             ,
             and
             many
             of
             the
             wicked
             cut
             of
             ,
             as
             eares
             of
             corne
             which
             is
             reaped
             .
          
           
             17
             And
             after
             this
             Angell
             God
             sent
             out
             another
             from
             amongst
             the
             company
             of
             his
             Saints
             ,
             and
             of
             his
             heavenly
             Church
             ,
             having
             also
             a
             sharpe
             sickle
             for
             to
             doe
             the
             like
             execution
             ,
             and
             to
             exercise
             the
             iudgements
             of
             God
             vpon
             the
             earth
             .
          
           
             18
             And
             after
             this
             second
             Angel
             ,
             there
             went
             a
             third
             Angel
             out
             from
             before
             the
             presence
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             (
             whose
             crosse
             is
             
             the
             only
             altar
             )
             to
             whome
             God
             did
             vse
             to
             commi●
             the
             executions
             of
             his
             iudgements
             by
             fire
             .
             This
             Angell
             cried
             with
             a
             lowd
             voice
             to
             him
             which
             had
             the
             sharpe
             sickle
             ,
             saying
             vnto
             him
             ,
             reveale
             the
             iudgements
             of
             God
             forthwith
             ,
             and
             punish
             the
             sinnes
             of
             men
             ;
             for
             their
             sinnes
             are
             growne
             to
             maturitie
             .
          
           
             19
             Then
             the
             Angel
             did
             that
             which
             was
             commanded
             him
             ,
             and
             did
             exercise
             iudgement
             vpon
             the
             earth
             ,
             and
             slewe
             the
             nations
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             and
             ●rod
             vpon
             them
             as
             we
             vse
             to
             tread
             grapes
             in
             a
             wine
             presse
             .
          
           
             20
             And
             this
             iudgement
             of
             God
             was
             executed
             without
             the
             Church
             of
             God
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             holy
             Ierusalem
             :
             which
             was
             exempted
             from
             this
             Iudgement
             .
             And
             the
             blood
             of
             this
             slaughter
             was
             so
             great
             ,
             that
             there
             ran
             a
             river
             of
             blood
             from
             the
             place
             for
             the
             space
             of
             twentie
             leagues
             ,
             &
             so
             deep
             that
             the
             horses
             stood
             vp
             in
             it
             even
             to
             the
             bridles
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             proofe
             and
             cle●ring
             of
             this
             Exposition
             .
          
           
             THis
             Chapter
             is
             an
             admonition
             of
             the
             evils
             and
             afflictions
             represented
             in
             the
             
             13.
             
             Chap.
             and
             a
             consolation
             to
             temper
             the
             hardnesse
             of
             the
             Churches
             servitude
             vnder
             the
             Papall
             kingdome
             ,
             vnder
             which
             although
             the
             Church
             lye
             hid
             ,
             yet
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             saith
             in
             the
             first
             verse
             of
             this
             chapter
             ,
             that
             God
             had
             an
             hundreth
             ,
             fortie
             ,
             and
             foure
             thousand
             faithfull
             remaining
             still
             amidst
             this
             corruption
             ;
             according
             as
             when
             Elias
             in
             the
             kingdome
             of
             Israel
             thought
             that
             hee
             only
             had
             beene
             left
             ,
             
             God
             told
             him
             that
             hee
             had
             7000
             men
             more
             which
             never
             bowed
             the
             knee
             to
             Baal
             .
             Now
             the
             number
             of
             a
             hundreth
             fortie
             &
             foure
             thousand
             is
             not
             without
             a
             mysterie
             .
             For
             besides
             that
             this
             number
             is
             a
             cubicall
             number
             cōsisting
             of
             twelue
             times
             twelue
             ,
             (
             God
             therby
             intending
             to
             signifie
             that
             the
             number
             of
             his
             elect
             is
             perfect
             ,
             and
             prescribed
             with
             great
             wisdome
             ,
             and
             which
             may
             not
             be
             diminished
             )
             there
             is
             yet
             more
             in
             it
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             God
             doth
             hereby
             shewe
             that
             this
             nūber
             shall
             bee
             taken
             indifferently
             out
             of
             all
             people
             and
             nations
             :
             like
             as
             in
             the
             7.
             chapt
             .
             this
             very
             number
             is
             taken
             equally
             out
             of
             the
             twelue
             tribes
             of
             Israel
             .
             For
             that
             by
             the
             144000.
             all
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             Elect
             is
             here
             vnderstood
             ,
             it
             appeares
             by
             that
             in
             the
             third
             verse
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             that
             these
             were
             
             bought
             from
             the
             earth
             .
          
           
             The
             foure
             beasts
             ,
             which
             are
             mentioned
             by
             the
             way
             in
             the
             3.
             verse
             ,
             are
             described
             exactly
             in
             the
             4.
             
             Chapter
             of
             this
             booke
             .
             And
             this
             vision
             is
             taken
             out
             of
             the
             first
             of
             Ezekiel
             ,
             which
             makes
             mee
             to
             vnderstand
             these
             4
             beasts
             in
             the
             same
             sense
             as
             they
             are
             vnderstood
             by
             Ezekiel
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             for
             the
             Angelicall
             vertues
             standing
             before
             the
             thron
             of
             God
             :
             Wherefore
             Ezekiel
             giues
             them
             wings
             also
             which
             signifie
             their
             readinesse
             to
             ob●y
             .
             And
             they
             haue
             diverse
             faces
             for
             to
             shew
             the
             diversitie
             of
             their
             vertues
             .
             The
             one
             hath
             the
             face
             of
             a
             Lyon
             ▪
             for
             to
             shewe
             their
             courage
             ,
             the
             other
             of
             an
             oxe
             ,
             for
             to
             shew
             their
             strength
             ,
             the
             other
             the
             face
             of
             a
             man
             ,
             for
             to
             shew
             their
             wisdome
             ,
             the
             other
             resembleth
             and
             eagle
             ,
             which
             witnesseth
             their
             speech
             ,
             and
             readinesse
             .
          
           
             The
             24
             beasts
             are
             the
             twelue
             Patriarks
             of
             the
             old
             Testament
             ,
             and
             the
             twelue
             of
             the
             newe
             ,
             which
             are
             the
             12
             Apostles
             ,
             by
             whom
             we
             are
             to
             vnderstand
             al
             the
             church
             of
             the
             glorified
             Saints
             .
             Which
             we
             may
             easily
             knowe
             by
             the
             9
             verse
             of
             the
             fift
             chapt
             .
             where
             these
             24
             Elders
             do
             praise
             the
             Lamb
             because
             he
             redeemed
             them
             vnto
             God
             by
             his
             blood
             ,
             out
             of
             every
             kindred
             ,
             &
             people
             
             and
             tongue
             ,
             and
             nation
             .
             Now
             if
             the
             24
             Elders
             doe
             represent
             the
             whole
             Church
             of
             the
             glorified
             Saints
             ,
             and
             speake
             in
             their
             name
             ,
             by
             the
             like
             reason
             is
             it
             also
             agreeable
             ,
             that
             these
             4
             beastes
             should
             represent
             the
             whole
             companie
             of
             Angelicall
             spirits
             .
          
           
             The
             praises
             wherewith
             they
             did
             extoll
             God
             for
             revealing
             the
             mysteries
             of
             our
             redemption
             ,
             cannot
             be
             vnderstood
             by
             fleshly
             and
             sensuall
             men
             ,
             to
             whome
             the
             Gospell
             seemeth
             folly
             ,
             as
             our
             Saviour
             saith
             to
             Peter
             .
             Mat.
             16.
             
             
               Flesh
               and
               blood
               hath
               not
               revealed
               this
               vnto
               thee
               ,
               but
               my
               father
               which
               is
               in
               heaven
               .
            
             Of
             these
             144000.
             which
             represent
             the
             whole
             company
             of
             the
             faithfull
             ,
             S.
             Iohn
             saith
             that
             
               they
               are
               not
               defiled
               with
               women
               ,
               for
               they
               are
               virgins
               .
            
             Doubtles
             a
             continent
             ,
             and
             chast
             virginitie
             both
             of
             body
             &
             mind
             is
             a
             great
             perfectiō
             :
             it
             keeps
             out
             all
             wicked
             thoughts
             from
             entrance
             ;
             it
             frees
             the
             soule
             from
             care
             ,
             and
             giues
             much
             libertie
             to
             the
             service
             of
             God.
             Yet
             for
             all
             this
             I
             cannot
             bee
             perswaded
             that
             S.
             Iohn
             doth
             here
             speake
             of
             bodily
             virginity
             ,
             or
             of
             continuing
             in
             a
             single
             state
             of
             life
             :
             For
             thē
             we
             should
             exclude
             the
             Prophets
             ,
             and
             the
             Apostles
             out
             of
             the
             number
             of
             the
             faithfull
             which
             follow
             the
             Lambe
             ,
             and
             which
             
             were
             redeemed
             from
             amongst
             the
             inhabitants
             of
             the
             earth
             .
             This
             makes
             mee
             thinke
             that
             as
             Idolatrie
             is
             infinite
             times
             called
             fornication
             ,
             &
             adulterie
             in
             holy
             scripture
             ,
             so
             this
             chastitie
             and
             virginitie
             here
             spokē
             of
             is
             nothing
             else
             but
             an
             abstaining
             from
             the
             service
             of
             Idols
             ,
             which
             are
             as
             it
             were
             the
             Concubines
             with
             whome
             Idolatours
             doe
             commit
             fornication
             ,
             and
             breake
             the
             spirituall
             bond
             with
             which
             they
             had
             tied
             themselues
             vnto
             Christ.
             
          
           
             They
             which
             are
             thus
             chaste
             and
             continent
             ,
             are
             by
             the
             iudgement
             of
             the
             spirit
             of
             God
             in
             the
             fift
             verse
             pronounced
             to
             bee
             without
             spot
             ;
             I
             confesse
             that
             in
             the
             most
             holy
             whilst
             they
             are
             in
             this
             flesh
             there
             is
             ever
             some
             infirmity
             remaining
             ,
             and
             the
             remainders
             of
             sin
             abiding
             .
             David
             acknowledgeth
             himselfe
             to
             be
             a
             sinner
             ,
             Psa.
             51.
             
             &
             130.
             
             &
             143.
             and
             his
             life
             confirmes
             it
             .
             The
             Apostle
             
               S.
               Paul
            
             confesseth
             that
             
               sinne
               dwelleth
               in
               him
            
             ,
             and
             
               that
               he
               doth
               the
               evill
               which
               he
               would
               not
               do
               .
               Rom.
            
             7.
             
             We
             all
             of
             vs
             faile
             in
             most
             things
             as
             
               S
               ,
               Iames
            
             saith
             .
             Neverthelesse
             the
             faithfull
             are
             said
             to
             bee
             iust
             ,
             and
             without
             spot
             ,
             because
             the
             bloud
             of
             
               Iesus
               Christ
            
             doth
             wash
             them
             from
             all
             their
             sins
             ,
             1.
             
             Ioh.
             1.
             and
             because
             the
             righteousnesse
             of
             
             Iesus
             Christ
             is
             ours
             ,
             wherefore
             he
             is
             also
             called
             the
             Lord
             our
             righteousnes
             ,
             Ier.
             23.
             ver
             .
             6.
             
             &
             1.
             
             Cor.
             1.
             v.
             30.
             
             &
             2.
             
             Cor.
             5.
             ver
             .
             21.
             
             Hee
             is
             also
             saide
             to
             bee
             without
             deceipt
             ,
             whose
             repentance
             is
             serious
             ,
             and
             his
             heart
             without
             hypocrisie
             ,
             as
             Nathanael
             in
             the
             1.
             chap.
             of
             
               S.
               Ioh.
               v.
            
             47.
             
             And
             they
             whose
             charity
             and
             faith
             is
             without
             counterfaiting
             ,
             Rom.
             12.9
             .
             &
             1.
             
             
               Tim.
               ver
            
             .
             5.
             albeit
             their
             charity
             and
             faith
             bee
             weake
             and
             imperfect
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             6.8
             .
             and
             9.
             verses
             the
             Angels
             sent
             for
             to
             preach
             the
             gospel
             ,
             are
             Ministers
             &
             Pastours
             of
             the
             Church
             .
             For
             God
             sendeth
             not
             his
             Angels
             to
             preach
             in
             the
             church
             but
             his
             Ministers
             ,
             which
             are
             often
             called
             Angels
             ,
             in
             the
             second
             and
             third
             Chapters
             of
             this
             very
             booke
             .
             Which
             is
             also
             vsuall
             in
             the
             old
             Testament
             ;
             especially
             in
             the
             5.
             of
             
               Ecclesiastes
               ,
               v.
            
             6.
             
             And
             the
             Prophet
             Malachie
             seemes
             to
             haue
             taken
             his
             name
             from
             this
             .
             For
             Malachie
             signifies
             
               The
               Angell
               of
               the
               Lord.
            
             
          
           
             From
             the
             6.
             verse
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             of
             the
             cha
             .
             the
             spirit
             of
             God
             doth
             reveale
             an
             admirable
             history
             ,
             and
             discovers
             many
             secrets
             vnto
             vs
             ,
             for
             hee
             describeth
             at
             large
             what
             the
             condition
             of
             the
             poore
             Church
             shall
             
             be
             vnder
             the
             government
             of
             Poperie
             ,
             till
             the
             time
             that
             the
             day
             of
             iudgment
             shal
             be
             at
             hand
             .
             From
             the
             6.
             verse
             to
             the
             13.
             he
             tels
             of
             3.
             
             Angels
             that
             went
             before
             ,
             which
             one
             after
             another
             at
             diverse
             times
             did
             preach
             the
             gospell
             ,
             seeking
             to
             turne
             men
             from
             Idolatrie
             ,
             and
             to
             make
             them
             cast
             of
             the
             Romish
             bondage
             .
             The
             rest
             of
             the
             chapter
             is
             spent
             in
             describing
             the
             punishmēts
             which
             God
             inflicteth
             vpō
             men
             because
             they
             did
             not
             obey
             their
             preaching
             ,
             and
             because
             they
             did
             conspire
             against
             God
             :
             and
             therefore
             as
             he
             doth
             produce
             3.
             
             Angels
             which
             at
             diverse
             times
             did
             preach
             the
             gospell
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             Papistry
             ,
             so
             doth
             he
             send
             3.
             
             Angels
             to
             execute
             Gods
             iudgementes
             ,
             which
             at
             severall
             times
             doe
             punish
             the
             rebellion
             of
             men
             .
             And
             as
             the
             third
             Angell
             that
             preached
             the
             gospell
             ,
             did
             preach
             it
             with
             more
             perspicuitie
             ,
             and
             greater
             fervēcie
             then
             the
             two
             former
             ,
             so
             the
             third
             Angell
             sent
             to
             revenge
             the
             hardnesse
             of
             mēs
             harts
             ,
             doth
             exercise
             more
             dreadful
             iudgements
             ,
             and
             doth
             mow
             down
             men
             as
             eares
             of
             corne
             ,
             and
             tread
             on
             them
             like
             grapes
             in
             the
             wine
             presse
             .
          
           
             Whosoever
             will
             open
             his
             eies
             ,
             and
             dispell
             the
             clowd
             of
             hatred
             ,
             &
             passion
             ,
             which
             
             dazels
             the
             iudgement
             ,
             shall
             finde
             (
             by
             that
             which
             hath
             fallen
             out
             within
             these
             few
             ages
             ,
             and
             by
             that
             which
             we
             see
             at
             this
             day
             )
             the
             accōplishment
             of
             this
             admirable
             prophecie
             :
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             3
             severall
             publications
             of
             the
             gospell
             amidst
             the
             darknesse
             of
             Papistrie
             ,
             and
             these
             publications
             backt
             by
             exemplarie
             iudgements
             ,
             men
             stil
             persevering
             in
             their
             obstinacie
             .
          
           
             
             In
             the
             yeare
             of
             our
             Lord
             ,
             1039.
             
             Idolatrie
             being
             much
             encreased
             ,
             and
             the
             Papall
             Empire
             greatly
             exalted
             ,
             God
             raised
             vp
             Berenger
             Archdeacon
             of
             Anger
             's
             ,
             for
             to
             oppose
             himselfe
             against
             the
             abuse
             of
             the
             Papacie
             ,
             especially
             against
             the
             errour
             of
             Transubstantiation
             ,
             &
             the
             
               Popes
               Supremacy
            
             :
             who
             taught
             so
             powerfully
             that
             
               Fraūce
               ,
               Spaine
               ,
               Italie
            
             ,
             and
             Germanie
             ,
             were
             full
             of
             men
             holding
             the
             same
             confessiō
             with
             Berenger
             :
             as
             
               Gulielmus
               Neobrige●sis
            
             witnesseth
             in
             the
             2.
             book
             &
             13.
             chap.
             of
             his
             English
             
             history
             ,
             where
             he
             saith
             that
             their
             number
             was
             as
             the
             sand
             of
             the
             sea
             .
             And
             this
             Berenger
             ,
             was
             a
             holy
             man
             ,
             and
             of
             great
             learning
             .
             The
             Archbishop
             Antoni●
             in
             the
             2.
             part
             of
             his
             Chronicle
             &
             16.
             book
             doth
             commend
             him
             for
             his
             honestie
             ,
             and
             humility
             ,
             and
             for
             distributing
             his
             goods
             
             amongst
             the
             poore
             .
             Which
             is
             confirmed
             by
             Platina
             in
             the
             life
             of
             Iohn
             the
             15.
             
             
               It
               appeares
            
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             
               that
               at
               that
               time
               there
               was
               Oder
               Abbot
               of
               Clunie
               ,
               and
               Berenger
               of
               Tours
               ,
               in
               estimatiō
               noted
               men
               both
               for
               their
               learning
               and
               religion
               .
            
             A
             little
             after
             he
             saith
             that
             after
             he
             had
             given
             all
             his
             goods
             to
             the
             poore
             ,
             hee
             got
             his
             owne
             living
             by
             the
             labour
             of
             his
             hands
             .
             It
             is
             true
             indeed
             that
             appearing
             at
             Rome
             in
             a
             councel
             there
             assembled
             ,
             hee
             was
             constrained
             for
             feare
             of
             loosing
             his
             life
             ,
             to
             subscribe
             to
             that
             which
             the
             Pope
             would
             haue
             him
             .
             But
             being
             returned
             into
             Fraunce
             he
             protested
             that
             he
             did
             this
             by
             compulsion
             ,
             and
             perseuered
             in
             maintenance
             of
             his
             former
             doctrine
             even
             to
             his
             dying
             day
             :
             vpon
             whom
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Ments
             named
             Hildebert
             ,
             made
             an
             Epitaph
             ,
             wherein
             he
             bewailes
             him
             as
             a
             great
             light
             that
             was
             extinguished
             ,
             and
             as
             a
             man
             of
             incomparable
             zeale
             ,
             and
             learning
             .
             The
             Popes
             to
             suppresse
             this
             truth
             ,
             did
             spare
             for
             no
             subtletie
             nor
             crueltie
             ,
             and
             did
             stirre
             vp
             kings
             to
             persecute
             these
             poore
             religious
             men
             .
             Whereat
             God
             also
             being
             enraged
             ,
             sent
             out
             great
             plagues
             ,
             and
             did
             execute
             rigorous
             iudgements
             vpon
             the
             people
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             .
             For
             in
             the
             year
             1076
             
             
             
             
             
             
             
             
             
             (
             which
             is
             about
             the
             time
             of
             Berenger's
             death
             )
             there
             arose
             a
             quarrell
             betweene
             the
             Emperour
             Henry
             the
             fourth
             ,
             and
             Pope
             Gregory
             the
             7
             surnamed
             Hildebrand
             ,
             who
             brought
             many
             divisions
             into
             the
             Roman
             Church
             ,
             and
             Empire
             ,
             during
             which
             there
             were
             more
             then
             40.
             bloudy
             battels
             fought
             insomuch
             that
             every
             place
             did
             streame
             with
             blood
             ,
             to
             speake
             nothing
             of
             the
             pestilence
             ,
             inroads
             ,
             &
             pillages
             ,
             that
             did
             wast
             Christendome
             .
             Behold
             here
             the
             first
             preaching
             of
             the
             Gospell
             ,
             which
             God
             did
             raise
             vp
             even
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             Poperie
             ,
             and
             after
             this
             preaching
             the
             Angel
             throwing
             down
             the
             sickle
             of
             Gods
             iudgements
             vpon
             men
             .
          
           
             
             But
             this
             darknesse
             still
             thickning
             more
             and
             more
             ,
             and
             the
             truth
             being
             opprest
             as
             it
             were
             by
             force
             :
             Behold
             about
             the
             yeare
             1130
             God
             made
             this
             truth
             to
             grow
             vp
             a
             fresh
             againe
             ,
             by
             the
             industrie
             of
             certaine
             servants
             of
             his
             which
             were
             the
             Disciples
             of
             Berenger
             ,
             amongst
             which
             was
             
               Peter
               de
               Bruis
            
             ,
             &
             
               Henry
               de
               Thoulouse
            
             ,
             &
             a
             little
             after
             thē
             ,
             
               Iohannes
               de
               Waldo
            
             of
             Lyons
             ,
             which
             began
             to
             shew
             himselfe
             in
             the
             yeare
             1158
             and
             translated
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             into
             the
             vulgar
             tongue
             ,
             whose
             life
             was
             an
             example
             of
             sanctitie
             .
             In
             hatred
             of
             whom
             they
             
             begā
             to
             call
             the
             truly
             faithful
             the
             Waldenses
             .
             These
             faithful
             spok
             iust
             as
             this
             2.
             
             Angel
             doth
             in
             the
             eight
             verse
             of
             this
             chapter
             calling
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             Babylon
             ,
             and
             exhorting
             every
             one
             to
             goe
             out
             of
             her
             .
             Against
             whom
             
               Pope
               Innocent
            
             the
             3.
             caused
             the
             Croisadoe
             to
             be
             preached
             ,
             and
             within
             a
             fewe
             moneths
             made
             aboue
             200000
             of
             them
             to
             be
             slaine
             in
             
               Provence
               ,
               Languedoe
            
             ,
             &
             Guyenna
             ;
             as
             it
             is
             reported
             in
             the
             history
             of
             
               Iohn
               Chassanion
            
             translated
             out
             of
             the
             Albigean
             tongue
             ;
             &
             all
             the
             Authors
             both
             of
             that
             time
             ,
             and
             of
             after
             ages
             sticke
             not
             to
             affirme
             asmuch
             .
             So
             God
             for
             to
             punish
             the
             rebellion
             of
             men
             threwe
             downe
             his
             sickle
             the
             second
             time
             ;
             and
             did
             execute
             more
             grievous
             punishments
             vpon
             them
             then
             the
             former
             .
             For
             then
             the
             quarrels
             betweene
             the
             Empire
             ,
             and
             the
             Papacie
             (
             which
             had
             slept
             for
             a
             long
             time
             )
             began
             afresh
             ,
             vnder
             
               Frederick
               Barbarossa
            
             that
             generous
             Emperour
             ,
             and
             patterne
             of
             vertue
             :
             who
             was
             constrained
             to
             keepe
             many
             armies
             afoot
             ,
             to
             defend
             himselfe
             against
             the
             enimies
             which
             the
             Pope
             had
             incensed
             against
             him
             .
             What
             man
             is
             able
             to
             expresse
             the
             horrible
             slaughters
             ,
             the
             sackings
             of
             townes
             ,
             the
             pight
             battels
             ,
             greater
             &
             more
             
             in
             number
             then
             those
             vnder
             the
             Henries
             ,
             till
             the
             yeare
             1177.
             
             When
             Pope
             Alexander
             the
             third
             ,
             trod
             vpon
             this
             Emperours
             neck
             on
             the
             steps
             of
             S.
             Markes
             Church
             in
             Venice
             ?
             and
             in
             the
             meane
             space
             the
             Moors
             and
             the
             Sarrasins
             wasted
             Spaine
             ,
             massacring
             all
             the
             Christians
             thereabout
             ,
             &
             the
             Saladin
             destroyed
             the
             Kingdome
             of
             Ierusalem
             ,
             that
             had
             cost
             vs
             more
             then
             twelue
             hundreth
             thousand
             men
             to
             conquere
             :
             which
             was
             brought
             to
             ruine
             in
             the
             yeare
             1187
             ,
             not
             without
             an
             vnvtterable
             desolation
             ;
             for
             the
             repairing
             whereof
             all
             the
             nobilitie
             ,
             and
             men
             of
             courage
             that
             were
             in
             France
             ,
             Germanie
             ,
             Flaunders
             ,
             England
             ,
             &
             Italie
             ,
             tooke
             the
             Crosse
             vpon
             them
             in
             the
             time
             of
             
               Philip
               Augustus
            
             ,
             and
             Lewis
             the
             9.
             
             But
             of
             all
             this
             innumerable
             multitude
             ,
             there
             came
             not
             the
             tenth
             part
             back
             again
             ,
             so
             that
             in
             Fraunce
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             neighbouring
             Countries
             ,
             there
             was
             nothing
             as
             it
             were
             to
             be
             seene
             ,
             but
             widows
             &
             orphans
             .
             Amidst
             these
             confusions
             ,
             and
             this
             generall
             disaster
             ,
             the
             Church
             of
             God
             did
             subsist
             miraculously
             ,
             and
             notwithstanding
             all
             the
             Popes
             persecutions
             against
             it
             ,
             did
             ,
             and
             still
             doth
             continue
             to
             this
             day
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             year
             1508.
             the
             Churches
             wrongfully
             called
             the
             
             Waldenses
             wrote
             their
             confession
             ,
             &
             sent
             it
             to
             Ladislaus
             king
             of
             Hungarie
             ,
             which
             confession
             is
             like
             vnto
             ours
             :
             &
             when
             God
             in
             this
             last
             age
             did
             readvance
             the
             standard
             of
             his
             truth
             ,
             these
             Churches
             ioined
             themselues
             with
             ours
             ,
             and
             suffered
             persecutions
             together
             with
             vs
             for
             the
             faith
             of
             Iesus
             Christ.
             So
             behold
             the
             second
             Angel
             preaching
             the
             Gospell
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             Poperie
             ,
             and
             at
             the
             same
             time
             the
             destroying
             Angel
             sent
             ,
             for
             ●o
             punish
             the
             rebellion
             of
             men
             the
             second
             time
             ,
             which
             did
             obstinatly
             withstand
             the
             word
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             Last
             of
             all
             the
             third
             preaching
             Angel
             is
             come
             in
             our
             daies
             ,
             
             opposing
             himselfe
             against
             the
             Papall
             Empire
             .
             That
             is
             to
             saie
             ,
             that
             God
             for
             this
             third
             time
             hath
             raised
             vp
             certaine
             faithfull
             preachers
             of
             the
             gospell
             ,
             for
             to
             withstand
             the
             Papacie
             .
             This
             hath
             hapned
             in
             our
             time
             ,
             wherein
             God
             hath
             raised
             vp
             certaine
             faithful
             Ministers
             ,
             which
             haue
             lighted
             the
             taper
             of
             truth
             againe
             ,
             and
             drawne
             this
             candle
             from
             vnder
             a
             bushell
             :
             Hence
             come
             the
             great
             breaches
             that
             we
             haue
             seene
             to
             be
             made
             in
             Papistrie
             ,
             &
             the
             gaping
             creuises
             in
             the
             temple
             of
             the
             Idole
             thorough
             which
             a
             man
             may
             discerne
             Idolatrie
             frō
             without
             .
             Hēce
             
             come
             so
             many
             churches
             to
             bee
             planted
             in
             
               Germanie
               ,
               England
               ,
               Scotland
               ,
               Fraunce
               ,
               Flaunders
               ,
               Denmarke
               ,
               Switzerland
               ,
               Poland
               ,
            
             &
             Hungarie
             ,
             with
             which
             when
             God
             shall
             haue
             bin
             sufficiently
             served
             by
             their
             giuing
             testimony
             to
             his
             truth
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             malice
             of
             the
             contradicting
             shall
             begin
             to
             oppresse
             the
             truth
             ,
             then
             shal
             the
             third
             Angell
             throw
             downe
             his
             sickle
             ,
             to
             reape
             and
             ●ut
             downe
             the
             enimies
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             to
             execute
             the
             last
             effects
             of
             his
             wrath
             ,
             which
             are
             here
             represented
             by
             a
             river
             of
             bloud
             ▪
             an
             hundred
             leagues
             large
             ,
             and
             so
             deepe
             ▪
             that
             the
             horses
             of
             the
             enimies
             ranged
             in
             battell
             against
             God
             shall
             hath
             themselues
             in
             the
             bloud
             of
             their
             Mast●rs
             ,
             and
             stand
             in
             it
             vp
             to
             their
             bridles
             ;
             for
             as
             this
             third
             preaching
             Angell
             spake
             more
             cleerely
             ,
             &
             boldly
             ,
             then
             the
             two
             former
             did
             ,
             so
             the
             obstinacie
             of
             men
             against
             this
             so
             great
             a
             light
             ,
             shal
             be
             punished
             with
             a
             more
             feareful
             punishment
             .
             They
             haue
             persecuted
             vs
             by
             massacrings
             and
             burnings
             :
             They
             haue
             disgraced
             vs
             with
             odious
             titles
             ,
             calling
             vs
             
               Huguenots
               ,
               Zuinglians
               ,
               Lutherans
            
             ,
             &
             Calvinists
             ,
             although
             our
             relligion
             be
             the
             auncient
             Christian
             religion
             ,
             and
             the
             religiō
             of
             the
             Apostles
             ▪
             &
             that
             we
             are
             vrgēt
             ,
             that
             the
             
             people
             might
             haue
             the
             sight
             of
             the
             scripture
             ,
             &
             that
             the
             fashion
             of
             saying
             the
             commō
             service
             in
             a
             strange
             tonge
             might
             be
             abolished
             :
             complaining
             of
             this
             that
             we
             cānot
             haue
             a
             free
             councell
             ,
             where
             we
             might
             be
             heard
             ,
             &
             where
             our
             adversaries
             might
             not
             be
             our
             iudges
             :
             In
             steed
             of
             the
             Councell
             of
             Trent
             ,
             where
             the
             Pope
             condemned
             vs
             without
             euer
             hearing
             vs
             speake
             for
             our selues
             :
             and
             whether
             wee
             could
             not
             haue
             gone
             safely
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             that
             rule
             mainetained
             in
             the
             church
             of
             Rome
             ,
             that
             mē
             are
             not
             to
             stand
             to
             those
             promises
             ,
             though
             ratified
             by
             oaths
             ,
             which
             they
             plight
             to
             Heretickes
             ;
             a
             rule
             practised
             vpon
             
               Iohn
               Hus
            
             &
             Hierome
             of
             Prague
             ,
             which
             were
             burnt
             notwithstanding
             the
             faithfull
             promise
             that
             they
             had
             of
             a
             safe
             conduct
             .
             For
             these
             ,
             and
             such
             like
             causes
             we
             doubt
             not
             (
             &
             wee
             speake
             it
             with
             feare
             ,
             not
             desiring
             the
             ruine
             but
             the
             conversiō
             of
             our
             adversaries
             )
             that
             the
             third
             destroying
             Angell
             shall
             ere
             long
             throw
             downe
             his
             fickle
             vpon
             the
             earth
             ,
             &
             display
             the
             iudgmentes
             of
             God
             vpon
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             ,
             for
             the
             third
             time
             .
          
           
             Hereby
             it
             appeares
             that
             the
             prophecie
             of
             this
             chapt
             .
             is
             accomplished
             as
             touching
             the
             3
             Angels
             that
             were
             sent
             to
             preach
             the
             
             Gospell
             ,
             but
             as
             for
             the
             3
             destroying
             Angels
             which
             were
             sent
             to
             execute
             the
             iudgments
             of
             God
             ,
             that
             the
             two
             former
             of
             the
             is
             already
             come
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             third
             is
             not
             yet
             come
             ,
             but
             is
             neere
             at
             hand
             .
          
           
             That
             which
             hath
             beene
             saide
             alreadie
             may
             suffice
             for
             the
             exposition
             of
             this
             prophecie
             .
             But
             vpon
             the
             6.
             verse
             where
             there
             is
             mention
             made
             of
             an
             Angel
             holding
             the
             
               everlasting
               Gospell
            
             ,
             I
             cannot
             omit
             that
             which
             
               Matthew
               Paris
            
             relateth
             in
             the
             year
             1256.
             and
             Platinae
             in
             the
             life
             of
             Alexander
             the
             4.
             
             
               Matthew
               Paris
            
             reporteth
             that
             
               William
               de
               S.
               Amore
            
             with
             other
             choice
             men
             of
             the
             Vniversitie
             of
             Paris
             were
             cited
             to
             Rome
             for
             complaining
             of
             a
             booke
             that
             was
             made
             by
             the
             
               Iacobin
               preaching
               Friars
            
             the
             which
             was
             intituled
             the
             
               Everlasting
               Gospell
            
             .
             And
             Platinae
             in
             the
             life
             of
             Alexander
             the
             fourth
             saith
             that
             this
             booke
             did
             teach
             ,
             that
             the
             state
             of
             grace
             did
             proceede
             ,
             
               non
               à
               lege
               Evangelis
               ,
               sed
               à
               lege
               spiritus
               ,
            
             not
             from
             the
             law
             of
             the
             Gospell
             but
             from
             the
             law
             of
             the
             spirit
             ,
             for
             so
             did
             they
             call
             their
             dreams
             &
             revelations
             .
             The
             mark
             at
             which
             this
             booke
             did
             aime
             ,
             was
             to
             suppresse
             the
             Gospel
             of
             Christ.
             A
             sinne
             so
             hainous
             ,
             as
             might
             deservedly
             haue
             made
             
             their
             whole
             order
             to
             haue
             beene
             rooted
             out
             ,
             
             ,
             neverthelesse
             
               Matthew
               Paris
            
             telleth
             vs
             that
             Pope
             Alevander
             did
             content
             himselfe
             with
             only
             commanding
             the
             book
             to
             be
             secretly
             burnt
             ,
             &
             (
             if
             it
             might
             be
             )
             without
             offending
             the
             fraternity
             .
             And
             not
             long
             after
             he
             made
             it
             manifest
             that
             he
             condemned
             thē
             by
             cōstraint
             ,
             &
             because
             it
             was
             a
             shame
             for
             him
             to
             do
             otherwise
             ,
             for
             hee
             droue
             away
             the
             said
             
               William
               de
               S.
               Amore
            
             ,
             and
             made
             him
             to
             be
             banished
             ,
             who
             hath
             written
             a
             book
             of
             this
             matter
             for
             the
             iustification
             of
             himselfe
             .
          
           
             The
             thirde
             verse
             is
             read
             diversly
             in
             the
             Greeke
             text
             .
             For
             there
             bee
             some
             copies
             which
             haue
             the
             point
             before
             the
             word
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             others
             put
             it
             after
             .
             The
             translation
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             turnes
             it
             as
             if
             the
             point
             were
             before
             ,
             trāslating
             it
             thus
             ,
             
               Beat●mort●●
               qui
               in
               domino
               moriuntur
               .
               A
               modo
               iam
               dicit
               spiritus
               vt
               requiescant
               a
               laboribus
               suis
               ,
            
             which
             seemes
             more
             smooth
             to
             me
             and
             more
             suitable
             to
             the
             Greeke
             phrase
             ,
             then
             if
             the
             point
             were
             put
             after
             the
             worde
             
               A
               modo
               .
               Beda
            
             expounds
             this
             place
             thus
             ,
             
               As
               hee
               saide
               that
               the
               wicked
               shoulde
               never
               haue
               any
               rest
               :
               so
               on
               the
               contrary
               he
               teacheth
               that
               the
               faithfull
               being
               assisted
               by
               their
               good
               
               workes
               ,
               doe
               rest
               from
               hence
               forth
               ,
               that
               is
               to
               say
               ,
               from
               the
               time
               of
               their
               death
               .
            
             For
             this
             word
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             doth
             not
             only
             signifie
             hereafter
             ,
             but
             also
             
               from
               henceforth
            
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             13.
             chapt
             .
             of
             S.
             Iohn
             ,
             v.
             19.
             and
             in
             the
             14.
             chap.
             v.
             7.
             
             Howsoever
             it
             be
             ,
             &
             in
             whether
             sense
             of
             the
             two
             you
             take
             this
             worde
             ,
             or
             vnderstand
             this
             verse
             ,
             it
             doth
             vtterly
             extinguish
             the
             imaginarie
             fire
             of
             Purgatorie
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             14.
             verse
             hee
             which
             sitteth
             vpon
             the
             cloude
             hauing
             the
             shape
             of
             a
             man
             ,
             cānot
             be
             Iesus
             Christ
             seeing
             that
             in
             the
             verses
             following
             the
             Angels
             command
             him
             ,
             and
             declare
             the
             will
             of
             God
             vnto
             him
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             16.
             verse
             and
             those
             which
             follow
             the
             iudgements
             of
             God
             are
             compared
             to
             an
             harvest
             ,
             and
             a
             vintage
             .
             A
             fashion
             of
             speech
             vsuall
             in
             Scripture
             ;
             as
             in
             the
             13.
             of
             S.
             
               Matthew
               ,
               the
               harvest
               is
               the
               ende
               of
               the
               world
               ,
               and
               the
               reapers
               are
               the
               Angels
               .
            
             And
             in
             the
             76.
             
             Psalme
             ,
             it
             is
             said
             that
             God
             doth
             vintage
             ,
             or
             cut
             of
             the
             spirits
             of
             Princes
             ,
             &
             that
             hee
             is
             torrible
             to
             the
             Kinges
             of
             the
             earth
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
           THE
           PROPHECIE
           CONTAIned
           in
           the
           17.
           
           Chap.
           of
           the
           Apocalyps
           .
           CHAP.
           6.
           
        
         
           
             
               1
               Then
               there
               came
               one
               of
               the
               7.
               
               Angels
               which
               had
               the
               7.
               
               Vials
               ,
               and
               talked
               with
               mee
               ,
               saying
               vnto
               me
               ,
               Come
               ;
               I
               will
               shew
               thee
               the
               damnation
               of
               the
               great
               Where
               that
               sitteth
               vpon
               many
               waters
               .
            
             
               2
               With
               whō
               the
               kings
               of
               the
               earth
               haue
               committed
               fornication
               ,
               and
               the
               inhabitants
               of
               the
               earth
               are
               drunke
               with
               the
               wine
               of
               her
               fornication
               .
            
             
               3
               So
               hee
               carried
               me
               away
               into
               the
               wildernesse
               in
               the
               spirit
               ,
               and
               I
               saw
               a
               woman
               sit
               vpon
               a
               scarlet
               coloured
               beast
               ,
               full
               of
               names
               of
               blasphemie
               which
               had
               7.
               heads
               and
               tenne
               hornes
               .
            
             
               4
               And
               the
               woman
               was
               araied
               in
               purple
               and
               scarlet
               ,
               and
               gilded
               with
               gold
               ,
               &
               precious
               stones
               ,
               and
               pearles
               ,
               and
               had
               a
               cuppe
               of
               gold
               in
               her
               hand
               ,
               full
               of
               the
               abomination
               ,
               &
               filthinesse
               of
               her
               fornication
               .
            
             
               5
               And
               in
               her
               forehead
               was
               a
               name
               written
               ,
               A
               mistery
               ,
               that
               great
               Babylon
               ,
               that
               mother
               of
               whoredomes
               ,
               and
               abominations
               of
               the
               earth
               .
            
             
             
               6
               And
               I
               saw
               the
               woman
               drunken
               with
               the
               bloud
               of
               Saints
               ,
               and
               with
               the
               bloud
               of
               the
               Martyrs
               of
               Iesus
               ,
               and
               when
               I
               saw
               her
               ,
               I
               wōdred
               with
               great
               marvell
               .
            
             
               7
               Then
               the
               Angell
               said
               vnto
               me
               .
               Wherfore
               marveilest
               thou
               ?
               I
               will
               shew
               thee
               the
               misterie
               of
               that
               woman
               ,
               and
               of
               that
               beast
               that
               beareth
               her
               ,
               which
               hath
               seaven
               heads
               and
               ten
               hornes
               .
            
             
               8
               The
               beast
               that
               thou
               haste
               seene
               ,
               was
               ,
               and
               is
               not
               ,
               &
               shall
               ascend
               out
               of
               the
               bottomlesse
               pit
               ,
               and
               shall
               go
               into
               perdition
               ,
               and
               they
               that
               dwell
               on
               the
               earth
               shall
               wonder
               (
               whose
               names
               are
               not
               written
               in
               the
               booke
               of
               life
               frō
               the
               foundation
               of
               the
               world
               )
               when
               they
               behold
               the
               beast
               that
               was
               ,
               and
               is
               not
               ,
               and
               yet
               is
               .
            
             
               9
               Here
               is
               the
               minde
               that
               hath
               wisdom
               .
               The
               7.
               heads
               are
               7.
               mountaine●
               ,
               whereon
               the
               woman
               sitteth
               :
               they
               are
               also
               7.
               kings
               .
            
             
               10
               Fiue
               〈◊〉
               ,
               fallen
               ,
               and
               one
               is
               ,
               and
               an
               other
               is
               not
               yet
               〈◊〉
               :
               and
               when
               he
               commeth
               he
               must
               continue
               a
               long
               space
               .
            
             
               11
               And
               the
               beast
               that
               was
               and
               is
               not
               ,
               is
               even
               the
               eighth
               ,
               and
               is
               one
               of
               the
               7.
               &
               shal
               goe
               into
               destruction
               .
            
             
               12
               And
               the
               10.
               hornes
               which
               thou
               sawest
               ,
               are
               10
               kings
               ,
               which
               yet
               haue
               not
               received
               
               a
               kingdome
               ,
               but
               shall
               receiue
               power
               as
               kings
               at
               one
               hower
               ,
               with
               the
               beast
               .
            
             
               13
               These
               haue
               one
               minde
               ,
               &
               shall
               giue
               their
               power
               ,
               and
               authority
               vnto
               the
               beast
               .
            
             
               14
               These
               shall
               fight
               with
               the
               Lamb.
               &
               the
               Lambe
               shall
               overcome
               them
               ;
               for
               hee
               is
               Lord
               of
               Lords
               ,
               and
               king
               of
               kings
               :
               and
               they
               that
               are
               on
               his
               side
               are
               called
               faithfull
               ,
               and
               chosen
               .
            
             
               15
               And
               he
               said
               vnto
               me
               ,
               The
               waters
               which
               thou
               sawest
               ,
               where
               the
               whore
               sitteth
               ,
               are
               people
               ,
               and
               multitudes
               ,
               and
               nations
               ,
               and
               tongues
               .
            
             
               16
               And
               the
               10
               hornes
               which
               thou
               sawest
               vpō
               the
               beast
               ,
               are
               they
               that
               shall
               hate
               the
               whore
               ,
               and
               shall
               make
               her
               desolate
               ,
               and
               naked
               ,
               and
               shall
               eate
               her
               flesh
               ,
               and
               burne
               her
               with
               fire
               .
            
             
               17
               For
               God
               hath
               put
               in
               their
               hearts
               to
               fulfill
               his
               will
               ,
               and
               to
               doe
               with
               one
               consent
               for
               to
               giue
               their
               kingdome
               vnto
               the
               beast
               ,
               vntill
               the
               words
               of
               God
               be
               fulfilled
               .
            
             
               18
               And
               that
               woman
               which
               thou
               sawest
               is
               that
               great
               citty
               which
               reigned
               ouer
               the
               kings
               of
               the
               earth
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             The
             Explication
             .
          
           
             1
             Then
             came
             one
             of
             the
             7.
             
             Angels
             to
             
             mee
             which
             were
             sent
             from
             God
             to
             powre
             downe
             7
             sorts
             of
             his
             iudgments
             vpon
             mē
             ;
             and
             this
             Angell
             spake
             vnto
             mee
             saying
             ,
             Come
             I
             will
             shewe
             thee
             the
             damnation
             of
             Rome
             that
             great
             Idolatrous
             citty
             ,
             which
             ruleth
             over
             many
             people
             ;
             For
             by
             the
             citty
             ,
             not
             the
             buildings
             ,
             but
             they
             which
             beare
             sway
             therein
             ,
             are
             vnderstood
             .
          
           
             2
             By
             whose
             suggestion
             the
             kings
             of
             the
             earth
             haue
             plaid
             the
             Idolatours
             ,
             and
             she
             hath
             made
             the
             inhabitāts
             of
             the
             earth
             drunken
             with
             her
             Idolatrie
             .
          
           
             3
             So
             then
             the
             Angell
             tooke
             me
             ,
             and
             carryed
             me
             aside
             into
             a
             secret
             place
             ,
             and
             I
             saw
             the
             citty
             of
             Rome
             represented
             vnder
             the
             forme
             of
             a
             woman
             ,
             which
             bore
             rule
             over
             an
             Empire
             ,
             the
             chiefe
             governors
             wher
             of
             were
             clad
             in
             scarlet
             ,
             and
             did
             assume
             many
             blasphemous
             titles
             ,
             and
             prerogatiues
             .
             And
             this
             Empire
             seated
             vpon
             7.
             hils
             had
             7
             sorts
             of
             divers
             successiue
             governments
             ,
             &
             was
             composed
             of
             tenne
             realmes
             ,
             &
             principall
             parts
             .
          
           
             4
             And
             this
             citty
             (
             that
             is
             to
             say
             the
             rulers
             of
             it
             )
             was
             clad
             in
             purple
             &
             scarlet
             ,
             having
             a
             crowne
             of
             gold
             vpon
             her
             head
             ,
             and
             a
             crosse
             of
             gold
             vpon
             her
             feet
             ,
             and
             vpon
             her
             crowne
             ,
             and
             on
             her
             hands
             ,
             many
             pretious
             
             stones
             ,
             with
             a
             mantle
             embrodered
             with
             pearle
             ;
             and
             through
             her
             great
             magnificence
             she
             made
             all
             the
             people
             to
             drink
             of
             the
             puddle
             of
             her
             Idolatrie
             ,
          
           
             5
             And
             made
             profession
             of
             great
             mysteries
             in
             her
             doctrine
             ,
             being
             indeed
             the
             great
             Babylon
             ,
             the
             headspring
             of
             Idolatrie
             ;
             and
             of
             the
             abominations
             of
             the
             world
             .
          
           
             6
             And
             I
             sawe
             this
             citie
             glutted
             with
             the
             blood
             of
             the
             faithfull
             ,
             raising
             vp
             persecutions
             ,
             and
             making
             the
             martyrs
             to
             bee
             massacred
             ,
             and
             hauing
             seen
             this
             ,
             I
             was
             striken
             with
             feare
             ,
             and
             stood
             amazed
             .
          
           
             7
             Then
             the
             Angel
             said
             vnto
             me
             ,
             why
             dost
             thou
             wonder
             ?
             I
             will
             shewe
             thee
             the
             interpretation
             of
             the
             vision
             ,
             and
             will
             tell
             thee
             what
             the
             beast
             represented
             by
             a
             woman
             meanes
             ,
             &
             what
             the
             Empire
             is
             ,
             that
             is
             figured
             by
             a
             beast
             hauing
             7.
             heads
             ,
             and
             ten
             hornes
             .
          
           
             8
             The
             beast
             which
             thou
             sawest
             is
             the
             Empire
             of
             Rome
             ,
             which
             did
             continue
             for
             a
             long
             time
             ,
             but
             now
             is
             no
             more
             ,
             being
             vāquisht
             ,
             and
             driven
             from
             Rome
             ,
             and
             Italie
             by
             the
             Lumbards
             :
             but
             shall
             rise
             vp
             againe
             from
             a
             low
             place
             ,
             and
             bee
             restored
             by
             the
             Papacie
             ,
             till
             the
             time
             that
             God
             at
             last
             shall
             
             destroy
             it
             .
             And
             the
             inhabitants
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             which
             haue
             not
             beene
             enrolled
             frō
             the
             foundation
             of
             the
             world
             amongst
             the
             number
             of
             the
             Elect
             ,
             shall
             wonder
             seeing
             the
             Empire
             of
             Rome
             ,
             which
             was
             at
             Rome
             but
             was
             driven
             thence
             by
             the
             Lumbards
             ,
             and
             neverthelesse
             doth
             nowe
             growe
             vp
             againe
             ,
             and
             is
             reerected
             by
             the
             Papacie
             ,
             so
             that
             a
             man
             may
             say
             that
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             is
             ,
             and
             is
             not
             ;
             that
             it
             is
             not
             because
             the
             Roman
             Emperours
             are
             no
             more
             ;
             that
             it
             is
             because
             the
             Pope
             doth
             in
             a
             manner
             set
             vp
             the
             Empire
             againe
             although
             it
             bee
             vnder
             another
             name
             and
             forme
             .
          
           
             9
             Here
             is
             need
             of
             wisdome
             to
             vnderstand
             this
             matter
             .
             In
             this
             vision
             of
             the
             beast
             which
             hath
             7
             heads
             and
             10
             hornes
             ,
             by
             the
             7.
             heads
             wee
             are
             to
             vnderstand
             7.
             hills
             ,
             vpon
             which
             the
             cittie
             of
             Rome
             is
             situate
             .
          
           
             10
             As
             also
             7.
             sortes
             of
             soueraintie
             or
             gouernement
             which
             must
             beare
             rule
             at
             Rome
             one
             after
             another
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             the
             kings
             the
             Consuls
             ,
             the
             militarie
             Tribunes
             ,
             the
             Decemvirs
             ,
             the
             Dictatours
             ,
             the
             Emperors
             and
             the
             Popes
             .
             The
             6.
             is
             nowe
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             the
             Emperours
             :
             And
             the
             7
             ,
             (
             to
             wit
             ,
             the
             Popes
             those
             Pontificall
             earthly
             monarchs
             )
             is
             not
             
             yet
             come
             ,
             and
             when
             it
             shall
             come
             ,
             it
             shall
             continue
             for
             a
             certaine
             time
             .
          
           
             11
             And
             also
             by
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             which
             was
             and
             is
             now
             no
             more
             ,
             the
             Empire
             of
             Charlemaigne
             ,
             and
             his
             successours
             ,
             is
             to
             be
             vnderstood
             ,
             which
             did
             governe
             at
             Rome
             for
             a
             time
             before
             the
             Monarchie
             of
             the
             Popes
             was
             fully
             perfected
             ;
             which
             Emperours
             although
             they
             be
             an
             8
             head
             ,
             doe
             yet
             neuerthelesse
             beare
             the
             name
             of
             one
             of
             the
             7.
             to
             wit
             of
             the
             Emperours
             .
          
           
             12
             But
             by
             the
             10
             hornes
             of
             this
             beast
             which
             is
             the
             Roman
             Papall
             Empire
             ,
             are
             vnderstood
             10
             kings
             which
             haue
             not
             as
             yet
             begun
             to
             raigne
             ,
             but
             shall
             raigne
             together
             with
             the
             Roman
             Papal
             Empire
             .
          
           
             13
             The
             counsells
             of
             these
             kings
             are
             ruled
             by
             the
             councel
             of
             the
             Papal
             Empire
             ,
             and
             they
             lend
             assistance
             vnto
             this
             Empire
             with
             their
             power
             .
          
           
             14
             They
             shall
             fight
             against
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             but
             Iesus
             Christ
             shall
             overcome
             them
             because
             he
             is
             Lord
             of
             Lords
             ,
             &
             king
             of
             kings
             ,
             and
             they
             which
             are
             his
             ,
             are
             called
             elect
             and
             faithfull
             .
          
           
             15
             After
             he
             said
             vnto
             me
             ,
             the
             waters
             which
             thou
             sawest
             ,
             ouer
             which
             Rome
             the
             Idolatresse
             hath
             dominion
             ,
             doe
             signifie
             
             people
             ,
             and
             multitudes
             ,
             and
             nations
             of
             divers
             languages
             .
          
           
             16
             And
             the
             10
             hornes
             which
             thou
             sawst
             this
             Empire
             to
             haue
             ,
             are
             the
             same
             10
             kings
             ,
             which
             in
             the
             ende
             shall
             conspire
             against
             it
             ,
             and
             consume
             it
             ,
             and
             burne
             it
             .
          
           
             17
             For
             God
             hath
             inclined
             their
             harts
             that
             they
             should
             do
             his
             will
             in
             executing
             his
             iudgements
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             should
             lay
             their
             heads
             together
             ,
             and
             should
             aid
             this
             Papall
             Empire
             with
             their
             forces
             ,
             only
             vntill
             the
             time
             of
             its
             continuance
             appointed
             by
             God
             bee
             accomplished
             .
          
           
             18
             And
             this
             womā
             which
             thou
             sawst
             is
             Rome
             that
             great
             city
             ,
             which
             commands
             the
             realmes
             of
             the
             earth
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             first
             part
             of
             this
             Prophecie
             .
          
           
             1
             Then
             there
             came
             one
             of
             the
             7
             Angels
             which
             had
             the
             7
             viols
             ,
             and
             talked
             with
             mee
             saying
             vnto
             me
             ;
             come
             I
             wil
             shew
             thee
             the
             dānation
             of
             the
             great
             where
             that
             sitteth
             vpon
             many
             waters
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Exposition
             .
          
           
             Then
             came
             one
             of
             the
             7
             Angels
             to
             mee
             
             were
             sent
             from
             God
             to
             powre
             downe
             7
             sorts
             of
             his
             iudgements
             vpon
             men
             ,
             &
             this
             Angel
             spoke
             vnto
             me
             saying
             ;
             Come
             I
             will
             shew
             thee
             the
             damnation
             of
             Rome
             that
             great
             Idolatrous
             citie
             ,
             which
             ruleth
             over
             many
             people
             ,
             for
             by
             the
             citie
             not
             the
             buildings
             ,
             but
             they
             that
             beare
             sway
             there●●
             are
             vnderstood
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Proofe
             .
          
           
             This
             Chapter
             is
             easie
             to
             be
             vnderstood
             ,
             for
             the
             6.
             first
             verses
             are
             expounded
             by
             those
             which
             follow
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             tearmes
             which
             the
             Angel
             vseth
             are
             sutable
             to
             the
             stile
             of
             the
             Prophets
             .
             They
             compare
             the
             Church
             to
             a
             womā
             ,
             calling
             her
             the
             daughter
             of
             Sion
             ,
             the
             spowse
             of
             our
             God
             :
             and
             so
             in
             the
             Apocalyps
             ,
             chap.
             12.
             he
             hath
             represented
             the
             Church
             vnder
             the
             forme
             of
             a
             woman
             :
             it
             is
             no
             marvaile
             therefore
             ,
             if
             the
             enimie
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             and
             the
             head
             of
             the
             Church
             opposite
             to
             God
             ,
             bee
             figured
             by
             a
             woman
             .
          
           
             The
             same
             Prophets
             doe
             call
             our
             covenant
             with
             God
             a
             marriage
             ,
             and
             the
             purity
             of
             our
             service
             to
             God
             by
             the
             name
             of
             chastitie
             ,
             and
             by
             a
             consequent
             they
             call
             Idolatrie
             
             which
             doth
             violate
             this
             marriage
             ,
             adulterie
             ,
             and
             spirituall
             fornication
             .
             *
             Ieremy
             saith
             ,
             that
             
               Iuda
               hath
               committed
               fornication
               with
               stones
               and
               stooks
               .
            
             According
             to
             this
             manner
             of
             speech
             doe
             they
             vse
             to
             call
             the
             people
             ,
             and
             cities
             that
             are
             giuen
             to
             Idolatrie
             ,
             by
             the
             name
             of
             harlots
             ,
             &
             strumpets
             .
             Isaiah
             in
             his
             1.
             
             Chap.
             v.
             21.
             
             
               How
               is
               the
               faithfull
               citie
               become
               an
               harlot
               ?
            
             The
             16.
             of
             Ezechiel
             is
             full
             of
             examples
             in
             this
             kinde
             .
             Nahum
             speaketh
             thus
             of
             Niniuie
             ,
             
               The
               harlot
               that
               selleth
               the
               people
               through
               her
               whordome
               ,
            
             
             which
             wordes
             are
             as
             it
             were
             all
             one
             with
             the
             words
             of
             S.
             Iohn
             here
             in
             this
             prophecie
             .
          
           
             Where
             wee
             are
             diligently
             to
             note
             that
             the
             Prophets
             and
             S.
             Iohn
             by
             the
             cities
             doe
             not
             vnderstand
             their
             walles
             ,
             but
             those
             which
             dwell
             in
             them
             ,
             and
             more
             especially
             such
             as
             are
             in
             authoritie
             ,
             and
             are
             set
             over
             them
             .
             For
             S.
             Iohn
             saith
             that
             this
             citie
             reigneth
             over
             many
             people
             ,
             and
             that
             she
             doth
             seduce
             the
             kings
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             which
             cannot
             agree
             to
             the
             walls
             ,
             and
             houses
             ,
             nor
             yet
             to
             the
             people
             of
             the
             citie
             of
             Rome
             ,
             but
             only
             to
             such
             as
             gouerne
             there
             .
          
           
             Now
             that
             this
             citie
             of
             which
             S.
             Iohn
             speakes
             is
             Rome
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             man
             that
             
             doubteth
             ,
             and
             our
             aduersaries
             themselues
             acknowledge
             it
             .
             For
             what
             citie
             can
             there
             bee
             which
             hath
             7
             hils
             ,
             which
             reigneth
             over
             kings
             ,
             which
             is
             an
             Idolatresse
             ,
             whose
             gouernours
             are
             clothed
             in
             skarlet
             ;
             doubtlesse
             there
             is
             no
             other
             of
             this
             nature
             but
             Rome
             ;
             And
             from
             S.
             Iohns
             time
             there
             hath
             beene
             no
             other
             citie
             hauing
             7
             hills
             that
             did
             reigne
             ouer
             the
             earth
             .
             Bellarmine
             in
             his
             3
             booke
             
               De
               Pontifice
               Romano
            
             ,
             &
             13
             Chap.
             *
             
               We
               may
               say
               ,
               and
               that
               better
               in
               my
               iudgement
               ,
               that
               by
               the
               whore
               Rome
               is
               vnderstood
               .
            
             The
             Iesuites
             Ribera
             ,
             and
             Viega
             say
             the
             same
             in
             their
             expositions
             of
             this
             Chap.
             Tertullian
             in
             his
             booke
             against
             the
             Iewes
             ,
             *
             
               Babylon
               in
               S.
               Iohn
               doth
               represent
               Rome
               ,
               being
               as
               great
               ,
               and
               as
               prowde
               of
               her
               dominions
               ,
               &
               as
               tyrannising
               over
               the
               Saints
               as
               ever
               Babylon
               was
               .
            
             The
             like
             vnto
             which
             he
             saith
             in
             his
             3
             booke
             and
             8.
             chap.
             against
             Marcion
             .
             S.
             Hierome
             in
             the
             11.
             question
             to
             
               Algasia
               ,
               According
               to
               the
               Revelation
               of
               S.
               Iohn
               in
               the
               forehead
               of
               the
               queane
               clad
               in
               purple
               there
               was
               a
               name
               of
               blasphemy
               written
               ,
               to
               wit
               ,
               Rome
               the
               everlasting
               ,
            
             and
             in
             his
             17.
             
             Epist.
             to
             Marcella
             ,
             *
             
               This
               place
               of
               Bethlehem
               ▪
               I
               am
               perswaded
               is
               more
               holy
               then
               that
               Tarpeian
               rocke
               (
               that
               is
               to
               say
               then
               
               the
               Capitoll
               of
               Rome
               )
               which
               by
               being
               often
               strooke
               with
               thunder
               from
               heaven
               did
               shew
               that
               it
               did
               not
               please
               God.
            
             Read
             the
             Revelation
             of
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             ,
             and
             see
             that
             which
             is
             there
             foretold
             of
             the
             whore
             clad
             in
             purple
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             blasphemie
             written
             in
             her
             forehead
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             7.
             hils
             ,
             and
             of
             manie
             waters
             ,
             and
             the
             destruction
             of
             Babylon
             .
             Bellarmine
             doeth
             confesse
             this
             ,
             but
             saith
             that
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             speakes
             of
             heatbenish
             Rome
             ,
             and
             not
             of
             Christian
             Rome
             ,
             such
             as
             it
             is
             now
             adaies
             .
             Which
             is
             altogither
             incoherent
             ;
             1.
             
             For
             heathnish
             Rome
             did
             not
             reigne
             over
             kings
             ,
             seeing
             that
             it
             did
             put
             downe
             kings
             .
             2.
             
             Heathnish
             Rome
             did
             not
             seduce
             the
             kings
             by
             flatterie
             ,
             and
             perswasion
             ,
             seeing
             that
             it
             went
             downe
             rightly
             to
             worke
             ,
             and
             conquered
             thē
             by
             opē
             force
             .
             3.
             
             Moreover
             here
             is
             mention
             made
             of
             the
             finall
             ruine
             of
             Rome
             ,
             so
             that
             it
             shall
             never
             be
             built
             vp
             againe
             ,
             which
             yet
             never
             befell
             heathenish
             Rome
             ;
             when
             therfore
             this
             destruction
             foretold
             of
             shall
             arriue
             ,
             it
             shall
             not
             light
             vpon
             the
             citty
             whilest
             it
             is
             heathenish
             ,
             but
             after
             that
             Paganisme
             is
             abolished
             .
             And
             indeed
             
               S.
               Hierom
            
             in
             the
             Epistle
             to
             Marcella
             formerly
             alleadged
             ,
             albeit
             he
             say
             that
             Rome
             by
             the
             confession
             of
             Christ
             
             hath
             defaced
             the
             name
             of
             blasphemy
             ;
             neverthelesse
             he
             spares
             not
             in
             the
             same
             place
             to
             recite
             the
             threatnings
             in
             the
             Apocalyps
             against
             it
             as
             not
             yet
             come
             ,
             &
             doth
             exhort
             Marcella
             to
             goe
             out
             of
             Babylon
             ,
             which
             were
             absurd
             if
             these
             threatnings
             had
             been
             pronoūced
             only
             against
             heathnish
             Rome
             .
          
           
             I
             would
             also
             know
             what
             sins
             should
             be
             the
             cause
             of
             the
             finall
             destructiō
             of
             Rome
             .
             Is
             it
             likely
             that
             it
             shall
             bee
             destroyed
             for
             the
             sinnes
             committed
             by
             Nero
             or
             Domitian
             1500
             yeares
             since
             ?
             So
             it
             is
             cleere
             that
             it
             shall
             be
             destroyed
             for
             the
             sinnes
             founde
             in
             it
             vpon
             the
             time
             of
             its
             destruction
             .
             Nor
             may
             wee
             omit
             that
             which
             the
             King
             notes
             as
             very
             fitting
             to
             this
             purpose
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             giues
             vs
             to
             vnderstand
             that
             his
             intent
             is
             to
             speake
             of
             thinges
             to
             come
             ,
             but
             heathnish
             Rome
             and
             the
             idolatrie
             thereof
             were
             present
             in
             
               S.
               Iohns
            
             time
             .
             To
             cōclude
             ,
             the
             truth
             is
             so
             cleere
             on
             our
             side
             ,
             that
             the
             Iesuits
             thēselues
             which
             haue
             written
             cōmentaries
             vpon
             the
             Apocalyps
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             Ribera
             ,
             and
             Viega
             ,
             take
             our
             parts
             ,
             and
             speake
             for
             vs.
             a
             Ribera
             saith
             ,
             
               We
               are
               to
               vnderstād
               this
               not
               only
               of
               Rome
               as
               it
               was
               heretofore
               vnder
               the
               Emperours
               ,
               but
               also
               as
               it
               shall
               be
               a●
               the
               end
               of
               the
               world
               .
               Viega
            
             after
             
             the
             same
             manner
             .
             b
             
               All
               that
               which
               is
               spoken
               in
               these
               chapters
               doth
               manifestly
               agree
               to
               Rome
               .
               As
               for
               the
               name
               of
               Babylon
               it
               is
               to
               be
               applyed
               to
               Rome
               which
               served
               Idols
               before
               euer
               it
               did
               receiue
               the
               faith
               of
               Christ
               ,
               &
               to
               Rome
               as
               it
               shall
               be
               a
               little
               before
               the
               time
               of
               Antichrist
               .
            
          
           
             c
             Tertullian
             (
             I
             must
             confesse
             )
             saith
             that
             
               the
               Church
               of
               Rome
               is
               happy
               ,
               to
               which
               the
               Prophets
               did
               powre
               out
               their
               doctrine
               togither
               with
               their
               bloud
               .
            
             But
             he
             speakes
             this
             to
             the
             church
             and
             not
             to
             the
             citty
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             to
             a
             few
             of
             the
             faithfull
             which
             lay
             hid
             amidst
             the
             corruption
             of
             this
             great
             cittie
             ,
             which
             seemes
             to
             be
             never
             the
             purer
             nowe
             a
             daies
             for
             all
             its
             outwarde
             profession
             of
             christianity
             :
             but
             if
             the
             preaching
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             in
             Capernaum
             ▪
             and
             in
             Ierusalem
             did
             not
             exempt
             these
             townes
             from
             the
             curse
             of
             God
             ,
             why
             should
             the
             presence
             of
             
               Saint
               Peter
            
             at
             Rome
             bee
             able
             to
             exempt
             it
             for
             ever
             from
             malediction
             .
          
           
             Some
             of
             the
             auncient
             were
             of
             opinion
             that
             this
             great
             whore
             did
             signifie
             the
             whole
             body
             and
             assembly
             of
             the
             wicked
             ,
             and
             the
             citty
             of
             the
             divell
             :
             which
             is
             refelled
             hereby
             ,
             because
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             saith
             ,
             that
             shee
             raigneth
             over
             the
             nations
             :
             for
             if
             this
             exposition
             
             were
             true
             ,
             then
             shee
             must
             needes
             reigne
             over
             her selfe
             ;
             shee
             that
             reigneth
             cannot
             be
             the
             same
             thing
             with
             those
             over
             whom
             shee
             reigneth
             .
             Herevnto
             adde
             that
             the
             7
             hils
             and
             the
             7
             kings
             ,
             and
             the
             habit
             of
             scarlet
             ,
             cannot
             be
             applyed
             to
             this
             meaning
             .
          
           
             That
             to
             sit
             vpon
             many
             waters
             ,
             doth
             signifie
             to
             raigne
             over
             many
             people
             ,
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             himselfe
             doth
             say
             in
             the
             15
             verse
             ,
             and
             wee
             haue
             proued
             it
             in
             an
             other
             place
             more
             at
             large
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             second
             part
             of
             this
             prophecie
             .
          
           
             2
             With
             whō
             the
             kings
             of
             the
             earth
             haue
             committed
             fornication
             ,
             and
             the
             inhabitants
             of
             the
             earth
             are
             drunke
             with
             the
             wine
             of
             her
             fornication
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Exposition
             .
          
           
             By
             whose
             suggestion
             the
             kings
             of
             the
             earth
             haue
             plaid
             the
             Idolatours
             ,
             and
             shee
             hath
             made
             the
             inhabitantes
             of
             the
             earth
             drunken
             with
             her
             Idolatrie
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             The
             Proofe
             .
          
           
             The
             Papal
             Empire
             being
             not
             of
             strēgth
             sufficient
             to
             abolish
             the
             kings
             ,
             doth
             make
             them
             drunke
             ,
             and
             lay
             them
             asleepe
             .
             It
             is
             the
             Pope
             that
             doeth
             abuse
             the
             bounty
             of
             our
             kings
             ,
             and
             vngratefully
             forgetting
             what
             benefactours
             they
             haue
             beene
             vnto
             him
             hath
             taken
             the
             third
             part
             of
             their
             land
             from
             them
             ,
             and
             the
             fifth
             part
             of
             their
             subiects
             ,
             over
             whom
             he
             boasteth
             that
             he
             hath
             absolute
             power
             ,
             to
             giue
             and
             take
             away
             their
             crownes
             at
             his
             pleasure
             ,
             &
             receiues
             homage
             ,
             and
             an
             oath
             of
             alleageance
             frō
             them
             ,
             and
             in
             way
             of
             recompence
             paies
             thē
             with
             trifles
             ,
             sending
             thē
             some
             holy
             Beads
             ,
             some
             Indulgences
             ,
             or
             certaine
             supposed
             reliques
             :
             and
             giues
             them
             the
             priuiledge
             of
             communicating
             vnder
             both
             kinds
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             he
             permits
             them
             ,
             by
             a
             speciall
             favour
             ,
             to
             obay
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             &
             giues
             them
             that
             by
             way
             of
             a
             priuiledge
             ,
             which
             Iesus
             Christ
             did
             grant
             to
             al
             Christiās
             .
             Likewise
             it
             is
             to
             gratifie
             kings
             that
             hee
             doeth
             suffer
             them
             to
             hold
             his
             horses
             bridle
             ,
             and
             when
             his
             Holinesse
             is
             reading
             the
             Masse
             in
             his
             owne
             person
             ,
             to
             hold
             the
             bason
             vnto
             him
             
             on
             their
             knees
             ,
             as
             if
             they
             were
             subdeacons
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             the
             Pope
             that
             hath
             taken
             from
             our
             kings
             the
             divine
             seruice
             in
             the
             language
             of
             their
             natiue
             countries
             ;
             and
             hath
             giuen
             them
             the
             Romane
             language
             in
             token
             of
             subiection
             ;
             Which
             hath
             taken
             the
             French
             liturgie
             from
             them
             ,
             and
             given
             them
             another
             to
             be
             sung
             after
             the
             Romish
             fashion
             ;
             which
             hath
             takē
             away
             wiues
             from
             priests
             :
             which
             hath
             brought
             vp
             images
             ,
             and
             established
             transubstantiation
             ,
             the
             feast
             God
             ,
             the
             adoration
             of
             the
             Sacrament
             ,
             &
             which
             hath
             wrested
             the
             holy
             scripture
             out
             of
             the
             hands
             of
             the
             people
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             third
             part
             of
             this
             prophecie
             .
          
           
             3
             So
             he
             carried
             mee
             away
             into
             the
             wildernesse
             in
             the
             spirit
             ,
             and
             I
             saw
             a
             woman
             sit
             vpon
             a
             scarlet
             coloured
             beast
             ,
             ful
             of
             names
             of
             blasphemie
             which
             had
             seaven
             heads
             ,
             and
             ten
             hornes
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Exposition
             .
          
           
             3
             So
             then
             the
             Angell
             tooke
             me
             ,
             and
             carryed
             me
             aside
             into
             a
             secret
             place
             ,
             and
             I
             
             saw
             the
             cittie
             of
             Rome
             represented
             vnder
             the
             forme
             of
             a
             woman
             ,
             which
             bore
             rule
             over
             an
             Empire
             ,
             the
             chiefe
             governors
             wher
             of
             were
             clad
             in
             scarlet
             ,
             and
             did
             assume
             many
             blasphemous
             titles
             ,
             and
             prerogatiues
             .
             And
             this
             Empire
             seated
             vpon
             7.
             hils
             had
             7
             sorts
             of
             divers
             successiue
             governments
             ,
             &
             was
             composed
             of
             tenne
             realmes
             ,
             &
             principall
             parts
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Proofe
             .
          
           
             By
             the
             woman
             (
             saith
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             )
             verse
             18
             the
             citie
             is
             to
             be
             vnderstood
             having
             seauē
             hills
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             Rome
             .
             Now
             by
             the
             citie
             wee
             are
             not
             to
             vnderstand
             the
             walles
             ,
             seeing
             that
             hee
             saith
             that
             this
             citie
             doth
             reigne
             ouer
             the
             people
             ,
             and
             vseth
             flatterie
             to
             make
             the
             kings
             of
             the
             earth
             drunke
             :
             which
             cannot
             agree
             to
             the
             buildings
             ,
             but
             only
             to
             the
             gouernours
             of
             the
             citie
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             to
             the
             Pope
             &
             his
             consistory
             .
             This
             woman
             therefore
             is
             mounted
             on
             a
             beast
             hauing
             7
             heads
             and
             10
             hornes
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             she
             doth
             reigne
             ouer
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             which
             is
             fained
             to
             haue
             7
             heads
             because
             of
             the
             7
             hills
             on
             which
             Rome
             is
             situate
             ,
             and
             because
             of
             the
             7
             sorts
             of
             soueraigntie
             
             which
             haue
             borne
             rule
             over
             that
             place
             successiuely
             ,
             as
             rhe
             Angel
             doth
             expound
             it
             in
             the
             9
             and
             10
             verses
             ,
             and
             wee
             haue
             shewd
             it
             at
             large
             in
             the
             exposition
             of
             the
             13.
             chap.
             &
             1.
             verse
             .
             She
             is
             also
             clad
             in
             skarlet
             ,
             for
             this
             is
             the
             Popes
             habit
             ,
             not
             only
             by
             custome
             ,
             but
             by
             expresse
             rule
             :
             as
             the
             third
             booke
             of
             holy
             ceremonies
             saith
             in
             the
             3
             sect
             .
             and
             5.
             chap.
             
               Ruber
               color
               propriè
               ad
               Papam
               pertinet
               ;
               The
               red
               colour
               doth
               properly
               appertaine
               to
               the
               Pope
               .
            
             and
             in
             the
             *
             1.
             booke
             ,
             1.
             chap.
             and
             9.
             sect
             .
             it
             is
             said
             that
             the
             Popes
             chaire
             ,
             and
             the
             place
             vpon
             which
             it
             stands
             must
             be
             couered
             al
             ouer
             with
             cloth
             of
             skarlet
             .
             There
             is
             none
             of
             his
             apparell
             ,
             even
             downe
             to
             his
             stockings
             ,
             and
             shooes
             ,
             that
             is
             not
             of
             skarlet
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             said
             in
             the
             
             Chap.
             of
             the
             1.
             section
             of
             the
             first
             booke
             .
             this
             is
             also
             the
             colour
             of
             the
             Cardinals
             habit
             ,
             as
             euery
             mā
             seeth
             .
             Nay
             which
             is
             more
             ,
             by
             the
             ordinance
             of
             Pope
             Paulus
             the
             2.
             the
             Cardinals
             mules
             must
             be
             couered
             ouer
             with
             skarlet
             ,
             as
             Platina
             reporteth
             in
             his
             life
             .
             Being
             willing
             it
             seemes
             that
             this
             prophecy
             which
             representeth
             the
             head
             of
             this
             Empire
             mounted
             vpon
             a
             beast
             couered
             with
             skarlet
             ,
             should
             also
             agree
             to
             euery
             Cardinall
             apart
             .
          
           
           
             As
             for
             the
             names
             of
             blasphemy
             which
             this
             Papall
             Empire
             doth
             assume
             ,
             see
             that
             which
             hath
             beene
             said
             of
             this
             vpon
             the
             5.
             verse
             of
             the
             13.
             chap.
             
          
        
         
           
             The
             4
             part
             of
             this
             Prophecie
             .
          
           
             4
             And
             the
             woman
             was
             araied
             in
             purple
             and
             scarlet
             ,
             and
             gilded
             with
             gold
             ,
             &
             precious
             stones
             ,
             and
             pearles
             ,
             and
             had
             a
             cuppe
             of
             gold
             in
             her
             hand
             ,
             full
             of
             the
             abomination
             ,
             &
             filthinesse
             of
             her
             fornication
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Exposition
             .
          
           
             4
             And
             this
             citty
             (
             that
             is
             to
             say
             the
             rulers
             of
             it
             )
             was
             clad
             in
             purple
             &
             scarlet
             ,
             having
             a
             crowne
             of
             gold
             vpon
             her
             head
             ,
             and
             a
             crosse
             of
             gold
             vpon
             her
             feet
             ,
             and
             vpon
             her
             crowne
             ,
             and
             on
             her
             hands
             many
             pretious
             stones
             ,
             with
             a
             mantle
             embrodered
             with
             pearle
             ;
             and
             through
             her
             great
             magnificence
             she
             made
             all
             the
             people
             to
             drink
             of
             the
             puddle
             of
             her
             Idolatrie
             ,
          
        
         
           
             The
             Proofe
             .
          
           
             This
             proposition
             is
             drawne
             from
             experience
             
             knowne
             to
             every
             man
             ,
             and
             from
             the
             rules
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             published
             by
             our
             adversaries
             .
             The
             6.
             
             Chap.
             and
             first
             section
             of
             the
             first
             booke
             of
             holy
             ceremonies
             hath
             these
             words
             ;
             
               They
               put
               red
               stockings
               on
               his
               legs
               ,
               and
               red
               shooes
               vpon
               his
               feet
               adorned
               with
               a
               crosse
               of
               gold
               ;
               and
               a
               little
               after
               ,
               He
               is
               apparelled
               with
               a
               long
               Albe
               ,
               a
               girdle
               ,
            
             
             
               and
               a
               stole
               hanging
               vpon
               his
               necke
               all
               embost
               with
               pearle
               .
            
          
           
             Whereas
             it
             is
             added
             that
             this
             whore
             doth
             giue
             her
             false
             doctrines
             vnto
             men
             in
             a
             cup
             of
             gold
             ,
             the
             meaning
             thereof
             is
             that
             she
             giues
             them
             with
             pompe
             ,
             and
             outward
             magnificence
             .
          
           
             The
             capitall
             letters
             of
             these
             words
             ,
             
               Poculum
               Aureum
               Plenum
               Abominationum
            
             ,
             being
             put
             together
             make
             vp
             Papa
             :
             VVhether
             it
             be
             that
             it
             falls
             out
             so
             by
             chance
             ,
             or
             rather
             that
             God
             would
             hereby
             giue
             vs
             an
             advertisement
             .
             And
             that
             which
             makes
             this
             observation
             the
             better
             worthie
             the
             noting
             ,
             is
             that
             it
             is
             found
             in
             Latin
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             language
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             .
          
           
             What
             these
             abominations
             are
             of
             which
             Rome
             makes
             the
             people
             to
             drinke
             I
             haue
             already
             shewed
             throughout
             my
             whole
             second
             booke
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             The
             5.
             part
             of
             this
             prophecie
             .
          
           
             5
             And
             in
             her
             forehead
             was
             a
             name
             written
             ,
             A
             mystery
             ,
             that
             great
             Babylon
             ,
             that
             mother
             of
             whoredomes
             ,
             and
             abominations
             of
             the
             earth
             .
          
           
             6
             And
             I
             saw
             the
             woman
             drunken
             with
             the
             bloud
             of
             Saints
             ,
             and
             with
             the
             bloud
             of
             the
             Martyrs
             of
             Iesus
             ,
             and
             when
             I
             saw
             her
             ,
             I
             wōdred
             with
             great
             marvell
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Exposition
             .
          
           
             5
             And
             made
             profession
             of
             great
             mysteries
             in
             her
             doctrine
             ,
             being
             indeed
             the
             great
             Babylon
             ,
             the
             headspring
             of
             Idolatrie
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             abominations
             of
             the
             world
             .
          
           
             6
             And
             I
             sawe
             this
             citie
             glutted
             with
             the
             blood
             of
             the
             faithfull
             ,
             raising
             vp
             persecutions
             ,
             and
             making
             the
             martyrs
             to
             bee
             massacred
             ,
             and
             hauing
             seen
             this
             ,
             I
             was
             striken
             with
             feare
             ,
             and
             stood
             amazed
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Proofe
             .
          
           
             Wee
             haue
             shewed
             in
             the
             exposition
             of
             
             the
             13.
             chap.
             and
             16.
             verse
             that
             according
             to
             the
             stile
             of
             the
             Prophets
             and
             the
             Apocalyps
             ,
             the
             marke
             in
             the
             forehead
             signifies
             the
             profession
             of
             religion
             ;
             in
             this
             place
             therefore
             ,
             to
             haue
             the
             name
             ,
             Mysterie
             ,
             written
             in
             the
             forehead
             ,
             signifies
             to
             make
             profession
             of
             abstruse
             ,
             and
             hidden
             mysteries
             ,
             such
             as
             all
             the
             mysteries
             of
             the
             Masse
             are
             ▪
             of
             which
             
               Pope
               Innocent
            
             hath
             written
             6.
             books
             ,
             wherein
             he
             finds
             great
             mysteries
             in
             all
             the
             attire
             ,
             and
             euery
             action
             of
             the
             Priest
             ;
             The
             seuerall
             habits
             of
             the
             Priest
             are
             enigmaticall
             ,
             and
             all
             his
             gestures
             allegoricall
             ,
             the
             priest
             turnes
             his
             backe
             to
             the
             people
             ,
             because
             God
             said
             vnto
             Moses
             a
             
               thou
               shalt
               see
               my
               backe
               parts
               .
            
             Hee
             which
             reads
             the
             Epistle
             ,
             goes
             in
             at
             one
             side
             of
             the
             pulpit
             ,
             and
             out
             at
             another
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             written
             ,
             b
             
               They
               were
               warned
               from
               God
               to
               turne
               another
               way
               .
            
             Hee
             which
             serues
             the
             priest
             and
             beares
             vp
             his
             traine
             ,
             doth
             turne
             and
             apply
             his
             body
             to
             euery
             motion
             of
             the
             priest
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             written
             ,
             
               Where
               I
               am
               there
               shall
               my
               servant
               be
               .
            
             In
             the
             Episcopall
             Masse
             they
             kisse
             the
             Bishop
             on
             his
             shoulder
             looking
             vpon
             his
             face
             backward
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             written
             ,
             
               Videmus
               in
               aenigmate
            
             .
             The
             Priests
             follow
             the
             crosse
             being
             cloathed
             
             in
             white
             surplisses
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             written
             ,
             
               They
               shall
               follow
               the
               Lambe
               being
               cloathed
               in
               white
               roabes
               .
            
             And
             all
             is
             done
             is
             a
             strange
             language
             ,
             in
             words
             mumbled
             out
             softly
             ,
             
               for
               feare
            
             (
             saith
             
               Pope
               Innocent
               )
               least
               the
               flies
               should
               tast
               the
               sweetnes
               of
               this
               ointment
               .
            
             But
             the
             greatest
             mysterie
             of
             all
             others
             is
             the
             doctrine
             of
             transubstantiation
             which
             makes
             God
             with
             fiue
             wordes
             ,
             and
             restraines
             a
             human
             body
             within
             a
             point
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             doth
             enclude
             that
             which
             is
             long
             ,
             within
             that
             which
             hath
             no
             length
             ,
             &
             placeth
             all
             the
             parts
             of
             a
             mans
             body
             vnder
             one
             only
             point
             ,
             and
             doth
             at
             the
             same
             time
             make
             length
             to
             be
             in
             the
             host
             ,
             &
             no
             length
             breadth
             ,
             and
             no
             breadth
             .
          
           
             There
             is
             a
             mysterie
             also
             in
             their
             saying
             ouer
             the
             same
             prayer
             ,
             7
             ,
             or
             50
             times
             precisely
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             number
             of
             the
             beads
             of
             their
             bracelet
             ,
             &
             in
             their
             making
             vertue
             to
             be
             in
             a
             number
             ,
             so
             that
             if
             a
             man
             fail
             in
             reckoning
             ,
             all
             the
             grace
             of
             the
             praier
             is
             gone
             ,
             and
             the
             fruit
             thereof
             lost
             .
             Besides
             we
             haue
             shewed
             in
             our
             exposition
             of
             of
             the
             2.
             chapt
             .
             of
             the
             2.
             to
             the
             Thessalonians
             ,
             that
             Poperie
             is
             wholy
             wouen
             together
             with
             a
             profound
             mysterie
             ,
             and
             wonderfull
             craft
             .
          
           
           
             Now
             although
             this
             bee
             the
             meaning
             of
             this
             prophecie
             ,
             yet
             this
             letteth
             not
             but
             that
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             may
             haue
             a
             reference
             to
             the
             secret
             and
             mysticall
             name
             of
             the
             citie
             of
             Rome
             which
             she
             vseth
             in
             her
             ceremonies
             ,
             and
             most
             secret
             mysteries
             .
             Which
             name
             being
             on
             a
             time
             vttered
             by
             
               Valerius
               Soranus
            
             ,
             he
             was
             forthwith
             punnisht
             ,
             as
             Plinie
             reporteth
             in
             his
             3.
             booke
             &
             5.
             chap.
             and
             
               Iulius
               Solinus
            
             in
             the
             first
             chapter
             of
             his
             first
             booke
             .
          
           
             
               Ioseph
               Scaliger
            
             a
             man
             no
             lesse
             faithfull
             and
             honest
             ,
             then
             learned
             ,
             hath
             often
             told
             me
             that
             being
             at
             Rome
             with
             
               Mounsieur
               de
               Abin
            
             Embassadour
             for
             the
             king
             ,
             amongst
             divers
             other
             things
             of
             S.
             Angeloes
             Castle
             ,
             that
             were
             shewd
             them
             ,
             they
             saw
             old
             plain
             miters
             ,
             which
             had
             the
             worde
             Mysterium
             engraued
             on
             their
             front
             .
             And
             Brocard
             witnesseth
             as
             much
             in
             his
             notes
             vpon
             this
             place
             .
             If
             it
             be
             so
             ,
             we
             need
             seeke
             no
             farther
             for
             any
             other
             interpretation
             .
          
           
             This
             same
             Rome
             ,
             in
             regard
             of
             those
             which
             raigne
             there
             ,
             is
             called
             Babylon
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             resemblance
             betweene
             these
             two
             .
             Babylon
             did
             destroy
             the
             Temple
             ,
             and
             this
             doth
             destroy
             the
             Church
             which
             is
             the
             
               Temple
               of
               God
               ;
               Babylon
            
             did
             lead
             men
             into
             
             Captivitie
             ,
             and
             this
             doth
             detaine
             the
             Church
             captiue
             vnder
             the
             yoke
             of
             the
             Inquisition
             ,
             and
             of
             tyrannie
             ;
             Babylon
             did
             gather
             all
             the
             riches
             of
             the
             earth
             vnder
             herselfe
             ,
             and
             this
             doth
             enrich
             herselfe
             by
             the
             spoiles
             of
             christianitie
             ;
             Babylon
             was
             giuen
             to
             Idolatrie
             ,
             and
             so
             is
             this
             too
             ;
             Both
             cities
             were
             first
             built
             by
             theeues
             .
             The
             captiuitie
             of
             Babylon
             was
             a
             forerunning
             signe
             of
             the
             first
             comming
             of
             our
             Lord
             ,
             and
             the
             captivitie
             of
             the
             Church
             vnder
             the
             Romish
             bōdags
             ,
             is
             a
             forerunning
             signe
             of
             the
             second
             comming
             of
             the
             sonne
             of
             God.
             The
             Fathers
             vnderstood
             it
             so
             .
             Tertullian
             hath
             told
             vs
             aboue
             that
             
               S.
               Iohns
            
             Babylon
             is
             Rome
             ,
             and
             St
             Augustin
             in
             the
             18
             booke
             of
             the
             citie
             of
             God.
             chap.
             2.22
             .
             saith
             ,
             
               Babylon
               is
               the
               first
               Rome
               ,
               and
               Rome
               is
               the
               second
               Babylon
               .
            
          
           
             As
             for
             the
             cruelties
             and
             persecutions
             ,
             we
             which
             haue
             suffered
             them
             &
             in
             whose
             families
             the
             wounds
             are
             yet
             to
             bee
             seene
             ,
             beleeue
             them
             without
             farther
             proofs
             .
             See
             what
             we
             haue
             said
             of
             this
             vpon
             the
             7
             verse
             of
             the
             13
             Chapter
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             6.
             part
             of
             this
             prophecie
             .
          
           
             7
             Then
             the
             Angell
             said
             vnto
             me
             .
             Wherfore
             
             marveilest
             thou
             ?
             I
             will
             shew
             thee
             the
             mysterie
             of
             that
             woman
             ,
             and
             of
             that
             beast
             that
             beareth
             her
             ,
             which
             hath
             seaven
             heads
             and
             ten
             hornes
             .
          
           
             8
             The
             beast
             that
             thou
             haste
             seene
             ,
             was
             ,
             and
             is
             not
             ,
             &
             shall
             ascend
             out
             of
             the
             bottomlesse
             pit
             ,
             and
             shall
             go
             into
             perdition
             ,
             and
             they
             that
             dwell
             on
             the
             earth
             shall
             wonder
             (
             whose
             names
             are
             not
             written
             in
             the
             booke
             of
             life
             frō
             the
             foundation
             of
             the
             world
             )
             when
             they
             behold
             the
             beast
             that
             was
             ,
             and
             is
             not
             ,
             and
             yet
             is
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Exposition
             .
          
           
             7
             Then
             the
             Angel
             said
             vnto
             me
             ,
             why
             dost
             thou
             wonder
             ?
             I
             will
             shewe
             thee
             the
             interpretation
             of
             the
             vision
             ,
             and
             will
             tell
             thee
             what
             the
             beast
             represented
             by
             a
             woman
             meanes
             ,
             &
             what
             the
             Empire
             is
             ,
             that
             is
             figured
             by
             a
             beast
             hauing
             7.
             heads
             ,
             and
             ten
             hornes
             .
          
           
             8
             The
             beast
             which
             thou
             sawest
             is
             the
             Empire
             of
             Rome
             ,
             which
             did
             continue
             for
             a
             long
             time
             ,
             but
             now
             is
             no
             more
             ,
             being
             vāquisht
             ,
             and
             driven
             from
             Rome
             ,
             and
             Italie
             by
             the
             Lumbards
             :
             but
             shall
             rise
             vp
             againe
             from
             a
             low
             place
             ,
             and
             bee
             restored
             by
             the
             
             Papacie
             ,
             till
             the
             time
             that
             God
             at
             last
             shall
             destroy
             it
             .
             And
             the
             inhabitants
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             which
             haue
             not
             beene
             enrolled
             frō
             the
             foundation
             of
             the
             world
             amongst
             the
             number
             of
             the
             Elect
             ,
             shall
             wonder
             seeing
             the
             Empire
             of
             Rome
             ,
             which
             was
             at
             Rome
             but
             was
             driven
             thence
             by
             the
             Lumbards
             ,
             and
             neverthelesse
             doth
             nowe
             growe
             vp
             againe
             ,
             and
             is
             reerected
             by
             the
             Papacie
             ,
             so
             that
             a
             man
             may
             say
             that
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             is
             ,
             and
             is
             not
             ;
             that
             it
             is
             not
             because
             the
             Roman
             Emperours
             are
             no
             more
             ;
             that
             it
             is
             because
             the
             Pope
             doth
             in
             a
             manner
             set
             vp
             the
             Empire
             againe
             although
             it
             bee
             vnder
             another
             name
             and
             forme
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Proofe
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             vnderstanding
             of
             this
             prophecie
             we
             are
             to
             note
             that
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             in
             this
             8.
             v.
             doth
             followe
             the
             stile
             of
             the
             Prophets
             ,
             which
             is
             to
             speake
             of
             things
             to
             come
             as
             if
             they
             were
             present
             ,
             or
             past
             ;
             &
             to
             transport
             his
             spirit
             beyond
             future
             ages
             ,
             as
             if
             they
             were
             already
             gon
             .
             For
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             in
             this
             place
             doth
             speake
             as
             if
             he
             were
             liuing
             at
             the
             time
             wherein
             (
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             being
             ruinated
             by
             the
             Lumbards
             )
             the
             Pope
             did
             
             cast
             about
             to
             compasse
             a
             temporall
             Monarchie
             ,
             and
             to
             reerect
             the
             Empire
             in
             his
             owne
             person
             :
             The
             vnderstanding
             of
             this
             cleereth
             the
             prophecie
             ,
             for
             larger
             proofes
             whereof
             turne
             backe
             to
             that
             which
             wee
             haue
             said
             vpon
             the
             1
             &
             3
             verses
             of
             the
             13
             Chapter
             .
          
           
             That
             which
             is
             said
             at
             the
             ende
             is
             plaine
             enough
             of
             it selfe
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             the
             Pope
             is
             Emperour
             vnder
             another
             title
             ,
             and
             another
             forme
             of
             Empire
             .
             For
             we
             haue
             shewed
             ,
             how
             he
             hath
             drawne
             the
             rights
             ,
             &
             dignities
             of
             Emperours
             vnto
             himselfe
             ;
             Although
             the
             forme
             of
             his
             gouernement
             be
             diuers
             from
             theirs
             .
             For
             the
             Emperours
             did
             raigne
             by
             force
             ,
             but
             he
             by
             fraud
             ;
             In
             the
             ancient
             Empire
             the
             spirituall
             power
             was
             only
             a
             dependance
             of
             the
             temporall
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             papacie
             the
             Temporall
             power
             doth
             depend
             vpon
             the
             spirituall
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             7.
             part
             of
             this
             prophecie
             .
          
           
             9
             Here
             is
             the
             minde
             that
             hath
             wisdom
             .
             The
             7.
             heads
             are
             7.
             mountaines
             ,
             whereon
             the
             woman
             sitteth
             ▪
             they
             are
             also
             7.
             kings
             .
          
           
             10
             Fiue
             are
             fallen
             ,
             and
             one
             is
             ,
             and
             an
             other
             is
             not
             yet
             come
             :
             and
             when
             he
             commeth
             
             he
             must
             continue
             a
             long
             space
             .
          
           
             11
             And
             the
             beast
             that
             was
             and
             is
             not
             ▪
             is
             even
             the
             eighth
             ,
             and
             is
             one
             of
             the
             7.
             &
             shal
             goe
             into
             destruction
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Exposition
             .
          
           
             9
             Here
             is
             need
             of
             wisdome
             to
             vnderstand
             this
             matter
             .
             In
             this
             vision
             of
             the
             beast
             which
             hath
             7
             heads
             and
             10
             hornes
             ,
             by
             the
             7
             ▪
             heads
             wee
             are
             to
             vnderstand
             7.
             hills
             ,
             vpon
             which
             the
             cittie
             of
             Rome
             is
             situate
             .
          
           
             10
             As
             also
             7.
             sortes
             of
             soueraigntie
             or
             gouernement
             which
             must
             beare
             rule
             at
             Rome
             one
             after
             another
             ,
             to
             wit
             ▪
             the
             kings
             the
             Consuls
             ,
             the
             militarie
             Tribunes
             ,
             the
             Decemvirs
             ,
             the
             Dictatours
             ,
             the
             Emperors
             and
             the
             Popes
             .
             The
             6.
             is
             nowe
             ,
             to
             wit
             ▪
             the
             Emperours
             :
             And
             the
             7
             ▪
             (
             to
             wit
             ,
             the
             Popes
             those
             Pontificall
             earthly
             monarchs
             )
             is
             not
             yet
             come
             ,
             and
             when
             it
             shall
             come
             ,
             it
             shall
             continue
             for
             a
             certaine
             time
             .
          
           
             11
             And
             also
             by
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             which
             was
             and
             is
             now
             no
             more
             ,
             the
             Empire
             of
             Charlemaigne
             ,
             and
             his
             successours
             ,
             is
             to
             be
             vnderstood
             ,
             which
             did
             governe
             at
             Rome
             for
             a
             time
             before
             the
             Monarchie
             of
             
             the
             Popes
             was
             fully
             perfected
             ;
             which
             Emperours
             although
             they
             be
             an
             8
             head
             ,
             doe
             yet
             neuerthelesse
             beare
             the
             name
             of
             one
             of
             the
             7.
             to
             wit
             of
             the
             Emperours
             .
          
           
             This
             exposition
             doth
             proue
             it selfe
             ,
             and
             experience
             speakes
             for
             it
             without
             any
             proofe
             .
             Besides
             as
             concerning
             the
             7
             ▪
             hills
             ;
             and
             7
             sorts
             of
             soveraigntie
             ,
             we
             haue
             spokē
             of
             them
             at
             large
             in
             the
             13
             chap.
             &
             1.
             verse
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             8
             part
             of
             this
             Prophecie
             .
          
           
             12
             and
             the
             10.
             hornes
             which
             thou
             sawest
             ,
             are
             10
             kings
             ,
             which
             yet
             haue
             not
             received
             a
             kingdome
             ,
             but
             shall
             receiue
             power
             as
             kings
             at
             one
             hower
             ,
             with
             the
             beast
             .
          
           
             13
             These
             haue
             one
             minde
             ,
             &
             shall
             giue
             their
             power
             ,
             and
             authority
             vnto
             the
             beast
             .
          
           
             14
             These
             shall
             fight
             with
             the
             Lamb
             ,
             &
             the
             Lambe
             shall
             overcome
             them
             ;
             for
             hee
             is
             Lord
             of
             Lords
             ▪
             and
             king
             of
             kings
             :
             and
             they
             that
             are
             on
             his
             side
             are
             called
             faithfull
             ,
             and
             chosen
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Exposition
             .
          
           
             12
             But
             by
             the
             10
             hornes
             of
             this
             beast
             which
             is
             the
             Roman
             Papall
             Empire
             ,
             are
             
             vnderstood
             10
             kings
             which
             haue
             not
             as
             yet
             begun
             to
             raigne
             ,
             but
             shall
             raigne
             together
             with
             the
             Roman
             Papal
             Empire
             .
          
           
             13
             The
             counsells
             of
             these
             kings
             are
             ruled
             by
             the
             counsel
             of
             the
             Papal
             Empire
             ,
             and
             they
             lend
             assistance
             vnto
             this
             Empire
             with
             their
             power
             .
          
           
             14
             They
             shall
             fight
             against
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             but
             Iesus
             Christ
             shall
             overcome
             them
             because
             he
             is
             Lord
             of
             Lords
             ,
             &
             king
             of
             kings
             ,
             and
             they
             which
             are
             his
             ,
             are
             called
             elect
             and
             faithfull
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Proofe
             .
          
           
             In
             this
             number
             of
             10
             kings
             doth
             the
             euidence
             of
             this
             prophecie
             principally
             appeare
             .
             We
             shall
             see
             anon
             in
             the
             exposition
             of
             the
             7
             chap.
             of
             Daniel
             ,
             how
             that
             a
             little
             before
             the
             Pope
             came
             to
             bee
             an
             earthly
             Monarch
             ,
             the
             ancient
             Roman
             Empire
             was
             devided
             into
             10
             kingdomes
             ,
             and
             cut
             out
             into
             10
             peeces
             .
             We
             haue
             also
             seene
             vpon
             the
             1
             verse
             of
             the
             13
             chap.
             that
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             whilst
             it
             was
             in
             its
             flourishing
             estate
             ,
             did
             consist
             of
             10
             provinces
             &
             principall
             parts
             .
             But
             here
             mention
             is
             made
             of
             Kings
             that
             the
             Pope
             shall
             subiect
             vnto
             
             himselfe
             and
             which
             shall
             vnite
             themselues
             ●n
             a
             bond
             of
             amitie
             with
             the
             Pope
             .
             Gregory
             the
             7
             surnamed
             Hildebrand
             was
             he
             that
             did
             first
             exalt
             the
             Papacie
             to
             the
             a
             heigth
             of
             glory
             ,
             and
             worldly
             greatnesse
             :
             Now
             at
             the
             same
             time
             10
             kingdomes
             did
             serue
             Papisme
             ,
             first
             The
             Empire
             of
             Germanie
             ,
             2.
             
             Fraunce
             ,
             3.
             
             England
             ,
             4.
             
             Scotland
             ,
             5.
             
             Denmarke
             ,
             6.
             
             Polonie
             ,
             7.
             the
             kingdome
             of
             Spain
             8.
             the
             kingdome
             of
             Navarre
             .
             9.
             
             The
             kingdome
             of
             Hungarie
             ,
             10.
             the
             kingdome
             of
             Naples
             ,
             and
             Sicilie
             .
             Yea
             and
             in
             the
             memorie
             of
             our
             forefathers
             
               Pope
               Leo
            
             the
             10
             ,
             being
             as
             yet
             in
             his
             full
             force
             ,
             a
             little
             before
             the
             wound
             which
             hee
             receaued
             ,
             Papistrie
             held
             10
             kingdomes
             in
             possession
             .
             1.
             
             The
             Empire
             of
             Germanie
             .
             2.
             
             Fraunce
             .
             3.
             
             England
             ,
             4.
             
             Scotland
             ,
             5.
             
             Denmarke
             .
             6.
             
             Polonie
             ,
             7.
             
             Hungarie
             .
             8.
             
             The
             realme
             of
             Arragon
             ,
             Naples
             ,
             and
             Sicilie
             .
             9.
             
             The
             realme
             of
             Castile
             .
             10.
             
             The
             realme
             of
             Portugall
             .
             For
             the
             realme
             of
             Bohemia
             is
             a
             fiefe
             of
             the
             Empire
             of
             Germanie
             ,
             and
             an
             Electorate
             of
             the
             Empire
             .
             Moreouer
             it
             is
             said
             that
             these
             kings
             shall
             begin
             to
             raigne
             together
             with
             the
             beast
             ,
             because
             (
             as
             the
             King
             of
             great
             Brittaine
             hath
             truely
             noted
             )
             all
             the
             realmes
             as
             it
             were
             of
             Christendome
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             the
             
             Papal
             Monarch
             (
             if
             we
             looke
             back
             to
             their
             first
             originall
             )
             tooke
             their
             beginning
             from
             the
             division
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             .
             Since
             therefore
             by
             this
             so
             cleere
             an
             exposition
             it
             is
             evident
             that
             the
             King
             of
             England
             is
             one
             of
             those
             which
             S.
             Iohn
             speaks
             of
             ,
             and
             that
             his
             predecessours
             of
             England
             and
             Scotland
             did
             make
             vp
             two
             hornes
             of
             this
             beast
             what
             pleasure
             is
             it
             vnto
             this
             so
             great
             a
             King
             to
             read
             himselfe
             mentioned
             in
             these
             diuine
             reuelations
             ?
             or
             who
             cā
             better
             diue
             into
             the
             meaning
             of
             this
             prophecie
             ,
             then
             he
             which
             makes
             vp
             a
             part
             of
             the
             prophecy
          
        
         
           
             The
             9
             part
             of
             this
             prophecie
             .
          
           
             15
             And
             he
             said
             vnto
             me
             ,
             The
             waters
             which
             thou
             sawest
             ,
             where
             the
             whore
             sitteth
             ,
             are
             people
             ,
             and
             multitudes
             ,
             and
             nations
             ,
             and
             tongues
             .
          
           
             16
             And
             the
             10
             hornes
             which
             thou
             sawest
             vpō
             the
             beast
             ,
             are
             they
             that
             shall
             hate
             the
             whore
             ,
             and
             shall
             make
             her
             desolate
             ,
             and
             naked
             ,
             and
             shall
             eate
             her
             flesh
             ,
             and
             burne
             her
             with
             fire
             .
          
           
             17
             For
             God
             hath
             put
             in
             their
             hearts
             to
             fulfill
             his
             will
             ,
             and
             to
             doe
             with
             one
             consent
             for
             to
             giue
             their
             kingdome
             vnto
             the
             beast
             ,
             vntill
             
             the
             words
             of
             God
             be
             fulfilled
             .
          
           
             18
             And
             that
             woman
             which
             thou
             sawest
             is
             that
             great
             citty
             which
             reigned
             ouer
             the
             kings
             of
             the
             earth
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Exposition
             .
          
           
             15
             After
             he
             said
             vnto
             me
             ,
             the
             waters
             which
             thou
             sawest
             ,
             ouer
             which
             Rome
             the
             Idolatresse
             hath
             dominion
             ,
             doe
             signifie
             people
             ,
             and
             multitudes
             ,
             and
             nations
             of
             divers
             languages
             .
          
           
             16
             And
             the
             10
             hornes
             which
             thou
             sawst
             this
             Empire
             to
             haue
             ,
             are
             the
             same
             10
             kings
             ,
             which
             in
             the
             ende
             shall
             conspire
             against
             it
             ,
             and
             consume
             it
             ,
             and
             burne
             it
             .
          
           
             17
             For
             God
             hath
             inclined
             their
             harts
             that
             they
             should
             do
             his
             will
             in
             executing
             his
             iudgements
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             should
             lay
             their
             heads
             together
             ,
             and
             should
             aid
             this
             Papall
             Empire
             with
             their
             forces
             ,
             only
             vntill
             the
             time
             of
             its
             continuance
             appointed
             by
             God
             bee
             accomplished
             .
          
           
             18
             And
             this
             womā
             which
             thou
             sawst
             is
             Rome
             that
             great
             city
             ,
             which
             commands
             the
             realmes
             of
             the
             earth
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             The
             Proofe
             .
          
           
             That
             which
             is
             propheticall
             in
             these
             4.
             verses
             is
             not
             yet
             accomplisht
             ,
             but
             the
             accomplishment
             of
             the
             prophecies
             precedēt
             ,
             doth
             make
             vs
             presume
             of
             the
             certaintie
             of
             this
             ,
             and
             is
             a
             token
             that
             it
             shall
             bee
             accomplisht
             ere
             long
             .
             It
             lies
             kings
             vpon
             to
             set
             themselues
             forward
             to
             serue
             God
             in
             this
             so
             great
             a
             worke
             .
             
               Blessed
               shall
               hee
               bee
            
             (
             saith
             the
             a
             Psamist
             )
             
               which
               shall
               dash
               the
               children
               of
               Babell
               against
               the
               stones
               .
            
             These
             children
             of
             Babell
             are
             the
             false
             doctrines
             .
             This
             stone
             is
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             a
             chosen
             ,
             tried
             stone
             ,
             the
             foundation
             stone
             of
             the
             Church
             b
             vpō
             which
             stone
             whosoeuer
             falleth
             shall
             be
             broken
             .
          
        
      
       
         
           THE
           PROPHECIE
           CONTAIned
           in
           the
           18.
           
           Chap.
           of
           the
           Apocalyps
           .
           CHAP.
           7.
           
        
         
           
             
               1
               And
               after
               these
               things
               I
               sawe
               another
               Angel
               come
               downe
               from
               heavē
               ,
               hauing
               
               great
               power
               ,
               so
               that
               the
               earth
               was
               lightned
               with
               his
               glorie
               .
            
             
               2
               And
               hee
               cried
               out
               mightily
               with
               a
               lowd
               voice
               ,
               saying
               ,
               it
               is
               fallen
               it
               is
               fallen
               ,
               Babylon
               that
               great
               citie
               ,
               &
               is
               become
               the
               habitation
               of
               divels
               ,
               and
               the
               hold
               of
               foule
               spirits
               ,
               &
               a
               cage
               of
               every
               vncleane
               ,
               &
               hatefull
               bird
               .
            
             
               3
               For
               all
               nations
               haue
               drunken
               of
               the
               wine
               of
               the
               wrath
               af
               her
               fornication
               ,
               and
               the
               kings
               of
               the
               earth
               haue
               committed
               fornication
               with
               her
               ,
               &
               the
               marchants
               of
               the
               earth
               are
               waxed
               rich
               of
               the
               abūdance
               of
               her
               pleasures
               .
            
             
               4
               And
               I
               heard
               an
               other
               voice
               from
               heaven
               saying
               goe
               out
               of
               her
               my
               people
               ,
               that
               yee
               be
               not
               partakers
               of
               her
               sinnes
               :
               and
               that
               yee
               receaue
               not
               of
               her
               plagues
               .
            
             
               5
               For
               her
               sinnes
               are
               come
               vp
               into
               heaven
               ,
               and
               God
               hath
               remembred
               her
               iniquities
               .
            
             
               6
               Reward
               her
               even
               as
               shee
               hath
               rewarded
               you
               ,
               and
               giue
               her
               double
               according
               to
               her
               workes
               :
               and
               in
               the
               cup
               that
               shee
               hath
               filled
               to
               you
               ,
               fill
               her
               the
               double
               .
            
             
               7
               In
               as
               much
               as
               she
               glorified
               her selfe
               ,
               and
               liued
               in
               pleasure
               ,
               so
               much
               giue
               yee
               to
               her
               torment
               and
               sorrow
               :
               for
               she
               saith
               in
               her
               heart
               I
               sit
               being
               a
               queene
               ,
               and
               am
               no
               widowe
               ,
               and
               
               shall
               see
               no
               mourning
               .
            
             
               8
               Therefore
               shall
               her
               plagues
               come
               at
               one
               day
               ,
               death
               ,
               and
               sorrow
               ,
               and
               famine
               ,
               shee
               shall
               be
               burnt
               with
               fire
               :
               for
               that
               God
               which
               condemneth
               her
               ,
               is
               a
               strong
               Lord.
               
            
             
               9
               And
               the
               kings
               of
               the
               earth
               shall
               bewaile
               her
               ,
               and
               lament
               for
               her
               ,
               which
               haue
               committed
               fornication
               and
               lived
               in
               pleasure
               with
               her
               ,
               when
               they
               shall
               see
               that
               smoake
               of
               that
               her
               burning
               .
            
             
               10
               And
               shall
               stand
               a
               farre
               of
               for
               feare
               of
               her
               torment
               ,
               saying
               ,
               Alas
               ,
               alas
               that
               great
               citie
               Babylon
               ,
               that
               mightie
               citie
               ,
               for
               in
               one
               houre
               is
               thy
               iudgement
               come
               .
            
             
               11
               And
               the
               marchants
               of
               the
               earth
               shall
               weepe
               ,
               and
               waile
               over
               her
               :
               for
               no
               man
               buyeth
               their
               ware
               any
               more
               .
            
             
               12
               The
               ware
               of
               gold
               ,
               and
               siluer
               ,
               and
               of
               pretious
               stones
               ,
               and
               of
               pearles
               ,
               and
               of
               fine
               linnen
               ,
               and
               of
               purple
               ,
               and
               of
               silke
               ,
               and
               of
               skarlet
               ▪
               and
               of
               all
               manner
               of
               sweet
               wood
               ,
               &
               of
               all
               vessels
               of
               yvorie
               ,
               and
               of
               all
               vessels
               of
               most
               pretious
               wood
               ,
               &
               of
               brasse
               ,
               and
               of
               iron
               ,
               &
               of
               marble
               .
            
             
               13
               And
               of
               cinamon
               ,
               and
               odours
               ,
               and
               ointments
               ,
               and
               frankincense
               ,
               and
               wine
               ,
               and
               oyle
               ,
               and
               fine
               flowre
               ,
               and
               wheate
               ,
               and
               beasts
               ,
               &
               sheep
               ,
               and
               horses
               ,
               &
               chariots
               ,
               &
               seruants
               
               and
               soules
               of
               men
               .
            
             
               14
               And
               the
               apples
               that
               thy
               soule
               lusted
               after
               are
               departed
               from
               thee
               ,
               and
               all
               things
               which
               were
               fat
               and
               excellent
               are
               departed
               from
               thee
               ,
               and
               thou
               shalt
               find
               them
               no
               more
               .
            
             
               15
               The
               merchants
               of
               these
               things
               which
               were
               waxed
               rich
               ,
               shall
               stand
               a
               farre
               of
               from
               her
               ,
               for
               feare
               of
               her
               torment
               ,
               weeping
               &
               wailing
               .
            
             
               16
               And
               saying
               alas
               ,
               alas
               ,
               that
               great
               citie
               ,
               that
               was
               clothed
               in
               fine
               linnen
               ,
               &
               purple
               ,
               and
               skarlet
               ,
               and
               gilded
               with
               gold
               ,
               and
               pretious
               stones
               ,
               and
               pearles
               .
               How
               could
               so
               great
               riches
               come
               to
               desolation
               in
               one
               houre
               ?
            
             
               17
               And
               every
               shipmaster
               ,
               and
               all
               the
               people
               that
               occupie
               ships
               ,
               and
               ship
               men
               ,
               and
               whosoever
               trafficke
               on
               the
               sea
               shall
               stand
               a
               farre
               off
               ,
            
             
               18
               And
               crie
               ,
               when
               they
               see
               that
               smoke
               of
               that
               her
               burning
               ,
               saying
               ,
               what
               citie
               was
               like
               vnto
               this
               great
               citie
               ?
            
             
               19
               And
               they
               shall
               cast
               dust
               on
               their
               heads
               ,
               and
               crie
               ,
               weeping
               and
               wailing
               ,
               &
               say
               ,
               Alas
               ,
               alas
               ,
               that
               great
               citie
               ,
               wherein
               were
               made
               rich
               all
               that
               had
               ships
               on
               the
               sea
               by
               her
               costlinesse
               :
               for
               in
               one
               houre
               she
               is
               made
               desolate
               .
            
             
               20
               O
               heaven
               reioice
               of
               her
               ,
               and
               the
               holy
               
               Apostles
               ,
               and
               Prophets
               :
               for
               God
               hath
               punnished
               her
               ,
               to
               bee
               revenged
               on
               her
               for
               your
               sakes
               .
            
             
               21
               Then
               a
               mightie
               Angel
               tooke
               vp
               a
               stone
               like
               a
               great
               milstone
               ,
               and
               cast
               it
               into
               the
               sea
               ,
               saying
               ,
               with
               such
               violence
               shall
               that
               great
               citie
               Babylon
               be
               cast
               ,
               and
               shall
               be
               found
               no
               more
               .
            
             
               22
               And
               the
               voice
               of
               harpers
               ,
               and
               musitians
               ,
               and
               of
               pipers
               ,
               and
               trumpeters
               shall
               be
               heard
               no
               more
               in
               thee
               ,
               and
               no
               crafts-man
               of
               what
               craft
               soever
               he
               be
               ,
               shall
               bee
               found
               any
               more
               in
               thee
               :
               and
               the
               sound
               of
               a
               milstone
               shal
               be
               heard
               no
               more
               in
               thee
               .
            
             
               23
               And
               the
               light
               of
               a
               candle
               shall
               shine
               no
               more
               in
               thee
               :
               and
               the
               voice
               of
               the
               bridegroome
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               bride
               shall
               bee
               heard
               no
               more
               in
               thee
               :
               for
               thy
               merchants
               were
               the
               great
               men
               of
               the
               earth
               :
               and
               with
               thine
               inchantments
               were
               all
               nations
               deceaved
               .
            
             
               24
               And
               in
               her
               was
               found
               the
               bloud
               of
               the
               Prophets
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               Saints
               ,
               and
               of
               all
               that
               were
               slaine
               vpon
               the
               earth
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             The
             Explication
             .
          
           
             1
             Afterward
             I
             sawe
             another
             Angell
             come
             downe
             from
             heauen
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             the
             son
             
             of
             God
             ,
             being
             armed
             with
             soveraigne
             power
             .
          
           
             2
             Who
             cried
             out
             with
             a
             lowd
             voice
             ,
             saying
             ,
             she
             is
             fallen
             ,
             she
             is
             fallen
             ,
             that
             great
             citie
             of
             Rome
             ,
             because
             she
             is
             become
             the
             habitation
             of
             divels
             ,
             and
             the
             hold
             of
             deceitfull
             spirits
             ,
             and
             of
             all
             sortes
             of
             orders
             distinguisht
             by
             their
             habits
             ,
             as
             of
             strange
             birds
             .
          
           
             3
             For
             all
             nations
             haue
             beene
             made
             drunke
             with
             the
             intoxicating
             wine
             of
             her
             Idolatrie
             ,
             and
             the
             kings
             of
             the
             earth
             did
             cleaue
             vnto
             her
             Idolatrie
             :
             and
             the
             merchandize
             of
             benefices
             ,
             pardons
             ,
             annates
             ,
             taxes
             ,
             dispensations
             ,
             indulgences
             ,
             and
             absolutions
             ,
             did
             enrich
             an
             infinite
             number
             of
             persons
             that
             did
             liue
             by
             her
             trafficke
             .
          
           
             4
             Afterward
             I
             heard
             the
             voice
             of
             God
             from
             heauen
             saying
             ,
             yee
             my
             people
             go
             out
             from
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             ,
             and
             from
             Poperie
             ;
             for
             feare
             least
             yee
             bee
             defiled
             in
             her
             superstition
             ,
             and
             perish
             together
             with
             her
             .
          
           
             5
             For
             her
             sinnes
             being
             linckt
             together
             in
             a
             long
             chaine
             haue
             raught
             vp
             to
             the
             heauenly
             throne
             of
             God
             ,
             there
             to
             bee
             iudged
             of
             him
             ,
             and
             God
             is
             resolued
             to
             pūnish
             her
             iniquities
             .
          
           
             6
             Yee
             people
             and
             kings
             whome
             shee
             
             hath
             tyrannized
             over
             ,
             and
             held
             captiues
             ,
             reuenge
             your selues
             vpon
             her
             ,
             &
             giue
             her
             double
             :
             and
             serue
             her
             as
             shee
             hath
             serued
             you
             ,
             euen
             to
             the
             double
             .
          
           
             7
             Giue
             her
             asmuch
             affliction
             as
             shee
             hath
             had
             glory
             ,
             that
             shee
             may
             weepe
             as
             much
             as
             shee
             hath
             ioyed
             in
             her
             delicious
             sportes
             and
             dissolutenesse
             .
             For
             shee
             said
             in
             her
             heart
             .
             I
             rule
             ,
             and
             am
             queene
             ,
             and
             mother
             of
             all
             churches
             ,
             which
             cānot
             be
             iudged
             of
             any
             .
             I
             am
             the
             spowse
             of
             Christ
             ,
             and
             shall
             neuer
             fall
             .
             For
             I
             cannot
             erre
             in
             the
             faith
             ,
             nor
             euer
             be
             cast
             of
             ,
             nor
             left
             by
             Christ.
             
          
           
             8
             For
             these
             causes
             shall
             these
             plagues
             come
             vpon
             her
             at
             once
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             death
             ,
             and
             sorrow
             ,
             and
             famin
             ,
             and
             she
             shall
             bee
             burnt
             with
             fire
             ,
             for
             God
             is
             able
             to
             doe
             her
             iustice
             .
          
           
             9
             And
             there
             shall
             bee
             a
             kings
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             which
             hauing
             committed
             Idolatry
             with
             her
             ,
             and
             hauing
             had
             a
             part
             in
             her
             dissolutenesse
             ,
             shall
             lament
             &
             take
             on
             ,
             seeing
             her
             consumed
             by
             fire
             .
          
           
             10
             And
             they
             shall
             stand
             a
             farre
             of
             ,
             without
             lending
             her
             any
             succour
             ,
             saying
             ,
             Alas
             ;
             Rome
             ,
             thou
             great
             and
             mightie
             citie
             ,
             how
             is
             thy
             destruction
             come
             vpon
             thee
             so
             suddainely
             ?
          
           
           
             11
             Likewise
             the
             Prelates
             ,
             great
             penitentiaries
             ,
             bullists
             ,
             dataries
             ,
             notaries
             ,
             &
             protonotaries
             Apostolicall
             ,
             Factours
             ,
             and
             Banckers
             ,
             which
             helpe
             men
             to
             the
             remission
             of
             their
             sinnes
             by
             letters
             of
             exchange
             ,
             all
             these
             shall
             bewaile
             the
             destruction
             of
             Rome
             ,
             and
             not
             they
             only
             but
             all
             sorts
             of
             merchants
             too
             shall
             take
             on
             ,
             because
             no
             man
             thencefoorth
             shall
             buy
             any
             more
             of
             their
             wares
             .
          
           
             12
             Because
             no
             man
             shall
             buy
             any
             more
             gold
             ,
             nor
             siluer
             ,
             for
             to
             make
             crucifixes
             ,
             chalices
             ,
             covers
             for
             cups
             ,
             candlesticks
             ,
             and
             other
             moueables
             of
             the
             Church
             :
             Nor
             pretious
             stones
             ,
             to
             set
             them
             in
             the
             Popes
             triple
             crowne
             ,
             and
             in
             Bishops
             rings
             ,
             &
             for
             an
             ornament
             of
             the
             caskets
             that
             containe
             reliques
             ;
             Nor
             pearles
             to
             hang
             about
             the
             Popes
             mantle
             ,
             and
             to
             adorn●
             the
             Roman
             Courtizans
             :
             Nor
             silke
             ,
             nor
             skarlet
             ,
             nor
             any
             kind
             of
             rich
             stuffe
             ,
             for
             to
             cloath
             their
             images
             ,
             and
             their
             Cardinals
             ,
             and
             to
             make
             Copes
             for
             priests
             ,
             and
             Banners
             for
             processions
             :
             Nor
             other
             pretious
             thinges
             ,
             for
             to
             embellish
             the
             palaces
             of
             Cardinals
             ,
             and
             other
             Prelats
             ,
             and
             officers
             of
             the
             Pope
             ,
             as
             marble
             and
             pretious
             wood
             ;
             Nor
             brasse
             ,
             nor
             yuorie
             ,
             to
             make
             deskes
             ,
             boxes
             ,
             &
             .
          
           
           
             13
             Nor
             odours
             and
             perfumes
             ,
             to
             perfume
             the
             Church
             ,
             or
             for
             the
             priuate
             delights
             of
             Prelats
             ,
             &
             officers
             of
             the
             Ecclesiasticall
             court
             .
             Nor
             wines
             &
             choice
             fruits
             for
             their
             tables
             .
             Nor
             riding
             horses
             ,
             nor
             coach
             horses
             ,
             for
             the
             Popes
             traine
             and
             his
             Cardinals
             .
             Nor
             captiues
             and
             servile
             consciences
             ,
             nor
             mens
             soules
             ,
             which
             were
             bought
             and
             sold
             ,
             but
             this
             traffick
             shall
             be
             abolisht
             ,
             by
             the
             destruction
             of
             Rome
             .
          
           
             14
             (
             For
             ô
             wretched
             citie
             ,
             al
             this
             worldly
             prosperitie
             ,
             all
             this
             riot
             of
             luxurie
             shall
             be
             taken
             away
             from
             thee
             ,
             and
             thou
             shalt
             enioy
             them
             no
             longer
             )
          
           
             15
             All
             such
             therefore
             as
             shall
             bee
             enricht
             by
             this
             trafficke
             ,
             and
             which
             haue
             preyed
             vpon
             the
             people
             vnder
             the
             shewe
             of
             Religion
             ,
             shall
             forsake
             her
             in
             her
             neede
             ,
             fearing
             to
             be
             wrapt
             in
             the
             same
             ruine
             ,
             and
             shall
             bewaile
             her
             with
             great
             lamentation
             .
          
           
             16
             Saying
             ,
             alas
             Rome
             ,
             thou
             so
             mighty
             and
             stately
             a
             citie
             !
             whose
             gouernours
             were
             cloathed
             in
             silke
             ,
             and
             purple
             ,
             &
             skarlet
             ,
             and
             crowned
             with
             gold
             ,
             and
             pretious
             stones
             ,
             how
             couldst
             thou
             fall
             from
             al
             these
             riches
             in
             so
             short
             a
             space
             ?
          
           
             17
             The
             Pilots
             themselues
             ,
             and
             the
             marriners
             ,
             which
             did
             serue
             to
             carry
             the
             
             foresaid
             marchandize
             ,
             shall
             withdrawe
             themselues
             without
             lending
             her
             any
             aide
             .
          
           
             18
             And
             seeing
             the
             smoake
             of
             her
             burning
             shall
             cry
             out
             saying
             ,
             what
             city
             was
             like
             vnto
             the
             city
             of
             Rome
             ?
          
           
             19
             And
             shall
             cast
             dust
             vpon
             their
             heads
             ,
             and
             shall
             crie
             out
             weeping
             ,
             and
             lamenting
             ,
             and
             say
             ,
             alas
             ,
             alas
             !
             that
             great
             city
             in
             which
             all
             those
             that
             did
             trafficke
             were
             made
             rich
             by
             her
             wealth
             ,
             howe
             shee
             is
             become
             desolate
             in
             an
             instant
             !
          
           
             20
             O
             yee
             heavenly
             spirits
             ,
             which
             doe
             reioyce
             at
             the
             conuersion
             of
             one
             only
             sinner
             ,
             reioyce
             at
             her
             ruine
             ;
             yee
             holy
             Apostles
             also
             and
             Prophets
             :
             For
             it
             is
             for
             your
             sakes
             that
             God
             hath
             taken
             vengeance
             of
             her
             .
          
           
             21
             Then
             I
             saw
             a
             mightie
             Angell
             take
             vp
             a
             great
             stone
             like
             a
             milstone
             ,
             and
             cast
             it
             into
             the
             sea
             ,
             saying
             .
             So
             shall
             Rome
             be
             cast
             into
             the
             deepe
             ,
             and
             abolisht
             euerlastingly
             and
             shall
             apeare
             no
             more
             then
             a
             milstone
             cast
             into
             the
             sea
             ,
             which
             neuer
             riseth
             vp
             againe
             to
             the
             top
             of
             the
             water
             .
          
           
             22
             23
             And
             all
             sorts
             of
             delights
             ,
             and
             pleasures
             ,
             of
             ornaments
             ,
             commodities
             ,
             &
             recreations
             ,
             are
             past
             from
             thee
             .
             Whereas
             before
             the
             factours
             of
             Rome
             did
             liue
             like
             Princes
             ,
             and
             the
             people
             and
             nations
             were
             
             
             
             
             
             
             
             
             
             
             
             
             
             
             the
             Latin
             Church
             is
             nothing
             else
             but
             a
             shop
             ,
             with
             a
             table
             of
             mony
             changers
             standing
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             it
             ,
             which
             Christ
             shall
             overturne
             the
             second
             time
             ,
             when
             the
             prophecie
             contained
             in
             this
             chapter
             shall
             bee
             accomplished
             .
          
        
      
       
         
           THE
           PROPHECIE
           CONtained
           in
           the
           7.
           chapter
           of
           Daniell
           .
           CHAP.
           8.
           
        
         
           
             
               1
               In
               the
               first
               yeare
               of
               Belshazzar
               king
               of
               Babell
               Daniel
               saw
               a
               dreame
               ,
               and
               there
               were
               visions
               in
               his
               head
               ,
               vpon
               his
               bed
               :
               then
               he
               wrote
               the
               dreame
               ,
               &
               declared
               the
               summe
               of
               the
               matter
               .
            
             
               2
               Daniel
               spake
               and
               said
               ,
               I
               saw
               in
               my
               vision
               by
               night
               ,
               and
               behold
               the
               4
               windes
               of
               heaven
               stroue
               vpon
               the
               great
               sea
               .
            
             
               3
               And
               4
               great
               beasts
               came
               vp
               from
               the
               sea
               one
               divers
               from
               an
               other
               .
            
             
               4
               The
               1
               was
               a
               Lyon
               and
               had
               Eagles
               wings
               :
               I
               beheld
               till
               the
               wings
               thereof
               were
               pluckt
               off
               ,
               &
               it
               was
               lifted
               vp
               from
               the
               earth
               and
               set
               vpon
               his
               feete
               as
               a
               man
               ,
               and
               a
               mans
               heart
               was
               given
               him
               .
            
             
             
               5
               And
               behold
               ,
               another
               beast
               which
               was
               the
               second
               ,
               was
               like
               a
               Beare
               ,
               and
               stoode
               vpon
               the
               one
               side
               :
               and
               hee
               had
               three
               tuskes
               in
               his
               mouth
               amongst
               his
               teeth
               ,
               and
               they
               said
               thus
               vnto
               him
               ,
               Arise
               and
               devoure
               much
               flesh
               .
            
             
               6
               After
               this
               I
               beheld
               ,
               &
               lo
               there
               was
               an
               other
               like
               a
               Leopard
               ,
               which
               had
               vpon
               his
               backe
               4
               wings
               of
               a
               fowle
               :
               the
               beast
               had
               also
               4
               heads
               and
               dominion
               was
               given
               him
               .
            
             
               7
               After
               this
               I
               saw
               in
               the
               visions
               by
               night
               ,
               and
               behold
               the
               fourth
               beast
               was
               fearefull
               ,
               and
               terrible
               ,
               and
               very
               strong
               .
               It
               had
               great
               iron
               teeth
               ,
               it
               devoured
               ,
               and
               brake
               in
               peeces
               ,
               and
               stamped
               the
               residue
               vnder
               his
               feet
               :
               &
               it
               was
               vnlike
               to
               the
               beasts
               that
               were
               before
               it
               ,
               for
               it
               had
               10
               hornes
               .
            
             
               8
               As
               I
               considered
               the
               hornes
               ,
               behold
               there
               came
               vp
               amōg
               thē
               another
               little
               horn
               ,
               before
               whom
               there
               were
               3
               of
               the
               first
               horns
               pluckt
               away
               :
               and
               behold
               in
               his
               throne
               there
               were
               eies
               like
               the
               eies
               of
               man
               ,
               and
               a
               mouth
               speaking
               presumptuous
               things
               .
            
             
               I
               beheld
               till
               the
               thrones
               were
               set
               vp
               ,
               and
               the
               ancient
               of
               daies
               did
               sit
               ,
               whose
               garment
               was
               as
               white
               as
               snowe
               ,
               and
               the
               haire
               of
               his
               head
               like
               the
               pure
               wooll
               :
               his
               throne
               was
               like
               the
               fiery
               flame
               ,
               and
               his
               wheeles
               like
               burning
               fire
               .
            
             
             
               10
               A
               fiery
               streame
               issued
               ,
               and
               came
               forth
               from
               before
               him
               :
               thousand
               thousands
               ministred
               vnto
               him
               ,
               ,
               and
               ten
               thousand
               thousands
               stood
               before
               him
               :
               the
               iudgement
               was
               set
               ,
               and
               the
               bookes
               opened
               .
            
             
               11
               Then
               I
               beheld
               ,
               because
               of
               the
               voice
               of
               the
               presumptuous
               words
               which
               the
               horne
               spake
               :
               I
               beheld
               even
               till
               the
               beast
               was
               slaine
               ,
               and
               his
               body
               destroyed
               ,
               and
               giuen
               to
               the
               burning
               fire
               .
            
             
               12
               As
               concerning
               the
               other
               beasts
               ,
               they
               had
               their
               dominion
               taken
               away
               :
               yet
               their
               liues
               were
               prolonged
               for
               a
               certaine
               time
               and
               season
               .
            
             
               13
               As
               I
               beheld
               the
               visions
               by
               night
               ,
               behold
               one
               like
               the
               sonne
               of
               man
               came
               in
               the
               clowdes
               of
               heaven
               ,
               and
               approached
               vnto
               the
               ancient
               of
               daies
               ,
               and
               they
               brought
               him
               before
               him
               .
            
             
               14
               And
               he
               gaue
               him
               dominion
               &
               honour
               ,
               and
               a
               kingdome
               :
               that
               all
               people
               ,
               nations
               and
               languages
               should
               serue
               him
               :
               his
               dominion
               is
               an
               everlasting
               dominion
               ,
               which
               shall
               never
               be
               taken
               away
               ,
               and
               his
               kingdome
               shall
               never
               be
               destroyed
               .
            
             
               15
               I
               Daniel
               was
               troubled
               in
               my
               spirit
               in
               the
               midst
               of
               my
               body
               ,
               and
               the
               visions
               of
               mine
               head
               made
               me
               afraid
               .
            
             
             
               16
               Therefore
               I
               came
               vnto
               one
               of
               them
               that
               stood
               by
               ,
               and
               asked
               him
               the
               truth
               of
               all
               this
               :
               so
               he
               told
               me
               ,
               and
               shewed
               mee
               the
               interpretation
               of
               all
               these
               things
               ,
               saying
               ,
            
             
               17
               These
               4
               great
               beasts
               ,
               are
               4
               kinges
               which
               shall
               arise
               out
               of
               the
               earth
               .
            
             
               18
               And
               the
               Saints
               of
               the
               most
               high
               shall
               receaue
               their
               kingdome
               ,
               which
               they
               shal
               possesse
               for
               ever
               ,
               even
               for
               ever
               and
               ever
               .
            
             
               19
               After
               this
               I
               would
               knowe
               the
               truth
               of
               the
               fourth
               beast
               ,
               which
               was
               so
               vnlike
               to
               al
               the
               others
               ,
               very
               fearefull
               ,
               whose
               teeth
               were
               of
               yron
               ,
               and
               his
               nayles
               of
               brasse
               :
               which
               devoured
               ,
               brake
               in
               peeces
               ,
               and
               stamped
               the
               residue
               vnder
               his
               feet
               .
            
             
               20
               Also
               to
               knowe
               of
               the
               10
               hornes
               that
               were
               in
               his
               head
               ,
               &
               of
               the
               other
               which
               came
               vp
               ,
               before
               whome
               three
               fell
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               horne
               that
               had
               eies
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               mouth
               that
               spoke
               presumptuous
               things
               ;
               whose
               looke
               was
               more
               stout
               then
               his
               fellowes
               .
            
             
               21
               I
               beheld
               ,
               and
               the
               same
               horne
               made
               battell
               against
               the
               Saints
               ,
               yea
               and
               prevailed
               against
               them
               .
            
             
               22
               Vntill
               the
               ancient
               of
               daies
               came
               ,
               &
               iudgement
               was
               giuen
               to
               the
               Saints
               of
               the
               most
               high
               :
               and
               the
               time
               approached
               that
               the
               Saints
               possessed
               the
               kingdome
               .
            
             
             
               23
               Then
               he
               said
               ,
               the
               fourth
               beast
               shall
               be
               the
               fourth
               kingdome
               in
               the
               earth
               ,
               which
               shall
               be
               vnlike
               to
               all
               the
               kingdomes
               ,
               and
               shall
               devoure
               the
               whole
               earth
               and
               shall
               tread
               it
               downe
               ,
               and
               breake
               it
               in
               peeces
               .
            
             
               24
               And
               the
               10
               hornes
               are
               10
               kings
               that
               shall
               rise
               out
               of
               this
               kingdome
               ,
               and
               another
               shall
               rise
               after
               them
               ,
               and
               he
               shall
               be
               vnlike
               to
               the
               first
               ,
               and
               he
               shall
               subdue
               3
               kings
               .
            
             
               25
               And
               shall
               speake
               wordes
               against
               the
               most
               high
               ,
               and
               shall
               consume
               the
               Saints
               of
               the
               most
               high
               ,
               and
               think
               that
               he
               may
               change
               times
               and
               lawes
               ,
               and
               they
               shall
               be
               giuen
               into
               his
               hand
               vntill
               a
               time
               ,
               and
               times
               ,
               and
               halfe
               a
               time
               .
            
             
               26
               But
               the
               iudgement
               shall
               sit
               ,
               &
               they
               shall
               take
               away
               his
               dominion
               ,
               to
               consume
               and
               destroy
               it
               vnto
               the
               end
               .
            
             
               27
               And
               the
               kingdome
               ,
               and
               dominion
               ,
               and
               the
               greatnesse
               of
               the
               kingdomes
               vnder
               the
               whole
               earth
               shall
               be
               given
               to
               the
               holy
               people
               of
               the
               most
               high
               ,
               whose
               kingdome
               is
               an
               everlasting
               kingdome
               ,
               and
               all
               power
               shall
               serue
               and
               obay
               them
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             The
             Exposition
             .
          
           
             1
             In
             the
             first
             yeare
             of
             Belshazzar
             king
             
             of
             Babel
             Daniel
             saw
             a
             dreame
             ,
             and
             lying
             vpon
             his
             bed
             ,
             had
             his
             head
             troubled
             with
             visions
             ,
             the
             matter
             of
             which
             dreame
             hee
             did
             afterward
             commit
             to
             writing
             .
          
           
             2
             And
             behold
             here
             what
             hee
             hath
             written
             of
             it
             .
             I
             had
             a
             vision
             by
             night
             ,
             and
             it
             seemed
             vnto
             mee
             that
             the
             windes
             comming
             from
             the
             foure
             quarters
             of
             the
             world
             blew
             vpon
             the
             sea
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             people
             and
             nations
             (
             whom
             the
             holy
             scripture
             doth
             often
             compare
             to
             the
             sea
             )
             had
             many
             divers
             and
             contrary
             tumults
             to
             disturbe
             them
             .
          
           
             3
             And
             out
             of
             the
             midst
             of
             these
             people
             ,
             and
             nations
             came
             fowre
             great
             beastes
             of
             different
             shapes
             ,
             figuring
             4
             great
             diverse
             Empires
             ,
             which
             should
             reigne
             in
             the
             world
             .
          
           
             4
             The
             first
             beast
             which
             did
             represent
             the
             first
             Empire
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             of
             Babylon
             ,
             was
             like
             vnto
             a
             Lyon
             ,
             to
             note
             his
             noblenesse
             ,
             and
             valour
             ,
             and
             had
             the
             wings
             of
             an
             Eagle
             ,
             to
             note
             the
             speedy
             atchieuements
             of
             his
             conquests
             .
             And
             I
             beheld
             till
             this
             actiue
             vigour
             was
             taken
             from
             him
             ,
             and
             that
             being
             spoiled
             of
             his
             bestiall
             fiercenesse
             ,
             he
             learned
             the
             lesson
             of
             obedience
             ,
             and
             was
             taught
             to
             abstaine
             from
             blood
             ,
             that
             so
             hee
             
             might
             liue
             with
             humanitie
             like
             a
             man
             ,
             and
             not
             with
             crueltie
             like
             a
             beast
             .
          
           
             5
             After
             this
             Empire
             succeeded
             the
             Empire
             of
             Persia
             ,
             figured
             by
             a
             bear
             ,
             which
             lay
             along
             vpon
             one
             side
             ,
             either
             because
             his
             cōquests
             did
             stretch
             from
             east
             to
             west
             ,
             or
             else
             because
             he
             was
             like
             a
             beare
             resting
             himselfe
             ,
             which
             never
             lyeth
             farre
             of
             from
             the
             prey
             which
             hee
             hath
             seized
             vpon
             .
             And
             this
             beare
             amongst
             many
             other
             teeth
             had
             3
             great
             teeth
             or
             tuskes
             ,
             signifying
             that
             amongst
             many
             other
             kingdoms
             which
             this
             Empire
             should
             possesse
             ,
             hee
             should
             haue
             3
             great
             and
             mightie
             kingdoms
             :
             that
             of
             Persia
             ,
             that
             of
             Media
             ,
             &
             that
             of
             Babylon
             .
             And
             God
             being
             incensed
             against
             men
             sent
             out
             this
             beare
             to
             make
             them
             dye
             .
          
           
             6
             After
             the
             fall
             of
             this
             Empire
             ,
             behold
             a
             third
             Empire
             rose
             vp
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             of
             the
             Macedonians
             ,
             figured
             by
             a
             Leopard
             ,
             because
             of
             its
             crueltie
             ,
             subtiltie
             ,
             and
             celerity
             ,
             represented
             by
             the
             4
             wings
             .
             And
             this
             Empire
             was
             forthwith
             divided
             into
             foure
             kingdoms
             ,
             which
             are
             the
             kingdoms
             of
             the
             Seleucidae
             in
             Asia
             maior
             ,
             the
             kingdome
             of
             Antigonus
             in
             Asia
             minor
             ,
             the
             kingdome
             of
             the
             Ptolomies
             in
             Egypt
             ,
             and
             the
             kingdome
             of
             Greece
             ,
             and
             God
             gaue
             vnto
             this
             
             Empire
             to
             raigne
             over
             the
             earth
             .
          
           
             7
             After
             this
             Empire
             there
             arose
             another
             Empire
             figured
             by
             a
             most
             dreadful
             &
             mightie
             strong
             beast
             .
             It
             had
             mighty
             kingdomes
             and
             provinces
             vnder
             it
             ;
             it
             did
             scatter
             and
             ruinate
             ,
             tyrannizing
             over
             those
             whom
             it
             did
             not
             slay
             .
             And
             this
             Empire
             was
             differing
             in
             force
             and
             power
             from
             the
             Empires
             that
             went
             before
             ,
             and
             had
             10
             parts
             and
             principall
             provinces
             vnder
             it
             ,
             &
             as
             it
             fell
             to
             decay
             ,
             ten
             kingdomes
             also
             did
             arise
             out
             of
             the
             division
             thereof
             .
          
           
             8
             As
             I
             stood
             wondring
             at
             the
             greatnesse
             of
             this
             Empire
             from
             which
             10
             kingdomes
             did
             arise
             ,
             behold
             a
             Monarch
             growing
             like
             a
             little
             horne
             amidst
             the
             other
             ,
             that
             sprang
             vp
             from
             betweene
             these
             kingdomes
             ,
             which
             for
             his
             share
             did
             possesse
             such
             a
             portion
             of
             this
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             as
             there
             is
             of
             3
             to
             10
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             well
             neer
             the
             third
             part
             ,
             and
             had
             the
             eies
             of
             humane
             vnderstanding
             ,
             having
             contrived
             the
             building
             of
             his
             kingdome
             by
             wonderfull
             policie
             ,
             and
             spoke
             prowdly
             and
             arrogantly
             ,
             boasting
             that
             he
             could
             not
             erre
             ,
             that
             hee
             was
             the
             supreme
             iudge
             in
             matters
             of
             faith
             and
             religion
             ,
             that
             he
             was
             a
             vice-God
             ,
             and
             God
             vpon
             earth
             ,
             King
             of
             kings
             ,
             the
             head
             
             and
             spowse
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             his
             holynesse
             ,
             and
             a
             disposer
             of
             kingdomes
             .
          
           
             9
             I
             considered
             with
             my selfe
             howe
             this
             Bishop
             did
             advance
             himselfe
             ,
             &
             continue
             ,
             vntill
             the
             thrones
             mounted
             vpon
             wheeles
             ,
             were
             set
             in
             their
             proper
             places
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             vntill
             the
             day
             of
             iudgement
             were
             well
             onward
             ,
             and
             hard
             at
             hand
             ,
             and
             the
             Lord
             God
             sat
             down
             vpō
             these
             thrones
             who
             is
             called
             the
             Ancient
             of
             daies
             ,
             because
             he
             is
             from
             before
             all
             time
             ,
             &
             from
             before
             all
             antiquitie
             ,
             and
             hee
             was
             cloathed
             with
             the
             light
             ,
             and
             had
             a
             head
             all
             hoary
             gray
             ,
             to
             signifie
             his
             age
             ,
             his
             throne
             was
             like
             the
             flame
             ,
             and
             the
             wheeles
             of
             his
             throne
             were
             as
             burning
             fire
             .
          
           
             10
             His
             iudgments
             like
             a
             fiery
             stream
             went
             from
             before
             his
             presence
             .
             An
             infinite
             number
             of
             Angels
             stood
             before
             him
             ,
             waiting
             his
             pleasure
             .
             So
             he
             sate
             him
             downe
             to
             iudge
             the
             world
             :
             and
             that
             hee
             might
             proceed
             with
             equity
             ,
             all
             his
             bookes
             were
             opened
             .
             To
             wit
             ,
             the
             booke
             of
             the
             sinnes
             of
             men
             mentioned
             in
             the
             65
             chap.
             of
             *
             Esay
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             20.
             of
             the
             Apocalyps
             ;
             as
             also
             the
             booke
             of
             the
             afflictions
             of
             the
             faithfull
             ,
             mentioned
             in
             the
             *
             56
             Psalm
             ;
             &
             the
             booke
             of
             life
             wherein
             the
             elect
             are
             registred
             ,
             mētioned
             
             in
             the
             13
             of
             the
             Apocalyps
             ,
             and
             17.
             
          
           
             11
             And
             I
             beheld
             with
             admiration
             ,
             how
             this
             sonne
             of
             perdition
             spoke
             prowd
             words
             ,
             till
             at
             last
             his
             Empire
             was
             destroyed
             ,
             and
             the
             body
             of
             this
             Roman
             Monarchie
             abolisht
             ,
             &
             the
             keyes
             thereof
             thrown
             into
             everlasting
             fire
             .
          
           
             12
             And
             al
             dominion
             was
             taken
             from
             the
             other
             beasts
             ,
             albeit
             they
             had
             continued
             for
             a
             long
             time
             in
             the
             world
             .
          
           
             13
             As
             I
             was
             ravisht
             by
             night
             with
             the
             contemplation
             of
             this
             vision
             ,
             I
             saw
             the
             sonne
             of
             God
             our
             Lord
             Iesus
             ,
             which
             came
             downe
             from
             heauen
             ,
             carried
             vpon
             the
             clouds
             ,
             and
             hee
             approached
             vnto
             God
             his
             father
             which
             sate
             vpon
             the
             throne
             .
             And
             his
             father
             made
             him
             sit
             on
             his
             right
             hand
             to
             iudge
             the
             world
             .
          
           
             14
             Giuing
             him
             a
             name
             aboue
             all
             names
             ,
             and
             all
             power
             both
             in
             heaven
             and
             in
             earth
             ,
             so
             that
             every
             knee
             shoulde
             bowe
             before
             him
             ,
             and
             all
             people
             should
             giue
             him
             glory
             ,
             and
             praise
             .
             His
             dominion
             is
             an
             everlasting
             dominion
             which
             shal
             not
             pass
             away
             ,
             and
             his
             kingdome
             shall
             not
             bee
             destroyed
             .
          
           
             This
             was
             the
             vision
             of
             Daniel
             ,
             the
             meaning
             whereof
             when
             he
             required
             ,
             it
             was
             giuen
             
             him
             by
             one
             of
             the
             Angels
             that
             stood
             by
             in
             these
             words
             ,
          
           
             17
             These
             4
             
               great
               beasts
               are
               foure
               kings
               that
               shall
               arise
               out
               of
               the
               earth
               .
            
          
           
             18
             
               And
               the
               Saints
               of
               the
               most
               high
               shall
               receaue
               the
               kingdome
               ,
               which
               they
               shall
               possesse
               for
               ever
               ,
               even
               for
               ever
               and
               ever
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             The
             Exposition
             .
          
           
             
               17
               These
               4
               great
               beasts
               signifie
               foure
               Realmes
               or
               Monarches
               ,
               that
               shal
               arise
               out
               of
               the
               earth
               .
            
          
           
             
               18
               Who
               being
               once
               abolisht
               ,
               God
               shall
               giue
               his
               faithfull
               servants
               the
               kingdome
               of
               heauen
               ,
               which
               they
               shall
               enioy
               everlastingly
               .
               This
               exposition
               having
               not
               satisfied
               Daniel
               concerning
               that
               which
               he
               desired
               most
               to
               know
               ,
               to
               wit
               ,
               what
               was
               meant
               by
               the
               fourth
               beast
               that
               had
               tenne
               heads
               ,
               and
               the
               little
               horne
               that
               grew
               out
               ,
               the
               same
               Angel
               doth
               expound
               it
               more
               at
               large
               vnto
               him
               ,
               saying
               ,
            
          
           
             23
             The
             fourth
             beast
             shall
             be
             the
             fourth
             kingdome
             in
             the
             earth
             ,
             which
             shall
             be
             vnlike
             to
             all
             the
             kingdomes
             ,
             and
             shall
             devoure
             the
             whole
             earth
             ,
             and
             shall
             tread
             it
             downe
             ,
             and
             breake
             it
             in
             peeces
             .
          
           
             24
             But
             the
             10
             hornes
             are
             10
             kings
             that
             shall
             rise
             out
             of
             this
             kingdome
             ,
             and
             another
             
             shall
             rise
             after
             them
             ,
             which
             shall
             be
             vnlike
             to
             the
             first
             ,
             and
             he
             shall
             subdue
             3
             Kings
             .
          
           
             25
             Hee
             shall
             speake
             words
             against
             the
             most
             high
             ,
             and
             shall
             consume
             the
             Saints
             of
             the
             most
             high
             ,
             and
             think
             that
             he
             may
             change
             times
             and
             lawes
             ,
             and
             the
             Saints
             shall
             be
             giuē
             into
             his
             hand
             vntill
             a
             time
             ,
             and
             times
             ,
             &
             half
             a
             time
             .
          
           
             26
             But
             the
             iudgement
             shall
             be
             held
             ,
             and
             they
             shall
             take
             away
             his
             dominion
             to
             consume
             and
             destroy
             it
             vnto
             the
             end
             .
          
           
             27
             That
             the
             kingdome
             ,
             and
             dominion
             ,
             and
             the
             greatnesse
             of
             the
             kingdomes
             vnder
             the
             whole
             heaven
             ,
             may
             bee
             given
             to
             the
             holy
             people
             of
             the
             most
             high
             ;
             the
             kingdome
             of
             which
             people
             is
             an
             everlasting
             kingdome
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             powers
             shall
             serue
             and
             obay
             them
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Exposition
             .
          
           
             23
             The
             fourth
             beast
             signifies
             the
             fourth
             Empire
             on
             the
             earth
             ,
             which
             shall
             differ
             from
             the
             other
             Empires
             in
             greatnes
             and
             violence
             ,
             and
             shall
             conquer
             all
             the
             earth
             ,
             and
             subiect
             it
             ,
             and
             wast
             it
             .
          
           
             24
             But
             the
             10
             horns
             which
             shal
             arise
             out
             of
             it
             ,
             are
             10
             kingdomes
             which
             shall
             spring
             vp
             from
             the
             dissipation
             of
             this
             Empire
             ,
             &
             shall
             divide
             it
             into
             10
             peeces
             .
             But
             after
             that
             these
             kingdomes
             shall
             bee
             erected
             amongst
             
             them
             ,
             whose
             Empire
             shall
             bee
             altogether
             divers
             from
             the
             others
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             :
             for
             hee
             shall
             ●ule
             vnder
             the
             shew
             of
             religion
             ,
             &
             spiritual
             power
             ;
             and
             shall
             possesse
             well
             neere
             the
             third
             part
             of
             the
             provinces
             of
             the
             ancient
             Empire
             ,
             and
             keepe
             them
             vnder
             him
             .
          
           
             25
             He
             shall
             speak
             blasphemy
             against
             God
             ,
             and
             persecute
             the
             Church
             ,
             and
             take
             vpon
             him
             to
             change
             the
             course
             of
             the
             year
             and
             make
             the
             daies
             holy
             or
             prophane
             at
             his
             pleasure
             :
             hee
             shall
             take
             vpon
             him
             also
             to
             change
             the
             law
             in
             cutting
             off
             the
             secōd
             commandement
             ,
             and
             denying
             that
             it
             is
             sinne
             to
             transgresse
             the
             last
             ,
             and
             dispensing
             with
             other
             commandements
             ,
             &
             prescribing
             lawes
             of
             equall
             authority
             with
             the
             law
             of
             God
             ,
             yea
             and
             of
             more
             authoritie
             ,
             and
             the
             Church
             shall
             bee
             held
             captiue
             vnder
             him
             for
             the
             space
             of
             1260
             yeares
             .
          
           
             26
             But
             the
             day
             of
             iudgement
             shall
             come
             :
             and
             Iesus
             Christ
             comming
             into
             the
             world
             shall
             take
             his
             dominion
             from
             him
             ,
             and
             shall
             destroy
             him
             vtterly
             .
          
           
             27
             To
             the
             end
             ,
             that
             a
             soueraigne
             dominion
             over
             all
             worldly
             greatnesse
             may
             be
             giuen
             to
             the
             Church
             of
             God
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             assēbly
             of
             the
             Saints
             ,
             to
             which
             church
             
             God
             hath
             given
             an
             euerlasting
             kingdome
             and
             all
             power
             both
             of
             men
             and
             diuels
             shal
             be
             subiect
             vnto
             it
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Proofe
             .
          
           
             Albeit
             this
             exposition
             doe
             explaine
             it selfe
             ,
             and
             be
             full
             of
             perspicuitie
             :
             yet
             to
             remoue
             all
             difficulties
             ,
             I
             will
             cleere
             6.
             points
             in
             which
             the
             whole
             proofe
             of
             our
             exposition
             doth
             consist
             ,
             and
             will
             shew
             .
          
           
             1
             That
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             falling
             to
             decay
             in
             the
             West
             ,
             and
             the
             East
             ,
             was
             divided
             into
             parts
             or
             kingdomes
             ,
             which
             Dan.
             v.
             7
             .
             and
             24.
             saith
             are
             vnderstood
             by
             the
             10
             hornes
             of
             the
             fourth
             beast
             .
             II.
             That
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             doth
             possesse
             well
             neer
             the
             third
             part
             of
             the
             ancient
             Roman
             Empire
             .
             III.
             That
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             doth
             chāge
             times
             and
             the
             law
             .
             IV.
             What
             the
             meaning
             of
             a
             time
             ,
             times
             ,
             and
             halfe
             a
             time
             is
             ,
             during
             which
             tearme
             ,
             the
             Saints
             shall
             bee
             made
             slaues
             ,
             and
             the
             church
             kept
             in
             bondage
             .
             V.
             What
             this
             Empire
             &
             dominion
             is
             that
             is
             giuen
             to
             the
             Saints
             .
             VI.
             That
             vpon
             good
             reason
             by
             the
             fourth
             beast
             we
             vnderstand
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             little
             horn
             the
             sonne
             of
             perdition
             ,
             which
             is
             called
             Antichrist
             
             by
             the
             Ancient
             ,
             as
             likewise
             by
             our
             aduersaries
             .
          
           
             1
             The
             diuision
             of
             the
             ancient
             Empire
             into
             tenne
             partes
             is
             most
             euident
             .
             Danie●
             makes
             10
             kingdomes
             to
             bee
             borne
             out
             o●
             the
             dispersing
             of
             the
             Romā
             Empire
             ,
             and
             amidst
             this
             a
             little
             horn
             to
             spring
             vp
             &
             grow
             out
             .
             To
             find
             the
             accomplishmēt
             therefore
             of
             this
             prophecy
             ,
             we
             are
             to
             look
             whether
             a
             little
             before
             the
             Pope
             became
             an
             earthly
             Monarch
             (
             for
             Daniel
             saith
             that
             these
             hornes
             here
             doe
             signifie
             Realmes
             )
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             were
             not
             diuided
             into
             tenne
             Realmes
             .
             We
             haue
             shewed
             already
             that
             in
             the
             yeare
             755
             the
             Pope
             began
             to
             lay
             the
             foundation
             of
             his
             earthly
             Empire
             ,
             and
             of
             a
             Bishop
             to
             become
             a
             Monarch
             .
             Nowe
             a
             little
             before
             ,
             (
             that
             is
             to
             say
             in
             the
             seauenth
             age
             )
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             was
             diuided
             into
             10
             peeces
             or
             kingdomes
             .
             1
             ,
             There
             was
             the
             kingdōe
             of
             the
             Frēch
             ,
             which
             held
             France
             &
             a
             part
             of
             Germanie
             .
             2.
             
             The
             kingdome
             of
             the
             English
             Saxons
             ,
             which
             held
             great
             Brittain
             .
             3
             The
             kingdōe
             of
             the
             Visigots
             which
             held
             Spaine
             .
             4.
             
             The
             kingdome
             of
             the
             Lumbards
             in
             Italie
             .
             5.
             
             The
             kingdome
             of
             the
             Sclavonians
             which
             held
             Illyria
             ,
             and
             the
             countries
             thereabout
             ▪
             6.
             
             The
             kingdome
             of
             
             the
             Huns
             and
             the
             Avarians
             in
             Hungarie
             &
             Austrich
             .
             7.
             
             The
             kingdome
             of
             the
             Bulgarians
             reigning
             in
             Bulgaria
             and
             Seruia
             ,
             &c.
             8.
             
             The
             kingdome
             of
             the
             Sarasens
             of
             Damascus
             that
             held
             Syria
             ,
             and
             reigned
             in
             the
             East
             .
             9.
             
             The
             kingdome
             of
             the
             Sarasens
             of
             Barbarie
             that
             reigned
             in
             Affricke
             ,
             which
             about
             this
             very
             age
             did
             inuade
             Spaine
             and
             passe
             into
             Fraunce
             .
             10.
             
             To
             which
             if
             yee
             ad
             that
             which
             as
             yet
             was
             held
             in
             possession
             by
             the
             Emperour
             of
             Constantinople
             ,
             yee
             shall
             find
             10
             Realmes
             ,
             euery
             one
             possessing
             his
             part
             of
             the
             ancient
             Roman
             Empire
             :
             and
             this
             ,
             a
             little
             before
             that
             this
             little
             horne
             shewed
             himselfe
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             before
             the
             Pope
             began
             to
             take
             his
             place
             amongst
             Princes
             ,
             and
             to
             lay
             the
             foundations
             of
             his
             Roman
             Monarchie
             .
          
           
             2
             That
             the
             portion
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             which
             the
             Pope
             hath
             vnder
             him
             ,
             hath
             such
             a
             proportion
             in
             respect
             of
             the
             whole
             extent
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             as
             there
             is
             of
             three
             to
             ten
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             hee
             doth
             possesse
             little
             lesse
             thē
             the
             third
             part
             thereof
             :
             this
             is
             easily
             proued
             to
             bee
             true
             ,
             if
             it
             please
             any
             to
             take
             but
             a
             map
             ,
             and
             a
             payre
             of
             compasses
             ,
             or
             else
             only
             to
             measure
             the
             countries
             of
             the
             Empire
             with
             his
             eies
             .
             The
             
             Pope
             did
             never
             possesse
             any
             thing
             ,
             nor
             never
             had
             any
             dominion
             over
             Greece
             ,
             Asia
             ,
             Syria
             ,
             Arabia
             ,
             Egypt
             ,
             or
             Affrick
             .
             For
             as
             for
             the
             incursions
             of
             our
             French
             into
             Syria
             ,
             Egypt
             and
             Constantinople
             ,
             they
             were
             nothing
             else
             but
             violēt
             motiōs
             ,
             which
             lasted
             but
             for
             a
             small
             time
             ,
             and
             did
             rather
             shew
             thē
             plant
             the
             Popes
             dominion
             in
             the
             East
             .
             Now
             all
             these
             countries
             being
             put
             together
             make
             vp
             a
             little
             more
             then
             two
             thirds
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             the
             rest
             hath
             beene
             vnder
             the
             Pope
             ,
             wherein
             hee
             hath
             planted
             his
             Monarchie
             :
             wherevnto
             moreouer
             hee
             hath
             added
             certaine
             prouinces
             that
             were
             never
             subiect
             to
             the
             Ancient
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             as
             Polonie
             ,
             the
             north
             part
             of
             Germanie
             ,
             Denmarck
             ,
             and
             Swethland
             ,
             and
             nowe
             of
             late
             a
             part
             of
             the
             Indies
             .
             But
             Daniel
             lookt
             not
             to
             these
             adiunctions
             ,
             for
             hee
             speakes
             only
             of
             the
             diuision
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             .
          
           
             3
             As
             for
             the
             changing
             of
             times
             ,
             and
             the
             law
             ,
             it
             is
             the
             Pope
             that
             takes
             vpon
             him
             to
             make
             the
             yeares
             shorter
             or
             longer
             .
             It
             is
             not
             long
             since
             that
             Gregorie
             the
             13
             did
             contract
             the
             yeare
             by
             10
             daies
             :
             it
             is
             the
             Pope
             that
             makes
             holy
             daies
             of
             common
             daies
             ,
             which
             can
             if
             it
             please
             him
             ,
             transport
             
             the
             month
             of
             Iuly
             into
             Ianuarie
             ;
             taking
             the
             authoritie
             vpon
             him
             of
             the
             ancient
             priests
             of
             Rome
             instituted
             by
             Numa
             ,
             who
             proclaimed
             the
             holy
             daies
             ,
             and
             thrust
             in
             odde
             days
             into
             the
             yeare
             at
             their
             pleasure
             .
             It
             were
             a
             needlesse
             labour
             for
             me
             to
             shewe
             more
             particularly
             howe
             hee
             changeth
             the
             law
             ,
             seeing
             that
             my
             whole
             second
             booke
             is
             spent
             in
             declaring
             howe
             the
             Pope
             doth
             oppose
             himselfe
             against
             the
             word
             of
             God.
             Seeing
             also
             that
             hee
             boasteth
             that
             hee
             can
             dispense
             with
             oathes
             and
             vowes
             made
             to
             God
             ,
             that
             he
             can
             dissolue
             compleat
             marriages
             ,
             although
             they
             bee
             not
             violated
             by
             adulterie
             :
             that
             hee
             can
             dispense
             with
             children
             for
             obaying
             their
             parents
             in
             honest
             things
             ,
             and
             with
             subiects
             for
             being
             faithfull
             to
             their
             Prince
             .
             That
             he
             can
             giue
             a
             mā
             leaue
             to
             marry
             his
             own
             neece
             contrary
             to
             the
             commandement
             of
             God.
             That
             hee
             can
             keepe
             Princes
             from
             reading
             the
             holy
             scripture
             ,
             contrary
             to
             an
             expresse
             commandement
             that
             is
             giuen
             them
             in
             the
             17
             of
             Deut.
             v.
             18.
             
             Whereupon
             his
             Doctours
             also
             say
             and
             write
             in
             their
             glosses
             vpon
             the
             Decrees
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             ,
             and
             in
             their
             bookes
             of
             controuersies
             ,
             that
             the
             Pope
             cā
             dispense
             against
             the
             Apostle
             ,
             and
             against
             
             the
             old
             Testament
             .
             And
             that
             hee
             can
             dispense
             with
             the
             commandement
             of
             the
             Lord
             wherein
             he
             saith
             ,
             
               Doe
               workes
               worthy
               of
               repentance
            
             :
             as
             hee
             doth
             indeed
             dispense
             with
             it
             by
             his
             Indulgences
             .
          
           
             4
             Next
             followes
             the
             exposition
             of
             these
             words
             ,
             
               A
               time
               ,
               times
               ,
               &
               halfe
               a
               time
               ,
            
             which
             is
             the
             tearme
             during
             which
             ,
             Daniel
             saith
             ,
             the
             Saints
             shall
             be
             kept
             in
             bondage
             ,
             and
             the
             church
             held
             captiue
             .
             These
             words
             at
             the
             first
             seeme
             strange
             ,
             but
             being
             compared
             with
             other
             places
             where
             there
             is
             mention
             made
             of
             the
             continuance
             of
             the
             dominion
             of
             Antichrist
             ,
             are
             easie
             to
             be
             vnderstood
             .
             We
             haue
             seene
             in
             the
             13
             Chapt.
             of
             the
             Apocalyps
             ,
             v.
             5.
             that
             the
             Romā
             Empire
             after
             the
             healing
             of
             its
             wound
             by
             the
             Papacie
             ,
             must
             continue
             42
             months
             ,
             which
             make
             3
             yeares
             and
             a
             halfe
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             1260
             mysticall
             daies
             ,
             which
             amount
             to
             so
             many
             yeares
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             stile
             of
             the
             Scripture
             :
             as
             we
             haue
             shewed
             by
             many
             examples
             in
             the
             exposition
             of
             the
             said
             passage
             of
             the
             Apocalyps
             .
             Now
             3
             yeares
             and
             a
             halfe
             ,
             are
             one
             yeare
             ,
             two
             yeares
             ,
             &
             halfe
             an
             yeare
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             spirit
             of
             God
             by
             an
             admirable
             correspondency
             of
             the
             Prophecies
             doth
             say
             the
             same
             thing
             in
             diuers
             
             words
             ,
             and
             doth
             tell
             vs
             before
             hand
             that
             the
             kingdome
             of
             Antichrist
             and
             the
             bondage
             of
             the
             Church
             vnder
             his
             dominion
             must
             continue
             1260
             yeares
             ,
             which
             as
             wee
             haue
             shewed
             by
             vndoubted
             proofes
             ,
             must
             begin
             in
             the
             yeare
             of
             our
             Lord
             ,
             755.
             
          
           
             5
             As
             concerning
             the
             kingdome
             ,
             and
             dominion
             over
             all
             things
             which
             God
             giueth
             to
             his
             Saints
             ,
             and
             the
             faithfull
             ,
             although
             they
             seeme
             servants
             and
             strangers
             in
             this
             world
             ,
             Daniel
             herein
             speakes
             according
             to
             the
             stile
             of
             the
             Scripture
             ,
             which
             calleth
             them
             Kings
             ,
             Apoc.
             1.
             v.
             6.
             
             &
             5.
             v.
             10
             
               He
               hath
               made
               vs
               kings
               and
               priests
               vnto
               God
               his
               father
               .
            
             And
             in
             the
             1.
             
             Epistle
             of
             
               S.
               Peter
            
             Chap.
             2.
             the
             faithfull
             are
             called
             
               a
               Royall
               Priesthood
            
             .
             Now
             they
             are
             kings
             ,
             both
             because
             they
             raigne
             already
             in
             Christ
             ,
             which
             is
             one
             body
             with
             vs
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             kingdome
             which
             he
             now
             possesseth
             ouer
             all
             things
             is
             ours
             :
             as
             also
             because
             that
             in
             the
             last
             day
             of
             iudgement
             ,
             the
             faithfull
             shall
             iudge
             the
             world
             ,
             and
             the
             Angels
             ;
             as
             the
             Apostle
             
               S.
               Paule
            
             saith
             in
             the
             1.
             to
             the
             Corinth
             .
             Ch.
             6.
             
             That
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             they
             shall
             bee
             the
             assessours
             of
             the
             sonne
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             approuers
             of
             the
             iudgment
             which
             he
             shall
             pronoūce
             against
             the
             wicked
             ,
             and
             against
             the
             divels
             .
             
             As
             also
             because
             that
             in
             the
             glory
             to
             come
             after
             the
             last
             day
             ,
             they
             shal
             be
             aboue
             those
             which
             reigned
             over
             them
             ,
             and
             shall
             bee
             kings
             whilst
             the
             mightie
             ones
             of
             this
             world
             ,
             which
             were
             enimies
             to
             the
             church
             ,
             shall
             be
             made
             slaues
             .
          
           
             6
             It
             remaines
             that
             we
             see
             ,
             whether
             they
             that
             hold
             that
             there
             is
             no
             mention
             at
             all
             made
             in
             this
             Chap.
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             nor
             of
             Antichrist
             ,
             but
             only
             of
             the
             kingdome
             of
             the
             Seleucidae
             :
             and
             of
             Antiochus
             Epiphanes
             ,
             can
             be
             excused
             .
          
           
             The
             ancient
             Doctors
             hold
             with
             vs
             ,
             that
             in
             this
             chapter
             Antichrist
             is
             spoken
             of
             ,
             as
             Hierome
             ,
             and
             Theodoret
             vpon
             this
             place
             ,
             S.
             Cyprian
             in
             his
             booke
             of
             exhortation
             to
             martyrdome
             .
             S.
             Austin
             in
             the
             23.
             chap.
             20.
             booke
             of
             the
             citie
             of
             God.
             And
             our
             adversaries
             are
             of
             the
             same
             opinion
             .
             They
             of
             the
             Ancient
             which
             by
             a
             little
             horne
             vnderstand
             Antiochus
             Epiphanes
             ,
             doe
             withall
             vnderstand
             Antichrist
             by
             the
             same
             horne
             ,
             for
             they
             hold
             that
             Antiochus
             was
             a
             figure
             of
             Antichrist
             ▪
             and
             that
             which
             is
             said
             of
             the
             one
             ,
             agrees
             also
             to
             the
             other
             .
          
           
             As
             for
             mine
             owne
             part
             I
             finde
             this
             Prophecie
             so
             cleere
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             hard
             to
             doubt
             of
             the
             meaning
             ;
             and
             indeed
             amongst
             all
             the
             
             chapters
             of
             holy
             scripture
             ,
             this
             did
             ever
             seeme
             excellent
             vnto
             me
             ,
             and
             I
             could
             never
             satisfy
             my selfe
             with
             admiring
             it
             .
             What
             deepnesse
             of
             wisdome
             there
             is
             in
             it
             !
             what
             cleerenesse
             of
             Prophecies
             !
             how
             many
             remarkeable
             circumstances
             !
             what
             excellent
             accord
             with
             the
             reuelation
             of
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             !
             yee
             shall
             find
             the
             same
             stile
             in
             both
             places
             in
             the
             same
             matter
             .
             Whosoever
             shall
             take
             this
             prophecie
             from
             Christians
             to
             appropriate
             it
             vnto
             the
             Iewes
             only
             ,
             goes
             about
             as
             it
             seemes
             to
             mee
             ,
             to
             stop
             vp
             a
             great
             window
             ,
             at
             which
             God
             doth
             let
             in
             his
             light
             vnto
             vs
             ,
             and
             to
             take
             away
             no
             small
             stay
             &
             comfort
             from
             our
             faith
             :
             besides
             that
             they
             doe
             shut
             their
             eies
             of
             set
             purpose
             ,
             and
             contest
             against
             experience
             .
             Yet
             let
             vs
             heare
             what
             they
             alleage
             .
          
           
             They
             lay
             for
             a
             foundation
             ,
             that
             the
             2.
             chap.
             and
             the
             7.
             speake
             both
             of
             one
             and
             the
             same
             thing
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             vision
             of
             the
             foure
             beastes
             hath
             the
             same
             signification
             with
             the
             image
             that
             had
             his
             head
             of
             gold
             ,
             his
             breast
             of
             siluer
             ,
             his
             belly
             &
             his
             thighes
             of
             brasse
             ,
             his
             legs
             part
             of
             yron
             and
             part
             of
             clay
             .
             That
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             both
             of
             these
             visions
             doe
             signifie
             foure
             Monarchies
             ,
             vnder
             which
             the
             Iewish
             Church
             was
             held
             in
             captiuitie
             ;
             
             I
             doe
             not
             deny
             but
             that
             the
             3
             first
             Monarchies
             are
             the
             same
             ,
             in
             the
             2.
             and
             7.
             chap.
             But
             the
             fourth
             Empire
             here
             called
             the
             fourth
             beast
             ,
             is
             altogether
             divers
             from
             the
             feet
             of
             the
             image
             in
             the
             second
             chapter
             .
          
           
             1
             For
             this
             fourth
             beast
             is
             described
             here
             as
             more
             able
             and
             strong
             then
             the
             3.
             former
             ,
             and
             his
             lookes
             are
             said
             to
             be
             more
             stout
             then
             his
             fellowes
             ,
             v.
             20.
             
             On
             the
             contrary
             the
             fourth
             kingdome
             in
             the
             2.
             chapt
             .
             is
             made
             to
             be
             farre
             weaker
             then
             the
             other
             .
             For
             Daniel
             in
             the
             42.
             verse
             saith
             ,
             
               that
               it
               shall
               be
               partly
               strong
               ,
               and
               partly
               broken
               ,
            
             and
             makes
             it
             so
             farre
             inferiour
             to
             the
             former
             monarchies
             ,
             as
             yron
             &
             clay
             are
             in
             respect
             of
             gold
             and
             silver
             .
          
           
             2
             Likewise
             when
             Daniel
             saith
             that
             the
             third
             Monarchy
             (
             which
             is
             that
             of
             the
             Macedonians
             )
             had
             4
             heads
             ,
             who
             sees
             not
             that
             hereby
             he
             vnderstands
             ,
             that
             the
             Empire
             should
             be
             divided
             into
             4
             kingdomes
             ?
             As
             Daniel
             himselfe
             also
             doth
             expounde
             himselfe
             in
             the
             8.
             chapt
             .
             v.
             22.
             
             The
             kingdome
             of
             the
             Seleucidae
             being
             one
             of
             the
             4
             kingdomes
             into
             which
             the
             Empire
             of
             Alexander
             is
             divided
             ,
             what
             probability
             is
             there
             that
             in
             the
             verse
             following
             hee
             shoulde
             
             make
             these
             very
             Seleucidae
             a
             diverse
             beast
             ,
             which
             but
             in
             the
             verse
             going
             before
             ,
             hee
             had
             made
             to
             bee
             one
             of
             the
             heades
             of
             the
             beast
             ?
             To
             salue
             the
             matter
             ,
             they
             tell
             vs
             of
             diuers
             confusions
             within
             the
             kingdome
             of
             
               Aridaeus
               ,
               Antipater
            
             ,
             and
             Cassander
             ,
             where
             they
             seeke
             for
             4
             kings
             opposing
             one
             an
             other
             at
             the
             same
             time
             ,
             but
             cannot
             finde
             them
             ;
             and
             say
             they
             should
             ,
             yet
             is
             it
             likely
             that
             Daniel
             should
             rather
             speake
             of
             the
             diuisions
             that
             fell
             out
             in
             a
             little
             corner
             of
             Alexanders
             Empire
             ,
             then
             of
             those
             that
             fell
             out
             in
             the
             whole
             Empire
             ,
             being
             that
             these
             were
             the
             greater
             of
             the
             two
             without
             all
             comparison
             ?
             Or
             who
             will
             thinke
             that
             Daniel
             in
             this
             place
             doth
             speake
             onlie
             of
             the
             diuisions
             of
             the
             country
             of
             Macedon
             ,
             which
             had
             nothing
             cōmō
             with
             the
             Iewes
             ,
             and
             omit
             those
             of
             Syria
             where
             the
             church
             dwelt
             ?
          
           
             3
             Nor
             are
             they
             lesse
             troubled
             ,
             if
             not
             more
             ,
             to
             finde
             10
             Seleucidian
             kings
             ,
             after
             whom
             they
             will
             haue
             
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
            
             to
             rise
             .
             For
             they
             are
             faine
             to
             thrust
             in
             the
             Ptolomies
             to
             make
             vp
             this
             number
             ,
             which
             did
             invade
             or
             ouerrun
             Syria
             .
             But
             Daniel
             saith
             that
             these
             10
             kings
             shall
             arise
             out
             of
             the
             decayed
             Empire
             ,
             and
             it
             cānot
             
             be
             said
             that
             the
             Ptolomies
             did
             rise
             out
             of
             the
             kingdome
             of
             the
             Seleucidae
             ,
             seeing
             that
             they
             did
             rise
             against
             the
             Seleucidae
             .
             They
             speake
             therefore
             ▪
             as
             if
             I
             shoulde
             saie
             ,
             that
             Brennus
             did
             rise
             out
             of
             the
             kingdome
             of
             Romulus
             ,
             or
             the
             Tarquins
             ,
             whereas
             he
             did
             rise
             vp
             against
             their
             state
             ,
             &
             posterity
             .
             And
             last
             of
             all
             ,
             should
             we
             grant
             them
             that
             which
             they
             would
             haue
             ,
             yet
             can
             they
             not
             make
             vp
             their
             number
             .
             For
             they
             make
             this
             Antiochus
             to
             bee
             the
             tenth
             of
             these
             kings
             ,
             contrary
             to
             the
             expresse
             words
             of
             Daniel
             ,
             which
             saith
             that
             this
             little
             horne
             shall
             rise
             vp
             after
             the
             ten
             kings
             :
             he
             is
             none
             of
             the
             ten
             therefore
             .
          
           
             4
             And
             they
             are
             as
             much
             out
             in
             the
             acceptiō
             of
             the
             word
             ,
             kings
             ,
             which
             throughout
             this
             whole
             chapt
             .
             doth
             not
             signifie
             the
             person
             of
             kings
             ,
             but
             the
             kingdomes
             ,
             or
             Monarchies
             .
             As
             it
             appeareth
             by
             the
             17.
             verse
             in
             these
             words
             ,
             the
             4
             beasts
             are
             foure
             kings
             ,
             where
             they
             themselues
             cōfesse
             that
             by
             the
             word
             kings
             ,
             we
             are
             to
             vnderstande
             Monarchies
             .
          
           
             5
             Besides
             ,
             I
             know
             not
             how
             they
             can
             finde
             that
             fulfilled
             in
             Antiochus
             ,
             which
             Daniel
             saith
             in
             the
             22.
             verse
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             That
             he
             shall
             subdue
             3
             kings
             ;
             for
             histories
             report
             
             no
             such
             thing
             of
             this
             man.
             
          
           
             6
             Herevnto
             adde
             that
             ,
             if
             (
             as
             they
             would
             haue
             it
             )
             the
             third
             beast
             doe
             signifie
             the
             Empire
             of
             Alexander
             only
             ,
             &
             not
             that
             of
             the
             Seleucidae
             ;
             too
             ,
             then
             this
             Empire
             must
             continue
             but
             6.
             yeares
             ,
             which
             is
             manifestly
             opposit
             to
             that
             which
             Daniel
             saith
             verse
             12.
             
             
               That
               the
               liues
               of
               these
               beasts
               were
               prolongued
               ,
               for
               a
               certaine
               time
               and
               season
               .
            
          
           
             7
             Nor
             can
             it
             be
             said
             ,
             with
             what
             violence
             they
             wrest
             the
             words
             of
             the
             13
             ver
             .
             where
             Iesus
             Christ
             is
             described
             comming
             in
             the
             clowdes
             of
             heauen
             .
             They
             would
             haue
             this
             not
             to
             be
             spoke
             of
             his
             comming
             at
             the
             last
             day
             ,
             but
             would
             haue
             it
             to
             be
             vnderstood
             of
             his
             incarnation
             ,
             when
             neuerthelesse
             it
             cannot
             be
             said
             without
             absurditie
             ,
             that
             he
             came
             down
             from
             heauen
             vpon
             the
             clowdes
             .
          
           
             8
             But
             to
             what
             ende
             shoulde
             Daniel
             speake
             so
             often
             of
             the
             glorification
             of
             the
             Saints
             ,
             and
             of
             their
             heauenly
             kingdome
             ,
             if
             hee
             spake
             but
             only
             of
             the
             humiliation
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             and
             not
             of
             the
             last
             iudgement
             ?
          
           
             9
             The
             space
             also
             of
             three
             yeares
             and
             an
             halfe
             ,
             exprest
             by
             a
             time
             ,
             two
             times
             ,
             and
             halfe
             a
             time
             ,
             can
             not
             agree
             to
             Antiochus
             .
             
             For
             in
             the
             8.
             chapt
             .
             ver
             .
             14.
             where
             this
             Antiochus
             is
             manifestly
             spoken
             off
             ,
             it
             is
             saide
             that
             hee
             shall
             wast
             the
             Sanctuarie
             for
             the
             space
             of
             
               two
               thousand
               ▪
               three
               hundreth
               mornings
               &
               evenings
               ,
            
             which
             amount
             to
             more
             then
             6
             yeares
             .
             And
             note
             that
             these
             words
             ,
             mornings
             ,
             &
             euenings
             ,
             are
             purposely
             added
             ,
             to
             shew
             that
             he
             speaketh
             of
             common
             and
             ordinarie
             daies
             ,
             and
             to
             distinguish
             thē
             from
             the
             three
             mysticall
             yeares
             ,
             and
             an
             halfe
             ,
             spoken
             of
             in
             this
             chapt
             .
          
           
             10.
             
             On
             the
             other
             side
             all
             their
             obiectiōs
             against
             this
             explication
             ,
             aime
             at
             this
             chiefly
             ,
             to
             shew
             that
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             is
             not
             spoken
             off
             in
             the
             2.
             chap.
             of
             Daniel
             ,
             which
             we
             do
             not
             deny
             ;
             but
             this
             lets
             not
             but
             that
             it
             may
             be
             spoken
             off
             in
             this
             chapt
             .
          
           
             11
             And
             ,
             to
             say
             truth
             ,
             they
             presuppose
             without
             reason
             that
             Daniel
             speakes
             this
             here
             but
             only
             for
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             Iews
             .
             For
             what
             inconvenience
             is
             there
             if
             we
             say
             that
             God
             did
             reueale
             something
             to
             his
             prophet
             concerning
             the
             Christiā
             church
             ?
             Seeing
             that
             in
             the
             12
             chapt
             .
             he
             doth
             apparantly
             prophecie
             of
             the
             resurrection
             ,
             and
             euerlasting
             life
             ;
             And
             do
             not
             they
             contradict
             themselues
             ,
             being
             that
             they
             woulde
             haue
             Daniel
             in
             the
             6.
             verse
             speake
             of
             the
             
             confusions
             that
             hapned
             in
             Macedō
             ,
             where
             the
             Iewes
             had
             no
             interest
             ,
             and
             which
             did
             not
             concerne
             them
             at
             all
             ?
          
           
             12
             Last
             of
             all
             I
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             vision
             mentioned
             in
             the
             2.
             chapt
             .
             had
             beene
             repeated
             in
             vaine
             in
             the
             7.
             if
             there
             were
             no
             diuersitie
             in
             them
             ,
             and
             if
             the
             second
             apparition
             of
             the
             same
             vision
             did
             not
             teach
             vs
             some
             thing
             that
             was
             not
             contained
             in
             the
             former
             .
          
        
      
       
         
           THE
           PROPHECIE
           CONtained
           in
           the
           11.
           chapter
           of
           the
           Apocalyps
           .
           CHAP.
           9.
           
        
         
           
             
               1
               Then
               was
               given
               me
               a
               reede
               like
               vnto
               a
               rod
               ,
               and
               there
               stoode
               an
               Angell
               by
               ,
               which
               said
               vnto
               me
               ,
               Rise
               ,
               and
               mete
               the
               temple
               of
               God
               ,
               and
               the
               altar
               ,
               and
               them
               that
               worshippe
               therein
               .
            
             
               2
               But
               the
               court
               that
               is
               without
               the
               tēple
               cast
               out
               ,
               and
               mete
               it
               not
               :
               for
               it
               is
               given
               vnto
               the
               Gentiles
               ,
               &
               the
               holy
               city
               shall
               they
               tread
               vnder
               foot
               42
               moneths
               .
            
             
               3
               But
               I
               will
               giue
               her
               vnto
               my
               two
               witnesses
               ,
               and
               they
               shall
               prophecie
               a
               thousand
               3
               
               hundreth
               ,
               and
               threescore
               daies
               clothed
               in
               sack-cloth
               .
            
             
               4
               These
               are
               two
               oliue
               trees
               ,
               and
               two
               candlestickes
               standing
               before
               the
               God
               of
               the
               earth
               .
            
             
               5
               And
               if
               any
               man
               will
               hurt
               them
               ,
               fire
               proceedeth
               out
               of
               their
               mouth
               ,
               &
               devoureth
               their
               enimies
               :
               for
               if
               any
               man
               will
               hurt
               them
               ,
               thus
               must
               he
               be
               killed
               .
            
             
               6
               These
               haue
               power
               to
               shut
               heavē
               ,
               that
               it
               may
               not
               raine
               in
               the
               daies
               of
               their
               prophecying
               ,
               and
               haue
               power
               over
               the
               waters
               to
               turne
               them
               into
               bloud
               ,
               to
               smite
               the
               earth
               with
               all
               maner
               of
               plagus
               as
               often
               as
               they
               will.
               
            
             
               7
               And
               when
               they
               shall
               haue
               finished
               their
               testimony
               ,
               the
               beast
               that
               commeth
               out
               of
               the
               bottomlesse
               pit
               ,
               shall
               make
               warre
               against
               them
               and
               shall
               overcome
               them
               ,
               &
               kill
               them
               .
            
             
               8
               And
               their
               dead
               bodies
               shall
               lie
               in
               the
               streetes
               of
               the
               great
               cittie
               ,
               which
               spirituallie
               is
               called
               Sodome
               ,
               and
               Egypt
               ,
               where
               our
               Lord
               also
               was
               crucified
               .
            
             
               9
               And
               they
               of
               the
               tribes
               ,
               and
               people
               ,
               and
               tongues
               ,
               and
               nations
               ,
               shall
               see
               their
               dead
               bodies
               three
               daies
               and
               an
               halfe
               ,
               and
               shall
               not
               suffer
               their
               carkasses
               to
               bee
               buried
               in
               graues
               .
            
             
               10
               And
               they
               that
               dwell
               vpon
               the
               earth
               
               shall
               reioice
               over
               them
               ,
               and
               be
               glad
               ,
               and
               shall
               send
               gifts
               one
               to
               an
               other
               :
               because
               that
               these
               two
               prophets
               vexed
               them
               that
               dwelt
               vpō
               the
               earth
               .
            
             
               11
               But
               after
               these
               3
               daies
               ,
               &
               an
               halfe
               ,
               the
               spirit
               of
               life
               comming
               from
               God
               ,
               shall
               enter
               into
               them
               ,
               and
               they
               shall
               stand
               vpon
               their
               feete
               ,
               and
               great
               feare
               shall
               come
               vpon
               them
               ,
               which
               saw
               them
               .
            
             
               12
               After
               this
               they
               shall
               heare
               a
               great
               voice
               from
               heaven
               ;
               saying
               ,
               Come
               vp
               hither
               .
               And
               they
               shall
               ascende
               vp
               to
               heaven
               in
               a
               clowde
               ,
               and
               their
               enimies
               shall
               see
               them
               .
            
             
               13
               And
               at
               the
               same
               howre
               there
               shall
               be
               a
               great
               earthquake
               ,
               and
               the
               tenth
               part
               of
               the
               citty
               shal
               fall
               ,
               and
               in
               the
               earthquake
               shal
               be
               slaine
               7000
               men
               in
               nūber
               ,
               and
               they
               which
               remaine
               shal
               be
               sore
               afraid
               ,
               and
               giue
               the
               glorie
               to
               God
               of
               heaven
               .
            
             
               14
               The
               second
               w●
               is
               past
               ,
               and
               beholde
               the
               third
               wo
               will
               come
               anon
               .
            
             
               15
               And
               the
               seaventh
               Angell
               blew
               the
               Trumpet
               ,
               &
               there
               were
               great
               voices
               in
               heaven
               ,
               saying
               ,
               The
               kingdomes
               of
               the
               world
               ,
               are
               our
               Lords
               ,
               and
               his
               Christs
               ,
               &
               he
               shal
               reigne
               for
               evermore
               .
            
             
               16
               Then
               the
               24
               elders
               which
               sate
               before
               God
               on
               their
               seats
               ,
               fell
               vpon
               their
               faces
               ,
               
               and
               worshipped
               God.
               
            
             
               17
               Saying
               ,
               we
               giue
               thee
               thankes
               o
               Lo●●
               God
               Almightie
               ,
               which
               art
               ,
               and
               which
               wa●
               and
               which
               art
               to
               come
               ,
               for
               thou
               hast
               receiued
               thy
               great
               might
               ,
               and
               hast
               begun
               th●
               raigne
               .
            
             
               18
               And
               the
               Gentiles
               were
               angry
               ,
               〈◊〉
               thy
               wrath
               is
               come
               ,
               and
               the
               time
               of
               the
               dead
               that
               they
               should
               bee
               iudged
               ,
               and
               that
               th●●
               shouldst
               giue
               the
               reward
               vnto
               thy
               servants
               the
               Prophets
               ,
               and
               to
               the
               Saints
               ,
               and
               to
               them
               that
               feare
               thy
               name
               ,
               to
               small
               and
               great
               ,
               and
               shouldst
               destroy
               thē
               which
               destroy
               the
               earth
               .
            
             
               19
               Then
               the
               Temple
               of
               God
               was
               opened
               in
               heauen
               ,
               and
               there
               was
               seene
               in
               his
               Tēple
               the
               Arke
               of
               his
               covenant
               :
               and
               there
               were
               lightnings
               ,
               and
               voices
               ,
               and
               thundrings
               ,
               and
               earthquakes
               ,
               and
               much
               hayle
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             The
             Explication
             .
          
           
             1
             It
             seemed
             vnto
             me
             in
             a
             vision
             ,
             that
             God
             put
             a
             long
             reed
             into
             my
             hand
             like
             a
             measure
             .
             Afterward
             an
             Angel
             sent
             from
             God
             said
             vnto
             mee
             ;
             with
             this
             measure
             ,
             which
             is
             Faith
             ,
             measure
             ,
             &
             learne
             to
             know
             the
             greatnesse
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             God
             exactly
             ,
             the
             excellency
             of
             the
             sacrifice
             of
             Iesus
             
             Christ
             ,
             and
             the
             state
             of
             the
             faithfull
             ,
             which
             serue
             God
             in
             his
             Church
             .
          
           
             2
             But
             measure
             not
             that
             which
             is
             without
             the
             Church
             ,
             neither
             make
             any
             reckoning
             of
             it
             .
             For
             these
             are
             the
             nations
             ,
             and
             people
             ,
             which
             are
             out
             of
             the
             covenant
             of
             God
             ,
             which
             shall
             tread
             vpon
             ,
             and
             tyrannize
             ouer
             the
             Church
             of
             God
             ,
             for
             the
             space
             of
             a
             thousand
             ,
             two
             hundreth
             &
             sixty
             yeares
             .
          
           
             3
             But
             I
             will
             giue
             place
             in
             my
             house
             to
             some
             few
             faithfull
             pastours
             ,
             which
             shal
             giue
             witnes
             to
             the
             truth
             ,
             during
             the
             1260
             yeares
             ,
             all
             which
             time
             the
             enimies
             of
             the
             Church
             shall
             beare
             sway
             ,
             which
             faithfull
             Pastours
             shal
             preach
             the
             truth
             with
             humilitie
             ,
             and
             strictnesse
             of
             life
             ,
             and
             much
             affliction
             .
          
           
             4
             These
             Pastors
             are
             like
             to
             oliue
             trees
             which
             bring
             tidings
             of
             peace
             ,
             and
             yeeld
             that
             comfortable
             oyle
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             that
             glads
             the
             soule
             ,
             and
             like
             two
             candlesticks
             ,
             that
             giue
             light
             in
             the
             church
             in
             the
             presence
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             5
             But
             if
             any
             one
             resist
             them
             ,
             or
             persecute
             them
             ,
             the
             word
             shall
             bee
             like
             a
             fire
             ,
             which
             shall
             consume
             their
             adversaries
             ,
             &
             turne
             them
             into
             condemnation
             .
          
           
           
             6
             These
             faithfull
             witnesses
             shal
             〈◊〉
             a
             drought
             to
             be
             vpon
             the
             earth
             ,
             and
             〈◊〉
             the
             waters
             to
             be
             corrupted
             ,
             and
             raise
             vp
             mortalitie
             ,
             as
             often
             as
             they
             shall
             prea●●
             the
             truth
             ,
             and
             shall
             not
             be
             heard
             .
             For
             Go●
             for
             their
             sakes
             shall
             visit
             men
             with
             divers
             plagues
             .
          
           
             7
             And
             when
             they
             shal
             haue
             continued
             preaching
             the
             ful
             time
             which
             God
             hath
             prescribed
             vnto
             them
             in
             his
             secret
             coūsell
             ,
             then
             the
             beast
             which
             is
             the
             sonne
             of
             perdition
             ,
             shall
             raise
             vp
             a
             great
             persecution
             against
             them
             ,
             and
             shall
             haue
             the
             vpper
             hand
             and
             make
             them
             to
             die
             .
          
           
             8
             And
             their
             martyrdomes
             shall
             bee
             seene
             through
             all
             places
             ,
             and
             quarters
             of
             the
             Popish
             Church
             ,
             which
             is
             called
             Sodome
             by
             a
             mysticall
             tearme
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             vice
             which
             raignes
             in
             the
             most
             eminent
             place
             of
             that
             Church
             ;
             and
             Egypt
             because
             of
             the
             bondage
             of
             Gods
             people
             ,
             which
             are
             kept
             in
             captivitie
             vnder
             Poperie
             .
             Where
             Christ
             also
             hath
             beene
             ,
             and
             stil
             is
             persecuted
             in
             his
             members
             .
          
           
             9
             And
             the
             people
             and
             nations
             that
             are
             kept
             in
             error
             shall
             see
             their
             persecutions
             and
             their
             martyrdomes
             ,
             for
             the
             space
             of
             halfe
             the
             time
             of
             the
             continuance
             of
             
             Poperie
             ,
             and
             shall
             cast
             their
             bodies
             out
             in●o
             the
             streets
             ,
             and
             shall
             let
             them
             bee
             dryed
             vp
             vpon
             Gibbets
             ,
             without
             ever
             being
             buried
             .
          
           
             10
             This
             persecution
             enduring
             ,
             the
             enimies
             of
             the
             Church
             shall
             reioice
             at
             the
             death
             of
             the
             faithful
             witnesses
             of
             the
             truth
             and
             be
             glad
             thereof
             ,
             and
             send
             presents
             one
             to
             another
             ,
             because
             they
             shall
             see
             themselues
             deliuered
             from
             the
             sollicitations
             &
             reprehensions
             of
             the
             faithfull
             ministers
             ,
             which
             would
             not
             let
             them
             to
             be
             quiet
             .
          
           
             11
             But
             this
             time
             being
             once
             expired
             ,
             they
             shall
             reviue
             in
             their
             successours
             ,
             God
             raising
             vp
             others
             in
             their
             place
             hauing
             the
             same
             spirit
             ,
             which
             shall
             stand
             vpright
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             speake
             the
             more
             couragiously
             .
             Whereat
             the
             people
             that
             are
             their
             enimies
             shall
             be
             greatly
             astonisht
             .
          
           
             12
             After
             this
             ,
             a
             voice
             shall
             come
             frō
             heauen
             ,
             which
             shall
             say
             vnto
             these
             faithful
             servants
             of
             God
             ,
             come
             vp
             into
             heauen
             :
             And
             God
             shall
             take
             them
             vp
             into
             heauen
             ,
             with
             evident
             testimonies
             of
             his
             fauour
             ,
             as
             their
             very
             enimes
             shall
             acknowledge
             .
          
           
             13
             At
             this
             very
             houre
             ,
             the
             people
             of
             the
             earth
             shal
             be
             smitten
             with
             a
             trembling
             feare
             .
             And
             God
             shall
             sende
             out
             a
             plague
             ,
             
             which
             shall
             kill
             the
             tenth
             part
             of
             the
             people
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             :
             and
             this
             suddaine
             feare
             shall
             swallow
             vp
             a
             great
             number
             of
             them
             ;
             they
             which
             remain
             shal
             stand
             amazed
             ,
             and
             giue
             the
             glory
             to
             God.
             
          
           
             14
             This
             woe
             shall
             bee
             the
             second
             after
             that
             of
             the
             Locusts
             ,
             after
             which
             there
             is
             a
             third
             also
             to
             come
             .
          
           
             
             15
             For
             after
             this
             ,
             comes
             the
             time
             wherein
             God
             will
             display
             his
             iudgments
             ,
             for
             the
             seaventh
             and
             last
             time
             .
             So
             there
             were
             voices
             heard
             in
             heauen
             ,
             saying
             ,
             Now
             the
             kingdome
             of
             God
             is
             establisht
             ,
             and
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             his
             sonne
             ouer
             euery
             creature
             for
             to
             raigne
             euerlastingly
             .
          
           
             16
             Then
             the
             Patriarchs
             and
             Apostles
             representing
             the
             whole
             Church
             of
             the
             Saints
             ,
             which
             stand
             before
             God
             ,
             &
             raigne
             with
             him
             ,
             fel
             downe
             vpon
             their
             faces
             ,
             and
             worshipped
             him
             .
          
           
             17
             Saying
             ,
             wee
             giue
             thee
             thankes
             ,
             Lord
             God
             Almightie
             ,
             and
             everlasting
             ,
             because
             thou
             hast
             made
             knowne
             thy
             great
             might
             ,
             and
             hast
             begunne
             to
             establish
             thy
             kingdome
             .
          
           
             18
             It
             is
             true
             that
             the
             nations
             &
             people
             were
             incensed
             against
             thy
             church
             ,
             but
             thou
             hast
             punnisht
             them
             in
             thy
             wrath
             ,
             and
             
             at
             length
             the
             time
             of
             the
             last
             iudgement
             is
             come
             ,
             wherein
             thou
             wilt
             giue
             a
             reward
             vnto
             thy
             seruants
             ,
             the
             ministers
             of
             the
             Gospell
             ,
             and
             to
             all
             the
             faithful
             which
             feare
             thy
             name
             ,
             both
             great
             and
             smal
             ,
             and
             wilt
             destroy
             the
             destroyers
             of
             thy
             Church
             which
             is
             vpon
             earth
             .
          
           
             19
             Then
             was
             the
             entrance
             into
             Paradice
             fully
             laid
             open
             ,
             and
             God
             heretofore
             figured
             by
             the
             Arcke
             ,
             called
             the
             Lord
             ,
             was
             manifested
             in
             heauen
             .
             But
             he
             let
             loose
             his
             choler
             vpon
             earth
             ,
             with
             glory
             &
             great
             power
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Proofe
             ,
             and
             cleering
             .
          
           
             The
             three
             first
             chapt
             .
             of
             this
             book
             ,
             containe
             nothing
             ,
             but
             familiar
             instructions
             ,
             with
             certaine
             representations
             of
             the
             maiestie
             of
             God
             and
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             without
             any
             predictiō
             .
             In
             the
             sixth
             chap.
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             begins
             to
             foretell
             of
             future
             euents
             ,
             and
             to
             draw
             out
             his
             propheticall
             revelations
             ,
             in
             which
             he
             follows
             the
             order
             of
             the
             time
             ,
             beginning
             at
             the
             nativitie
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             &
             holding
             on
             till
             the
             approaching
             of
             the
             last
             iudgement
             ,
             which
             is
             spoken
             of
             at
             the
             end
             of
             this
             11.
             chapt
             .
          
           
           
             All
             this
             time
             is
             first
             of
             all
             diuided
             into
             the
             opening
             of
             the
             7.
             seales
             ,
             which
             are
             as
             so
             many
             reuelations
             of
             the
             hidden
             counsel
             of
             God
             a
             little
             after
             into
             the
             7.
             soundings
             of
             the
             trumpets
             ,
             which
             signifie
             seauen
             seuerall
             executions
             of
             the
             iudgementes
             of
             God
             vpon
             the
             earth
             ,
             which
             are
             also
             signified
             by
             the
             7.
             viols
             of
             Gods
             wrath
             thrown
             vpon
             men
             .
          
           
             How
             many
             years
             euery
             seale
             must
             last
             ,
             &
             how
             many
             ,
             euery
             trumpet
             ,
             this
             is
             another
             question
             ;
             and
             which
             doth
             not
             appertaine
             directly
             to
             the
             See
             of
             Rome
             .
             Only
             wee
             are
             to
             note
             ,
             that
             the
             two
             witnesses
             must
             be
             slaine
             by
             the
             beast
             vnder
             the
             sixt
             trumpet
             ,
             and
             afterward
             be
             brought
             to
             life
             againe
             by
             the
             power
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             at
             last
             be
             called
             from
             heauē
             ,
             to
             come
             vp
             thither
             ,
             &
             that
             after
             this
             the
             7
             trumpet
             must
             soūd
             ,
             as
             it
             appeares
             by
             the
             13.
             verse
             of
             the
             ninth
             chapter
             ,
             &
             by
             the
             15
             verse
             of
             the
             11
             chap.
             Whence
             it
             is
             manifest
             that
             vnto
             vs
             (
             which
             liue
             now
             vnder
             the
             sixt
             trumpet
             )
             as
             wee
             will
             demonstrate
             ,
             one
             part
             of
             these
             things
             is
             accomplisht
             :
             but
             that
             the
             whole
             is
             not
             yet
             accomplisht
             .
             Which
             is
             the
             cause
             of
             the
             obscurity
             of
             this
             prophecie
             ,
             that
             troubled
             many
             mens
             heads
             ,
             whilst
             they
             sought
             for
             
             the
             fulfilling
             of
             thinges
             to
             come
             in
             ages
             past
             .
          
           
             And
             this
             doth
             not
             only
             shew
             me
             a
             waie
             to
             the
             cleering
             of
             this
             prophecie
             ,
             but
             also
             giues
             me
             a
             reason
             why
             I
             should
             expounde
             this
             chapt
             .
             out
             of
             his
             order
             ,
             and
             put
             it
             last
             .
             For
             whosoeuer
             shall
             read
             the
             Revelation
             diligently
             ,
             shal
             finde
             that
             from
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             sixth
             chapter
             to
             the
             end
             of
             the
             eleauenth
             ,
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             doth
             follow
             a
             continual
             course
             of
             prophetical
             history
             from
             time
             to
             time
             ,
             vntill
             the
             day
             of
             iudgement
             .
             But
             that
             the
             12.
             chapt
             .
             he
             doth
             begin
             the
             same
             historie
             againe
             after
             another
             fashion
             ,
             beginning
             at
             the
             birth
             of
             our
             Sauiour
             ,
             and
             following
             the
             historie
             of
             the
             church
             euen
             to
             the
             end
             of
             the
             booke
             ,
             which
             hee
             concludes
             with
             the
             last
             iudgement
             ,
             and
             with
             the
             heauenly
             glory
             ,
             of
             the
             church
             of
             God.
             Wherefore
             we
             could
             not
             choose
             but
             expound
             this
             12
             chapt
             .
             and
             those
             which
             follow
             ,
             before
             the
             11.
             chapt
             .
             that
             wee
             might
             follow
             the
             order
             of
             the
             time
             .
             Moreouer
             there
             being
             but
             one
             part
             of
             this
             chapt
             .
             accomplisht
             ,
             reason
             bids
             that
             we
             should
             end
             with
             that
             which
             is
             not
             as
             yet
             come
             to
             passe
             ;
             But
             as
             for
             that
             which
             is
             come
             to
             passe
             ,
             the
             exposition
             which
             I
             giue
             of
             it
             ,
             
             seemes
             in
             my
             opinion
             ,
             to
             be
             easie
             and
             naturall
             .
          
           
             The
             meting
             of
             the
             holy
             Citie
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             Church
             ,
             seemes
             to
             be
             taken
             out
             of
             the
             40.
             chap.
             of
             Ezekiel
             ,
             where
             by
             a
             reed
             ,
             or
             cane
             to
             measure
             ,
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             giues
             Ezechiel
             to
             vnderstand
             ,
             that
             he
             would
             learn
             him
             an
             exact
             knowledge
             of
             his
             Church
             .
             In
             the
             2.
             verse
             ,
             in
             saying
             that
             the
             Court
             which
             is
             out
             of
             the
             Temple
             ,
             is
             giuen
             to
             the
             Gentiles
             ,
             he
             doth
             glaunce
             at
             the
             mysticall
             reason
             of
             the
             building
             of
             the
             Tabernacle
             ,
             which
             had
             three
             parts
             .
             1
             ,
             The
             court
             where
             the
             people
             stood
             .
             2.
             
             The
             holy
             place
             ,
             into
             which
             the
             Levits
             and
             priests
             entred
             ,
             where
             the
             candlesticke
             was
             ,
             the
             shew
             bread
             ,
             and
             the
             altar
             of
             perfumes
             .
             3.
             
             The
             Sanctuarie
             where
             the
             Arke
             surnamed
             the
             Lord
             stood
             ,
             whither
             none
             might
             enter
             but
             the
             high
             Priests
             :
             The
             way
             to
             goe
             into
             the
             holy
             place
             was
             through
             the
             Court
             ,
             and
             into
             the
             Sanctuarie
             through
             the
             holy
             place
             .
             The
             Court
             represented
             the
             nations
             which
             are
             out
             of
             the
             Church
             .
             The
             holy
             place
             represented
             the
             Church
             ,
             where
             the
             word
             of
             God
             doth
             illighten
             and
             nourish
             vs
             ,
             and
             where
             the
             benefit
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             is
             a
             continuall
             perfume
             before
             God.
             The
             Sanctuarie
             
             figured
             heauen
             ,
             where
             our
             high
             Priest
             is
             gon
             in
             alone
             by
             his
             own
             power
             ,
             to
             bring
             vs
             thither
             also
             .
             So
             the
             Court
             was
             a
             figure
             of
             the
             state
             of
             nature
             ,
             the
             holy
             place
             of
             the
             state
             of
             grace
             ,
             the
             Sanctuarie
             of
             the
             state
             of
             glory
             .
             And
             none
             euer
             entred
             into
             the
             second
             but
             through
             the
             first
             ,
             nor
             into
             the
             last
             but
             through
             the
             second
             .
             Vpon
             good
             reason
             therefore
             is
             it
             that
             the
             Court
             here
             is
             assigned
             vnto
             the
             nations
             ,
             which
             do
             not
             knowe
             God
             ,
             seeing
             that
             it
             was
             out
             of
             the
             holy
             place
             ,
             which
             was
             a
             figure
             of
             the
             church
             of
             God.
             And
             this
             is
             farther
             confirmed
             by
             the
             renting
             of
             the
             vaile
             ,
             (
             which
             did
             divide
             the
             holy
             place
             from
             the
             Court
             )
             at
             the
             death
             of
             our
             Sauior
             ,
             whereby
             there
             was
             an
             open
             passage
             laid
             open
             ,
             for
             the
             nations
             that
             were
             strangers
             from
             his
             couenant
             ,
             to
             enter
             into
             the
             Church
             .
          
           
             Now
             here
             by
             the
             nations
             ,
             not
             only
             the
             heathen
             are
             to
             be
             vnderstood
             ,
             but
             all
             people
             that
             are
             enimies
             to
             the
             church
             of
             God.
             The
             terme
             of
             time
             ,
             for
             which
             they
             must
             oppresse
             the
             church
             of
             God
             ,
             is
             42
             months
             which
             make
             3
             yeares
             and
             a
             halfe
             ,
             which
             amount
             to
             1260
             yeares
             ,
             to
             take
             a
             day
             for
             a
             yeare
             :
             as
             wee
             haue
             shewed
             in
             the
             exposition
             of
             the
             fifth
             verse
             of
             the
             13.
             chapter
             .
             
             This
             is
             the
             time
             that
             is
             allotted
             to
             the
             Papall
             Empire
             to
             trample
             vpon
             the
             Church
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             As
             for
             the
             two
             witnesses
             ,
             I
             take
             it
             that
             they
             signifie
             nothing
             else
             but
             a
             fewe
             witnesses
             ,
             but
             yet
             sufficient
             enough
             to
             beare
             witnesse
             of
             the
             truth
             :
             whether
             it
             bee
             that
             the
             holy
             scripture
             doth
             vse
             these
             words
             of
             two
             or
             three
             ,
             insteed
             of
             saying
             ,
             very
             few
             ;
             as
             when
             Christ
             doth
             promise
             ,
             that
             where
             there
             shall
             be
             
               two
               or
               three
            
             gathered
             together
             in
             his
             name
             ,
             he
             will
             be
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             them
             :
             and
             in
             the
             32.
             of
             Deut.
             v.
             30.
             
               two
               shall
               put
               ten
               thousand
               to
               flight
               ,
            
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             a
             small
             number
             shall
             make
             a
             great
             multitude
             to
             turne
             their
             backs
             :
             and
             there
             is
             the
             like
             fashion
             of
             speech
             to
             bee
             found
             in
             the
             17
             of
             Esay
             ,
             verse
             6.
             
             Or
             whether
             it
             be
             that
             in
             the
             matter
             of
             witnesses
             ,
             the
             number
             of
             two
             is
             put
             downe
             in
             Scripture
             ,
             as
             sufficient
             ,
             according
             as
             Christ
             saith
             that
             *
             
               by
               the
               mouth
               of
               two
               or
               three
               witnesses
               every
               word
               is
               confirmed
               .
            
             Or
             whether
             it
             be
             ,
             that
             what
             number
             soeuer
             there
             bee
             of
             Pastours
             ,
             yet
             all
             their
             testimonies
             being
             taken
             from
             the
             two
             testaments
             ,
             which
             are
             the
             true
             witnesses
             of
             the
             will
             of
             God
             ,
             it
             is
             not
             without
             good
             reason
             ,
             that
             their
             testimonie
             
             is
             reduced
             to
             the
             number
             of
             two
             ,
             to
             the
             ende
             that
             they
             should
             not
             looke
             within
             the
             authoritie
             of
             men
             ,
             nor
             seek
             after
             customes
             for
             a
             third
             testimonie
             .
             For
             it
             is
             not
             likely
             that
             God
             should
             haue
             but
             2
             faithfull
             pastours
             to
             oppose
             themselues
             against
             the
             Empire
             of
             the
             sonne
             of
             perdition
             ,
             which
             shall
             be
             so
             powerfull
             ,
             and
             last
             for
             so
             many
             ages
             .
             Now
             ,
             as
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             said
             ,
             that
             the
             oppression
             of
             the
             Church
             must
             continue
             42
             moneths
             ,
             which
             are
             three
             yeares
             &
             a
             halfe
             ,
             so
             likewise
             doth
             hee
             say
             that
             the
             faithfull
             witnesses
             shal
             preach
             1260
             daies
             which
             make
             vp
             also
             three
             yeares
             &
             a
             halfe
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             dominion
             of
             the
             son
             of
             perdition
             shall
             neuer
             be
             without
             being
             contradicted
             by
             some
             fewe
             faithfull
             seruants
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             gouernement
             of
             the
             one
             ,
             and
             the
             reluctancy
             of
             the
             other
             ,
             are
             of
             the
             same
             cōtinuance
             .
             We
             haue
             *
             shewed
             how
             in
             this
             mysticall
             number
             a
             day
             is
             taken
             for
             a
             yeare
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             stile
             of
             the
             Scripture
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Papall
             Monarchie
             must
             last
             1260
             yeares
             .
          
           
             These
             two
             witnesses
             are
             compared
             to
             two
             oliue
             trees
             ,
             and
             to
             two
             Candlesticks
             :
             in
             imitation
             of
             the
             vision
             that
             appeared
             to
             Zachary
             chapt
             .
             4.
             who
             saw
             a
             Candlesticke
             
             of
             golde
             betweene
             two
             oliue
             trees
             ,
             of
             which
             it
             is
             said
             at
             the
             end
             of
             the
             Chapter
             .
             
               These
               are
               the
               two
               oliue
               braunches
               that
               stande
               before
               the
               Lorde
               of
               the
               whole
               earth
               .
            
             Both
             because
             the
             oliue
             is
             a
             signe
             of
             peace
             ,
             witnesse
             the
             doue
             ,
             which
             carryed
             an
             oliue
             branch
             to
             Noah
             in
             his
             mouth
             in
             token
             of
             peace
             .
             As
             also
             ,
             because
             the
             scripture
             doth
             attribute
             a
             property
             vnto
             oile
             of
             making
             glad
             .
             Psa.
             104.
             
             Whence
             it
             is
             called
             
               the
               oile
               of
               gladnes
            
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             maketh
             glad
             ,
             Psal.
             45.
             ver
             .
             8.
             
             Now
             the
             word
             is
             the
             gospell
             of
             
               peace
               ;
               Ephes.
            
             6.15
             .
             and
             maketh
             glad
             the
             heart
             ,
             Psal.
             19.9
             .
             
               that
               we
               may
               reioice
               in
               the
               light
               thereof
               ,
               Iohn
            
             5.35
             .
          
           
             But
             as
             this
             preaching
             is
             the
             sauour
             of
             life
             vnto
             such
             as
             beleeue
             ,
             so
             is
             it
             the
             sauor
             of
             death
             vnto
             the
             rebellious
             ,
             and
             doeth
             wound
             them
             mortally
             .
             Whence
             God
             also
             saith
             that
             this
             word
             kils
             ,
             and
             that
             his
             prophets
             ,
             and
             faithfull
             Ministers
             smite
             the
             earth
             with
             wounds
             by
             their
             preaching
             .
             It
             is
             said
             in
             ●
             Hosea
             that
             hee
             did
             cut
             downe
             those
             of
             Ephraim
             by
             his
             prophets
             ,
             &
             slaie
             them
             by
             the
             words
             of
             his
             mouth
             ,
             and
             in
             Ieremie
             chapt
             .
             5.
             v.
             14.
             
             
               I
               will
               put
               my
               wordes
               into
               thy
               mouth
               like
               a
               fire
               ,
               and
               this
               people
               shal
               be
               as
               wood
               ,
               and
               it
               shall
               devour
               them
               .
            
             In
             this
             
             sense
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             these
             faithfull
             witnesses
             are
             said
             to
             shut
             heaven
             ,
             and
             hinder
             the
             raine
             ,
             and
             turne
             the
             water
             into
             bloud
             ;
             For
             they
             are
             thought
             to
             do
             that
             ,
             which
             God
             doeth
             do
             for
             their
             sakes
             .
             Notwithstanding
             there
             is
             a
             manifest
             allusion
             in
             this
             to
             the
             example
             of
             
               Elias
               ,
               King.
            
             1.17
             .
             which
             shut
             the
             floodgates
             of
             heauen
             ,
             and
             made
             it
             not
             to
             raine
             for
             the
             space
             of
             3
             ▪
             whole
             yeares
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             example
             of
             Moyses
             ,
             which
             turned
             the
             waters
             of
             Egypt
             into
             bloud
             .
             These
             two
             appeared
             to
             Iesus
             Christ
             in
             the
             moūtaine
             ;
             and
             these
             also
             are
             they
             ,
             that
             must
             returne
             into
             the
             world
             (
             as
             Hilarius
             thinks
             )
             to
             fight
             with
             Antichrist
             .
          
           
             After
             that
             the
             beast
             (
             which
             the
             Ancient
             ,
             and
             our
             aduersaries
             themselues
             confesse
             to
             be
             Antichrist
             )
             shall
             haue
             slaine
             the
             two
             faithfull
             witnesses
             ,
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             saith
             that
             their
             bodies
             shal
             lie
             in
             the
             streetes
             of
             the
             great
             citty
             .
             He
             opposeth
             the
             great
             Cittie
             ,
             to
             the
             holy
             Citty
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             Church
             of
             God
             ,
             of
             which
             he
             speakes
             in
             the
             seconde
             verse
             ,
             to
             shew
             that
             the
             false
             church
             ,
             which
             is
             at
             enmitie
             with
             God
             ,
             shal
             be
             very
             great
             in
             respect
             of
             the
             church
             of
             God.
             For
             that
             by
             this
             word
             ,
             city
             ,
             we
             are
             not
             to
             vnderstād
             one
             only
             towne
             ,
             it
             appeares
             by
             this
             ,
             that
             
             it
             is
             not
             only
             called
             Sodome
             ,
             but
             Egypt
             also
             which
             is
             the
             name
             of
             a
             great
             Coūtry
             .
             For
             as
             in
             this
             chapt
             .
             by
             the
             holy
             citty
             wee
             doe
             not
             vnderstand
             one
             towne
             ,
             but
             the
             whole
             Church
             ,
             so
             neither
             by
             the
             city
             that
             is
             at
             enmity
             with
             the
             Church
             are
             wee
             to
             vnderstand
             one
             only
             town
             ,
             but
             the
             whole
             body
             of
             the
             nations
             vnited
             against
             the
             Church
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             Now
             it
             is
             not
             without
             cause
             ,
             that
             the
             Popish
             church
             is
             called
             Sodome
             ,
             seeing
             that
             in
             the
             places
             where
             Papistrie
             is
             establisht
             without
             Contradiction
             ,
             and
             especially
             at
             Rome
             ,
             whence
             al
             this
             great
             body
             of
             the
             Romish
             church
             doth
             depend
             ,
             this
             vice
             is
             familiar
             ,
             and
             hath
             euer
             beene
             so
             even
             from
             the
             time
             of
             the
             
             Apostle
             
               S.
               Paul.
            
             The
             Roman
             authors
             of
             this
             time
             ,
             boast
             of
             it
             ,
             and
             glory
             in
             it
             .
             Plutarch
             a
             Graecian
             borne
             ,
             but
             one
             that
             liued
             at
             the
             court
             of
             Rome
             ,
             a
             graue
             author
             and
             full
             of
             good
             instructions
             ,
             in
             his
             booke
             of
             the
             education
             of
             children
             ,
             saith
             that
             he
             dares
             not
             to
             condemne
             this
             kinde
             of
             loue
             ,
             and
             thinks
             it
             to
             befit
             philosophy
             .
             And
             it
             is
             not
             without
             a
             mystery
             that
             this
             word
             Amor
             being
             written
             backward
             makes
             Roma
             ,
             because
             that
             there
             is
             the
             seat
             ,
             and
             place
             of
             residence
             ,
             of
             
             this
             vnnaturall
             and
             preposterous
             loue
             ,
             or
             if
             it
             fell
             out
             so
             by
             chance
             ,
             it
             hits
             so
             happily
             that
             it
             may
             seeme
             to
             haue
             beene
             intended
             purposely
             .
             Nor
             is
             it
             without
             example
             ,
             that
             a
             towne
             or
             countrie
             should
             be
             called
             by
             the
             name
             of
             Sodome
             ,
             because
             of
             their
             conformity
             in
             manners
             .
             Esay
             in
             his
             
             first
             chapt
             .
             speaks
             thus
             to
             the
             princes
             and
             people
             of
             Ierusalem
             ;
             Heare
             the
             word
             of
             the
             Lord
             O
             yee
             princes
             of
             Sodome
             ,
             harkē
             vnto
             the
             law
             of
             God
             O
             people
             of
             Gomorah
             .
          
           
             In
             this
             Sodome
             and
             Egypt
             ,
             the
             holie
             Ghost
             saith
             (
             in
             the
             8.
             v.
             )
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             was
             crucified
             ,
             either
             because
             Iesus
             Christ
             was
             and
             is
             persecuted
             there
             in
             his
             mēbers
             ;
             which
             is
             confirmed
             by
             the
             last
             verse
             of
             the
             18.
             chap.
             where
             speaking
             of
             Rome
             (
             as
             our
             aduersaries
             confesse
             )
             it
             is
             said
             that
             in
             her
             was
             found
             the
             blouds
             of
             the
             Saints
             
               and
               of
               all
               that
               were
               slaine
               vpon
               the
               earth
               ,
            
             not
             because
             all
             were
             slaine
             within
             the
             Citty
             ,
             but
             by
             her
             perswasion
             ,
             and
             counsell
             :
             or
             els
             because
             that
             Rome
             (
             as
             the
             King
             hath
             verie
             well
             noted
             to
             the
             purpose
             )
             did
             crucifie
             Iesus
             Christ
             in
             his
             owne
             person
             ,
             for
             as
             much
             as
             it
             was
             done
             by
             the
             Romanes
             ,
             that
             were
             sent
             out
             of
             Rome
             into
             Iudaea
             .
             For
             if
             anie
             one
             stand
             stifly
             to
             maintaine
             that
             this
             cittie
             
             where
             Iesus
             Christ
             was
             crucified
             is
             Ierusalem
             ,
             I
             doubt
             how
             he
             cā
             make
             it
             good
             ,
             since
             that
             Christ
             was
             not
             crucified
             in
             Ier●●salem
             ,
             but
             out
             of
             the
             cittie
             on
             mount
             Calvarie
             .
          
           
             In
             this
             great
             citty
             therefore
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             false
             church
             ,
             God
             saith
             by
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             ,
             that
             the
             faithfull
             witnesses
             shall
             be
             slaine
             ,
             and
             their
             bodies
             cast
             out
             into
             the
             streets
             without
             buriall
             ;
             which
             was
             done
             vnto
             vs
             in
             their
             last
             massacres
             ,
             and
             persecutions
             ,
             after
             which
             the
             tyrants
             did
             reioice
             ,
             as
             who
             had
             got
             the
             victory
             ,
             and
             eased
             themselues
             of
             a
             great
             burden
             .
             There
             were
             Bonfires
             made
             at
             Rome
             ,
             in
             token
             of
             ioy
             for
             the
             death
             of
             Lewis
             of
             Burbon
             prince
             of
             Conde
             .
             In
             the
             Popes
             chāber
             of
             presence
             there
             is
             the
             massacre
             of
             Paris
             to
             be
             seene
             painted
             ,
             as
             a
             victorie
             of
             the
             church
             ,
             that
             the
             prophecie
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             might
             be
             fulfilled
             ;
             
               Verily
               ,
               verily
               ,
               I
               say
               vnto
               you
               that
               yee
               shall
               weepe
               and
               lament
               ,
            
             
             
               but
               the
               worlde
               shall
               reioice
            
             .
          
           
             This
             being
             so
             ,
             it
             appeares
             by
             this
             prophecie
             that
             the
             church
             of
             God
             must
             be
             opprest
             ,
             and
             stifled
             as
             it
             were
             for
             a
             time
             ,
             and
             that
             her
             enimies
             shall
             reioyce
             hereat
             ,
             as
             if
             it
             were
             their
             doing
             .
             And
             this
             Ecclypse
             of
             
             ●he
             sun
             of
             the
             Gospell
             must
             last
             for
             three
             daies
             ,
             &
             a
             halfe
             ,
             which
             once
             expired
             ,
             God
             shall
             raise
             vp
             other
             witnesses
             of
             his
             truth
             ,
             so
             like
             those
             that
             went
             before
             in
             power
             &
             zeale
             ,
             that
             one
             may
             say
             they
             are
             the
             same
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             stile
             of
             holy
             Scripture
             ,
             which
             cals
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             Baptist
             Elias
             ,
             because
             that
             hee
             was
             cloathed
             with
             the
             vertue
             and
             spirit
             of
             Elias
             .
             Matt.
             11.
             v.
             14.
             
             And
             Iesus
             Christ
             himselfe
             was
             called
             
               Iohn
               Baptist
            
             ,
             &
             Elias
             ,
             of
             those
             which
             did
             take
             him
             to
             bee
             nothing
             but
             a
             Prophet
             .
             After
             this
             manner
             of
             speech
             ,
             Ezechiel
             calleth
             Iesus
             Christ
             David
             .
             chap
             ,
             34.
             v.
             23.
             
          
           
             As
             for
             the
             time
             of
             three
             daies
             &
             a
             halfe
             ,
             during
             which
             ,
             the
             bodies
             of
             the
             faithfull
             witnesses
             shall
             be
             cast
             out
             through
             all
             the
             quarters
             of
             the
             Romish
             Church
             ,
             it
             is
             manifest
             that
             S.
             Ioh.
             doth
             hereby
             shew
             vs
             how
             long
             the
             persecution
             of
             the
             Church
             vnder
             the
             Roman
             Hierarchie
             must
             continue
             .
             For
             to
             know
             how
             long
             this
             time
             shall
             endure
             ,
             and
             to
             how
             much
             the
             three
             daies
             and
             an
             halfe
             come
             ,
             wee
             are
             to
             note
             that
             3
             daies
             and
             an
             halfe
             make
             halfe
             a
             weeke
             ,
             which
             giues
             vs
             to
             vnderstād
             that
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             here
             vnder
             the
             name
             of
             a
             weeke
             doth
             cōprehend
             the
             whole
             time
             of
             the
             beastes
             
             raigne
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             doth
             advertise
             vs
             that
             the
             persecution
             shall
             last
             halfe
             the
             time
             of
             this
             raigne
             .
             Since
             therefore
             he
             shal
             raigne
             1260
             yeares
             ,
             as
             we
             haue
             shewed
             in
             the
             exposition
             of
             the
             5.
             verse
             of
             the
             13
             Chapter
             ,
             and
             this
             11
             chap.
             doth
             confirme
             it
             ,
             it
             followes
             that
             the
             Roman
             Hierarchie
             shall
             persecute
             the
             faithfull
             630
             yeares
             .
             Now
             I
             doe
             not
             find
             that
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             did
             begin
             to
             persecute
             ,
             and
             to
             vse
             crueltie
             in
             generall
             against
             all
             that
             did
             withstand
             her
             doctrine
             ,
             till
             Berengers
             time
             ,
             whom
             Pope
             Nicolas
             the
             2.
             compelled
             to
             recant
             by
             force
             ,
             in
             the
             yeare
             1059.
             
             And
             euer
             since
             the
             Popes
             haue
             persecuted
             such
             as
             haue
             maintained
             the
             same
             doctrine
             .
             If
             then
             you
             adde
             the
             630
             yeares
             to
             1059
             yeares
             ,
             you
             shall
             finde
             that
             the
             persecution
             of
             the
             Church
             vnder
             the
             Pope
             ,
             shall
             haue
             an
             end
             in
             the
             yeare
             1689.
             
             This
             tearme
             once
             expired
             ,
             the
             truth
             that
             was
             opprest
             shall
             lift
             vp
             her
             head
             afresh
             ,
             and
             the
             faithfull
             witnesses
             shall
             be
             seene
             to
             stand
             vp
             againe
             ,
             who
             shall
             astonish
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             for
             a
             short
             time
             .
             For
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             telleth
             vs
             vers
             .
             12.
             that
             God
             shall
             take
             them
             vp
             into
             heauen
             with
             evident
             signes
             that
             hee
             hath
             gathered
             them
             vnto
             himselfe
             ,
             and
             these●
             
             signes
             shal
             be
             made
             manifest
             euen
             to
             their
             very
             enimies
             .
          
           
             At
             this
             time
             the
             people
             shall
             be
             much
             moued
             ,
             for
             this
             is
             signified
             by
             the
             earthquake
             .
             In
             this
             commotion
             ,
             affrightment
             ,
             &
             dissention
             of
             the
             people
             ,
             the
             tenth
             part
             of
             the
             men
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             shall
             be
             slaine
             ,
             which
             number
             is
             exprest
             by
             the
             number
             of
             7000
             ,
             according
             to
             a
             fashion
             of
             speech
             vsuall
             in
             Scripture
             ,
             which
             by
             7000
             men
             vnderstands
             a
             greater
             number
             then
             can
             be
             conceaued
             ,
             as
             when
             Elias
             thought
             that
             he
             had
             beene
             the
             only
             faithfull
             man
             that
             was
             left
             in
             Israel
             ,
             God
             told
             him
             that
             he
             had
             7000
             left
             yet
             ,
             
               which
               never
               bowed
               the
               knee
               to
               Baal
               ,
            
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             a
             greater
             number
             then
             he
             could
             imagin
             .
             At
             the
             sight
             of
             which
             plagues
             many
             being
             stricken
             with
             amazement
             ,
             shall
             turne
             vnto
             God
             and
             giue
             him
             the
             glory
             .
          
           
             By
             all
             that
             which
             hath
             beene
             formerly
             said
             ,
             it
             appeares
             that
             we
             at
             this
             time
             liue
             in
             the
             last
             half
             day
             of
             these
             three
             last
             daies
             and
             a
             halfe
             of
             persecution
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             time
             also
             that
             goes
             next
             to
             the
             sound
             of
             the
             last
             trumpet
             ,
             that
             is
             spoken
             of
             in
             the
             15
             verse
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             the
             seaventh
             &
             last
             execution
             of
             Gods
             iudgementes
             ,
             which
             
             shall
             goe
             before
             the
             day
             of
             iudgement
             .
             
             But
             if
             you
             divide
             the
             time
             from
             the
             death
             of
             Christ
             vntil
             the
             yeare
             1689
             ,
             into
             six
             equall
             parts
             (
             for
             every
             trumpet
             hath
             a
             certaine
             space
             of
             time
             )
             you
             shall
             knowe
             how
             many
             yeares
             the
             seaventh
             trumpet
             must
             take
             vp
             .
             And
             if
             you
             compare
             the
             whole
             summe
             with
             that
             which
             wee
             haue
             said
             in
             the
             exposition
             of
             the
             13
             Chapt.
             vpon
             the
             5
             verse
             ,
             you
             shal
             find
             great
             agreement
             betweene
             them
             ,
             and
             in
             probabilitie
             gather
             the
             time
             well
             ▪
             neere
             of
             the
             comming
             of
             our
             Saviour
             ,
             the
             sonne
             of
             God
             ,
             blessed
             for
             ever
             .
          
           
             There
             remaines
             one
             difficultie
             to
             cleer
             concerning
             these
             two
             witnesses
             ,
             which
             our
             adversaries
             say
             are
             Enoch
             and
             Elias
             ,
             whome
             they
             would
             haue
             to
             returne
             into
             the
             world
             againe
             to
             withstand
             Antichrist
             ,
             and
             to
             preach
             ,
             one
             to
             the
             Gentiles
             ,
             the
             other
             to
             the
             Iewes
             ,
             for
             this
             is
             the
             taske
             that
             they
             haue
             laid
             vpon
             them
             by
             their
             magistral
             authoritie
             without
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             would
             pul
             them
             from
             the
             place
             of
             rest
             where
             they
             abide
             in
             happynesse
             ,
             to
             thrust
             them
             into
             frayes
             ,
             and
             of
             glorious
             and
             immortall
             persons
             ,
             make
             them
             weake
             and
             mortall
             .
             It
             would
             haue
             beene
             hard
             for
             me
             
             to
             haue
             added
             any
             thing
             to
             that
             which
             his
             Maiestie
             of
             England
             hath
             learnedly
             and
             diligently
             noted
             vpon
             this
             question
             ,
             were
             it
             not
             that
             Bellarmine
             and
             Coeffeteau
             go
             to
             snap
             at
             his
             discourse
             ,
             and
             being
             not
             able
             to
             say
             any
             thing
             of
             themselues
             ,
             take
             delight
             only
             in
             contradicting
             .
             This
             therfore
             deserues
             to
             be
             examined
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Translation
             of
             Enoch
             and
             Elias
             .
             Of
             the
             place
             where
             they
             are
             .
             Who
             these
             two
             witnesses
             be
             .
             The
             booke
             of
             the
             King
             defended
             against
             false
             calumnies
             .
          
           
             Moyses
             in
             the
             5.
             chapt
             .
             of
             Genesis
             saith
             ,
             that
             
               Enoch
               having
               lived
            
             365
             years
             (
             which
             is
             a
             yeare
             of
             yeares
             )
             
               was
               seene
               no
               more
               ,
               for
               God
               tooke
               him
               away
               .
            
             This
             translation
             of
             Enoch
             being
             done
             in
             the
             body
             ,
             did
             exempt
             him
             from
             death
             ,
             as
             the
             Apostle
             saith
             in
             the
             epistle
             to
             the
             Hebrewes
             ,
             chap.
             11.
             v.
             5.
             
             
               Enoch
               was
               translated
               that
               hee
               should
               not
               see
               death
               ,
               neither
               was
               he
               found
               ,
               for
               God
               had
               translated
               him
               .
            
          
           
             The
             like
             befell
             Elias
             in
             the
             2.
             chapt
             .
             of
             the
             2.
             booke
             of
             Kings
             ,
             where
             he
             is
             rapt
             vp
             
             to
             heauen
             in
             a
             whirlewinde
             .
          
           
             This
             seemes
             to
             me
             to
             haue
             fallen
             out
             ,
             by
             the
             secret
             counsell
             of
             the
             wisdome
             of
             God.
             For
             as
             the
             world
             is
             diuided
             into
             3.
             ages
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             into
             the
             time
             before
             the
             law
             ,
             into
             the
             time
             vnder
             the
             law
             ,
             and
             into
             the
             time
             vnder
             the
             gospell
             ,
             so
             it
             pleased
             God
             that
             in
             every
             one
             of
             these
             ages
             there
             should
             one
             man
             be
             taken
             vp
             to
             heauen
             in
             his
             body
             ,
             Enoch
             before
             the
             law
             ,
             Elias
             vnder
             the
             law
             ,
             
               Iesus
               Christ
            
             vnder
             the
             Gospel
             ;
             to
             the
             end
             that
             the
             souls
             of
             the
             Saints
             that
             liued
             either
             before
             the
             law
             ,
             or
             vnder
             the
             law
             ,
             or
             vnder
             the
             gospell
             ,
             and
             are
             now
             in
             heauen
             ,
             should
             haue
             a
             man
             in
             that
             age
             of
             theirs
             that
             should
             be
             an
             image
             of
             the
             future
             estate
             after
             the
             day
             of
             iudgement
             ,
             and
             a
             pledge
             of
             the
             resurrection
             of
             the
             bodie
             .
             For
             euen
             as
             Moyses
             and
             Elias
             did
             appeare
             vnto
             Iesus
             Christ
             on
             the
             mountaine
             ,
             for
             to
             signifie
             that
             the
             law
             and
             the
             gospell
             gaue
             testimony
             vnto
             him
             (
             as
             the
             King
             hath
             excellent
             well
             noted
             in
             his
             booke
             )
             so
             I
             am
             perswaded
             that
             these
             3
             were
             as
             so
             manie
             witnesses
             of
             the
             resurrection
             vnto
             the
             Saints
             that
             liued
             before
             the
             law
             ,
             vnder
             the
             law
             ,
             and
             vnder
             the
             gospell
             .
          
           
             To
             these
             two
             seruants
             of
             God
             ,
             Enoch
             
             and
             Elias
             ,
             the
             curious
             spirits
             of
             men
             haue
             assigned
             diuers
             habitations
             .
             There
             bee
             some
             that
             lodge
             them
             in
             the
             aire
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             place
             that
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             hath
             appointed
             for
             the
             diuels
             ,
             Eph.
             2.
             v.
             2.
             
             Others
             thinke
             to
             pleasure
             them
             more
             by
             making
             them
             to
             be
             in
             an
             earthly
             paradise
             ,
             which
             (
             as
             they
             say
             )
             is
             sixteene
             cubits
             higher
             thē
             the
             highest
             hils
             ,
             that
             so
             it
             may
             be
             one
             cubit
             
             higher
             then
             the
             flowd
             .
             And
             it
             is
             credible
             that
             Enoch
             (
             which
             as
             then
             was
             there
             all
             alone
             )
             seeing
             the
             waters
             to
             come
             with
             in
             a
             cubit
             of
             his
             feet
             ,
             thought
             himselfe
             not
             sufficiently
             secured
             .
             All
             these
             are
             fables
             that
             smell
             of
             the
             Iewish
             Cabalisticall
             traditions
             ,
             which
             it
             hath
             pleased
             our
             aduersaries
             to
             follow
             in
             this
             point
             ,
             and
             which
             Moyses
             hath
             cleerely
             confuted
             .
             For
             he
             describes
             the
             garden
             of
             Eden
             to
             be
             in
             Mesopotamia
             ,
             and
             makes
             the
             riuer
             Euphrates
             to
             passe
             thorough
             it
             ,
             painting
             out
             the
             course
             that
             it
             runs
             ,
             and
             naming
             the
             coūtries
             that
             it
             scoures
             ,
             and
             the
             nature
             of
             the
             land
             is
             set
             downe
             by
             him
             ,
             in
             that
             hee
             saith
             that
             it
             yeelds
             Gold
             and
             Bdeliū
             ,
             and
             Onyx
             stone
             :
             which
             are
             most
             certaine
             proofes
             that
             hee
             speaks
             not
             of
             any
             fantasticall
             regiō
             .
             Now
             there
             are
             none
             but
             know
             that
             Mesopotamia
             
             is
             a
             plaine
             even
             country
             and
             that
             the
             riuers
             do
             alwaies
             overflow
             the
             vallies
             and
             lowest
             places
             .
             Whence
             it
             followes
             that
             if
             the
             deluge
             did
             couer
             the
             highest
             hils
             ,
             by
             a
             farre
             greater
             reason
             must
             it
             couer
             ,
             and
             wast
             the
             champion
             of
             Mesopotamia
             .
          
           
             All
             this
             overbusie
             curiosity
             of
             this
             people
             ,
             proceeds
             from
             their
             neglecting
             to
             read
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             which
             decides
             this
             question
             saying
             in
             expresse
             tearmes
             ,
             that
             ,
             
               Elias
               went
               vp
               by
               a
               whirlewind
               into
               heaven
               .
            
             He
             was
             therefore
             taken
             vp
             ▪
             into
             heaven
             ,
             and
             there
             is
             no
             reason
             to
             place
             Enoch
             any
             where
             else
             ,
             since
             that
             he
             was
             equally
             translated
             in
             body
             .
             But
             if
             the
             faithfull
             that
             are
             in
             heaven
             be
             with
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             Iohn
             17.
             v.
             24.
             
             Philip.
             1.
             v.
             23.
             
             Why
             should
             these
             so
             excellent
             servants
             of
             God
             ,
             haue
             an
             inferiour
             blessednesse
             allotted
             vnto
             them
             ?
             this
             translation
             had
             beene
             no
             favour
             done
             vnto
             them
             ,
             but
             a
             punnishment
             .
             But
             if
             the
             thiefe
             crucified
             with
             Iesus
             Christ
             entred
             into
             Paradise
             40
             daies
             before
             the
             ascension
             of
             our
             Lord
             ,
             what
             should
             hinder
             but
             that
             Enoch
             and
             Elias
             might
             haue
             free
             accesse
             into
             the
             same
             place
             before
             his
             ascension
             ?
             Iesus
             Christ
             I
             confesse
             saith
             in
             the
             3
             of
             
               S.
               Iohn
               ,
               v.
            
             13.
             
             
               No
               man
               ascendeth
               vp
               to
               heauen
               ,
               
               but
               he
               that
               hath
               descended
               from
               heaven
               ,
               the
               sonne
               of
               man
               that
               is
               in
               heavē
               .
            
             But
             he
             speaks
             according
             to
             the
             Hebrew
             fashion
             ,
             which
             by
             going
             vp
             into
             heauen
             ,
             and
             descending
             downe
             thence
             ,
             vnderstand
             ,
             the
             bringing
             of
             the
             knowledge
             of
             heavenly
             thinges
             to
             men
             from
             on
             high
             :
             and
             so
             doth
             the
             Apostle
             take
             it
             in
             the
             10
             to
             the
             Romans
             .
             ver
             .
             6.
             as
             it
             appeares
             by
             the
             drift
             of
             the
             discourse
             .
             Iesus
             Christ
             therefore
             in
             this
             place
             meanes
             to
             tell
             Nicodemus
             only
             thus
             much
             ,
             that
             none
             can
             bring
             vs
             the
             knowledge
             of
             heavenly
             things
             ,
             but
             only
             the
             sonne
             of
             man
             that
             came
             downe
             from
             heauen
             .
             Nor
             may
             we
             thinke
             it
             strange
             that
             God
             gaue
             them
             a
             speciall
             priuiledge
             to
             be
             exempted
             from
             death
             ,
             since
             that
             the
             scripture
             pronounceth
             as
             much
             not
             only
             of
             Enoch
             ,
             but
             also
             of
             all
             those
             that
             shall
             liue
             vpon
             the
             earth
             at
             the
             comming
             of
             our
             Lord.
             For
             seeing
             that
             all
             the
             Saints
             doe
             already
             stand
             possest
             of
             heavenly
             glory
             ,
             what
             haue
             these
             two
             committed
             ,
             that
             they
             only
             should
             be
             shut
             out
             thence
             ,
             and
             kept
             in
             a
             place
             of
             expectation
             apart
             ,
             to
             be
             subiect
             to
             death
             stil
             ?
             And
             besides
             I
             would
             knowe
             of
             M.
             Co●ffetau
             ▪
             if
             hee
             would
             make
             a
             conscienee
             to
             invoke
             Enoch
             and
             Elias
             ;
             if
             he
             do
             invoke
             thē
             ,
             
             he
             presupposeth
             that
             they
             doe
             already
             enioy
             the
             presence
             of
             God
             ,
             if
             he
             doe
             not
             ,
             hee
             sinneth
             against
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             ,
             which
             in
             their
             Letanies
             call
             vpon
             all
             the
             Prophets
             and
             Patriarchs
             in
             generall
             .
          
           
             Since
             then
             that
             their
             abode
             is
             in
             heauē
             with
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             let
             vs
             see
             what
             reason
             these
             men
             haue
             to
             pull
             them
             out
             thence
             ,
             for
             to
             make
             them
             come
             downe
             vpon
             the
             earth
             againe
             ,
             and
             condemne
             them
             to
             die
             .
          
           
             As
             concerning
             Enoch
             our
             adversaries
             produce
             no
             place
             out
             of
             the
             Canonicall
             Scriptures
             ,
             only
             they
             allege
             Ecclesiasticus
             in
             the
             44
             chapt
             .
             v.
             16.
             a
             passage
             that
             runs
             thus
             according
             to
             the
             Greek
             which
             is
             the
             Originall
             .
             
             
               Enoch
               pleased
               the
               Lord
               God
               ,
               therefore
               was
               hee
               translated
               for
               an
               example
               of
               repentance
               to
               the
               generations
               .
            
             Is
             there
             ever
             a
             word
             in
             all
             this
             either
             of
             the
             translation
             of
             Enoch
             into
             an
             earthly
             paradise
             ,
             or
             of
             his
             returning
             hither
             to
             fight
             with
             Antichrist
             ?
             Therefore
             Bellarmine
             thought
             it
             better
             to
             alleage
             the
             common
             translation
             cleane
             contrary
             to
             the
             Text
             ,
             which
             hath
             translated
             it
             falsly
             ,
             after
             this
             manner
             .
             b
             
               Enoch
               pleased
               God
               ,
               and
               was
               translated
               into
               Paradice
               to
               giue
               repentance
               to
               the
               Gentiles
               .
            
             The
             word
             Paradice
             ,
             and
             the
             word
             Gentils
             
             are
             falsly
             thrust
             in
             ;
             &
             yet
             when
             all
             is
             done
             we
             must
             bee
             faine
             to
             suppose
             that
             this
             Paradise
             is
             earthly
             .
             Let
             the
             reader
             iudge
             whether
             this
             opinion
             be
             not
             built
             vpon
             good
             grounds
             ,
             which
             hath
             nothing
             brought
             to
             maintaine
             it
             ,
             but
             only
             a
             false
             passage
             ,
             and
             that
             out
             of
             an
             Apocryphall
             booke
             too
             .
             These
             people
             therefore
             doe
             much
             wrong
             to
             Enoch
             in
             keeping
             him
             5000
             yeares
             frō
             the
             presence
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             stripping
             him
             of
             his
             immortalitie
             ,
             to
             send
             him
             downe
             hither
             for
             to
             be
             slaine
             by
             Antichrist
             ,
             as
             if
             God
             had
             not
             other
             men
             enough
             in
             that
             age
             to
             employ
             .
             Nor
             may
             we
             omit
             ,
             that
             the
             men
             which
             liued
             before
             the
             floud
             ,
             were
             giants
             ,
             and
             that
             our
             stature
             is
             dwarfish
             in
             respect
             of
             theirs
             :
             if
             Enoch
             therefore
             should
             come
             into
             the
             world
             in
             his
             old
             stature
             ,
             he
             would
             be
             thought
             a
             kind
             of
             monster
             ,
             and
             men
             would
             bee
             frighted
             with
             the
             bignesse
             of
             his
             personage
             .
          
           
             The
             fable
             of
             Enoch
             being
             once
             confuted
             ,
             that
             of
             Elias
             vanisheth
             with
             the
             same
             breath
             ;
             for
             these
             squires
             must
             of
             necessitie
             seeke
             elsewhere
             for
             their
             two
             witnesses
             if
             one
             of
             them
             faile
             :
             neuerthelesse
             let
             vs
             see
             that
             which
             they
             produce
             for
             Elias
             .
          
           
             They
             finde
             these
             wordes
             at
             the
             end
             of
             
             
             
               Malachie
               .
               Behold
               I
               go
               hence
               to
               send
               Eliah
               the
               prophet
               before
               the
               comming
               of
               the
               great
               and
               fearefull
               day
               of
               the
               Lord.
               And
               hee
               shall
               turne
               the
               harts
               of
               the
               fathers
               to
               the
               childrē
               ,
               &
               the
               harts
               of
               the
               children
               to
               their
               fathers
               ,
               least
               I
               come
               &
               smite
               the
               earth
               with
               cursing
               .
            
             To
             this
             the
             King
             answeres
             that
             there
             is
             no
             better
             interpreter
             of
             Malachies
             wordes
             then
             Iesus
             Christ
             himselfe
             ,
             who
             doth
             assure
             vs
             that
             this
             Elias
             promised
             by
             Malachie
             is
             
               Iohn
               Baptist.
            
             If
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             
               yee
               will
               receiue
               my
               saying
               ,
               this
               is
               that
               Elias
               which
               was
               to
               come
               ,
               Mat.
            
             11.14
             .
             And
             yet
             more
             plainly
             in
             the
             17.
             chapt
             .
             he
             hauing
             said
             that
             Elias
             was
             already
             come
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             did
             not
             know
             him
             ;
             
               S.
               Matthew
            
             addes
             that
             his
             disciples
             vnderstood
             him
             to
             speak
             of
             
               Iohn
               Baptist.
            
             Iesus
             Christ
             indeed
             had
             saide
             before
             that
             
               Elias
               must
               come
            
             ,
             speaking
             in
             this
             (
             as
             the
             King
             hath
             well
             noted
             )
             according
             to
             the
             common
             opinion
             ,
             but
             to
             the
             ende
             that
             this
             might
             not
             be
             vnderstood
             of
             any
             other
             but
             
               Iohn
               Baptist
            
             ,
             he
             annexeth
             immediatly
             ,
             
               But
               I
               say
               vnto
               you
               that
               Elias
               is
               already
               come
               ,
               &
               they
               haue
               not
               knowne
               him
               .
            
             Good
             cause
             therefore
             had
             his
             Maiestie
             to
             accuse
             Bellarmine
             of
             falshood
             ,
             for
             alleaging
             these
             words
             of
             Christ
             ,
             
               Elias
               shal
               come
            
             
             without
             alleaging
             the
             words
             that
             follow
             ,
             
               But
               I
               say
               vnto
               you
               that
               Elias
               is
               already
               come
               .
            
          
           
             Now
             here
             the
             point
             of
             the
             question
             is
             ,
             whether
             Malachie
             and
             the
             Apostles
             obiecting
             to
             Christ
             that
             Elias
             must
             come
             ,
             do
             speake
             of
             an
             Elias
             that
             must
             goe
             before
             the
             first
             ,
             or
             second
             comming
             of
             our
             Saviour
             .
             As
             for
             Malachie
             hee
             begins
             this
             discourse
             from
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             3
             chapt
             .
             in
             these
             words
             .
             
               Behold
               I
               goe
               hence
               to
               send
               my
               messenger
               ,
               and
               hee
               shall
               prepare
               the
               way
               before
               me
               ,
               and
               the
               Lord
               whom
               yee
               seeke
               shall
               speedily
               come
               to
               his
               Temple
               .
            
             Wordes
             that
             cannot
             agree
             to
             the
             second
             comming
             of
             Christ
             ,
             when
             hee
             shall
             neede
             no
             preparing
             of
             his
             way
             ,
             &
             the
             earth
             shall
             thē
             be
             his
             temple
             no
             more
             .
             This
             appeares
             also
             out
             of
             the
             7.
             chapt
             .
             where
             Malachie
             saith
             that
             this
             
               Elias
               shal
               turne
               the
               hearts
               of
               the
               fathers
               vnto
               the
               childrē
               ,
            
             which
             are
             the
             very
             words
             of
             the
             
             Angell
             vnto
             Zachary
             declaring
             the
             office
             of
             his
             sonne
             .
             To
             the
             same
             purpose
             also
             serue
             these
             words
             ,
             
               For
               feare
               least
               I
               come
               and
               smite
               the
               earth
               .
            
             For
             how
             can
             it
             be
             said
             that
             these
             two
             witnesses
             shall
             come
             for
             to
             hinder
             the
             comming
             of
             Christ
             to
             iudgement
             ,
             and
             to
             keepe
             him
             
             from
             smiting
             the
             earth
             ?
             Seeing
             that
             his
             comming
             is
             inevitable
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             faithfull
             shall
             long
             for
             it
             ?
             &
             pray
             that
             the
             kingdome
             of
             God
             may
             come
             ,
             saying
             with
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             Apoc.
             22.20
             .
             
               Even
               so
               ,
               come
               Lorde
               Iesus
               .
            
          
           
             As
             for
             the
             17.
             chapt
             .
             of
             
               S.
               Matthew
            
             ,
             it
             is
             manifest
             that
             the
             second
             cōming
             of
             Christ
             is
             not
             meant
             in
             that
             place
             ,
             but
             onlie
             the
             first
             .
             For
             the
             Apostles
             either
             ravisht
             with
             the
             glory
             of
             his
             transfiguration
             ,
             or
             rather
             perswaded
             by
             the
             many
             powerfull
             miracles
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             to
             beleeue
             that
             hee
             was
             the
             Messias
             ,
             neverthelesse
             found
             thēselues
             vnable
             to
             solue
             the
             obiectiō
             of
             the
             Scribes
             ,
             which
             did
             proue
             that
             Christ
             was
             not
             the
             Messias
             by
             this
             argument
             ,
             because
             that
             Elias
             was
             not
             yet
             come
             .
             Doubtlesse
             these
             Scribes
             did
             not
             contest
             about
             the
             day
             of
             iudgement
             ,
             but
             about
             the
             manifestation
             of
             the
             promised
             Messias
             ,
             which
             (
             as
             they
             thought
             )
             was
             not
             yet
             come
             .
          
           
             To
             this
             they
             oppose
             the
             words
             of
             Malachie
             ,
             which
             calleth
             this
             day
             
               a
               great
               and
               fearefull
               day
            
             ▪
             which
             seemes
             ill
             befitting
             the
             gentlenesse
             ,
             and
             humilitie
             of
             Christs
             first
             comming
             .
             His
             Maiesties
             answer
             is
             that
             the
             day
             of
             the
             Lords
             passion
             was
             full
             of
             horror
             
             and
             astonishment
             .
             The
             sun
             was
             darkned
             ,
             the
             vaile
             of
             the
             Temple
             was
             rent
             ,
             the
             earth
             trembled
             ,
             the
             stones
             were
             cloven
             ,
             the
             monuments
             were
             opened
             ,
             the
             dead
             were
             raised
             .
             Or
             wee
             may
             say
             that
             the
             first
             comming
             of
             the
             Messias
             although
             it
             were
             in
             humilitie
             ,
             was
             yet
             for
             all
             that
             very
             fearfull
             .
             For
             hee
             was
             sent
             to
             bee
             a
             stumbling
             blocke
             vnto
             many
             ,
             and
             drew
             a
             totall
             destruction
             vpon
             the
             Iewes
             .
             God
             a
             little
             after
             (
             according
             to
             the
             prediction
             of
             Malachie
             )
             hauing
             smitten
             their
             land
             as
             accursed
             .
             Besides
             we
             find
             that
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             
               iom
               hunnora
            
             in
             Hebrew
             may
             signifie
             an
             wonderfull
             and
             honourable
             day
             as
             well
             as
             a
             terrible
             day
             .
             Aretas
             in
             the
             30.
             chap.
             of
             his
             cōmentarie
             vpon
             the
             Apocalyps
             ,
             turnes
             it
             ,
             
               dies
               Domini
               magnus
               &
               manifestus
            
             ,
             and
             the
             translation
             of
             the
             Septuagint
             renders
             it
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               diem
               Domini
               magnam
               &
               illustrem
            
             .
          
           
             The
             passage
             that
             is
             alleaged
             out
             of
             the
             48
             of
             
               Ecclesiasticus
               .
               vers
            
             .
             10.
             is
             of
             no
             force
             ,
             for
             the
             booke
             is
             Apocryphall
             ,
             &
             the
             translator
             thereof
             craues
             pardon
             in
             the
             Prologue
             if
             hee
             hath
             chanced
             in
             some
             places
             not
             to
             expresse
             his
             Authors
             meaning
             so
             significantly
             .
             And
             yet
             the
             place
             is
             falsly
             alleaged
             
             too
             .
             Behold
             the
             true
             here
             ;
             
               Elias
               was
               appointed
               to
               reproue
               in
               due
               season
               ,
            
             
             
               &
               to
               pacifie
               the
               wrath
               of
               the
               Lords
               iudgement
               before
               it
               kindled
               ,
               and
               to
               turne
               the
               hearts
               of
               the
               fathers
               vnto
               the
               children
               ,
               and
               to
               set
               vp
               the
               tribes
               of
               Iacob
               .
            
             Where
             is
             there
             in
             al
             this
             the
             least
             word
             of
             comming
             backe
             into
             the
             world
             ,
             of
             being
             slaine
             ,
             or
             of
             fighting
             with
             Antichrist
             ?
             To
             be
             short
             ,
             although
             all
             that
             they
             faine
             of
             the
             returning
             of
             Elias
             were
             true
             ,
             yet
             this
             makes
             nothing
             for
             the
             two
             witnesses
             ,
             till
             they
             haue
             proued
             as
             much
             of
             Enoch
             ,
             of
             whome
             they
             haue
             nothing
             at
             all
             to
             say
             .
          
           
             In
             one
             thing
             they
             cannot
             choose
             but
             be
             much
             cumbred
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             in
             this
             ,
             when
             they
             say
             that
             these
             two
             witnesses
             shall
             bee
             sent
             to
             fight
             with
             Antichrist
             for
             the
             space
             of
             three
             yeares
             and
             an
             halfe
             ,
             at
             the
             ende
             of
             which
             ,
             Antichrist
             shall
             slay
             them
             .
             By
             this
             reckoning
             Antichrist
             must
             be
             in
             the
             world
             before
             them
             ,
             and
             stay
             in
             the
             world
             after
             them
             ,
             yea
             &
             be
             in
             the
             heigth
             of
             his
             strēgth
             after
             he
             hath
             slaine
             them
             ,
             seeing
             that
             there
             by
             he
             shall
             become
             victorious
             .
             And
             by
             a
             consequent
             he
             must
             be
             in
             the
             world
             aboue
             three
             yeares
             and
             a
             halfe
             ;
             what
             becomes
             then
             of
             their
             assertion
             ,
             wherein
             they
             affirme
             
             that
             Antichrist
             shall
             continue
             but
             3
             yeares
             and
             a
             halfe
             ?
             Surely
             it
             must
             needes
             be
             that
             these
             two
             witnesses
             and
             Antichrist
             must
             come
             into
             the
             world
             in
             the
             same
             day
             and
             die
             in
             the
             same
             day
             .
          
           
             The
             fathers
             are
             of
             divers
             opinions
             concerning
             this
             ,
             and
             resolue
             vpon
             nothing
             certainely
             .
             *
             
               S.
               Austin
            
             in
             his
             8.
             homily
             vpon
             the
             Apocalyps
             ,
             
               I
               will
               giue
               vnto
               my
               two
               witnesses
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               vnto
               the
               two
               Testaments
               :
            
             and
             a
             little
             after
             .
             
               The
               two
               Candlesticks
               are
               the
               Church
               ,
               but
               according
               to
               the
               number
               of
               the
               testaments
               .
               Primasius
            
             saith
             the
             same
             in
             his
             3.
             book
             ,
             &
             Beda
             vpon
             the
             Apocalyps
             .
             Lactantius
             in
             the
             17.
             chap.
             of
             his
             7.
             booke
             (
             after
             many
             fancies
             with
             which
             that
             book
             is
             stuft
             )
             saith
             ,
             that
             towards
             the
             last
             times
             there
             shall
             come
             a
             great
             Prophet
             ,
             which
             must
             be
             slain
             
               by
               a
               king
               that
               came
               out
               of
               Syria
               ,
               &
               was
               begotten
               by
               the
               Divell
               .
            
             For
             a
             Bellarmine
             belyes
             Lactantius
             when
             hee
             maketh
             him
             to
             say
             that
             Elias
             shall
             come
             againe
             .
             Hilarie
             in
             the
             20
             Canon
             of
             his
             cōmentarie
             vpon
             
               S.
               Matthew
            
             ,
             recites
             divers
             opinions
             of
             his
             time
             ,
             in
             these
             words
             .
             b
             
               Iesus
               
               appeared
               in
               the
               forme
               of
               his
               glory
               vpon
               the
               mount
               ,
               Moyses
               and
               Elias
               accompanying
               him
               .
               And
               these
               are
               the
               two
               prophets
               (
               as
               wee
               conceaue
               )
               which
               must
               come
               before
               his
               comming
               ,
               and
               which
               the
               Apocalyps
               of
               S.
               Iohn
               telleth
               vs
               ,
               must
               be
               slaine
               by
               Antichrist
               ,
               albeit
               there
               haue
               beene
               divers
               opinions
               of
               many
               ,
               touching
               Enoch
               ,
               or
               Ieremie
               ,
               one
               of
               which
               must
               die
               as
               Elias
               .
               Irenie
            
             in
             his
             5
             booke
             saith
             that
             Elias
             and
             Enoch
             were
             translated
             into
             Paradise
             ,
             
               &
               ibi
               manere
               vsque
               ad
               consummationem
               conspicantes
               incorruptionem
               :
               and
               that
               they
               remaine
               there
               till
               the
               ende
               of
               the
               world
               ,
               beholding
               incorruption
               .
            
             If
             they
             remaine
             in
             Paradise
             still
             vntill
             the
             ende
             or
             consummation
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             
             they
             shall
             not
             come
             down
             hither
             vpon
             earth
             to
             fight
             with
             Antichrist
             before
             the
             consummation
             thereof
             .
             This
             is
             his
             Maiesties
             observation
             of
             England
             ,
             and
             is
             most
             fit
             to
             the
             purpose
             .
             Tertullian
             in
             the
             1.
             
             Chap.
             of
             his
             booke
             against
             the
             Iewes
             ,
             saith
             that
             ,
             
               Enoch
               an
               vpright
               man
               ,
               was
               translated
               by
               God
               ,
               although
               he
               were
               not
               circumcised
               ,
               neither
               yet
               did
               obserue
               the
               sabbaoth
               ,
               who
               hath
               not
               to
               this
               day
               tasted
               of
               death
               ,
               to
               the
               end
               that
               hee
               which
               did
               aspire
               to
               eternitie
               ,
               might
               shew
               vnto
               vs
               that
               we
               might
               please
               God
               without
               the
               burden
               of
               
               Moyses
               law
               .
            
             A
             passage
             which
             Bellarmine
             clips
             in
             the
             6.
             chap.
             of
             his
             3
             booke
             
               de
               Pontifice
            
             ,
             where
             hee
             seemes
             not
             to
             vnderstand
             the
             place
             well
             :
             for
             Tertullian
             calls
             
               Enoch
               aeternitatis
               candidatum
            
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             one
             that
             did
             aspire
             to
             eternitie
             ,
             not
             because
             he
             aspires
             vnto
             it
             now
             ,
             but
             because
             hee
             aspired
             vnto
             it
             ,
             whilst
             hee
             lived
             here
             vpon
             the
             earth
             .
             For
             the
             intent
             of
             Tertullian
             is
             to
             make
             it
             appeare
             vnto
             the
             Iewes
             ,
             that
             a
             mā
             may
             attaine
             vnto
             eternall
             life
             without
             the
             Ceremonies
             of
             the
             law
             ,
             by
             the
             example
             of
             Enoch
             which
             without
             ever
             keeping
             of
             these
             ,
             did
             not
             desist
             to
             aspire
             to
             immortality
             ;
             And
             wheras
             he
             saith
             that
             he
             is
             not
             as
             yet
             dead
             ,
             this
             doth
             not
             enforce
             that
             hee
             must
             die
             ,
             no
             more
             then
             if
             I
             should
             say
             that
             the
             divel
             hath
             not
             as
             yet
             destroied
             the
             church
             or
             that
             there
             could
             no
             lie
             as
             yet
             bee
             found
             in
             the
             Gospell
             ,
             doth
             inferre
             that
             either
             of
             these
             two
             things
             must
             come
             to
             passe
             .
             *
             
               S.
               Hierome
            
             to
             Pammachius
             against
             the
             errors
             of
             Iohn
             of
             Ierusalem
             ,
             
               Enoch
               was
               translated
               in
               the
               flesh
               ,
               Elias
               was
               rapt
               vp
               to
               heaven
               in
               the
               flesh
               :
               being
               not
               as
               yet
               dead
               ,
               they
               are
               already
               made
               inhabitants
               of
               Paradise
               .
               They
               haue
               the
               same
               members
               with
               which
               they
               were
               taken
               vp
               and
               translated
               .
               That
               
               which
               we
               imitate
               by
               fasting
               ,
               they
               enioy
               by
               their
               coniunction
               with
               God.
            
             Note
             that
             they
             are
             in
             heaven
             ,
             and
             ioyned
             with
             God
             ,
             contrary
             to
             our
             adversaries
             tenent
             .
             As
             also
             that
             they
             are
             
               already
               in
               Paradise
            
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             condition
             of
             others
             is
             such
             that
             they
             cannot
             be
             there
             in
             body
             till
             after
             the
             day
             of
             iudgement
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             that
             none
             might
             imagine
             that
             hee
             speaks
             of
             an
             earthly
             Paradise
             .
             Aretas
             in
             the
             29.
             chapt
             .
             of
             his
             commentarie
             vpon
             the
             Apocalyps
             ,
             vpon
             these
             words
             of
             the
             Angel
             to
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             ,
             a
             
               Thou
               must
               prophecie
               againe
            
             ,
             b
             saith
             ,
             that
             many
             were
             of
             opinion
             that
             S.
             Iohn
             liveth
             vntil
             the
             end
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             shal
             come
             in
             the
             time
             of
             Antichrist
             with
             Enoch
             and
             
               Elias
               .
               Hippolytus
               Martyr
            
             saith
             the
             same
             in
             his
             book
             
               de
               consummatione
               seculi
            
             ;
             To
             be
             briefe
             ,
             there
             is
             nothing
             more
             divers
             ,
             then
             they
             are
             in
             their
             opinions
             .
          
           
             Our
             aduersaries
             themselues
             disagree
             about
             this
             .
             
               Arias
               Montanus
            
             speakes
             after
             this
             manner
             vpon
             the
             4
             of
             Malachie
             :
             
             
               The
               ancient
               Scribes
               by
               this
               great
               and
               fearefull
               day
               did
               wisely
               vnderstand
               ,
               not
               the
               day
               of
               the
               last
               iudgement
               ,
               but
               the
               time
               of
               the
               comming
               of
               the
               Messias
               :
               which
               interpretatiō
               of
               theirs
               was
               approved
               off
               ,
               and
               confirmed
               by
               Christ
               in
               
               the
            
             17.
             
               of
               Matthew
               .
               Bellarmin
            
             in
             the
             6.
             chapt
             .
             of
             his
             3.
             book
             
               de
               Pontifice
            
             ,
             wonders
             what
             Iansenius
             bishop
             of
             Gaunt
             dreamt
             off
             ,
             when
             he
             said
             that
             the
             comming
             of
             Elias
             againe
             into
             the
             worlde
             could
             not
             bee
             gathered
             out
             of
             the
             48.
             chapt
             .
             and
             10.
             ver
             .
             of
             Ecclesiasticus
             .
             The
             Iesuit
             b
             Maldonate
             in
             his
             commentarie
             vpon
             the
             17.
             of
             
               Saint
               Matthew
            
             saith
             ,
             
               that
               it
               is
               so
               cleere
               a
               case
               that
               Moyses
               and
               Elias
               must
               come
               ,
               that
               no
               man
               can
               deny
               it
               not
               only
               without
               being
               rash
               ,
               but
               also
               without
               being
               impudent
               .
            
             In
             the
             iudgement
             of
             this
             Iesuit
             ,
             Bellarmin
             is
             impudent
             ,
             seeing
             that
             he
             denies
             that
             Moyses
             shall
             come
             ,
             &
             would
             haue
             it
             to
             be
             Enoch
             .
             The
             Iesuit
             Pererius
             in
             the
             7.
             booke
             of
             his
             commentarie
             vpon
             Genesis
             ,
             in
             the
             disputation
             c
             touching
             Enoch
             doth
             refute
             their
             proofe
             of
             this
             taken
             out
             of
             the
             16
             verse
             of
             the
             44
             of
             Ecclesiasticus
             ,
             and
             expounds
             the
             place
             as
             we
             do
             .
          
           
             The
             cause
             of
             this
             error
             (
             which
             the
             King
             with
             good
             reason
             calleth
             an
             idle
             dreame
             ,
             and
             an
             old
             wiues
             tale
             )
             came
             from
             the
             corrupt
             Greeke
             translatiō
             of
             the
             Septuagint
             ,
             which
             puts
             a
             word
             into
             that
             place
             of
             Malachie
             ,
             which
             is
             not
             in
             the
             Hebrew
             ,
             for
             whereas
             in
             the
             Hebrew
             it
             is
             only
             ,
             
               Beholde
               
               I
               go
               hence
               to
               send
               you
               Elias
               ,
            
             the
             Greek
             trāslation
             turnes
             it
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             A
             translation
             which
             Chrysostome
             followed
             in
             his
             58
             Homilie
             vpon
             
               S.
               Matthew
            
             ,
             and
             which
             made
             him
             to
             be
             of
             the
             opinion
             that
             Elias
             should
             come
             back
             againe
             into
             the
             world
             .
          
           
             This
             matter
             might
             haue
             beene
             ended
             ,
             were
             it
             not
             that
             hereby
             his
             Maiestie
             takes
             an
             occasion
             to
             complaine
             of
             the
             wrongs
             that
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             hath
             done
             vnto
             the
             old
             and
             new
             Testament
             ,
             which
             may
             probably
             be
             thought
             to
             be
             meant
             by
             these
             two
             witnesses
             ,
             seeing
             that
             these
             are
             they
             which
             beare
             witnesse
             of
             Iesus
             Christ.
             The
             Kings
             complaints
             are
             .
             1.
             
             That
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             doth
             revile
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             .
             2.
             
             That
             she
             doth
             prefer
             her
             corrupted
             translation
             before
             the
             Originals
             of
             the
             Greeke
             ,
             and
             Hebrew
             .
             3.
             
             That
             she
             doth
             make
             Apocryphall
             books
             to
             bee
             of
             equall
             authoritie
             with
             the
             Cononical
             .
             4.
             
             That
             she
             doth
             apply
             the
             psalter
             of
             David
             to
             the
             virgin
             Mary
             ,
             by
             putting
             out
             Gods
             name
             ,
             &
             placing
             hers
             insteed
             thereof
             .
             5.
             
             That
             shee
             doth
             deny
             the
             people
             to
             read
             the
             Bible
             ,
             and
             will
             not
             suffer
             it
             to
             be
             translated
             into
             their
             vulgar
             tongue
             ,
             and
             yet
             for
             all
             that
             ,
             
             will
             suffer
             them
             to
             haue
             fabulous
             ,
             and
             ridiculous
             legends
             .
             
          
           
             1
             In
             the
             first
             place
             the
             King
             doth
             challenge
             them
             for
             calling
             the
             Scripture
             
               a
               nose
               of
               wax
               ,
               a
               dead
               letter
               ,
               a
               leaden
               ,
               or
               Lesbian
               rule
               .
               Coeffeteau
            
             aunsweres
             ,
             
               that
               such
               blasphemies
               are
               not
               found
               in
               the
               writings
               of
               the
               Doctours
               that
               they
               approue
               off
               ;
               Bellarmine
            
             on
             the
             contrary
             doth
             confesse
             it
             ,
             but
             saith
             that
             nothing
             else
             is
             meant
             by
             this
             ,
             but
             only
             that
             Hereticks
             do
             make
             the
             scripture
             a
             nose
             of
             wax
             ,
             a
             Lesbian
             rule
             ,
             &c
             which
             is
             refuted
             by
             the
             learned
             Bishop
             of
             Elie
             ,
             in
             his
             answer
             to
             the
             Cardinals
             Apologie
             ,
             where
             he
             cites
             
               Eckius
               ,
               Luthers
               Antagonist
            
             ,
             in
             his
             booke
             
               de
               fide
               &
               iustificatione
            
             ,
             cap.
             73.
             
             a
             
               Tradition
               is
               more
               powerfull
               thē
               the
               Scripture
               ,
            
             and
             in
             the
             same
             book
             .
             b
             
               Tradition
               is
               a
               most
               certaine
               rule
               of
               the
               truth
               ,
               by
               which
               wee
               ought
               to
               examine
               the
               Scriptures
               .
               The
               ende
               that
               moued
               the
               Evangelists
               to
               write
               ,
               was
               not
               because
               they
               would
               haue
               their
               writings
               to
               rule
               over
               religion
               and
               faith
               ,
               but
               rather
               that
               they
               should
               bee
               subiect
               vnto
               it
               .
               Coster
            
             saith
             the
             same
             in
             his
             Enchiridion
             of
             Controuersies
             .
             And
             in
             the
             71.
             chap.
             c
             
               The
               Scriptures
               are
               as
               a
               nose
               of
               wax
               ,
               that
               suffers
               it selfe
               to
               be
               turned
               this
               way
               ,
               and
               that
               way
               ,
            
             
             he
             saith
             
               that
               they
               are
            
             ;
             and
             not
             
               that
               they
               are
               made
               to
               be
               .
            
             He
             alleageth
             Hosius
             also
             ,
             which
             maintaines
             against
             
               Brentius
               ,
               that
               his
               words
               which
               said
               that
               the
               Scriptures
               without
               the
               authoritie
               of
               the
               Church
               are
               no
               more
               to
               be
               esteemed
               then
               Esops
               Fables
               (
               p●tuisse
               pio
               sensu●ici
               )
               might
               bee
               spoken
               in
               a
               godly
               sense
               .
            
             And
             a
             Turrianus
             who
             in
             the
             p.
             250.
             saith
             ,
             that
             
               if
               Christ
               had
               left
               no
               other
               rule
               of
               our
               faith
               then
               the
               Scripture
               ,
               we
               should
               haue
               had
               nothing
               else
               but
               a
               Delphian
               sword
               ,
            
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             
               a
               two
               edged
               sword
               that
               cuts
               vpon
               both
               sides
               .
            
             And
             behold
             here
             some
             of
             Bellarmines
             owne
             words
             (
             which
             are
             little
             better
             )
             in
             his
             4.
             chap.
             and
             b
             4.
             booke
             ,
             
               Of
               the
               word
               not
               written
               ;
               Although
               the
               Scripture
               say
               that
               the
               bookes
               of
               the
               Apostles
               ,
               and
               Prophets
               are
               divine
               ,
               yet
               I
               shall
               never
               beleeue
               it
               assuredly
               ,
               if
               I
               doe
               not
               first
               beleeue
               that
               the
               Scripture
               which
               saith
               this
               ,
               is
               divine
               .
               For
               we
               read
               as
               well
               in
               the
               Alcoran
               that
               the
               Alcorā
               was
               sent
               from
               heaven
               .
            
             This
             Cardinal
             would
             haue
             the
             testimony
             that
             the
             Scripture
             giues
             of
             it selfe
             to
             bee
             no
             more
             credited
             then
             that
             which
             the
             Alcoran
             giues
             of
             it selfe
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             10.
             chap.
             he
             saith
             c
             that
             
               the
               
               Scriptures
               are
               not
               absolutly
               necessary
               ,
            
             and
             in
             the
             seauenth
             chapt
             .
             he
             is
             bold
             to
             affirm
             ,
             
             
               that
               there
               be
               some
               trad●tions
               which
               are
               greater
               then
               some
               of
               the
               Scriptures
               ,
               as
               concerning
               the
               obligation
               ,
            
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             a
             man
             is
             bound
             more
             to
             beleeue
             them
             then
             the
             Scripture
             .
             In
             the
             12.
             
             Chapt.
             b
             
               The
               proper
               and
               principall
               end
               of
               the
               Scripture
               ,
               was
               not
               that
               it
               should
               be
               a
               rule
               of
               faith
               ,
               but
               that
               it
               should
               be
               a
               profitable
               admonition
               to
               make
               men
               entertaine
               the
               doctrine
               of
               preaching
               ,
            
             And
             a
             little
             after
             .
             c
             
               I
               say
               that
               although
               the
               scripture
               were
               not
               made
               properly
               to
               be
               a
               rule
               of
               faith
               ,
               yet
               it
               is
               a
               rule
               of
               faith
               ,
               though
               not
               a
               totall
               rule
               ,
               but
               a
               partiall
               .
            
          
           
             The
             famous
             Doctor
             Charron
             surpasseth
             them
             all
             .
             Behold
             how
             hee
             doth
             extoll
             the
             Scripture
             in
             his
             3
             Truth
             ,
             a
             booke
             which
             France
             hath
             receaued
             with
             wonderful
             applause
             .
             In
             the
             second
             chapter
             ,
             hauing
             said
             that
             the
             Church
             and
             the
             Scripture
             are
             iudges
             together
             ,
             he
             addeth
             ,
             
               But
               the
               church
               is
               primarily
               and
               principally
               ,
               and
               with
               great
               preheminence
               .
            
             And
             a
             little
             after
             ,
             
               The
               Scripture
               is
               not
               ,
               nor
               cannot
               be
               the
               last
               rule
               ,
               &
               soveraigne
               iudge
               of
               doctrine
               .
            
             In
             the
             2.
             page
             of
             the
             3.
             chap.
             
               Faith
               that
               is
               necessary
               to
               salvation
               comes
               from
               the
               Church
               speaking
               ,
               &
               not
               
               from
               the
               reading
               of
               the
               Scripture
               ,
               without
               knowing
               of
               which
               after
               a
               sort
               ,
               yea
               and
               without
               beleeuing
               or
               obaying
               it
               expresly
               ,
               a
               thousand
               millions
               are
               saved
               —
               To
               be
               short
               ,
               a
               man
               may
               be
               a
               Christian
               ,
               and
               a
               good
               Christian
               ,
               &
               bee
               saved
               ,
               without
               the
               Scripture
               ,
               but
               not
               without
               the
               Church
               .
            
             And
             a
             little
             after
             ,
             
               How
               can
               one
               get
               out
               of
               contention
               by
               the
               scripture
               seeing
               that
               wee
               come
               into
               it
               by
               the
               Scripture
               ?
               This
               is
               an
               open
               field
               for
               all
               quarrels
               ;
               &
               as
               we
               vse
               to
               say
               ,
               a
               sword
               for
               all
               hands
               ;
               yea
               by
               this
               many
               come
               to
               be
               Atheists
               —
               it
               is
               like
               a
               forrest
               where
               all
               claime
               right
               to
               graze
               ,
               yea
               even
               Atheists
               themselues
               .
            
             And
             in
             the
             same
             chapter
             ,
             
               The
               scripture
               hath
               no
               auctoritie
               ,
               waight
               ,
               power
               over
               vs
               ,
               but
               only
               as
               much
               as
               the
               church
               doth
               appoint
               ,
               and
               assigne
               vnto
               it
               .
            
             Now
             every
             one
             knowes
             that
             by
             the
             scripture
             wee
             doe
             not
             vnderstand
             the
             paper
             or
             inke
             ,
             but
             the
             worde
             of
             God
             contained
             therein
             ,
             and
             none
             can
             deny
             but
             that
             the
             church
             is
             subiect
             to
             the
             word
             of
             God.
             But
             by
             these
             Doctours
             reckoning
             the
             word
             of
             God
             should
             be
             subiect
             to
             the
             church
             ,
             and
             men
             should
             giue
             waight
             and
             authority
             to
             the
             word
             of
             God.
             In
             the
             4.
             chapt
             .
             he
             saith
             vnto
             such
             as
             exact
             proofes
             out
             of
             Scripture
             for
             every
             point
             of
             faith
             ,
             
               that
               this
               is
               a
               
               wrongfull
               and
               vniust
               demand
               :
               for
               it
               is
               to
               require
               an
               impossible
               thing
               ;
               because
               the
               Scripture
               doth
               not
               speake
               of
               all
               things
               :
            
             &
             in
             the
             same
             place
             ,
             
               It
               is
               most
               false
               that
               Gods
               intent
               was
               to
               informe
               the
               world
               of
               his
               will
               ,
               to
               plant
               the
               faith
               ,
               and
               make
               Christians
               by
               the
               Scripture
               .
            
             What
             was
             therefore
             the
             end
             of
             those
             holy
             Scribes
             ?
             
               It
               was
            
             (
             saith
             he
             in
             the
             same
             place
             )
             
               to
               write
               certaine
               particulars
               according
               as
               they
               saw
               occasion
               (
               de
               re
               natâ
               )
            
             A
             little
             after
             he
             saith
             ,
             
               that
               to
               aske
               for
               scripture
               is
               to
               play
               the
               ill
               debtor
               ,
               &
               the
               part
               of
               an
               vnhonest
               man
               ,
               which
               will
               not
               pay
               his
               mony
               except
               he
               may
               first
               see
               his
               bond
               .
               Thou
               dost
               beleeue
               because
               thou
               dost
               read
               ,
               thou
               art
               therefore
               no
               Christian
               ,
               for
               a
               Christian
               beleeues
               before
               he
               read
               ,
               &
               without
               reading
               .
               —
               A
               Christian
               beleeues
               at
               first
               without
               expecting
               a
               reason
               ,
               with
               his
               eies
               close
               shut
               ,
               &
               afterward
               hee
               seeth
               reason
               .
               —
               He
               that
               beleeveth
               because
               he
               hath
               read
               the
               bible
               ▪
               ●his
               faith
               &
               beliefe
               is
               in
               a
               manner
               not
               Christian
               like
               :
               wee
               must
               call
               it
               by
               some
               other
               name
               ,
               a
               humane
               ,
               purchased
               ,
               studyed
               faith
               ,
               but
               not
               a
               Christian
               faith
               ,
               neither
               is
               hee
               that
               shall
               professe
               it
               a
               Christiā
               .
            
             In
             briefe
             ,
             vnder
             the
             shew
             of
             a
             respect
             towards
             the
             church
             (
             by
             which
             wee
             must
             alwaies
             vnderstande
             the
             Romane
             
             church
             )
             these
             people
             doe
             persecute
             these
             two
             faithfull
             witnesses
             ,
             and
             doe
             plant
             Atheisme
             vnder
             hand
             ,
             whereof
             this
             Doctor
             Charron
             in
             particular
             is
             not
             a
             little
             conscious
             :
             as
             it
             appeares
             by
             many
             places
             in
             his
             booke
             of
             Wisdome
             .
             The
             Kings
             complaint
             therefore
             is
             iust
             ,
             and
             had
             hee
             but
             held
             his
             peace
             ,
             the
             matter
             would
             haue
             proclaimed
             it selfe
             .
          
           
             But
             aboue
             all
             the
             Cardinall
             of
             Perons
             booke
             seemes
             intolerable
             to
             his
             Maiesty
             ,
             concerning
             the
             
               Insufficiencie
               of
               the
               Scripture
               ;
               Coeffeteau
            
             answeres
             that
             this
             is
             an
             Imposture
             of
             the
             Minister
             Tilenus
             ,
             which
             caused
             it
             to
             be
             printed
             at
             Rochel
             with
             this
             title
             .
             In
             all
             this
             Coeffeteau
             is
             ill
             informed
             .
             For
             Monsieur
             Titenus
             is
             not
             Minister
             to
             this
             day
             .
             Secondly
             although
             he
             did
             put
             this
             title
             before
             the
             booke
             ,
             yet
             can
             he
             not
             in
             this
             respect
             be
             accused
             of
             imposture
             ,
             because
             the
             booke
             being
             without
             a
             title
             ,
             &
             being
             that
             there
             must
             one
             of
             necessity
             be
             put
             before
             it
             ,
             he
             could
             not
             haue
             chosen
             any
             more
             fit
             to
             the
             purpose
             then
             out
             of
             the
             first
             line
             of
             the
             booke
             ,
             which
             is
             this
             ,
             
               The
               scripture
               is
               not
               sufficient
               without
               traditions
               .
            
             And
             that
             his
             Maiestie
             might
             know
             in
             what
             this
             insufficiency
             consisteth
             ,
             the
             first
             
             point
             is
             that
             there
             is
             no
             mention
             made
             of
             the
             immortality
             of
             the
             soule
             in
             the
             books
             of
             Moyses
             .
             Which
             yet
             is
             mentioned
             there
             very
             *
             often
             .
             And
             although
             there
             were
             nothing
             said
             of
             it
             ,
             yet
             these
             holy
             bookes
             being
             the
             religion
             of
             Gods
             people
             ,
             they
             doe
             necessarily
             carry
             the
             immortality
             of
             the
             soule
             imprinted
             on
             their
             foreheads
             ,
             &
             presuppose
             it
             by
             the
             title
             ,
             because
             that
             without
             this
             ,
             religion
             is
             nothing
             but
             folly
             ,
             and
             an
             vnwieldy
             yoke
             .
          
           
             The
             seconde
             thing
             that
             his
             Maiestie
             findes
             faulte
             with
             ,
             
             is
             that
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             doth
             preferre
             the
             vulgar
             Latin
             trāslation
             (
             which
             is
             corrupted
             in
             a
             thousand
             and
             a
             thousand
             places
             )
             before
             the
             Originall
             text
             of
             the
             Greeke
             and
             Hebrew
             .
             And
             he
             saith
             this
             because
             the
             Coūcell
             of
             Trent
             in
             the
             4
             Session
             hath
             decreed
             *
             
               that
               the
               old
               and
               vulgar
               edition
               be
               held
               for
               authenticall
               ,
               &
               that
               none
               presume
               to
               reiect
               it
               vnder
               what
               pretext
               soever
               .
            
             Whence
             it
             followes
             that
             in
             all
             places
             where
             it
             is
             contrary
             to
             the
             Originall
             Greek
             and
             Hebrew
             ,
             a
             man
             must
             beware
             how
             he
             reiect
             it
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             must
             rather
             thinke
             that
             the
             Originall
             is
             false
             then
             the
             Copie
             .
             And
             indeed
             Bellarmin
             in
             the
             7.
             chapt
             .
             of
             his
             2.
             booke
             
               de
               verbo
               Dei
            
             speaks
             
             thus
             of
             the
             Hebrew
             Bible
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             New
             Testament
             in
             Greeke
             ,
             
               In
               this
               ,
               my
               opinion
               is
               that
               we
               are
               to
               hold
               that
               of
               the
               Greeke
               which
               I
               haue
               said
               already
               of
               the
               Hebrew
               bibles
               ,
               to
               wit
               ,
               that
               the
               Greeke
               Copies
               are
               not
               generally
               corrupted
               ,
               and
               yet
               that
               their
               fountaines
               are
               not
               altogither
               pure
               .
            
             But
             if
             the
             Originals
             of
             the
             word
             of
             God
             be
             marr'd
             ,
             what
             suretie
             then
             is
             there
             in
             religion
             ?
             and
             if
             the
             springs
             bee
             troubled
             how
             can
             the
             streames
             runne
             cleere
             ?
             Now
             amongst
             other
             corruptions
             of
             the
             Romish
             translatiō
             his
             Maiestie
             doth
             produce
             two
             .
             The
             first
             is
             in
             the
             15
             of
             
               S.
               Luke
            
             verse
             8.
             where
             in
             steede
             of
             
               to
               sweepe
               the
               house
            
             ,
             the
             vulgar
             translatiō
             hath
             turnd
             it
             ,
             
               to
               overturn
               the
               house
            
             .
             The
             other
             is
             in
             the
             21.
             chapt
             .
             of
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             ,
             ver
             .
             22.23
             .
             where
             in
             steed
             of
             ,
             
               If
               I
               will
               that
               he
               stay
               ,
            
             the
             vulgar
             translation
             turnes
             it
             ,
             
               I
               will
               that
               he
               stay
               so
               ,
            
             vpon
             which
             corruption
             some
             haue
             groūded
             that
             idle
             conceipt
             of
             theirs
             ,
             that
             
               Saint
               Iohn
            
             is
             not
             dead
             to
             this
             day
             .
             Coeffeteau
             saith
             these
             places
             haue
             beene
             corrected
             in
             the
             last
             bibles
             ,
             meaning
             the
             Bibles
             newly
             printed
             by
             the
             authority
             of
             Clemēt
             the
             8.
             
             But
             Bellarmin
             *
             contradicts
             him
             ,
             and
             saith
             that
             the
             first
             place
             only
             is
             corrected
             &
             not
             the
             second
             .
             But
             the
             Bibles
             of
             Sixtus
             V.
             
             printed
             but
             a
             little
             before
             haue
             nothing
             corrected
             in
             them
             :
             and
             before
             Sixtus
             ,
             the
             Councell
             of
             Trent
             did
             approue
             of
             the
             vulgar
             translation
             in
             all
             things
             ;
             seeing
             that
             it
             hath
             pronounced
             it
             to
             bee
             authenticall
             cleane
             through
             out
             ,
             and
             hath
             forbidden
             any
             part
             thereof
             to
             bee
             refused
             :
             But
             the
             Pope
             doth
             correct
             the
             Councels
             ,
             and
             the
             Popes
             his
             predecessours
             ,
             and
             after
             this
             Pope
             Clement
             ,
             there
             will
             some
             Boniface
             come
             ,
             which
             shall
             vndoe
             that
             which
             Clement
             did
             .
          
           
             As
             for
             the
             impurity
             of
             the
             vulgar
             translation
             ,
             it
             would
             be
             easier
             for
             a
             man
             to
             alter
             it
             cleane
             ,
             and
             make
             a
             new
             one
             of
             it
             ,
             thē
             to
             purge
             it
             .
             In
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             the
             Psalmes
             and
             of
             the
             prophets
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             more
             reason
             then
             there
             is
             rime
             :
             To
             bee
             short
             ,
             it
             is
             cleane
             a
             diuers
             thing
             from
             the
             Original
             .
             The
             13.
             
             Psalme
             which
             is
             the
             14.
             in
             the
             Hebrew
             ,
             at
             the
             9.
             verse
             ,
             where
             there
             are
             10.
             lines
             added
             ,
             which
             are
             not
             in
             the
             Hebrew
             .
             In
             the
             second
             psalme
             insteed
             of
             
               kisse
               the
               sonne
            
             ,
             the
             Latin
             translation
             hath
             it
             ,
             
               Apprehend
               discipline
            
             .
             In
             the
             132.
             psal
             .
             v.
             5.
             in
             steed
             of
             
               I
               will
               blesse
               her
               vitailes
            
             ,
             this
             translation
             renders
             it
             ,
             
               I
               will
               blesse
               her
               widdowes
            
             .
             In
             the
             9.
             chap.
             of
             Esdras
             ,
             v.
             8.
             insteed
             
             of
             paxillus
             ,
             this
             translation
             hath
             
               pax
               illius
            
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             
               his
               peace
            
             ,
             for
             
               a
               naile
            
             .
             And
             in
             the
             verse
             following
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             in
             the
             Hebrew
             
               for
               to
               giue
               vs
               a
               hedge
               in
               Iuda
               ,
            
             this
             trāslatiō
             hath
             it
             ,
             
             
               to
               giue
               vs
               hope
               in
               Iuda
               .
            
             In
             the
             19.
             chapt
             .
             of
             the
             1.
             of
             Samuel
             ,
             verse
             24.
             insteed
             of
             
               He
               fell
               downe
               naked
            
             ,
             this
             translation
             turnes
             it
             ,
             
               He
               sung
               all
               naked
            
             ;
             In
             the
             16.
             of
             the
             Prov.
             ver
             .
             11.
             the
             Hebrew
             saith
             ,
             
               the
               waights
               of
               the
               bagge
            
             ,
             the
             translation
             ,
             
               the
               waights
               of
               the
               time
            
             .
             These
             are
             ridiculous
             faultes
             ,
             but
             they
             which
             follow
             are
             malicious
             .
             As
             the
             translating
             it
             in
             the
             3.
             of
             Genesis
             ,
             and
             15.
             verse
             ,
             shee
             (
             to
             wit
             the
             woman
             )
             
               shall
               bruise
               the
               serpents
               head
            
             ;
             whereas
             it
             is
             ,
             
               The
               seed
               of
               the
               woman
               shall
               bruise
               the
               heade
               of
               the
               serpent
               .
            
             Whence
             in
             the
             Virgins
             psalter
             this
             commendation
             ,
             of
             having
             bruised
             the
             head
             of
             the
             Serpent
             is
             attributed
             vnto
             her
             .
             As
             also
             the
             translating
             it
             in
             the
             99.
             psalm
             .
             
               Fall
               downe
               to
               his
               footstoole
            
             ,
             whereas
             it
             is
             in
             the
             Hebrew
             ,
             
               Fall
               downe
               towardes
               ,
               or
               before
               his
               footstoole
               .
            
             A
             corruption
             that
             was
             in
             the
             time
             of
             
               S.
               Augustine
            
             ,
             who
             did
             not
             know
             that
             they
             would
             in
             ages
             following
             ground
             the
             worship
             of
             creatures
             vpō
             this
             place
             .
             As
             also
             for
             omitting
             these
             wordes
             in
             the
             11.
             chapt
             .
             and
             6.
             verse
             of
             the
             Epistle
             
             to
             the
             
               Romans
               ,
               If
               it
               bee
               of
               workes
               it
               is
               no
               more
               grace
               ,
               or
               else
               were
               worke
               no
               worke
               .
            
             I
             wonder
             much
             also
             howe
             it
             comes
             to
             passe
             that
             in
             the
             11
             of
             
               S.
               Luke
            
             the
             vulgar
             translatiō
             cuts
             off
             the
             fourth
             part
             of
             the
             Lords
             praier
             ,
             omitting
             these
             words
             ,
             
               which
               art
               in
               heaven
            
             ,
             as
             also
             ,
             
               Thy
               will
               bee
               done
               in
               earth
               as
               it
               is
               in
               heaven
               ,
            
             as
             also
             these
             words
             ,
             
               But
               deliver
               vs
               from
               evill
            
             .
             The
             vulgar
             translation
             (
             that
             it
             might
             bring
             in
             a
             diffidence
             &
             vncertainety
             of
             saluation
             )
             renders
             the
             first
             verse
             of
             the
             9.
             of
             Ecclesiasticus
             after
             this
             manner
             .
             
               A
               man
               knows
               not
               whether
               he
               haue
               deserved
               loue
               or
               hatred
               ,
               but
               all
               things
               are
               kept
               in
               vncertainety
               ,
               for
               the
               time
               to
               come
               .
            
             Whereas
             the
             Hebrew
             hath
             only
             ,
             
               No
               man
               knoweth
               either
               loue
               or
               hatred
               of
               all
               that
               is
               before
               them
               .
            
             We
             might
             note
             many
             more
             such
             like
             places
             ,
             whence
             it
             appeares
             that
             his
             Maiesties
             complaint
             is
             most
             iust
             .
          
           
             The
             King
             complaines
             also
             that
             these
             two
             witnesses
             are
             wrong'd
             in
             this
             ,
             
             that
             mens
             writings
             called
             Apocryphall
             ,
             are
             made
             of
             equal
             worth
             with
             thē
             .
             Which
             we
             haue
             proued
             to
             be
             against
             the
             authoritie
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             and
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             ancient
             church
             ,
             and
             haue
             shewed
             that
             Coeffeteau
             doth
             alleadge
             a
             falsified
             Councell
             
             of
             Nice
             ,
             &
             abuse
             a
             place
             of
             
               S.
               Austin
            
             .
             See
             the
             5.
             
             Article
             of
             my
             2.
             book
             vpon
             this
             .
             And
             note
             besides
             that
             not
             only
             the
             Apocryphall
             bookes
             are
             set
             in
             the
             same
             ranck
             with
             the
             Canonical
             ,
             but
             also
             that
             the
             Roman
             Decree
             in
             the
             19.
             
             Distinction
             in
             the
             Canon
             
               In
               Canonicis
            
             ,
             saith
             that
             
               the
               Popes
               Decretal
               Epistles
               are
               to
               be
               reckoned
               amōgst
               the
               Canonicall
               Scriptures
               .
            
             So
             behold
             with
             what
             good
             companiōs
             these
             two
             witnesses
             are
             matcht
             .
          
           
             The
             fourth
             Cōplaint
             that
             his
             Maiestie
             makes
             ,
             
             is
             of
             the
             horrible
             corruption
             ,
             allowed
             off
             ,
             and
             published
             in
             the
             church
             of
             Rome
             ,
             in
             that
             they
             suffer
             a
             psalter
             ,
             commonly
             called
             the
             psalter
             of
             
               S.
               Bonavēture
            
             made
             in
             honor
             of
             the
             
               Virgin
               Mary
            
             ,
             where
             the
             psalmes
             of
             David
             are
             applyed
             to
             the
             Virgin
             ,
             and
             her
             name
             put
             in
             the
             place
             of
             Gods
             name
             .
             And
             this
             worthy
             psalter
             hath
             beene
             translated
             into
             French
             ,
             and
             printed
             at
             Paris
             in
             the
             year
             1601.
             with
             the
             approbation
             of
             the
             faculty
             of
             the
             Diuines
             of
             Paris
             .
             In
             reading
             thereof
             you
             would
             say
             ,
             See
             here
             the
             Psalmes
             of
             David
             ,
             but
             only
             that
             the
             name
             of
             God
             is
             not
             called
             vpon
             in
             them
             .
             And
             it
             seemes
             that
             David
             doth
             invoke
             the
             
               Virgin
               Marie
            
             .
             The
             131.
             psalme
             
             begins
             thus
             .
             
               Memento
               Domina
               David
               ,
               &
               omnium
               invocantium
               nomen
               tuum
               .
               Remember
               David
               ,
               ô
               Lady
               ,
               and
               all
               those
               which
               call
               vpon
               thy
               name
               .
            
             With
             the
             like
             grace
             ,
             the
             Reuerende
             father
             Solier
             a
             Iesuite
             of
             Sainctes
             ,
             hath
             lately
             set
             forth
             3.
             sermons
             in
             praise
             of
             the
             Beatified
             Ignatius
             ,
             in
             the
             first
             of
             which
             ,
             page
             33.
             he
             saith
             that
             Adā
             sung
             these
             psalmes
             to
             comfort
             himselfe
             in
             his
             banishment
             .
             It
             may
             be
             also
             that
             Elias
             did
             read
             them
             at
             the
             Canonical
             houres
             of
             our
             Lady
             .
             Bellarmine
             in
             his
             Apologie
             against
             the
             King
             excuseth
             the
             matter
             ,
             saying
             that
             
               Bonaventure
               did
               not
               change
               Davids
               Psalter
               ,
               but
               only
               made
               another
               of
               it
               in
               imitation
               of
               Davids
               Psalmes
               ,
               being
               moved
               therevnto
               by
               a
               goldly
               affection
               that
               hee
               bore
               to
               the
               holy
               Virgin.
            
             But
             that
             which
             is
             an
             impietie
             against
             God
             ,
             can
             be
             no
             pietie
             toward
             the
             Holy
             Virgin.
             Shee
             doth
             not
             thinke
             her selfe
             honoured
             by
             the
             dishonour
             of
             God.
             For
             this
             prophane
             psalter
             is
             made
             as
             if
             one
             should
             apply
             the
             Lords
             praier
             to
             the
             
               Virgin
               Mary
            
             ,
             in
             saying
             ,
             
               Our
               mother
               which
               art
               in
               heaven
               ,
               hallowed
               bee
               thy
               name
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             Hee
             that
             should
             speak
             after
             this
             manner
             to
             the
             
               Virgin
               Mary
            
             ,
             mought
             he
             excuse
             himselfe
             in
             saying
             that
             hee
             did
             not
             corrupt
             the
             
             Lords
             prayer
             ,
             but
             made
             another
             in
             imitation
             thereof
             ,
             being
             moved
             therevnto
             by
             a
             godly
             affection
             that
             he
             bore
             to
             the
             holy
             Virgin
             ?
             This
             Psalter
             is
             little
             better
             .
             The
             109.
             
             Psalme
             begins
             thus
             .
             
               Dixit
               Dominus
               Dominae
               nostrae
               ,
               sede
               mater
               mea
               à
               dextris
               meis
               .
               The
               Lord
               said
               vnto
               our
               Lady
               ,
               sit
               down
               mother
               at
               my
               right
               hand
               .
            
             The
             Psalm
             a
             129
             
               De
               profundis
               clamavi
               ad
               te
               Domina
               :
               Domina
               exaudi
               vocemmeam
               .
               Out
               of
               the
               deepe
               places
               haue
               I
               called
               vnto
               thee
               ô
               Lady
               ,
               ô
               Lady
               heare
               my
               voice
               .
            
             The
             b
             90
             Psalme
             ,
             which
             in
             our
             Psalters
             begins
             with
             ,
             
               who
               so
               dwelleth
               in
               &c.
            
             is
             thus
             applyed
             to
             the
             
               Virgin
               Mary
               .
               Hee
               that
               committeth
               himselfe
               to
               the
               protection
               of
               the
               mother
               of
               God
               ,
               shall
               rest
               secure
               vnder
               her
               shaddow
               ,
               and
               safeguard
               .
               His
               enimies
               though
               they
               come
               against
               him
               shall
               not
               hurt
               him
               ,
               and
               the
               arrow
               that
               flyeth
               through
               the
               aire
               shall
               not
               strike
               him
               .
            
             and
             in
             the
             c
             93
             Psalme
             ,
             hee
             makes
             as
             though
             hee
             durst
             not
             presume
             to
             speake
             to
             God
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             to
             wrong
             him
             .
             
               The
               Lord
               is
               a
               God
               of
               vengeance
               ,
               but
               thou
               ô
               mercifull
               mother
               art
               enclined
               to
               pitie
               and
               compassion
            
             ;
             you
             would
             say
             that
             she
             were
             set
             to
             pacifie
             Gods
             anger
             ,
             and
             to
             make
             him
             change
             his
             will.
             It
             was
             a
             hard
             matter
             therefore
             to
             get
             accesse
             
             to
             God
             ,
             before
             the
             birth
             of
             the
             Virgin
             ,
             or
             before
             she
             was
             crownd
             queene
             of
             heaven
             ;
             To
             conclude
             ,
             all
             this
             whole
             Psalter
             is
             such
             and
             yet
             Bellarmine
             dares
             say
             that
             it
             was
             made
             
               with
               a
               holy
               and
               godly
               affection
               ,
            
             &
             the
             facultie
             of
             the
             Divines
             of
             Paris
             ,
             did
             not
             sticke
             to
             approue
             of
             it
             .
             And
             yet
             afterward
             they
             are
             bold
             to
             say
             that
             the
             worship
             of
             Latria
             appertaineth
             to
             God
             only
             ,
             as
             if
             the
             Psalmes
             of
             David
             were
             no
             divine
             service
             .
          
           
             
             On
             the
             complaint
             which
             his
             Maiestie
             makes
             in
             the
             5
             place
             of
             the
             suppressing
             of
             the
             Scripture
             ,
             for
             feare
             least
             the
             people
             should
             come
             to
             see
             it
             ,
             these
             Doctours
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             reading
             of
             the
             Scripture
             is
             not
             absolutely
             denied
             vnto
             lay
             men
             ,
             but
             that
             they
             are
             forbid
             to
             read
             it
             without
             hauing
             a
             speciall
             permission
             ;
             (
             that
             is
             to
             say
             )
             that
             the
             Pope
             by
             a
             speciall
             priuiledge
             wil
             giue
             a
             man
             leaue
             to
             obay
             God
             ,
             for
             God
             would
             haue
             the
             people
             to
             read
             the
             Scripture
             .
             Kings
             are
             Laymen
             ,
             and
             yet
             for
             all
             that
             in
             the
             17.
             of
             Deuter.
             they
             are
             commanded
             to
             read
             in
             the
             booke
             of
             the
             lawe
             all
             the
             daies
             of
             their
             life
             .
             And
             when
             the
             Apostle
             wrote
             to
             the
             people
             of
             the
             church
             of
             Corinth
             ,
             of
             Rome
             ,
             of
             Ephesus
             ,
             did
             he
             not
             meane
             ,
             that
             they
             to
             whome
             hee
             wrote
             should
             read
             his
             
             Epistles
             ?
             And
             when
             in
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Apocalyps
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             
               Blessed
               is
               hee
               that
               readeth
               ,
               &
               they
               that
               heare
               the
               wordes
               of
               this
               Prophecy
               ,
            
             why
             should
             wee
             not
             ,
             following
             the
             counsell
             of
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             ,
             apply
             our selues
             to
             the
             reading
             hereof
             ,
             seeing
             that
             it
             is
             the
             next
             way
             to
             make
             vs
             happy
             ?
             And
             yet
             this
             is
             one
             of
             the
             obscurest
             bookes
             in
             all
             the
             Scripture
             :
             how
             much
             more
             then
             are
             wee
             exhorted
             by
             this
             to
             read
             the
             books
             of
             the
             Gospell
             ,
             so
             full
             of
             perspicuity
             and
             instruction
             ?
             In
             the
             17
             of
             the
             Acts.
             ver
             .
             11.
             they
             of
             Beroe
             are
             commended
             because
             that
             after
             they
             had
             heard
             
               S.
               Paule
            
             preach
             ,
             they
             did
             dayly
             vse
             to
             examine
             his
             doctrine
             by
             the
             Scripture
             ,
             to
             knowe
             whether
             it
             were
             so
             or
             no
             ,
             and
             yet
             it
             is
             probable
             that
             the
             Apostle
             
               S.
               Paule
            
             did
             ,
             at
             the
             least
             speake
             with
             as
             much
             certainety
             ,
             as
             Curates
             and
             Bishops
             doe
             now
             adaies
             .
             Why
             then
             may
             not
             they
             which
             heare
             them
             (
             after
             their
             sermons
             ended
             )
             compare
             that
             which
             they
             heard
             with
             the
             Scripture
             ▪
             to
             see
             whether
             it
             bee
             truely
             alleaged
             or
             no
             ?
             A
             strange
             case
             !
             These
             Doctors
             both
             in
             their
             sermons
             ,
             and
             in
             their
             writings
             pretend
             Scripture
             commonly
             ,
             but
             will
             not
             haue
             the
             people
             to
             see
             whether
             they
             deale
             truely
             or
             no.
             As
             if
             they
             
             should
             say
             ,
             
               S.
               Paul
            
             ,
             or
             
               S.
               Iohn
            
             saith
             so
             ,
             but
             doe
             not
             goe
             thither
             to
             see
             it
             .
             They
             send
             you
             to
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             ,
             but
             stop
             you
             in
             the
             way
             ;
             yea
             and
             in
             their
             ful
             sermons
             they
             alleage
             the
             Scripture
             in
             barbarous
             Latin
             ,
             and
             interpret
             it
             according
             to
             such
             allegations
             ,
             as
             if
             French
             were
             worth
             nothing
             except
             it
             were
             set
             in
             the
             taile
             of
             Latin.
             Iesus
             Christ
             many
             a
             time
             in
             the
             Scripture
             askes
             of
             those
             that
             stand
             about
             him
             .
             *
             
               haue
               yee
               not
               read
            
             ,
             and
             ,
             
               How
               readest
               thou
            
             ?
             should
             Iesus
             Christ
             now
             adaies
             speak
             in
             the
             same
             manner
             to
             the
             people
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             ,
             they
             would
             answer
             him
             ,
             wee
             haue
             not
             read
             ,
             for
             the
             Popes
             Holynesse
             will
             not
             permit
             it
             ,
             except
             it
             bee
             vnto
             some
             fewe
             which
             vnderstand
             Latin
             ,
             and
             which
             haue
             speciall
             leaue
             from
             their
             Ordinarie
             .
             Certainely
             I
             dare
             maintaine
             that
             for
             a
             man
             to
             take
             vpon
             him
             to
             permit
             any
             one
             by
             his
             speciall
             favour
             &
             priviledge
             ,
             to
             obay
             God
             or
             to
             be
             instructed
             in
             his
             word
             ,
             is
             far
             worse
             thē
             if
             he
             should
             forbid
             him
             to
             serue
             God.
             For
             hee
             which
             doth
             forbid
             a
             man
             to
             serue
             God
             ,
             doth
             onely
             oppose
             himselfe
             against
             God
             :
             but
             he
             which
             giues
             any
             one
             a
             priviledge
             to
             serue
             God
             ,
             makes
             God
             to
             bee
             his
             inferiour
             ,
             and
             his
             subiect
             ,
             seeing
             that
             hee
             
             cannot
             be
             served
             but
             by
             the
             permission
             of
             the
             Pope
             ,
             and
             it
             will
             come
             to
             this
             passe
             at
             last
             ,
             that
             God
             must
             doe
             him
             reverence
             ,
             if
             he
             himselfe
             looke
             to
             be
             served
             .
             Herevnto
             adde
             that
             women
             ,
             &
             the
             common
             sort
             of
             people
             which
             do
             not
             vnderstand
             Latin
             care
             not
             to
             sue
             for
             a
             permission
             to
             read
             it
             in
             Latin
             ,
             which
             yet
             is
             the
             only
             tongue
             that
             is
             allowed
             of
             in
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             .
             But
             if
             you
             turne
             over
             all
             the
             histories
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             you
             shall
             never
             finde
             that
             any
             went
             about
             to
             hinder
             the
             reading
             of
             the
             Scripture
             ,
             but
             certain
             monsters
             &
             tyrants
             ,
             as
             
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
            
             ,
             &
             such
             like
             persecutours
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             whose
             example
             the
             Pope
             hath
             followed
             .
             For
             that
             there
             are
             some
             vulgar
             translations
             seen
             now
             adaies
             in
             France
             and
             Italie
             ,
             this
             hath
             beene
             but
             of
             late
             ,
             and
             without
             approbation
             :
             &
             our
             aduersaries
             are
             beholding
             to
             vs
             for
             it
             .
             For
             it
             is
             not
             yet
             a
             hundreth
             yeares
             since
             that
             you
             should
             assoone
             haue
             found
             an
             Alcoran
             ,
             as
             a
             French
             or
             Italian
             Bible
             ,
             amongst
             the
             people
             of
             the
             Romish
             church
             .
             And
             yet
             to
             this
             day
             at
             Rome
             ,
             or
             in
             Spaine
             ,
             to
             finde
             a
             Spanish
             ,
             or
             Italian
             Bible
             with
             one
             of
             the
             people
             ,
             is
             a
             burning
             matter
             ,
             and
             a
             case
             of
             the
             Inquisition
             .
          
           
           
             Yet
             iudge
             what
             tyranny
             this
             is
             .
             For
             the
             books
             of
             the
             old
             and
             new
             Testament
             ,
             are
             our
             contract
             of
             marriage
             with
             our
             bridegrome
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             and
             the
             testament
             of
             our
             heauenly
             father
             .
             The
             clauses
             of
             the
             Legacies
             and
             donations
             contained
             therein
             ,
             do
             appertaine
             to
             the
             people
             as
             well
             as
             to
             the
             Priests
             :
             why
             then
             should
             anie
             one
             keep
             their
             fathers
             testament
             from
             the
             people
             ?
             Why
             may
             not
             the
             Spowse
             be
             suffered
             to
             see
             her
             contract
             of
             marriage
             ?
             Must
             I
             in
             this
             businesse
             rely
             vpon
             the
             trust
             of
             men
             that
             liue
             by
             my
             ignorance
             ,
             and
             make
             their
             gaine
             by
             concealing
             the
             truth
             from
             mee
             ?
             Why
             do
             they
             suffer
             me
             to
             read
             fables
             and
             prophane
             histories
             ,
             and
             will
             not
             suffer
             me
             to
             read
             the
             will
             ,
             and
             the
             ordinances
             of
             my
             father
             ?
             Why
             do
             they
             make
             me
             to
             suspect
             the
             Holy
             scriptures
             as
             if
             they
             were
             dangerous
             bookes
             ,
             and
             a
             knife
             to
             cut
             my
             throat
             with
             ?
             Suffer
             vs
             at
             least
             to
             haue
             a
             good
             opinion
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             she
             shall
             be
             bound
             vnto
             you
             for
             it
             .
             If
             you
             say
             ,
             But
             many
             abuse
             thē
             ;
             I
             answere
             that
             preaching
             is
             abused
             too
             ,
             &
             so
             is
             the
             goodnesse
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             yet
             for
             al
             this
             we
             are
             not
             to
             abstaine
             from
             them
             ,
             or
             suspect
             them
             the
             more
             :
             And
             besides
             that
             there
             is
             more
             danger
             in
             a
             voluntary
             ignorance
             ,
             
             then
             in
             a
             desire
             to
             profit
             .
             And
             it
             shal
             neuer
             bee
             found
             that
             the
             people
             did
             hatch
             heresies
             by
             the
             reading
             of
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             ,
             but
             all
             the
             Arch
             Heretickes
             haue
             bin
             men
             that
             haue
             had
             the
             charge
             of
             teaching
             which
             should
             therefore
             rather
             of
             the
             two
             be
             bar'd
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             .
             They
             say
             that
             it
             is
             for
             none
             but
             men
             of
             knowledge
             to
             read
             them
             ;
             whereas
             I
             ever
             thought
             that
             a
             man
             did
             read
             them
             to
             get
             knowledge
             ;
             but
             these
             men
             wil
             haue
             knowledge
             to
             be
             gotten
             before
             the
             reading
             of
             them
             :
             which
             is
             a
             most
             wicked
             assertion
             ,
             to
             make
             a
             knoweledge
             in
             religion
             that
             may
             be
             without
             the
             scripture
             ,
             &
             before
             the
             scripture
             .
             And
             yet
             if
             it
             were
             so
             ,
             what
             shoulde
             become
             of
             a
             great
             company
             of
             the
             Priests
             ,
             which
             are
             more
             ignorant
             then
             the
             most
             part
             of
             the
             people
             ,
             to
             whō
             notwithstanding
             the
             reading
             of
             the
             Scripture
             is
             permitted
             ?
          
           
             But
             if
             any
             be
             desirous
             to
             know
             the
             beliefe
             of
             the
             Ancient
             Church
             concerning
             this
             ,
             and
             whether
             the
             people
             did
             read
             the
             holy
             scripture
             then
             or
             no
             ,
             beholde
             here
             some
             of
             their
             testimonies
             .
             Chrysostome
             in
             his
             3.
             
             Homilie
             of
             Lazarus
             speakes
             thus
             to
             his
             auditours
             ,
             
               I
               do
               exhort
               you
               alwaies
               ,
               and
               will
               never
               cease
               to
               exhort
               you
               that
               you
               bee
               
               not
               only
               attentiue
               here
               to
               that
               which
               is
               spoken
               ,
               but
               when
               you
               be
               at
               home
               also
               ,
               that
               you
               would
               set
               your
               selus
               carefully
               to
               the
               reading
               of
               the
               holy
               Scripture
               .
               A
               thing
               which
               I
               haue
               not
               forborne
               to
               inculcat
               vnto
               thē
               ,
               that
               haue
               spoken
               with
               me
               ,
               in
               particular
               .
               For
               it
               is
               not
               fit
               that
               any
               should
               say
               vnto
               me
               ,
               these
               words
               are
               but
               little
               gracious
               ,
               and
               there
               be
               many
               other
               things
               to
               busie
               a
               man
               ,
               I
               am
               tyed
               to
               attend
               at
               the
               Court
               ,
               I
               mānage
               publike
               affaires
               ,
               I
               haue
               my
               occupation
               ,
               I
               haue
               a
               wife
               ,
               I
               see
               to
               the
               bringing
               vp
               of
               my
               children
               ,
               I
               looke
               to
               my
               family
               ,
               I
               am
               mingled
               with
               the
               world
               ,
               &
               therefore
               it
               is
               not
               for
               mee
               to
               read
               the
               Scriptures
               ,
               but
               for
               those
               which
               haue
               bid
               Adieu
               to
               the
               world
               ,
               whose
               dwelling
               place
               is
               vpon
               the
               tops
               of
               hils
               ,
               there
               leading
               a
               more
               strict
               kinde
               of
               life
               .
               What
               saist
               thou
               ô
               Man
               ?
               must
               thou
               not
               turne
               over
               the
               scriptures
               because
               thou
               art
               distracted
               with
               many
               businesses
               ?
               But
               it
               lyes
               thee
               vpon
               rather
               to
               reade
               them
               then
               they
               which
               are
               more
               free
               :
               For
               they
               haue
               not
               so
               much
               neede
               of
               the
               assistance
               of
               the
               scripture
               as
               thou
               which
               art
               tost
               amidst
               the
               vvaues
               of
               businesses
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             Till
             at
             last
             he
             sayth
             ,
             that
             
               it
               is
               impossible
               ,
               yea
               I
               say
               impossible
               that
               any
               should
               attaine
               to
               salvation
               ,
               if
               hee
               imploy
               not
               himselfe
               daily
               in
               this
               spiritual
               reading
               .
            
             And
             
             a
             little
             after
             .
             
               The
               graces
               of
               the
               spirit
               hath
               so
               ordered
               and
               fitted
               the
               scriptures
               ,
               that
               publicans
               ,
               fisher
               men
               ,
               makers
               of
               tents
               ,
               the
               Pastours
               and
               Apostles
               ,
               the
               simple
               and
               ignorāt
               sort
               of
               people
               may
               bee
               saved
               by
               these
               bookes
               ,
               that
               none
               of
               them
               hereafter
               may
               haue
               anie
               cause
               to
               complaine
               of
               the
               difficulty
               .
               To
               the
               ende
               that
               the
               thinges
               which
               are
               saide
               there
               might
               be
               easie
               to
               vnderstand
               ,
               and
               that
               the
               Artizan
               ,
               the
               groom
               ,
               &
               the
               widdow
               woman
               ,
               and
               he
               that
               is
               most
               vnlearned
               of
               all
               mē
               ,
               may
               carry
               away
               some
               profit
               by
               the
               hearing
               of
               this
               read
               .
            
             To
             be
             brief
             the
             whole
             homily
             is
             spēt
             about
             nothing
             else
             .
             Hierome
             in
             an
             Epistle
             to
             Laeta
             concerning
             the
             instruction
             of
             her
             daughter
             Paula
             .
             a
             
               In
               steed
               of
               pretious
               stones
               and
               silke
               ,
               let
               her
               loue
               the
               bookes
               of
               God
               ,
               in
               which
               let
               her
               not
               loue
               the
               gold
               ,
               nor
               the
               painting
               vpon
               the
               covers
               ,
               but
               the
               scripture
               learnedly
               corrected
               ,
               and
               distinguisht
               .
               Let
               her
               first
               learne
               the
               psalmes
               ,
               let
               her
               solace
               her selfe
               with
               these
               songs
               .
               Let
               her
               learne
               how
               to
               liue
               well
               in
               the
               Proverbs
               of
               Salomon
               .
               Let
               her
               learne
               how
               to
               despise
               worldly
               things
               by
               Ecclesiastes
               .
               Let
               her
               follow
               the
               examples
               of
               vertue
               and
               patience
               in
               Iob.
               From
               hence
               let
               her
               passe
               over
               to
               the
               Evāgelists
               ,
               &
               neuer
               lay
               them
               out
               of
               her
               hands
               .
               Let
               her
               learne
               the
               
               Prophets
               by
               heart
               .
               Let
               her
               beware
               of
               al
               Apocryphall
               bookes
               .
            
             Then
             therefore
             the
             reading
             of
             the
             scripture
             was
             permitted
             ,
             yea
             and
             commanded
             ,
             even
             to
             young
             maides
             .
          
           
             
               S.
               Austin
            
             in
             the
             9.
             chapt
             .
             of
             his
             booke
             
               de
               Doctrinâ
               Christianâ
            
             ,
             speaking
             of
             the
             Canonicall
             bookes
             ,
             b
             
               In
               all
               these
               bookes
               ,
               they
               which
               feare
               God
               ,
               and
               are
               of
               a
               zealous
               disposition
               ,
               do
               seeke
               after
               the
               will
               of
               God.
               In
               which
               worke
               and
               travel
               ,
               the
               first
               taske
               that
               they
               haue
               to
               do
               ,
               is
               to
               know
               these
               bookes
               :
               and
               although
               they
               cannot
               vnderstand
               them
               presently
               ,
               yet
               in
               reading
               them
               over
               ,
               either
               to
               learne
               them
               by
               heart
               ,
               or
               at
               the
               least
               not
               to
               haue
               thē
               altogither
               vnknown
               vnto
               thē
               .
            
             The
             third
             booke
             begins
             with
             this
             .
             
               Homo
               timēs
               deum
               voluntatem
               eius
               in
               sanctis
               scripturis
               inquirit
               .
               A
               man
               fearing
               God
               seekes
               diligently
               for
               his
               will
               in
               the
               holy
               Scriptures
               .
            
          
           
             In
             a
             word
             ,
             all
             this
             forbidding
             of
             the
             scripture
             to
             be
             read
             without
             a
             special
             permission
             ,
             and
             the
             denying
             it
             to
             bee
             translated
             into
             any
             vulgar
             tongue
             ,
             for
             feare
             least
             the
             people
             shoulde
             put
             their
             noses
             into
             it
             ,
             is
             a
             thing
             neuer
             heard
             off
             in
             al
             ages
             ,
             a
             new
             kinde
             of
             tyranny
             ,
             &
             a
             manifest
             betraying
             of
             a
             bad
             cause
             .
             He
             that
             is
             loath
             to
             haue
             the
             law
             seen
             ,
             acknowledgeth
             that
             it
             doth
             not
             
             fauor
             him
             in
             his
             suite
             .
          
           
             The
             other
             complaintes
             of
             the
             King
             ,
             as
             of
             the
             abuse
             of
             fabulous
             legends
             ,
             of
             the
             traffick
             ,
             which
             hath
             changed
             the
             spiritual
             keyes
             into
             keies
             of
             gold
             ,
             &
             the
             fishermans
             boate
             into
             a
             merchants
             ship
             ,
             these
             haue
             been
             proved
             in
             the
             6.
             
             Article
             of
             my
             second
             booke
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             exposition
             of
             the
             18.
             chapter
             of
             the
             Apocalyps
             .
          
        
      
       
         
           
             PROPHECIES
             SCATTEred
             throughout
             the
             Apocalyps
             ,
             speaking
             of
             the
             Pope
             and
             his
             seate
             ,
             noted
             by
             the
             King
             of
             Great
             Brittaine
             .
             CHAP.
             10.
             
          
           
             BEsides
             these
             prophecies
             formerly
             expounded
             ,
             which
             describe
             the
             Popes
             seate
             ,
             and
             his
             person
             ,
             by
             a
             continued
             discourse
             of
             whole
             chapters
             ;
             His
             Maiestie
             hath
             noted
             other
             places
             also
             to
             this
             purpose
             scattered
             here
             &
             there
             in
             divers
             places
             of
             the
             Apocalyps
             ,
             which
             may
             not
             bee
             omitted
             .
             The
             first
             is
             in
             the
             6.
             chapt
             .
             and
             8.
             verse
             ,
             Where
             the
             Popes
             seate
             is
             represented
             
             by
             
               a
               pale
               horse
               ,
               &
               his
               name
               that
               sa●e
               on
               him
               was
               death
               ,
               and
               Hell
               followed
               after
               him
               ,
               &
               power
               was
               givē
               vnto
               him
               over
               the
               fourth
               part
               of
               the
               earth
               ,
            
             to
             wit
             over
             Europe
             .
             Hell
             followes
             him
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             the
             reward
             for
             those
             which
             serue
             this
             seate
             .
          
           
             His
             Maiesty
             notes
             also
             that
             the
             Pope
             is
             the
             king
             called
             Abaddon
             ,
             or
             Apollyon
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             one
             that
             destroies
             ,
             and
             wasteth
             soules
             ,
             who
             is
             spoken
             off
             in
             the
             9.
             chapt
             .
             v.
             11.
             and
             is
             king
             over
             the
             Locusts
             which
             came
             out
             of
             the
             thicke
             smoake
             of
             the
             bottomlesse
             pit
             ,
             v.
             2.3
             .
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             which
             arose
             out
             of
             grosse
             ignorance
             that
             proceeded
             from
             hell
             and
             the
             diuell
             ,
             and
             that
             ,
             after
             that
             
               a
               starre
               fell
               from
               heaven
            
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             by
             the
             meanes
             of
             one
             which
             hauing
             beene
             a
             light
             vnto
             the
             church
             for
             a
             time
             ,
             tumbled
             downe
             ,
             and
             fell
             away
             from
             heavenly
             things
             to
             earthly
             ,
             of
             a
             spirituall
             Pastor
             becōming
             a
             Temporal
             Prince
             :
             which
             is
             altogither
             suteable
             to
             the
             Pope
             .
             This
             is
             confirmed
             by
             this
             ,
             that
             the
             men
             which
             serue
             him
             are
             punished
             in
             the
             20.
             verse
             for
             serving
             Idoles
             of
             Gold
             ,
             of
             syluer
             ,
             of
             brasse
             and
             of
             stone
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             that
             no
             mā
             should
             apply
             this
             prophecie
             to
             the
             Turcks
             .
             For
             the
             Turcks
             haue
             all
             sorts
             of
             Images
             in
             detestation
             .
             
             And
             the
             vices
             reckoned
             vp
             in
             the
             21.
             verse
             do
             all
             agree
             to
             the
             Romane
             Hierarchie
             ,
             as
             the
             King
             hath
             shewed
             most
             exactly
             and
             truely
             .
          
           
             He
             doth
             likewise
             apply
             the
             16.
             chap.
             of
             the
             Apocalyps
             to
             the
             See
             of
             Rome
             ,
             where
             God
             doth
             powre
             out
             7
             vials
             of
             his
             wrath
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             7
             sorts
             of
             punishments
             vpon
             those
             which
             beare
             the
             marke
             of
             the
             beast
             in
             their
             foreheads
             ,
             ver
             .
             1.
             and
             2.
             
             The
             three
             last
             are
             the
             worst
             .
             For
             in
             the
             fift
             ,
             which
             is
             spoken
             off
             in
             the
             10.
             verse
             ,
             God
             powreth
             out
             darknes
             vpon
             the
             throne
             of
             the
             beast
             ,
             and
             God
             smiting
             them
             from
             aboue
             ,
             they
             blasphemed
             against
             him
             .
             But
             at
             the
             powring
             out
             of
             the
             sixt
             viall
             ,
             verse
             13.
             
             
               There
               came
            
             3
             
               vncleane
               spirits
               like
               frogs
               out
               of
               the
               mouth
               of
               the
               Dragon
               ,
               and
               out
               of
               the
               mouth
               of
               the
               beast
               ,
               &
               out
               of
               the
               mouth
               of
               the
               false
               Prophet
               ,
            
             by
             which
             Frogs
             his
             Maiestie
             vnderstands
             ,
             the
             Emissaries
             ,
             and
             new
             religious
             orders
             ,
             which
             the
             Pope
             sends
             out
             to
             seduce
             the
             people
             ,
             and
             especially
             the
             Iesuits
             compared
             (
             as
             the
             King
             hath
             most
             wittily
             obserued
             )
             to
             Frogs
             ,
             because
             as
             these
             liue
             by
             land
             and
             water
             ,
             and
             are
             of
             a
             mixt
             nature
             ,
             so
             the
             Iesuits
             are
             halfe
             Ecclesiastical
             ,
             halfe
             lay
             creatures
             ;
             men
             of
             the
             church
             ,
             &
             
             yet
             such
             as
             will
             thrust
             themselues
             into
             worldly
             affaires
             .
             And
             they
             are
             said
             to
             be
             2
             ,
             because
             (
             saith
             the
             King
             )
             of
             their
             threefold
             direction
             ,
             being
             sent
             from
             those
             3.
             mentioned
             v.
             13.
             
             Which
             seemes
             to
             be
             cōfirmed
             by
             that
             which
             is
             annext
             in
             the
             14.
             verse
             .
             
               These
               are
               the
               spirits
               that
               worke
               miracles
               ,
               which
               goe
               vnto
               the
               kings
               of
               the
               earth
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               whole
               world
               to
               gather
               them
               to
               the
               battell
               of
               that
               great
               day
               of
               God
               Almightie
               .
            
             For
             these
             men
             speake
             of
             miracles
             ,
             and
             incite
             kings
             &
             people
             on
             to
             persecute
             the
             faithfull
             ,
             but
             at
             the
             incounter
             God
             shall
             overthrow
             them
             in
             the
             day
             which
             he
             hath
             appointed
             ,
             &
             doeth
             (
             as
             it
             were
             )
             expect
             them
             in
             battell
             .
          
           
             The
             place
             where
             the
             Adversaries
             shal
             be
             discomfited
             ,
             is
             called
             Harmageddon
             in
             the
             16.
             verse
             ,
             which
             is
             an
             Hebrew
             word
             ,
             and
             signifieth
             the
             mounetaine
             of
             Mageddo
             ,
             neere
             to
             which
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             in
             the
             neighbouring
             vallie
             ,
             the
             good
             *
             King
             Iosias
             was
             slaine
             by
             Neco
             king
             of
             Egypt
             .
             In
             the
             same
             place
             was
             Si●era
             ,
             captaine
             of
             Iabins
             army
             king
             of
             Canaan
             ,
             discomfited
             by
             Debora
             the
             Prophetesse
             ;
             as
             it
             is
             to
             bee
             seene
             in
             the
             15.
             of
             Iudges
             ,
             ver
             .
             19.
             whence
             it
             appeares
             that
             the
             holy
             Holy
             Ghost
             doeth
             heere
             allude
             
             that
             discomfiture
             which
             was
             effected
             by
             contemptible
             meanes
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             by
             a
             woman
             attended
             but
             by
             a
             small
             company
             ;
             to
             signifie
             ,
             that
             the
             Popes
             throne
             ,
             and
             they
             which
             follow
             him
             ,
             shall
             be
             vanquished
             by
             the
             Church
             compared
             to
             a
             woman
             ,
             and
             by
             contemptible
             meanes
             .
             Notwithstanding
             we
             are
             to
             note
             that
             this
             word
             Harmagaddon
             doth
             also
             signifie
             
               the
               overthrow
               of
               the
               prowd
               or
               haughtie
               :
            
             yea
             and
             that
             in
             Hebrew
             it
             signifies
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             
               Roma
               subversio
            
             ,
             the
             subversion
             of
             Rome
             ,
             which
             fals
             out
             by
             an
             admirable
             occurrence
             .
          
           
             The
             7
             viall
             powred
             out
             in
             the
             17
             verse
             .
             Even
             to
             the
             end
             of
             the
             Chapter
             doth
             represent
             the
             plagues
             which
             must
             befall
             the
             Cittie
             of
             Rome
             ,
             and
             the
             Romish
             Church
             ,
             before
             her
             destruction
             .
             The
             great
             Earthquake
             ,
             and
             the
             diuision
             of
             the
             great
             Citty
             into
             3.
             parts
             .
             v.
             19.
             doe
             foretell
             vs
             of
             the
             divisions
             and
             dissentions
             which
             shall
             trouble
             her
             a
             little
             before
             her
             final
             overthrow
             :
             which
             is
             toucht
             by
             the
             way
             in
             these
             words
             .
             
               And
               that
               great
               Babylon
               came
               in
               remembrance
               before
               God
               ,
               to
               giue
               vnto
               her
               the
               cup
               of
               the
               wine
               of
               the
               fiercenesse
               of
               his
               wrath
               .
            
             This
             destruction
             of
             hers
             is
             described
             more
             at
             large
             in
             the
             18.
             chap.
             which
             
             we
             haue
             expounded
             .
          
           
             He
             that
             would
             be
             more
             fully
             informed
             in
             these
             thinges
             ,
             let
             him
             read
             the
             Kings
             kooke
             ;
             For
             all
             that
             we
             can
             doe
             herein
             ,
             is
             nothing
             else
             but
             to
             follow
             his
             steps
             .
             Because
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             is
             more
             concealed
             in
             these
             last
             observations
             ,
             then
             in
             the
             other
             Chapters
             which
             I
             haue
             expounded
             all
             along
             ;
             Experience
             will
             make
             it
             more
             manifest
             ,
             and
             posterity
             shall
             hereafter
             reckon
             this
             amongst
             one
             of
             Gods
             wonderfull
             workes
             ,
             that
             hee
             did
             set
             such
             a
             great
             King
             vpō
             the
             Throne
             ,
             to
             publish
             his
             secrets
             frō
             an
             high
             place
             ,
             and
             to
             expose
             the
             truth
             to
             the
             sight
             of
             al
             mē
             .
             But
             especially
             the
             Kings
             and
             Princes
             of
             these
             and
             succeeding
             ages
             ,
             will
             be
             admonisht
             hereby
             ,
             and
             perceiuing
             that
             it
             is
             more
             then
             1500
             yeares
             since
             that
             God
             did
             speake
             of
             them
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             do
             make
             a
             part
             of
             
               S.
               Iohns
            
             Revelation
             ,
             wil
             apply
             themselues
             readily
             to
             execute
             his
             ordinance
             .
             To
             whō
             his
             Maiestie
             of
             England
             (
             towards
             the
             end
             of
             his
             preface
             )
             makes
             an
             exhortation
             ,
             which
             deserues
             to
             bee
             written
             in
             letters
             of
             Gold
             ,
             and
             which
             I
             haue
             put
             here
             for
             the
             conclusion
             of
             my
             booke
             ,
             as
             a
             more
             delicate
             dish
             at
             the
             ende
             of
             a
             feast
             .
          
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
        
      
       
         
         
           THE
           CONCLVSION
           OF
           THE
           King
           of
           Great
           Brittaines
           Preface
           ,
           containing
           an
           exhortation
           to
           all
           Christian
           Kings
           and
           Princes
           .
        
         
           My
           harty
           desire
           is
           that
           you
           would
           deeply
           consider
           ,
           &
           weigh
           your
           cōmon
           interest
           in
           this
           Cause
           .
           For
           neither
           in
           all
           my
           Apologie
           ,
           nor
           in
           the
           pretended
           Refutatiō
           thereof
           ,
           is
           there
           any
           question
           made
           anent
           the
           Popes
           power
           ouer
           me
           in
           particular
           ,
           for
           the
           excommunicating
           or
           deposing
           of
           me
           .
           For
           in
           my
           particular
           ;
           the
           Cardinall
           doth
           me
           that
           grace
           ,
           that
           hee
           saith
           ,
           The
           Pope
           thought
           it
           not
           expedient
           at
           this
           time
           to
           excommunicate
           me
           by
           name
           ;
           our
           questiō
           being
           only
           generall
           ,
           Whether
           the
           Pope
           may
           lawfully
           pretend
           any
           temporal
           power
           ouer
           Kings
           ,
           or
           no
           ?
        
         
           That
           no
           Church
           men
           can
           by
           his
           rule
           be
           subiect
           to
           any
           temporall
           Prince
           ,
           I
           haue
           already
           shewed
           you
           ;
           And
           what
           Obedience
           any
           of
           you
           may
           looke
           for
           of
           any
           of
           them
           
             de
             facto
          
           ,
           he
           plainly
           forewarneth
           you
           of
           ,
           by
           the
           example
           of
           Gregory
           the
           Great
           his
           obedience
           to
           the
           Emperor
           Mauritius
           :
           not
           
           being
           ashamed
           to
           slaūder
           that
           great
           Personages
           Christian
           humilitie
           &
           obedience
           to
           the
           Emperour
           ,
           with
           the
           title
           of
           a
           constrained
           and
           forced
           obedience
           ,
           because
           he
           might
           ,
           or
           durst
           do
           no
           otherwise
           .
           Whereby
           hee
           not
           only
           wrongs
           the
           saide
           Gregory
           in
           particular
           ,
           but
           euen
           doth
           by
           that
           meanes
           lay
           on
           an
           heauy
           slaunder
           &
           reproach
           vpō
           the
           Christian
           humility
           &
           patience
           of
           the
           whole
           Primitiue
           Church
           ,
           especially
           in
           the
           time
           of
           Persecution
           :
           if
           the
           whole
           glorie
           of
           their
           Martyrdome
           and
           Christian
           patience
           shall
           be
           thus
           blotted
           with
           that
           vile
           glosse
           of
           their
           coacted
           &
           constrained
           suffering
           ,
           because
           they
           could
           or
           durst
           doe
           no
           otherwise
           ;
           like
           the
           patience
           and
           obedience
           of
           the
           Iewes
           or
           Turkish
           slaues
           in
           our
           time
           ,
           cleane
           contrary
           to
           
             S.
             Paul
          
           and
           
             S.
             Peters
          
           doctrine
           of
           obedience
           for
           cōscience
           sake
           ;
           
           and
           as
           contrary
           to
           
             Tertullians
             Apologie
          
           for
           Christians
           ,
           and
           all
           the
           protestations
           of
           the
           ancient
           Fathers
           in
           that
           case
           .
           But
           it
           was
           good
           lucke
           for
           the
           ancient
           Christians
           in
           the
           daies
           of
           
             Ethnicke
             Emperors
          
           ,
           that
           this
           profane
           and
           newe
           conceit
           was
           then
           vnknowne
           among
           them
           :
           otherwise
           they
           would
           haue
           beene
           vtterly
           destroyed
           and
           rooted
           out
           in
           that
           time
           ,
           &
           no
           man
           to
           haue
           
           pitied
           them
           ,
           as
           most
           dangerous
           members
           in
           a
           Common-wealth
           ;
           who
           would
           no
           lōger
           be
           obedient
           ,
           then
           till
           they
           were
           furnished
           with
           sufficient
           ability
           and
           power
           to
           resist
           and
           rebell
           .
        
         
           Thus
           may
           ye
           see
           ,
           howe
           vpon
           the
           one
           part
           our
           Cardinall
           will
           haue
           all
           Kings
           and
           Monarchs
           to
           be
           the
           
             Popes
             Vassals
          
           ;
           and
           yet
           will
           not
           on
           the
           other
           side
           ,
           allow
           the
           meanest
           of
           the
           Pope
           his
           vassals
           ,
           to
           be
           subiect
           to
           any
           Christian
           Prince
           .
           But
           he
           no●
           thinking
           it
           enough
           to
           make
           the
           Pope
           our
           Superior
           ,
           hath
           in
           a
           late
           Treatise
           of
           his
           (
           called
           the
           
             Recognition
             of
             his
             bookes
             of
             Controversies
          
           )
           made
           the
           people
           and
           Subiectes
           of
           euerie
           one
           of
           vs
           ,
           our
           Superiors
           .
           For
           hauing
           taken
           occasion
           to
           revisite
           againe
           his
           bookes
           of
           Controuersies
           and
           to
           correct
           or
           explaine
           what
           hee
           findeth
           amisse
           or
           mistaketh
           in
           them
           ;
           in
           imitation
           of
           
             S.
             Augustine
          
           his
           retractions
           (
           for
           so
           he
           saith
           in
           his
           Preface
           )
           he
           doth
           in
           place
           of
           retracting
           any
           of
           his
           former
           errours
           ,
           or
           any
           matter
           of
           substance
           ;
           not
           retract
           ,
           but
           recant
           indeede
           ,
           I
           meane
           sing
           ouer
           againe
           ,
           and
           obstinatly
           confirme
           a
           number
           of
           the
           grossest
           of
           them
           .
           Among
           the
           which
           ,
           the
           exempting
           of
           all
           Church-men
           from
           subiection
           to
           any
           Temporall
           
           Prince
           ,
           and
           the
           setting
           vp
           not
           only
           of
           the
           Pope
           ,
           but
           euen
           of
           the
           People
           aboue
           their
           natural
           King
           ;
           are
           two
           of
           his
           maine
           points
           .
        
         
           As
           for
           the
           exemption
           of
           the
           Clerickes
           ;
           hee
           is
           so
           greedy
           there
           to
           proue
           that
           point
           ,
           as
           hee
           denieth
           Caesar
           to
           haue
           beene
           Pauls
           lawfull
           Iudge
           :
           
           contrary
           to
           the
           expresse
           Text
           ,
           and
           Pauls
           plaine
           Appellation
           ,
           and
           acknowledging
           him
           his
           Iudge
           ;
           besides
           his
           many
           times
           claiming
           to
           the
           Roman
           priviledges
           ,
           
           and
           avowing
           himselfe
           a
           Roman
           by
           freedome
           ;
           &
           therefore
           of
           necessitie
           a
           Subiect
           to
           the
           Roman
           Emperour●
           .
           But
           it
           is
           a
           wōder
           that
           these
           
             Roman
             Catholickes
          
           ,
           who
           vaunt
           themselues
           of
           the
           ancienty
           both
           of
           their
           doctrine
           and
           Church
           ,
           and
           reproach
           vs
           so
           bitterly
           of
           our
           Nouelties
           ,
           should
           not
           bee
           ashamed
           to
           make
           such
           a
           newe
           inept
           glosse
           as
           this
           vpon
           
             S.
             Pauls
          
           Text
           ;
           which
           as
           it
           is
           directly
           contrary
           to
           the
           Apostles
           words
           ,
           so
           is
           it
           without
           any
           warrant
           ,
           either
           of
           any
           ancient
           Councell
           ,
           or
           of
           so
           much
           as
           any
           one
           particular
           Father
           that
           euer
           interprets
           that
           place
           in
           this
           sort
           :
           Neither
           was
           it
           euer
           doubted
           by
           any
           Christian
           in
           the
           Primitiue
           Church
           ,
           that
           the
           Apostles
           ,
           or
           any
           other
           degree
           of
           Christians
           ,
           were
           subiect
           to
           the
           Emperour
           .
        
         
         
           And
           as
           for
           the
           setting
           vp
           of
           the
           People
           aboue
           their
           owne
           naturall
           King
           ,
           he
           bringeth
           in
           that
           principle
           of
           Sedition
           ,
           that
           he
           may
           thereby
           proue
           ,
           that
           Kings
           haue
           not
           their
           power
           and
           authoritie
           immediatlie
           from
           God
           ,
           as
           the
           Pope
           hath
           his
           :
           For
           euery
           King
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           is
           made
           and
           chosen
           by
           his
           people
           ;
           nay
           ,
           they
           do
           but
           so
           trāsferre
           their
           power
           in
           the
           Kings
           person
           ,
           as
           they
           do
           not
           withstanding
           retaine
           their
           habitual
           power
           in
           their
           owne
           hands
           ,
           which
           vpon
           certaine
           occasions
           they
           may
           actually
           take
           to
           themselues
           againe
           .
           This
           ,
           I
           am
           sure
           ,
           is
           an
           excellent
           ground
           in
           Diuinitie
           for
           all
           Rebels
           and
           rebellious
           people
           ,
           who
           are
           hereby
           allowed
           to
           rebel
           against
           their
           Princes
           ;
           and
           assume
           liberty
           vnto
           themselues
           ,
           when
           in
           their
           discretions
           they
           shal
           thinke
           it
           cōvenient
           .
        
         
           And
           amongst
           his
           other
           Testimonies
           for
           probation
           ,
           that
           all
           Kings
           are
           made
           &
           created
           by
           the
           People
           ;
           he
           alleadgeth
           the
           Creation
           of
           three
           Kings
           in
           Scripture
           ,
           
             Saul
             David
          
           and
           Ieroboam
           ;
           and
           though
           hee
           bee
           compelled
           by
           the
           expresse
           wordes
           of
           the
           Text
           ,
           to
           cōfesse
           ,
           that
           God
           by
           his
           Prophet
           Samuel
           annointed
           both
           a
           Saul
           and
           b
           David
           ;
           yet
           will
           he
           ,
           by
           the
           post-consent
           of
           the
           
           people
           ,
           proue
           that
           those
           Kings
           were
           not
           immediatly
           made
           by
           God
           ,
           but
           mediatlie
           by
           the
           people
           ;
           though
           he
           repeate
           thrise
           that
           word
           of
           Lott
           ,
           by
           the
           casting
           whereof
           he
           confesseth
           that
           Saul
           was
           chosen
           .
           And
           if
           the
           Election
           by
           Lott
           be
           not
           an
           immediate
           Election
           from
           God
           ;
           
           thē
           was
           not
           Matthias
           ,
           who
           was
           so
           chosen
           and
           made
           an
           Apostle
           ,
           immediatly
           chosen
           by
           God
           :
           &
           consequently
           ,
           he
           that
           sitteth
           in
           the
           Apostolike
           Sea
           cānot
           for
           shame
           claime
           to
           be
           immediatly
           chosen
           by
           God
           ,
           if
           Matthias
           (
           that
           was
           one
           of
           the
           twelue
           Apostles
           ,
           supplying
           Iudas
           his
           place
           )
           was
           not
           so
           chosen
           .
           But
           as
           it
           were
           a
           blasphemous
           impietie
           ,
           to
           doubt
           that
           Matthias
           was
           immediatlie
           chosen
           by
           God
           ,
           and
           yet
           was
           he
           chosen
           by
           the
           casting
           of
           Lots
           ,
           as
           Saul
           was
           :
           so
           is
           it
           well
           enough
           knowne
           to
           some
           of
           you
           (
           my
           louing
           Brethren
           )
           by
           what
           holy
           Spirit
           or
           casting
           of
           Lots
           the
           Popes
           vse
           to
           be
           elected
           ;
           the
           Colledge
           of
           Cardinals
           ,
           his
           Electors
           ,
           having
           been
           divided
           into
           two
           mightie
           factions
           euer
           since
           long
           before
           my
           time
           ;
           &
           in
           place
           of
           casting
           of
           Lotts
           ,
           great
           fat
           pensions
           being
           cast
           into
           some
           of
           their
           greedy
           mouthes
           for
           the
           Election
           of
           the
           Pope
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           partiall
           homours
           of
           Princes
           .
           
           But
           I
           doe
           most
           of
           all
           wonder
           at
           the
           weaknesse
           of
           his
           memory
           :
           for
           in
           this
           place
           he
           maketh
           the
           post-consent
           of
           the
           people
           to
           bee
           the
           thing
           that
           made
           both
           these
           Kings
           ,
           notwithstanding
           of
           their
           preceding
           inauguration
           &
           anointment
           by
           the
           Prophet
           at
           Gods
           commandement
           ;
           forgetting
           that
           in
           the
           beginning
           of
           this
           same
           little
           booke
           of
           his
           ,
           answering
           one
           that
           alledgeth
           a
           sentence
           of
           
             S.
             Cyprian
          
           ,
           to
           proue
           that
           the
           Bishops
           were
           iudged
           by
           the
           people
           in
           Cyprians
           time
           ,
           he
           there
           confesseth
           ,
           that
           by
           these
           words
           ,
           the
           
             consent
             of
             the
             people
          
           to
           the
           Bishops
           Election
           must
           be
           onlie
           vnderstood
           .
           Nor
           will
           he
           there
           any
           waies
           be
           moued
           to
           graunt
           ,
           that
           the
           peoples
           power
           ,
           in
           consenting
           to
           or
           refusing
           the
           Electiō
           of
           a
           Bishop
           ,
           should
           be
           so
           vnderstood
           ,
           as
           that
           therby
           they
           haue
           
             power
             to
             elect
             Bishops
          
           :
           And
           yet
           do
           these
           words
           of
           Cyprian
           seeme
           to
           bee
           farre
           stronger
           ,
           for
           granting
           the
           peoples
           power
           to
           elect
           Church-men
           ,
           then
           any
           wordes
           that
           hee
           alleageth
           out
           of
           Scripture
           are
           for
           the
           peoples
           power
           in
           electing
           a
           King.
           For
           the
           very
           words
           of
           Cyprian
           by
           himselfe
           there
           cited
           are
           ,
           
           That
           
             th●
             very
             people
             haue
             principally
             the
             power
             ,
             either
             to
             choose
             such
             Priests
             as
             are
             worthy
             ,
             or
             to
             refuse
             
             such
             as
             are
             vnworthy
             :
          
           And
           ,
           I
           hope
           ,
           he
           can
           neuer
           proue
           by
           the
           Scripture
           ,
           that
           it
           had
           beene
           lawfull
           to
           the
           people
           of
           Israel
           ,
           or
           that
           it
           was
           left
           in
           their
           choise
           ,
           to
           haue
           admitted
           or
           refused
           Saul
           or
           David
           at
           their
           pleasure
           ,
           after
           that
           the
           Prophet
           had
           anointed
           them
           ,
           and
           presented
           them
           vnto
           them
           .
        
         
           Thus
           ye
           see
           how
           little
           he
           careth
           (
           euen
           in
           so
           little
           a
           volume
           )
           to
           contradict
           himselfe
           ,
           so
           it
           may
           make
           for
           his
           purpose
           ;
           making
           the
           consent
           of
           the
           people
           to
           signifie
           their
           
             power
             of
             Election
          
           in
           the
           making
           of
           Kings
           :
           though
           in
           the
           making
           of
           Bishops
           ,
           by
           the
           peoples
           consent
           ,
           their
           approbation
           of
           a
           deed
           done
           by
           others
           must
           only
           be
           vnderstood
           .
           And
           as
           for
           his
           example
           of
           Ieroboams
           election
           to
           be
           King
           ;
           hee
           knoweth
           well
           enough
           ▪
           
           that
           Ieroboam
           was
           made
           King
           in
           a
           popular
           mutinous
           tumult
           &
           rebellion
           ▪
           onely
           permitted
           by
           God
           ,
           &
           that
           in
           his
           wrath
           ,
           both
           against
           these
           two
           Kings
           and
           their
           people
           .
           But
           if
           he
           wil
           needs
           helpe
           himselfe
           ,
           against
           al
           rules
           of
           Divinity
           ,
           with
           such
           an
           extraordinary
           example
           for
           proofe
           of
           a
           generall
           Rule
           ;
           why
           is
           it
           not
           as
           lawfull
           for
           vs
           Kings
           to
           oppose
           herevnto
           the
           example
           of
           Iehu
           his
           Inauguratiō
           to
           the
           kingdome
           ;
           
           who
           vpon
           the
           Prophets
           private
           anointment
           
           of
           him
           ,
           and
           that
           in
           most
           secret
           manner
           ,
           tooke
           presently
           the
           Kings
           office
           vpon
           him
           ,
           without
           ever
           craving
           any
           sorte
           of
           approbation
           from
           the
           people
           ?
        
         
           And
           thus
           may
           yee
           nowe
           cleerely
           see
           ,
           how
           deepe
           the
           claime
           of
           the
           Babylonian
           Monarch
           toucheth
           vs
           in
           all
           our
           common
           interest
           :
           for
           (
           as
           I
           haue
           already
           told
           )
           the
           Pope
           ,
           nor
           any
           of
           his
           Vassals
           ,
           I
           meane
           Church-men
           ,
           must
           be
           subiect
           to
           no
           Kings
           nor
           Princes
           :
           and
           yet
           all
           Kings
           and
           their
           Vassals
           must
           not
           onely
           bee
           subiect
           to
           the
           Pope
           ,
           but
           even
           to
           their
           owne
           people
           .
           And
           now
           ,
           what
           a
           large
           libertie
           is
           by
           this
           doctrine
           lefte
           to
           Church-men
           ,
           to
           hatch
           or
           foster
           any
           treasonable
           attempts
           against
           Princes
           ;
           I
           leaue
           it
           to
           your
           considerations
           ,
           since
           do
           what
           they
           will
           ,
           they
           are
           accountable
           to
           none
           of
           vs
           :
           nay
           ,
           all
           their
           treasonable
           practises
           must
           be
           accounted
           works
           of
           pietie
           ,
           and
           they
           (
           being
           iustly
           punished
           for
           the
           same
           )
           must
           be
           presently
           inrolled
           in
           the
           list
           of
           Martyrs
           and
           Saints
           ;
           like
           as
           our
           new
           printed
           Martyrologie
           hath
           put
           Garnet
           and
           Ouldcorne
           in
           the
           Register
           of
           English
           Martyrs
           abroad
           ,
           that
           were
           hanged
           at
           home
           for
           Treason
           against
           the
           Crowne
           and
           whole
           State
           of
           England
           :
           so
           as
           I
           may
           
           iustly
           with
           Isaiah
           ,
           pronounce
           a
           
             Woe
             to
             thē
             that
             speake
             good
             of
             evill
             ,
             and
             evill
             of
             good
          
           ;
           
           
             which
             put
             light
             for
             darknesse
             ,
             and
             darknesse
             for
             light
          
           ;
           
           
             which
             iustifie
             the
             wicked
             for
             a
             reward
             ,
             and
             take
             away
             the
             righteousnes
             of
             the
             righteous
             frō
             him
             .
          
           For
           evē
           as
           in
           the
           time
           of
           the
           greatest
           blindnesse
           in
           Popery
           ,
           though
           a
           man
           should
           finde
           his
           wife
           or
           his
           daughter
           lying
           a
           bed
           in
           her
           Confessors
           armes
           ;
           yet
           was
           it
           not
           lawfull
           for
           him
           so
           much
           as
           to
           suspect
           that
           the
           Frier
           had
           any
           errande
           there
           ,
           but
           to
           Confesse
           and
           instruct
           her
           :
           Even
           so
           ,
           though
           Iesuits
           practising
           in
           Treason
           be
           sufficiently
           verified
           ,
           &
           that
           themselues
           cannot
           but
           cōfesse
           it
           ;
           yet
           must
           they
           be
           accoūted
           to
           suffer
           Martyrdome
           for
           the
           Faith
           ,
           and
           their
           blood
           worke
           miracles
           ,
           &
           frame
           a
           
             stramineum
             argumentum
          
           vpon
           strawes
           ▪
           when
           their
           heads
           are
           standing
           aloft
           ,
           withered
           by
           the
           Sunne
           and
           the
           wind
           ,
           a
           publike
           spectacle
           for
           the
           eternall
           commemoration
           of
           their
           treacherie
           .
           Yea
           ,
           one
           of
           the
           reasons
           ,
           that
           is
           give
           in
           the
           Printers
           Epistle
           of
           the
           Colonian
           edition
           of
           the
           Cardinall
           or
           his
           Chaplaines
           pamphlet
           ,
           why
           he
           doth
           the
           more
           willingly
           print
           it
           ,
           is
           ;
           because
           that
           the
           innocency
           of
           that
           most
           holie
           and
           constant
           man
           
             Henry
             Garnet
          
           ,
           is
           declared
           
           and
           set
           forth
           in
           that
           booke
           ;
           against
           whom
           ,
           some
           
             (
             he
             knew
             not
             who
          
           )
           had
           scattered
           a
           false
           rumour
           of
           his
           guiltinesse
           of
           the
           English
           treason
           .
        
         
           But
           ,
           Lord
           ,
           what
           an
           impudencie
           or
           wilfull
           ignorance
           is
           this
           ,
           that
           he
           ,
           who
           was
           so
           publikely
           and
           solemnely
           convicted
           &
           executed
           ,
           vpon
           his
           owne
           so
           cleare
           ,
           vnforced
           &
           often
           repeated
           confession
           ,
           of
           his
           knowledge
           &
           cōcealing
           of
           that
           horrible
           Treason
           ;
           should
           now
           be
           said
           to
           haue
           a
           certaine
           rumour
           spred
           vpon
           him
           of
           his
           guiltinesse
           ,
           by
           
             I
             know
             not
             who
          
           ?
           with
           so
           many
           attributes
           of
           godlinesse
           ,
           constancie
           and
           innocencie
           bestowed
           vpon
           him
           ,
           as
           if
           publike
           Sentences
           &
           Executions
           of
           Iustice
           ,
           were
           rumors
           of
           
             I
             know
             not
             who
          
           .
           Indeed
           ,
           I
           must
           confesse
           ,
           the
           book
           it selfe
           sheweth
           a
           great
           affection
           to
           performe
           ,
           what
           is
           thus
           promised
           in
           the
           Preface
           thereof
           :
           for
           in
           two
           or
           three
           places
           therin
           ,
           is
           there
           most
           honorable
           lying
           mention
           made
           of
           that
           strawe-Saint
           ;
           wherein
           ,
           though
           hee
           confesse
           that
           Garnet
           was
           vpon
           the
           foreknowledge
           of
           the
           Powder-Treason
           ,
           yet
           in
           regard
           it
           was
           (
           as
           he
           saith
           )
           only
           vnder
           the
           Seale
           of
           Confession
           ,
           hee
           sticketh
           not
           to
           praise
           him
           for
           his
           concealing
           thereof
           ,
           and
           would
           gladly
           
           giue
           him
           the
           crown
           of
           glory
           for
           the
           same
           :
           not
           being
           ashamed
           to
           proclaime
           it
           as
           a
           principall
           head
           of
           Catholique
           doctrine
           ▪
           
             That
             the
             secret
             of
             Sacramentall
             confession
             ought
             not
             to
             be
             revealed
             ,
             not
             for
             the
             eschewing
             of
             whatsoever
             evill
             .
          
           But
           how
           damnable
           this
           doctrine
           is
           ,
           &
           how
           dangerously
           preiudiciall
           to
           all
           Princes
           and
           States
           ;
           I
           leaue
           it
           to
           you
           to
           iudge
           ,
           whom
           all
           it
           most
           highly
           concerneth
           .
           For
           although
           it
           be
           true
           ,
           that
           when
           the
           Schoole-men
           came
           to
           bee
           Doctors
           in
           the
           Church
           ,
           and
           to
           marre
           the
           old
           grounds
           in
           Diuinity
           by
           sowing
           in
           amongst
           them
           their
           Philosophicall
           distinctions
           ;
           though
           they
           (
           I
           say
           )
           do
           mainetaine
           ,
           That
           whatsoeuer
           thing
           it
           told
           a
           Cōfessor
           vnder
           the
           vaile
           of
           confession
           ,
           how
           dangerous
           soever
           the
           matter
           be
           ,
           yet
           he
           is
           bound
           to
           conceale
           the
           parties
           name
           :
           yet
           doe
           none
           of
           them
           ,
           I
           meane
           of
           the
           old
           Schoolmen
           ,
           deny
           that
           if
           a
           matter
           be
           revealed
           vnto
           thē
           ,
           the
           concealing
           wherof
           may
           breed
           a
           great
           or
           publike
           danger
           ;
           but
           that
           in
           that
           case
           the
           Confessor
           may
           disclose
           the
           matter
           ,
           though
           not
           the
           person
           ,
           and
           by
           some
           indirect
           meanes
           make
           it
           come
           to
           light
           ▪
           that
           the
           daunger
           thereof
           may
           be
           prevented
           .
           But
           that
           no
           treason
           nor
           devilish
           plot
           ,
           
           though
           it
           should
           tende
           to
           the
           rvi●e
           or
           exterminion
           of
           a
           whole
           Kingdome
           ,
           must
           be
           reuealed
           ,
           if
           it
           bee
           tolde
           vnder
           Confession
           ,
           no
           not
           the
           matter
           so
           farre
           indirectly
           ,
           disclosed
           ,
           as
           may
           giue
           occasion
           for
           preventing
           the
           danger
           thereof
           :
           though
           it
           agree
           with
           the
           conceit
           of
           some
           three
           or
           fowre
           new
           Iesuited
           Doctors
           ,
           it
           is
           such
           a
           new
           and
           dangerous
           head
           of
           doctrine
           ,
           as
           no
           King
           nor
           State
           can
           liue
           in
           securitie
           where
           that
           Position
           is
           maintained
           .
        
         
           And
           now
           ,
           that
           I
           may
           as
           well
           proue
           him
           a
           lyar
           
             in
             facto
          
           ,
           in
           his
           narration
           of
           this
           particular
           History
           ;
           as
           I
           haue
           shewed
           him
           to
           be
           
             in
             iure
          
           ,
           by
           this
           his
           damnable
           and
           false
           ground
           in
           Divinity
           :
           I
           will
           truely
           informe
           you
           of
           Garnets
           case
           ,
           which
           is
           far
           otherwise
           then
           this
           Answerer
           alleadgeth
           .
           For
           first
           ,
           it
           can
           never
           bee
           accounted
           a
           thing
           vnder
           Confession
           ,
           which
           he
           that
           reveales
           it
           doth
           not
           discover
           with
           a
           remorse
           ,
           accounting
           it
           a
           sinne
           whereof
           he
           repenteth
           him
           ;
           but
           by
           the
           contrary
           ,
           discouer●
           it
           as
           a
           good
           motion
           ,
           and
           is
           therein
           not
           disswaded
           by
           hi●
           Confessor
           ,
           nor
           any
           penance
           inioyned
           him
           for
           the
           same
           :
           and
           in
           this
           forme
           was
           this
           Treason
           revealed
           to
           Garnet
           ,
           as
           himselfe
           confessed
           .
           And
           next
           ,
           though
           he
           stood
           
           long
           vpon
           it
           ,
           that
           it
           was
           revealed
           vnto
           him
           vnder
           the
           vaile
           of
           Confession
           ,
           in
           respect
           it
           was
           done
           in
           that
           time
           ,
           while
           as
           the
           partie
           was
           making
           his
           Confession
           vnto
           him
           ;
           Yet
           at
           the
           last
           he
           did
           freely
           confesse
           ▪
           that
           the
           partie
           reuealed
           it
           vnto
           him
           as
           they
           were
           walking
           ,
           and
           not
           in
           the
           time
           of
           Confession
           ▪
           But
           (
           he
           said
           )
           hee
           delivered
           i●
           vnto
           him
           vnder
           the
           greatest
           S●ale
           that
           might
           be
           ,
           and
           so
           hee
           tooke
           that
           he
           mean●
           by
           the
           Seale
           of
           Confession
           ;
           And
           it
           had
           (
           as
           he
           thought
           )
           a
           relation
           to
           Confession
           ;
           in
           regard
           that
           he
           was
           that
           partie
           ▪
           Confessor●
           and
           had
           taken
           his
           Confession
           sometimes
           before
           ,
           and
           was
           to
           take
           it
           againe
           within
           few
           daies
           thereafter
           .
           Hee
           also
           said
           that
           hee
           pretended
           to
           the
           partie
           ,
           that
           he
           would
           not
           conceale
           it
           from
           his
           Superior
           .
           And
           further
           it
           is
           to
           be
           noted
           ,
           that
           hee
           confessed
           ,
           that
           two
           diuers
           persons
           conferred
           with
           him
           anent
           this
           Treason
           ;
           and
           that
           when
           the
           one
           of
           them
           ,
           which
           was
           Catesby
           ▪
           conferred
           with
           him
           thereupon
           ,
           it
           was
           in
           the
           other
           parties
           presence
           and
           hearing
           &
           what
           a
           Confession
           can
           this
           be
           in
           the
           hearing
           of
           a
           third
           person
           ?
           And
           how
           farre
           his
           last
           words
           (
           whereof
           our
           Answerer
           so
           much
           vaunts
           him
           )
           did
           disproue
           it
           to
           haue
           beene
           
           vnder
           Confession
           ,
           the
           Earle
           of
           North-hamptons
           booke
           doth
           beare
           witnesse
           .
        
         
           Now
           as
           to
           the
           other
           parties
           name
           ,
           that
           reuealed
           the
           Powder-Treason
           vnto
           him
           ,
           it
           was
           Greenwell
           the
           Iesuite
           ;
           and
           so
           a
           Iesuite
           reuealed
           to
           a
           Iesuite
           this
           treasonable
           Plot
           ,
           the
           Iesuite
           reuealer
           not
           shewing
           any
           remorse
           ,
           and
           the
           Iesuite
           whom
           to
           it
           was
           revealed
           not
           so
           much
           as
           inioyning
           him
           any
           penance
           for
           the
           same
           .
           And
           that
           ye
           may
           knowe
           that
           more
           Iesuits
           were
           also
           vpon
           the
           partie
           ,
           Owldcorne
           the
           other
           Powder-Martyr
           ,
           after
           the
           misgiving
           and
           discouerie
           of
           that
           Treason
           ,
           preached
           consolatory
           doctrine
           to
           his
           Catholike
           auditory
           ;
           exhorting
           them
           not
           to
           faint
           for
           the
           misgiuing
           of
           this
           enterprise
           ,
           nor
           to
           thinke
           the
           worse
           thereof
           that
           it
           succeeded
           not
           ;
           alleadging
           divers
           Presidents
           of
           such
           godly
           enterprises
           that
           misgaue
           in
           like
           manner
           :
           especially
           ,
           one
           of
           S.
           Lewis
           King
           of
           France
           ,
           who
           in
           his
           second
           iourney
           to
           the
           Holy-land
           died
           by
           the
           way
           ,
           the
           greatest
           part
           of
           his
           army
           being
           destroyed
           by
           the
           plague
           ;
           his
           first
           iourney
           hauing
           likewise
           misgiuen
           him
           by
           the
           Soldans
           taking
           of
           him
           :
           exhorting
           them
           thereupon
           not
           to
           giue
           over
           ,
           but
           still
           to
           hope
           that
           God
           
           would
           blesse
           their
           enterprise
           at
           some
           other
           time
           ,
           though
           this
           did
           faile
           .
        
         
           Thus
           see
           yee
           now
           ,
           with
           what
           boldnes
           and
           impudencie
           hee
           hath
           belied
           the
           publikely
           knowen
           veritie
           in
           this
           errand
           ;
           both
           in
           auowing
           generally
           that
           no
           Iesuite
           was
           any
           waies
           guiltie
           of
           that
           Treason
           ,
           for
           so
           he
           affirmeth
           in
           his
           booke
           ;
           and
           also
           that
           Garnet
           knewe
           nothing
           thereof
           ,
           but
           vnder
           the
           Seale
           of
           Confession
           .
           But
           if
           this
           were
           the
           first
           lie
           of
           the
           affaires
           of
           this
           State
           ,
           which
           my
           fugitiue
           Priests
           &
           Iesuits
           haue
           coined
           and
           spread
           abroad
           ;
           I
           could
           charme
           them
           of
           it
           ,
           as
           the
           prouerbe
           is
           .
           But
           as
           well
           the
           walles
           of
           divers
           Monasteries
           and
           Iesuites
           Colleges
           abroad
           ,
           are
           filled
           with
           the
           painting
           of
           such
           lying
           histories
           ,
           as
           also
           the
           bookes
           of
           our
           said
           Fugitiues
           are
           farced
           with
           such
           sort
           of
           shamelesse
           stuffe
           ;
           such
           are
           the
           innumerable
           sorts
           of
           torments
           &
           cruell
           deaths
           ,
           that
           they
           record
           their
           Martyrs
           to
           haue
           suffered
           here
           ;
           some
           torne
           at
           foure
           Horses
           ;
           some
           sowed
           in
           Beares
           skins
           and
           then
           killed
           with
           Dogges
           ;
           nay
           ,
           women
           haue
           not
           beene
           spared
           (
           they
           say
           )
           &
           a
           thousand
           other
           strange
           fictions
           ;
           the
           vanities
           of
           all
           which
           I
           will
           in
           two
           wordes
           discouer
           vnto
           you
           .
        
         
         
           First
           ,
           as
           for
           the
           cause
           of
           their
           punishment
           ,
           I
           doe
           constantly
           maintaine
           that
           which
           I
           haue
           said
           in
           my
           Apologie
           :
           That
           no
           man
           ,
           either
           in
           my
           time
           or
           in
           the
           late
           Queens
           ,
           euer
           died
           here
           for
           his
           conscience
           .
           For
           let
           him
           bee
           neuer
           so
           devout
           a
           Papist
           ,
           nay
           ,
           though
           he
           professe
           the
           same
           neuer
           so
           constantly
           ,
           his
           life
           is
           in
           no
           danger
           by
           the
           Law
           ,
           if
           hee
           breake
           not
           out
           into
           some
           outward
           acte
           expresly
           against
           the
           wordes
           of
           the
           Law
           ;
           or
           plot
           not
           some
           vnlawfull
           or
           dangerous
           practise
           or
           attempt
           ;
           Priests
           &
           Popish
           Churchmen
           only
           excepted
           ,
           that
           receaue
           Orders
           beyond
           the
           seas
           ;
           who
           for
           the
           manifold
           treasonable
           practises
           that
           they
           haue
           kindled
           &
           plotted
           in
           this
           countrey
           are
           discharged
           to
           come
           home
           againe
           vnder
           paine
           of
           Treason
           ,
           after
           their
           receauing
           of
           the
           said
           Orders
           abroad
           ,
           and
           yet
           ,
           without
           some
           other
           guilt
           in
           them
           then
           their
           bare
           home-comming
           ,
           haue
           none
           of
           them
           bin
           ever
           put
           to
           death
           .
           And
           next
           ,
           for
           the
           cruell
           torments
           and
           strange
           sorts
           of
           death
           that
           they
           say
           so
           many
           of
           them
           haue
           bin
           put
           vnto
           ;
           if
           there
           were
           no
           more
           but
           the
           Law
           &
           continually
           obserued
           custome
           of
           England
           ,
           these
           many
           hundreth
           yeares
           ,
           in
           all
           criminall
           matters
           ,
           it
           will
           sufficiently
           
           serue
           to
           refute
           all
           these
           monstrous
           lies
           :
           for
           no
           tortures
           are
           ever
           vsed
           here
           ,
           but
           the
           Manicles
           or
           the
           Racke
           ,
           and
           these
           never
           but
           in
           cases
           of
           high
           Treason
           ;
           and
           all
           sorts
           of
           Traitours
           die
           but
           one
           manner
           of
           death
           here
           ,
           whether
           they
           be
           Papist
           or
           Protestant
           Traitors
           ;
           Queene
           Maries
           time
           only
           excepted
           .
           For
           then
           indeed
           no
           sorts
           of
           cruell
           deaths
           were
           spared
           vnexecuted
           vpon
           men
           women
           and
           children
           professing
           our
           Religion
           :
           yea
           ,
           even
           against
           the
           Laws
           of
           God
           and
           Nature
           ,
           women
           with
           child
           were
           put
           to
           cruell
           death
           for
           their
           profession
           ;
           and
           a
           liuing
           child
           falling
           out
           of
           the
           mothers
           belly
           ,
           was
           throwne
           in
           the
           same
           fire
           againe
           that
           consumed
           the
           mother
           .
           But
           these
           tyrannous
           persecutions
           were
           done
           by
           the
           Bishops
           of
           that
           time
           ,
           vnder
           the
           warrant
           of
           the
           Popes
           authoritie
           ;
           &
           therefore
           were
           not
           subiect
           to
           that
           constant
           order
           and
           formes
           of
           execution
           ,
           which
           as
           they
           are
           here
           established
           by
           our
           Laws
           &
           customes
           ,
           so
           are
           they
           accordingly
           obserued
           in
           the
           punishment
           of
           all
           criminals
           .
           For
           all
           Priests
           and
           Popish
           Traitours
           here
           receiue
           their
           Iudgements
           in
           the
           temporall
           Courts
           ,
           and
           so
           doe
           neuer
           exceed
           those
           formes
           of
           execution
           which
           are
           prescribed
           by
           the
           Law
           ,
           
           or
           approued
           by
           continuall
           custome
           .
           One
           thing
           is
           also
           to
           be
           marked
           in
           this
           case
           ;
           that
           strangers
           are
           never
           called
           in
           question
           here
           for
           their
           religion
           ,
           which
           is
           farre
           otherwise
           (
           I
           hope
           )
           in
           any
           place
           where
           the
           Inquisition
           domines
           .
        
         
           But
           hauing
           now
           too
           much
           wearied
           you
           with
           this
           long
           discourse
           ,
           whereby
           I
           haue
           made
           you
           plainly
           see
           ,
           that
           the
           wrong
           done
           vnto
           mee
           in
           particular
           ,
           first
           by
           the
           
             Popes
             Breues
          
           ,
           and
           then
           by
           these
           Libellers
           ,
           doth
           as
           deepely
           interest
           you
           all
           in
           generall
           ,
           that
           are
           Kings
           ,
           free
           Princes
           ,
           or
           States
           ,
           as
           it
           doth
           me
           in
           particular
           :
           I
           will
           now
           conclude
           ,
           with
           my
           humble
           prayers
           to
           God
           ,
           that
           hee
           will
           waken
           vs
           vp
           all
           out
           of
           that
           Lethargike
           slumber
           of
           Securitie
           ,
           wherein
           our
           Predecessors
           and
           we
           haue
           lien
           so
           long
           ;
           and
           that
           we
           may
           first
           grauely
           consider
           ,
           what
           wee
           are
           bound
           in
           conscience
           to
           doe
           for
           the
           planting
           and
           spreading
           of
           the
           true
           worship
           of
           God
           ,
           according
           to
           his
           revealed
           will
           ,
           in
           all
           our
           Dominions
           ;
           therein
           hearing
           the
           voice
           of
           our
           onely
           Pastor
           (
           for
           his
           sheepe
           will
           knowe
           his
           voice
           ,
           as
           himselfe
           saith
           )
           &
           not
           following
           the
           vaine
           ,
           
           corrupt
           and
           changeable
           traditions
           of
           men
           .
           And
           next
           ,
           that
           we
           may
           providently
           look
           to
           the
           
           securitie
           of
           our
           owne
           States
           ,
           and
           not
           suffer
           this
           encroching
           
             Babylonian
             Monarch
          
           to
           winne
           stil
           ground
           vpon
           vs.
           And
           if
           GOD
           hath
           so
           mercifully
           dealt
           with
           vs
           ,
           that
           are
           his
           Lieutenants
           vpon
           earth
           ,
           as
           that
           hee
           hath
           ioined
           his
           cause
           with
           our
           interest
           ,
           the
           spirituall
           libertie
           of
           the
           Gospell
           with
           our
           temporall
           freedome
           :
           with
           what
           zeale
           and
           courage
           may
           we
           then
           imbrace
           this
           work
           :
           for
           our
           labours
           herein
           being
           assured
           ,
           to
           receiue
           at
           the
           last
           the
           eternall
           and
           inestimable
           reward
           of
           felicitie
           in
           the
           kingdome
           of
           Heaven
           ;
           &
           in
           the
           meane
           time
           to
           procure
           vnto
           our selues
           a
           temporall
           securitie
           ,
           in
           our
           temporal
           Kingdomes
           in
           this
           world
           .
        
         
           As
           for
           so
           many
           of
           you
           as
           are
           already
           perswaded
           of
           that
           Truth
           which
           I
           professe
           ,
           though
           differing
           among
           your selues
           in
           some
           particular
           points
           ;
           I
           thinke
           little
           perswasion
           should
           moue
           you
           to
           this
           holy
           and
           wise
           Resolution
           :
           Our
           Greatnes
           ,
           nor
           our
           number
           ,
           praised
           bee
           GOD
           ,
           being
           not
           so
           cōtemptible
           ,
           but
           that
           we
           may
           shew
           good
           example
           to
           our
           neighbours
           ;
           since
           almost
           the
           halfe
           of
           all
           Christian
           people
           and
           of
           all
           sorts
           and
           degrees
           ,
           are
           of
           our
           profession
           ;
           I
           meane
           ,
           all
           gone
           out
           of
           Babylon
           ,
           even
           from
           Kings
           and
           free
           Princes
           ,
           to
           the
           meanest
           
           sort
           of
           people
           .
           But
           aboue
           all
           (
           my
           loving
           Brethren
           and
           Cosins
           )
           keepe
           fast
           the
           vnity
           of
           Faith
           amongst
           your selues
           ;
           Reiect
           a
           questions
           of
           Genealogies
           and
           b
           
             Aniles
             fabulas
          
           ,
           as
           Paul
           saith
           ;
           Let
           not
           the
           foolish
           heate
           of
           your
           Preachers
           for
           idle
           Controuersies
           or
           indifferent
           things
           ,
           teare
           asunder
           that
           Mysticall
           Body
           ,
           whereof
           yee
           are
           a
           part
           ,
           since
           the
           very
           coat
           of
           him
           whose
           members
           we
           are
           was
           without
           a
           seam●
           ;
           and
           let
           not
           our
           diuision
           breed
           a
           slander
           of
           our
           faith
           ,
           and
           bee
           a
           word
           of
           reproach
           in
           the
           mouths
           of
           our
           aduersaries
           ,
           who
           make
           Vnitie
           to
           be
           one
           of
           the
           speciall
           notes
           of
           the
           true
           Church
           .
        
         
           And
           as
           for
           you
           (
           my
           loving
           Brethren
           &
           Cosins
           )
           whom
           it
           hath
           not
           yet
           pleased
           GOD
           to
           illuminate
           with
           the
           light
           of
           his
           Truth
           ;
           I
           can
           but
           humbly
           pray
           with
           Elizeus
           ,
           that
           it
           would
           please
           GOD
           to
           open
           your
           eies
           ,
           that
           yee
           might
           see
           what
           innumerable
           and
           invincible
           armies
           of
           Angels
           are
           euer
           prepared
           and
           ready
           to
           defend
           the
           truth
           of
           GOD
           ;
           &
           with
           
             S.
             Paul
          
           I
           wish
           ,
           that
           ye
           were
           as
           I
           am
           in
           this
           case
           ;
           especially
           that
           ye
           would
           search
           the
           Scriptures
           ,
           
           &
           ground
           your
           Faith
           vpon
           your
           own
           certaine
           knowledge
           ,
           &
           not
           vpō
           the
           report
           of
           others
           ;
           since
           euery
           
             Man
             
             must
             be
             safe
             by
             his
             〈◊〉
             faith
             .
          
           But
           ,
           leauing
           this
           to
           GOD
           his
           mercifull
           providence
           in
           his
           due
           time
           ,
           
           I
           haue
           good
           reason
           to
           remember
           you
           ,
           to
           maintaine
           the
           ancient
           liberties
           of
           your
           Crownes
           and
           Common-wealths
           ,
           not
           suffering
           any
           vnder
           GOD
           to
           set
           himselfe
           vp
           aboue
           you
           ;
           and
           therein
           to
           imitate
           your
           owne
           noble
           Preaecessors
           ,
           who
           (
           even
           in
           the
           daies
           of
           greatest
           blindnesse
           )
           did
           divers
           times
           couragiously
           oppose
           themselues
           to
           the
           incroaching
           ambition
           of
           Popes
           .
           Yea
           ,
           some
           of
           your
           Kingdomes
           haue
           in
           all
           ages
           maintained
           ,
           and
           without
           any
           interruption
           enioyed
           your
           liberty
           ,
           against
           the
           most
           ambitious
           Popes
           .
           And
           some
           haue
           of
           very
           late
           had
           an
           evident
           proofe
           of
           the
           Popes
           ambitious
           aspiring
           ouer
           your
           temporall
           power
           ;
           wherein
           yee
           haue
           constantly
           maintained
           and
           defended
           your
           lawfull
           freedome
           ,
           to
           your
           immortall
           honour
           .
           And
           therefore
           I
           hartily
           wish
           you
           all
           ,
           to
           doe
           in
           this
           case
           the
           office
           of
           godly
           and
           iust
           Kings
           and
           earthly
           Iudges
           :
           which
           consisteth
           not
           onely
           in
           not
           wronging
           or
           invading
           the
           liberties
           of
           any
           other
           person
           (
           for
           to
           that
           wil
           I
           neuer
           presse
           to
           perswade
           you
           )
           but
           also
           in
           defending
           &
           mantaining
           these
           lawfull
           liberties
           where
           with
           GOD
           
           hath
           indued
           you
           .
           For
           ye
           ,
           whom
           GOD
           hath
           ordained
           to
           protect
           your
           people
           from
           iniuries
           ,
           should
           bee
           ashamed
           to
           suffer
           your selues
           to
           be
           wronged
           by
           any
           .
           And
           thus
           ,
           assuring
           myselfe
           ,
           that
           yee
           will
           with
           a
           setled
           iudgement
           free
           of
           preiudice
           ,
           weigh
           the
           reasons
           of
           this
           my
           Discourse
           ,
           and
           accept
           my
           plainenesse
           in
           good
           part
           ,
           gracing
           this
           my
           Apologie
           with
           your
           fauours
           ,
           and
           yet
           no
           longer
           then
           till
           it
           shall
           bee
           iustly
           &
           worthily
           refuted
           ▪
           I
           end
           ,
           with
           my
           earnest
           prayers
           to
           the
           Almightie
           for
           your
           prosperities
           ,
           and
           that
           after
           your
           happy
           temporall
           Raignes
           in
           earth
           ,
           yee
           may
           liue
           &
           raigne
           in
           Heaven
           with
           him
           for
           ever
           .
        
         
      
    
     
       
         Notes, typically marginal, from the original text
         
           Notes for div A20930-e90
           
             *
             Luc.
             2.
             
          
           
             *
             Ierem.
             8.7
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A20930-e1260
           
             *
             Hosea
             .
             2.19.20
             .
          
           
             *
             
               Lib.
               de
               bono
               coniugali
               cap.
            
             21.
             
          
           
             *
             Ephes.
             5.
             
             Psal.
             45.
             
             Rev.
             19.
             
          
           
             *
             1.
             
             Tim.
             3.2.4
             .
          
           
             *
             Tit.
             80
             
               de
               concessione
               praebendarū
            
             .
          
           
             *
             
               Can.
               licet
               Tit.
            
             2.
             
               de
               cōstit
               .
               in
               Sexto
            
             .
          
           
             *
             
               Can.
               Proposuit
            
             .
          
           
             *
             
               Hieron
               .
               ad
               Eustochium
            
             .
          
           
             *
             
               Tho.
               in
            
             22.
             qu.
             88.
             art
             .
             2.
             
          
           
             *
             
               Bell.
               lib.
               de
               Clericis
               .
               c.
            
             18
             
          
           
             Lib.
             2.
             
               de
               Mon.
               cap.
            
             31
             
          
           
             *
             Phil.
             2.13
             .
          
           
             *
             Cap.
             34.
             lib.
             2.
             
               de
               Mon.
            
             
          
           
             *
             1.
             
             Tim.
             5
             9
             
          
           
             *
             
               Can.
               hac
               ratione
               caus
            
             .
             31.
             quaest
             .
             1
             a.
             
          
           
             *
             Rom.
             1.
             
          
           
             *
             Lev.
             18.20
             
          
           
             *
             Gal
             4.
             v.
             10
             
          
           
             Mat.
             15.
             v.
             11
             
          
           
             *
             Ep.
             1.
             
             Her.
             
          
           
             *
             Luk.
             11.
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A20930-e6900
           
             *
             1.
             
             Tim.
             4.1
             .
          
           
             *
             
               Taxa
               Cancellaria
               A.
               post
               fol.
            
             11.
             
          
           
             *
             Pag.
             510.
             
               edit
               .
               Colon.
               tom
            
             .
             4.
             
          
           
             *
             
               Sues
               .
               in
               Dom
               cap.
            
             13
             
               Mart.
               lib.
            
             5.
             ep
             .
             8.
             
          
           
             *
             
               Sues
               .
               in
               Dom
               cap.
            
             13
             
               Mart.
               lib.
            
             5.
             ep
             .
             8.
             
          
           
             *
             
               Extra
               .
               D●
               Mai●rit
               ▪
               &
               obed
               titulo
               .
            
             33.
             
               cap.
               Perpetuas
            
             .
          
           
             *
             Ps.
             72.
             v.
             8.
             
          
           
             *
             2
             Cor.
             11.
             v.
             2.
             
          
           
             *
             1.
             
             Tim.
             3.6
             
          
           
             Rom
             6.23
             .
             Ephes.
             2
             8.
             
             Rom.
             8.17
             .
             1
             Ioh
             1.3
             .
             i.
             Cor.
             10
             11
             Heb.
             2.4
             .
             Heb.
             9.10
             .
          
           
             *
             
               C●n
               Hac
               〈◊〉
               .
               causa
            
             31.
             quaest
             1
             
          
           
             *
             
               Con.
               Barclaium
               .
               c.
            
             7.
             
          
           
             
               Extrau
               .
               v●m
               sanctā
            
             .
          
           
             *
             2.
             
             Cor.
             6.19
             
          
           
             1.
             
             Tim.
             3.15
             
          
           
             *
             Iob.
             10
             4.17.8.6.69
             .
          
           
             *
             
               De
               electione
               Papae
               vide
            
             1.
             sect
             .
             1.
             
               lib.
               sacr
               .
               Ceremon
            
             .
          
           
             *
             
               Out
               of
               the
               Venice
               edition
               printed
               in
               the
               yeare
            
             1514.
             
               in
               pag.
            
             125.
             
               after
               these
               wordes
               Il
               Ba
               glidi
               Digiuno
               .
            
          
           
             *
             Ioh.
             5.
             v.
             3●
             
          
           
             *
             
               They
               bore
               crosses
               on
               their
               breasts
               which
               waged
               warre
               for
               the
               Pope
               against
               the
               Turke
               ,
               or
               any
               other
               infidels
               .
            
          
           
             Dan.
             7.
             v.
             8.9.10
             .
          
           
             *
             
               Apol.
               contra
               Regem
               .
               c.
            
             9.
             
               parag
               .
               At
               inq●●unt
            
             .
          
           
             Mat.
             24
             ver
             24.
             
             Marc.
             13
             v.
             22.
             
          
           
             *
             
               Tractain
               de
               trans●●●
               Martini
            
             .
          
           
             *
             
               Nocte
               quadam
               assistente
               Angelo
               Eunuchizavi
               sevidit
               .
            
          
           
             *
             
               Ego
               quid
               feci
               ?
               sedebam
               ibi
               super
               lactuc●m
               venit
               illa
               &
               m●mordit
               me
               .
            
          
           
             *
             
               Si
               quis
               non
               communicat
               det
               locum
               .
            
          
           
             *
             
               Bell.
               lib.
               ●
               Imag
               cap.
            
             1●
             
               parag
               Arg●●mentum
               .
               E●
               adem
               occas●●one
               amisit
               dem
               Leo
               ●
               successor
               es
               ius
               imperi●●
               Italiae
               .
            
          
           
             *
             
               Albertus
               Krantzius
               in
               Metrop
               lib.
            
             1
             cap
             9.
             
             
               Wernerius
               Role
               uingius
               de
               laud
               Westph
               cap
            
             7.
             
             
               Sigon
               .
               de
               reg
               .
               Ital.
               ad
               annum
            
             1264.
             
             
               Platina
               in
               Leone
            
             3.
             
             
               Onuphr
               .
               in
               Platinae
               Vrbanum
            
             4.
             
             
               Meierus
               annal
               .
               Flandri
               .
               lib.
            
             33.
             
          
           
             
               Apol.
               in
               Regem
               cap.
            
             9.
             
          
           
             *
             
               Langii
               Chron.
               Citizense
               ad
               annum
            
             .
             1509.
             
          
           
             *
             
               S●e●dan
               l
            
             ▪
             9
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A20930-e15720
           
             *
             Heb.
             2.14
             .
             Col
             2.15
             .
             Ps.
             68.19
             .
             Eph.
             4.8
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A20930-e17140
           
             *
             Ioh.
             16.11
             .
          
           
             *
             Luk.
             4.6
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             Cor.
             10.
             ●●
             
          
           
             *
             
               Varro
               lib.
            
             5
             
               Dies
               Septimentium
               no●inatu●
               ab
               ●is
            
             7.
             
               moati●●●
               in
               queis
               ●rbs
               sita
               est
            
          
           
             *
             
               Varro
               lib.
            
             5
             
               Dies
               Septimentium
               no●inatu●
               ab
               ●is
            
             7.
             
               moati●●●
               in
               queis
               ●rbs
               sita
               est
            
          
           
             *
             
               Virg.
               Ecl.
            
             1.
             
             
               O
               Melibae●
               Deus
               .
               &
               paulò
               pòst
               ,
               Bissenos
               cui
               nostra
               dies
               altaria
               fumant
               .
               Martial
               .
               Epig.
            
             8.
             l.
             5
             
               Edictum
               domini
               deique
               nostri
               .
               Horat.
               Epist.
            
             1.
             l.
             2.
             
             
               Praesenti
               tibi
               maturos
               largimur
               honores
               ,
               Iurandasque
               tuum
               per
               nomen
               ponimus
               aras
               Codicis
               lib.
            
             1.
             tit
             .
             2.
             
               de
               sacrosanctia
               Ecclesiis
               ,
               Capitationis
               modum
               beneficio
               nostri
               nominis
               sublevandum
            
             ▪
             
          
           
             Ioh
             16.11
             .
          
           
             Luk.
             4.6
             .
          
           
             
               In
               orat
               .
               de
               aruspice
               resp
               .
            
          
           
             Pag.
             3.
             
          
           
             *
             
               Leo
               x
               in
               the
               Bull
               exurge
               ,
               which
               is
               at
               the
               end
               of
               the
               last
               Lateran
               coūcell
               ,
               doth
               cōdemne
               Luther
               for
               saying
               that
               the
               Church
               or
               the
               Pope
               could
               not
               make
               new
               articles
               of
               faith
               and
               the
               power
               of
               adding
               to
               the
               Creed
               is
               given
               to
               the
               Pope
               in
               the
               last
               session
               of
               the
               Councell
               of
               Florence
               .
            
          
           
             2.
             
             
               Point
               how
               the
               Romish
               Church
               doth
               revise
               the
               Saints
               .
            
          
           
             3.
             
               point
               .
               that
               the
               Church
               of
               Rome
               doth
               persecute
               the
               faithfull
               .
            
          
           
             The
             4.
             
               point
               of
               the
               continuance
               of
               the
               Empire
               .
            
          
           
             2.
             
             Pet.
             3.8
             .
          
           
             
               Of
               this
               place
               of
               Daniel
               see
               th●
            
             9.
             
             Chapt.
             
          
           
             5.
             
             
               Point
               of
               the
               religious
               service
               done
               to
               the
               Popes
               seat
               .
            
          
           
             1.
             
             Lib.
             3.
             cap.
             
          
           
             
               Theod.
               hist.
               Eccl.
               l.
            
             2.
             c.
             16
             
               Imperator
               imperavit
               Liberium
               relegari
               Beroeam
               quae
               est
               in
               Thracia
               :
               Liberi●
               abeunti
               misit
               imperator
               s●lid●s
            
             500.
             
               in
               s●mptus
            
             .
          
           
             *
             
               Eutrop.
               l.
            
             9
             
               Carausius
               purpuram
               sumpsit
               &
               paulo
               post
               Galerius
               pur
               puratus
               traditur
               ad
               vehiculum
               decurrisse
               .
               S.
               Ambrosius
               Theodosio
               dixit
               purpura
               imperatorem
               non
               sacerdotem
               facit
               .
            
          
           
             *
             
               Aurel.
               vict
               in
               Diocletiano
               ▪
               Passus
               adorari
               se
               appellarique
               deum
               Lamprid
               .
               idem
               ait
               de
               Heliogabalo
               in
               vita
               Alexandri
               Severi
               .
            
          
           
             
               Sucton
               .
               Caligula
               ex
               capturis
               prostibul●um
               vectigal
               instituit
               ,
               quantum
               quaeque
               vno
               concubitis
               mereret
               .
               Lamprid.
               i●
               Alexandr●
               ▪
               Severo
               .
               Lenonum
               vecctigal
               &
               m●retricum
               ,
               &
               exoletorum
               in
               sacrum
               oerarium
               vetuit
               inferri
               &
               ad
               ins●●rationem
               theatri
               ,
               amphitheatri
               ,
               &
               Circi
               deputavit
               .
            
          
           
             *
             
               You
               haue
               an
               example
               of
               this
               engraued
               over
               the
               Portall
               of
               S.
               Anthonies
               Abby
               were
               Paris
               .
               read
               also
               the
               Legend
               of
               S.
               Anthonie
               .
            
          
           
             *
             
               Character
               bestiae
               intelligi
               potest
               vel
               ●bstinata
               malicia
               quâ
               aliqui
               deputātur
               ad
               poenam
               aeternā
               vel
               professio
               illiciti
               cult●●
               .
            
          
           
             *
             
               Can.
               vt
               .
               Ieiune
               Dist.
            
             5.
             
               de
               consecrat
            
             .
          
           
             
               
                 ●
                 —
                 30
              
               
                 ●
                 —
                 1
              
               
                 ●
                 —
                 300
              
               
                 ●
                 —
                 5
              
               
                 ●
                 —
                 10
              
               
                 ●
                 —
                 50
              
               
                 ●
                 —
                 70
              
               
                 ●
                 —
                 200
              
               
                 666.
                 
              
            
          
           
             *
             
               Quartode
               〈◊〉
               anno
               secundam
               post
               Neronē
               persecutionē
               movente
               Domitiano
               in
               Patmon
               insulā
               relegatus
               scripsit
               Apocalypsin
               .
            
          
        
         
           Notes for div A20930-e25190
           
             ●9
             .
          
           
             The
             1
             Angel
          
           
             
               In
               the
               yeare
               of
               our
               Lord.
            
             1063.
             
          
           
             The
             2.
             Angel
          
           
             The
             3.
             Angel
          
           
             
               Precepit
               Papa
               vt
               novus
               ille
               liber
               quē
               Evangelium
               aeternū
               nominant
               secreto
               &
               si
               possit
               fieri
               sine
               fratrum
               scandalo
               combureretur
               .
            
          
        
         
           Notes for div A20930-e27360
           
             *
             Ier.
             3.9
             .
          
           
             Nahum
             3.4
             .
          
           
             *
             
               Secund●
               dici
               potest
               &
               meo
               iudicio
               melius
               per
               meretricem
               intelligi
               Romam
               .
            
          
           
             *
             
               Babylon
               apud
               Iohannē
               nostrum
               Romanae
               vrbis
               figuram
               portat
               ,
               proinde
               &
               magnae
               ,
               &
               regno
               superbae
               ,
               &
               sanctorum
               debellatricis
               .
            
          
           
             *
             
               Et
               hic
               puto
               locus
               sanctior
               est
               Tarpeia
               rupe
               quae
               de
               coelo
               saepius
               fulminata
               ostendit
               quod
               domine
               displiceret
               .
               Lege
               Apocalypsin
               Iohan.
               &
               quod
               de
               muliere
               purpurata
               cantetur
               contuere
               .
            
          
           
             a
             
               Ribera
               in
               Apoc.
               ca.
            
             14.
             num
             .
             42
             
               De
               Roma
               intelligendum
               non
               solùm
               qualis
               sub
               Ethnici●
               imperatori●us
               olim
               suit
               sedetiā
               qualis
               in
               fine
               seculi
               futura
               est
               .
            
          
           
             b
             
               Viega
               in
            
             17.
             
             
               Apoc.
               com
            
             .
             1.
             
             Sec.
             3
             
               omnia
               quae
               in
               his
               capitibus
               commemorātur
               in
               Romanam
               vrb●m
               apertissime
               quadrant
               .
            
          
           
             c
             
               De
               praescriptione
               adversus
               Hermogenem
               Foelix
               ecclesia
               cui
               t●tam
               doctrinam
               Apostoli
               cum
               sanguine
               suo
               pro
               suderunt
               .
            
          
           
             *
             
               Planum
               totum
               cū
               magno
               scabell●
               coopertum
               e●it
               panno
               ●occin●o
               .
            
          
           
             
               Caligis
               rubei●
               ,
               sandaleis
               rubeis
               aureâ
               cruce
               orna●is
            
          
           
             
               Stolam
               orn●tam
               cum
               per
               lis
               pendent●
               à
               collo
               .
            
          
           
             a
             Ex.
             33
             23
             
          
           
             b
             Mat.
             2.12
             
          
           
             a
             An.
             107●
             .
          
           
             a
             Ps.
             137
             
          
           
             b
             Es.
             28.16
             .
             &
             8
             14.
             
             Mat.
             21.
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A20930-e31050
           
             a
             
               To
               wit
               ,
               the
               Kings
               that
               will
               not
               ioin
               themselues
               with
               others
               which
               shall
               conspire
               against
               her
               .
            
          
        
         
           Notes for div A20930-e32000
           
             *
             Esa.
             65.
             v.
             6
             
               Behold
               it
               is
               written
               before
               me
               :
               I
               wil
               not
               keepe
               silence
               .
            
          
           
             *
             Ps.
             56.
             
               v
               ▪
            
             8
             
               Thou
               purest
               my
               teares
               in
               ●o
               thy
               bottle
               ,
               are
               they
               not
               in
               thy
               regi●●er
               ?
            
          
        
         
           Notes for div A20930-e33930
           
             Apoc.
             9.
             v.
             12
             
               One
               woe
               is
               past
               ,
               and
               behold
               yet
               two
               woes
               to
               come
               after
               this
               .
            
          
           
             *
             Deut.
             17.
             v.
             6.
             
             &
             19.
             v.
             15.
             
             Mat.
             18.
             v.
             16.
             
          
           
             *
             
               In
               the
               exposition
               of
               the
            
             5.
             
               verse
               of
               the
            
             13.
             
             Chap.
             
          
           
             Rom.
             1.27
             .
          
           
             v.
             10.
             
          
           
             Ioh.
             26.
             v.
             20
             
          
           
             
               Note
               that
               the
            
             33
             
               years
               in
               which
               Christ
               was
               in
               the
               world
               are
               to
               be
               taken
               away
               ,
               and
               doe
               not
               fall
               vpon
               the
               trumpets
               .
            
          
           
             Gen
             7.20
             .
             
               Fifteene
               cubits
               vpward
               did
               the
               waters
               prevaile
               when
               the
               mountaines
               were
               covered
               .
            
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             b
             
               Enoch
               placuit
               deo
               &
               translatus
               est
               in
               paradisum
               vt
               det
               gentibus
               poetitentiam
               .
            
          
           
             Malach.
             4.
             v.
             5.6
             .
          
           
             Luk.
             1.17
             .
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             *
             Tom.
             9.
             
             
               Dabo
               duobus
               testibus
               meis
            
             ,
             1.
             
               testamentis
               .
               Duo
               candelabra
               ecclesia
               est
               ,
               sed
               pro
               numero
               testamentorum
               .
            
          
           
             a
             
               Bellarmine
               in
               the
               thirde
               booke
               of
               his
               Apologie
               against
               the
               King
               chap.
            
             1.
             
               where
               he
               names
               many
               fathers
               without
               alleaging
               their
               words
               .
            
          
           
             b
             
               Apparui●
               cum
               gloriae
               suae
               habitu
               ,
               Moyse
               &
               Elia
               in
               mont●
               comitantibus
               &
               h●s
               quid●
               eosdem
               prophetas
               duos
               praevenientes
               adventum
               eius
               intelligimus
               ,
               quos
               Apocal.
               Iohannis
               ab
               Antichristo
               perimend●s
               esse
               dicit
               ,
               licet
               variae
               vel
               de
               Enoch
               vel
               d●
               Eliâ
               plurimorum
               extiterint
               opiniones
               .
            
          
           
             
               Enoch
               iustiss●mum
               ,
               non
               circumcisum
               〈◊〉
               sabbatizantem
               de
               hoc
               mund●
               transtulit
               ,
               qui
               nedum
               mortem
               〈◊〉
               vt
               aeternitatis
               cādidatus
               iam
               〈◊〉
               ostenderes
               nos
               quoque
               sine
               legis
               onere
               Moys●s
               ,
               Deo
               placereposse
               .
            
          
           
             *
             
               Enoch
               〈◊〉
               .
               status
               est
               in
               car●●
               Et
               Elias
               Carneus
               raptus
               est
               in
               coelū
               ,
               necdū
               mortui
               ,
               &
               Paradistiam
               coloni
               ,
               habēt
               membracum
               quibus
               rapti
               sunt
               atque
               trāslati
               Quod
               nos
               imitamur
               i●iuni●
               ,
               illi
               posside●●
               consortio
               .
            
          
           
             a
             Apoc.
             10.
             v.
             11.
             
          
           
             b
             
               Opinantur
               multi
               beatū
               hunc
               .
               virum
               vsque
               ad
               seculi
               consummationē
               vivere
               ,
               ae
               venturū
               esse
               circa
               tēp●ra
               Antichristi
               ,
               cum
               Enoch
               &
               Eliâ
               .
            
          
           
             
               Ac
               diem
               hunc
               magnū
               &
               terribilē
               non
               iudicii
               extre●i
               sed
               Messiae
               advenientis
               tēpusantiqui
               Scribae
               sopiē
               tèr
               interpretabantur
               ,
               idque
               a
               Christ●
               probatum
               &
               confirmatum
               est
               .
               Mat.
            
             17
             ▪
             
          
           
             b
             
               Tam
               apertam
               rem
               esse
               Moysen
               &
               Eliam
               veturos
               esse
               ,
               vt
               nemo
               id
               non
               solùm
               sine
               temeritate
               ,
               sed
               nec
               sine
               impudentia
               negare
               possit
               .
            
          
           
             c
             Qu.
             1.
             num
             137.
             
          
           
             1
             
               Point
               ,
               that
               the
               church
               doth
               revile
               the
               scripture
            
          
           
             a
             
               Eckius
               ,
               efficacior
               quā
               scriptura
               est
               traditio
               .
            
          
           
             b
             
               Traditio
               certissima
               est
               veritatis
               regula
               ad
               quā
               Scripturam
               expendere
               oporteat
               ,
               Evangelistarū
               non
               f
               uit
               hoc
               in
               scribendo
               consitium
               ,
               vt
               sua
               illa
               scripta
               praeessent
               nost●ae
               religioni
               &
               fidei
               sed
               subssent
               potius
            
          
           
             c
             
               Sunt
               enim
               scripturae
               velut
               cereus
               quidā
               nosus
               qui
               sicut
               horsum
               illorsūque
               trahise
               permittit
               &c.
               
            
          
           
             a
             
               Turrianus
               Si
               Scripturā
               s●lam
               fidei
               regulā
               Christus
               reliquisset
               in
               Eccles●a
               quid
               aliud
               quàm
               gladium
               Delphi
               cum
               haberemus
               ?
            
          
           
             b
             §
             
               Quarto
               ●ecesse
               .
               Etsi
               Scriptura
               di
               cat
               libros
               Prophetarū
               &
               Apostolorum
               esse
               divinos
               ,
               tamen
               non
               ce●tò
               id
               ●redam
               ,
               nisi
               prius
               credider●
               Scripturam
               quae
               hoc
               dicit
               esse
               diuinam
               .
               Nā
               in
               Alcorano
               Mahumetis
               passim
               legim
               ipsum
               Alcoranum
               de
               coelo
               à
               Deo
               dimissum
               .
            
          
           
             c
             §
             
               Ad●lla
               .
               Supra
               diximus
               Scripturas
               non
               fuisse
               absolutè
               necessarias
               .
            
          
           
             §
             
               Sed
               omissi●
               Quaedā
               sunt
               traditiones
               maiores
               quoad
               obligationem
               quàm
               quaedā
               Scripturae
               .
            
          
           
             b
             §
             
               Respondeo
               Scripturae
               finem
               propriū
               &
               praecipuū
               non
               fuisse
               vt
               esset
               regula
               fidei
               ,
               sed
               vt
               esset
               commonitorium
               quoddam
               vtile
               .
            
          
           
             c
             
               Dico
               secundo
               Scripturā
               etsi
               non
               est
               sact●
               praecipuè
               vt
               sit
               regula
               fidei
               ▪
               esse
               tamen
               regulam
               fidei
               non
               totalem
               sed
               partialem
            
          
           
             *
             Gen.
             5
             .
             2●
             Gen.
             49.18
             .
             Exod.
             3.15
             Num.
             23.10
             
          
           
             
               II.
               Point
               .
               Of
               their
               preferring
               the
               corrupt
               translation
               before
               the
               original
               .
            
          
           
             *
             
               Vt
               vetus
               &
               vulgata
               editio
               pr●
               authentica
               habeatur
               ,
               &
               quòd
               ●am
               ne
               m●
               reiicere
               quovis
               pr●textu
               audeat
               vel
               presumat
            
          
           
             *
             
               Locus
               posterior
               non
               est
               mutatu●
               ,
               quo●i●m
               hab●tur
               in
               omnibus
               Latinis
               codici●us
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spe●
               for
               sepem
               ,
               cecinit
               ●udus
               for
               cecidit
               ,
               lapides
               saeculi
               ,
               for
               sacculi
               ,
               ipsa
               mulier
               ,
               for
               ipsum
               semen
            
          
           
             
               III.
               Point
               .
               Of
               their
               equalling
               the
               Apocryphall
               books
               with
               the
               Canonicall
               .
            
          
           
             
               IV
               Point
               ,
               Davids
               Psalter
               corrupted
               .
            
          
           
             a
             
               Which
               is
               the
            
             110.
             
               in
               the
               Hebrew
            
             .
          
           
             b
             The
             91.
             
               in
               the
               Hebrew
            
             .
          
           
             c
             The
             94.
             
               in
               the
               Hebrew
            
             .
          
           
             
               V.
               Point
               .
               the
               suppressing
               of
               the
               holy
               scripture
               .
            
          
           
             *
             Matt.
             19.4
             .
             Luk.
             10.26
             .
          
           
             a
             
               Pro
               gē●is
               &
               serico
               divin●s
               codices
               〈◊〉
               ,
               in
               quibus
               non
               auri
               &
               pellis
               Babylonicae
               vermiculata
               pictura
               ,
               sed
               ad
               fidem
               place●t
               emendata
               &
               erudita
               distinctio
               .
               Di
               scat
               primò
               psalterium
               ,
               bis
               se
               cāticis
               ●v●cet
               —
               Ad
               Evangelia
               transeat
               ,
               nūquam
               ea
               positura
               de
               manibus
               ,
               mandet
               memoriae
               Prophetas
               ,
               caveat
               omnia
               Apocrypha
               .
            
          
           
             b
             
               In
               his
               omnibus
               libri●
               timentes
               Deum
               ,
               &
               pietate
               mans
               eti
               qu●runt
               voluntatē
               Dei.
               Cuius
               operi●
               &
               laboris
               prima
               observatio
               est
               (
               vt
               diximus
               )
               n●s
               se
               ist●s
               libros
               etsi
               nondum
               intellectum
               ,
               adlegendo
               tamē
               m●
               vel
               mandare
               memoriae
               vel
               omninò
               incognitos
               non
               habere
               .
            
          
        
         
           Notes for div A20930-e39860
           
             *
             Chron.
             35.
             v.
             22.
             
             
               Herodotus
               in
               his
            
             2
             
               book
               called
               Euterpe
               speaking
               of
               this
               battle
               of
               Neco
               against
               Iosias
               .
               s●ith
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               for
               Meguido
            
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A20930-e40310
           
             Rom.
             13.6
             .
             1.
             
             Pet.
             2
             ,
             13.
             
          
           
             Act.
             25.10
             .
          
           
             Act.
             22
             .
             2●
             ▪
             
          
           
             a
             1.
             
             Sam.
             10
             1.
             
          
           
             b
             1.
             
             Sam
             16.12
             ,
             13.
             
          
           
             Actes
             1.
             
          
           
             
               Cyp.
               lib.
            
             1.
             
             Epist.
             4.
             
          
           
             1.
             
             King.
             12.20
             .
          
           
             2
             King.
             9
             ▪
             2
             ,
             3.
             
          
           
             Isai
             5.20
             .
          
           
             Vers.
             23.
             
          
           
             Ioh.
             10.27
             .
          
           
             a
             1.
             
             Tim.
             1.4
             
          
           
             b
             
               Ibid
               c.
            
             4.7
             
          
           
             Act.
             26.29
             .
          
           
             Abac.
             2.4
             .